Learning Basics

2 Adams/View
Overview

Overview

Starting Adams/View
You or your system administrator can customize how you start Adams/View and how Adams/View looks
after you start it.

To start Adams/View in UNIX:

1. At the command prompt, enter the command to start the Adams Toolbar, and then press Enter.
The standard command that MSC provides is mdadamsx, where x is the version number, for
example mdadams2010, which represents MD Adams 2010.
The Adams Toolbar appears.
2. Click the Adams/View tool .
For more information on the Adams Toolbar, see Running and Configuring Adams.

To start Adams/View in Windows:

1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to MSC.Software, point to MD Adams 2010, point
to AView, and then select Adams - View.
For more information on running Adams products from the Start menu, see Running and
Configuring Adams.

Starting a New Modeling Session

When you start Adams/View, Adams/View displays a Welcome dialog box that lets you create a new
Modeling database or use an existing one. The Welcome dialog box also lets you import modeling data
and specify your working directory.
Adams/View also displays the Welcome dialog box when you use the New Database command to create
a new modeling database in which to store your models. The Welcome dialog box is shown below.

To start a new session:

1. Select one of the options explained in the table below to indicate how you'd like to start using
Adams/View, and then select OK.

The option: Does the following:

Create a new model Lets you start a new modeling session with a new modeling database.
Follow Steps 2 and 3 to create the new modeling database.
Open an existing Lets you open an existing modeling database. Learn about Opening a
database Modeling Database.
 Learning Basics 3
Overview

The option: Does the following:

Import a file Lets you start a new modeling session by reading in a model from an
Adams/View command file or an Adams/Solver dataset.

• Import - Adams/Solver Dataset Files

• Import - Adams/View Command Files
Exit Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an operation.

2. Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams/View saves all files in this
directory. You can change the working directory at any time. Learn about specifying working
directory.
3. If you selected to create a new model, do the following:
• In the Model name text box, enter the name you want assigned to the new model. You can
enter up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces
or periods.
• Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:

Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.

No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.
Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings dialog box appears after
you select OK on the Welcome dialog box.
4. Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time is in seconds and
angles are in degrees. You can set:
• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
5. If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as required. Learn
about changing the default units.
6. Select OK.
Adams/View creates a new model for you. If you selected to set gravity when creating a new
model, the Gravity Settings dialog box appears. Learn about specifying gravitational force.

Modeling Process
The steps that you use in Adams/View to create a model mirror the same steps that you would use to build
a physical prototype. Click a step below or use the arrows on the right to read the steps sequentially.
4 Adams/View
Overview

Functional Virtual Prototyping Process

Although we’ve listed the steps that you perform to create a model as though you create the entire model
at once and then test and improve it, we recommend that you build and test small elements or subsystems
of your model before you build the entire model. For example, create a few modeling objects, connect
them together, and then run a simple simulation to test their motion and ensure that you are connecting
them correctly. Once these are modeled correctly, add more complexity to your model. By starting out
slowly, you can ensure that each subsystem works before moving on to the next step. We call this the
crawl-walk-run approach.

Adams/View Main Window

After you start Adams/View, the Adams/View main window appears.

Initial Adams/View Window

Menu bar Welcome Dialog box

Main toolbox

Status bar
 Learning Basics 5
Overview

Exiting Adams/View
To exit Adams/View:
1. On the File menu, select Exit.
2. If you did not save your work, asks you if you want to save your work:
• To save your work and exit Adams/View, select OK. If you want to save the model with a
new name in the current directory, enter the new name in the Filename text box.
• To exit without saving your work, select Exit, Don’t Save.
• To continue using Adams/View, select Cancel.

Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams/View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about using the Adams/View log file

Displaying Product Information

When using any Adams product, you can display the following information:
• Software version number and the date it was built
• Directory where Adams is installed
• Copyright statement

To display information about Adams/View:

1. From the Help menu, select About.
2. View the information, and then select OK
.

Tip: Shortcut from the Status bar, select .

Loading and Unloading Plugins

MSC has many add-on modules or plugins to Adams/View, which expand its functionality. The plugins
include Adams/AutoFlex, Adams/Vibration, Adams/Controls, and Adams/Durability. You run these
products from within Adams/View. You can set Adams/View to load them automatically when you start
up. You can also unload them while in your current session of Adams/View. To run a plugin, you must
have a license to it. (To learn more about the various plugins, see their online help.)

To see if there is a license available to run a plugin:

1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
The Plugin Manager appears.
2. At the top of the Plugin Manager, select a plugin.
6 Adams/View
Overview

3. At the bottom of the Plugin Manager, in the text box Licenses, view the number of licenses
available.

To load an available plugin:

1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
2. In the Load column, next to the plugins you want to load, select Yes.
3. Select OK.
The commands or menus for the plugins are added to Adams/View.

To unload a plugin:
1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
2. In the Load column, next to the plugin you want to unload, clear the selection of Yes.
3. Select OK.
Adams/View removes any plugin menus or commands.

To set up a plugin so it loads automatically when you start Adams/View:

1. From the Tools menu, select Plugin Manager.
2. In the Load at Startup column, next to the plugin you want to load automatically, select Yes.
3. Select OK.

Executing a System Command

You can execute an operating system command from within Adams/View so that you do not have to leave
the Adams/View window.
You can select to display the results of the command in the Information Window or the Log file. If you
select to display the results of the command in the Information window, you can:
• Clear the window and only view the results of the command.
• Save the results of the command to a file.

If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other
commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.

To execute a system command within Adams/View:

1. On the Tools menu, select System Command.
The Execute System Command dialog box appears.
2. In the Command Text text box, enter the operating system command that you want to execute.
See your operating system documentation for more information.
3. Select whether or not you want the output of the command to be displayed in the Information
window or the log file.
 Learning Basics 7
Overview

4. Select OK.

Using the Adams/View Log File

Adams/View generates a log file during each Adams/View session, called aview.log.
While you are running Adams, you can display the current contents of the log file. In addition, you can
display the log file in a text editor. The following sections explain how to display the log file in
Adams/View and set the type of messages displayed.
• Viewing the Log File in Adams/View
• Updating the Log File
• Setting the Log File Information

Note: You can change the name of the log file through the initialization file .mdi_init. For more
information, see Running and Configuring Adams.

Viewing the Log File in Adams/View

You can use the Log File command on the Tools menu to display the log file. You can keep the dialog
box open as you execute commands so you can keep track of the commands and messages that you
receive.
To help you use the log file as a command file, Adams/View marks any messages as comments so that it
does not try to execute them when you import the command file. It indicates a comment by placing an
exclamation mark (!) in front of the message. Adams/View also displays as comments any commands
that it executes when it starts up. To help you distinguish the startup commands from messages,
Adams/View follows the exclamation mark (!) with the command prompt (>>).

To display the log file:

1. On the Tools menu, select Log File.
The Display Log File dialog box appears.
2. Select Info to display all messages written to the log file. The default is to display only warnings,
errors, and fatal messages.

Updating the Log File

Adams/View does not update the Display Log File dialog box each time you execute a command.
Therefore, if you want to see the commands that you executed since you opened the dialog box, you must
update the log file.

To update the contents of the log file:

• From the Display Log File dialog box, select Update.
8 Adams/View
Overview

Setting the Log File Information

When you display the log file, Adams/View displays only warnings, errors, and fatal messages that you
have received. You can change the type of messages that Adams/View displays as well as display the
commands that Adams/View has executed. You can also display only lines that contain certain
information, such as display only commands that create links, and remove any duplicate lines that occur
if you encounter the same error again.

To set the type of information displayed in the Display Log File dialog box:
1. Select the Show only lines of type check box and then select one of the following:
• Info - Displays all commands that you have executed in Adams/View.
• Warning - Displays non-fatal messages that warn you of possible problems with commands
you entered.
• Error - Displays fatal messages that Adams/View did not understand and, therefore, did not
successfully process.
• Fatal - Displays messages that indicated that your model would not simulate.
2. If desired, select Show only lines containing and enter the text that the line must contain in the
text box. You can also enter wildcards. Learn about using wildcards.
3. Select Apply.

To remove duplicate lines:

• From the Display Log File dialog box, select Suppress duplicate lines.

Using Wildcards
You can use wildcards to narrow any search, set the type of information displayed in a window, such as
the Database Navigator or the Log file, or specify a name of an object in a dialog box.

This character: Represents:

* (asterisk) Zero or more characters
? Any single character
[ab] Any one of the characters in the brackets
[^AB] Any character other than the characters following the caret symbol (^) in the
brackets
[a-c] Any one character in a range enclosed in brackets
{AB, bc} Any of the character strings in the braces

Tips on Using Wildcards

Here are some tips for entering wildcards:
 Learning Basics 9
Overview

• Case is insignificant so xYz is the same as XYz.

• You can match alternative sequences of characters by enclosing them in braces and separating
them with commas. For example, the pattern a{ab,bc,cd}x matches aabx, abcx, and acdx.
• You can form character sets that match a single character using brackets [ ]. For example, [abc]d
matches ad, bd, and cd
• You can use a dash (-) to create ranges of characters. For example, [a-f1-4] is the same as
[abcdef1234].
• You can use a backslash (\) to include a special character as part of the character set. For
example, [AB\]CD] includes the five characters A, B, ], C, and D.

Here are some examples of more complex patterns and possible matches:
• x*y - Matches any object whose name starts with x and ends with y. This would include xy, x1y,
and xaby.
• x??y - Matches only those objects with four-character long names that start with x and end with
y. This would include xaay, xaby, and xrqy.
• x?y* - Matches all of those objects whose names start with x and have y as the third character.
This would include xayee, xyy, and xxya.
• *{aa,ee,ii,oo,uu}* - Matches all those objects whose name contains the same vowel twice in a
row. This would include loops and skiing.
• [aeiou]*[0-9] - Matches any object whose name starts with a vowel and ends with a digit. This
would include eagle10, arapahoe9, and ex29.
• [^aeiou]?[xyz]* - Matches any object whose name does not start with a vowel and has x, y, or z
as the third letter. This would include thx1138, rex, and fizzy.
• You can use quotation marks to identify all objects with a certain naming pattern. The following
example describes how to set a damping ratio of 0.05 to all beams in .model_1 that have
‘_beam’ in the name.
for var=the_beam obj=.model_1."*_beam*" type=Beam
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = (eval(the_beam).name) &
damping_ratio = 0.05
end !for

Adams/View Tools
Adams/View provides following tools. Click on each tool to learn more.
• Coordinate window
• Command Navigator
• Command Window
• Message Window
10 Adams/View
Overview

• Information Window
• Database Navigator
• Table Editor
 Learning Basics 11
Setting Preferences

Setting Preferences

Setting Default Coordinate System

Coordinate Systems in Adams/View
When you first start Adams/View, it displays a View triad in the lower left corner. The view triad displays
the global coordinate system for the Modeling database.
By default, Adams/View uses a Cartesian coordinate system as the global coordinate system with three
axes (x, y, and z). Adams/View attaches the ground part to the global coordinate system and by default
positions all other modeling objects to it.

Rotation Sequences
Adams/View uses three orientation angles to perform three rotations about the axes of a coordinate
system. You specify the order in which axes are rotated about as a sequence of three numbers (1,2,3),
which correspond to x-, y-, and z-axes, respectively. For example, a rotation order of 312 produces
rotations about the z-, then x-, and then y-axis. Adams/View provides you with a set of 24 rotation
sequences from which to choose. The most commonly used rotation sequence, body 313, is the default
sequence.
The figure below shows how successive rotations defined by the rotation angles orient the axes. Dashed
lines represent original orientations and solid lines represent new and unchanged orientations.

• The first angle rotates the coordinate system about its z-axis. This repositions the x-axis and the
y-axis (see a in figure).
• The second angle rotates the coordinate system about its new x-axis (x´) to reposition the new y-
axis (y´) and the z-axis (see b in figure).
12 Adams/View
Setting Preferences

• The third angle rotates the coordinate system about its new z-axis (z´) to reposition the new x-
axis (x´) and the second new y-axis (y´´).
Together and in sequence, these rotations define the orientation of the coordinate system (see c in figure).
The right-hand rule defines the direction of positive rotation about each axis. For example, if you are
looking down the initial z-axis, positive rotations are counterclockwise and negative rotations are
clockwise.

To set the default coordinate system:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the Settings menu, select Coordinate System.
• On the Move tool stack of the Main toolbox, select the Coordinate System tool .
The Coordinate System Setting dialog box appears.
2. Select the type of location coordinate systems: cartesian, cylindrical, spherical
3. Select the type of rotation sequence. See Rotation Sequences.
4. Select either:
• Space fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that remain in their original
orientation.
• Body fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that move with the body as it
rotates.
As Adams/View applies each rotation to an axis, it produces a new set of axes.
5. Select OK.

Specifying Gravitational Force

You can specify the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of gravity. For each part with mass, the
gravitational force produces a point force at its center of mass.

To turn off gravity:

• From the Gravity Settings dialog box, clear the Gravity check box.

When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams/View Main window. To turn off
the display of the gravity icon, see Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

To turn on and specify gravitational force:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the Settings menu, select Gravity.
• On the Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack of the Main toolbox, select the Gravity tool
.
 Learning Basics 13
Setting Preferences

The Gravity Settings dialog box appears.

2. Select the Gravity check box to turn on gravity.
3. Set the acceleration of the gravity in the x, y, and z directions with respect to the global coordinate
system. See the table below for assistance.
4. Select OK.

To enter: Do the following:

A value Enter the acceleration value in the X, Y, or Z text boxes as appropriate.
A standard value Select a standard button (+ or -) for the direction you want to set. The standard
(+ or -) acceleration value appears in the apropriate X, Y, or Z text boxes.

Setting Screen and Printer Fonts

You can change the font Adams/View uses to display text in a view, such as the name of a part or a note
on the screen, or to print text to a printer. The fonts available for displaying text in a view are those
available with your operating system. The fonts available for printing text are a fixed set of 12 fonts. Note
that your printer may not support all of these printer fonts. Learn about Printing Models.

To select a screen or printer font:

1. On the Settings menu, select Fonts.
The Fonts dialog box appears.
2. In the Screen Font text box, enter the name of the font you want Adams/View to use to display
text in a view. To browse for a font, right-click the text box, select Browse, and select a font.
3. Set Postscript Font to the font you want to use to print text.
4. Select OK.

Specifying Working Directory

By default, Adams/View searches for and saves all files in the directory from which you ran
Adams/View. You can change the working directory.

To change the working directory for the current session:

1. On the File menu, select Select Directory.
Select the directory in which Adams/View should save files.
2. Select OK.
You can also set the working directory when you start Adams/View. Learn about starting a new session.

To change the working directory for all sessions:

1. On UNIX:
14 Adams/View
Setting Preferences

• From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Adams/View tool, and then select Change Settings.
• In the Registry Editor, select WorkingDirectory, and then change the working directory.
For more information, see Running and Configuring Adams.
2. On Windows:
• On the Desktop, right-click the Adams/View shortcut, and then select Properties.
• In the Start In text box, enter the working directory.

Setting Units of Measurement

You can set the units that Adams/View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select
individual units or select a set group of units.

Units of Measurement in Adams/View

The units of measurement that Adams/View provides for you are shown in the table below. The table also
shows the default units when you start a new session

For the The default

dimension: Its supported units are: unit is:
Length Meter, Millimeter, Centimeter, Kilometer, Inch, Foot, Mile, Millimeter
Micrometer, Nanometer, Angstrom, Microinch, Mils, Yard
Mass Kilogram, Gram, PoundMass, OunceMass, Slug, KilopoundMass, Kilogram
Tonne, Milligram, Microgram, Nanogram, Us_ton
Force Newton, KilogramForce, Dyne, PoundForce, OunceForce, Newton
KiloNewton, KilopoundForce, MilliNewton, CentiNewton, Poundal,
Micronewton, Nanonewton, Meganewton
Time Second, Minute, Hour, Millisecond, Microsecond, Nanosecond, Day Second
Angle Radian, Degree, Revolutions, AngularMinutes, AngularSeconds Degree
Frequency Radians per second, Hertz Radians per
second

Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes

When you enter a numeric value in a text box, you can specify the units of measurement that you want
used for the value or let Adams/View use the default unit. For example, you can specify the length of a
link in millimeters even when the default unit is set to meters.
When you want to enter an alternate unit, you include the value and its unit. Adams/View encloses the
value and unit in parentheses ( ). You can also enter an abbreviation for the unit. For example, to specify
60 millimeters, enter the following:
(60mm)
 Learning Basics 15
Setting Preferences

You set default units when you create an Adams/View model or you can use the Units command on the
Settings menu to change the units.

Unit Labels
To enter units other than the default in text boxes, you can use either simple unit labels or composed unit
labels.

Simple Unit Labels

Simple units: Simple unit Labels: Minimal abbreviations:

Length centimeter centimeter
cm c
foot f
ft ft
inch i
kilometer kilometer
km km
m m
meter met
mile mile
millimeter millimeter
mm mm
Angle am am
angular_minutes angular_m
angular_seconds angular_s
as as
degree d
radian r
Mass gram g
kg kg
kilogram kilogram
kpound_mass kpound_m
lbm lbm
megagram meg
ounce_mass ounce_m
pound_mass pound_m
slug sl
Time hour ho
millisecond millis
minute min
ms ms
second s
16 Adams/View
Setting Preferences

Simple units: Simple unit Labels: Minimal abbreviations:

Force dyne dy
kg_force kg_
kilogram_force kilogram_force
knewton kn
kpound_force kpound_f
lbf lbf
millinewton millin
newton ne
ounce_force ounce_f
pound_force pound_f
Frequency hz hz
radians/second radians/sec

Any unique abbreviation for a simple unit label is acceptable. For example, you can abbreviate radians
in the following ways, since none of the abbreviations conflict with abbreviations for any other units:
radians = radian = radia = radi = rad = ra = r
There are three exceptions for entering unique aliases:

Aliases: Unit Labels:

d degrees, although it conflicts with dynes
kg kilograms, although it conflicts with kg_force
m meters, although it conflicts with mile, minute, ms, millisecond, and millinewton

Here are some examples of unit labels associated with a number within text boxes:
• 1mm
• 1.2 inch (spaces are not significant)
• 24in (you can use abbreviations)

Composed Unit Labels

Composed unit labels enable you to create aggregate units. You do this by combining Simple Unit Labels
and operators. There are three operators for composing aggregate units from existing simple units:

Operator: Notation: Comment:

Exponentiation ** Right operand must be an integer: inch**2
Multiplication - or * foot-pound_f = foot*pound_f
Division /
 Learning Basics 17
Setting Preferences

A composed unit label is always enclosed in parentheses to eliminate ambiguity. Here are some tips and
examples of composed unit labels:
• To indicate torque, enter: 3.3 (newton*meter)
• To indicate composed acceleration, enter: 9.8 (meter/sec**2)
• To indicate angular acceleration, enter : PI (rad/sec**2)
• To indicate multiplication with a dash, enter: (fun(1)*3)(in - lbf)
• You cannot include parentheses inside of composed units. Therefore, the following is incorrect:
1.2 (inch / (sec*deg))
Instead, enter the following:
1.2 (inch / sec/deg)

Tip: In general, if you see units associated with numbers in the information window, command
file, log file, and so on, you should be able to take that unit string and use it in a text box
without error.

To set the unit of measurement in Adams/View:

1. On the Settings menu, select Units.
The Units Settings dialog box appears.
2. Select the unit of measurement for each of the dimensions using the table below for assistance.
3. Select OK.

To select: Do the following:

Unit for a specific Select the individual unit from the pull-down menu associated with the dimension.
dimensions
Predefined unit Select one of the following buttons. In all the unit systems, time is in seconds and
system angle is in degrees. When you select a predefined unit system, the units selected
appear in the upper portion of the dialog box.

• MMKS - Sets length to millimeters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons.

• MKS - Sets length to meters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons.
• CGS - Sets length to centimeters, mass to grams, and force to Dyne.
• IPS - Sets length to inches, mass to pound mass, and force to PoundForce.
18 Adams/View
Setting Preferences

Saving and Restoring Settings

You can save the current settings of the display of your model and any other settings you specify through
the Settings menu. Adams/View saves your settings in the file aviewBS.cmd in the directory from which
you ran Adams/View.
The settings that Adams/View saves include:
• Part and model display
• Rendering mode, colors, and translucency
• Visibility of the View triad, Screen icons, Working grid, and Coordinate window
• Settings for working grid, units, and screen icons
• Force graphics
• Toolbox and toolbar display and placement
• Simulation preferences
• Solution controls

When you start up Adams/View, Adams/View reads the settings stored in aviewBS.cmd, if it exists in
your path, and uses them instead of any settings in the Modeling database.

To save settings:
1. Set the display of your model and any other Adams/View settings, as desired.
2. From the Settings menu, select Save Settings.

To restore the saved settings:

1. From the Settings menu, select Restore Settings.
Models
Learn about working with Model in a Modeling database:
• Creating Models
• Displaying Models in the Database
• Merging Models
• Renaming a Model
• Modifying a Model's Comments
• Printing Models
• Deleting a Model
• Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window

Note: To copy a model, see Copying Objects.

Creating Models
You can store more than one Model in a Modeling database. You may find it helpful to store multiple
models in the same database because it lets you:
• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
• Compare results between models.

To add a model to the current database:

1. On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select New.
The Create/Modify model dialog box appears.
2. In the Model Name text box, enter the name of the model that you want to create. You can enter
up to 80 alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or
periods.
3. Select whether or not you want to use the same gravity settings as the current model in your
database. Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.
4. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter comments you want associated with
the model. Learn about Comments.
5. Select OK.
2 Adams/View
Models

Displaying Models in the Database

You can set a View window so it displays a particular Model in the current Modeling database. You will
find this helpful when you want to compare different models or work with different models at the same
time.

To display a different model in a view window:

1. Click the view window in which you want to display the model.
2. On the View menu, select Model.
The Database Navigator appears listing the current models in your modeling database.
3. Select the model you want to display from the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
Learn about Setting Part Display.

Merging Models
You can merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. For example, you can merge a
subsystem, called the source model, which you want to work on separately, into the base destination
model when you are ready to work on them as a whole. Adams/View maintains the source model and
does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
As you merge models, you can:
• Enter a set of translations and rotations that Adams/View applies to the source model.
Adams/View first rotates the model then translates it.
• Specify whether Adams/View merges parts with the same name into one part, or copies and
renames the duplicate objects before merging them into the destination model.
• Place all merged objects into a group. Learn more about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.

To merge models:
1. On the Tools menu, select Merge Two Models.
The Merge Two Models dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Model Name text box, enter the name of the destination model.
3. In the Model to be merged text box, enter the name of the source model that you want to merge
into the destination model.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4. Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it with the destination model.
 3
Models

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention for entering
translational positions. Learn more about Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.
5. Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source model.
Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate system and
applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed 313 Euler angles. You can
change the convention for entering orientation angles.
6. If desired, enter a new or existing group into which Adams/View adds all merged objects.
7. Set the pull-down menu to either merge parts that have the same name (Merge) or rename the
parts before merging the models (Rename).
8. Select OK.

Renaming a Model
Adams/View lets you change the name of a Model.

To rename a model:
1. On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Rename.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to rename.
The Rename Object appears.
3. Enter a new name for the model.
4. Select the More button to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the
database.
5. Select OK.

Modifying a Model's Comments

You can change the comments associated with a model.

To modify a model's comments:

1. On the Edit menu, select Modify. Be sure that no objects are selected. If objects are selected, click
the background of the main window or double-click the Select tool .
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to modify, and then select OK.
The Create/Modify model dialog box appears.
3. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated
with the model. Learn about Comments.
4. Select OK.
4 Adams/View
Models

Printing Models
Adams/View prints the currently displayed Model as it appears in the currently active View window. You
can set various print options, such as specifying Postscript or HPGL format.
Before printing, be sure to check which view window is the active window and what the magnification
of your model is in the view window. You might also want to check the font that Adams/View is using
for printing text. Learn about Setting Screen and Printer Fonts.

To print the currently displayed model:

1. Select one of the following:
• On the File menu, select Print.
• On the Standard toolbar, select the Print tool .
The Print dialog box appears.
2. Set the printing options as desired, and then select OK.

To print: Do the following:

To a printer Select Printer and, in the Printer text box, enter an operating system
command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1 ).
Only to a file Select File and enter the location and name of the file to which you want
to print the model in the File text box.
In a different format Select the format. You can select Postscript, HPGL, or Encapsulated
Postscript.
In color or black and white Select either Color or Black and White. If you select Black and White,
Adams/View prints the model in black and white even if you are using a
color printer.
At a different orientation Select the type of orientation: Portrait or Landscape.
On a different size paper Select the size of paper or select Default to accept the current default
paper for the printer.

To cancel printing:
• Select Cancel or press the Esc key.

Deleting a Model
You can remove a Model and all its objects from the Modeling database. When you delete a model,
Adams/View removes the following objects from the modeling database:
• Parts
• Geometry
• Markers
 5
Models

• Joints
• Forces
• Simulation results
• Data elements and System elements
• Design variables

It does not remove plots, interface changes, or design variables that belong to the modeling database.

To delete a model:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the Build menu, point to Model, and then select Delete.
• On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the model you want to delete. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
If you selected Delete from the Build menu, Adams/View asks you to confirm the deletion of the
model.
4. Select Delete.

Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window

The model topology map displays information about the parts in your Model and determines what
constraints are owned by the model and what parts the constraints connect. The information appears in
the Information Window.
You can view the part connection information in two ways:
• By part - Lists each part in the model, along with the parts it is connected to and what
constraints or forces are affecting it.
• By connections - Displays each constraint and force with the parts they connect and act on. Also
displays any unconnected parts.

Model Topology by Part

You can select to have Adams/View list each part in the model, along with the parts it is connected to and
what constraints or forces are affecting it. If an object is inactive, the text (OFF) appears next to it. The
following shows the information that appears in the Information window or Database Navigator when
you display the connections by parts for a model called model_1.

Topology of model: model_1

Ground Part: ground
6 Adams/View
Models

Part ground
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_1 via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)

Part LINK_1
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_2 (Revolute Joint)
ground via FORCE_1 (Single_Component_Force)

Part LINK_5
Is connected to:
LINK_1 via JOINT_3 (Revolute Joint)
LINK_6 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)

Part LINK_6
Is connected to:
LINK_5 via JOINT_4 (Revolute Joint)
ground via JOINT_1 (Revolute Joint)

To display model topology by parts, do one of the following:

• From the Tools menu, select Model Topology Map.
• In Adams/View, on the Status bar, from the Information tool stack, select the Model Topology
by Parts tool .

Model Topology by Connections

When you select to display model topology by connection, Adams/View displays each constraint and
force with the parts that they connect and act on. Adams/View also displays any unconnected parts, and
indicates when an object is inactive with the text (OFF). The following sample shows the information
that appears when you select to display topology by connections for a model with three parts, named
model_1.
Topology of model: model_1
Ground Part: ground

JOINT_1 connects LINK_2 with ground (Revolute Joint)

JOINT_2 connects LINK_3 with LINK_4 (Revolute Joint)
JOINT_3 connects LINK_2 with LINK_3 (Revolute Joint)

Unconnected Parts:

LINK_1
 7
Models

To display model topology by connections:

• On the status bar, from the Information tool stack, select the Model Topology by Constraints
tool .

Note: You can also view model topology through the Database Navigator.
8 Adams/View
Modeling Database

Modeling Database
Adams/View stores all your work in Modeling database.
Learn more:
• About the Adams/View Modeling Database
• Creating a Modeling Database
• Opening a Modeling Database
• Saving Modeling Database
• Saving the Current Modeling Database with a New Name

About the Adams/View Modeling Database

The Adams/View Modeling database is a hierarchical database. Each object in the database has an object
that owns it, called its parent, and many objects own other objects, called their children. The top level
objects in the database are models, views, plots, and libraries containing such things as dialog boxes.
The following shows the hierarchy of a database called Database_1 that contains one model and a plot
of the model.

Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.

Creating a Modeling Database

When you first start working with Adams/View, it provides you with options for creating a new Modeling
database. You can also create a new modeling database anytime during your Adams/View session. You
can have only one modeling database open at a time, but it can contain multiple models.
Remember that Adams/View saves all your customization changes, such as any new dialog boxes, in the
modeling database. Therefore when you create a new modeling database, the standard Adams/View
 9
Modeling Database

interface appears and you will need to make any changes again in the new database. If, however, you use
the command, Save Settings, on the Settings menu to save any preferences you set, Adams/View reads
these and changes the interface accordingly. Learn about Saving and Restoring Settings.

To create a modeling database:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the File menu, select New Database.
• On the Standard toolbar, select the New Database tool .
When you create a new database, Adams/View automatically closes the current database. If
you did not save your current database, Adams/View asks you if you want to save it before
closing.
2. Select one of the following if you did not save your existing database:
• Yes - Saves and closes the database.
• No - Closes the database without saving it.
• Cancel - Does not save the database.
Adams/View displays the Welcome dialog box, which lets you choose how you want to start
your modeling session with the new modeling database.

Opening a Modeling Database

You can open an existing Modeling database. You can only open one database at a time. To load different
types of data into your modeling database, such as geometric data or commands, import the data as
explained in Exchanging Data in Adams.

To open a modeling database:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the File menu, select Open Database.
• On the Standard toolbar, select the Open Database tool .
The File Selection dialog box appears. The File Selection filter is set to display only modeling
database files (those with a .bin extension).
2. In the Directories list box, select the directory in which the file is located.
3. Highlight the file that you want to open in the Files list box, or type the file name in the Selection
text box.
The highlighted file appears in the Selection text box.
4. Select OK.
10 Adams/View
Modeling Database

Saving Modeling Database

You can use the Save Database command to save the current Modeling database as an Adams/View
Binary format file. Saving your modeling database as a binary file saves all modeling information,
including any customization changes you made. To save the model data in another format, export the data
as explained in Exchanging Data in Adams. To save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.

To save an existing modeling database:

1. Select one of the following:
• On the File menu, select Save Database.
• On the Standard toolbar, select the Save Database tool .
Before saving the file, Adams/View displays a message asking you if you’d like to create a
backup file of the current database file.
2. Select one of the following:
• Yes - Creates a backup file of the existing database file and saves the database. When
Adams/View creates a backup file, it adds a % to the end of the file extension (for example,
model.bin%).
• No - Saves the database without making a backup copy of the existing database file.
• Cancel - Exit the command without saving the database.

Saving the Current Modeling Database with a New Name

You can save the current modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several
versions of your database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you
inadvertently change or delete your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling
information, including any customization changes you made. To save the model data in another format,
export the data as explained in Exchanging Data in Adams. To save your preferences, see Saving and
Restoring Settings.

To save a new database or an existing database with a new name:

1. On the File menu, select Save Database As.
The Save Database As dialog box appears.
2. In the File Name text box, enter the name you want to assign to the file.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
3. Select OK.
 11
Database Navigator

Database Navigator
The Database Navigator helps you view, select, and modify objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more:
• About the Database Navigator

Viewing Objects
• Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator
• Managing the Select List
• Filtering Objects in the Database Navigator
• Sorting Objects in the Database Navigator
• Setting Highlighting in the Database Navigator

Changing Objects
• Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator
• Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator
• Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator

Viewing Information About Your Model

• Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator
• Viewing the Associativity of Objects
• Viewing Object Information Through the Database Navigator

About the Database Navigator

The Database Navigator appears when you do one of the following:
• Select Database Navigator from the Tools menu.
• Execute an editing command, such as Modify, from the Edit menu when no object is currently
selected.
• Request to view information about an object using the Info command on the Edit shortcut menu.
• Browse for the name of an object to enter in a dialog box using the Browse command.

The Database Navigator has several modes in which you can display object information. It can be set to
just let you browse for objects or you can set it to rename objects, view information about the objects,
such as view how the object relates to other objects, and view dependencies.
The Database Navigator only displays the types of objects that are appropriate for the command you are
executing. For example, if you are renaming a model, it only displays models in your database. On the
other hand, if you are searching for any modeling object in the database, it displays all types of modeling
objects. You can also set a filter for the types of objects that the Database Navigator displays.
12 Adams/View
Database Navigator

The Database Navigator shows objects in their database hierarchy. The following figure shows the
Database Navigator with the top-level modeling objects in a small database that contains one model,
model_1 . These objects do not have parents. Double-click the name of a model, in this case model_1, to
find all the objects belonging to that model.

Showing , Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database

Navigator
In the Database Navigator Tree list, a plus (+) in front of an object indicates that the object has children
below it but they are hidden. A minus (-) indicates that all objects immediately below the object are
displayed.

To show or hide objects below a single object:

• Double-click an object with a plus or minus by it.

To expand or collapse all objects by one level:

• In the lower right corner of the navigator window, select the + or - button.
 13
Database Navigator

To hide all objects:

• In the lower right corner of the navigator window, select the - button.

You can use the Database Navigator to select any object in the database. You can also select more than
one object to complete a command. You can create a list of selected objects on which to perform options
by choosing Select List from the pull-down menu at the top of the Database Navigator.

To select a single object:

• In the tree list, click the object and select OK. If the Database Navigator is not in multi-select
mode, you can also double-click the object to select it.

To use the mouse to select a continuous set of objects:

1. In the tree list, drag the mouse over the objects you want to select or click on one object, hold
down the Shift key, and click the last object in the set. All objects between the two selected
objects are highlighted.
2. Select OK.

To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use the Up or Down
arrows to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.

To select a noncontinuous set of objects:

1. In the tree list, click on an object, hold down the Ctrl key, and click on the individual objects you
want to select.
2. Select OK.

To clear any selection in the tree list:

• Hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected object to clear its highlighting.

Managing the Select List

You can use the Database Navigator to view objects you've selected using the procedures explained in
Showing, Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator. The list of objects is called the Select
list. You can also add and remove objects from the Select list.

To view the select list:

• From the pull-down menu, select Select List.
The selected objects appear in the text box to the right.

To add objects to a select list:

1. From the pull-down menu, select Select List.
14 Adams/View
Database Navigator

2. From the tree list or view window, select the objects to be on the select list as explained in the
previous section.
3. Select Add.
4. Select Apply.

To remove objects from the select list:

1. From the pull-down menu, select Select List.
2. From the list that appears on the right, select the objects to be removed.
3. Select Remove.
4. Select Apply.

To clear all objects from the select list:

1. From the pull-down menu, select Select List.
2. Select Clear.
3. Select Apply.

Filtering Objects in the Database Navigator

You can filter the types and names of objects that you want displayed in the Database Navigator Tree list
to narrow the display to exactly what you want or to broaden the display using wildcards. For example,
you can narrow the display to only parts or broaden the display to include all objects that begin with a
particular character, such as an h. Learn about Using Wildcards.

To set the filter of the Database Navigator:

1. In the Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to display. Type any wildcards
that you want to include.
2. From the pull-down menu to the right of the Filter text box, select the type of object or objects
that you want to display in the Database Navigator. To select from all the different object types
in the modeling database, select Browse.
3. To only display active or inactive objects, set the pull-down menu below the Filter objects to
either Active Objects or Inactive Objects. Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.
4. Select OK.

Sorting Objects in the Database Navigator

You can sort objects in the Database Navigator by their name or type, such as parts or geometry. You can
also select to not sort the object so the objects appear in the Database Navigator in the order they are
stored in the modeling database.
Note that sorting by name can be slow for objects with very long names. Setting no sorting is the fastest
way to see objects.
 15
Database Navigator

To sort objects in the Database Navigator:

• At the bottom of the Database Navigator, from the Sort by pull-down menu, select how you'd
like the objects sorted.

Setting Highlighting in the Database Navigator

You can set up the Database Navigator so that whenever you select an object in the tree list, it also appears
selected in the main window and the reverse. Highlighting is off by default.

To toggle highlighting:
• Select Highlighting.

Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database

Navigator
Through the Database Navigator, you can set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects
appear in Adams/View.You can set:
• Visibility of the object and of its name on the screen.
• Color, line style, line width and transparency of the object. For example, you can set the color of
the object’s outline or its name.
• Size of the screen icons that represent the object in your model. Note that these changes take
precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database.
• State of the object during a simulation: active or inactive.

You can also set appearance through the Edit -> Appearance command. Learn about Setting Object
Appearance through Edit -> Appearance Command.

To set the appearance of objects:

1. Select an object from the Database Navigator Tree list.
2. Use the options in the dialog box to set the appearance of the object. To inherit an attribute from
a parent of the object, select None from any of the pull-down menus. See Display Attribute dialog
box help.

Tip: For transparency, the higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other
objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is, covering
other objects. However, setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact
on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware
acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting
the object’s render mode to wireframe.

3. To set the scope of the appearance changes, you can select either:
16 Adams/View
Database Navigator

• Object - Only apply to the selected object.

• Siblings - Apply changes to all objects of the same type that are children of the parent of the
selected object.
• All - Apply changes to objects matching the filter you set in the Filter text box.
4. Select Apply.

Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator

You can use the Database Navigator to rename any object. Also see Renaming Objects Through Menu
Commands.

To rename an object:
1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Rename.
2. From the Tree list, select the object to rename.
3. In the text box that appears to the right, type a new name for the object.
4. Select Apply.

Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator

You can use the Database Navigator to associate comments with any object in the Modeling database.

To associate comments with an object:

1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Comments.
2. From the Tree list or View window, select an object.
3. In the text box that appears to the right, type or modify the comments associated with the object.
4. Select Apply.

To save the comments in a file:

• Select Save to File.

Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator

The model topology map displays information about the parts in your model and determines what
constraints are owned by the model and what parts the constraints connect. The information appears in
the window on the right of the Database Navigator.
You can view the part connection information in the following ways:
• By part - Lists each part in the model, along with the parts it is connected to and what
constraints or forces are affecting it.
Learn more about Model Topology by Part.
 17
Database Navigator

• By connections - Displays each constraint and force with the parts they connect and act on. Also
displays any unconnected parts.
Learn more about Model Topology by Connections.
• Graphically - Displays a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other
parts.
Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.

Graphically Viewing Model Topology

In graphical topology, the Database Navigator displays a representation of the selected part and shows its
connections to other parts. The connections represent the joints or forces between the parts. Each time
you select a different part in the tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show
the select part at its center. If an object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.
18 Adams/View
Database Navigator

To display model topology of parts and connections:

• From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Topology by Parts or Topology by
Constraints.

To graphically view the topology of parts:

1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Graphical Topology.
2. From the Tree list or view window, select an object.

Viewing the Associativity of Objects

You can use the Database Navigator to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you
can select a joint in the tree list to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view
the objects that use the selected object.

To view the associativity of objects:

1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Associativity.
2. Set the associativity:
• To show the objects that the selected object uses, select Uses
• To show the objects that use the selected object, select Is Used By.
3. From the Tree list or View window, select an object.
The objects associated with the selected object appear in the text box to the right.

To set up automatic navigation of the objects:

• Select Auto Navigate. Learn more About Auto Navigation.

To save the current associativity information to a file:

• Select Save to File.

Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator

You can use the Database Navigator just as you would the Information Window to display information
about an object.

To display object information:

1. From the Database Navigator pull-down menu, select Information.
2. From the Tree list or View window, select an object.
The information about the object appears in the window to the right.

To save the information to a file:

• Select Save to File.
 19
Database Navigator

To return to the information about a previous object:

• Select .

About Auto Navigation

When you select Auto Navigate, the Database Navigator lets you view the associativity of objects that
you select from the Tree list and any objects listed in the window on the right. For example, if you have
a model with a joint motion, and then select to view the associativity of that motion, you see a joint listed
in the right window, as shown below.
With Auto Navigate selected, you can just select that joint from the right window to view its associativity.
If it were not selected, you would have to select the joint from the tree list to view its associativity. In
addition, when you select the joint in the right window, the Database Navigator also highlights it in the
tree list.
20 Adams/View
Information Window

Information Window
Adams/View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, Simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window. For example, you can display additional
information about the current object's parent or child, print the information, display information about a
different object in the database, and more.
Learn more:

Displaying Information
• Displaying Object Information and Accessing the Information Window
• Displaying Parent and Children Information
• Displaying an Object's Modify Dialog Box

Managing Information
• Clearing the Information Window
• Saving Information in the Information Window
• Displaying a Text File in the Information Window
• Copying Text in the Information Window
• Setting the Information Mode

Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information

Window
You can display information about each object in your Modeling database, including parts, geometry,
motion, and Markers. You can view the information about an object currently on the screen or any object
in the database, including view windows or dialog boxes.
When you display information about the objects in your modeling database, Adams/View displays
information specific to that type of object. For example, when you display information about a rigid body
in your model, Adams/View displays information about its material content, inertial properties, initial
conditions, orientation, velocity, and more. When you display information about a motion, Adams/View
display information about the type of motion it is, its function, and time derivative.

To display information about a modeling object displayed on the screen:

• Right-click the object on the screen, and then select Info.

Tip: You may want to zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor
over just that object.

Information about the object appears in the Information window.

 21
Information Window

To use the Database Navigator to display information about objects in the Information
window:
1. On the Status bar, select the Info tool from the Information tool stack.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the object about which you want to display information. Learn about selecting objects.
3. Select OK.
The information window appears.

To display object information once you've displayed the Information window, do one of
the following:
• In the text box at the top of the Information window, enter the name of the object, and then select
Apply.
• If the object name already appears in the Information window, place the text cursor in the name
of the object, and then select Apply.

Displaying Parent and Children Information

Each object in the database has an object that owns it, called its parent, and many objects own other
objects, called their children. The top-level objects in the database are models, plots, and interface
objects, called gui objects. These objects do not have parents. You can display information about the
parent or children of the object currently displayed in the Information window.
If an object has a parent, the type of parent it has appears in the Information window under the heading
Parent Type and the name of the parent is placed in front of the name of the object in the Object Name
heading. For example, for the part LINK_2, its parent type and name appear in the Information window,
as shown below:

To display an object's children:

• In the Information window, select Children. Learn about accessing the Information window.

To display an object's parent, do one of the following:

• In the Information window, select Parent.
• In the Information window, place the text cursor in the name of the parent and select Apply.
22 Adams/View
Information Window

Displaying an Object's Modify Dialog Box from the Information

Window
When information about an object is displayed in the Information window, you can access that object's
modify dialog box so you can modify the object.

To access an object's modify dialog box from the Information window:

• In the Information window, place the text cursor in the name of the object and select Modify.
Learn about accessing the Information window.
• Learn about other ways of Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.

Clearing the Information Window

Each time you request information in the Information window, Adams/View adds the information to the
bottom of the Information window without removing the current information. You can remove all current
information.

To clear the Information window:

• In the Information window, select Clear.

Saving Information in the Information Window

You can save the contents of the Information window to a text file.

To save the contents of the information to a text file:

1. In the Information window, select Save to File.
The Select File dialog box appears.
2. Select the directory in which you want to place the file.
3. In the File Name text box, enter the file name.
4. Select Open.

Displaying a Text File in the Information Window

You can display any text file in the Information window. You will find this helpful if you want to display
an information file that you saved or you are creating a demonstration of your model using an
Adams/View command file and you want to display information about a particular object or aspect of the
demonstration.

To display a text file when the Information window is already displayed:

1. In the Information window, select Read from File.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
 23
Information Window

2. Select the directory in which you want to place the file.

3. Highlight the file that you want to open in the list, or type the file name in the File Name text box.
4. Select Open.

To display a text file when the Information window is not displayed:

1. On the Tools menu, select Show File.
The Info Window Read dialog box appears.
2. In the File Name text box, you can either:
• Enter the name of the file.
• Browse for a file: right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the
File Selection dialog box.
3. Select OK.
The Information window appears with the text of the file as its content.

Copying Text in the Information Window

You can copy any text in the Information window for use in another window, dialog box, or application.
You cannot paste or delete any text in the window.

To copy text in the Information window:

1. Highlight the text that you want to copy.
2. Right-click the Information window and select Copy.

Setting the Information Mode

By default, the Information window displays only a part's parent and type. To display more information
about the part, you can turn on verbose mode. When you turn on verbose mode, the Information window
displays the children of the object, its geometry, whether or not comments are associated with it, and its
attributes, such as its color and visibility.

To turn on verbose mode:

• Select the Verbose check box.
24 Adams/View
Information Window
Adams/View Interface
Learn about the different aspects of the Adams/View interface.
• Using Shortcut Menus
• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
• Working with Text Boxes
• Working with the Coordinate Window
• Using Tables to Enter Values
• Undoing and Redoing Operations
• Canceling Operations
• Managing Messages

Using Shortcut Menus

The four different types of Shortcut menus are explained in the table below.

To display and select a command from a shortcut menu:

1. Right-click the appropriate type of object.
2. Select the desired command.

When cursor is over: The shortcut menu lets you:

Modeling object in the main window Select, modify, duplicate, delete, measure, rename,
(for example, a rigid body) deactivate, set appearance, and display information about the
object.
Main window (over no modeling Set the display of the main window, such as zoom in on your
object) model or change the view orientation.

See an Example of shortcut menu.

Text box in a dialog box Enter information required in the text box.

See Using Shortcut Menus in Text Boxes.

Strip charts that monitor a measure Transfer the plot to the full plotting window, display
information about the measure, and delete the measure.

Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes

Some of the tools on the Main toolbox are actually Tool stacks. If you are using tool stacks frequently, you
can display many of them as floating dialog boxes, or palettes. For example, you can display the
2 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

Geometric Modeling tool stack as the Geometric Modeling Palette. You can keep these palettes open
during your entire modeling session and place them anywhere on your screen.
As you create objects, such as parts or constraints, Adams/View provides settings to assist in defining the
objects. It provides the settings in a container at the bottom of the palette or Main toolbox. For example,
as you create a link, Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and depth before you create it. Then,
as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move the cursor. You can also
define Design variables or Expressions for these setting values.

To select a default tool from the Main toolbox or palette:

• Click the tool once with the left mouse button.

To select a default tool so you can use it several times or set the display in all view
windows:
• Double-click the tool with the left mouse button.

To stop using a tool:

• Select another tool, Esc key, or the Select Tool.

To display a tool stack and select a tool from it:

1. Right-click a tool stack.
2. Select the desired tool in the stack.

To display a tool stack as a palette:

• On the tool stack, select the Display Palette tool .

Working with Text Boxes

Text boxes in dialog boxes let you input information into Adams/View. Adams/View text boxes provide
you with a visual cue as to whether or not the information in the text box is required to run the command.
If the information in the text box is required, the text box appears in a lighter shade of gray. If the
information is not required, the text box appears in a darker shade of gray. Also, you can use the shortcut
menu in a text box to determine if the information is required.
Learn more:
• Using Shortcut Menus in Text Boxes
• Entering Modeling Objects in Text Boxes
• Searching for Files
• Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Clearing Text
• Viewing and Validating Text in Text Boxes
• Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes
 3
Adams/View Interface

Using Shortcut Menus in Text Boxes

The text boxes also contain Shortcut menus to access commonly used commands that pertain to the
information to be entered in the text box. For example, if a text box requires a file or model name, you
can click the right mouse button to display a command for browsing your directories or modeling
database. The types of commands that appear on shortcut menus depend on the type of object required
in the text box. The table below shows the different menu commands that appear for each type of object.

When the text box

requires: The shortcut menu lets you:
Modeling object (for • Browse the Modeling database, select an
example, a rigid body) object from the screen, or create an object.
• Copy, cut, and paste text.
• Manage and parameterize objects. These are
the same commands available through the
pull-down menus.
• Display information about the required
values.
File name and location • Browse directories.
• Search a specified path.
• Copy, cut, and paste text and display
information about the required values.

Text, such as a value • Copy, cut, and paste text.

• Parameterize the text, if appropriate.
• Display information about the required
values.

Entering Modeling Objects in Text Boxes

Many of the dialog boxes in Adams/View require the name of a modeling object, such as a part or model.
To help you enter the object name, Adams/View provides commands on the Shortcut menus in text boxes
for selecting the object from the screen or for browsing your modeling database using the Database
Navigator.
The shortcut menu also has a command called Guesses. Guesses displays the five most recently created
objects of that type. Depending on the object required, the shortcut menu also contains a command to
create a new object of the required type.
4 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

To enter a modeling object by typing:

• Place the cursor in the text box, and then type the name of the modeling object in the text box.
Be sure to enter the entire name of the object, including its model and parent, if the name of the
object is not unique within the entire database. For example, if you had two markers called
mar_1 on two different parts, you need to enter .model_1.par_1.mar_1 to uniquely identify the
marker. Learn about the Adams/View modeling database hierarchy.

To enter a modeling object by picking, browsing, or creating the object:

1. Right-click the text box. The first command on the menu is the type of object to be entered. For
example, the first command is Model if you are to enter a model, Constraint if you are to enter
a constraint.
2. Point to the type of object and then do one of the following:
• Select Pick and click on the desired object in the main window.
• Select Browse to display the Database Navigator, and then select the desired object from the
Database Navigator.
• Point to Guesses and select the desired object from the list of recently created objects of that
type.
• Select Create to create an object of the type required.

Searching for Files

If a text box requires the name and location of a file, you can browse for it or look for it in a specified
search path. The next sections explain how to browse and search for files:
• Browsing Directories
• Using a Search Path

Browsing Directories
You can use the Select File dialog box to browse for a file.
To browse for a file:
1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Select Browse to display the Select File dialog box.
3. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
4. In the File Name box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
5. Select Open.

Tip: Clear the text box, if necessary, and double-click to display the File Selection dialog box
 5
Adams/View Interface

Using a Search Path

The file aview.pth in the aview directory defines search paths for different types of files. For example,
there is a path defined for database modeling files (binary files), paths defined for command files, and so
on. Adams/View displays the search paths defined for a particular object when you select Search from a
shortcut menu in a text box. You can use these search paths to quickly locate files.
• For more on aview.pth, see Running and Configuring Adams.

To search for a file in a search path:

1. Right-click a text box that requires a file name to display a shortcut menu.
2. Point to Search, and then select a search path that contains the file you are looking for. For
example, if you are searching for a modeling database (binary file), select $LOCAL_AVIEW.
The Select File dialog box appears.
3. Locate the file in the list, and then select Open.

Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Clearing Text

You can use the shortcut menu commands that appear in text boxes to cut or copy the text in the box to
the clipboard (a temporary storage area) and paste text saved in the clipboard into the text box. You can
also quickly clear text in a text box using a keyboard shortcut.
To cut and copy text in a text box:
1. Select the text that you want to cut or copy.
2. Right-click the text box to display the shortcut menu and do one of the following, depending on
the type of text in the text box:
3. If the text is a value, select Cut or Copy.
4. If the text is a name of an object, point to Text, and then select Cut or Copy.
To paste text stored in the clipboard:
1. Place the cursor in the text box where you want to paste the text.
2. Right-click the text box to display the shortcut menu and do one of the following depending on
the type of text in the text box:
3. If the text is a value, such as a real number, select Paste.
4. If the text is a name of an object, point to Text, and then select Paste.
To quickly clear a text box:
• Left-click at the start of the text box, and then press Ctrl-k.

Viewing and Validating Text in Text Boxes

To help you ensure that you enter the correct type of information and to see if the information is required,
the Shortcut menus in text boxes contain a submenu called Field Info. Field Info does the following:
6 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

• Indicates whether or not the information in the text box is required to execute the command. The
following text appears in the menu. They are for information only and do not execute a
command.
• Required appears if the information is required.
• Optional appears if the information is not required.
• Displays the type of information you should enter (text, integer, model, and so on).
• Validates the information you have entered in the text box. This is particularly helpful if you
entered a function in the text box. Adams/View also automatically validates the information
when you move the cursor out of the text box.

To view and validate the information required in a text box:

1. Right-click the text to display the shortcut menu.
2. Point to Field Info, and then do either of the following:
• To verify that the information you already entered was correctly enter, select Validate. If you
enter invalid information, Adams/View highlights the text box in red and displays an error
message.
• View the type of information to be entered and whether or not it is required for Adams/View
to execute the command.
Also see Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes.
 7
Adams/View Interface

Working with the Coordinate Window

You can use the Coordinate window to help you identify the coordinates of any location in a View window.
You can also measure the distance between objects based on their coordinate locations.
The sections below explain how to work with the coordinate window:
• Displaying the Coordinate Window
• Measuring the Distance Between Points

Displaying the Coordinate Window

To toggle on and off the display of the coordinate window, do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Coordinate Window.

• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, select the Coordinate Window tool .
The coordinate window appears in the lower right corner of the screen. You can move and size it
as you do any window in your operating system.

Tip: Press the F4 key to toggle the display of the coordinate window.

Measuring the Distance Between Points

In Delta mode, you can use your mouse and the coordinate window to find the distance between two
points

To measure the distance between two points:

1. Move the cursor to the point in a view window where you want to begin, and press and hold down
the mouse button.
2. Drag the cursor to the next point. As you drag the cursor, Adams/View displays the distance the
cursor moves in the coordinate window.
3. To end delta mode, release the mouse button.

Using Tables to Enter Values

Adams/View has two types of tables for entering values as shown in the table below. To learn more, click:
• Entering Values in Cells
• Moving Between Cells
• Selecting Cells and Rows
• Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text in Cells
• Viewing Entire Contents of a Cell
8 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

• Resizing Columns

The table: Lets you: Example:

Table Editor Enter values for all types of
objects.

Location Table Enter values for multiple

locations, such as the
locations for the points on a
spline.

Entering Values in Cells

To enter values in a cell of a table:
1. Click the cell.
The text cursor appears in the cell.
2. Enter the values in the selected cell.

Moving Between Cells

You can quickly move from one cell to another using the following shortcuts. Note that you must press
the Enter key to enter information into the cells.
To move to the next cell:
 9
Adams/View Interface

• Press Tab.

To move to the previous cell:

• Press Shift + Tab.

To move up to the previous row or down to the next row:

• Press the up or down arrow keys.

Selecting Cells and Rows

To work with information in a table, you must select the information you want to change.

To select: With the mouse:

A cell Click the cell.
A range of cells Click the upper left cell and drag across the cells you want to select.

OR:

Hold down the Ctrl key and select individual cells.

An entire row Click the row header.
An entire column Click the column header.

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text in Cells

You can cut or copy text from one cell of a table and paste it in another cell.
To cut or copy text:
• Right-click the text in the cell that you want to cut or copy and then select Copy or Cut.

To paste text:
• Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and select Paste.

Viewing Entire Contents of a Cell

Often, information displayed in a cell is longer than the width of the cell. When this happens,
Adams/View displays an arrow next to the cell to indicate that there is more information than can fit in
10 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

the cell. The following figure shows the Location Table as it appears in UNIX when cells contain more
information than can be displayed at once.

To view the rest of the cell:

• Click the cell.
Adams/View displays the last portion of the information in the cell.

Resizing Columns
You can change the size of any column in a table. In addition, in the Location table, you can resize all
columns equally.
To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button

Undoing and Redoing Operations

You can undo the effects of most Adams/View commands. Adams/View remembers up to 20
Adams/View operations. For example, if you accidentally delete a joint, you can undo the deletion by
selecting Undo. Note that you cannot undo the effects of some commands, such as the commands in the
File menu.

To undo an operation, do one of the following:

• On the Edit menu, select Undo.

• On the Main toolbox, select the Undo tool .

 11
Adams/View Interface

• Type Ctrl + Z.

To redo an operation, do one of the following:

• On the Edit menu, select Redo.

• On the Main toolbox, select the Redo tool .

• Type Ctrl + Shift + Z.

Canceling Operations
You can cancel any operation that you started in Adams/View. For example, you can exit from a dialog
box or from a drawing operation or stop a simulation or animation.

To cancel an operation, do one of the following:

• Select the Cancel button on a dialog box, if available.

• Press the Esc key or select the Stop tool on the Status bar.

Managing Messages
Types of Messages
Adams/View displays informational messages, errors, warnings, and faults in the following interface
elements.

The element: Displays:

Status bar Informational status messages, brief descriptions of commands, and the time
remaining in an operation. It also displays messages to assist you in creating
and editing objects. Be sure to watch it as you work with Adams/View. The
status bar appears at the bottom of the main window
Alert boxes Errors or messages about the command that you selected. For example, it
appears when you select to perform an operation on an object and there are no
objects of that type in the database.
Message Window Messages about the execution of a command. By default, the message window
only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface.
You can also set it to display messages about commands that you execute from
the Command window, Command Navigator, and Adams/View command file.
12 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

Setting the Messages Displayed

By default, the Message Window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from commands
that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also display
messages that you execute from the Command Window, Command Navigator, and Adams/View
command file. In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational
to fatal messages.

To set the messages displayed in the message window:

1. From the Message window, select Settings.
The Message Settings dialog box appears.
2. Set the messages that you want displayed as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

To display: Select one of the following:

Only certain types of messages • Only Graphical User Interface (GUI) widgets to display
messages that are generated from commands you execute
from the user interface.
• The GUI, the command line, and command files to display
messages that you execute from the user interface, command
window, Command Navigator, and command files.
• Don't display messages to turn off the display of all
messages.
Messages at or above a • Information - Displays messages about what is occurring
specified severity level during a command. Setting the message window to display
these types of messages helps you understand what is
happening in Adams/View but requires no action from you.
• Warning - Displays messages that warn you that something
unusual occurred but the operation can continue. You may
want to fix or change something to complete the operation
without warnings.
• Error - Displays messages that indicate that the operation
cannot be executed. You need to fix or change something to
complete the operation.
• Fatal - Displays messages that indicate that a programming
error occurred. You should report the message to MSC's
Technical Support staff.

Clearing the Message Window

Each time you receive a message in the Message Window, Adams/View adds the message to the bottom
of the message window without removing the previous message. You can, however, clear all previous
messages.
 13
Adams/View Interface

To clear the message window:

• From the Message window, select Clear.

Setting Screen Icon Display

When you first start Adams/View, it displays Screen icons. As you add objects to your model, however,
these icons can clutter your view of the model. To clear the display of a window, you can turn off the
icons. You can select to turn off:
• All icons
• Only icons of certain types of objects, for example, all joints
• Only icons for individual objects, such as FORCE_1

In addition, you can set the size of the icons either in current units or as a factor of their current size.
Learn more about how to set the display of screen icons by database and object type.
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Database
• Setting Screen Icon Display by Object Type

For information on quickly toggling the display of all screen icons, see Displaying View Accessories. For
information on setting the display of icons for individual objects, see Setting Object Appearance.

Setting Screen Icon Display by Database

You can set up how you want Screen icons to be displayed for an entire Modeling database. By default,
all models and objects in the modeling database inherit the screen icon settings that you specify for the
database. You can, however, override the inheritance for different types of objects as explained in Setting
Screen Icon Display by Object Type, or for individual objects as explained in the Setting Object
Appearance.

To set up the screen icon display for the entire database:

1. On the Settings menu, select Icons.
The Icon Settings Dialog Box appears.
2. Set New Value to one of the following to select whether or not you want to turn on screen icons:
• No Change - Select No Change to not change the current settings.
• On - Turns on all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for individual objects or
types of objects.
• Off - Turns off all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for individual objects or
types of objects.
3. In the New Size text box, enter the size you want for the screen icons. Note that any changes you
make to the size of icons for individual objects or types of objects take precedence over this size
setting.
14 Adams/View
Adams/View Interface

4. To save the settings for each new database in the Adams/View settings file (aviewBS.cmd), select
Save new size as default. Learn about Saving and Restoring Settings.
5. Select OK.

To reset the screen icon display to the previous values:

• On the Icon Settings dialog box, select Reset.

Setting Screen Icon Display by Object Type

You can set up how you want Screen icons displayed for a particular type of object, such as all parts or
joints. By default, all objects inherit the screen icon display options that you specify for the modeling
database. You can set screen icon options for the following types of objects:
• Curve-Curve Constraints
• Couplers
• Data elements
• Equations (System elements)
• Forces
• Gears
• Joints
• Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display
options for parts.)
• Motion
• Part (also called Bodies)
• Points
• Point-Curve Constraints

To set screen icon display options for objects of a particular type:

1. On the Settings menu, select Icons.
The Icon Settings Dialog Box appears.
2. Set Specify Attributes for to the type of object for which you want to set the screen icon options.
3. From the Visibility area of the Icon Settings dialog box, select whether or not you want to turn on
screen icons for the selected object type. You can select:
• On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
• Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object. Remember, however,
that turning on the display of screen icons for the entire database overrides this setting.
• Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its parent. For example,
a coordinate system marker inherits settings from its parent part.
 15
Adams/View Interface

• No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make changes to other display
options without affecting the visibility of the icons.
4. Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to scale the icons.
The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size.
A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify
globally for the modeling database.
5. Enter the color you want to use for the icons.

To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select Browse or
Create.
1. Set Name Visibility Option to whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Step 3 for an explanation of the choices.
2. Select OK.
16 Adams/View
Display Options

Display Options

Setting Part Display

You can set a View window so it displays a particular part in the current Model. You will find this helpful
when you want to compare or work with different parts at the same time.

To display a single part in a view window:

1. Click the view window in which you want to display the part.
2. On the View menu, select Part Only.
The Database Navigator appears listing the parts in the current model.
3. Select the part you want to display.
4. Select OK.
The selected part appears in the currently active view.

Displaying View Accessories

When you first start Adams/View, it displays several accessories to help you manage the view of your
model:
• Working grid
• Screen icons
• View triad
• View title

Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use
the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot
change the view title.

To use a dialog box to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. Click the view window whose accessories you want to change.
2. On the View menu, select View Accessories, and then select the accessories that you want to turn
on or off from the View Accessories dialog box that appears.
3. Enter the title you want displayed in the currently active view window, and then press Enter.
4. On the Window menu in the View Accessories dialog box, select Exit.

To use tools in the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of view accessories:
1. If you want to change the view accessories for only one view window, click that view window.
 17
Display Options

2. On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, select a view accessory tool. Double-click any
of the tools to apply the accessory changes to all view windows. Note that the tool must be on top
of the tool stack to double-click it.
3. Select the buttons Icons or Grid on the Main toolbox to toggle on and off the display of screen
icons and the working grid.

Tip: • Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window to toggle on and off the
display of the working grid in the active view window
• Type a lowercase v to toggle on and off the display of screen icons.

Setting Rendering Mode

Adams/View provides six Rendering mode in which you can display a model in a view window.

To select a rendering mode:

• Click the View window whose rendering mode you want to change.
• On the View menu, point to Render Mode, and then select a rendering mode.

To toggle the display between wireframe and smooth-shaded mode:

Do one of the following:
• On the Main toolbox, select Render to toggle between wireframe and smooth-shaded mode.
• Type an uppercase S in the view window.

Displaying Toolbox and Toolbars

You can turn on and off the display of the Main toolbox , the Standard toolbar and Status bar. You can
also set where the Standard and status toolbars appear—either at the top of the main window under the
menu bar or at the bottom of the window. By default, the Main toolbox appears at the left of the main
window, the Standard toolbar is turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.

To turn toolbars on and off:

1. On the View menu, select Toolbox and Toolbars.
The Tool Settings dialog box appears.
2. Select the visibility of each toolbar and its placement in the main window. Your changes take
place immediately.
3. Close the dialog box.
18 Adams/View
Display Options

Setting Stereo Viewing

You can set up stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all UNIX platforms but not Windows.
To run stereo viewing, before running Adams/View, set the MDI_STEREO environment variable
MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams/View Environment
Variables.

Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.

To set this registry setting:

1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.
The Registry Editor appears.
2. Select AView -> Preferences -> Graphics -> OpenGL_Software_Assisted.

Using Stereo Viewing on SGI Machines

There are two types of stereo views available on SGI machines:
• Above-and-below viewing - The first, and least useful, is above-and-below viewing. This type
of viewing is used with non-stereo- ready hardware and splits the screen into two halves, a top
half and bottom half. The result is that the screen size in pixels is effectively cut in half in the
vertical direction. For example, on a monitor set for a screen size 1024 x 768 pixels, the screen
size changes to 1024 x 384. This changes the aspect ratio of the screen and of the resulting
images displayed within Adams/View and Adams/PostProcessor. They appear to be one half as
tall as they should be.
• Interlaced stereo viewing - The second type of viewing is Interlaced stereo viewing, which is
available on stereo-capable graphics cards. This approach has the advantage that the screen
aspect ratio is not changed and, therefore, the resulting images maintain the same proportions
has their non-stereo counterparts. To enable this mode in the current Adams code, the video
format for the monitor must be set to a format that supports interlaced stereo viewing. To do this,
use the SGI setmon(1) shell command. For example, on a SGI tezro machine with a V12
graphics card, you could use the following command:
/usr/gfx/setmon -n 1280x1024_100s

To turn on stereo viewing and set options for it:

1. From the Settings menu, select Stereo Viewing.
2. Select Stereo viewing.
 19
Display Options

3. Set the following options as desired:

For the option: Do the following:

Depth of Field Slide to control the depth of the perspective matrix.
Eye Separation Slide to control of offset between the left and right modeling views.
Parallax Control the type of parallax view used to display the model:

• Positive - Positive parallax viewing produces images that appear to be

within the space of the monitor. For engineering purposes where objects
are often cut off by the window borders or partially obscured by dialog
boxes, positive parallax viewing produces images that are less confusing
to the viewer and are, therefore, easier to view.
• Negative - Negative parallax viewing produces images that appear to
float in space in front of the display. Viewing floating images that are
partially obscured by interface items produces confusing cues to the
viewer. While the image appears in front of the screen, the interface
items appear to be on the screen but these interface items can obscure
part of the image. These conflicting inputs can be confusing and lead to
extra strain.
Eye Position Use with Negative parallax viewing and use it to control how far the image floats
in front of the screen.

Setting View Background Colors

By default, Adams/View uses a blue background to display the Main window and any View window that
you create. It also provides a set of colors in which you can display the background. You can set the view
to any color by setting the red, green, and blue colors directly.
Learn more:
• Selecting a Preset Background Color
• Creating a Background Color

Selecting a Preset Background Color

You access the palette of background colors using:
• View Background Color command on the Settings menu.
• Background Color Tool Stack on the Main toolbox.

The View Background Color command contains all the pre-set colors, while the Background Color tool
stack contains only four of the most commonly used colors.
20 Adams/View
Display Options

To select a color from the Background Color tool stack:

• Select a color from the Background Color tool stack.

To select from the entire palette of background colors:

1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. Select a color from the palette of preset background colors.
The color appears in the Current color box and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders.
3. Select OK.

Creating a Background Color

You can create a background color by setting its red, green, and blue light percentages and change the
background of all view windows to this new color. You cannot add the color to the preset palette of colors
or change the colors in the preset palette.

To create a color:
1. From the Settings menu, select View Background Colors.
The Edit Background Color dialog box appears.
2. If desired, select a color near to the color that you want to create from the palette of preset
background colors.
The color appears in the Current color box, and its color values appear in the Red, Green, and Blue
color value sliders. Adams/View creates the color by mixing the red, green, and blue light
percentages as specified in the color value sliders.
3. Change the color values for the color in the Red, Green, and Blue color value sliders, as desired.
As you change the color values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
4. Select OK.

To reset a color to the original background color:

• Select the R tool in the Edit Background Color dialog box.

Setting Up the Working Grid

By default Adams/View displays a Working grid. You can set the appearance of various elements in the
grid, such as its color, location, and orientation.
Learn more:
• Setting the Appearance of the Working Grid
• Setting the Location and Orientation of the Working Grid
 21
Display Options

Setting Up the Appearance of the Working Grid

Settings -> Working Grid

You can set the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility. You can
also set the working grid to represent Polar working grid or Rectangular working grid coordinates.

To set the appearance of the working grid:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the Settings menu, select Working Grid.
• On the Move tool stack, select the Working Grid tool .
The Working Grid Settings dialog box appears.
2. Select whether or not you want to display the working grid.
3. Select the type of working grid you want to use (Rectangular or Polar). Adams/View changes the
coordinate system settings accordingly. For more information on coordinate systems, see Setting
Default Coordinate System.
4. Select the size and spacing of the working grid. The options for setting the size and spacing
depend on the type of working grid you select, as listed below.
• For a rectangular working grid, set the following:
Size - Enter the size of the grid in the x and y directions in length units.
22 Adams/View
Display Options

Spacing - Enter the spacing between each point in the grid in the x and y directions in length
units.
See Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing.
• For a polar coordinate system, set the following:
Maximum Radius - Enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to its outermost circle.
Circle Spacing - Enter the amount of space between each circle in the working grid. The
smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams/View defines.
Radial Increments - Enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of the working grid.
Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working grid. The lines do not include the
axes. The number of lines (N) determines the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in
the formula:
 = 360×/N
For example, if you specify 8 lines, the angle increment between the lines is 45.
See Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing.
5. Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can also set the color of the
objects to Contrast, which indicates that Adams/View should select a color that contrasts with the
color currently set for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful
when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or when you frequently
change the view background.
The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided for setting the color
of objects. The colors do not include any new colors that you created.
The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.
6. Select OK.

Setting Up the Location and Orientation of the Working Grid

You can set the center location and orientation of the Working grid as desired. This is particularly helpful
when you are moving or creating objects because, by default, Adams/View moves and creates objects in
the plane of the working grid.

To set the location and orientation of the working grid:

1. Do one of the following, if you haven't already:
• On the Settings menu, select Working Grid.
• On the Move tool stack, select the Working Grid tool .
The Working Grid Settings dialog box appears.
2. Set the center location of the working grid by setting Set Location to one of the following:
• Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the center of the view window.
• Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the working grid.
 23
Display Options

3. Set Set Orientation to how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation by
picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you select Pick for orientation,
you will also set the location of the working grid.
24 Adams/View
View Options

View Options

Setting Up the Window Layout

By default, Adams/View displays the front of your model in the entire main window. Adams/View also
provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of
your model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams/Views
displays the current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.

You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layout Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.

To select a layout:
1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, select Layout to display the Window Layout palette.
• Select the Window Layouts tool stack.
2. Select a layout.
 25
View Options

3. If you used the palette, select Close to close it. You can keep it open to quickly switch between
layouts.

Activating a View Window

By default, Adams/View changes the display of your model only in the active View window, leaving the
other windows the same. The active window is outlined in red. Adams/View also provides shortcuts from
the Tool stacks that let you change the display in all your view windows at once.

To activate a view window so that any display changes occur in it:

• Click anywhere in the view window using the left mouse button. Be sure the border changes to
red.

Changing the View in a Window

Adams/View provide seven pre-set views of your model that you can display in any of your view
windows. You can access the pre-set views using the Pre-set command on the View menu or using the
set of View Orientation Tool Stacks on the Main Toolbox.
Learn about the different Orientations and the tools that activate them.

To set a view in a view window:

1. Click the view window whose view you want to change.
2. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Pre-Set, and then select a view.
• On the Main toolbox, select one of the tools on the View Orientation tool stacks.
3. Double-click any of the tools to apply the view orientation to all view windows. Note that the tool
must be on top of the tool stack to double-click it.

Tip: Type one of the following uppercase letters while the cursor is in a view window to change
to the corresponding view:
• F - Front view
• T - Top view
• R - Right view
• I - Iso

Setting the Center of a View Window

You can move a particular point in your model to the center of the current View window. This is
particularly helpful when you have zoomed in on your model and you want to rotate the View because it
26 Adams/View
View Options

lets you set the center about which Adams/View rotates the view. You can also reposition the model so
that the origin (0,0) of the window is again at the center of the window.

To set a particular point as the center of window:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Center.
• On the Main toolbox, select the Center tool .

Tip: Type a lowercase c.

2. Click the left mouse button on the point in the model that you want at the center of the window.

To return the origin (0,0) of the window to the center of the window:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Origin.

Setting the View Perspective

By default, Adams/View displays your model as though it were drawn on a flat piece of paper. This is
called orthographic projection mode. You can change the depth of the screen to perspective mode.
Perspective mode causes a vanishing point effect by showing the size of parts relative to their distance
from the viewer. It does not show the true proportions of all parts. The figure below shows a solid box in
the two different view projection modes. Once in perspective mode, you can set the distance the objects
are from the viewer.

To set the current View to perspective mode, do one of the following:

• On the Main toolbox, select the Depth button.
• On the View menu, point to Projection, and then select Perspective.
 27
View Options

To set the perspective in the window:

1. On the Main toolbox, from the Translate Tool Stack, select the Translate Z tool .

Tip: Type a lowercase d to change the perspective.

2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window as follows:
• To increase perspective, drag the cursor upward.
• To decrease perspective, drag the cursor downward.
4. When the window contains the desired perspective, release the mouse button.

To set the view back to orthographic mode, do one of the following:

• On the Main toolbox, clear the Depth check box again.
• On the View menu, point to Projection, and then select Orthographic.

Dynamically Translating a View

To move the display of the model so that you can see objects that are outside the current view window
boundaries, you can translate the view. Translating the view moves the view in the x and y directions as
you move the cursor. You can also more precisely control the translation of the view by specifying the
amount by which Adams/View translates the view each time you move the cursor.
You can translate the View by selecting the Translate command from the View menu or View shortcut
menu that appears in the main window. In addition, there is a Translate tool on the Main toolbox. If you
want to control the amount by which Adams/View moves the view, you must use the Translate tool on
the Main toolbox.

To dynamically translate the view:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Translate.
• On the Main toolbox, from the Translate Tool Stack, select the Translate tool .
2. Place the cursor in the view window and click and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor in the window in the direction you want to translate the view. The view of the
window follows the movement of the mouse.
4. When the window contains the desired view, release the mouse button.

Tip: Type a lowercase letter t while the cursor is in a view window.

28 Adams/View
View Options

To dynamically translate a view by specified increments:

Use the Translate tool on the Main toolbox as explained above, but also:
1. On the Main toolbox, in the Increment box, enter the amount by which you want to increment
the view translations.
2. As you translate the view, hold down the Shift key. Holding down the Shift key limits
Adams/View to the increments you specified. To translate the view continuously, release the
Shift key.

Dynamically Rotating a View

You can rotate the display of the model about any of the View’s three axes (x, y, or z). You can also more
precisely control the rotation of the view by specifying the amount by which Adams/View rotates the
view each time you move the cursor. All the rotation operations work using screen axes. Screen axes are
fixed with x to the right, y up, and z out of the screen.
You can rotate a view the Position/Orientation submenu on the View menu or from the View shortcut
menu. In addition, you can use the Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack on the Main toolbox to rotate the view
about the screen x-, y-, and the z-axes. If you want to set the amount by which Adams/View rotates the
view, you must use the Dynamic Rotation tool stack on the Main toolbox.

To rotate a view dynamically:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select one of the Dynamic
Rotation commands.
• Select a tool from the Dynamic Rotation tool stack on the Main toolbox. Select either:
Rotate XY tool to rotate the view about the screen’s x- and y-axes at the same time.
Rotate Z tool to rotate the view about the screen’s z-axis.
2. Place the cursor in the view window, hold down the left mouse button, and move the cursor to
rotate the view in the specified direction. As you move the cursor, the view changes.
3. When the window contains the desired view, release the mouse button.

Tip: Type a lowercase r while the cursor is in the view window to rotate the view about
the x- and y-axes and type a lowercase s to rotate (spin) the view about the z-axis.

To dynamically rotate a view by specified increments:

Use a Dynamic Rotation tool on the Main toolbox as explained previously, but also:
• On the Main toolbox, in the Increment box, enter the amount by which you want to increment
the view rotations. You can enter any value, but we suggest that you use a value between 0 and
360. Try 5.
 29
View Options

• As you rotate the view, hold down the Shift key. Holding down the Shift key limits Adams/View
to the increments you specified. To rotate the view continuously, release the Shift key.

Orienting the View Using an Object XY

You can rotate the View to that of any object in your model. Adams/View rotates the view so that the front
of the selected object appears in xy plane of the view. The front of an object is the location where its
positioning handle is set to the screen axes. For example, if you have two blocks as shown in the following
figure, you can orient the view to the front of BLOCK_1 simply by selecting any part of BLOCK_1.

To orient the view using an object:

1. Select one of the following:
• On the View shortcut menu, select Align to Object XY.
• On the Main toolbox, select the Align to Object XY tool .
2. Select an object.

Tip: Type a lowercase e when the cursor is in the view window. e stands for entity orient.

Orienting the View Using Precise Increments

You can rotate the View about the x, y, and z screen axes by a specified increment.

To orient the view by precise increments:

1. On the Main Toolbox, select the View Rotation tool from the Toggle Tool Stack.
The View Rotation palette appears.
2. Select the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the view.
3. Select the appropriate rotation arrows on the View Rotation palette to rotate the view.
30 Adams/View
View Options

Orienting the View Using Three Points

You can specify three points to define a new View orientation in the View window. The first point defines
the center of the view and the second and third points define the x- and y-axes. You can define the points
for the x- and y-axes using any edge, face, or point in your model.
For example, if you have two blocks as shown in the figure below, you can rotate the view to see the front
of the first block, BLOCK_2, by selecting the center of mass of BLOCK_2 as the center of the view and
selecting two points along the edges of BLOCK_2 that define the new view. In the figure, the points that
you would select are indicated with X’s.

To orient a view using three points:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the View shortcut menu in the main window, select Align to 3 Point.
• On the Main toolbox, select the Align to 3 Point tool .
2. Select the point you want to define as the center of the view.
3. Select an edge, face, or point to define the x-axis and then select another edge, face, or point to
define the y-axis.
Adams/View rotates the view to the new view.

Dynamically Zooming the Display

Changes the magnification of your model in the window. Dynamic zooming automatically zooms the
current window in and out as you move the cursor. You can more precisely control the magnification by
specifying an increment by which Adams/View zooms the window.

To dynamically zoom the current window:

1. Select one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Zoom In/Out.
 31
View Options

• On the Main toolbox, select the Zoom In/Out tool .

2. Position the cursor in the window you want to zoom and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the cursor in the window:
• To enlarge the display of the model, move the cursor toward the outside of the window. Do
not move the cursor outside of the window or Adams/View turns dynamic zooming off.
• To shrink the display of the model, move the cursor in toward the center of the window.
4. When the model is at the desired magnification, release the mouse button.

Tip: Type a lowercase z while the cursor is in the window to dynamically zoom the view.

To dynamically zoom the window by increments:

• Use the Zoom In/Out tool on the Main toolbox as explained above but:
1. On the Main toolbox, in the Increment box, enter the amount by which you want to increment the
zoom. For example, to magnify the view 3 times, enter 3. To magnify it by 1/2, enter.5.
2. As you move the cursor in the window, hold down the Shift key.

Zooming In and Out by Pre-Set Values

You can quickly enlarge and shrink the display of the model in the current window by 1/2 (50%) its
current magnification.

To magnify the display by 1/2:

• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Zoom In.

To shrink the display by 1/2:

• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Zoom Out.

Defining a Zoom Area

You can define the area that you want enlarged and displayed in the current window. You draw a box to
define the zoom area. The lower left corner of the window that you define becomes the lower left corner
32 Adams/View
View Options

of the view window. The shape of the window you define does not need to correspond to the shape of the
view window. Adams/View fits the specified area into the view window as necessary.

To define a zoom box:

1. Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Zoom Box.
• On the Main toolbox, select the Zoom Box tool .
2. Place the cursor where you want the upper right corner of the box and click and hold down the
left mouse button.
3. Drag the mouse diagonally to define the size of the box.
4. Release the mouse button.

Tip: Type a lowercase w when the cursor is in the window.

Fitting a Model in a Window

You can fit the entire model into the current window using the Fit and Fit - No Ground commands.
• Fit - Fits the entire model into the window, including the ground part and any geometry attached
to it.
• Fit - No Ground - Excludes the ground part and its geometry.

For example, if you have a model of a car that also has a very large piece of geometry on ground
representing a road, and you use Fit to view the entire model, the view contains all of the geometry, as
 33
View Options

shown in the image on the left. The car appears very small after the fit to accommodate the road. If you
use Fit - No Ground, the view is only of the car, as shown in the image on the right.

To fit the entire model, including ground, into the window:

Do one of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Fit.
• Right-click the background of the screen, and, from the shortcut menu, select Fit to View.

• On the Main toolbox, select the Fit tool .

Tip: Type a lowercase f.

To fit the model, excluding ground, into the window:

• On the View menu, point to Position/Orientation, and then select Fit - No Ground.
• Right-click the background of the screen, and, from the pop-up menu, select Fit to View.

Tip: Type Ctrl f.

Refreshing the Model Display

You can redraw the Main window to return the model to its initial configuration and display all geometry
in the Model. This is particularly useful if you selected to view only certain parts and now want to view
the entire model.

To refresh the model display:

• On the View menu, select Refresh.
34 Adams/View
View Options

Purging Cache Files

Flexible-body cache files (.fcf) used to achieve the performance of flexible-body animations can
accumulate on your disk after repeated simulation-animation iterations. You can purge the cache files
from your disk through the Tools menu in both Adams/View and Adams/PostProcessor (animation
mode).
Learn more about cache files.

To purge cache files:

• From the Tools menu, select Purge Cache Files.
Building Models
2 Adams/View
Parts

Parts
Parts define the objects in your model that can have mass and inertia properties and can move. All forces
and constraints that you define in your model act on these parts during a simulation. The next sections
explain more about parts:

Types of Parts
Adams/View provides you with three different types of parts that you can create:
• Rigid Bodies
• Flexible bodies - Basic Adams/View provides you with the ability to create Discrete Flexible
Link. For more functionality, you can purchase Adams/Flex. For information on purchasing
Adams/Flex, see your MSC sales representative, and for information on using Adams/Flex, refer
to Adams/Flex online help.
• Point mass

In addition, Adams/View provides a ground part that is already created for you.

About the Ground Part

The ground part is the only part in your model that must remain stationary at all times. Adams/View
creates the ground part automatically when you create a model. You can also define a new or existing
part as the ground part. The ground part does not have mass properties or initial velocities and does not
add Degrees of freedom into your model.
The ground part acts as the global coordinate system that defines the global origin (0,0,0) and reference
frame about which you create your model. You cannot specify its position. You can add geometry to the
ground part.
In addition, by default, the ground part also acts as the inertial reference frame with respect to which all
of the part velocities and accelerations are calculated. You can also select another part as the inertial
reference frame. You can select another part through the Command Navigator.
Note that although the ground part is the only part in your model that must remain stationary at all times,
you can move the geometry and constraints attached to the ground part. Since geometry and constraints
are tied to markers, you can use the Select List Manager to select all the markers on ground and then
translate and rotate the ground entities with the rest of your model.
Learn about Defining a New Ground Part.

Local Coordinate Systems

As you create parts, Adams/View assigns a coordinate system to each part, known as its local coordinate
system. A part’s local coordinate system moves with the part and its original position defaults to that of
the global coordinate system.
 Building Models 3
Parts

The local coordinate system is a convenient way to define the position and location of objects.
Adams/View also returns Simulation results, such as the position of a part, as the displacement of a part’s
local coordinate system with respect to the global coordinate system. It returns object results, however,
as the displacement of a part’s center of mass relative to the global coordinate system.

Degrees of Freedom
Each rigid body that you create can move within all Degrees of freedom; a point mass can move within
three translational degrees of freedom. You can constrain the movement of parts by:
• Adding them to the ground part, which means they are fixed to the ground and cannot move in
any direction. Each time you create geometry, Adams/View gives you the option to add it to
ground, create a new part, or add it to an existing part.
• Adding constraints, such as joints, to define how the parts are attached and how they move
relative to each other.

Naming Conventions
As you create parts, Adams/View automatically generates names for them based on their type and the
number of objects of that type in your model. For example, when you create a point mass, Adams/View
names it POINT_MASS_1. For all rigid bodies, except points and coordinate system markers,
Adams/View uses the name PART regardless of the type of geometry. For example, if you create a box,
Adams/View names it PART_1. When you create a second box, Adams/View names it PART_2, and so
on. You can rename your parts. Learn about Renaming Objects Through Menu Commands.

Rigid Bodies
The most common type of part in your model is a Rigid body. Adams/View provides a library of geometry
that you can use to create rigid bodies. A part can be made up of many different geometric objects. There
are two types of geometry that you can use to create rigid bodies.
• Construction geometry
• Solid geometry

Each time you create geometry, you can select to do one of the following:
• Create a new part containing the geometry.
• Add the geometry to an existing part.
• Add the geometry to ground. You add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving around
a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground. (You can also fix
parts temporarily to ground using a fixed joint.
In addition, you specify the location of the geometry in space. You can select to define the location of the
geometry:
4 Adams/View
Parts

• Graphically, by picking locations on the screen or by selecting an object on the screen that is at
the desired location.
• Precisely, by entering coordinate locations.

Learn more techniques for creating and placing objects.

Also See Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack to learn more about creating rigid body geometry.

Modeling Two-Dimensional Body Using Planar Option

Adams/Solver (C++) only
After you create a rigid body, you can identify it as planar (as having only three degrees of freedom
(DOF)) instead of creating a planar joint (see Planar Joint Tool). The three DOFs are global x and y
translations and a rotation about the global z-axis. You can think of the body as a regular three-
dimensional body with a built-in planar joint. Unlike a body and a planar joint pair, however, which
combines to add 18 equations to an index-3 dynamic analysis in Adams/Solver, the planar body only adds
six equations.
Example of using the planar option.

Note: • Using planar parts does not limit your use of three-dimensional contacts. If you can
simplify your contacts to two-dimensional representations, however, you will usually
realize speed improvements.
• A planar body is implicitly constrained to move in a plane at a fixed global value of z.
Any force applied to the planar part in the global z direction is discarded. The same
applies to torques about the global x- and y-axes. It is not possible to measure the
reaction forces required to constrain the planar part to stay in plane. If such forces are
desired, you must subsitute the equivalent part and planar joint combination.

To set a part as planar:

1. Create the three-dimensional rigid body.
2. Display the Modify Body dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
3. Set Category to Name and Position.
4. At the bottom of the dialog box, select Planar.
5. From the option menu that appears, select the plane in which the planar part will move. The
default is for the planar part to move in the global xy plane.
6. Select OK.
 Building Models 5
Parts

Parameterization
As you create rigid bodies in your model, you can define them so that the location or orientation of one
object affects the location or orientation of another body. This is called parameterizing your model.
Parameterizing your model simplifies changes to your model because it helps you automatically size,
relocate, and orient objects. For example, if you parameterize the geometry of two links to the location
of a point, when you move the point, the link geometry changes accordingly, as shown in the figure
below.
Example of Parameterizing Locations

The ways in which you can build parameterization into your model while creating rigid bodies include
the following:
• Attach objects to points so that when you change the location of the points, the body locations
and orientations update accordingly.
As you create a point, Adams/View gives you the option to attach other nearby objects to the
point. The help that explain how to create points also explain how to attach objects to them.
• Define design variables to represent values of your rigid body geometry, such as the length or
width of a link. You can create design variables for any values you specify for a rigid body.
Design variables are needed when you run tests on your model, such as design studies. Learn
about Using Design Variables.
• Create expressions that calculate the values of your rigid bodies, such as the length or width of a
box. You can specify expressions for any values you specify for a rigid body geometry. For more
information on creating expressions, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.
You can also parameterize your model after you build it. For more information on parameterization, see
Improving Your Model Designs

Before You Begin

Before you begin creating the parts of your model, you might want to take some time to set up your
modeling environment and learn some drawing and placement techniques. To help you place parts
accurately, do the following:
6 Adams/View
Parts

• Turn on the Working grid so that the points snap to a grid. In addition, Adams/View draws objects
parallel to the current working grid so by displaying it you can better see how your objects are
being drawn. Learn about Setting Up the Working Grid.
• Display the Coordinate window so that you can view the coordinate values as you place points.
Learn about Working with the Coordinate Window.
• Be sure to set the current units to those required for your model. Learn about Setting Default
Coordinate System.
• Review the different tools for drawing and placing objects in Tools and Techniques.
 Building Models 7
Tools and Techniques

Tools and Techniques

There are several techniques in Adams/View that can help you create objects with precision and speed.

Turning Selection Highlighting On and Off

Adams/View provides a Dynamic Model Navigator that highlights entire objects or edges, faces, and
points on those objects so you can easily select, place, or align an object that you are creating or a rotate
a view.
The Model Navigator highlights objects and displays their names as you move the cursor over them
within the main window. For example, when you create a marker, the Model Navigator highlights edges,
faces, and points you might want to use to orient the axes of the coordinate system. In addition, if you are
adding a point or joint to a part, the Model Navigator highlights the different parts in your model to which
you can add the point or joint. The figure below shows the the Model Navigator highlighting line
geometry.

The Model Navigator only highlights those objects that are appropriate for the operation you are
currently performing. For example, when you are aligning the faces of two parts, the Model Navigator
only highlights faces. It does not highlight edges or points. In addition, if you are chaining together wire
geometry, the Model Navigator only highlights wire geometry.
Finally, when you are defining a direction, the Model Navigator lets you select points, edges, or faces.
When you select an edge or face, the Model Navigator then lets you select the direction along the object
that you want to define since edges and faces don't provide unique direction.
To improve performance you can turn off the Model Navigator.

To turn off the Dynamic Model Navigator:

• During a selection operation, press the Ctrl key.
8 Adams/View
Tools and Techniques

Setting Snapping to Objects

As you build your model through the graphical interface, Adams/View automatically snaps the object
that you are creating to surrounding geometric objects. This can help you quickly align parts or draw
objects that touch other objects.

To turn off object snapping:

• As you create an object, press the Ctrl key.

Note: If the Working grid is on, when you draw, move, resize, or reshape geometry, the geometry
automatically snaps to the grid points. Learn about turning on and off the working grid.

Entering Precise Location Coordinates

As you create an object, such as a design point or a force, Adams/View often asks you to select the
position of the object. You can do this graphically by clicking the mouse button when the cursor is in the
screen or you can enter location coordinates to precisely set its location. You can enter the location
relative to the origin of the working grid, the global coordinate system, or any other object on the screen.

To enter location coordinates:

1. When Adams/View asks you for a location, right-click.
The LocationEvent dialog box appears as shown below. The current coordinates of the cursor
appear in the upper box.

2. In the upper box, enter the coordinates at which to place the object.
3. Select the element (Working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object) to which the
coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to the working grid.
4. In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only need to enter an
object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an object.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
5. Select Apply.
 Building Models 9
Tools and Techniques

Selecting from a List of Objects

When you perform a modeling operation, such as set an object's appearance or specify a force direction,
and you need to select an object from the screen, you can display a list of all objects in the area
surrounding the cursor and then select the desired object from the list. Note that this only works during
a modeling operation. The objects include geometric objects, such as object faces, vertices, and more.

To display a list of all objects in an area of the screen:

1. Right-click the area of the screen containing the desired object.
A selection box of all the objects in the area appears.
2. Highlight the desired object from the list and select OK.
3. As you highlight the desired object in the list, Adams/View also highlights the object on the
screen. To see what objects the names in the list represent, scroll through the list to highlight the
objects.
10 Adams/View
Orientation Methods

Orientation Methods

Orientation
Orientation of rigid or flexible body using three rotation angles. Adams/View orients the body starting
from the initial coordinate system and applying three successive rotations.
Depending on the convention you select, the rotations occur about space-fixed or body-fixed axes in any
combination of the x, y, and z axes. By default, you supply body 313 (body-fixed z, x, z) angles.
Adams/View applies your orientation angles with respect to the coordinate system in the Orientation
Relative To or Relative To text box.

Along Axis Orientation

Orientation of a rigid or flexible body by directing one of its axes. Adams/View assigns an arbitrary
rotation about the axis.
Two points are needed to define an axis but you can enter either one or two points to direct the axis. If
you enter two points, the axis points from the first location to the second. If you enter one point,
Adams/View uses the location you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the new
location as the second point.

Along Axis Orientation

Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system you identify in the Location
Relative To or Relative To text box.
Note that this does not completely dictate the orientation of the coordinate system. Adams/View positions
the coordinate system with an arbitrary rotation about the axis. If you must completely control the
coordinate system orientation, select Orientation or In Plane Orientation.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system. You can use the DEFAULTS
ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change this convention.
For example, selecting either X_AXIS_XY_PLANE or X_AXIS_XZ_PLANE directs the x-axis. The
plane-convention setting does not affect this parameter.
You can also direct the axis graphically using the marker’s position handle. Simply point the appropriate
axis on the marker in the desired direction.
 Building Models 11
Orientation Methods

In Plane Oriention
Orientation of the rigid or flexible body by directing one of the axes and locating one of the coordinate
planes.
In Plane Orientation

To define an axis and a plane, you need three points. You can enter either two or three locations, however.
If you enter three locations, the axis points from the first location to the second and the plane is parallel
to the plane defined by the three locations. If you enter only two locations, Adams/View uses the location
you specified in the Location text box as the first point and the other two locations as the second and third
points.
Adams/View applies the location coordinates in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box.
By default, you direct the z-axis of the coordinate system marker and locate the zx plane. You can use
the DEFAULTS ORIENT_AXIS_AND_PLANE AXIS_AND_PLANE_SETTING command to change
this convention. For example, selecting X_AXIS_XY_PLANE directs the x-axis and orients the xy
plane.
12 Adams/View
Orientation Methods
Construction Geometry
You can create several types of Construction geometry. You draw construction geometry normal to the
screen or the working grid, if you turned it on.

Creating Points
To create a point:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Point Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the point added to ground or to another part in your model.
• Whether you want to attach nearby objects to the point. For information on attaching
objects, see Parameterization.
3. If you selected to add the point to another part in your model, select the part.
4. Place the cursor where you want the point to be located and click the left mouse button.

Tip: If you want to place the point at the location of another object, as you create the point, right-
click near the object. Adams/View displays a list of objects near the cursor. Select the
object at whose location you want to place the point. Adams/View creates the point at that
location.

If you want to specify precise coordinates, right-click away from the object. A dialog box
for entering the location of the point appears. For information on using the dialog box, see
Entering Precise Location Coordinates.

Creating Markers
To create a marker:
1. From the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack, select the Marker Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• Whether you want the marker added to: (a) Ground (b) Another part in your model (including
a flexible body); or (c) Curve (only available with Adams/Solver (C++)) (Learn about
switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.)
• How you want to orient the marker. Set Orientation to the desired orientation method. When
adding a marker to a curve, the orientation is prescribed implicitly.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you selected to add the marker to a part, select the part to which you want to add the marker.
• If you selected to add the marker to a curve, select the spline curve onto which you want to
add the marker (splines and data-element curves are all considered curves).
2 Adams/View
Construction Geometry

4. Place the cursor where you want the marker to be located and click.
5. If you selected to orient the marker to anything other than the global or view coordinate system,
select the directions along which you want to align the marker’s axes. Do this for each axis that
you selected to specify.
Adams/View draws the marker, aligning its axes as specified.

Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align
One Axis, and then follow the prompts:

1. Select the object to align (the first marker)

2. Select the axis on object to align (z-axis on first marker)
3. Select the direction for the axis:
• Select the center of the first marker
• Select the center of the second marker

Creating Lines and Polylines

To draw a single line:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Polyline Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Set the type of line to be drawn to One Line.
• If desired, set the length and angle of the line.
3. Position the cursor where you want the line to begin, and click the left mouse button.
4. Move the cursor in the direction you want to draw the line.
5. When the line is the desired length and orientation, click again to end the line.

To draw an open or closed polyline:

1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Polyline Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Set the type of line to be drawn to Polyline.
• If desired, set the length of the line segments.
3. Select whether you want a closed polyline (polygon) by selecting Closed.
4. Position the cursor where you want the polyline to begin, and click the left mouse button.
 3
Construction Geometry

5. To create the first line segment, drag the cursor and click to select its endpoint.
6. To add line segments to the polyline, continue dragging the cursor and clicking.
7. To stop drawing and create the open or closed polyline, right-click. If you selected to create a
closed polyline, Adams/View automatically draws a line segment between the last and first points
to close the polyline. Note that clicking the right mouse button does not create another point.

Tip: While creating the polyline, you can remove the last line segment that you created by
clicking its endpoint. You can continue removing line segments in the reverse order that
you created them.

Creating Arcs and Circles

To draw an arc:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Arc Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams/View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the arc.
• Specify the starting and ending angles of the arc. The default is to create a 90-degree arc
from a starting angle of 0 degrees.
3. Click where you want the center of the arc and then drag the mouse to define the radius of the arc
and the orientation of the x-axis. Adams/View displays a line on the screen to indicate the x-axis.
If you specified the radius of the arc in the settings container, Adams/View maintains that radius
regardless of how you drag the mouse.
4. When the radius is the desired size, click.

To draw a circle:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Arc Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part. By
default, Adams/View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the circle.
• Select Circle.
3. Click where you want the center of the circle and then drag the mouse to define the radius of the
circle. If you specified the radius of the circle in the settings container, Adams/View maintains
that radius regardless of how you drag the mouse.
4. When the radius is the desired size, click.
4 Adams/View
Construction Geometry

Creating Splines
To create a spline by selecting points on the screen:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Spline Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Select whether you want the spline to be closed or open.
3. Set Create by Picking to Curve or Edge.
4. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the spline, and click.
5. Click the locations where you want the spline to pass through. You must specify at least eight
locations for a closed spline and four locations for an open spline.
6. To stop drawing the spline, right-click.

Tip: If you make a mistake, click the last location you defined. You can continue removing
locations by clicking on each location in the reverse order that you defined them.

To create a spline by selecting an existing curve or edge:

1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Spline Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Select whether you want the spline to be closed or open.
3. Set Create by Picking to Curve or Edge.
4. In the # Points text box, set how many points you want used to define the curve or edge or clear
the selection of Spread Points and let Adams/View calculate the number of points needed.
5. Select the curve.
 5
Creating Solid Geometry

Creating Solid Geometry

You can create several types of Solid geometry. In addition, you can combine solid geometry into more
complex geometry or modify the geometry by adding features, such as fillets or chamfers.

Creating a Box
To create a box:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Box Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of length, height, or depth dimensions of the box.
3. Place the cursor where you want a corner of the box and click and hold down the left mouse
button.
4. Drag the mouse to define the size of the box. If you specified any of the length, height, or depth
dimensions of the box in the settings container, Adams/View maintains those dimensions
regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. Release the mouse button when the box is the desired size.

Creating Two-Dimensional Plane

To create a plane:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Plane Tool .
2. In the settings container, specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry
or add the geometry to an existing part or ground.
3. Place the cursor where you want a corner of the box and click and hold down the left mouse
button.
4. Drag the mouse to define the size of the box.
5. Release the mouse button when the box is the desired size.

Creating a Cylinder
To create a cylinder:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cylinder Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams/View creates a new part.
6 Adams/View
Creating Solid Geometry

• If desired, set the length or radius dimensions of the cylinder in the settings container.
3. Click and hold down the mouse where you want to begin drawing the cylinder.
4. Drag the mouse to size the cylinder. If you specified any of the length and radius dimensions of
the cylinder in the settings container, Adams/View maintains those dimensions regardless of how
you drag the mouse.
5. When the cylinder is the desired size, click.

Creating a Sphere
To create a sphere:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Sphere Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams/View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the radius of the sphere.
3. Click where you want the center of the sphere.
4. Drag the mouse to size the sphere. If you specified a radius dimension for the sphere in the settings
container, Adams/View maintains that dimension regardless of how you drag the mouse.
5. When the sphere is the desired size, click.

Creating a Frustum
To create a frustum:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Frustum Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set the length or radii of the frustum.
3. Click where you want to begin drawing the frustum.
4. Drag the mouse to size the frustum. If you specified the length or radii of the frustum in the
settings container, Adams/View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you drag the
mouse.
5. When the frustum is the desired size, click.
 7
Creating Solid Geometry

Creating a Torus
To create a torus:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Torus Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground. By default, Adams/View creates a new part.
• If desired, set the minor and major radii of the torus.
3. Place the cursor where you want the center of the torus and click.
4. Drag the mouse to define the radius of the torus. If you specified the radii of the torus in the
settings container, Adams/View maintains those dimensions regardless of how you drag the
mouse.
5. When the torus is the desired size, click.

Creating a Link
To create a link:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Link Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set any of the length, width, or depth dimensions of the link.
3. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the link, and click.
4. Drag the mouse until the link is the desired size and then release the mouse button. If you specified
the length, width, and depth of the link in the settings container, Adams/View maintains those
dimensions regardless of how you drag the mouse.

Creating a Plate
To create a plate:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Plate Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• If desired, set the thickness or radius of the corners of the plate.
3. Place the cursor where you want the first corner of the plate and click the left mouse button.
4. Click at each corner of the plate. You must specify at least three locations.
8 Adams/View
Creating Solid Geometry

5. Continue selecting locations or right-click to close the plate.

Note: If the distance between any two adjacent points is less than two times the radius of the
corner, Adams/View cannot create the plate.

Creating an Extrusion
To create an extrusion based on an existing curve profile:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Extrusion Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Set Create profile by to Curve.
• If desired, set the length (depth) of the extrusion.
• Specify the direction you want the profile to be extruded from the current Working grid.
Learn about directions.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
3. Select the curve profile.

To create an extrusion based on selected points:

1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Extrusion Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the geometry or add the
geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Set Create profile by to Points.
• Specify whether or not you want to create a closed extrusion.
• If desired, set the length of the extrusion.
• Specify the direction you want the profile to be extruded from the current Working grid.
Learn about directions.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
3. Place the cursor where you want to begin drawing the profile of the extrusion and click.
4. Click at each vertex in the profile; then right-click to finish drawing the profile.
Learn to extrude existing construction geometry along a path.
 9
Creating Solid Geometry

Creating a Revolution
To create a revolution by selecting points to define the profile:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Revolution Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part or
ground.
• Set Create by Picking to Points.
• Specify whether or not you want to create a closed revolution.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
3. Click at two points that define the axis about which Adams/View revolves the profile.
4. Click at the location of each vertex in the profile; then right-click to finish drawing the profile.

Tip: Be sure to draw the profile so that it does not intersect the line you drew to define
the axis of revolution.

To create a revolution by selecting a profile curve:

1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Revolution Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• Specify whether you want to create a new part or add the geometry to an existing part or
ground.
• Set Create by Picking to Curve.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the analytical method. Clear to use the non-
analytical method.
3. Click two points that define the axis about which Adams/View revolves the profile.
4. Select construction geometry defining the profile curve.
10 Adams/View
Creating Complex Geometry

Creating Complex Geometry

Adams/View provides you with many ways in which you can take simple geometry and create complex
geometry from it. You can create solid geometry that has mass from wire geometry or create complex,
open geometry that has no mass.

Chaining Wire Geometry

To chain wire Construction geometry together:
1. If necessary, create the wire geometry.
2. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Chain Tool .
3. Click each piece of the wire geometry to be chained. As you move the cursor around the main
window, Adams/View highlights those objects in your model that can be chained.
4. After selecting the geometry to be chained, right-click to create the chained geometry.

Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path

You can add thickness to Construction geometry by extruding it to create three-dimensional geometry.
You can extrude lines, polylines, polygons, and wire geometry that you have chained together. You
cannot extrude points. If the geometry you extrude is closed, Adams/View creates solid geometry that
has mass. Adams/View centers the extruded geometry about the z-axis of the view screen or working
grid, if it is turned on.
When you extrude geometry, you select the geometry that you want to extrude, called the profile
geometry, and then you select the wire geometry that defines the path along which you want to extrude
the profile. See an Example of Extrusion.
The geometry you extrude can be a new part or belong to another part, which you specify when you
extrude the geometry.

Extrusion Limits
You can only select to extrude a profile whose extrusion would have the following properties:
• Same dimensions. For example, you cannot extrude a profile that would have mixed dimensions.
See an Example of Mixed Dimensions.
• Edge or face shared by only one face. See an Example of Objects with Shared edges and faces.
• No intersecting lines.

Objects with these properties are called manifold. If the object extruded did not have these properties, it
would be non-manifold.
If the result of an extrusion is an object that is non-manifold, you receive the following error message
when you try to create the extrusion:
 11
Creating Complex Geometry

! ERROR: Creation of the feature failed

! ERROR: The body created is non-manifold.
Remake the profile so that it does not result in a non-manifold
extrusion.

To extrude construction geometry:

1. If necessary, create the construction geometry.
2. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Extrusion Tool .
3. In the settings container, do the following (you can ignore all other settings):
• Specify whether you want to create a new part composed of the extruded geometry or add
the geometry to an existing part or ground.
• Select Along Path.
• Select Analytical to create the revolution using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the Non-
analytical Method.
4. Select the construction geometry to be extruded.
5. Select the construction geometry defining the path along which you want to extrude the geometry.
12 Adams/View
Combining Geometry

Combining Geometry
Once you have created individual parts of Solid geometry, you can combine them into one part to create
complex, solid geometry, referred to as constructive, solid geometry or CSG. Adams/View creates the
solid geometry using Boolean operations, such as union and intersection.

Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids

To create a part from the intersection of two overlapping solids:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Intersect Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be combined. As you move the cursor, Adams/View highlights those
objects that can be combined. The second part you select is combined into the first part.

Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids

To create a part from the union of two solids:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Unite Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be combined. As you move the cursor, Adams/View highlights those
objects that can be combined. The second part you select is combined into the first part.

Cutting a Solid
To create a part from the difference of two solids:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette, select the Cut Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be cut. As you move the cursor, Adams/View highlights those objects
that can be cut. The second part you select is cut from the first part.

Splitting a Solid
To split a complex solid:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Split Tool .
2. Select the solid geometry to be split. Adams/View highlights those objects in your model that can
be split.
 13
Adding Features to Geometry

Adding Features to Geometry

You can add features to the solid geometry that you create, including chamfering the edges of the
geometry, adding holes and bosses, and hollowing out solids.

Chamfering and Filleting Objects

To create a chamfered or fillet edge:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select either of the following tools:
• To create a chamfered edge or corner, select the Chamfer Tool .
• To create a fillet edge or corner, select the Fillet Tool .
2. In the settings container, do one of the following:
• If desired, for chamfers, specify the width of the bevel.
• If desired, for fillets, specify the radius. To create a variable fillet, also select End Radius and
enter the end radius. Adams/View uses the value you enter for radius as the starting radius of
the variable fillet.
3. Select the edges or vertices to be chamfered or filleted. The edges and vertices must be on the
same rigid body.
4. Right-click.

Creating a Hole or Boss

To create a hole or boss:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select either of the following tools:
• To create a hole, select the Hole Tool .
• To create a knob, select the Boss Tool .
2. In the settings container, do one of the following:
• If desired, forholes, specify the radius and depth of the hole. You cannot specify the radius and
depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into two separate geometries.
• If desired, for bosses, specify the radius and height.
3. Select the face of the body on which you want to create the hole or boss.
4. Click the location where you want to center the hole or boss.

Tip: To create a hole or boss at a specific location, create a temporary marker at the desired
location for the hole or boss, and select it in Step 4.
14 Adams/View
Adding Features to Geometry

Hollowing Out a Solid

To hollow an object:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Hollow Tool .
2. In the settings container, do the following:
• If desired, specify the thickness of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.
• If you want to add the shell to the outside of the object, clear the Inside check box.
3. Select the solid body that you want to hollow.
4. Select the faces of the body that you want to hollow. Adams/View highlights those faces that can
be selected.
5. Click the right mouse button to hollow the selected faces.

Merging Geometry
To merge two rigid body geometry:
1. From the Geometric Modeling palette or tool stack, select the Merge Tool .
2. Select the geometry to be merged. Adams/View highlights those objects in your model that can
be merged as you move the cursor around the modeling window. The second geometry that you
select is combined into the first.
Adams/View combines the selected geometry and deletes the second.
Discrete Flexible Links
A discrete flexible link consists of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements. You
indicate the following and Adams/View creates the appropriate parts, geometry, forces, and constraints
at the endpoints:
• Endpoints of the link
• Number of parts and the material type
• Properties of the beam
• Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)

The following figure shows a flexible link composed of rigid bodies whose cross-section geometry is
rectangular.

For more information on beam force elements, see Adding a Massless Beam. Also note the caution about
the asymmetry of beams explained in that section.
Learn more:
• Types of Flexible Link Geometry
• Positioning Flexible Links
• About Number of Beams Created
• Creating Flexible Links
• Modifying Flexible Links
2 Adams/View
Discrete Flexible Links

Types of Flexible Link Geometry

To make it convenient to create discrete flexible links, Adams/View provides a set of geometry you can
select for the cross-section of the link. If the pre-defined geometry does not meet your needs, you can
also define your own cross-section based on area and inertia properties that you enter. If you enter area
and inertia properties yourself, Adams/View creates short angular geometry to represent the link.
The pre-defined cross-section geometry that you can select includes:
• Solid rectangular
• Solid circular
• Hollow rectangular
• Hollow circular
• I-beam

Adams/View uses the cross-section geometry to calculate the following:

• Area and area moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz) for the beams.
• Mass, mass moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz), and center-of-mass Markers for the rigid bodies.

Note that Adams/View does not directly use the geometry to account for stress on the beam. Therefore,
any stress values are based on the area and area moments.

Positioning Flexible Links

You use two or three Markers to define the locations and orientation of a discrete flexible link: Markers 1
and 2 (attachment markers) and an orientation marker, which is required for only certain types of cross-
section geometry. See a Picture for Orientation Marker.
As you can see from the examples, the attachment markers (Markers 1 and 2) define the total length of
the flexible link and the x (longitudinal) direction of the associated beam forces. Adams/View creates
new markers on top of Markers 1 and 2, as well as at the centers-of-mass of the geometry associated with
the discrete flexible link. For the resulting beams, the vector from Marker 1 to Marker 2 defines the x-
axis while the vector from Marker 1 to the orientation marker defines the xz-plane. The global axes are
not relevant to the orientation of the beam forces unless you erroneously specify three colinear markers.
The orientation marker works with the two attachment markers (Markers 1 and 2) to define a plane. The
x-axis of the beam markers will be aligned along the line formed between the attachment markers. The
beam markers will be oriented such that their z-axes are in the plane formed by the two attachment
markers and the orientation marker. If the orientation marker is colinear with the two attachment markers,
the plane formed by those three points is indeterminate. Adams/View will not attempt to adjust the
orientation marker by adding unit vectors until a noncolinear solution is found. The orientation marker
itself is not changed.
 3
Discrete Flexible Links

About Number of Beams Created

The following table shows how the number of beams that get created for your flexible link depends on
the number of segments and the types of endpoint attachments.

Types of endpoint attachments: Number of beams created:

Free-Free Number of segments - 1
Rigid-Rigid Number of segments - 1
Free-Rigid or Rigid-Free Number of segments - 1
Flexible-Free or Free-Flexible Number of segments
Flexible-Rigid or Rigid-Flexible Number of segments
Flexible-Flexible Number of segments + 1

For links with axisymmetric cross-sections, such as solid and hollow circular sections, the orientation of
the cross section is not critical and so Adams/View does not require the use of an orientation marker.

Creating a Flexible Link

To create a flexible link:
1. From the Build menu, point to Flexible Bodies, and then select Discrete Flexible Link.
The Discrete Flexible Link dialog box appears.
2. Define the overall properties of the flexible link as explained in the table below.

To specify: Do the following:

Name for parts, In the Name text box, enter a text string of alphanumeric characters. Adams/View
constraints, prepends the text string you specify to the name of each object it creates. For
forces, and example, if you specify the string LINK, the first rigid body is LINK_1, the first
Markers marker is LINK_MARKER_1, and so on.
Type of material In the Material text box, enter the type of material to be used for the rigid bodies
and beam properties.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Learn about Setting Up Material Types.

Number of Enter the number of rigid bodies that you want in the link.
segments
4 Adams/View
Discrete Flexible Links

To specify: Do the following:

Damping ratio In the Damping Ratio text box, enter the ratio of viscous damping to stiffness for
the beam forces.
Color In the Color text box, enter the color to be used for the geometry in the flexible link.

3. Define the length of the link and its flexibility at its ends as explained in the table below.

To specify: Do the following:

Ends of the link Enter the markers that define the endpoints of the link in the Marker 1 and
Marker 2 text boxes. Marker 1 defines the start of the link and Marker 2
defines the end of the link. Marker 1 and Marker 2 are also used to calculate
the orientation of the link. Learn more about Positioning Flexible Links.
Flexibility at the Select how to define the ends of the link from the Attachment pull-down menus.
ends of the link You can select the following for each end of the link:

• free - The end is unconnected.

• rigid - A fixed joint is created between the parent of Marker 1 and the
first part of the discrete flexible link or between the parent of Marker 2
and the last part of the discrete flexible link.
• flexible - The link has discrete flexibility all the way to the endpoint. To
create this flexibility, Adams/View creates an additional beam force
between the first or last segment of the link and the parent part of
Marker 1 or Marker 2. The length of the beam is one half of the segment
length.

4. Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the area and area moments
of inertia of the flexible link, and then select OK.
• Solid Rectangle
• Solid Circle
• Hollow Rectangle
• Hollow Circle
• I-Beam
• Properties

Defining Link Cross Section

Solid Rectangle
In the following text boxes, enter:
 5
Discrete Flexible Links

• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of link. For information on
setting the orientation of the geometry, see Positioning Flexible Links.
• Base - The width of the rectangle (dimension in local y direction).
• Height - The height of the rectangle (dimension in local z direction).

Solid Circle
• Diameter - Diameter of the circular cross-section.

Hollow Rectangle
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. See Positioning
Flexible Links on setting the orientation of the geometry.
• Base - The outer width of the rectangular shell.
• Height - The height of the outer rectangular shell.
• Thickness - Uniform width of the wall of the rectangular shell.
6 Adams/View
Discrete Flexible Links

Hollow Circle
• Diameter - Outer diameter of the circular shell.
• Thickness - Width of the wall of the circular shell.

I-Beam
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation of the link. See Positioning Flexible
Links for information on setting the orientation of the geometry.
• Base - Enter the width of the I-beam.
• Height - Enter the height of I-beam.
• Flange - Enter the width of the flange of the I-beam.
• Web - Enter the width of the web of the beam.

Properties
Enter values in the following text boxes to create your own custom-shaped cross-section:
• Orient Marker - The marker that defines the orientation (z-axis) of the link. For information on
setting the orientation of the link, see Positioning Flexible Links.
• X Section Area - Specify the uniform area of the beam cross section. The centroidal axis must
be orthogonal to this cross section.
• Link Mass - Enter the total mass of all the link segments combined.
• Link Segment Inertias - Specify the area moments of inertia for the link.
• Ixx - Enter the torsional constant, also referred to as torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness
coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is
identical to the polar moment of inertia J = (r4/2). For thin-walled sections, open sections, and
noncircular sections, consult a handbook.
 7
Discrete Flexible Links

• Iyy, Izz - Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam-cross sectional
areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moments of area about a given
axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz =
(r4/4). For thin-walled sections, open sections, and noncircular sections, consult a handbook.

Note: The example of an elliptical cross-section below is only one example of many cross-
sections that you can create using the Properties option.

Modifying Flexible Links

Once you create a discrete flexible link, you must modify each object separately, such as each beam and
Rigid body. Therefore, you might find it easier to delete the beam and create it again instead of modifying
each object individually.
If you find that link does not bend enough, investigate your cross-section and material properties and
possibly increase the number of segments in the link.
8 Adams/View
Point Masses

Point Masses
Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs. The following figure shows a model of a net
with point masses.

To create or modify a point mass:

1. From the Build menu, point to Point Mass, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a point mass to modify.
The Create/Modify Point Mass dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
3. If you are creating a point mass, enter a name for the point mass.
4. Set the mass of the point mass in the dialog box and adjust its location as desired. By default,
Adams/View places the point mass in the center of the main window with a mass of 1 in current
units.
5. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated
with the point mass. Learn about Comments.
6. Select OK.
 9
Creating Trace Spline

Creating Trace Spline

Traces follow the motion of a point or part (circle or cylinder) as it moves relative to a second part.
You can create two- or three-dimensional splines from traces. A trace that follows a point creates a three-
dimensional spline. The point can move in any direction relative to the part on which the trace was
created.
A trace that follows a circle or cylinder creates a two-dimensional spline. Adams/View creates the curve
in the xy plane of the base marker (the marker on the part on which the trace was created). Adams/View
assumes the circle is parallel to the plane or the cylinder is perpendicular to the plane, and that the motion
is in this plane.
When you create the trace, Adams/View creates a base marker that is oriented properly with respect to
the circle or cylinder you selected. Therefore, the curve will be in the plane of the circle in its initial
position. You have to make sure that the motion is in the plane of the circle or you will get unexpected
results. Therefore, be sure to think of the circle trace as occurring in the plane of the circle. It can be any
plane, not necessarily the global xy plane.

Example of Creating Spline Geometry

For example, if you want to create a surface on a cam that makes a follower part move in a particular way
relative to each other, you can create the necessary surface geometry by following the movement of the
two parts with a trace that Adams/View turns into spline geometry.
You start creating the spline geometry by first making the follower and cam move the way you want them
to relative to each other. You place a motion on the cam joint that rotates the cam once per second. Next,
you place a motion on the follower joint that moves it up and down once each second.
10 Adams/View
Creating Trace Spline

After simulating the motion, you then request Adams/View to trace the motion of the follower circle
relative to the cam circle and create spline geometry based on that geometry. The following figure shows
the cam and follower geometry and the trace that Adams/View creates.

To create a spline from a trace:

1. Set up your model so that it creates the desired motion after which you want the spline to be
modeled.
2. Run a simulation of your model as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.
3. Reset the simulation by selecting the Simulation Reset tool from either the Simulation
container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation palette. See Interactive Simulation Palette and
Container dialog box help.
4. From the Review menu, select Create Trace Spline.
5. Select a point, marker, circle, or cylinder with which to trace, and then select the part on which to
trace.
6. You can trace on ground or any other part. For a point trace, select anywhere on the point or part.
For a circle or cylinder, however, be careful where you select because where you select on the
circle and the part determines the resulting trace geometry. There are usually two possible traces,
one on each side of the circle or cylinder.
 11
Creating Trace Spline

7. Replay the simulation to see the selected object follow the trace curve.

Tip: The following are some tips on creating splines from traces:

• When you trace an object, the point/circle should move in a smooth, even path or
the trace ends up looking like scribbles on the screen.
• If the path is closed, you should simulate for one cycle only.
• If the trace is uneven or complex, you can get a strange looking curve as a result.
As an alternative to the Create Trace Spline menu command, you can use the
Command Navigator to execute the command: geometry create curve
point_trace. It lets you create a polyline instead of a spline, which works better if
the trace is uneven or complex. In that case, the motion of the cam or slot is
transferred through the traced curve and gives the desired follower motion.
12 Adams/View
Creating Trace Spline
Overview of Constraints
Constraints define how parts (rigid bodies, Flexible bodies, or Point mass) are attached to one another and
how they are allowed to move relative to each other. Constraints restrict relative movement between parts
and represent idealized connections.

Types of Constraints
Adams/View provides a library of constraints including:
• Idealized joints
• Primitive joints
• Motions generators
• Higher-pair constraints

The following figure shows some of the different types of idealized joints that Adams/View supports.

Constraints and Degrees of Freedom

Degrees of freedom (DOF) are a measure of how parts can move relative to one another in a model. A
body free in space has six DOF in which it can move: three translational and three rotational. Each DOF
corresponds to at least one equation of motion. When you add a constraint, such as a revolute joint,
between two parts, you remove DOF between the parts, causing them to remain positioned with respect
2 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

to one another regardless of any motion or force in the model. Each constraint in Adams/View removes
different DOF.
For example, a revolute joint removes all three translational DOF and two of the rotational DOF between
two parts. If each part had a point on the joint that was on the centerline of the revolute pin, then the two
points would always remain coincident. They would only rotate with respect to one another about one
axis: the centerline of the revolute joint.
The total number of DOF in a model is equal to the difference between the number of allowed part
motions and the number of active constraints in the model. When you run a simulation of your model,
Adams/Solver calculates the number of DOF in your model as it determines the algebraic equations of
motion to be solved in your model. You can also calculate the DOF in your model before running a
simulation as explained in Verifying Your Model.
For a list of the DOF that the different constraints in Adams/View remove, see the following:
• DOF Removed by Idealized Joints
• DOF Removed by Primitive Joints
• DOF Removed by Higher-Pair Constraints
• DOF Removed by Motion

Connecting Constraints to Parts

Adams/View uses the convention that the first part that you select when you create a Constraint is the part
that moves relative to the second part that you select. For example, if you join a door and a door frame
with a Joint, the first part that you select is the door so that it moves relative to the door frame.
Adams/View always applies forces at the location of the constraint. For example, for a revolute joint,
Adams/View applies any forces at the center of the joint. For joints that allow translational movement,
such as a screw joint connecting a nut and bolt, the location of the joint changes over time as the first part
moves relative to the second part and, therefore, the locations of the forces change. For the nut and bolt,
as the nut moves along the bolt, the location of the joint changes and the reaction forces also change
relative to the bolt.
When you create many of the constraints in Adams/View, including most idealized joints, primitive
joints, and some types of motion, Adams/View provides you with shortcuts for specifying the parts that
the constraints are to connect or to which the motion is to be applied. As you create a constraint, you can:
• Let Adams/View connect the constraint to the parts nearest to the constraint location. If there is
only one part, Adams/View assumes that the second part is ground. Note that letting
Adams/View select the parts is only appropriate when two parts are located near one another and
when it does not matter which part Adams/View considers the first or second part.
There are some constraints, such as revolute, translational, and cylindrical, to which you can
apply motions. If you think that you will apply a joint motion, you should explicitly select the
two parts when creating the constraints.
 3
Overview of Constraints

There are other constraints, such as Hooke/universal, inline, and perpendicular, which are very
sensitive to which part is the first part and which is the second. When you create these
constraints, you should explicitly select the parts to be connected.
• Explicitly select the parts to be connected. The first part that you select moves relative to the
second part that you select.
• If you created your model in exploded view, which lets you create individual parts and then
assemble them together into a model, you can specify the parts to be connected by the constraint
and then select a different location for the constraint on each part. When you assemble the parts
into a model, Adams/View joins the parts together at the location on the first part that you
selected. Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.

Constraints and I and J Markers

When you create a Constraint, Adams/View creates Markers at the specified location on both parts.
Adams/View orients the markers in the direction of the axis along which the parts can move with respect
to each other. The marker on the first part is often called the I marker and the marker on the second part
is called the J marker.
When Adams/View creates a joint primitive, it creates an I marker on the first part and a J marker on the
second part. It connects the I marker on the first part to the J marker on the second part.
For more on the effects of I and J markers on the joint, see JOINT in the Adams/Solver online help.

Tips on Constraining Your Model

The following are some tips to help you constrain your model correctly.
• Build your model by adding constraints to a few parts and testing the constraint connections
frequently. By building your model, you can more easily pinpoint the cause of any simulation
problems.
• Be sure that you connect the right parts and that you correctly define which part should move
relative to another part.
Be sure that you connect the right parts and that you explicitly select which part is to move
relative to another part if the constraint allows translational motion.
• Be sure to orient the constraint correctly.
If you do not define constraint directions correctly, you might not remove DOF from the model
that you intended to and, in fact, you might remove DOF that you did not intend to.
For example, if you have a slider-crank model and you direct a translational joint between the
slider and ground so that it is out of the plane of desired motion, the model locks up immediately
when you run a simulation.
• Be sure to select the correct type of constraint.
4 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

Try to find only one constraint that removes all the DOF that you need to remove. If you define
more than one constraint between two parts, you get the union of the DOF that each constraint
removes, which may not be what you expected. For example, if you have two concentric,
cylindrical parts that you want to allow to rotate and translate with respect to each other, and you
use one translational and one revolute joint between the parts, you lock the parts together. They
lock together because the translational joint allows no relative rotational movement and the
revolute joint allows no relative translational movement. In this case, instead of using the two
joints, you should use a single cylindrical joint.
• Check the DOF in your system periodically.
Use the Verify command to check the DOF in your model to make sure you have the correct
number of parts and constraints. Learn about Verifying Your Model.
• Run a Kinematic simulation to test your model without forces.
If possible, run a kinematic simulation before performing a dynamic simulation. By running a
kinematic simulation, you can ensure that connections are correct before you add forces to your
model. You may have to add temporary constraints to your model to run a kinematic simulation.
• Remove redundant constraints from your model even if a simulation of your model runs
correctly. See More on Redundant Constraint Checking.

Working with Higher-Pair Constraints

Adams/View provides you with two types of higher-pair constraints: point curve and 2D curve curve.

Point-Curve Constraints
The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the
second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must
always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from
your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams/View creates a
marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction
relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.

When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the
center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
 5
Overview of Constraints

To create a point-curve constraint:

Before creating a point-curve constraint, read Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints.
1. From the Joint palette, select the Point-Curve Constraint Tool .
2. In the settings container, set whether or not you will be selecting an edge or curve:
• Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use
a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams/View.
3. Select a point on a part that will travel along a curve.
4. Select the curve or edge along which the point will travel. The curve can be closed or open. Note
that when you select a closed curve, Adams/View highlights only a portion of the curve.
Adams/View will use the entire curve.

To Modify Point-Curve Constraints

The following procedure changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a point-curve
constraint. See Point-Curve Constraint Tool. Learn about Working with Higher-Pair Constraints.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.

1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve dialog box as explained in
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams/Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.

For the option: Do the following:

Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape on which the point can move. You
can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about Using Curve
Elements in Your Model.
I Marker Name Point that moves along the curve.
6 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

For the option: Do the following:

J Floating Marker Name Enter a marker that is a floating marker. Adams/Solver positions the origin
of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the curve. It
orients the marker so that its x-axis is tangent to the curve at the contact
point, its y-axis points outward from the curve’s center of curvature at the
contact point, and its z-axis is along the binormal at the contact point.

Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams/Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The
curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
Displacement Ic/ Select either:
No Displacement Ic
• Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve. If
the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View uses a
point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you
specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker
you specify for Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
 7
Overview of Constraints

For the option: Do the following:

Velocity Ic/ Select either:
No Velocity Ic
• Velocity Ic - Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along the
curve. You specify the velocity in the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.

5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

For the option: Do the following:

Velocity Ic/ Select either:
No Velocity Ic
• Velocity Ic - Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along the
curve. You specify the velocity in the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
• No Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve is
specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part containing
the curve.

Curve-Curve Constraints
A curve-curve constraint restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with a second
curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where the point
8 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve constraint
removes two Degrees of freedom from your model.

An example of a curve-curve constraint is a valve lifter where a cam lifts a plate-like object. The point
of contact between the plate and the cam changes depending on the position and shape of the cam.
The two curves of the constraint, which you define by selecting edges in your model, must lie in the same
plane. You can initially select curves that are not in the same plane, but Adams/Solver moves the parts
during Simulation to ensure that the two curves are constrained to the same plane of motion with respect
to each other. Both curves can be open or closed.
The curves always maintain contact, even when the dynamics of the model might actually lift one curve
off the other. You can examine the constraint forces to determine if any lift-off should have occurred. If
your results require an accurate simulation of intermittent contact, you should model the contact forces
directly using a vector force.
The curve-curve constraint models only one contact. Therefore, if the curves have contact at more than
one point, you need to create a curve-curve constraint for each contact, each with a initial condition
displacement near the appropriate point. Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.

Note: Instead of defining a curve by selecting a curve on a part, you can also use a curve element
that you create to define the curve. To specify a curve element, you can create geometry for
the curve and select that geometry as you create the cam or modify the cam to reference
the curve element. Learn about Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements.

To Create a Curve-Curve Constraints

Before creating a curve-curve constraint, read Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints.
1. From the Joint palette or tool stack, select the 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool .
 9
Overview of Constraints

2. In the settings container, for each part, set whether or not you will be selecting an edge or curve:
• Curves - Splines, chains, and data element curves are all considered curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For example, you can use
a Parasolid object representing a cam that you imported into Adams/View.
3. Select a curve or edge that will travel along a second curve.
4. Select the curve along which the first curve will travel. The curve can be closed or open. Note that
when you select a closed curve, Adams/View highlights only a portion of the curve. Adams/View
will use the entire curve.

To Modify 2D Curve-Curve Constraints

The following procedure changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve
constraint. See 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.

1. Display the Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve as explained in Accessing Modify
Dialog Boxes.
2. Assign a unique ID number to it. Learn about Adams/Solver IDs.
3. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the cam that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the cam. Learn about Comments.
4. Set the basic properties as explained in the table below.

For the option: Do the following:

I Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve that moves along the second
curve (J curve). You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about
Curves.
J Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve along which the first curve
(I curve) moves. You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about
Curves.
I Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the first curve (I curve).
Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by the
curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve coordinates are,
therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference marker.
J Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the second curve (J curve).
Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by the
curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve coordinates are,
therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference marker.
10 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

For the option: Do the following:

I Floating Marker Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating marker
Name at the instantaneous point of contact on the first curve, which is also the global
position of the J floating marker on the second curve. Adams/View orients the
marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the instantaneous contact point, its
y-axis is along the instantaneous normal, and its z-axis is along the resultant
binormal.
J Floating Marker Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating marker
Name at the instantaneous point of contact on the second curve, which is also the
position of the I floating marker on the first curve. Adams/View orients the
marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the instantaneous contact point, its
y-axis is along the instantaneous normal, and its z-axis is along the resultant
binormal.

5. Set the initial conditions as explained in the table below, and then select OK. Learn about Higher-
Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.

For the option: Do the following:

I Displacement Ic/ Select either:
No I Displacement Ic
• I Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the first curve
(I curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View
uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default, you
specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the marker
you specify for I Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No I Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
J Displacement Ic/ Select either:
No J Displacement Ic
• J Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the second
curve (J curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve,
Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By
default, you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of
the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of the
marker you specify for J Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No J Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
 11
Overview of Constraints

For the option: Do the following:

I Velocity Ic/ Select either:
No I Velocity Ic
• I Velocity - Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the first
curve (I curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is initially
moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve.
• Positive if it is moving towards the end of the curve.
• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
J Velocity Ic or Select either:
No J Velocity Ic
• J Velocity - Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the second
curve (J curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is initially
moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the curve.
• Positive if it is moving toward the end of the curve.
• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
• No J Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
I Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the first curve (I curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
J Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact (displacement) on
the second curve (J curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve

Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints

The following are some tips for creating point-curve and 2D curve-curve constraints. Learn more about
these constraints with Point-Curve Constraint Tool and 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.
• Specify a curve with a large number of curve points.
When you select a curve, be sure that it contains a sufficiently large number of points to achieve
an acceptable fit.
12 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

• Use closed curves whenever possible.

It is generally easier to select a closed curve, if possible. Open curves represent modeling
difficulties when the point on the follower part approaches one of the end points of the open
curve.
• Define curves that cover the entire expected range of motion of the cam.
Adams/Solver stops a Simulation if the contact point moves off the end of an open curve.
Therefore, be sure that the curve you define covers the expected range of motion of the contact
point.
• Avoid defining an initial configuration with the initial point of contact near to one of the end
points of the curve.
• Avoid curve-on-curve constraints that have more than one contact point.
Adams/Solver requires that your model contain a unique contact point during simulation. If there
is more than one contact point, Adams/Solver may be unable to find the correct contact point or
may even jump from one contact point to the next. It also may have difficulties finding the
correct solution. One way to ensure that contact points are unique is to specify curve shapes that
are convex. The following figure shows two curves, the first is convex and the second is
nonconvex. Note that for a convex curve, any line segment connecting two arbitrary points on
the curve lies in the domain of the curve (it does not intersect the curve). The same is not true for
nonconvex curves.

• You can create more than one contact using the same curve.
• It is easy to over-constrain a model using the curve-to-curve constraint. For example, in a cam-
follower configuration, the cam should usually be rotating on a cylindrical joint, not a revolute
joint. If the follower is held by a translational joint and the cam by a cylindrical joint, the curve-
to-curve cam between the follower and cam prevents the cam from translating along the axis of
rotation, which is the axis of the cylindrical joint. A revolute joint would add a redundant
constraint in that direction.
 13
Overview of Constraints

Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions

The initial conditions that you can set include:
• Point-curve (See Point-Curve Constraint Tool)
The initial conditions for a point-curve constraint include:
• Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along the curve. You specify the velocity in
the coordinate system of the part containing the curve. Therefore, you specify the speed of
the I marker from the standpoint of an observer on the part containing the curve. Therefore,
if the curve, not the I marker, moves globally then the velocity of the I marker is still
nonzero.
• Initial point of contact on the curve. If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve,
Adams /View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specified. By default, you
specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part containing the curve.
If another coordinate system is more convenient, you can specify another initial conditions
coordinate system marker and enter the initial point in its coordinates.
If you supply an initial point, Adams/View assembles the model with the I marker at the
specified point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions to do so. If you do
not supply an initial point, Adams/View assumes the initial contact is at the point on the curve
closest to the I marker position. Adams/View may adjust that contact point to maintain other
part or constraint initial conditions.
• 2D Curve-Curve (See 2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool)
The initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve constraint include:
• Velocity with which the contact point on either or both curves is moving. You specify the
velocity in the coordinate system of the part containing the second curve. If you do not
supply an initial velocity, Adams/View assumes the initial velocity is zero, but may adjust
that velocity to maintain other part or constraint initial conditions.
• Initial point of contact on either or both curves. If the point you specify is not exactly on the
curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default,
you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of the part containing the
curve. If another coordinate system is more convenient, you can specify another initial
conditions coordinate system marker and enter the initial point in its coordinates.
If you supply an initial point, Adams/View assembles the model with the marker at the specified
point on the curve, even if it must override part initial conditions to do so. If you do not supply
an initial point, Adams/View assumes the initial contact is at the point on the curve closest to the
first curve (I curve). Adams/View may adjust that contact point to maintain other part or
constraint initial conditions.
The initial conditions are only active during an Initial conditions simulation, which Adams/View runs
before it runs a Simulation of your model.
You can also leave some or all of the initial conditions unset. Leaving an initial condition unset lets
Adams/View calculate the initial conditions of the constraint during an initial conditions simulation
depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the constraint. Note that it is not the same as
14 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints

setting an initial condition to zero. Setting an initial condition to zero means that the constraint will not
be moving in the specified direction or from a specified point when the simulation starts, regardless of
any forces and constraints acting upon it. For a Kinematic simulation, the initial conditions are redundant.
Therefore, for a model with zero Degrees of freedom, you should always leave the initial conditions
unset.

DOF Removed by Higher-Pair Constraints

The following table shows the degrees of freedom that higher-pair constraints remove.

General Constraints
Available with Adams/Solver (C++) only
You can create a general constraint that defines an arbitrary constraint specific to a model. As its name
implies, it is more general than the Idealized joints, which describe physically recognizable combination
of constraints that are used to connect bodies together. You can also use the general constraint to
equivalently define an existing idealized joint. Read more about the GCON statement in Adams/Solver
(C++) help.
We advise that you use the general constraint with caution. Be sure to read the Known Limitations in the
GCON statement.
 15
Overview of Constraints

To create or modify a general constraint:

1. Do one of the following:
• To create a general constraint, from the Joint palette or tool stack, select the General

Constraint tool .

• To modify a general constraint, from the Edit menu, select Modify. From the Database
Navigator that appears, select the general constraint to modify.
2. The Create/Modify General Constraint dialog box appears.
3. If you are creating a general constraint, in the Name text box, change the name for the constraint.
Adams/View assigns a default name to the constraint.
4. Enter a runtime function that Adams/Solver (C++) forces to zero during the simulation. To enter
a function expression, next to the f (q) = text box, select the More tool to display the
Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the Function
Builder online help. Learn more about defining a runtime function for a general constraint.
5. In the Report reaction forces on marker text box, enter a marker whose reaction forces are
measured and reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported is the force that is
exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint equation. Note that if you specify a marker and the
runtime function has no dependency on it, the general constraint reports a zero force. The default
is the ground coordinate system (GCS).

Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must enter the name of the
marker. Learn about Adams/Solver IDs.

6. Select OK.
16 Adams/View
Overview of Constraints
Joints
Idealized Joints

About Idealized Joints

Idealized joints connect two parts. The parts can be rigid bodies, Flexible bodies, or Point masses. You
can place idealized joints anywhere in your model.

Note: The joints you can attach to flexible bodies depend on the version of Adams/Solver you are
using (C++ or FORTRAN). In addition, Adams/Solver (C++) does not support point
masses.

For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams/Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams/Flex
online help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.

Adams/View supports two types of idealized joints: simple and complex. Simple joints directly connect
bodies and include the following:
• Revolute Joints. See Revolute Joint Tool.
• Translational Joints. See Translational Joint Tool.
• Cylindrical Joints. See Cylindrical Joint Tool.
• Spherical Joints. See Spherical Joint Tool.
• Planar Joints. See Planar Joint Tool.
• Constant-Velocity Joints. See Constant-Velocity Joint Tool.
• Screw Joints. See Screw Joint Tool.
• Fixed Joints. See Fixed Joint Tool.
• Hooke/Universal Joint. See Hooke/Universal Joint Tool.

Complex joints indirectly connect parts by coupling simple joints. They include:
• Gears. See Gear Joint Tool.
• Couplers. See Coupler Joint Tool.

You access the joints through the Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks.

Creating Idealized Joints

The following procedure explains how to create a simple idealized joint. You can select to attach the joint
to parts or spline curves. If you select to attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker,
2 Adams/View
Joints

and the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify dialog
box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about
switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
Note that this procedure only sets the location and orientation of the joint. If you want to set the friction
of a joint, change the pitch of a screw joint, or set initial conditions for joints, modify the joint.

To create a simple idealized joint:

1. From the Joint palette or tool stack, select the joint tool representing the idealized joint that you
want to create.
2. In the settings container, specify how you want to define the bodies the joint connects. You can
select:
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit)
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
For more on the effects of these options, see the help for the joint tool you are creating and
Connecting Constraints to Parts.
3. In the settings container, specify how you want the joint oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it is displayed,
or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature in
your model, such as the face of a part.
4. If you selected to explicitly define the bodies by selecting 2 Bodies - 1 Location or 2 Bodies - 2
Locations in Step 2, in the settings container, set First Body and Second Body to how you want
to attach the joint: on the bodies of parts, between a part and a spline curve, or between two spline
curves.
5. Using the left mouse button, select the first part or a spline curve (splines and data element curves
are all considered curves). If you selected to explicitly select the parts to be connected, select the
second part or another curve using the left mouse button.
6. Place the cursor where you want the joint to be located (for a curve this is referred to as its curve
point), and click the left mouse button. If you selected to specify its location on each part or curve,
place the cursor on the second location, and click the left mouse button.
7. If you selected to orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow representing the direction along a feature where you want the joint
oriented. When the direction vector represents the correct orientation, click the left mouse button.

Modifying Basic Properties of Idealized Joints

You can change several basic properties about an Idealized joints. These include:
• Parts that the joint connects. You can also switch which part moves relative to another part.
 3
Joints

• What type of joint it is. For example, you can change a revolute joint to a translational joint. The
following are exceptions to changing a joint's type:
• You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple idealized joint or to a
joint primitive.
• You cannot change a joint's type if motion is applied to the joint. In addition, if a joint has
friction and you change the joint type, Adams/View displays an error.
• Whether or not forces that are applied to the parts connected by the joint appear graphically on
the screen during an animation. Learn about Setting Up Force Graphics.
• For a screw joint, you can also set the pitch of the threads of the screw (translational
displacement for every full rotational cycle). Learn about screw joints.

To change basic properties for a joint:

1. Display the Modify Joint dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. If desired, in the First Body and Second Body text boxes, change the parts that the joint connects.
The part that you enter as the first body moves relative to the part you enter as the second body.
3. Set Type to the type of joint to which you want to change the current joint.
4. Select whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts that the joint connects.
5. For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full rotational cycle).
6. Select OK.

About Initial Conditions for Joints

You can specify initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints. Adams/View uses the
initial conditions during an Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a simulation of your
model.
You can specify the following initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints:
• Translational or rotational displacements that define the translation of the location of the joint on
the first part (I marker) with respect to its location on the second part (J marker) in units of
length. You can set translational displacement on a translational and cylindrical joint and you can
set rotational displacements on a revolute and cylindrical joint.
Adams/View measures the translational displacement at the origin of the I marker along the
common z-axis of the I and J markers and with respect to the J marker. It measures the rotational
displacement of the x-axis of the I marker about the common z-axis of the I and J markers with
respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
• Translational or rotational velocity that define the velocity of the location of the joint on the first
part (I marker) with respect to its location on the second part (J marker) in units of length per unit
of time.
4 Adams/View
Joints

Adams/View measures the translational velocity of the I marker along the common z-axis of I
and J and with respect to the J marker. It measures the rotational velocity of the x-axis of the I
marker about the common z-axis of the I and J markers with respect to the x-axis of the J marker.
If you specify initial conditions, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the joint during an
assemble model operation regardless of any other forces acting on the joint. You can also leave some or
all of the initial conditions unset. Leaving an initial condition unset lets Adams/View calculate the
conditions of the part during an assemble model operation depending on the other forces acting on the
joint. Note that it is not the same as setting an initial condition to zero. Setting an initial condition to zero
means that the joint will not be moving in the specified direction or will not be displaced when the model
is assembled, regardless of any forces acting on it.
If you impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with those on a part that the joint
connects, the initial conditions on the joint have precedence over those on the part. If, however, you
impose initial conditions on the joint that are inconsistent with imparted motions on the joint, the initial
conditions as specified by the motion generator take precedence over those on the joint.

Setting Initial Conditions

To modify initial conditions:
1. Display the Modify Joint dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Select Initial Conditions.
The Joint Initial Conditions dialog box appears. Some options in the Joint Initial Conditions dialog
box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you are setting initial
conditions.
3. Set the translational or rotational displacement or velocity, and then select OK.

Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere
from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams/Solver issues a warning
message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams/View
issues an error message and stops execution.

Imposing Point Motion on a Joint

You can impose a motion on any of the axes (DOF) of the idealized joint that are free to move. For
example, for a translational joint, you can apply translational motion along the z-axis. Learn more About
Point Motion.

Note: For translational, revolute, and cylindrical joints, you might find it easier to use the joint
motion tools to impose motion. Learn about Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools.
 5
Joints

To impose motion on a joint:

1. Display the Modify Joint dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Select Impose Motion.
The Impose Motion(s) dialog box appears. Some options in the Impose Motion dialog box are not
available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint on which you are imposing motion.
3. Enter a name for the motion. Adams/View assigns a default name to the motion.
4. Enter the values for the motion as explained in Options for Point Motion Dialog Box, and then
select OK.

Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

You can model both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints.

Note: Using Adams/Solver (C++), you can apply joint friction to joints if they are attached to
flexible bodies; using Adams/Solver (FORTRAN), you cannot. In addition, Adams/Solver
(C++) does not support point masses.

For a summary of which joints and forces are supported on flexible bodies, see Table of
Supported Forces and Joints in the Adams/Flex online help. Also refer to the Adams/Flex
online help for more information on attaching joints and forces to flexible bodies.

To add friction to a joint:

1. Display the Modify Joint dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Select the Friction tool .
The Create/Modify Friction dialog box appears. The options in the dialog box change depending
on the type of joint for which you are adding friction.
3. Enter the values in the dialog box for the type of joint as explained below, and then select OK.
• Cylindrical Joint Options
• Revolute Joint Options
• Spherical Joint Options
• Translational Joint Options
• Universal/Hooke Joint Options
6 Adams/View
Joints

Friction Regime Determination (FRD)

Three friction regimes are allowed in Adams/View:

The regime: Means:

Dynamic friction A joint is in dynamic friction if its joint velocity magnitude exceeds 1.5 times
the stiction transition velocity. The dynamic coefficient of friction (md) is used
in the computation of frictional forces.
Transition between If the joint velocity magnitude is between 1 and 1.5 times the stiction transition
dynamic and static velocity, the joint is considered to be transitioning between static and dynamic
friction friction. A STEP function transitions the coefficient of friction between the
dynamic (md) and static (ms) coefficients of friction.
Static friction A joint is in static friction when the joint velocity magnitude falls below the
stiction transition velocity. The effective coefficient of friction is computed
using the joint creep, joint velocity, and static coefficient of friction ( ms ).

The joint velocity determines the instantaneous friction regime for a joint. The following is a block
diagram of the friction regimes available in Adams/Solver.
 7
Joints

Conventions in Friction Block Diagrams

The following tables identify conventions used in the block diagrams:
• Legend for Block Diagrams identifies symbols in the diagrams.
• Relationship Between the Inputs Option and Switches Used in the Block Diagrams describes the
relationship between the Input Forces to Friction option in the Create/Modify Friction dialog box
and the switches used in the block diagrams.

Legend for Block Diagrams

Symbol: Description:
Scalar quantity

Vector quantity

Summing junction:
c=a+b

Multiplication junction:
c=axb

MAG Magnitude of a vector quantity

ABS Absolute value of a scalar quantity
FRD Friction regime determination

Relationship Between the Inputs Option and Switches Used in the Block Diagrams

Switch: Inputs are: Symbol: Acceptable values:

SW1 Preload Fprfrc or Tprfc On or off
SW2 Reaction force f or F On or off
SW3 Bending moment Tr On or off
SW4 Torsional moment Tn On or off
All or None sets all applicable switches On or off, respectively

Cylindrical Joint friction

Joint reaction (F) and reaction torque (Tm) combined with force preload (Fprfrc) and torque preload
(Tprfrc) yield the frictional force and torque in a cylindrical joint. As the block diagram indicates, you
can turn off one or more of these force effects using switches SW1 through SW3. The frictional force in
8 Adams/View
Joints

a cylindrical joint acts at the mating surfaces of the joint. The FRD block determines the direction of the
frictional force. Based on the frictional coefficient direction, the surface frictional force is broken down
into an equivalent frictional torque and frictional force acting along the common axis of translation and
rotation.
 9
Joints

Cylindrical Joint Options

For the option: Do the following:

Mu Static Define the coefficient of static friction in the joint. The magnitude of the
frictional force is the product of Mu Static and the magnitude of the normal
force in the joint, for example:

Friction Force Magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Static and N = normal force

The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Mu Dynamic Define the coefficient of dynamic friction. The magnitude of the frictional
force is the product of Mu Dynamic and the magnitude of the normal force
in the joint, for example:

Friction force magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Dynamic and N = normal force

The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Initial Overlap Defines the initial overlap of the sliding parts in either a translational or
cylindrical joint. The joint's bending moment is divided by the overlap to
compute the bending moment's contribution to frictional forces.

The default is 1000.0, and the range is Initial Overlap > 0.

10 Adams/View
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Overlap To define friction in a cylindrical joint, Adams/Solver computes the overlap
of the joint. As the joint slides, the overlap can increase, decrease, or remain
constant. You can set:

• Increase indicates that overlap increases as the I marker translates in the

positive direction along the J marker; the slider moves to be within the
joint.
• Decrease indicates that the overlap decreases with positive translation
of the joint; the slider moves outside of the joint.
• Remain Constant indicates that the amount of overlap does not change
as the joint slides; all of the slider remains within the joint.
The default is Remain Constant.
Pin Radius Defines the radius of the pin for a cylindrical joint.

The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.

Stiction Transition Define the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from dynamic
Velocity friction to static friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker
is below the value, then static friction or stiction acts to make the joint stick.

The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams/Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:

Friction force magnitude < static * normal force

Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.

The default is 0.01 length units, and the range is > 0.

Friction Force Preload Define the joint's preload frictional force, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

Default is 0.0, and the range is > 0.

Friction Torque Preload Define the preload friction torque in the joint, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

The default is 0.0, and the Range is > 0.

 11
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Effect Define the frictional effects included in the friction model, either Stiction
and Sliding, Stiction, or Sliding. Stiction is static-friction effect, while
Sliding is dynamic-friction effect. Excluding stiction in simulations that
don't require it can greatly improve simulation speed. The default is
Stiction and Sliding.
Input Forces to Friction Define the input forces to the friction model. By default, all user-defined
preloads and joint-reaction force and moments are included. You can
customize the friction-force model by limiting the input forces you specify.
The inputs for a translational joint are:

• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.

Revolute Joint Friction

Joint reactions (Fa and Fr), bending moment (Tr), and torque preload (Tprfrc) determine the frictional
torque in a revolute joint. You can turn off one or more of these force effects using switches SW1 through
SW3. The joint reactions (Fa and Fr) are converted into equivalent torques using the respective friction
arm (Rn) and pin radius (Rp). The joint bending moment (Tr) is converted into an equivalent torque using
12 Adams/View
Joints

pin radius (Rp) divided by bending reaction arm (Rb). The frictional torque (Tfrict) is applied along the
axis of rotation in the direction that the FRD block computes.
 13
Joints

Revolute Joint Options

For the option: Do the following:

Mu Static Define the coefficient of static friction in the joint. The magnitude of the
frictional force is the product of Mu Static and the magnitude of the normal
force in the joint, for example:

Friction Force Magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Static and N = normal force

The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Mu Dynamic Define the coefficient of dynamic friction. The magnitude of the frictional
force is the product of Mu Dynamic and the magnitude of the normal force
in the joint, for example:

Friction force magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Dynamic and N = normal force

The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Friction Arm Define the effective moment arm used to compute the axial component of
the friction torque. The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.
Bending Reaction Arm Define the effective moment arm use to compute the contribution of the
bending moment on the net friction torque in the revolute joint. The default
is 1.0, and the range is > 0.
Pin Radius Defines the radius of the pin.

The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.

Stiction Transition Define the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from dynamic
Velocity friction to static friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker
is below the value, then static friction or stiction acts to make the joint stick.

The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
14 Adams/View
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams/Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:

Friction force magnitude < static * normal force

Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.

The default is 0.01 length units, and the range is > 0.

Friction Torque Preload Define the preload friction torque in the joint, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

The default is 0.0, and the Range is > 0.

Effect Define the frictional effects included in the friction model, either Stiction
and Sliding, Stiction, or Sliding. Stiction is static-friction effect, while
Sliding is dynamic-friction effect. Excluding stiction in simulations that
don't require it can greatly improve simulation speed. The default is
Stiction and Sliding.
Input Forces to Friction Define the input forces to the friction model. By default, all user-defined
preloads and joint-reaction force and moments are included. You can
customize the friction-force model by limiting the input forces you specify.
The inputs for a translational joint are:

• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
 15
Joints

Spherical Joint Friction

The reaction force (F) and the preload frictional torque (Tprfrc) are the two forcing effects used in
computing the frictional torque on a Spherical joint. The ball radius is used to compute an equivalent
frictional torque. The FRD block determines the direction of the frictional torque.
16 Adams/View
Joints

Spherical Joint Options

For the option: Do the following:

Mu Static Define the coefficient of static friction in the joint. The magnitude of the
frictional force is the product of Mu Static and the magnitude of the normal
force in the joint, for example:

Friction Force Magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Static and N = normal force

The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Mu Dynamic Define the coefficient of dynamic friction. The magnitude of the frictional
force is the product of Mu Dynamic and the magnitude of the normal force
in the joint, for example:

Friction force magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Dynamic and N = normal force

The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Ball Radius Defines the radius of the ball in a spherical joint for use in friction-force and
torque calculations.

The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.

Stiction Transition Define the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from dynamic
Velocity friction to static friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker
is below the value, then static friction or stiction acts to make the joint stick.

The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
 17
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams/Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:

Friction force magnitude < static * normal force

Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.

The default is 0.01 length units, and the range is > 0.

Friction Torque Preload Define the preload friction torque in the joint, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

The default is 0.0, and the Range is > 0.

Effect Define the frictional effects included in the friction model, either Stiction
and Sliding, Stiction, or Sliding. Stiction is static-friction effect, while
Sliding is dynamic-friction effect. Excluding stiction in simulations that
don't require it can greatly improve simulation speed. The default is
Stiction and Sliding.
Input Forces to Friction Define the input forces to the friction model. By default, all user-defined
preloads and joint-reaction force and moments are included. You can
customize the friction-force model by limiting the input forces you specify.
The inputs for a translational joint are:

• Preload
• Reaction Force
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.

Translational Joint Friction

Joint reaction force (F), bending moment (Tm), torsional moment (Tn), and force preload (Fprfrc) are
used to compute the frictional force in a translational joint. You can individually turn off the force effects
using switches SW1 through SW4.
18 Adams/View
Joints

The bending moment (Tm) is converted into an equivalent force using the Xs block. Similarly, torsional
moment is converted into an equivalent joint force using the friction arm (Rn). Frictional force (Ffrict) is
applied along the axis of translation in the direction that the FRD block computes.
 19
Joints

Translational Joint Options

For the option: Do the following:

Mu Static Define the coefficient of static friction in the joint. The magnitude of the
frictional force is the product of Mu Static and the magnitude of the normal
force in the joint, for example:

Friction Force Magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Static and N = normal force

The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Mu Dynamic Define the coefficient of dynamic friction. The magnitude of the frictional
force is the product of Mu Dynamic and the magnitude of the normal force
in the joint, for example:

Friction force magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Dynamic and N = normal force

The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Reaction Arm Define the effective moment arm of the joint-reaction torque about the
translational joint's axial axis (the z-direction of the joint's J marker). This
value is used to compute the contribution of the torsional moment to the net
frictional force.

The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.

Initial Overlap Defines the initial overlap of the sliding parts in either a translational or
cylindrical joint. The joint's bending moment is divided by the overlap to
compute the bending moment's contribution to frictional forces.

The default is 1000.0, and the range is Initial Overlap > 0.

20 Adams/View
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Overlap To define friction in a cylindrical joint, Adams/Solver computes the overlap
of the joint. As the joint slides, the overlap can increase, decrease, or remain
constant. You can set:

• Increase indicates that overlap increases as the I marker translates in the

positive direction along the J marker; the slider moves to be within the
joint.
• Decrease indicates that the overlap decreases with positive translation
of the joint; the slider moves outside of the joint.
• Remain Constant indicates that the amount of overlap does not change
as the joint slides; all of the slider remains within the joint.
The default is Remain Constant.
Stiction Transition Define the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from dynamic
Velocity friction to static friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker
is below the value, then static friction or stiction acts to make the joint stick.

The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams/Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:

Friction force magnitude < static * normal force

Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.

The default is 0.01 length units, and the range is > 0.

Friction Force Preload Define the joint's preload frictional force, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

Default is 0.0, and the range is > 0.

Effect Define the frictional effects included in the friction model, either Stiction
and Sliding, Stiction, or Sliding. Stiction is static-friction effect, while
Sliding is dynamic-friction effect. Excluding stiction in simulations that
don't require it can greatly improve simulation speed. The default is
Stiction and Sliding.
 21
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Input Forces to Friction Define the input forces to the friction model. By default, all user-defined
preloads and joint-reaction force and moments are included. You can
customize the friction-force model by limiting the input forces you specify.
The inputs for a translational joint are:

• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
• Torsional Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.
22 Adams/View
Joints

Universal/Hooke Joint Friction

The universal/hooke joint contains two yokes (I_YOKE and J_YOKE) that are modeled independently.
An equivalent revolute joint represents each yoke. Frictional torques are applied along the axes of
rotation of the two yokes.
 23
Joints

Universal/Hooke Joint Options

For the option: Do the following:

Yoke Select either to define the rotational constraint on which the friction acts. I
Yoke identifies the yoke to the I marker's rotational constraint. J Yoke
identifies the yoke to the J marker's rotational constraint.
Mu Static Define the coefficient of static friction in the joint. The magnitude of the
frictional force is the product of Mu Static and the magnitude of the normal
force in the joint, for example:

Friction Force Magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Static and N = normal force

The static frictional force acts to oppose the net force or torque along the
Degrees of freedom of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Mu Dynamic Define the coefficient of dynamic friction. The magnitude of the frictional
force is the product of Mu Dynamic and the magnitude of the normal force
in the joint, for example:

Friction force magnitude, F = µN

where µ = Mu Dynamic and N = normal force

The dynamic frictional force acts in the opposite direction of the velocity
of the joint.

The range is > 0.

Friction Arm Define the effective moment arm used to compute the axial component of
the friction torque. The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.
Bending Reaction Arm Define the effective moment arm use to compute the contribution of the
bending moment on the net friction torque in the universal/hooke joint. The
default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.
Pin Radius Define the radius of the pin. The default is 1.0, and the range is > 0.
Stiction Transition Define the absolute velocity threshold for the transition from dynamic
Velocity friction to static friction. If the absolute relative velocity of the joint marker
is below the value, then static friction or stiction acts to make the joint stick.

The default is 0.1 length units/unit time on the surface of contact in the
joint, and the range is > 0.
24 Adams/View
Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Max Stiction Define the maximum displacement that can occur in a joint once the
Deformation frictional force in the joint enters the stiction regime. The slight
deformation allows Adams/Solver to easily impose the Coulomb
conditions for stiction or static friction, for example:

Friction force magnitude < static * normal force

Therefore, even at zero velocity, you can apply a finite stiction force if your
system dynamics require it.

The default is 0.01 length units, and the range is > 0.

Friction Torque Preload Define the preload friction torque in the joint, which is usually caused by
mechanical interference in the assembly of the joint.

Default is 0.0, and the range is > 0.

Effect Define the frictional effects included in the friction model, either Stiction
and Sliding, Stiction, or Sliding. Stiction is static-friction effect, while
Sliding is dynamic-friction effect. Excluding stiction in simulations that
don't require it can greatly improve simulation speed. The default is
Stiction and Sliding.
Input Forces to Friction Define the input forces to the friction model. By default, all user-defined
preloads and joint-reaction force and moments are included. You can
customize the friction-force model by limiting the input forces you specify.
The inputs for a translational joint are:

• Preload
• Reaction Force
• Bending Moment
Friction Inactive During Specify whether or not the frictional forces are to be calculated during a
Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation.

DOF Removed by Idealized Joints

The following table lists all of the idealized joints except screw, gear, and coupler joints. It does not
contain screw joints because they couple one rotational and one translational degree of freedom and
 25
Joints

cannot be placed in any one of the categories in the table. The table does not contain gears and couplers
because they connect joints rather than parts.

Primitive Joints

About Joint Primitives

A joint primitive places a restriction on relative motion, such as restricting one part to always move
parallel to another part. The joint primitives do not have physical counterparts as the idealized joints do.
You can, however, combine joint primitives to define a complex constraint that cannot be modeled using
the idealized joints. In fact, you can use the joint primitives to create any of the idealized joints listed in
About Idealized Joints.

The different types of joint primitives that are available in Adams/View are:
• Inline. See Inline Joint Tool.
• Inplane. See Inplane Joint Tool.
• Orientation. See Orientation Joint Tool.
• Parallel Axes. See Parallel Axes Joint Tool.
• Perpendicular Axes. See Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool.
26 Adams/View
Joints

Note that joint primitives are only available from the Joint palette, not the Joint tool stack on the Main
toolbox.

Creating Joint Primitives

The following procedure explains how to create a joint primitive. You can select to attach the joint to
parts or spline curves. If you select to attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and
the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify dialog box
help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about
switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

To create a joint primitive:

1. From the Joint palette, select the joint tool representing the joint primitive that you want to create.
2. In the settings container, specify how you want to define the bodies the joint connects. You can
select:
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit)
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
• For more on the effects of these options, see the help for the joint tool you are creating and
about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
3. In the settings container, specify how you want the joint oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it is displayed,
or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature in
your model, such as the face of a part.
4. In the settings container, set First Body and Second Body to how you want to attach the joint: on
the bodies of parts, between a part and a spline curve, or between two spline curves.
5. Using the left mouse button, select the first part or a spline curve (splines and data element curves
are all considered curves). If you selected to explicitly select the parts to be connected, select the
second part or another curve using the left mouse button.
6. Place the cursor where you want the joint to be located (for a curve this is referred to as its curve
point), and click the left mouse button. If you selected to specify its location on each part or curve,
place the cursor on the second location, and click the left mouse button.
7. If you selected to orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow representing the direction along a feature where you want the joint
oriented. When the direction vector represents the correct orientation, click the left mouse button.
 27
Joints

DOF Removed by Primitive Joints

The following table shows the degrees of freedom that joint primitives remove when used alone or in
combination with other primitives.

Couplers

Creating Couplers
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint
to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To
specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you
modify the coupler.

To create a coupler:
1. From the Joint palette, select the Coupler tool .
2. Select the driver joint to which the second joint is coupled.
3. Select the coupled joint that follows the driver joint.
28 Adams/View
Joints

Modifying Couplers
When you modify a coupler joint, you can:
• Set the number of joints being coupled together.
• Change the joints being coupled together.
• Select which joint is the driver joint and which are the coupled joints.
• Specify the relationship between the joints as linear or nonlinear.
• If you specify a linear relationship, enter scales for the coupled joints.
• If you specify a nonlinear relationship, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written
subroutine COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2 or you can also specify an alternative library and name
for the user subroutine. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help. Learn about
specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
• You can also modify coupler properties using the Table Editor.

To modify a coupler joint:

1. Display the Modify Coupler dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
The Modify Coupler dialog box appears. The options in the dialog box change depending on
whether the coupler joint couples two or three joints and whether or not it is linear or nonlinear.
2. Select whether or not you want a three-joint coupler or a two-joint coupler and the relationship
between the joints:
• By Displacements
• By Scale
• User Defined
3. If desired, in the Driver and Coupled text boxes, change the joints to be coupled and, then set
Freedom Type to their type. If you have any cylindrical joints, you can specify either translational
or rotational displacement. Translational joints always have translational displacements. Revolute
joints always have rotational displacements.
4. Do the following depending on the relationship set up for the coupler:
• If the coupler is linear, enter a scale for the second and third coupled joints. The scales are r2
and r3 in the following equation:
delta1 + r2 * delta2 + r3 * delta3 =0
If the joint displacement is rotational, its corresponding delta in the equation above is in
radians.
• If the coupler is nonlinear, in the User-Written Subroutine Parameters text box, specify the
user parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine or specify a routine other than the
standard in the Routine text box. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
Learn about specifying another routine with ROUTINE Argument.
 29
Joints

About Gears
Gears in Adams/View connect two of the parts, which are called the geared parts, by coupling together
the allowable Degrees of freedom in two joints.

The coupled joints are attached to the third part, called the carrier part. The joints can be translational,
revolute, or cylindrical joints. Using different combinations of joint types and orientations, you can
model many different physical gears, including spur, helical, planetary, bevel, and rack-and-pinion.
When you create the joints to be geared together, you must create them so the first part you select is a
geared part and the second part is the carrier part. Therefore, the I marker parameters of the joints must
belong to the geared parts and the J marker parameters must belong to the carrier part. In addition, the
CV marker must belong to the carrier part.
The gear uses the location of the CV marker to determine the point of contact or mesh of the two geared
parts. The direction of the z-axis of the common velocity marker points in the direction of the common
motion of the geared parts. This is also the direction in which the gear teeth forces act.
The location of the CV marker is constant with respect to the carrier part. Its location does not change
when the direction of power flows through the gear changes.
An Adamsgear joint does not model backlash.
30 Adams/View
Joints

Creating and Modifying Gears

When you create or modify a gear, you specify or change the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical
joints located on the carrier part and the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts.

To create or modify a gear:

1. Do one of the following depending on whether you are creating or modifying a gear:
• To create a gear, select the Gear tool on the Joint tool stack or palette.
The Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear dialog box appears.
• To modify a gear, display the Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear dialog box as explained
in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
Both the gear create and modify dialog boxes contain the same set of options.
2. If you are creating a gear, in the Gear Name text box, change the name for the gear. Adams/View
assigns a default name to the gear.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the gear. Learn about Adams/Solver IDs.
4. In the Comments text box, add or change any comments about the gear to help you manage and
identify the gear. Learn about Comments.
5. In the Joint Name text box, enter or change the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical joints
to be geared together. Adams/View automatically separates the joint names with a comma (,).
6. In the Common Velocity Marker text box, enter or change the marker defining the point of
contact between the geared parts. You need to make sure the z-axis of the common velocity
marker points in the direction of motion of the gear teeth that are in contact. Z-axis of the common
velocity marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears. See the picture in About Gears.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Note: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious configuration, the
z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented incorrectly.

7. Select OK.

Equations for Gears

The algebraic equation that the gear joint adds to your model, in general, looks like the following:
S1q1 + S2q2 = 0

where:
• q1 and q2 are the rotational or translation displacement variables defined by the allowable
Degrees of freedom in the geared joints.
 31
Joints

• S1 and S2 represent scalar multipliers that act to couple these displacements together. S1 and S2
are defined indirectly by the spatial relationship between the locations of the joints with respect
to the common velocity marker.
You do not explicitly define the scalar multipliers (gear ratio) when creating a gear. Instead, Adams/View
automatically determines the gear ratio as the distance between the origin of the common velocity marker
and the origins of the coupled joints. The gear ratio is shown below.

The figure also shows a specific case of creating a spur gear. For this gear, the general equation is:

a  A = b  B

or, to write it in the general form:

a  A – b  B = 0
32 Adams/View
Joints
Motion
Overview of Motion
A motion generator dictates the movement of a part as a function of time. It supplies whatever force is
required to make the part satisfy the motion. For example, a translational joint motion prescribes that a
joint on a part move at 10 mm/second in the z direction. You can apply the motion to either idealized
joints or between a pair of parts.

Types of Motion
Adams/View provides you with the following types of motion:
• Joint Motion - Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or
cylindrical joint. Each joint motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model.
Joint motions are very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above
listed joints and movements in only one direction or rotation.
• Point Motion - Prescribes the movement between two parts. When you create a point motion,
you specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any
type of idealized joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
Point motions enable you to build complex movements into your model without having to add
joints or invisible parts. For example, you can represent the movement along an arc, of a ship in
the ocean, or a robot’s arm.
For more on point motions, see About Creating Point Motions.

Defining the Motion Magnitude

You can define motion as acceleration, displacement, or velocity over time. By default, Adams/View
creates a motion that moves at a constant velocity over time. When you create a motion, you can define
its magnitude by entering one of the following:
• Translational or rotational speed - As you create a motion, you can specify the translational or
rotational speed of the motion. By default, you enter the rotational speed in number of degrees
per second and the translational speed in length units per time unit (for example, number of
inches per second).
When Adams/View creates the motion, it uses the value you enter as the motion function. It also
converts the rotational motion speed to radians. When you modify the motion, you can change
the value or enter a function expression or a user-written subroutine as explained next.
2 Adams/View
Motion

• Function expression - You can use Adams/View function expressions to specify the exact
movement applied to a joint as a function of time. For example, using function expressions you
can define a motion function that holds the joint in a fixed position, as well as one that moves the
joint with the required force to produce a constant velocity. To learn more about function
expressions, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Note: If you make your function a function of displacements or forces, Adams/View issues an
error and stops execution. These types of functions contain a VARVAL (function that
returns variable name), and although a VARVAL is allowed in the function, Adams/View
issues a warning. The motion function containing the VARVAL will not give correct
velocities, accelerations, or reaction forces in a joint, and may have trouble converging to
a solution.

• Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine - You can create a much more complex
motion by creating a MOTSUB User-written subroutine and entering the values to be passed to
the subroutine to determine the motion. For more on creating subroutines and passing values to
them, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver help.

Tips on Creating Motions

The following are some tips for creating motions:
• The motions that you assign determine the initial displacements and velocities of your model.
For any joint that has a motion applied to it, do not specify initial conditions that act in the same
direction as the motion. If you specify initial conditions for both the joint and the motion,
Adams/Solver uses the motion conditions and ignores the initial conditions you specified for the
joint.
• You can define a zero motion with respect to time, which is the same as locking two parts
together.
• If any motion generates nonzero initial part accelerations, Adams/Solver may not produce
reliable accelerations and velocities for the first two or three internal Integration steps of a
Dynamic simulation. Adams/Solver automatically corrects for this; therefore, the values it returns
at the first output step are accurate. A sensor, however, that depends on the accelerations or
reaction forces due to this motion may trip unexpectedly before the first Output step, even
though the solution appears correct when the sensor is removed. If this occurs, you should
modify the initial conditions set for the motion so that the initial accelerations are zero.
• If you defined the motion using velocity and acceleration, you cannot set a dynamic simulation
so that it uses the ABAM integrator. For more on controlling your simulation, see Solver Settings
- Dynamic.
• Adams/Solver cannot perform a kinematic simulation on a zero-DOF model containing motions
whose function expressions are specified as velocity or acceleration. You’ll need to perform a
dynamic simulation instead.
 3
Motion

DOF Removed by Motion

The following lists the motions that can be applied to the axes of parts. It places the general point motion
in all fields of the table because a general point motion can apply motion to none, any, or all axes of a part.

Applying Joint Motion

Creating Joint Motion

When you create a Joint motion, Adams/View creates a motion at the specified joint. It defines the motion
as a constant velocity over time based on a speed value that you can enter. The speed value can be a
numerical value, function expression, or User-written subroutine.
Learn about:
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Defining the Motion Magnitude
• DOF Removed by Motion

To create a joint motion:

1. From the Joint palette or Motion tool stack, select the joint motion tool representing the motion
that you want to create. Select either:
• to create a translational motion.
• to create a rotational motion.
4 Adams/View
Motion

2. In the settings container, specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By
default, Adams/View creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second and a
translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.
To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the Speed text box, point to
Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder.
For information on using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
3. Use the left mouse button to select the joint on the screen to which the motion will be applied.

Modifying Joint Motion

You can change several properties about a Joint motion after you create it. The properties include:
• Joint to which the motion is applied.
• Motion direction, either rotational or translational.
• Motion definition, including how the motion magnitude is defined (displacement, velocity, or
acceleration) and the function that defines its magnitude. You can enter a numerical value,
function expression, or User-written subroutine for the magnitude (MOTSUB). For more
information on MOTSUB, see Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver help.
• Initial conditions for displacement and velocity. Adams/View uses the initial conditions during
an Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a simulation of your model. You can
specify the following initial conditions:
• Initial displacement that defines the translation of the first part, in units of length or angles,
relative to the second part. You can set initial displacement on any joint motion whose
magnitude is defined as velocity or acceleration.
• Initial velocity that defines the velocity of the first part with respect to the second part, in units
of length or angles per unit of time. You can set initial velocity on any joint motion whose
magnitude is defined as acceleration.

Note: You can also modify joint properties using the Table Editor.

To modify a joint motion:

1. Display the Joint Motion dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. If desired, in the Joint text box, change the joint to which the motion is applied. The Joint Type
text box automatically updates to the selected type of joint.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
3. Set Direction to the desired motion direction (rotational or translational). You can select only
translational motion for a translational or cylindrical joint. You can select only rotational motion
for a revolute or cylindrical joint.
4. Set Define Using to how you will define the motion.
 5
Motion

If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that appears:
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression:
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool
to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder,
see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
If you selected Subroutine, enter the parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine
MOTSUB and its ID or you can specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in
the Routine text box. For more on subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver
online help. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
5. Set Type to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is
defined.
6. In the Displacement IC or Velocity IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement
or velocity. The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.

Applying Point Motion

About Point Motion

There are two types of Point Motion that you can create:
• Single point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around one axis.
• General point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around the three axes (six
degrees of freedom (DOF)).

When you create a point motion, you specify the parts to which the motion is to be applied and the
location and orientation of the motion. Adams/View creates markers on each part at the location of the
motion. The marker that Adams/View creates on the first part you select is called the moving point. It
moves or rotates relative to the marker on the second part, called the reference point. The z-axis of the
reference point defines the positive direction using the right-hand rule.
When you create a point motion, Adams/View creates a motion at the specified location.
• For a single point motion, Adams/View defines the motion as a constant velocity over time,
based on a speed value that you can enter. The speed value can be a numerical value, function
expression, or User-written subroutine, as explained in Defining the Motion Magnitude.
By default, Adams creates the point motion around or along the z-axis. You specify the direction
of the z-axis when you create the single point motion. You can change the axis around or along
which the motion is applied.
• For a general point motion, Adams/View creates a motion around or along all six coordinates of
the markers created on the selected parts. It does not define the magnitude of the motion. You’ll
need to modify the motion to define its magnitude.
6 Adams/View
Motion

Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools

Learn about applying point motion as you modify joints in Imposing Point Motion on a Joint.

To create a point motion:

1. From the Joint palette, select the tool representing the type of point motion that you want to create.
Select either:
• to create a single point motion.

• to create a general point motion.

2. In the settings container, specify the following:
How you want the motion applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 Location - Lets you select the location of the motion and have Adams/View determine the
two parts to which it should be applied. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the motion
location. If there is only one part near the motion, Adams/View connects the motion to that
part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to which the motion is to be
applied and the location of the motion.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to which the motion is to be
applied and the location of the motion on each part. You should use this option if you are
working in exploded view. For more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see Connecting Constraints to Parts.
How you want the motion oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the motion along the current working grid, if it is displayed,
or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the motion along a direction vector on a feature in
your model, such as the face of a part.
3. If you are creating a single point motion, set Characteristic to the direction of the motion, and
then enter the speed of the motion in the Speed text box.
4. If you selected to explicitly select the parts to which the motion is to be applied, select each part
using the left mouse button.
5. Place the cursor where you want the motion to be located and click the left mouse button. If you
selected to specify its location on each part, place the cursor on the second location, and click the
left mouse button.
6. If you selected to orient the joint along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow showing the direction in which you want the motion oriented.
When the direction vector shows the correct orientation, click the left mouse button.
 7
Motion

Modifying Single Point Motion

The following procedure explains how to modify a single Point Motion defined between two parts.

Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.

To modify a single point motion:

1. Display the modify motion dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
The Point Motion dialog box appears.
2. If desired, in the Moving Point and Reference Point text boxes, change the markers that define
the location and orientation of the motion on the parts.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
3. Set Type to how you want to define the magnitude of motion:
If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that appears:
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool
to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function Builder,
see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
• If you selected Subroutine, enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine and
its ID.
4. Set Type to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion magnitude is
defined.
5. In the Displacement IC or Velocity IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement
or velocity.
• Initial displacement defines the translation of the first part in units of length relative to the
second part. You can set displacements on any point motion whose magnitude is defined as
velocity or acceleration.
• Initial velocity defines the velocity of the first part with respect to the second part in units of
length per unit of time. You can set initial velocity on any point motion whose magnitude is
defined as acceleration.

Modifying General Point Motion

The following procedure explains how to modify a general Point Motion defined between two parts.

Note: You can also modify point motion using the Table Editor.
8 Adams/View
Motion

To modify a general point motion:

1. Display the modify motion dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
The Impose Motion(s) dialog box appears.
2. If desired, in the Moving Point and Reference Point text boxes, change the markers that define
the location and orientation of the motion on the parts. Learn about moving and reference points.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
3. Set Type to how you want to define the magnitude of motion.
4. Enter the following in the F(time) text boxes. The text boxes that appear depend on how the
magnitude of the motion is defined.
• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in radians.)
• Function expression
• Parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine MOTSUB or you can specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. See the
Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help. Learn about specifying your own routine
with ROUTINE Argument.
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the More tool
to display the Function Builder.
5. In the Disp. IC or Velo. IC text boxes, enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity.
The text boxes that appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
• Initial displacement defines the translation of the first part in units of length relative to the
second part. You can set displacements on any point motion whose magnitude is defined as
velocity or acceleration.
• Initial velocity defines the velocity of the first part with respect to the second part in units of
length per unit of time. You can set initial velocity on any point motion whose magnitude is
defined as acceleration.
Forces
Overview
Forces define loads and compliances on parts. Forces do not absolutely prohibit or prescribe motion.
Therefore, they do not add or remove degrees of freedom (DOF) from your model. Some forces can resist
motion, such as spring dampers, and some can try to induce motion.
Adams/View provides the following types of forces:
• Applied forces
• Flexible connectors - Note that flexible connectors resist motion and are simpler and easier to use
than applied forces because you only supply constant coefficients for the forces. The forces
include Beams, Bushings, translational spring dampers, and torsion springs that provide
compliant force relationships.
• Special forces - Special forces are forces that are commonly encountered, such as tire and
gravity forces.
• Contacts - Specify how parts react when they come in contact with each other when the model is
in motion.
See Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack dialog box help for more information.

Defining Force Magnitude

When defining a force’s magnitude, you can either define it as one resultant magnitude along a direction,
or you can resolve the resultant into as many as three components that are associated with the three
mutually perpendicular axes of a particular coordinate system.
You can define force magnitudes in Adams/View in the following ways:
• Enter values used to define stiffness and damping coefficients. In this case, Adams/View
automatically makes the force magnitude proportional to the distance and velocity between two
points. The coefficients represent the proportionality constants. You specify coefficients for
flexible connectors, such as spring-dampers and beams. You can also specify these values for
applied forces.
• Enter a function expression using the Adams/View library of built-in functions. You can enter
expressions for all types of applied forces. Built-in functions include the types listed below. For
more information on using expressions and available functions, see Function Builder.
• Displacement, velocity, and acceleration functions that allow the force to be related to the
movement of points or bodies in the system. Examples include springs and viscous dampers.
• Force functions that allow the force to depend on other forces in the system. An example
would be a Coulomb friction force that is proportional to the normal force between two
bodies.
• Mathematical functions, such as sine and cosine, series, polynomials, and steps.
2 Adams/View
Forces

• Spline functions that allow the force to depend on data stored in lookup tables. Examples of
these include motors using torque-speed curves or nonlinear bushings whose stiffness is not
entirely linear.
• Impact functions that make the force act like a compression-only spring-damper that turns
on and off as bodies intermittently contact one another.
• Enter parameters that are passed to User-written subroutines that are linked to Adams/View. You
can enter parameters for all types of applied forces. You can also enter parameters to a subroutine
for the field flexible connector to create a nonlinear force between two parts. For more
information on how to use subroutines to define your force magnitudes, see the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Defining Force Directions

You can define force directions in one of two ways:
• Along one or more of the axes of a marker.
• Along the line-of-sight between two points.

If your force direction remains fixed with respect to some part in your model, either a moving part or the
ground part, then you can define the force using one vector component and specify only one magnitude
and direction.
If you have two or more forces whose directions always remain perpendicular to one another (such as a
normal force and a friction force), you can either define multiple Single-component forces whose
directions are perpendicular or you can use a Multi-Component force element. You must define several
expressions, one for each of the force magnitudes you need.
If the direction along which you want the force applied is defined by the line between two points in your
model and is constantly changing throughout the Simulation, you only need to define one component of
force along this direction and one expression for the corresponding force magnitude.
As you define forces, Adams/View gives you shortcuts for defining the force application. These shortcuts
allow you to let Adams/View automatically create the force definition using only a few clicks of the
mouse. For example, as you create a bushing, you can simply specify one location. Adams/View
automatically determines the parts which should be included. You can also specify that the force be
aligned to the coordinates of the Working grid or screen or a feature of a part.

Applied Forces
Applied forces are forces that define loads and compliances on parts so they move in certain ways.
Adams/View provides a library of applied forces that you can use. Applied forces give you a great deal
of flexibility, but they require work to model simple forces. Instead of using applied forces, you may want
to consider using the flexible connectors, which model several commonly used force elements, or special
forces, which provide environmental and complex forces.
 3
Forces

Applied forces can have one, three, or six components (three translational and three rotational) that define
the resultant force. For example, a single-component force or torque defines the force using a single
component, while a multi-component force or torque defines the force using three or more components.
The following figure shows all six possible force components associated with a particular coordinate
system’s x-, y-, and z-axes.

As you create applied forces, you specify:

• Parts to which the force is applied and its direction - You can apply the force to two parts or to
one part and ground. Adams/View creates a marker on each part. The first part you select is the
action body and receives the force action. The second part you select is the reaction body and
receives the force reaction. If you specify one part and ground, the reaction force is on the
ground part, and, thus, has no effect on your model.
• Characteristic, which defines the magnitude of the force. You can specify:
• Constant force - You enter a constant force value. When Adams/View creates the force, it
uses the value you enter as the force function. When you modify the force, you can change
the value or enter a function expression or parameters to a user-written subroutine as
explained for the Custom option below.
• Bushing or spring-like - Adams/View creates a function expression defining the linear
stiffness and damping forces based on the stiffness and damping coefficients that you
specify.
• Custom - You define the magnitude of the force as a function of any combination of
displacements, velocities, other applied forces, user-defined variables, and time. You can
write a function expression or enter parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine (for
example, SFOSUB or VFOSUB) that is linked into Adams/View. You define the constitutive
equation for the force applied to the action body. Adams/View evaluates the reaction forces
on the reaction body. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Adams/View evaluates the signed magnitude of the force and applies it to the selected body or
bodies.
4 Adams/View
Forces

Single-Component Forces
To create a single-component force:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select either:
• to create a single-component force.
• to create a single-component torque.
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• The number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can select the following:
• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working grid, if it is
displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as along an edge or normal to the face of a part.
• The characteristics of the force. You can select the following:
• Constant force/torque - Enter a constant force or torque value or let Adams/View use the
default value.
• Spring-Damper - Enter stiffness and damping coefficients and let Adams/View create a
function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values. (Not available
when you are using the Main toolbar to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in effect, creates a force with
zero magnitude. After you create the force, you modify it by entering a function expressions
or parameters to a SFOSUB User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can
also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying
a routine with ROUTINE Argument.
3. Do one of the following depending on whether you are creating a single-component force or
torque:
• For a single-component force, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque
between two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two
bodies. Be sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
• For a single-component torque, select the action body. If you selected to create a torque
between two parts, select the reaction body and then select the points of application on the two
bodies. Be sure to select the point of application on the action body first.
4. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow representing the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. When the direction vector represents the desired orientation, click.
 5
Forces

Modifying Single-Component Forces

The following procedure explains how to modify the following for a single-component force:
• Force direction, if only one part is affected.
• Action body to which the force is applied. If you created the force between two parts, you can
also change the reaction body. You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a
force created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. You’ll have to
delete the force and create it again.
• Force magnitude.
• Force graphics.

Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.

To modify a single-component force:

1. Display the Modify Force dialog box as explained in the Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set the following in the dialog box, and then select OK.

To: Do the following:

Set the Select either:
number of
parts affected • On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied to a part.
and the The force direction is fixed on ground.
direction of • On One Body, Moving with Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part. The
the force part defines the direction of the force.
• On One Body, Moving with Other Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a part.
A second part (the direction part) defines the direction of the force.
• Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the parts can be
ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force defined between two parts
or the reverse. You can, however, change a torque on one part to a torque on two
parts or the reverse.
Set the Change the values in the following text boxes as necessary. The text boxes available
bodies used depend on how you defined the direction of the force.
in defining
the force • Body - Change the action body to which the force is applied.
• Action Body - For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to
which the force is applied.
• Reaction Body - Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
• Direction Body - Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you
selected the direction option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
6 Adams/View
Forces

To: Do the following:

Change the Set Define Using to how you will define the force. Select:
force
function • Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.
defining the If you selected Function, enter the following in the Function (time) text box that
magnitude of appears:
the force
• Constant force value
• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function text box, select the More
button to display the Function Builder.

• Subroutine to define using a User-written subroutine SFOSUB or you can specify

an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed to a
user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.
Force Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none. By
Display default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-
component forces.

Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces

When you create a single-component force, you have three options for specifying the number of parts
affected and the direction of the force:
• Space fixed - Applies the single-component force to one part, or action body, that you select.
Adams/View automatically applies the reaction force to ground. You specify a direction for the
force. The direction never changes. It remains fixed in space during the simulation, even if the
action body moves because the marker used to define the force direction is attached to the
ground part.
 7
Forces

• Body moving - Applies the single-component force to one part, or action body, that you select.
Adams/View automatically applies the reaction force to ground. You specify a direction for the
force. The direction can change during the simulation because the coordinate system marker
used to define the force direction is attached to the action body. You can attach the direction
marker to a different part when you modify the force.

• Two bodies - Applies the single-component force to two parts that you select, at two locations
that you select. Adams/View defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two
locations you selected.

Multi-Component Forces
To define more complex forces, you can use multi-component forces. Multi-component forces apply
translational and/or rotational force between two parts in your model using three or more orthogonal
components. The following lists the different types of multi-component forces:
• Three-component force
• Three-component torque
8 Adams/View
Forces

• Six-component general force

A multi-component force applies an action force to the first part you select, which is called the action
body. Adams/View automatically applies a corresponding reaction force to the second part you select,
which is called the reaction body. If you define the force characteristics as bushing-like, Adams/View
generates equations to represent a linear spring-damper in the specified component directions.
To define the points of application of the multi-component force, Adams/View creates a marker for each
part. The marker belonging to the action body is the action marker, and the marker belonging to the
reaction body is the reaction marker. Adams/View keeps the reaction marker coincident with the action
marker at all times. The reaction marker is often referred to as a floating marker because its location is
not fixed relative to the body to which it belongs. Action and reaction markers are also referred to as I
and J markers.
Adams/View also creates a third marker called a reference (R) marker that indicates the direction of the
force. You define the orientation of the reference marker when you create a multi-component force. You
can align the marker to the working grid, if it is turned on, or to the global coordinate system. You can
also orient the marker using any feature in your model, such as along an edge of a part.
Example of Action and Reaction Force Movement
The following figure illustrates the movement of reaction forces and the placement of the reference
marker. The figure shows a ball bouncing on a board. As the ball bounces, its location changes relative
to the board. The reaction forces applied to the board also change location because the reaction (J) marker
moves with the ball. The reaction forces applied to the board do not change direction because the
reference (R) marker belongs to the stationary board.

Tip: You can use the Info command to see the markers that Adams/View creates for a multi-
component force. You can also see the markers when you modify the force. Learn about
Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information Window.
 9
Forces

Total Force Equations

For a six-component general force and a three-component force, the total force that Adams/Solver
supplies is the vector sum of the individual force components that you specify. Its magnitude is the square
root of the sum of the squares of the three mutually-orthogonal force components:

F a = FXx̂ rm + FYŷ rm + FZẑ rm

where:

• F a is the action applied to the action body.

• FX is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the x-component.
• FY is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the y-component.
• FZ is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the z-component.

• x̂ rm is a unit vector along the + x direction of the reference marker.

• ŷ rm is a unit vector along the + y direction of the reference marker.

• ẑ rm is a unit vector along the + z direction of the reference marker.

The values of the reaction forces are:

Fr = –Fa
where r is the reaction force applied to the reaction body. If you apply the force to a part and ground,
Adams/Solver does not calculate the reaction forces.

Total Torque Equations

For a Six-component general force and a Three-component torque, the magnitude of the torque is the
square root of the sum of the squares of the magnitudes of the three mutually orthogonal torque
components, such that:

T a = TXx̂ rm + TYŷ rm + TZẑ rm

where:

• T a is the action applied to the action body.

• TX is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the x component according to
the right-hand rule.
• TY is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the y component according to
the right-hand rule.
10 Adams/View
Forces

• TZ is the user-defined function defining the magnitude and sign of the z component according to
the right-hand rule.

• x̂ rm is a unit vector along the + x direction of the reference marker.

• ŷ rm is a unit vector along the + y direction of the reference marker.

• ẑ rm is a unit vector along the + z direction of the reference marker.
The reaction torque applied to the reaction body is:

Tr = –Ta

where T r is the reaction torque applied to the reaction body. If you apply the torque to a part and ground,
Adams/Solver does not calculate the reaction torques.

Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts

When you create Multi-Component forces, Adams/View provides you with shortcuts for specifying the
parts to which the force is to be applied. As you create a multi-component force, you can select one of
the methods listed below. These methods also apply to bushings, fields, and torsion springs.
• 1 Location - Lets you select the location of the force and have Adams/View determine the two
parts to which it should be applied. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the point of
application. If there is only one part near the point, Adams/View applies the force to that part and
ground. Note that letting Adams/View select the parts is only appropriate when two parts are
located near each other and when it does not matter which part is the action body and which is
the reaction body.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you select the two parts to which the force will be applied and the
common point of application on each part. The first part you select is the action body; the second
part is the reaction body.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you select the two parts to which the force is applied and a
different location for the force on each part. If the markers defining the locations of the forces are
not coincident and aligned, the forces may be nonzero at the beginning of the simulation.
 11
Forces

The table summarizes the bodies and locations you specify as you create a force.

The method: Number of bodies: Number of points:

1 Location 0 1
2 Bodies - 1 Location 2 1
2 Bodies - 2 Locations 2 2

Tip: To precisely orient your force, first orient the Working grid so its x-, y-, and z-axes align
with the desired force axes. Then, use the Normal To Grid orientation method when you
create the force. Learn about the Working Grid dialog box

Creating Multi-Component Forces

To create multi-component forces:

1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select either:
• to create a three-component force.
• to create a three-component torque.
• to create a six-component general force.
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• The method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application points. You can select
the following:
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current Working grid, if it is
displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as along an edge or normal to the face of a part.
• The characteristics of the force. You can select the following:
• Constant force/torque - Enter a constant force or torque value or let Adams/View use the
default value.
• Bushing-like - Enter stiffness and damping coefficients and let Adams/View create a
function expression for damping and stiffness based on the coefficient values.
12 Adams/View
Forces

• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you. After you create the force, you
modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a standard User-written
subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also specify your own rotine with
ROUTINE Argument.
3. Click the bodies.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along direction vectors using features, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct x-axis orientation and then click
again for the y-axis orientation.

Modifying Multi-Component Forces

The procedure below modifies the following for a Multi-Component force:
• Action and reaction body to which the force is applied or the action and reaction markers.
• reference marker.
• Force magnitude.
• Force graphics.

Learn about:
• Total Force Equations
• Total Torque Equations
• Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts

To modify a multi-component force:

1. Display a Modify Force dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
 13
Forces

2. Set the following in the dialog box, and then select OK.

To: Do the following:

Set the bodies or markers From the pull-down menus, select whether or not you want to define the
used in defining the force force using bodies or markers. Then, enter values in the text boxes, as
appropriate. The text boxes that are available depend on how you
defined the direction of the force.

• Action Part/Action Marker - Change the action body or

marker to which the force is applied.
• Reaction Part/Reaction Marker - Change the reaction body or
marker that receives the reaction forces.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Change the reference In the Reference Marker text box, change the reference marker that
marker that indicates the indicates the direction of the force.
direction of the force
Change how the Set Define Using to how you want to define the force. Select:
characteristics of the force
are defined • Function to define using a numerical value or function
expression, and then enter either a constant force value or
function expression for each component of the force. To enter a
function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select
the More button to display the Function Builder.

• Subroutine to define using a User-written subroutine, and then

enter the parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine
and the ID of the force being modified. In the Routine text box,
you can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE
Argument.
Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts,
both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the
action body.

Flexible Connectors

Bushings
Creating Bushings
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that
you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
14 Adams/View
Forces

Learn about Constitutive Equations for Bushings.

To create a bushing:
1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Bushing tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force;
Adams/View automatically calculates the x- and y-axes.
• The translational and rotational stiffness and damping properties for the bushing.
3. Click the bodies.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.

Modifying Bushings
The following procedure modifies the following for a Bushing:
• The two bodies to which the forces are applied.
• Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.
• Force graphics.

Learn about Constitutive Equations for Bushings.

To modify a bushing:
1. Display the Modify Bushing dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
 15
Forces

2. Enter the values in the dialog box as explained the table below, and then select OK.

To: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Set the bodies used in Change the following as necessary in the following text boxes. The text boxes
defining the force available depend on how you defined the direction of the force.

• Action Body - Change the action body to which the force is applied.
• Reaction Body - Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Change the properties For the translational force applied by the bushing, enter:
of the force
• Three stiffness coefficients.
• Three viscous-damping coefficients. The force due to damping is zero
when there are no relative translational velocities between the markers
on the action and reaction bodies.
• Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate
the magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of
the coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when
both the relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers
on the action and reaction bodies are zero.
For the rotational (torque) properties, enter:

• Three stiffness coefficients.

• Three viscous-damping coefficients. The torque due to damping is
zero when there are no relative rotational velocities between the
markers on the action and reaction bodies.
• Three constant torque (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the torque components about the x-, y-, and z-axes of the
coordinate system marker on the reaction body (J marker) when both
the relative rotational displacement and velocity of the markers on the
action and reaction bodies are zero.
Set force graphics Set Force Display to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the
parts, both, or none.
16 Adams/View
Forces

Constitutive Equations for Bushings

The following constitutive equations define how Adams/View uses the data for a linear Bushing to apply
a force and a torque to the action body depending on the displacement and velocity of the I marker on the
action body relative to the J marker on the reaction body.

Note: A bushing has the same constitutive relation form as a field element. The primary
difference between the two forces is that nondiagonal coefficients (Kij and Cij, where i is
not equal to j) are zero for a bushing. You only define the diagonal coefficients (Kii and
Cii) when creating a bushing. For more on field elements, see Field ElementTool.

where:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• x, y, and z are measure numbers of the bushing deformation vector in the coordinate system of
the J marker.
• Vx, Vy, and Vz are time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
• F1, F2, and F3 are measure numbers of any constant preload force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
 17
Forces

• a, b, and c are projected, small-angle rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the
J marker.
• wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
• T1, T2, and T3 are measure numbers of any constant preload torque components in the
coordinate system of the J marker.
The bushing element applies an equilibrating force and torque to the J marker in the following way:

where:

•  is the instantaneous deformation vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at
the J marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque at the J marker is
usually not equal to the torque at the I marker because of the moment arm due to the deformation
of the bushing element.
For the rotational constitutive equations to be accurate, at least two of the rotations (a, b, c) must be small.
That is, two of the three values must remain smaller than 10 degrees. In addition, if a becomes greater
than 90 degrees, b becomes erratic. If b becomes greater than 90 degrees, a becomes erratic. Only c can
become greater than 90 degrees without causing convergence problems. For these reasons, it is best to
define your bushing such that angles a and b remain small (not a and c and not b and c).

Translational Spring Dampers

A translational spring damper represents forces acting between two parts over a distance and along a
particular direction. You specify the locations of the spring damper and points on two parts. Adams/View
calculates the spring and damping forces based on the distance between the locations on the two parts
and their rate of change, respectively.
It applies an action force to the first part you select, called the action body, and applies an equal and
opposite reaction force to the second part you select, called the reaction body. The forces are both directed
along the line connecting the spring-damper endpoints, often called the line of sight. A positive action
18 Adams/View
Forces

force tends to push the action body away from the reaction body. A negative action force tends to pull
the action body toward the reaction body.

You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use splines to define the relationships
of damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a
pure damper or set the damping value to 0 to create a pure spring.
You can also set a reference length for the spring, as well as a preload force. By default, Adams/View
uses the length of the spring damper when you create it as its reference length.

Creating Translational Spring Dampers

You add a Translational spring damper to your model by defining the locations on two parts between
which the spring damper acts. You define the action force that is applied to the first location, and
Adams/Solver automatically applies the equal and opposite reaction force to the second location.

Learn about Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers.

To create a spring damper:

1. From the Create Forces palette or tool stack, select the Translational Spring Damper tool .
2. If desired, in the Settings container, enter stiffness (K) and damping (C) coefficients.
3. Select a location for the spring damper on the first part. This is the action body.
4. Select a location for the spring damper on the second part. This is the reaction body.

Modifying Translational Spring Dampers

For a Translational spring damper, you can modify:
• Parts between which the spring damper acts.
• Stiffness and damping values, including specifying splines that defines the relationship of
stiffness to displacement and damping to velocity. Learn about Splines.
• Preload values.
• Whether or not spring, damper, and force graphics appear.
 19
Forces

Learn about Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers.

To modify a spring damper:

1. Display the Modify a Spring-Damper Force dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. In the Action Body and Reaction Body text boxes, change the parts to which the spring-damper
force is applied, if desired.
3. Enter values for stiffness and damping as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

To: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Stiffness Select one of the following:

• Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring damper.
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation. Learn about Splines.
Damping Select one of the following:

• Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the spring
damper.
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force
to velocity. Learn about Splines.
20 Adams/View
Forces

To: Do the following:

Length and preload • In the Preload text box, enter the preload force for the spring damper.
of spring Preload force is the force of the spring damper in its reference position.
• Select either:
• Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring
damper when you created it as its reference length.
• Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its
preload position.
Tip: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the same
as the spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-zero, then
the displacement at preload is not the same as the spring’s free
length.
Set graphics Set any of the following:

• Graphics - Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always
off, or on whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
• Force Display - Specify whether you want to display force graphics for
one of the parts, both, or none. By default, Adams/View displays the
force graphic on the action body.
• Damper Graphic - Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are
always on, always off, or on whenever you have defined a damping
coefficient.

Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers

The magnitude of the translational force of a spring damper is linearly dependent upon the relative
displacement and velocity of the two locations that define the endpoints of the spring damper. The
following linear relation describes the action force:
force = -C(dr/dt) - K(r - LENGTH) + PRELOAD
where:
• r is the distance between the two locations that define the spring damper measured along the
line-of-sight between them.
• dr/dt is the relative velocity of the locations along the line-of-sight between them.
• C is the viscous damping coefficient.
• K is the spring stiffness coefficient.
• PRELOAD defines the reference force of the spring.
• LENGTH defines the reference length, so that when r = LENGTH, then force = PRELOAD.
 21
Forces

Torsion Springs
A torsion spring force is a rotational spring-damper applied between two parts. It applies the action
torque to the first part you select, called the action body, and applies an equal and opposite reaction torque
to the second part you select, called the reaction body.
Adams/View creates a marker at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the
I marker. The marker on the second location that you specify is called the J marker. The right-hand rule
defines a positive torque. Adams/View assumes that the z-axes of the I and J markers remain aligned at
all times.
The following linear constitutive equation describes the torque applied at the first body:
torque = -CT*da/dt - KT*(a-ANGLE) + TORQUE
Adams/Solver automatically computes the terms da/dt and a. The term a is the angle between the x axes
of the I and the J markers. Adams/Solver takes into account the total number of complete turns.

You can specify the damping and stiffness values as coefficients or use a spline to define the relationship
of damping to velocity or stiffness to displacement. You can also set the stiffness value to 0 to create a
pure damper or set the damping values to 0 to create a pure spring. Learn about defining Splines.
You can also set the rotation angle of the torsion spring when it is in its preload state and any preload
forces on the spring. By default, Adams/View uses the rotation angle of the torsion spring when you
create it as its preload angle.

Creating Torsion Springs

To create a Torsion spring:

1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Torsion Spring tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 location
• 2 bodies - 1 location
22 Adams/View
Forces

• 2 bodies - 2 locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
• How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force;
Adams/View calculates the x- and y-axes automatically.
• The torsional stiffness (KT) and torsional damping (CT) coefficients.
3. Click the bodies, unless Adams/View is automatically selecting them (1 location method).
4. Click one or two force-application points, depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector using a feature, move the cursor around
in your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the
force oriented. Click when the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation.

Modifying Torsion Springs

After you’ve created a Torsion spring, you can modify:
• Parts between which the torque acts
• Stiffness and damping values
• Preload values
• Force graphics

To modify a torsion spring:

1. Display the Modify a Torsion Spring dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. In the Action Body and Reaction Body text boxes, change the parts to which the torsion spring
is applied, if desired.
 23
Forces

3. Enter values for stiffness and damping as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

To: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Stiffness Select one of the following:

• Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the torsion

spring.
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure
damper.
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship
of force to deformation. Learn about Splines.
Damping Select one of the following:

• Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the

torsion spring.
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure
spring.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship
of force to velocity. Learn about Splines.
Preload force and angle of • In the Preload text box, enter the preload force for the torsion
spring spring. Preload force is the force of the torsion spring in its
preload position.
• Select either:
• Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when
you created it as its preload position.
• Angle at Preload and enter the angle of the spring at its
preload position.
Set graphics Set Torque Display to whether you want to display force graphics for
one of the parts, both, or none.

Beams
A beam creates a linear translational and rotational force between two locations that define the endpoints
of the beam. It creates markers at each endpoint. The marker on the action body, the first part you select,
is the I marker. The marker on the reaction body, the second part you select, is the J marker. The forces
the beam produces are linearly dependent on the relative displacements and velocities of the markers at
the beam’s endpoints.
See Beam example of two markers (I and J) that define the endpoints of the beam and indicates the twelve
forces (s1 to s12) it produces.
24 Adams/View
Forces

The x-axis of the J marker defines the centroidal axis of the beam. The y-axis and z-axis of the J marker
are the principal axes of the cross section. They are perpendicular to the x-axis and to each other. When
the beam is in an undeflected position, the I marker has the same angular orientation as the J marker, and
the I marker lies on the x-axis of the J marker. Adams/View applies the following forces in response to
the translational and the rotational deflections of the I marker with respect to the J marker:
• Axial forces (s1 and s7)
• Bending moments about the y-axis and z-axis (s5, s6, s11, and s12)
• Twisting moments about the x-axis (s4 and s10)
• Shear forces (s2, s3, s8, and s9)

You can use a field element instead of a beam to define a beam with characteristics unlike those that the
beam assumes. For example, a field element can define a beam with a nonuniform cross section or a beam
with nonlinear material characteristics.

Caution: By definition a beam is asymmetric. Holding the J marker fixed and deflecting the I marker
produces different results than holding the I marker fixed and deflecting the J marker by
the same amount. This asymmetry occurs because the coordinate system frame that the
deflection of the beam is measured in moves with the J marker.

Constitutive Equations for Beams

The following constitutive equations define how Adams/Solver uses the data for a linear field to apply a
force and a torque to the I marker on the action body of a Beam. The force and torque it applies depends
 25
Forces

on the displacement and velocity of the I marker relative to the J marker on the reaction body. The
constitutive equations are analogous to those in the finite element method.

where:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are the measure numbers of the translational force components in the coordinate
system of the J marker.
• x, y, and z are the translational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker
measured in the coordinate system of the J marker.
• Vx, Vy, and Vz are the time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are the rotational force components in the coordinate system of the J marker.
• a, b, and c are the relative rotational displacements of the I marker with respect to the J marker as
expressed in the x-, y-, and z-axis, respectively, of the J marker.
• wx, wy, and wz are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.

Note: Both matrixes, Cij and Kij, are symmetric, that is, Cij=Cji and Kij=Kji. You define the
twenty-one unique damping coefficients when you modify the beam.

Adams/Solver defines each Kij in the following way:

K11 = E A / LK22 = 12 E Izz /[L3 (1+Py)]
26 Adams/View
Forces

K26 = -6 E Izz /[L2 (1+Py)]

K33 = 12 E Iyy /[L3 (1+Pz)]
K35 = 6 E Iyy /[L2 (1+Pz)]
K44 = G Ixx / L
K55 = (4+Pz) E Iyy /[L (1+Pz)]
K66 = (4+Py) E Izz /[L (1+Py)]
where:
• E = Young’s modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
• A = Uniform area of the beam cross section.
• L = Undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis.
• Py = 12 E Izz ASY/(G A L2)
• z = 12 E Iyy ASZ/(G A L2)
• ASY = Correction factor (shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the y direction for Timoshenko
beams.
• ASZ = Shear area ratio for shear deflection in the z direction for Timoshenko beams.

Adams/Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker on the reaction body, as defined
by the following equations:

L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J
marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite,
because of the force transfer.

Creating Beams

To create a beam:
1. From the Create Forces palette or tool stack, select the Massless Beam tool .
2. Select a location for the beam on the first part. This is the action body.
3. Select a location for the beam on the second part. This is the reaction body.
4. Select the direction in the upward (y) direction for the cross-section geometry.

Modifying Beams
After you’ve created a Beam, you can modify the following:
• Markers between which the beam acts.
• Stiffness and damping values.
• Material properties of the beam, such as its length and area.
 27
Forces

Learn about Constitutive Equations for Beams.

To modify a beam:
1. Display the Force Modify Element Like Beam dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. In the New Beam Name text box, enter a new name for the beam, if desired.
3. In the Solver ID text box, assign a unique ID number to the beam.
4. Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and identify the beam.
5. Enter values for the beam properties as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

To set: Do the following:

Area moments of Enter the following:
inertia
• In the Ixx text box, enter the torsional constant. The torsional constant
is sometimes referred to as the torsional shape factor or torsional
stiffness coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to the fourth power.
For a solid circular section, Ixx is identical to the polar moment of
inertia J= . For thin-walled sections, open sections, and non-
circular sections, you should consult a handbook.
• In the Iyy and Izz text boxes, enter the area moments of inertia about
the neutral axes of the beam cross sectional areas (y-y and z-z). These
are sometimes referred to as the second moment of area about a given
axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid
circular section, Iyy=Izz= . For thin-walled sections, open
sections, and non-circular sections, you should consult a handbook.
Area of the beam cross In the Area of Cross Section text box, enter the uniform area of the beam
section cross-section geometry. The centroidal axis must be orthogonal to this cross
section.
28 Adams/View
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Shear area ratio In the Y Shear Area Ratio and Z Shear Area Ratio text boxes, specify the
correction factor (the shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the y and z
direction for Timoshenko beams. If you want to neglect the deflection due to
shear, enter zero in the text boxes.

For the y direction:

where:

• Qy is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a force

in the z direction.
• lz is the cross section dimension in the z direction.
For the z direction:

where:

• Qz is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a force

in the y direction.
• ly is the cross section dimension in the y direction.
Common values for shear area ratio based on the type of cross section are:

• Solid rectangular - 6/5

• Solid circular - 10/9
• Thin wall hollow circular - 2
Note: The K1 and K2 terms that are used by MSC/NASTRAN for
defining the beam properties using PBEAM are the inverse of the y
shear and z shear values that Adams/View uses.
Young’s and shear In the Young’s Modulus and Shear Modulus text boxes, enter Young’s and
modulus of elasticity shear modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
Length of beam Enter the undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis of the J marker on
the reaction body.
 29
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Damping ratio or Select either:
damping matrix
• Damping Ratio and enter a damping value to establish a ratio for
calculating the structural damping matrix for the beam. To obtain the
damping matrix, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by the
value you enter for the damping ratio.
• Matrix of Damping Terms and enter a six-by-six structural damping
matrix for the beam. Because this matrix is symmetric, you only need
to specify one-half of the matrix. The following matrix shows the
values to input:

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures
that damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams/Solver does
not warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
30 Adams/View
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Markers that define Specify the two markers between which to define a beam. The I marker is on
the beam the action body and the J marker is on the reaction body. The J marker
establishes the direction of the force components.

By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to
the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed configuration,
the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.

When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.

When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not correctly
describe the beam behavior. Adams/Solver issues a warning message if the
beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the undeformed
length.

Field Elements
A field element applies a translational and rotational action-reaction force between two locations.
Adams/View creates markers at each location. The marker on the first location you specify is called the
I marker. The marker on the second location you specify is called the J marker. Adams/View applies the
component translational and rotational forces for a field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on
the J marker.
The field element can apply either a linear or nonlinear force, depending on the values you specify after
you create the field.
• To specify a linear field, enter values that define a six-by-six stiffness matrix, translational and
rotational preload values, and a six-by-six damping matrix. The stiffness and damping matrixes
must be positive semidefinite, but need not be symmetric. You can also specify a damping ratio
instead of specifying a damping matrix.
• To specify a nonlinear field, use the User-written subroutine FIESUB to define the three force
components and three torque components and to enter values to pass to FIESUB. (See the
Adams/Solver Subroutines online help.)
 31
Forces

Constitutive Equations for Field Elements

The following constitutive equations define how Adams/Solver uses the data for a linear field to apply a
force and a torque to the I marker depending on the displacement and velocity of the I marker relative to
the J marker.

For a nonlinear field, the following constitutive equations are defined in the FIESUB subroutine:

Adams/Solver applies the defined forces and torques at the I marker. In the linear and nonlinear
equations:
• Fx, Fy, and Fz are the three translational force measure numbers.
• Tx, Ty, and Tz are the three rotational force measure numbers associated with unit vectors
directed along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the J marker.
32 Adams/View
Forces

• K is the stiffness matrix.

• x0, y0, z0, a0, b0, and c0 are the free lengths.
• x, y, z, a, b, and c are the translational and the rotational displacements of the I marker with
respect to the J marker expressed in the coordinate system of the J marker.
• Vx, Vy, and Vz are the scalar time derivatives of x, y, and z, respectively.
• x, y, and z are the measure numbers of the angular velocity of the I marker as seen by the J
marker, expressed in the J marker coordinate system.
• C is the damping matrix.
• F1, F2, F3, T1, T2, and T3 are the translational and rotational pre-tensions.

Adams/Solver computes all variables and time derivatives in the J marker coordinate system.
Adams/Solver applies an equilibrating force and torque at the J marker, as defined by the following
equations:
Fj = - Fi
Tj = - Ti - L Fi
L is the instantaneous displacement vector from the J marker to the I marker. While the force at the J
marker is equal and opposite to the force at the I marker, the torque is usually not equal and opposite,
because of the force transfer.

Cautions for Field Elements

• For the constitutive equations of a field element to be accurate, at least two of the rotations (a, b,
c) must be small. That is, two of the three values must remain smaller than 10 degrees. In
addition, if a becomes greater than 90 degrees, b becomes erratic. If b becomes greater than 90
degrees, a becomes erratic. Only c can become greater than 90 degrees without causing
convergence problems. For these reasons, it is best to define your field such that angles a and b
(not a and c and not b and c) remain small.
• The three rotational displacements (a, b, and c) that define the field are not Euler angles. They
are the projected angles of the I marker with respect to the J marker. Adams/Solver measures
them about the x-, y-, and z-axes of the J marker.
• The K and C matrices must be positive semidefinite. In other words:
xtK x > 0 for all non-zero displacements x, and
ytC y > 0 for all non-zero velocities y
If this is not true, the stiffness matrix of the field may be removing energy from the system.
Similarly, the damping matrix may be adding energy to the system. Both of these situations are
uncommon. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not warn you if the C matrix, K matrix, or both are
not positive semidefinite. While Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not require that these matrices
be symmetric, it is most realistic.
 33
Forces

Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices

The elements of the stiffness and damping matrices for a field element have mixed units because each of
the 6x6 matrices is assembled from four 3x3 matrices, each having consistent units within itself, but
different from each other.
The stiffness matrix is multiplied by displacements (both linear and angular) to give the forces (both
linear and torsional). Here (x, y, z) is the displacement vector and (a, b, c) are the displacement angles. F
and T are the force and torque vectors.
[ | ] [ x ] [ Fx ]
[ Force/Length | Force/Angle ] [ y ] [ Fx ]
[ | ] [ z ] [ Fx ]
-----------------|--------------- =
[ | ] [ a ] [ Tx ]
[ Torque/Length | Torque/Angle ] [ b ] [ Ty ]
[ | ] [ b ] [ Tz ]

Creating Field Elements

When you create a Field element, you define the location of the force element. SD Suspension creates I
and J markers defining the location and direction of the field. To define other properties of the field
element, such as its damping values, you must modify the field.

To create a field element:

1. From the Create Forces tool stack or palette, select the Field tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
How you want the force applied to parts. You can select the following:
• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
How you want the force oriented. You can select:
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes of the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y, and z-axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a feature in your model,
such as the face of a part. The direction vector you select defines the z-axis for the force;
Adams/View automatically calculates the x- and y-axes.
The translational and rotational stiffness and damping properties for the bushing.
3. Click the bodies unless Adams/View is automatically selecting them.
4. Click one or two force-application points depending on the location method you selected.
5. If you selected to orient the force along a direction vector on a feature, move the cursor around in
your model to display an arrow that shows the direction along a feature where you want the force
oriented. When the direction vector shows the correct z-axis orientation, click.
34 Adams/View
Forces

Modifying Field Elements

After creating a Field element, you can modify it to define a linear or nonlinear force.

To modify a field element:

1. Display the Force Modify Element Like Field dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. In the New Field Name text box, enter a new name for the field element, if desired.
3. In the Solver ID text box, assign a unique ID number to the beam.
4. Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and identify the beam.
5. Enter the values in the dialog box as explained the table below, and then select OK.

To set: Do the following:

Markers that define the In the I marker Name and J marker Name text boxes, specify the two
field markers between which the force and torque are to be exerted.
Translational and Enter the preload translational and rotational force for the field element in the
rotational preload of Preload text boxes.
field
• Translation at Preload to define three reference lengths. This is the
nominal (x0, y0, z0) position of the I marker with respect to the
J marker, resolved in the J marker coordinate system.
• Rotation at Preload to define the reference rotational displacement
of the axes of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in
the J marker axes (a0, b0, and c0) (specified in radians).
If the reference force is zero, then the preload is the same as the free length.
Entering preload values is optional and defaults to a six zero entry.
Force preload or Select one of the following:
parameters to a User-
written subroutine • Define Using Standard Values and enter values for the text boxes
that appear in the dialog box as explained in the next rows of this
table.
• Define Using Subroutine and enter parameters to be passed to the
user-written subroutine FIESUB. to define a nonlinear field. Enter up
to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to FIESUB. For
more on the FIESUB subroutine and nonlinear fields, see the
Adams/Solver online help.
You can also specify an alternative library and name for the
subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own
routine with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Define Using Standard Values, the following options appear:
 35
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Force and torque In the Force Preload and Torque Preload text boxes, define three preload
preload force components and three preload torque components transferred by the
field element when the I and J markers are separated/misaligned by the values
specified in the Translation at Preload and Rotation at Preload text boxes.

The terms are the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axis of the J marker
and the torque components about the x, y-, and z-axis of the J marker,
respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and Torque Preload is optional
and defaults to six zero entries.
36 Adams/View
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Stiffness matrix In the Stiffness Matrix text box, define a six-by-six matrix of stiffness
coefficients. The following matrix shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for
field elements.

Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for
the stiffness matrix.
 37
Forces

To set: Do the following:

Damping coefficients Enter either a matrix of damping terms or a damping ratio if you want to
include damping coefficients in the calculation of the field forces as explained
below. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries.

• To define a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping coefficients, select

Matrix of Damping Terms and enter the elements. The following
matrix shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about Defining the Elements of the Stiffness and Damping Matrices for
field elements.

• To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix
to the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If
you enter a damping ratio, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness
matrix by the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio
without also entering a stiffness matrix.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for
the damping matrix.

Modal Forces
A modal force, or MFORCE, allows you to distribute a force to one or more, or all nodes of a flexible
body. The force can vary in time or position and can even be made dependent on a state variable.
Examples of modal force applications are pressures on journal bearings, simulating magnetically induced
fields, or the modeling of airfoil flutter. Modal forces are a special class of forces called distributed loads
that can only be applied to flexible bodies.
For a detailed overview of distributed loads and a tutorial that steps you through an example of adding
modal forces to your model, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies.
Adams/View provides three options for defining MFORCEs on flexible bodies. All options require
additional work outside of Adams/View to complete the definition and simulation of modal forces.
38 Adams/View
Forces

• Reference and scale a load case defined in the flexible body's modal load matrix. This option can
only be used in Adams/View on flexible bodies that have been built with Modal Neutral File
(MNF) that contains modal load case information. For more information on flexible bodies, their
modal load matrix, and how to generate modal load case information in an MNF, see Creating
Loadcase Files.
• Specify the modal force as a product of a modal load case and scale function defined in a User-
written subroutine. The scale function can depend on time or the state of the system. The load
case can only be a function of time.
• Directly specify the components of a modal force in a User-written subroutine. Each component
can depend on time or the state of the system. This option is only available in Adams/Solver
(C++).
The last two options provide much more capability in defining modal forces. To take advantage
of these options, however, you need to develop a MFOSUB routine that is built into the
Adams/Solver. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online
help.

More than one modal force can be defined on a flexible body. For each modal force defined on a flexible
body a modal force icon appears at its local part reference frame. You can transfer modal forces from one
flexible body to another.
Learn more:
1. Creating a Modal Force
2. Modifying a Modal Force
3. Copying and Deleting a Modal Force
4. Viewing Modal Preloads of Flexible Bodies

Creating Modal Forces

To create a modal force:
1. From the Main toolbox, from the Create Forces tool stack, select the Modal Force tool .
The Create/Modify Modal Force dialog box appears.
2. In the Create Modal Force dialog box, specify the following:
 39
Forces

Options in Create Modal Force Dialog Box

To: Do the following:

Assign a name to the In the Force Name text box, enter the name of the modal force to be created.
MFORCE Adams/View automatically assigns a default name of MFORCE followed by
an underscore and a number to make the name unique (for example,
MFORCE_1).
Specify the flexible In the Flexible Body text box, enter the name of the flexible body.
body to which the
MFORCE is applied Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
40 Adams/View
Forces

To: Do the following:

Apply the reaction of If desired, in the Reaction Part text box, enter the name of an existing part. If
the modal force you enter a part name, Adams/View automatically creates a Floating marker
resultant to a part associated with this part when it creates the MFORCE. Adams/View keeps the
marker coincident with the flexible body analysis coordinate system during the
simulation. Therefore, the need for the point of reaction to be a floating marker.

In addition, because floating markers cannot be defined on flexible bodies, the

reaction part is restricted to rigid bodies only.

Note: You can use the Info command to see the floating marker that
Adams/View creates when you reference a reaction part. Learn about
Displaying Object Information and Accessing Information Window.
Select how you want Select the following from Define Using:
to define the modal
force. • Function - Lets you select the modal load case and scale function of
the MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
• Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute
the modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal
force applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on
time or the state of the system. The load case can only be a function of
time.
• Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute
the modal force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal
force can depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams/Solver
(C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings -
Executable dialog box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams/Solver
that contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the
modal force. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the
Adams/Solver online help.
You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user
subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own
routine with ROUTINE Argument.

3. If you select to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify:
• Load Case - Lets you select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal load case
labels is generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
 41
Forces

• Scale Function - Lets you specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the
modal load case.
4. Select OK.

Modifying Modal Forces

You can modify an existing MFORCE in the following ways:
• The flexible body to which the modal forces is applied.
• The part to which the reaction resultant of the modal force is applied.
• The definition of the modal force.

To modify a MFORCE:
1. Display the Create/Modify Modal Force dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog
Boxes.
2. Follow the instructions in the dialog box help.
3. Select OK.

Copying and Deleting a Modal Force

You can copy and delete MFORCEs just like you copy and delete other objects in Adams/View. See
Copying Objects and Deleting Objects.

Note: When you copy a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified or as a result, a Floating
marker referenced, Adams/View also creates a new floating marker.

In addition, when you delete a MFORCE that has a reaction part specified, Adams/View
does not delete its referenced floating marker.

Viewing Modal Preloads of Flexible Bodies

A special form of a modal load in a flexible body is a modal preload. Since modal preloads are an integral
property of the flexible body, you do not have the ability to modify these loads in Adams/View. You can,
however, inspect the values of these preloads for each mode. In Adams/View, there are two ways to
review the modal preloads of a flexible body.
For a detailed overview of modal preloads and a tutorial that steps you through an example of modeling
preloads, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies.

To review the modal preloads using the Flexible Body Modify dialog box:
1. Double-click the flexible body to display the Flexible Body Modify dialog box.
42 Adams/View
Forces

2. From the Flexible Body Modify dialog box, select Modal ICs.
The Modify Modal ICs... dialog box appears. Preloads for the flexible body appear in the last
column.
3. Review the preloads, and then select Close.

To obtain a listing of the preloads using the Info command:

1. Display information on the flexible body as explained in Displaying Object Information and
Accessing Information Window.
2. In the Information Window, select Verbose, and then select Apply.
The modal preload values appear in the last column of the modal frequency table.

Viewing Modal Forces

You can review modal forces on flexible bodies in Adams/PostProcessor as:
• Curves
• Contour plots
• Vector plots

No matter what form, the modal force results are presented with respect to the flexible body’s local part
reference frame. This is unlike most other Adams force elements that are plotted with respect to the
ground coordinate system, by default. For a detailed overview of modal forces and a tutorial that steps
you through an example of creating a modal force, see Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed
Flexible Bodies.

Note: • To create a contour or vector plot of a modal force, the MNF of the associated
flexible body must contain nodal masses. You can use the MNF browser to check
if the MNF contains nodal masses, see Browsing an MNF or an MD DB.
• Because modal forces can depend on the state of the system, you must run a
simulation before viewing the results of a modal force.

To review a modal force component as a curve:

1. Start Adams/PostProcessor, and then set its mode to plotting (see Modes).
2. From the Dashboard, set Source to Result Sets.
The dashboard changes to show the results available for plotting.
3. From the Result Set list, select the modal force object whose characteristics you want to plot.
4. From the Component list, select the component of the modal force. FX, FY, FZ, TX, TY, and TZ
are the resultant force and torque components with respect to the flexible body’s local part
reference frame. FQi is the ith modal component of the modal force.
5. Select Add Curves to add the data curve to the current plot.
 43
Forces

To review a modal force as a contour plot:

1. Set the Adams/PostProcessor mode to animation.
2. Right-click the background of a viewport, and then select Load Animation.
3. From the Treeview in Adams/PostProcessor, select the flexible body on which you want to display
the modal force plot.
4. In the Property Editor, set Plot Type to Both.
5. In the dashboard, select the Contour Plots tab.
6. Set Contour Plot Type to the component of the modal force you want to review. Remember that
the modal force components are with respect to the flexible body’s local part reference frame.
Next, Adams/PostProcessor computes the minimum and maximum values of the modal force.
This can take a few minutes because it requires interrogating the modal force values at every node
in every mode at every animation frame.
7. Select the Play button to animate the modal force contour plot.

To review a modal force as a vector plot:

1. Follow steps 1. through 4. in To Review a modal force as a contour plot above.
2. Select the Vector Plots tab in the dashboard.
3. Set Vector Plot Type to either Force or Torque.
4. Select the Play button to animate the modal force contour plot.
44 Adams/View
Forces
Contacts
Overview
Using contacts, you can go beyond just modeling how parts meet at points and model how solid bodies
react when they come in contact with one another when the model is in motion.
For more on the theory behind contact forces, see the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online
help.
See Solver Settings - Contacts dialog box help.

About Contact Forces

Contacts allow you to model how free-moving bodies interact with one another when they collide during
a simulation.
Contacts are grouped into two categories:
• Two-dimensional contacts, which include the interaction between planar geometric elements (for
example, circle, curve, and point)
• Three-dimensional contacts, which include the interaction between solid geometry (for example,
spheres, cylinders, enclosed shells, extrusions, and revolutions).
You currently cannot model contact between a two-dimensional and a three-dimensional geometry,
except for sphere-to-plane contact.
For more on the theory behind contact forces, see the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online
help.

Click here to see an Example of Using Contact Forces.

Contact Force Algorithms

Contact forces use two distinct normal force algorithms:
• Restitution-based contact
• IMPACT-Function-Based Contact

Note: Contact defined between planar geometry (for example, circle to curve) must be
constrained to lie in the same plane. You usually accomplish this using planar joints or an
equivalent set of Constraints that enforce the planarity.

Failure to enforce planarity will result in a run-time error when the bodies go out of plane
during a Simulation.
2 Adams/View
Contacts

You can also create your own contact force model by entering parameters to a User-written subroutine.

Supported Geometry in Contacts

Two-Dimensional Contacts
Adams/View supports two-dimensional contact between the following geometry:
• Arc
• Circle
• Polylines
• Splines
• Point
• Plane

For flexible bodies, only point-to-plane and point-to-curve contacts are supported, where the point is on
the flexible body. Adams/Solver (C++) can treat multiple points per CONTACT statement.
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) can only treat one point per CONTACT statement.

Note: You cannot have contacts between a point and another point and a plane and another plane.

Three-Dimensional Contacts
Adams/View supports three-dimensional contact between the following solid geometry:
• Sphere
• Cylinder
• Frustum
• Box
• Link
• Torus
• Extrusion
• Revolution
• Constructive, solid geometry (geometry combined from several geometries)
• Generic three-dimensional Parasolid geometry, including extrusion and revolution
• Shell (enclosed-volume only)

You can also create a contact between a three-dimensional elliposoid and a plane (sphere only).
 3
Contacts

In case of Adams/Solver C++, you can create three-dimensional contacts between flexible bodies as well
as between a flexible body and a Solid geometry. When a three-dimensional contact is created between
a flexible body and a solid geometry, it is mandatory that the rigid body is always the J geometry.
Adams/View also supports nonsolid, three-dimensional geometries, such as shells. Adams/View allows
you to select the free edges of shell elements. You can create contacts between flexible body edges as
well as between flexible body edge and a plane or a curve.

Creating/Modifying Contact Forces

To create or modify a contact force:

1. From the Force tool stack or palette, select the Contact Force tool .
The Create/Modify Contact dialog box appears.
2. Enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

Tip: You can change the direction of the force on some geometry (for example, circle, curve,
plane, and sphere) by selecting the Change Direction tool .
4 Adams/View
Contacts

To: Do the following:

Define type and geometry To define the geometry/flexible body that comes into contact:

1. Set Type to the type of geometry to come into contact. In case of

flexible bodies, you must either select the Flex Body To Flex Body
or Flex Body to Solid options. Flexible bodies can participate in
the contact only for Adams/Solver C++. In case of flex edge
contacts, select Flex Edge To Flex Edge or Flex Edge To Curve or
Flex Edge To Plane.
The text boxes change depending on the type of contact force you
selected.
2. In the text boxes, enter the name of the geometry or flexible body
objects. For solids and curves, you can enter more than one
geometry, but the geometry must belong to the same part. You can
select the objects from the screen or Database Navigator or type it
directly in the text box. If you type the geometry object name
directly in the text box, you must press Enter to register the value.
In case of "Flex Body to Solid" type of contacts, the rigid body
should always be the J geometry. Similarly in case of Flex Edge to
Curve or Plane type of contacts, Curve or Plane should always be
J geometries.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
If you want to change the direction of the force, in the Direction
pull-down menu, select the geometry on which you want to change
the force, and then select the Change Direction tool . This
is disabled in case of "Flex Body to Flex Body" and "Flex Body to
Solid" contacts but is available in all the Flex Edge contacts.
Turn on the force display Select Force Display, and then from the option menu, select a color for
for both normal and the force display.
friction forces and set its
color Note: If you are using an External Adams/Solver, you must set the
output files to XML to view the force display. See Solver
Settings - Output dialog box help
Refine the normal force Select Augmented Lagrangian.
between two sets of rigid
geometries that are in When you select Augmented Lagrangian, Adams/View uses iterative
contact refinement to ensure that penetration between the geometries is minimal.
It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is relatively insensitive to
the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material compliance
effects.

Note: Augmented Lagrangian is only available when defining a

Restitution-based contact.
 5
Contacts

To: Do the following:

Define a restitution-based To define the normal force as restitution-based:
contact
1. Set Normal Force to Restitution.
2. Enter a penalty value to define the local stiffness properties
between the contacting material.
A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry
into another will be small. Large values, however, will cause
numerical integration difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate
for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more information on how
to specify this value, see the Extended Definition for the
CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
3. Enter the coefficient of restitution, which models the energy loss
during contact.
4. A value of zero specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the
two colliding bodies.
5. A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no
energy loss.
The coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are
coming into contact. For information on material types versus commonly
used values of the coefficient of restitution, see the table for the
CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help. Restitution based
contacts is not available when flexible bodies are participating in the
contact.
6 Adams/View
Contacts

To: Do the following:

Define an impact contact To define the normal force as based on an impact using the IMPACT
function:

1. Set Normal Force to Impact.

2. Enter values for the following:
• Stiffness - Specifies a material stiffness that is to be used to
calculate the normal force for the impact model.
In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard the
bodies in contact are.
Note: When changing the length units in Adams/View, stiffnesses in
contacts are scaled by (length conversion factor**exponent).
When changing the force unit, stiffness is only scaled by the
force conversion factor.
• Force Exponent - Adams/Solver models normal force as a
nonlinear springdamper. If the damping penetration, above, is
the instantaneous penetration between the contacting
geometry, Adams/Solver calculates the contribution of the
material stiffness to the instantaneous normal forces as:
STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT
For more information, see the IMPACT function in the
Adams/Solver online help.
• Damping - Enter a value to define the damping properties of
the contacting material. A good rule of thumb is that the
damping coefficient is about one percent of the stiffness
coefficient.
• Penetration Depth - Enter a value to define the penetration at
which Adams/Solver turns on full damping. Adams/Solver
uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient
from zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the
penetration reaches the damping penetration. A reasonable
value for this parameter is 0.01 mm. For more information,
refer to the IMPACT function in the Adams/Solver online help.
Define your own contact 1. Set Normal Force to User Defined.
model 2. Enter parameters to the user-defined subroutine. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in
the Routine text box. Learn about ROUTINE Argument.
 7
Contacts

To: Do the following:

Model the friction effects 1. Set Friction Force to Coulomb.
at the contact locations 2. Set Coulomb Friction to On, Off, or Dynamics Only to define
using the Coulomb whether friction effects are to be included.
friction model
3. In the Static Coefficient text box, specify the coefficient of
Note: The friction friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is smaller than the
model models value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material types
dynamic friction versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction,
but not stiction. see Material Contact Properties Table.
For more on friction in Excessively large values of Static Coefficient can cause
contacts, see Contact integration difficulties.
Friction Force Calculation.
Range: Static Coefficient 0
In addition, read the
information for the 4. In the Dynamic Coefficient text box, specify the coefficient of
CONTACT statement in friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is larger than the
the Adams/Solver online value for Friction Transition Vel. For information on material
help. types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of the
dynamic coefficient of friction, see Material Contact Properties
Table.
Excessively large values of Dynamic Coefficient can cause
integration difficulties.
Range: 0 Dynamic Coefficient Static Coefficient
5. In the Static Transition Vel. text box, enter the static transition
velocity. Learn more about this value.
6. In the Friction Transition Vel. text box, enter the friction
transition velocity.
Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from
the value for Static Coefficent to the value for Dynamic
Coefficient as the slip velocity at the contact point increases.
When the slip velocity is equal to the value specified for Friction
Transition Vel., the effective coefficient of friction is set to
Dynamic Coefficient.
Note: Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties.
You should specify this value as:
Friction Transition Vel. 5* ERROR
where ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its
default value is 1E-3.
Range: Friction Transition Vel. Static Transition Vel. > 0
8 Adams/View
Contacts

To: Do the following:

Model the friction effects 1. Set Friction Force to User Defined.
at the contact locations 2. Enter parameters to a user-defined subroutine, CNFSUB, and enter
using your own model the name of the routine.
3. In the Static Transition Vel. text box, enter the static transition
velocity.
Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from
the value in Dynamic Coefficient to the value in Static Coefficent
as the slip velocity at the contact point decreases. When the slip
velocity is equal to the value you specify for Static Transition Vel.,
the effective coefficient of friction is set to the value in Static
Coefficient.
Range: 0 < Static Transition Vel. Friction Transition Vel
Note: A small value for Static Transition Vel. causes numerical
integrator difficulties. A general rule for specifying this value
is:
Static Transition Vel. ERROR
where ERROR is the accuracy requested of the integrator. Its
default value is 1E-3. See Solver Settings - Dynamic.

Simulation Results of Contact Forces

When you run a simulation, Adams/View automatically calculates specific attributes of contact forces.
The results appear in Adams/PostProcessor in plotting mode for objects.
For contact force:
• element_force
• element_torque

For tracks:
• Double-click a track to view:
• I_Point
• I_Normal_Force
• I_Friction_Force
• I_Normal_Unit_Vector
• I_Friction_Unit_Vector
• J_Point
• J_Normal_Force
• J_Friction_Force
 9
Contacts

• J_Normal_Unit_Vector
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector
• Slip_Deformation
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration

Learning More about the Contact Detection Algorithm

To greatly simplify the contact detection algorithm, Adams/Solver assumes that the volume of
intersection between two solids will be much, much less than the volume of either solid. This means that,
for example for a sphere in a V-groove, the Adams/Solver algorithm breaks down when the two contact
volumes merge into one. This assumption is not as drastic as it may first appear. The reason is that most
users are interested in contact between rigid bodies (that is, bodies that do not undergo a large
deformation). Also, rigid bodies generally do not penetrate very far into one another. Note that we do not
recommend that you use the contact detection algorithm in the modeling of very soft bodies.
After contact occurs between two solids, Adams/Solver computes the volumes of intersection. There may
be only one volume of intersection, or there may be multiple volumes of intersection (this would
correspond to multiple locations of contact). In this discussion, we assume that there is only a single
volume of intersection. The algorithm is the same for every intersection volume.
Once there is contact, Adams/Solver finds the centroid of the intersection volume. This is the same as the
center of mass of the intersection volume (assuming the intersection volume has uniform density).
Next, Adams/Solver finds the closest point on each solid to the centroid. The distance between these two
points is the penetration depth.
Adams/Solver then puts this distance into the formula:

F = K*(distance)n
where:
• K - material stiffness
• n - exponent
• F - force

to determine the contact force due to the material stiffness (there can also be damping and friction forces
in the contact).
For example, if you apply this algorithm to a sphere on a plate, the intersection volume is some type of
spherical shape with a flat side. The centroid of this volume can be computed (this is where most of the
time is spent in the algorithm). It will be below the plate and inside the sphere. The nearest point on the
plate (to the centroid) and the nearest point on the sphere (to the centroid) can also be computed. In this
case, the line between them will pass through the center of the sphere (this will also be the direction in
which the contact force acts).
10 Adams/View
Contacts

Again, the algorithm can handle the case of a sphere in a V-groove. There will be two volumes of
intersection and two separate forces will be applied to sphere and to the V-groove (equal and opposite
forces).

Contact Friction Force Calculation

Adams/Solver uses a relatively simple velocity-based friction model for contacts. Specifying the
frictional behavior is optional. The figure below shows how the coefficient of friction varies with slip
velocity.
Coefficient of Friction Varying with Slip Velocity
 11
Contacts

In this simple model:

Material Contact Properties Table

The table below shows material types and their commonly used values for the dynamic coefficient of
friction and restitution.

Material 1: Material 2: Mu static: Mu dynamic: Restitution Coefficient:

Dry steel Dry steel 0.70 0.57 0.80
Greasy steel Dry steel 0.23 0.16 0.90
Greasy steel Greasy steel 0.23 0.16 0.90
Dry aluminium Dry steel 0.70 0.50 0.85
12 Adams/View
Contacts

Material 1: Material 2: Mu static: Mu dynamic: Restitution Coefficient:

Dry aluminium Greasy steel 0.23 0.16 0.85
Dry aluminium Dry aluminium 0.70 0.50 0.85
Greasy aluminium Dry steel 0.30 0.20 0.85
Greasy aluminium Greasy steel 0.23 0.16 0.85
Greasy aluminium Dry aluminium 0.30 0.20 0.85
Greasy aluminium Greasy aluminium 0.30 0.20 0.85
Acrylic Dry steel 0.20 0.15 0.70
Acrylic Greasy steel 0.20 0.15 0.70
Acrylic Dry aluminium 0.20 0.15 0.70
Acrylic Greasy aluminium 0.20 0.15 0.70
Acrylic Acrylic 0.20 0.15 0.70
Nylon Dry steel 0.10 0.06 0.70
Nylon Greasy steel 0.10 0.06 0.70
Nylon Dry aluminium 0.10 0.06 0.70
Nylon Greasy aluminium 0.10 0.06 0.70
Nylon Acrylic 0.10 0.06 0.65
Nylon Nylon 0.10 0.06 0.70
Dry rubber Dry Steel 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Greasy steel 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Dry aluminium 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Greasy aluminium 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Acrylic 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Nylon 0.80 0.76 0.95
Dry rubber Dry rubber 0.80 0.76 0.95
Greasy rubber Dry steel 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Greasy steel 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Dry aluminium 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Greasy aluminium 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Acrylic 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Nylon 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Dry rubber 0.63 0.56 0.95
Greasy rubber Greasy rubber 0.63 0.56 0.95
 13
Contacts

References
The friction values used in the material interaction table are generalized values based on the following
references:
• Bowden & Tabor, "The Friction and Lubrication of Solids," Oxford.
• Fuller, "Theory and Practice of Lubrication for Engineers," Wiley.
• Ham & Crane, "Mechanics of Machinery," McGraw-Hill.
• Bevan, "Theory of Machines," Longmans.
• Shigley, "Mechanical Design," McGraw-Hill.
• Rabinowicz, "Friction and Wear of Materials," Wiley.
14 Adams/View
Contacts
System Elements
System elements allow you to add your own algebraic and differential equations, and corresponding
states, to your model. Adams/Solver solves your equations simultaneously with the equations it generates
from other modeling elements.
Your user-defined equations can depend on any states in the model, such as time, part motions, forces, or
other user-defined states. In turn, you can reference your states in forces, system elements, and other
modeling elements.
System elements enable you to model system components that are not as easily represented by standard
Adams/View modeling objects, such as parts, constraints, and forces. They are useful for modeling
components or subsystems that have dynamics of their own. You can use system elements to represent a
control system, for example, or to model the dynamics of an electro-mechanical, hydraulic, or pneumatic
actuator. You can also use system elements to compute simulation output. For example, you might
calculate the energy dissipated in a damper.
The system elements are listed in the table below.

The system
element: Defines:
Differential equation Differential equation that describes a user-defined variable in terms of its time
derivative.
General state System of explicit differential and (optionally) algebraic equations in state-
equation space form. You use array data elements to specify inputs, outputs, and
statements.
Linear state equation System of constant coefficient, explicit, differential, and algebraic equations in
the classic state-space format when used with associated array and matrix data
elements.
Transfer function Single-input, single-output transfer function as a ratio of two polynomials in
the Laplace domain when used with associated array data elements.
State variable Scalar algebraic equation for independent use or as part of the plant input, plant
output, or array data elements.

Example of Using System Element

We've provided a complete example of using System elements in a model in the examples directory of
your Adams installation directory. The example contains the following elements:
• State variables
• Arrays
• Matrices
• Implicit and explicit differential equations
2 Adams/View
System Elements

• Linear state equations

• Transfer functions

The files you use to run the example are:

• system_tutorial.cmd - Contains an Adams/View command file that builds a model containing the
elements listed above.
• system_tutorial.txt - Describes the model and its construction.

The path to the files is /install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is where the Adams
software is installed.

Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements

During a static simulation, Adams/Solver finds equilibrium values for user-defined differential variables
(differential equations, general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer functions), as well as
for the displacement and force variables. The equilibrium values it finds change the initial conditions for
subsequent simulations. To help you control the static simulation results, Adams/View provides an option
that you can set to keep the values constant. This option is called static hold. Static hold retains the user-
specified initial conditions as the static equilibrium values.
If you do not set static hold, Adams/Solver sets the time derivatives of the user-defined variables to zero
during a static simulation, and uses the user-supplied initial-condition values only as initial guesses for
the static solution. Generally, the final equilibrium values are not the same as the initial condition values.
Adams/Solver then uses the equilibrium values of the user-defined variables as the initial values for any
subsequent simulation, just as with the equilibrium displacement and force values.
If you do set static hold, Adams/Solver retains the user-specified initial conditions as the static
equilibrium values. Therefore, the final equilibrium values are the same as the user-specified initial
conditions. Note that this does not guarantee that the time derivatives of the user-defined variable are zero
after a static simulation.

Using Arrays with System Elements

You use array elements to represent the system states and outputs for linear state equations, general state
equations, and transfer functions. You use the run-time function ARYVAL to reference states and outputs
for these elements, instead of using Adams functions that are dedicated expressly to the equations. For
more information on arrays, see Creating and Modifying Arrays. For more information on the ARYVAL
function, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.
The state variable and differential equation elements do not use arrays. You reference a state variable with
the VARVAL function, and reference a differential equation with the DIF and DIF1 functions. Again, for
more information on these functions, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.
 3
System Elements

Terminology Used in System Elements

The terminology used in the dialog boxes for creating linear state equations, general state equations, and
transfer function follows standard control systems terminology, where:

• x is the state array

• y is the output array
• u is the input array
• IC is the initial conditions array, x(t=0)

You define each of these arrays using an array data element stored in the current Modeling database. All
array sizes must be consistent with the definition of the system elements. Do not define arrays with zero-
size and zero-valued partial-derivative matrices. Adams/Solver correctly formulates the system equations
based on those arrays and derivatives that do exist.

About Using Differential Equations

A differential equation creates a user-defined state variable and defines a first-order differential equation
that describes it. The equation can be dependent on any Adams/Solver state variable available in a
function expression except Point-Curve Constraints and 2D Curve-Curve Constraints. You can create
systems of differential equations using more than one differential equation, linear state equation, or
general state equation.
You describe the variable in a differential equation either by writing a function expression or User-written
subroutine. Because it is easier to write function expressions than subroutines, you should use function
expressions whenever possible to describe user-defined differential variables.

Ways to Define Differential Equations

You can define the differential equation in either explicit or implicit form. The following equation defines
the explicit form of a differential equation:

y· = f  y q q·  t 
where:

• y· is the time derivative of the user-defined state variable.

• y is the user-defined state variable itself.

• q is a vector of Adams/Solver-defined state variables.

You need to use the implicit form if the first derivative of the state variable cannot be isolated. The
following equation defines the implicit form of a differential equation:

0 = F  y y·  q q·  t 
4 Adams/View
System Elements

Ways You Can Use Differential Equations

Differential equations are best for creating single equations or small sets of equations. Although you can
create sets of differential equations to represent higher-order equations or large systems of equations,
other Adams/Solver elements, such as transfer functions, linear state equations, or general state
equations, can be more convenient in these cases.

You can use the solution to the differential equation in function expression that define a number of other
elements in Adams, such as a force, or in User-written subroutines. Both function expressions and user-
written subroutines can access the user-defined state variable and its derivative. Therefore, you can use
Adams/Solver to solve an independent initial value problem, or you can fully couple the differential
equations with the system of equations that governs the dynamics of the problem.
Function expressions access the state variable using the function DIF(i1) and the derivative using
DIF1(i1). In each case, i1 specifies the name of the differential equation that defines the variable. User-
written subroutines access the value and derivative by calling the subroutine SYSFNC. For more
information on functions, see Adams/View Function Builder online help. For more information on
subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Creating and Modifying Differential Equation

The following procedure explains how to create or modify a differential equation.

To create or modify differential equations:

1. From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Differential Equation, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a differential equation to modify.
The Create/Modify Differential Equation dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same
options.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the differential equation element, if desired.
4. Set Type to either Explicit or Implicit to indicate that the function expression or User-written
subroutine defines the explicit or implicit form of the equation. Learn about Ways to Define
Differential Equations.
5. Do either of the following:
• Set Definition to Run-time Expression, and, in the y' = text box, enter a function expression
that Adams/Solver evaluates during a Simulation. In the function expression, the system
variable DIF(i) is the value of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines, and
DIF1(j) is the first derivative of the dependent variable that the differential equation defines.
Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See
Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
• Set Definition to User Written Subroutine and in the y' = text box, enter parameters that are
passed to a user-written subroutine DIFSUB or specify an alternative library and name for the
user subroutine in the Routine text box. Learn about Adams/Solver Subroutines. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
 5
System Elements

6. In the Initial Conditions text box, specify:

• The initial value of the differential equation at the start of the simulation.
• Optionally, if you are defining an implicit equation, an approximate value of the initial time
derivative of the differential equation at the start of the simulation. (You do not need to supply
a second value when you enter a explicit equation because Adams/Solver can compute the
initial time derivative directly from the equation.)
7. Adams/Solver might adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs an initial conditions
simulation. Entering an initial value for the time derivative helps Adams/Solver converge to a
desired initial conditions solution.
8. Select whether or not Adams should hold constant the value of the differential equation during
static and quasi-static Simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using
System Elements.

Creating and Modifying General State Equations

The following procedure teaches you how to represent a subsystem that has well defined inputs (u),
internal states (x), and a set of well defined outputs (y).
See GSE statement in the Adams/Solver online help for an extensive discussion on General State
equations.

To create or modify a general state equation:

1. From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to General State Equation, and then
select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
The Create/Modify General State Equation dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the
same options.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the general state equation element, if desired, and assign
a unique ID to it.
4. Set up the GSE by filling in the following text boxes:
• In the U Array (Inputs) text box, specify the array element that defines the input variables
for the GSE. The U array is optional. When not specified, there are no system inputs. The
number of inputs to the GSE is inferred from the number of variables in the U array.
• In the Y Array (Outputs) text box, specify the array element that defines the output variables
for the GSE.
• In the User Function Parameters text box, specify the parameters that are to be passed to the
User-written subroutines that define the constitutive equations of a GSE, viz., Equations (1),
(2), and (3).
Three user subroutines are associated with a GSE:
• GSE_DERIV is called to evaluate fc() in Equations 1.
6 Adams/View
System Elements

• GSE_UPDATE is called to evaluate fd() in Equations 2.

• GSE_OUTPUT is called to evaluate g() in Equations 3.
See the Subroutines help in the Adams/Solver online help.
If you specified a user function, in the Interface Function Names, enter function names to use
other than the standard names GSE_DERIV, GSE_UPDATE, and GSE_OUTPUT.
5. Set States to the type of system to define:
• Continuous Systems
• Discrete Systems
• Sampled Systems
• None (No options appear; defines a Feed-Forward Only System)
The dialog box changes depending on the type of system. See the next tables for the values to enter
depending on the systems you are creating. For a sampled system, you enter both continous and
discrete values.
6. Add or change any comments about the GSE that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it.
7. Select OK.
Options for Defining Continuous and Sampled Systems

For the option: Do the following:

X Array (Continous) Enter the array element that defines the continuous states for the GSE. The
array element must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Continous) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the continuous
states in the system.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous states are
initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to change
during static and quasi-static simulations.
 7
System Elements

Options for Discrete and Sampled Systems

For the option: Do the following:

X Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the GSE.
It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the discrete
states in the system. The array is optional. The array element must be of the
IC type.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states are
initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states is to
start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to be at the
initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a GSE. This
Function/Sample User tells Adams/Solver to control its step size so that the discrete states of the GSE
Parameters are updated at:

last_sample_time + sample_period
In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to write, you
can specify it in a user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP. Adams/Solver will
call this function at each sample time to find out the next sample period.

Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build an
expression. See Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online
help.

Creating and Modifying Linear State Equations

The following procedure explains how to create a linear state equation.
See LSE statement in Adams/Solver online help for an extensive discussion on Linear State Equations.

To create or modify a linear state equation:

1. From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Linear State Equation, and then
select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a linear state equation to modify.
The Part Create Equation Linear State Equation or Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation
dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the linear state equation element, if desired, and assign
a unique ID number to it.
8 Adams/View
System Elements

4. Add or change any comments about the equation element that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the element.
5. Enter the arrays and matrices in the next text boxes as explained below.
• X State Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear
system. The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
• U Input Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must be an inputs (U) array.
If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward
matrix, or both.
The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there are elements in the
inputs (U) array.
• Y Output Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional. If you enter an
outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The
corresponding matrix elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in
the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other
linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
• IC Array Name - Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial conditions
for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The IC array must have the same
number of elements as the states (X) array (equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix).
When you do not specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.
• A State Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix
for the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of rows and columns),
and it must have the same number of columns as the number of rows in the states (X) array.
• B Input Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows as the A state matrix
and the same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U) array.
Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you must also include an
inputs (U) array.
• C Output Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of columns as the A state
matrix and the same number of rows as the number of elements in the outputs (Y) array.
Entering a C output matrix is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include
an outputs (Y) array name.
• D Feedforward Matrix Name - Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward
matrix for the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same number of rows
as the number of elements in the Y output array and the same number of columns as the
number of elements in the inputs (U) array.
When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a Y output matrix and an
inputs (U) array.
 9
System Elements

6. Set Static hold to yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static and quasi-static
simulations; no if they can change. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using
System Elements.
7. Select OK.

Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions

The following procedure examples how to create or modify a transfer function.
See TFSISO statement in Adams/Solver online help for an extensive discussion on Transfer functions.

To create or modify a transfer function:

1. From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to Transfer Function, and then select
either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
3. The Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box appears. Both dialog boxes contain the same
options.
4. If you selected New, change the name of the transfer function element, if desired.
5. Enter the arrays for the transfer function in the next three text boxes as explained below:
• Input Array Name (U) - Enter the array that defines the input (or control) for the transfer
function. The array must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the size of the array when you
created it, it must be one.
• State Array Name (X) - Enter the array that defines the state variable array for the transfer
function. The array must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the size of the array
when you created it, it must be one less than the number of coefficients in the denominator.
• Output Array (Y) - Enter the array that defines the output for the transfer function. The array
must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state equation, general
state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the size of the array when you created it, its
size must be one.
6. In the Denominator Coefficients and Numerator Coefficients text boxes, specify the
coefficients of the polynomial in the numerator and denominator of the transfer function. List the
coefficients in order of ascending power of s, starting with s to the zero power, including any
intermediate zero coefficients. The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater
than or equal to the number of coefficients for the numerator. The number of coefficients for the
denominator must be greater than or equal to the number of coefficients for the numerator.
7. Select Check Format and Display Plot to display a plot of the transfer function. (see Plots
Transfer Function dialog box help)
8. Select whether or not Adams should hold constant the value of the transfer equation during static
and quasi-static Simulations. Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System
Elements.
10 Adams/View
System Elements

9. Select OK.

About State Variables

You create state variables to define scalar algebraic equations for independent use or as part of the plant
input, plant output, or array elements. The computed value of the variable can depend on almost any
Adams system variable. Note that you cannot access reaction forces from Point-Curve Constraints and
Curve-Curve Constraints.

You use state variables in the following ways:

• With plant input and plant output elements to identify inputs and output for an Adams/Linear
solution. For information on using Adams/Linear and plant inputs and plant outputs, see the
Adams/Solver online help.
• With array elements to identify inputs to linear state equations, general state equations, and
transfer functions.
• Independently to break up long function expressions into several parts or to compute common
values that you need in several other function expressions. Using state variables to compute
intermediate values can make complex expressions easier to read and modify. If you use the
expression in many places, computing it once in a state variable can also be faster
computationally.

Ways to Define State Variables

You can define the computed value of a variable by either:
• Writing a function expression in the model.
• Calling a VARSUB User-written subroutine.

Function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the computed value of the variable using
the Adams/View function VARVAL(variable_name) to represent the value, where variable_name
specifies the name of the variable. User-written subroutines access a single variable by calling the
subroutine SYSFNC.
For more information on functions, see Adams/View Function Builder online help. For more information
on subroutines, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Cautions When Using State Variables

You should use caution when defining variables that are dependent on other variables or on Adams/View
elements that contain functions. It is possible to create equations that cannot be solved. If a defined
system of equations does not have a stable solution, convergence can fail for the entire Adams model.
For example, if you define your state variable my_variable using the function expression:
F = varval(my_variable) + 1
You are defining the following algebraic equation that has no solution:
 11
System Elements

V = V + 1
When Adams/Solver tries to solve this equation using the Newton-Raphson iteration, the solution
diverges and a message appears on the screen indicating that the solution has failed to converge.

Creating and Modifying State Variables

The following procedure explains how to create or modify a state variable.

To create and modify a state variable:

1. From the Build menu, point to System Elements, point to State Variable, and then select either
New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a system element to modify.
The Create/Modify State Variable dialog box appears.
3. If you selected New, change the name of the state variable element, if desired
4. Set Definition to either of the following:
• Run-time Expression
• User written subroutine
Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.
5. If you selected:
• Run-time Expression, enter the function expression that defines the variable. Select the More
button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function Builder and
Adams/View Function Builder online help.
• User written subroutine, enter constants to the User-written subroutine VARSUB to define a
variable. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
6. If desired, select Guess for F(1, 0..), and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable.
Adams/Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial conditions simulation. Entering an
accurate value for initial conditions can help Adams/Solver converge to the initial conditions
solution.
12 Adams/View
Data Elements

Data Elements
Arrays

Types of Arrays
There are four types of arrays:
• General/Initial Conditions - Define an array of constants used as initial conditions for a system
element or User-written subroutine.
• States (X) and Outputs (Y) - Designate the state or output variable arrays for a system element,
such as a linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. Adams/Solver
computes these values during a Simulation.
To use the arrays, you reference them in function expressions. You can reference the array as the
state or output variable array of only one system element in a model (for example, only one
linear state equation or one general state equation).
Learn about System Elements.
• Inputs (U) - An array that groups together a set of variables used to define the inputs for a system
element. Adams/View computes variable values from the specified variable data elements.
The inputs (U) and the initial conditions arrays can exist independently, and do not need to be
referenced by another system element.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the array values. Function
expressions use the function ARYVAL (ARRAY_NAME, COMPONENT) to access the values.
ARRAY_NAME specifies the name of the array, and COMPONENT specifies the position of
the desired value in the array definition.
You should note that you can only access states (X), outputs (Y), and inputs (U) arrays in
functions because the initial condition array is not accessible in the model definition. You can
access the initial condition array in a user-written subroutine. To access all the elements of an
array, call the subroutine SYSARY. To access one element of an array in a subroutine, call the
subroutine SYSFNC. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

Determining Array Size

For the states (X) and outputs (Y) arrays, the system element in which the arrays are referenced
automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the array size, if you specify one. For
initial conditions and general arrays, Adams/View determines the actual size of the array during parsing,
as it counts the number of values. When you provide an array size, Adams/View checks the count for
consistency if you request size checking.
 13
Data Elements

If you specify the size of an array, it should match the number of values or variables in the array or the
size needed for the associated element. The following table lists the sizes for arrays used in different
system element equations.

For arrays used in: The array size is:

Linear state equation • States (X) array size must be the same size as the row dimension of the
(LSE) matrix used to define the state transition matrix for the linear system.
• Outputs (Y) size must be the same size as the row dimension of the
matrix used to define the output matrix for the linear system or the
matrix used to define the feed forward matrix for the linear system.
Transfer functions • States (X) size is determined by the transformation from polynomial
(TFSISO) ratio type to canonical state-space form, which is a set of coupled,
linear, constant-coefficient differential equations and a single algebraic
equation.
• Outputs (Y) size is always 1.
General state equations • States (X) size is the same as the number defined in the matching
(GSE) general state equation definition.
• Outputs (Y) size is the same as the number of output equations, as
defined in the same general state equation definition.

To create or modify an array data element:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Array, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create/Modify Solver Array dialog box appears, and you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element array to modify. The
Create/Modify Solver Array appears. Continue with Step 4.
3. If creating the array, accept the default name or assign a new name.

Tip: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with which system
element if you name the array elements and the corresponding system elements
with like names. For example, the states (X) array that goes with general state
equation GSE_100 would be ARRAY_100; the inputs (U) array would be
ARRAY_101; and the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102.

4. Select the type of array that you want to define. Learn about the Types of Arrays. The dialog box
changes depending on the selection you make.
14 Adams/View
Data Elements

5. Depending on the type of array you are creating or modifying, enter or change the values in the
dialog box as explained in the next table, and then select OK.

To create/modify: Do the following:

General and initial In the Numbers text box, enter the values to be stored in the array.
conditions array
States (X) In the Size text box, enter the size of the array.
Outputs (Y) In the Size text box, enter the size of the array.
Inputs (U) In the Variables text box, enter the variables to be stored. If the array is used
as input to a transfer function, then you can enter only one variable.

Strings
A string element defines a character string that you can refer to later in the execution of Adams/View or
Adams/Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the next line. It can, however, be
longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve the character string in a User-
written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a file name to a user-written
subroutine. For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.

To create or modify a string:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to String, and then select either New or
Modify
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create/Modify String dialog box appears, and you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element string to modify. The Data
Element Modify String Element dialog box appears. It contains the same options as the Data
Element Create String Element dialog box.
3. In the Name text box, enter the name that you want assigned to the string.
4. In the String text box, enter the string values.
5. Select OK.

Curves
Learn more:
• About Data Element Curves
• Uses for Data Element Curves
• Steps in Defining Curves
• Using Curve Elements in Your Model
• Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements
 15
Data Elements

About Curve Data Elements

The x, y, and z coordinates of a point on a parametric curve are functions of an independent parameter,
alpha. As alpha varies from its minimum value to its maximum value, the functions x(alpha), y(alpha),
and z(alpha) sweep out points on the curve. A simple example of a parametric curve is the helix defined
by the following equations:
x = cos(alpha)
y = sin(alpha)
z = alpha

Ways to Use Curve Data Elements

A curve data element defines a three-dimensional parametric curve that you can reference when:
• Creating a higher-pair constraint - When you create or modify a Point-Curve Constraints or
2D Curve-Curve Constraints, you can pick the geometric curves that you've created from the
curve element or you can modify the point- or curve-curve constraint to use a different curve.
• Creating a part - You can use the curve that you create in the definition of a part. For example,
when you create a construction geometry spline using the geometric modeling tools as explained
in Creating Splines, Adams/View automatically creates a curve element defining the spline. You
could replace the default curve element with a curve element that you create. You could also
create an empty part using the Table Editor, and modify it to contain a curve element.
• Writing function expressions - You can use the curve element as the input to a function, such as
CURVE(B-Spline fitting method). For more information on using curves in a function
expression, see Spline Functions in Adams/View Function Builder online help.
16 Adams/View
Data Elements

Defining Data Element Curves

You can define a data element curve using:
• Data points in a matrix - When you create a curve data element, you define the curve points to
which Adams/View matches a curve. You set the way in which Adams/View fits the curve to the
curve points by setting the interpolation order. In addition, you specify whether or not the curve
is open or closed. Learn About Specifying Open or Closed Curves.
• Subroutine - To use a different type of curve or to model an analytically defined curve, such as
a helix, you can write a CURSUB User-written subroutine to compute the curve coordinates and
derivatives. See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help. You can also specify an
alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about specifying your own routine
with ROUTINE Argument.
Adams/View defines a b-spline using control points that form a polygon in space and a knot vector. It
computes the control points internally from the curve points. Adams/View uses a non-uniform knot
vector with quadruple multiplicity at both ends. The curve starts at the first control point and ends at the
last. In between, it is attracted to, but does not necessarily hit, the intermediate control points.
Adams/View parameterizes a b-Spline starting at -1 and ending at +1. The figure below shows a set of
control points and the b-spline curve it defines.
Control Points and the Resulting B-Spline
 17
Data Elements

Steps in Defining a Curve

To create a curve using curve or data points that are defined in a matrix element or using a User-written
subroutine, you perform the steps listed in the figure below.

About Specifying Open or Closed Curves

A data element curve can be open or closed. A closed curve meets at the ends, connecting the curve at
minimum and maximum parameter values. An open curve does not meet at the ends.
If you create an open curve, Adams/View does not allow a point-curve (see Point-Curve Constraints) or
2D curve-curve (see Curve-Curve Constraints) contact point to move beyond the end of the curve.
Adams/View, however, automatically moves a point-curve or curve-curve constraint contact point across
the closure of a closed curve, if needed. For example, you can model a cam profile as a closed curve, and
Adams/View allows the follower to move across the closure as the cam rotates.
Adams/View stops the simulation if a point-curve or curve-curve constraint contact point is prescribed
to move off the end of the curve. You should ensure that the curve defined includes the expected range
of contact.

Using Curve Elements in Your Model

Once you've created a curve element, you can use it to define a higher-pair constraint, as geometry of a
part, or in a function expression.
• Higher-Pair Constraint - When you create or modify either Point-Curve Constraints or Curve-
Curve Constraints, you can pick the geometric curves that you've created from the curve element
or you can modify the point- or curve-curve constraint to use a different curve.
18 Adams/View
Data Elements

• Geometry of a part - You can use the curve that you create in the definition of a part. For
example, when you create a Construction geometry spline using the geometric modeling tools as
explained in Creating Splines, Adams/View automatically creates a curve element defining the
spline. You could replace the default curve element with a curve element that you create. You
could also create an empty part using the Table Editor, and modify it to contain a curve element.
• Function expression - You can use the curve element as the input to a function, such as CURVE
(B-Spline fitting method). See Spline Functions in Adams/View Function Builder online help.

Creating and Modifying Curve Data Elements

To create or modify a curve data element:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Curve, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Data Element Create Curve dialog box appears and you should continue with Step 4.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element curve to modify. The Data
Element Modify Curve dialog box appears. It contains the same options as the Data Element
Create Curve dialog box.
3. If creating the curve, accept the default name or assign a new name.
4. Assign a unique ID number to the curve element, if desired.
5. Add or change any comments about the curve element to help you manage and identify it.
6. Set Closed to no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.
7. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the dialog box for how you want to define the curve
(either from a matrix or a User-written subroutine). The dialog box changes depending on the
selection you made. Learn more about Defining Data Element Curves.
 19
Data Elements

8. If you are entering values using a matrix, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the table
below, and then select OK.

To set: Do the following:

Matrix to be used In the Matrix Name text box, enter the matrix name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Interpolation order Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is 1 plus the
degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order also affects the
number of points used to determine each spline segment. For example, splines
of order 2 are basically polylines, while the segments used to create an spline of
order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4 is the default order of splines, which is a cubic b-
spline.

Note: B-splines of order K will have K - 2 continious derivatives. The

discontinuities appear where the polynomial segments join together.
Increasing the order of the b-spline arbitrarily may introduce
unwanted oscillation into the curve.

9. If you are entering values using a subroutine, enter values in the dialog box as explained in the
table below, and then select OK.

To set: Do the following:

User-written subroutine In the User Function text box, enter the subroutine name. You can also
to be used specify an alternative library and name for the subroutine in the Routine
text box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE
Argument.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Minimum and maximum Enter the following:
curve parameters
Minimum Parameter - Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter
for a user-written curve.

Maximum Parameter - Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter

for a user-written curve.

Splines
A spline creates a continuous function from a set of data points.
Learn about:
• About Data Element Splines
20 Adams/View
Data Elements

• Ways to Create Splines

• Curve-Fitting Techniques
• Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor
• Creating Splines Using the General Method
• Modifying Splines
• Tips and Cautions When Creating Splines
• Example of Using Splines

About Data Element Splines

A spline creates a continuous function from a set of data points. Splines are useful when you have test
data or manufacturer specifications that specify the value of a function at several points. The spline can
define a curve (two-dimensional, x, y) or a surface (three-dimensional, x, y, z).
You can use splines to create nonlinear functions for motions, forces, or other elements that use functions.
In the case of a motion, the points define the displacement, velocity, or acceleration as a function of time,
displacement, velocity, or another Adams quantity.
The Adams/View spline element contains the x, y or x, y, z data points that you want to interpolate. To
use the spline element, you must write a function expression that includes Adams spline functions (such
as AKISPL or CUBSPL) or create a User-written subroutine that calls one of the spline utility subroutines
(AKISPL or CUBSPL subroutine). The functions or subroutines interpolate the discrete data.

Ways to Create Splines

You can enter spline data into Adams/View in several ways:
• Use the Spline Editor (see Create/Modify Spline dialog box help) to create a spline in
Adams/View. The Spline Editor provides you with a table for inputting values and a plotting
window for viewing the results and the effects of different curve-fitting techniques.
• Use the general method to define spline data points by referencing either a file containing a set
of points or results from a simulation. You can also enter numerical values directly. See Creating
Splines Using the General Method.
• Import tabular data into Adams/View and save it as a spline. For information on how to import
test data as splines, see Import - Test Data.
• Use the data from a plot and save it as a spline. For more information, see Creating Splines from
Curves in the Adams/PostProcessor online help.

General Method for Creating Splines

Creating splines using the general method lets you define the data points of the spline using:
 21
Data Elements

• File - The file is in RPC III, DAC, or user-defined format. The file contains x, y, and, optionally,
z values that define the spline data points. You can specify that Adams/View only use a particular
named block or channel within the file. You can only enter time response data in RPC III and
DAC files if you are using Adams/Durability. For more information on using splines in
Adams/Durability, see Adams/Durability online help.
Entering a user-defined file causes Adams/Solver to call the User-written subroutine
SPLINE_READ, which you must provide. For more on how to define a SPLINE using a user-
defined file, see the example in SPLINE_READ of the Adams/Solver Subroutines online help.
• Results of a simulation - You can also use the results of a Simulation as input to a spline by
referencing Result set components. For more on result set components, see About Simulation
Output.
• Numerical values directly input in the dialog box - You can directly input x, y, and, optionally,
z values in the dialog box.

Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View

Adams/View uses curve-fitting techniques to interpolate between data points to create a continuous
function. If the spline data has one independent variable, Adams/View uses a cubic polynomial to
interpolate between points. If the spline data has two independent variables, Adams/View first uses a
cubic interpolation method to interpolate between points of the first independent variable and then uses
a linear method to interpolate between curves of the second independent variable.
For information on the different spline functions that use these curve fitting techniques, see the
definitions of the functions in Adams/View Function Builder online help, and for a comparison of the
different methods, refer to Spline Functions in the same help.

Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor

The Spline Editor provides a tabular or plot view of your spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on your spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline.
You can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
Using the Spline Editor, you can create a two- or three-dimensional splines.
Learn more:

General Procedures
• Displaying the Spline Editor and Setting the View
• Setting Spline Units and Dimensions
• Specifying Linear Extrapolation

Plotting a Spline:
• Setting the View of the Spline Plot
22 Adams/View
Data Elements

• Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor

• Editing Spline Plot Data
• Changing Plotting Methods and Recomputing the Plot
• Transferring Plot to Adams/PostProcessor

Editing a Spline in a Table:

• Working with Tables
• Adding and Removing Rows

Displaying the Spline Editor and Setting the View

You can choose to view your spline as a plot or as a table in tabular format:
• Plot view
• Tabular view
 23
Data Elements

Spline Editor in Plot View

Viewing the spline as a plot lets you view the data in the spline as a curve and apply several operations
on the curve, such as change the curve-fitting techniques being used to create the curve, view the results
of linear extrapolation, or view the changes you made against the original spline values.
24 Adams/View
Data Elements

Spline Ediotr in Tabular View

Viewing a spline in tabular view gives you the most accuracy for setting the location of the spline data
points. It also lets you quickly add points by inserting rows of data.

To display the Spline Editor:

• From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select New.

To set the view of the Spline Editor:

• Set View As to either Tabular Data or Plot.
 25
Data Elements

Setting Spline Units and Dimensions

You can specify the units that you want assigned for values in your spline in the Spline Editor. If you set
the units for your data points, Adams/View automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you
ever change your default modeling units.
You can also select to create two- or three-dimensional splines. When you create a three-dimensional
spline in tabular view, the Spline Editor displays a second column for adding z values as shown below.
Note that you can view the z dimension in the 3D Spline Plot Viewer. You also need to recompute the
spline in plot view to set a three-dimensional spline. (Learn about Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in
the Spline Editor.)

To set units:
• Set Units to the desired units. Select no_units if you do not want units associated with the
values.

To specify two- or three-dimensional splines:

1. Set Type to either:
• y=f(x) (2D) to create or edit a two-dimensional, curve spline.
• y=f(x,z) (3D) to create or edit a three-dimensional, surface spline.
2. If you are in plot view to see the effect of the changes, select Recompute. Learn about Changing
Plotting Methods and Recomputing the Plot.

Specifying Linear Extrapolation

Linear extrapolation extends the curve created from the spline values by estimating the values that follow
from the spline values.

To specify linear extrapolation:

• Select Linear extrapolation.
26 Adams/View
Data Elements

To view the results of the linear extrapolation on the spline:

• Change the Spline Editor to plot view and select Extrapolation Tails.

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

Setting the View of the Spline Plot

When the Spline Editor is in plot view, there are several ways you can change the view of the spline plot,
including viewing the slope of the curve, turning off the display of the data points that make up the spline,
and more. Be default, Adams/View displays a curve and hotpoints representing the spline data points.
(Learn about Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor.)

To view the curve that Adams/View generates from the data points:
• Select Spline Curves.
If creating a 3D spline, you can view a 3D plot of the curves.

To view the slope (derivative) of a curve:

• Select Slope Curves.

To view the spline data points:

• Select Symbols.
You can edit the data points and, if creating a 3D spline, you can view a 3D plot of the points.

To retain the original curve as you edit the data points:

• Select Memory Curves.

To view the effect of linear extrapolation:

• Select Extrapolation Tails.
For more on setting up linear extrapolation, see Specifying Linear Extrapolation.

Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor

In the Spline Editor, in either plot view or tabular view, you can display a three-dimensional (3D) plot of
your spline. You must have set the type of the spline to 3D. (Learn about Setting Spline Units and
Dimensions and Displaying the Spline Editor and Setting the View.)

In plot view, you can display two different 3D plots:

• Data Points - Using the 3D button next to Symbols displays the 3D spline using the raw data
points (that is, the points represented by the curve symbols in the 2D plot). This is the same plot
you see when you select to view a 3D plot in tabular view.
• Spline Representation - Using the 3D button next to Spline Curves displays a 3D plot using the
spline representations Adams/View generates from the raw data points. Each of the curves in the
2D plot represents one of the rows in the 3D preview plot.
 27
Data Elements

In tabular view, to display a 3D plot of the data points:

• From the bottom right corner, select 3D Preview.

In plot view, to display a 3D plot of the data points:

• Next to Symbols, select 3D.

In plot view, to display a 3D plot of spline representations:

• Next to Spline Curves, select 3D.

To display the coordinates of a vertex on a 3D plot (called Probe mode):

1. Type a lowercase p.
2. Place the cursor over the vertex of interest.
The Spline Editor displays the coordinates (x, y, z values).

Editing Spline Plot Data

The left side of the Spline Editor in plot view displays a plot of the data points in the spline in plot view.
Hotpoints appear on the curve in the plot window at each data point in the spline. You can drag the
hotpoints to change the data point locations.

To edit data points:

1. Click the data point that you want to edit. Note that you must turn on the viewing of symbols.
Hotpoints appear at each data point.
2. Position the cursor on a hotpoint and drag the hotpoint to the desired location.

Changing Plotting Methods and Recomputing the Plot

By default in plot view, the Spline Editor displays a curve from your spline data points using 50 curve
points and the Akima curve-fitting method. You can change the number of points and the method used
to calculate the curve. You must recompute the spline to see the effect of these changes. As you
recompute the spline, you can select to use the values stored for the spline in the modeling database or
use the values as you've edited them.

To change the number of points used to display a curve:

• In the Points text box of the Spline Editor, enter the number of points.

Note: Changing the number of points only changes the display of the curve, making it smoother
or more coarse. It does not change the number of data points in the curve.

To set the curve-fitting technique:

• Set Spline Type to either AKISPL or CUBSPL.

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

28 Adams/View
Data Elements

To recompute the curve:

1. Select Recompute.
Adams/View asks you if you want to use the current values for the spline or the ones stored in the
modeling database.
2. Select one of the following:
• Yes to use the values in the database.
• No to use the edited values.

Transferring Plot to Adams/PostProcessor

As you work on a spline in the Spline Editor, you can transfer its plot to Adams/PostProcessor where you
can save your plot and have it be accessible in Adams/PostProcessor for such operations as creating
reports. Note that any changes you make to the plot in Adams/PostProcessor are not reflected in the actual
spline object because you are editing the plot, not the spline data.

To transfer a spline plot:

1. In the lower right corner of the Spline Editor, select Transfer to Full Plot.
2. Display Adams/PostProcessor to view the plot.

Working with Tables

The left side of the Spline Editor in tabular view displays the data points for the current spline. You can
change any of the values in the cells of the Spline Editor and work with the cell much as you do in any
spreadsheet editor.

To enter text in a cell:

1. Click the cell. The text cursor appears in the cell.
2. Type the text you want and press Enter.

To move to the next cell:

• Press Tab.

To move to the previous cell:

• Press Shift + Tab.

To move up to the previous row or down to the next row:

• Select the up or down arrow keys.

To cut or copy text in cells:

1. Select the text in the cell that you want to cut or copy.
2. Right-click the cell containing the text to be cut or copied, and then select Copy or Cut.
 29
Data Elements

To paste text:
• Right-click the cell where you want to insert the text, and then select Paste.

To view the entire contents of a cell:

Often, information displayed in a cell of the Spline Editor is longer than the width of the cell. When this
happens, Adams/View displays the first portion of the information. In UNIX, it also displays an arrow
next to the cell to indicate that there is more information than can fit in the cell.
• Click in the cell. Adams/View displays the last portion of the information in the cell.

To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.

Adding and Removing Rows

You can add rows to the X and Y table and to the Z table if you are creating a three-dimensional spline.

To add a row to the beginning of the X and Y table:

• Select Append row to X & Y data.

To add a row to the end of the X and Y table:

• Select Prepend row to X & Y data.

To add a row after a particular X and Y row:

• Enter a row number in the Insert Row After text box and select Insert Row After.

To add a row to the end of the Z table:

• Select Append Z Value.

To remove a row from either the X and Y or Z table:

• Enter the row number in the Remove Row text box and select Remove Row.

Creating Splines Using the General Method

To create a general spline using the general method:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select General.
The Data Element Create Spline dialog box appears.
2. Accept the default name or assign a new name.
3. Assign a unique ID number to the spline, if appropriate.
30 Adams/View
Data Elements

4. Add any comments about the spline that you want to enter to help you manage and identify it.
5. Set Linear Extrapolate to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first
or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams/Solver extrapolates a spline that
exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points.
For RPC III or DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant). Learn
about spline extrapolation in Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.
6. Depending on how you are creating the spline, enter or change the values in the dialog box as
explained in the next table, and then select OK. See General Method for Creating Splines for
available options.

To create a spline
from: Do the following:
File 1. Set the pull-down menu to File.
2. Enter the name of the file.
3. If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want
Adams/View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in
the file.
4. Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with
time response data in RPC III files only. See Adams/Durability online
help.
Result set components 1. Set the pull-down menu to Result Set Component.
2. Select the result set components to be used for the x and y values.
Numerical input 1. Set the pull-down menu to Numerical.
2. Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes. Note the
following:
• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x
values, n, depends on whether you specify a single curve or a
family of curves.
• Values must be constants; Adams/Solver does not allow
expressions.
• Values must be in increasing order:
• x1 < x2 < x3, and so on.

Modifying Splines
The method you use to modify a spline (Spline Editor or general method) depends on the input to the
spline.
 31
Data Elements

• Numerical values or Result set components - If the input for the spline data points was numerical
values or result set components, then when you select to modify the spline, Adams/View
displays the Spline Editor because it provides the most convenient method for directly editing
values.
• File - If the method of input for the spline data points was a file, Adams/View displays the Data
Element Modify Spline dialog box, for you to change the file or interpolation method using the
general method.
Note that because you do not always modify splines using the same method that you used to create them,
you cannot change the input to the spline data points without first deleting the spline and making it again.
For example, if you created a spline using the result set component TIME as the x values, and you want
to change the spline to reference the result set component that defines the force on a part, you would have
to delete the spline and create it again referencing the new component. In addition, if you defined spline
data points using direct numerical values and you want to instead reference a file, you must delete the
spline and make it again using the general method.

To modify a spline:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Spline, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select a data element spline to modify.
The Spline Editor or Data Element Modify dialog box appears.
3. Follow the instructions in Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor or Creating Splines Using the
General Method, as appropriate.

Tips and Cautions When Creating Splines

When selecting points to represent a curve or surface:
• Crowd points in regions with high rates of change.
• Spread out points in regions with slow rates of change.

The x and z data must cover the anticipated range of values. However, the following situations sometimes
cause Adams/Solver to evaluate a spline outside of its defined range:
• Adams/Solver occasionally approximates partial derivatives using a finite differencing
algorithm.
• Adams/Solver occasionally attempts an iteration that moves the independent variable outside of
its defined range. If this occurs, Adams/Solver issues a warning message and extrapolates the
four closest spline points. If the extrapolation is poor, Adams/Solver can have difficulty reaching
convergence, which may affect the results.
To avoid these problems, try to use real points, and extend spline values 10 percent beyond the total
dynamic range.
32 Adams/View
Data Elements

Example of Using Splines

In this example, we use a spline to relate the force of a spring to its deformation. The values in the
following Table show the relation of a force in a spring to its deformation.

Data Relating Spring Force to Spring Deflection Force

When the deflection The force

is: is:
-0.33 -38.5
-0.17 -27.1
-0.09 -15.0
0.0 0.0
0.10 10.0
0.25 30.0
0.40 43.5
0.70 67.4

Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the
force at any deflection value, Adams/View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force.
The continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -
0.25. If you input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that
the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions
to fit a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams/View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.

Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
 33
Data Elements

2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in
the spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog
box, change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F= f(defo). Adams/View builds a function
expression for you, using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.

Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections.
In this case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the
force by entering a function expression, such as:

-akispl(dm(.model_1.PART_1.MAR_4,.model_1.ground.MAR_2)
- 200.0, 0.0, .model_1.SPLINE_1)
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression

Matrices
When creating or modifying a data element matrix, you can specify its values:
• Using Full Format
• Using Sparse Format
• Using Result Set Components
• Using Data Files

Matrix Format Types

• A data element matrix is a general M x N array that can be a rectangular or square two-
dimensional matrix or a row or column matrix. You can enter the data in:
• Full format - You list all the M x N values or specify the results of a Simulation (Result set
components).
• Sparse format - You list the row position, column position, and value for only nonzero entry
values.
• External file - Enter a file containing a matrix.

If one-third or more of the entries in a matrix are nonzero, we recommend that you use full format since
it takes less time to create. If the matrix is mostly empty and entering each nonzero entry's row position,
column position, and value takes less time than entering all of the values, you should use the sparse
format

About the Format for Matrix Data Files

You can use a data file to read a large matrix into Adams/View. There is no limit to the size of an array
read from the file. The data file can be in one of three formats:
34 Adams/View
Data Elements

• Adams/Solver format - An ADAMSMAT or ADAMSMAT2 format file consists of variable-

length records that must be laid out as described in the following paragraphs. Header Characters
and File Formats lists the file format details.
Example of Matrix File in ADAMSMAT Format
Example of Entering Matrix File in ADAMSMAT2 Format
• Standard FSAVE or the optional MATSAVE format supported by the MATRIXx software
package - See the MATRIXx literature for a description of the FSAVE and MATSAVE formats.

Although no other formats are supported, the ADAMSMAT option is fairly general because the format
for reading in the data is specified within the file, and should meet your requirements.
The first record in any file type contains an 80-character header that indicates the format of the file as
listed in the table below. The remainder of the first record can be used as a title to identify the kind of
data in the file.

Header Characters and File Format Types

If the characters are: Then the file format is:

ADAMSMAT or ADAMSMAT2 Adams/Solver code format
MATRIXx FSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package
MATSAVE MATSAVE format of the MATRIXx software package

Note that the specifications for the format of the data file are case-sensitive. Uppercase letters and a
lowercase x must be used to indicate MATRIXx.

The second record contains only an integer n, right-justified within the first five spaces (the I5
FORTRAN format). It tells how many matrices are contained in the file. The next several records (one
or more) contain the alphanumeric names (eight characters or less) of all of the matrices in the file. The
names are listed sequentially, four to a line, in eight-character fields separated by ten blanks. That is, the
FORTRAN format for the records containing the matrix names is A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8, 10X, A8.
Sets of contiguous records define each matrix. Without any intervening blank lines, the blocks of records
begin immediately after the last line of matrix names. The first record in each block contains the name
of the matrix in the first eight characters of the line. The code searches through the file until it finds the
block of records corresponding to the name of the matrix element.
The first record of the block contains the type of matrix (either FULL or SPARSE ) within the second
eight spaces on the record. If the type is FULL, the next eight spaces (from 17 through 24) contain the
string CORDER or RORDER to indicate that the values are listed by column or by row, respectively.
Otherwise, if the type is SPARSE, the space is left blank. Learn about Matrix Format Types.
The numerical values specified on the first record of the block include the:
• Number of rows M in the matrix.
• Number of columns N.
 35
Data Elements

• Total number of entries to be assigned values from the file.

If the matrix type is SPARSE, then the total number of entries must be less than or equal to (generally
much less than) M x N. If the matrix is FULL, the total number must be equal to M x N.
• For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries
must be right justified in the fields 25 to 29, 30 to 34, and 35 to 39, respectively.
• For a matrix in the ADAMSMAT2 format, the values for M, N, and the total number of entries
must be separated by spaces.
The final entry on the first line of the block of records defining each matrix is the format specification
for the records containing the values of the matrix. Beginning in column 40, 41 spaces are allowed for
the character string containing the FORTRAN format specification, which must include delimiting
parentheses. The lines of data begin on the next record and continue with successive records until the
code has read into storage either M x N values if the matrix is full or the total number specified if the
matrix is sparse.

Specifications for ADAMSMAT Data File

Number of Argument/S FORTRAN

Item: records: Contents: ymbol: format:
1 1 Header for the file ADAMSMAT A
2 1 Number of matrices in the file n I5
3 (n +3)/4 Names of the n matrices NAME 4 (8A,10X)
4 1 Name of the matrix NAME A8,
{FULL or SPARSE } A8,
{CORDER or RORDER if FULL or A8,
blank if SPARSE }
Number of rows, columns M,N, 315,
Total number of entries number
FORTRAN format specification FORMAT A41
5 variable All entries in the matrix if FULL. A(I,J) or FORMAT
I,J, A(I,J) FORMAT
The indexes and nonzero entries in the matrix if
SPARSE.
Note: Items 4 and 5 have to be repeated n times, once for each matrix named in Item 3.
36 Adams/View
Data Elements

Specifications for the ADAMSMAT2 Matrix File

Number of Argument or FORTRAN

Item: records: Contents: symbol: format:
1 1 Header for the file ADAMSMAT2 A
2 1 Number of matrices in the file n I5
3 (n +3)/4 Names of the n matrices NAME 4 (8A,10X)
4 1 Name of the matrix NAME A8,
{FULL or SPARSE} A8,
{CORDER or RORDER if FULL or blank if A8,
SPARSE}
Number of rows, columns, and total number M,N, Values
of entries number separated
by spaces
FORTRAN format specification FORMAT A41
5 variable All entries in the matrix if FULL. A(I,J) or FORMAT
I,J, A(I,J) FORMAT
The indices and nonzero entries in the matrix
if SPARSE.
Note: Items 4 and 5 have to be repeated n times, once for each matrix named in Item 3.

For a full matrix, the code simply reads matrix entries sequentially from the file. If the matrix is sparse,
organize the data in triplets; Adams/View reads the row and column indexes followed by the
corresponding entry in the matrix. One triplet follows another until Adams/View has read the specified
total number of values into the storage arrays.
If the file contains another matrix, the block of records defining its structure and containing its values
must follow immediately after the last line of data for the previous matrix.

Example of Matrix File in ADAMSMAT Format

In the following example, the prob.dat is in the directory, /home/staff/demo, and contains the following
data:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
ADAMSMAT Floating platform example
3
TRF VALK STL
TRF FULL RORDER 4 2 8 ( 8F8.5 )
1.36400 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -3.54600 4.00800 0.00000 0.79900
VALK FULL CORDER 3 3 9 ( 3F6.3 )
1.970 0.000-3.440
0.000 4.510 6.020
-3.440 6.020 2.110
STL SPARSE 6 1 4 ( 2( 2I5, E14.6 ) )
1 1 0.169805E+02 2 1 -0.230745E+02
4 1 0.016390E+00 5 1 0.011271E+00
 37
Data Elements

The second and third records are read with format I5 and 4(A8,10X), respectively. Then, the first record
of each of the blocks corresponding to the three matrices TRF, VALK, and STL is read with the format
3A8, 3I5, A41. Finally, as can be seen in the copy of the file shown above between the two strings of 80
characters that mark the columns (which, of course, are not part of the file), the single record of data for
the matrix TRF is read with the format 8F8.5; the three records for VALK are read with 3F6.3; and the
two records for STL with 2(2I5,E14.6).

Example of Entering Matrix File in ADAMSMAT2 Format

ADAMSMAT2 KILOGRAM METER SECOND NEWTON TTTTFTTTF [bar_se.mnf@Thu Jan 18

16:11:41 2003 ]
12
SELMOD SELNOD GENSTIFF INVAR1
INVAR2 INVAR3 INVAR4 INVAR6
INVAR7 INVAR8 T_MODE R_MODE
SELNOD FULL RORDER 3 4 12 ( 1I8, 3E14.6 )
1 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
11 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
11 1.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
SELMOD FULL RORDER 10 2 20 ( 1I8, 1E14.6 )
2 2.653209E+03
3 5.241086E+03
4 7.699911E+03
5 9.969139E+03
6 1.199289E+04
7 1.372134E+04
8 1.511193E+04
9 1.613041E+04
10 1.675170E+04
11 1.696051E+04
INVAR1 FULL RORDER 1 1 1 ( 1E14.6 )
7.830000E-01
INVAR2 FULL RORDER 1 3 3 ( 3E14.6 )
3.915000E-01 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
INVAR3 SPARSE 3 10 1 ( 2I8, E14.6 )
1 1 0.000000E+00
INVAR4 SPARSE 3 10 1 ( 2I8, E14.6 )
1 1 0.000000E+00
INVAR6 SPARSE 10 10 10 ( 2I8, E14.6 )
1 1 1.000000E+00
2 2 1.000000E+00
3 3 1.000000E+00
4 4 1.000000E+00
5 5 1.000000E+00
6 6 1.000000E+00
7 7 1.000000E+00
8 8 1.000000E+00
9 9 1.000000E+00
10 10 1.000000E+00
INVAR7 FULL RORDER 3 3 9 ( 3E14.6 )
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 2.623050E-01 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 2.623050E-01
INVAR8 FULL RORDER 10 9 90 ( 9E14.6 )
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -2.556825E-01 0.000000E+00
38 Adams/View
Data Elements

0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -2.556825E-01

0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -3.035794E-02 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -3.035794E-02
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 1.251399E-02 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 1.251399E-02
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -7.881414E-03 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -7.881414E-03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -6.413957E-03 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 -6.413957E-03
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
GENSTIFF SPARSE 10 10 10 ( 2I8, E14.6 )
1 1 2.779090E+08
2 2 1.084432E+09
3 3 2.340622E+09
4 4 3.923513E+09
5 5 5.678161E+09
6 6 7.432809E+09
7 7 9.015700E+09
8 8 1.027189E+10
9 9 1.107841E+10
10 10 1.135632E+10
T_MODE FULL CORDER 3 30 90 ( 3E14.6 )
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.130106E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.130106E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
 39
Data Elements

1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
1.598211E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
-1.130106E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
R_MODE FULL CORDER 3 30 90 ( 3E14.6 )
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00 0.000000E+00

Defining Matrices Using User-Entered Values in Full Format

When creating a data element matrix in full format, you specify all the values in the matrix. Learn more
about Matrix Format Types.

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.
40 Adams/View
Data Elements

To create or modify a matrix using full format:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix Dialog Box, and
you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The
Create/Modify Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not
want units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams/View
automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select Full Matrix to enter all the values for the M x N array or enter names of Result set
components.
6. Select either of the following:
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by columns, select Enter Input Ordered
by Columns.
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by rows, select Enter Input Ordered by
Rows.
7. Select User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.
8. In the Row Count and Column Count text boxes, enter the number of rows and columns in the
matrix.
9. In the Values text box, enter the values in the matrix in either row or column order depending on
the order you selected in Step 6. You can separate the values using a comma or by pressing Enter
after each value.
10. Select OK.

Example of Entering Matrix in Full Format

If you want to enter the following matrix of values in full format:

1.364 0.000
0.000 0.000
– 3.546 4.008
0.000 0.7999
enter the following in the text boxes:
• Row Count - 4
• Column Count - 2
 41
Data Elements

• Values - 1.364, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000, -3.546, 4.008, 0.000, 0.7999

Defining Matrices Using Sparse Format

When you create or modify a matrix using sparse format, you enter only nonzero values.
Learn more about Matrix Format Types.

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.

To create or modify a matrix using sparse format:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix dialog box, and
you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The
Create/Modify Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not
want units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams/View
automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select Sparse Matrix to enter the row position, column position, and value for only nonzero
values.
6. Enter the following:
• Row Index - Enter the row numbers, separated by commas, in your matrix containing nonzero
values. Enter the row number each time there is a value in the row.
• Column Index - Enter the column numbers, separated by commas, containing nonzero
values. Enter the column number each time there is a value in the column.
• Values - Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column. Separate each
value with a comma.
7. Select OK.

Defining Matrices Using Result Set Components

You can only use a Result set component as matrix values using full format and entering all the values
stored in the result set component.
42 Adams/View
Data Elements

Learn more about Matrix Format Types.

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.

To create or modify a matrix using sparse format:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix Dialog Box, and
you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The
Create/Modify Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not
want units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams/View
automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select either of the following:
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by columns, select Enter Input Ordered
by Columns.
• To specify that matrix values are arranged in order by rows, select Enter Input Ordered by
Rows.
6. To obtain the values from the results of a Simulation, select Result Set Component.
7. In the Result Set Component Names text box, enter the name or names of the components.
8. Select OK.

Defining Matrices Using Data Files

When creating or modifying a data element matrix, you can define any size matrix using an external data
file. You can also specify in the data file whether you are entering the matrix values in full or sparse
format.
Learn more about:
• Matrix Format Types
• About the Format for Matrix Data Files

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file
 43
Data Elements

To create or modify a matrix using full format:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select either New or
Modify.
2. If you selected:
• New, the Create Matrix dialog box appears, as shown in Create/Modify Matrix Dialog Box, and
you should continue with Step 3.
• Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a data element matrix to modify. The
Create/Modify Matrix dialog box appears.
3. In the Matrix Name text box, accept the default name or enter a new name.
4. Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select no_units if you do not
want units associated with the values. If you set the units for your matrix values, Adams/View
automatically performs any necessary unit conversions if you ever change your modeling units.
5. Select From a File.
6. Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the matrix in the file. The
name of the matrix is necessary even if the file contains only one matrix. You will need to create
additional matrices to read other matrices from the same file.
7. Select OK.

Defining FE Model Data for Output

You can also set up Adams/View to produce data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or
strains for input to subsequent finite-element or fatigue-life analysis for use in third-party products. You
use the Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Durability (see Solver Settings - Output dialog box
help) command to specify the type of file to produce. Adams/View will not output to any files unless you
specify the format.

To output FE model data:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to FEMdata, and then select either New or
Modify.
The Create FEMDATA dialog box appears.
2. In the Name text box, enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the modeling database to
create or modify.
3. Set Type to the information you want to output, and then enter the values in the dialog box as
explained in the FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table, depending on the type of format.
4. In the File text box, enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing
directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the Adams
run ID and body ID according to the type of data and file format that you specified in the Solver
-> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability Files.
5. Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
44 Adams/View
Data Elements

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the
simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The
default is to output to the end of the simulation.
6. Select OK.
 45
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Learn about the Adams/View Controls toolkit, which provides simple linear control and filter blocks to
quickly build PID controls, prefilters, or other linear continuous time-element representations:
• Process for Building Controls Blocks and Prefilters
• Available Controls Blocks
• Creating Control Blocks
• Modifying Controls Blocks
• Checking Block Connections
• Creating Custom Blocks

Process for Building Controls Blocks and Prefilters

Follow the process below for building controls blocks and prefilters into your Adams/View models using
the Adams/View Controls Toolkit:
1. Draw a picture with your model and the controls and filters you want to add.
2. Create all input blocks.
3. Create remaining blocks one at a time and connect them to each other and the model.
4. Check all input and output connections.

Step 1 - Draw a Picture

Before adding filters and controls to your model, draw a block diagram showing the model, the inputs to
the control and filter blocks from the model, and the outputs from the control and filter blocks to the
model. A graphical representation of a typical block diagram to use for adding filters and controls is
shown in the figure below.
.

Example Block Diagram for Using Control and Filter Blocks

The inputs to the control and filter blocks that you need to diagram include:
46 Adams/View
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

• Time-based forcing functions, which might be considered "external inputs" such as Input A in
the figure above.
• Feedback loops, which might be considered "internal inputs" or closed, control loops such as
Input B in the figure above.
The outputs from the control and filter blocks that should be in your diagram include:
• Filtered measures of your model that you want to track for display or plotting purposes.
• Outputs from your model that are used as inputs to the control blocks you will be adding.

Consider adding switches to your models at places where you might want to "open the feedback loop,"
either for debugging your model or for seeing the change in performance that controls provide.
Once you have identified the inputs and outputs for the control and filter blocks, you are ready to create
the necessary blocks and connect them together and to the model.

Step 2 - Create All Input Blocks

You must first create an input block to connect to other control blocks. For example, if you want to use
a displacement from your model as an input to your control block, you must first create an input block to
set up the signal for the control block.

Step 3 - Create Other Control and Filter Blocks and Connect Them
Once you have created the input blocks, you can then create controls blocks and specify how they
interconnect with each other and input functions. The input to a control or filter block must be given as
the name of another existing control block or input block. The output of controls blocks can be referenced
in function expressions. Each control block maintains a state variable value. The name of the Adams state
variable can be found using the Database Navigator for a PID block (see Picture of Database Navigator
with PID Block). This value is then referenced in elements, such as forces, by simply typing in the element
name as the function expression. See Picture of referencing element.

Step 4 - Check All Input and Output Connections

Available Controls Blocks

Learn about the different controls blocks available in Adams/View Controls Toolkit:

Input Function Block

Input function blocks are needed wherever a control or filter block does not receive its input from another
control or filter block. This includes external time functions that need to be passed into a block, as well
as measures of your model that represent error signals to pass into a block.
An input function block takes any valid solver expression as its input. The input function block is a valid
controls block to reference as the input to any other controls block.
 47
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Summing Junction Block

Summing junction blocks are used to add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can
select whether the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single clicking
on the +/- sign button.
A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input. Specify the assembly name
of any controls block, including input function blocks, in either the Input 1 text box or the Input 2 text
box.

Gain, Integrator, Low-pass Filter, and Lead-lag Filter Blocks

Gain, integrator, low-pass filter, and lead-lag filter blocks are used to create the s-domain (Laplace
domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. For each of these blocks, the block gain or the
filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parametrize this constant
with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the bandwidth or gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.

User-Defined Transfer Function Block

The user-defined transfer function block is used to create general rational polynomial blocks by
specifying the polynomial coefficients. Coefficients are specified in the order n0, n1, n2 for the
numerator where the underlying polynomial representation is given as ****** and similarly for the
denominator. Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to this block.

Second-Order Filter
The second-order filter block is used to create a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural
frequency and the damping ratio. You can parametrize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio
constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or
damping ratio of the associated block.

PID Controller
The PID controller is used to create a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs
are necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the
derivative state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the
proportional input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity
in the x direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated
input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with Adams/View real design variables to
quickly study the effect of changing control gains.
48 Adams/View
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Switch
The switch is a convenient means to "zero" the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes
any control block as its input.

Creating Controls Blocks

To create a block in the Adams/View Controls Toolkit:
1. From the Build menu select Controls Toolkit.
The Create/Modify Standard Controls Block dialog box appears.
2. Select an icon representing the type of block that you want to create. The choices in the Create
Controls Block dialog box change to those for creating the selected control block. Learn about the
different types of blocks.
3. Enter the block name, all required inputs, and all required parameters. Inputs to controls blocks
are required to be existing controls blocks, with the exception of the input function block. Learn
about the options for each control block:
• Input-Signal Function Block
• Summing Junction Block
• Gain Block
• Integrator Block
• Low-Pass Filter Block
• Lead-Lag Filter Block
• User-Defined Transfer Function Block
• Second-Order Filter Block
• PID Controller
• Switch Block
4. Select OK.

Modifying Controls Blocks

You modify blocks in the Adams/View Controls Toolkit by selecting their assembly name in the
Database Navigator.

Checking Block Connections

In the Adams/View Controls Toolkit, you can verify that all control and filter blocks are properly
connected. When you verify the connections, Adams/View checks that all blocks have defined inputs and
then checks that all block outputs are referenced either in other blocks or as inputs to your model.
 49
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

To check block connections:

• Select on the Create/Modify Standard Controls Block.

Creating Custom Blocks

Adams/View defines each type of control in the Adams/View Controls Toolkit as an assembly. Each time
you use a controls block of a particular type, you create an instance of that assembly type. Using the
Database Navigator, you can find the controls assemblies as well as other assemblies defined under the
Adams library.
The controls block assembly definition combines Measures, Adams/View Design variables,
Adams/Solver variables, Adams/Solver transfer functions, and Adams/Solver arrays into one database
object. When Adams/View creates a control block instance, it creates all the appropriate variables,
functions, and arrays underneath that block, all with that block name.
You can create your own control blocks by first creating an assembly definition, and then adding your
assembly to the controls library. Your control blocks can have any set of equations that you require by
adding the appropriate Adams/Solver functions and variables to the block definition.

Plant Inputs and Outputs

Plant output defines the set of measured outputs from the system and Plant input defines a set of inputs
to the mechanical system. Adams/Linear linearizes the system equations to the following form:

where:
• x is the linearized system state array.
• u is the array of system inputs defined by plant input.
• y is the array of system outputs defined by plant output.

This form is commonly referred to as the state-space form of the system equations in control theory.
Adams/Solver outputs the A, B, C, and D matrices for use in a control-system design or any other linear
system analysis software. If only the A matrix is required, plant input and plant output are not necessary.

Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

The plant outputs with the plant inputs, variables, arrays, transfer functions, linear state equations, and
general state equations define the interface between Adams and control design and analysis packages
such as MATRIXx and MATLAB.
50 Adams/View
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

As shown below, plant inputs and outputs act as socket for input and output to your controller, organizing
the variable wires.

Adams/Linear uses plant inputs and outputs to identify which variables to consider system inputs and
outputs when generating state matrices. A control design program can use these matrices to design a
controller for the system. The resulting controller can then be included in the model using variables,
arrays, transfer functions, linear state equations, or general state equations. See the LINEAR command in
the Adams/Solver online help.

Creating Plant States

(Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.)
Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. In Adams/Solver (C++), you can define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will fill in by choosing a set of internally available states for the ones
that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and discards
the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams/Solver (C++) to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model
can contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
• For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Knowledge Base Article 12721.
 51
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

• For an example of using PSTATE, see Knowledge Base Article 12663.

To create a plant state:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant State, and then select New.
2. Enter the name you want assigned to the plant state.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the plant state.
4. In the Comments text box, add or change any comments about the plant state to help you manage
and identify the plant state.
5. Enter the list of variables. To help you create a variable for a plant state object, select Create State
Variable for Plant State. You can set values for the state variables in the Create State Variable
for Plant State dialog box.
6. Select OK.

To run a linear modes simulation using the plant state object:

1. Set the solver to Adams/Solver (C++).
2. In the Interactive Simulation palette, right-click the Compute Linear Modes tool , and then
select the Compute Linear Modes with Pstate tool .
The Compute Linear Modes dialog box appears.
3. Enter the plant state object you created and the reference marker.
4. Select OK.

See an Example of Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.

52 Adams/View
Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit
Editing Modeling Objects
Basics
2 Adams/View
Selecting Objects

Selecting Objects
When you create a modeling object, such as a part or force, Adams/View automatically selects it so that
you can edit it. When you create a Rigid body, Hotpoints and an Object position handle appear on the body
so that you can rotate and position the body's geometry.
You can also select objects for editing. You can select one or more objects or select a group of objects
based on their type, such as select all link geometry.

Select Tool
Main toolbox -> Select tool

Selects modeling objec such as parts or forces. Selecting the object deselects any currently selected
object. If you select a rigid body, Adams/View selects the entire body including its geometry.

To select a single object:

1. From the Main toolbox, select the Select tool .
2. Click anywhere on the object.
The object appears with a thicker line width. If the object is a rigid body, its Hotpoints and object
position handle appear on the body so that you can rotate and position the body’s geometry.

To select several objects:

1. From the Main toolbox, select the Select tool .
2. Position the cursor on the screen where you want a corner of the selection box and drag the mouse
to draw a rectangle that encloses or touches the objects that you want to select.
3. Release the mouse button.
The selected objects appear with a thicker line width. If the object is a rigid body, its hotpoints
and the object position handle appear on the body so that you can rotate and position the body’s
geometry.

Selecting Objects from a Crowd

When you are performing an operation, such as setting an object’s appearance, and you need to select an
object from the screen but the object is obscured by other objects, you can display a list of all objects in
that area and then select the desired object from the list. Note that this only works during a modeling
operation.

To display a list of all objects in an area of the screen:

1. Start the operation you want to perform.
2. Click the right mouse button when the cursor is the area of the screen containing the desired
object.
 Basics 3
Selecting Objects

A selection box of all the objects in the area appears.

3. Highlight the desired object from the list, and then select OK.

Selecting a Single Object Using a Shortcut Menu

As an alternative to the Select tool, you can select a single object using the shortcut menu.

To select a single object using the shortcut menu:

1. Place the cursor over the object that you want to select.
2. Click and hold down the right mouse button.
A shortcut menu appears.
3. Point to the object name and then select Select.
The object appears with a thicker line width. If the object is a Rigid body, its Hotpoints and Object
position handle appear on the body so that you can rotate and position the body’s geometry.

Managing the List of Selected Objects

You can use the Select List Manager to view objects you've selected and add to and remove objects from
the Select list. You can add and remove objects based on their name, type, group, and parent.
Learn more:
• Displaying the Select List Manager
• Adding a Single Object to the Select List
• Adding or Removing Objects
• Updating the Select List Display
• Selecting Objects in a Group

Displaying the Select List Manager

To display the Select List Manager:

• From the Edit menu, select Select List.
The Select List Manager appears.
The current objects in the select list appear in the Select List Manager window.

Adding a Single Object to the Select List

To add a single object to the select list:

• In the Object Name text box, enter the name of the object that you want to add, and then select
the Add button next to the text box.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
4 Adams/View
Selecting Objects

Adding or Removing Objects

You can add multiple objects to or remove multiple objects from the select list. Adams/View gives you
the flexibility to:
• Broaden the search for objects to be included or removed by entering wildcards. You can specify,
for example, to remove all objects that contain a particular character, such as an h. Learn more
about Using Wildcards.
• Limit the scope of the objects to be added or removed to only objects that belong to a particular
object. For example, you can limit the scope from all markers to only markers belonging to a
PART_1.

To add or remove multiple objects to and from the select list based on search criteria:
1. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included.
2. Set Type Filter to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove. To display all the
different object types, select Browse.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects belonging
to a certain object by entering the name of the parent object.
4. Select Add or Remove.

To remove selected objects from the list:

1. Select Remove Objects.
A list of currently selected objects appears.
2. Select the object or objects to remove. Tips To select objects:.
3. Select OK.

To quickly remove all objects from the list:

• Select Clear All.

Updating the Select List Display

You can update the list of objects in the Select List Manager window so that it reflects any selections that
you made using the mouse or shortcut menus as explained in the previous sections.

To update the select list display:

• Select Refresh.

Selecting Objects in a Group

You can add to or remove objects in a group to the Select List Manager just as you would for any type of
object as explained in Adding or Removing Objects. Before adding the object to the select list, you can
set whether or not you want to list each object in the group in the Select List Manager or just list the name
of the group.
 Basics 5
Selecting Objects

To list all objects in a group in the Select List Manager:

• Select Expand Groups.

Deselecting Objects
To deselect objects:
• From the Edit menu, select Deselect All.

Tip: Ctrl + D.

• Click when the cursor is anywhere on the background of the screen.

6 Adams/View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

The Table Editor is a convenient way to manage the objects in your model. It displays the objects in your
Modeling database in table format so you can compare the objects and quickly update them. For example,
you can update the x, y, and z locations of all parts in your model at once or parameterize the locations
of parts to the locations of other parts. The information that you can view and update about an object
depends on the type of object. The Table Editor also lets you create and delete objects.
Learn about:

Display Options
• Displaying the Table Editor
• Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor
• Sorting Objects in the Table Editor

Working with Objects and Cells

• Copying Objects in the Table Editor
• Creating Objects in the Table Editor
• Deleting Objects in the Table Editor
• Working with Cells in the Table Editor

Applying and Saving Information

• Reloading Database Values in the Table Editor
• Applying Changes in the Table Editor
• Saving Table Editor Information

For general information on using tables in Adams/View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.

Displaying the Table Editor

To display the Table Editor:
• From the Tools menu, select Table Editor.
 Basics 7
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

By default, the Table Editor displays the x, y, and z location of parts in your model.

Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor

You can display any type of object that is in your current Modeling database through the Table Editor.
For example, you can select to view all Markers or all motions. You can only view one type of object at
a time.
Adams/View provides option buttons for selecting the most common modeling objects. The option
buttons appear along the bottom of the Table Editor.

To set the type of objects displayed:

• From along the bottom of the Table Editor, select a check box of the desired object type.
Adams/View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.
If you do not see any objects in the Table Editor, the filter may not be set correctly for the type of object
you selected. For example, by default, the filter for joints is set to only display revolute joints. Therefore,
if you have no revolute joints in your model, you will not see any joints displayed in the Table Editor
when you select Joints as the type of object.
You can change the filter the categories of information that the Table Editor displays. You can also narrow
the display of objects based on an object's name or parent, such as to display only markers that belong to
PART_1, which is called setting the scope. You can also narrow the display based on the names of
objects. For example, you can set the name filter to only display the names of objects that contain the
number 2 (MARKER_20, MARKER_21, and so on). Using the scope and name filter together, you can
focus on those objects of interest and filter out the rest.
8 Adams/View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For
example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they
are visible or active in the current simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their
locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of
forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints
displayed.

To filter the information displayed in the Table Editor:

1. Set the type of object displayed to a standard object as explained in To set type of objects
displayed.
2. Select Filters from the Table Editor.
A Table Editor Filters dialog box appears. The options in the dialog box depend on the type of
object currently displayed.
3. In the Scope text box, limit the scope of the search, if desired, to all objects beneath a particular
object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object. Note that you cannot enter
wildcards in the Scope text box.
For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or enter
.model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.
4. In the Name Filter text box, enter the name of the object or objects that you want to display. Type
any wildcards that you want included. By default, Adams/View displays all objects that meet the
scope entered in the previous step regardless of their name. Learn more about Using Wildcards.
For example, enter the following to display all markers whose names start with MARKER_2 or
MARKER_3 (MARKER_20, MARKER_30, MARKER_31, and so on).
MARKER_[23]*
5. Select the categories of information or set the type of object that you want displayed and select
OK.
The following figure shows an example of displaying information about markers. In the example,
you first select Markers from the bottom of the Table Editor. When the Markers Table Editor
Filters dialog box appears, you set the types of information to display about markers. The result
in the Table Editor is a listing of six markers.

Sorting Objects in the Table Editor

You can sort the information in the Table Editor by object name or by a particular column and set the type
of sorting. You can select:
• Alphanumeric sorting, which sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first
followed by numeric characters.
 Basics 9
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

• Numeric sorting, which sorts objects based on their numeric value. It sorts any alphabetic
characters as zeros.

Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams/View sets the values displayed in cells back
to those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes that you
made to cells and did not apply to your modeling database

To sort objects in the Table Editor:

1. Select Sorting in the Table Editor.
The Sorting Settings dialog box appears.
2. Set the sorting options as explained in the table below, and then select OK.

To set: Select one of the following:

The category on which • No sorting - Objects appear in the Table Editor in the order they are
objects are sorted stored in the modeling database.
• Sort By Name - Sorts the objects by their name (by rows).
• Sort By Column Labelled and enter the name of the column on which
to sort the objects. To select a column name from a list, select Select.
Sort order • Alphabetic to sort alphabetic characters first.
• Numeric to sort in numeric order. It sorts any alphabetic characters as
zeros.

Copying Objects in the Table Editor

You can create a new object by copying an existing object in the Table Editor. Adams/View assigns the
new object a default name and displays its information in the last row of the Table Editor.

To copy an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to copy.
2. Right-click a cell in a row that is not selected. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Copy
Object.
Adams/View creates a duplicate of the object. It places the object in the last row of the Table
Editor.

Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.
10 Adams/View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

Creating Objects in the Table Editor

Using the Table Editor, you can create certain types of modeling objects. For most types of objects, you
can only create an object if another object of that type already exists in the Modeling database. For
example, if the Table Editor is set to display forces but you currently have no forces in your modeling
database, you cannot create a force through the Table Editor.
You can create parts, points, and coordinate system markers, however, regardless of whether or not an
object of that type already exists in the modeling database. For example, you can create a new marker if
the Table Editor is set to display coordinate system markers. You do not have to have an object of this
type already in the database.
Note that you cannot create a joint through the Table Editor.

To create a part, marker, or point with default values:

1. Display parts, markers, or points in the Table Editor. Learn about Displaying the Table Editor.
2. Select the Create button along the bottom of the Table Editor.
Adams/View creates an object with default values. It displays the object's information in the last
row of the Table Editor.

To create other types of objects:

1. Display the type of object you want to create in the Table Editor. An object of the type to be
created must already exist in the database.
2. Right-click a cell that is not selected. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Create Object.
Adams/View displays a dialog box that helps you create the object.
3. Enter the values in the dialog box, and then select OK.

Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.

Deleting Objects in the Table Editor

You can delete any object in the Modeling database using the Table Editor. Be careful, however, when
you delete non-standard objects, such as view layouts or interface objects. Deleting a non-standard object
may have more consequences that you are not aware of.

To delete an object:
1. Select the row containing the object you want to delete.
2. Right-click a cell in the row. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Delete Object.
 Basics 11
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

Adams/View deletes the object from the Table Editor.

Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your Modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.

Working with Cells in the Table Editor

The cells of the Table Editor display information about the objects in your Modeling database. You can
modify the information displayed about objects to make changes to the objects in the modeling database.
For example, you can move a point by changing its x location in the Table Editor from 50 inches to 60
inches.
Learn about:
• Entering Text in Cells
• Inserting Text into a Multiple Cells
• Entering Object and Information Names in Cells
• Modifying Cells Based on Their Current Contents

Note: The operations you perform with the Table Editor are not stored in your modeling
database until you apply them. Learn Applying Changes in the Table Editor.

Entering Text in Cells

While you can enter text directly into the cells of the Table Editor, you can also use the input box that
appears at the top of the Table Editor, as shown below. The input box lets you add text to more than one
cell at a time and quickly update the values in the cell.

To enter text in a cell:

1. Click the cell. The text cursor appears in the cell.
2. Type the text you want.
12 Adams/View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

To enter text through the input box:

1. Click the cell whose text you want to edit.
The text in the cell appears in the input box.
2. Place the cursor in the input box and type the text you want.
3. To insert the text in the input box into the cell, do either of the following:
• Select the Lock tool .
• Press Enter.

Inserting Text into a Multiple Cells

You can use the input box to insert the same text into multiple cells at once.

To insert text into multiple cells:

1. Select the cells in which you want to insert the text.
2. In the input box, enter the text that you want to insert as explained in Entering Text in Cells.
3. Select the Insert tool ..

Entering Object and Information Names in Cells

When you create function expressions or parameterize your model, you often need to include the full
name of a modeling object, which is the name of the object's parent followed by the object's name, and
the name assigned to the information you want associated with the object as it appears in the modeling
database. For example, when building a function for a force, you often refer to a marker's displacement
in the x direction. In a function expression, enter the following:
.model_1.PART_2.MAR_1.Loc_X
The Table Editor provides a shortcut for entering the object and field names so that you can build
functions and parameterize your model quickly.

To quickly enter an object's full name and information field into the input box:
1. Place the cursor in the input box where you want the object name to be inserted.
2. Select the Object Name & Field tool f(x) on the Table Editor.
3. Select any cell in the row containing the object whose name you want to input.
Adams/View inserts the object's full name and field information into the cell.
For more information on building functions, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help. For
information on parameterizing your model, see Improving Your Model Designs.

Modifying Cells Based on Their Current Contents

Using the Table Editor, you can quickly update the current value in many cells at once. For example, you
can update the x location of all markers to be that of their current location plus 3. The Table Editor creates
a variable based on the current contents of a cell ( $cell), which you can use to update the cells.
 Basics 13
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

For a marker example, the Table Editor would create a text string in the input box that represents the
current x location of all selected markers. You would then create an expression to add 3 to any current
cell value. The input box would look like the following:
$cell + 3
When you insert the expression into the x location cell of a selected marker, the variable changes to the
current value of the selected cell. For the marker example, the cell for MARKER_1 whose current value
is 20, now looks like the following:
(20 + 3)
When you apply the changes to the modeling database, Adams/View stores the value as an expression
(an expression in Adams/View always is enclosed in parenthesis ( )):
(20 + 3)
To have Adams/View evaluate the expression and store only a number, enter eval in front of the
expression in the input box as shown below and then insert the expression to the cells:
eval($cell + 3)

To modify the cells based on their current contents:

1. Display the type of object you want to update in the Table Editor, if necessary. Learn about Setting
Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor.
2. Select the cells you want to update.
3. Enter how you want to update the cells in the input box as explained in Entering Text in Cells.
4. Select the Cell Variable tool to create a variable representing the current contents of the
cells.
5. Select the Insert tool .
Adams/View updates the cells with the information in the input box.

Reloading Database Values in the Table Editor

If you have made changes to values in the Table Editor that you would like to clear out and reset to the
current values of the object, you can reload the table.

To reload the Table Editor:

• Select Reload.

Applying Changes in the Table Editor

You must apply any changes you make to objects in the Table Editor before Adams/View saves them in
the Modeling database.
14 Adams/View
Editing Objects Using the Table Editor

To apply changes:
• From the Table Editor, select Apply.

Saving Table Editor Information

You can save the current contents of the Table Editor in ASCII format. Adams/View places spaces
between each cell.

To save the current contents:

1. From the Table Editor, select Write.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
2. In the Directories list box, select the directory in which you want the file located.
3. In the Selection text box, enter the file name.
4. Select OK.
 Basics 15
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes

Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes

You use the modify dialog box associated with an object to change the properties of that object. For
example, you modify a simple idealized joint using the Modify Joint dialog box. Follow the instructions
below to learn how to display a modify dialog box band follow the instructions in the appropriate help
topics to learn how to modify a particular type of object using the dialog box.

To display a modify dialog box for an object on the screen:

• Right-click the object whose properties you want to modify, point to the type of object, and then
select Modify. For example, for a joint, the shortcut menu displays the word Joint. You would
point to Joint, and then select Modify.

Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object. Learn about Defining a Zoom Area.

The modify dialog box appears.

Tip: Double-click the object to display its modify dialog box or select the object and then
enter Ctrl + e.

To use the Database Navigator to display a modify dialog box:

1. Double-click the background of the Adams/View main window to clear any selections.
2. From the Edit menu, select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the object whose properties you want to modify. Learn about Showing , Hiding, and
Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
The modify dialog box appears.
16 Adams/View
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes
Working with Objects

Copying Objects
You can copy any selected objects within the same model. Adams/View creates an identical copy of the
selected object. Adams/View assigns a default name to the duplicated object using the copied object
name as the base name and appending _2 to the name. For example, if Adams/View copies a rigid body
called PART_1, it assigns the new object the name PART_1_2.

To copy selected objects:

1. Select the objects that you want to copy. Learn about Selecting Objects.
2. Select one of the following:
• From the Edit menu, select Copy.
• From the Standard toolbar, select the Copy tool .
Adams/View creates a copy of the objects. It selects the copied objects so you can edit or move
them.

Tip: Select Ctrl + C.

To copy an object on the screen using the shortcut menu:

1. Right-click the object you want to copy.

Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.

2. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Copy.

To copy objects using the Database Navigator:

1. To clear any selections, click the background of the Adams/View main window.
2. From the Edit menu, select Copy.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the object you want to copy. Learn about Showing , Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the
Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
2 Adams/View
Working with Objects

Deleting Objects
You can delete any object that you created in the current modeling database, including deleting a model.
Learn about Deleting a Model.
You can delete any object that has a graphical representation on the screen, such as a rigid body or link,
by selecting them first and then deleting them. You can also select objects that do not have graphical
representations by searching for them through the Database Navigator and then deleting them.

To delete selected objects:

1. Select the objects that you want to delete. Learn about Selecting Objects.
2. From the Edit menu, select Delete.
3. Adams/View deletes the selected objects.

Tip: Select the Del. key.

To delete an object on the screen using the shortcut menu:

1. Right-click the object you want to delete.

Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.

2. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Delete.

To delete objects using the Database Navigator:

1. Double-click the background of the Adams/View main window to clear any selections.
2. From the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the object you want to delete from the Database Navigator. Learn about Showing , Hiding,
and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.

Renaming Objects Through Menu Commands

About Object Naming
As you create objects in Adams/View, Adams/View automatically assigns names to them. The name
consists of the type of object and a unique ID. For example, it names a joint JOINT_1 and a motion
MOTION_1.
 3
Working with Objects

An object also has a full name, which is the name of the object’s parent followed by the name of the
object. A full name always begins with a “.” (dot). For example, a part with the name PART_1 in the
model SLA has the full name .SLA.PART_1.
Objects must have a unique name relative to other objects that belong to their parents. For example, you
cannot have two points named PT1 on part PART_1, but you can have PT1 on more than one part because
the full names of each point would be unique (.SLA.PART_1.PT1 and .SLA.PART_2.PT1).
Adams/View allows you to change the default name assigned to any object but you cannot change its full
name. Adams/View often shows you just the name of the object and not its full name to simplify the
display of objects.

To rename a selected object:

1. Select the object that you want to rename. Learn about Selecting Objects.
2. From the Edit menu, select Rename.
The Rename Object appears.
3. In the New Name text box, enter the name you want to assign to the object.
4. To rename another object, select the More button to display the Database Navigator.
5. Select OK.

To rename an object on the screen using the shortcut menu:

1. Right-click the object you want to rename.

Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.

2. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Rename.

The Rename Object dialog box appears.
3. In the New Name text box, enter the name you want to assign to the object.
4. Select OK.

To rename any object in the database:

1. Double-click the background of the Adams/View main window to clear any selections.
2. From the Edit menu, select Rename.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the object that you want to rename from the Database Navigator.
The Rename Object dialog box appears.
4. In the New Name text box, enter the name you want to assign to the object.
5. Select OK.
4 Adams/View
Working with Objects

To rename an object as you modify it:

You can also rename an object when you are modifying it. You cannot, however, change the name of the
object directly in the Name text box of the modify dialog box. Instead, you display the shortcut menu,
and then select Rename. The example shows how to change the name of JOINT_1 as you are modifying
it.
1. Display the object’s modify dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Right-click in the Name text box, point to the name of the object (such as .model_1.JOINT_1),
and then select Rename.
3. In the New Name text box, enter the name you want to assign to the object.
4. Select OK.

Adding Comments to Objects

You can add notes about the objects in your model to help you manage and identify them. The types of
objects about which you can add comments are listed below. For parts, constraints, and forces, you add
comments when you modify the object. For models, you can add the comments as you create the model,
and you can also modify the comments.
• Models
• Parts
• Constraints
• Forces
• Materials

The comments that you create appear in the following:

• Information window
• Adams/View Log files
• Adams/View command files or
• Adams/Solver dataset files

To add comments to an object:

1. From the object's modify dialog box or from the Create/Modify model dialog box, select the
Comment tool . Learn about Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
The Modify Comment dialog box appears.
2. In the Comment Text section of the dialog box, enter the comments that you want associated with
the object.
3. Select Time or Date to add the time and date when you created the comments.
4. Select OK.
 5
Working with Objects

About Activation Status

Objects in Adams/View have two states during a Simulation: active and inactive. When an object is
active, Adams/Solver includes the object in any simulations that you run. If an object is inactive,
Adams/Solver ignores the object. For example, if you constrain two parts using a Fixed joint to
temporarily keep them fixed, you can deactivate the fixed joint during the simulation. The two parts are
then free to move relative to each other.
You may find activating and deactivating objects helpful in the following circumstances:
• You have imported part graphics from a CAD program and you haven’t constrained all of the
parts yet. By deactivating some of them, you can keep them in your Modeling database without
having them affect the simulation. You can also test each Constraint that you create individually.
• You are debugging your model and you want to see which objects are causing problems. You can
deactivate those you think are most likely to be generating errors.
• You are studying design variations and you want to alternate between different variations. For
example, you could create both a Bushing and a Joint between two parts in your model. During
the first simulation, you could activate the bushing and deactivate the joint. During the second
simulation, you could deactivate the bushing and activate the joint. Finally, during a third
simulation, you could activate both.
You can also create a Scripted simulation to turn on and off the activation states of objects during a
simulation. For example, to simulate the launching of a missile, you can fix the missile to the plane with
a fixed joint and then deactivate the joint during the simulation to simulate the release of the missile.
Learn about Performing a Scripted Simulation.
You can set the activation status of the following objects. All objects are active by default.
• Groups (You set the activation status of groups as you create them. Learn about Grouping and
Ungrouping Objects.)
• Parts (rigid bodies, point masses, and flexible links)
• Differential equations
• Markers
• Constraints
• Forces
• Data elements
• Output controls

About Inheriting Activation Status

When you activate an object, it only becomes truly active if and when all of its ancestors are active. In
addition, if you deactivate an object, you also deactivate all its children. For example, if you have a part
(PART_1) with two markers (MARKER_1 and MARKER_2), you can only activate MARKER_1 if
6 Adams/View
Working with Objects

PART_1 is also active. Also, if you deactive PART_1, you also deactivate its markers. The following
figure shows the possible activation states for PART_1 and its markers.

Learn about:
• About activation status
• Activating and deactivating objects

Activating and Deactivating Objects

Any objects that you deactive appear dimmed in the display of the Main window and Database Navigator.
In addition, the text OFF appears next to the object in the Database Navigator Tree list.
Note that any geometry that you deactivate will not be included in mass calculations.

To activate or deactivate a selected object:

1. Select the object to be activated or deactivated.
2. From the Edit menu, select either Activate or Deactivate.
If you deactivated an object, Adams/View changes its color to indicate it is not active.

To change the activation status of an object on the screen and its children:
1. Right-click the object you want to activate or deactivate.

Tip: You can zoom in on the object on the screen to more easily place the cursor over just
that object.
 7
Working with Objects

2. From the shortcut menu that appears, select (De)activate.

The Deactivate/Activate Object dialog box appears.
3. Set the activation of the object and select whether or not you want the object's children to inherit
the activation status of the parent. Learn About Inheriting Activation Status.
4. Select OK.

To activate or deactivate an object using the Database Navigator:

1. Double-click the background of the Adams/View main window to clear any selections.
2. From the Edit menu, select Activate or Deactivate.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the object you want to activate or deactivate from the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.

To determine the activation status of an object:

• Display information about the object as explained in Viewing Object Information. Be sure that
Verbose is selected in the Information window so that the window displays all information about
the object.

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

If several objects make up a unit or subsystem of your model, you can group them so that you can work
on them as a single object. For example, you could group all the objects that make up a suspension system
or a handle of a latch. Once you've grouped the objects, you can add them to the select list all at once so
that you can perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their
activation and deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.

To create a group of objects:

1. From the Build menu, select Group.
The Group Create dialog box appears.

Note: The pull-down menu Expand Groups is only present to provide backward
compatibility. We recommend that you not use it.

2. Enter a name for the group of objects. Adams/View assigns a default name for you.
3. Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you manage and identify the
group.
8 Adams/View
Working with Objects

4. Specify the objects to be included in the group as explained in the table below.

To: Do the following:

Explicitly specify the In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects. Separate
objects to be grouped each name with a comma (,).

You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut menu,
Adams/View enters commas between the objects.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Set filters for specifying In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify the
objects to be grouped type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter Parts to
include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only coordinate system
markers.

5. Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You can enter an
expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter 1 or 0. If you do not specify a value,
Adams/View uses the activation status you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands as
explained in Activating and Deactivating Objects.
6. Select OK.

To ungroup objects:
1. From the Build menu, select Ungroup.
The Delete Group dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.
3. Select OK.

Setting Object Appearance through Edit -> Appearance

Command
You can set how individual or types of objects appear in Adams/View.You can set:
• Visibility of the object and of its name on the screen.
• Color, line style, line width, rendering, and transparency of the object. For example, you can set
the color of the object’s outline or its name.
• Size of the screen icons that represent the object in your model. Note that these changes take
precedence over the size you specify globally for the Modeling database.
You can also set appearance through the Database Navigator. You cannot, however, set rendering mode,
but you can additionally set the state of the object during a Simulation. Learn about Setting Appearance
of Objects Through the Database Navigator.
 9
Working with Objects

To set the appearance of an object:

1. If desired, select the object whose appearance you want to set. Otherwise, you can use the
Database Navigator to select the object. It appears after Step 2.

Tip: Right-click the object on the screen, point to the name of the object, and then select
Appearance.

2. From the Edit menu, select Appearance.

If you did not select an object, the Database Navigator appears.
3. If necessary, select the object from the Database Navigator. Learn about Showing , Hiding, and
Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator.
4. Do one of the following:
• To explicitly specify an object, in the Entity text box, enter the name of the object whose
appearance you want to set.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog box.
• To specify an entire type of object whose appearance you want to set, in the Entity text box,
enter a wildcard, and then specify the type of object in the Type text box. For example, enter
Parts to set the appearance of all rigid bodies or Markers to set the appearance of all markers.
5. Set Visibility to how you want the visibility of the selected object or objects. You can select:
• On - Turns on the display of the objects.
• Off - Turns off the display of the objects.
• Inherit - Lets the object simply inherit the display settings from its parent. For example, a
coordinate system marker inherits settings from its parent part.
6. Set Name Visibility to whether or not you want the name of the objects displayed in the View
window. Refer to the options above for Visibility for an explanation of the choices.
7. Set Color Scope to the color you want used for the objects and set which elements of the objects
should be affected by the selected color. You can select:
• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be shaded (they include sides
of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so on).
• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of a graphic that can be
shaded.
• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that cannot be shaded or filled
like the coil of a spring damper.
• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-click the Color text
box, and select Browse or Create.
8. Set the Render choices to:
10 Adams/View
Working with Objects

• Filled - Adds shading to a solid fill to give a more realistic appearance. It does not show edges.
The light source is from the upper left.
• Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see through the objects. Helps
you select points and edges.
9. Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more transparent the object
is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object is,
covering other objects.

Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact on graphical
performance if you are using a graphics card without hardware acceleration for
OpenGL. Instead of setting an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s
render mode to wireframe.

10. In the Icon Size text box, enter the size you want for the icons or, in the Icon Scale text box, enter
the amount by which you want to scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size
set. A scale factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces the size
of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the icons. Note that these changes
take precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as explained in
Setting Screen Icon Display.

Setting Up Material Types

You can create or modify a material, which you can then assign to parts. You define a material by its
composition, such as restitution coefficient, Young's modulus, Poisson’s ratio, and mass density. Part
material properties are important in determining the mass moments of inertia of a part.

To create or modify a material type:

1. From the Build menu, point to Materials, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a material type to modify, and
then select OK.
The Create/Modify Material dialog box appears.
3. Change the default name assigned to the new material type, if desired.
4. Enter the values for Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio, and mass density.
5. Select the Comments tool on the dialog box and enter any comments you want associated
with the material type. Learn about Comments.
6. Select OK.
 11
Working with Objects

Standard Material Properties

The following table shows the material properties for the standard material types in Adams/View. All
material types in Adams/View are assumed to be linearly elastic. Adams/View automatically calculates
the material’s Shear Modulus (G) from the Young’s Modulus (E) and Poisson’s Ratio () according to the
equation:

Young’s Modulus value

The material (Newton/meter2) Poisson’s Ratio Density (kg/meter3)
Aluminum 7.1705E+ 10 0.33 2740.0
Cast iron 1.0E+11 0.211 7080.0
Steel 2.07E+11 0.29 7801.0
Stainless steel 1.9E+11 0.305 7750.0
Magnesium 4.48E+10 0.35 1795.0
Nickel 2.07E+11 0.291 7750.0
Glass 4.62E+10 0.245 2595.0
Brass 1.06E+11 0.324 8545.0
Copper 1.19E+11 0.326 8906.0
Lead 3.65E+10 0.425 11370
Titanium 1.0204E+11 0.3 4850.0
Tungsten 3.447E+11 0.28 19222\
Wood 1.1E+10 0.33 438.0

Setting Object Colors

By default, Adams/View displays each of the objects you create in a different color using its palette of
objects colors. You can also:
• Change the color of any object.
• Modify any of the colors in the palette.
• Create a color of your own.
• Change the background color of the Main window and any View windows that you create.

Learn about:
• Changing an Object's Color
12 Adams/View
Working with Objects

• Modifying and Creating Object Colors

Changing an Object's Color

You can change an object's color using either the Object Color Tool Stack on the Main Toolbox, which
contains 15 colors to which you can set the color of a object, or you can use the Edit Appearance Dialog
Box. The Edit Appearances dialog box lets you select all the colors defined in the Modeling database.

To change an object's color using the Object Color tool stack:

1. Select the object or objects whose color you want to change as explained in Selecting Objects.
2. Select a color from the Object Color tool stack.

To change an object's color using the Edit Appearances dialog box:

1. Select the object or objects whose color you want to change.
2. From the Edit menu, select Appearance.
3. In the Color text box, enter the name of a color.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Learn more about Setting Object Appearance through Edit -> Appearance Command.

Modifying and Creating Object Colors

You can change the colors that are available for displaying objects and define new colors. Note that the
color changes are not reflected in the color tools on the Object Color tool stack. These are fixed and
remain the same colors as the default colors.

To modify or create a color:

1. From the Settings menu in either the main or plotting window, select Colors.
The Edit Color dialog box appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To modify a color, set Color to the the color that you want to modify. You can also select
Background to edit the color of the view window background. The selected color appears in
the Old color box.
• To create a new color, select New Color. The Create New Color dialog box appears. Enter the
name of the color, and then select OK.
3. Select Color Picker, and then select a color.
The selected color appears in the New color box.
4. Select OK.
 13
Working with Objects

Using the Color Picker to Select Colors

You can use the Color Picker to select a color from a preset palette of basic colors or colors you define
yourself.

Selecting a Basic Color

There are forty-eight basic colors already defined for you.

To select a basic color:

1. Select the color’s square in the Basic Colors box. The selected color, its red, green, and blue
(RGB), and hue, Saturation, and luminosity values (HSV) appear in the lower right corner of the
Color Picker.
2. Select OK.

Defining a New Color

Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color in the Basic Color palette
and then modifying it.

To define a new color:

1. Click anywhere in the color matrix to select a color.
2. Change the RGB or HSV values or use the Luminosity slider to the right of the color matrix to
adjust the lightness or luminosity of the color. See a Picture of Color Picker.
3. Select OK.

Tip: There are sixteen Custom Color squares that you can fill with colors that you want to use
throughout the current session of Adams/View. To store a custom color, select a Custom
Color square, define a color, and then select Add to Custom Colors. The colors are only
available for the current session of Adams/View.
14 Adams/View
Measuring Distance Between Positions

Measuring Distance Between Positions

You can quickly have Adams/View calculate the relative distance and orientation between positions in
your model defined as Markers or Points. You can also calculate the distance from a position and ground.
It's a quick way to check the relationship between two positions without creating a measure or request.
You will find it helpful to check, for example, if two markers in your model are at the proper distance or
orientation.
Adams/View calculates the following distance information:
• Magnitude
• x, y, and z component
• Angular displacement

You can also select that Adams/View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. When you select
a reference marker, Adams/View calculates the distance information in the coordinate system of the
reference marker. If you do not specify a reference marker, Adams/View calculates the distance relative
to the ground part.
You can select to measure the distance at the model’s initial configuration (how you built it) or at
particular Simulation step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. For the
model configuration, you can select:
• Model input - The model configuration that was input to Adams/Solver, the analysis engine,
before it ran a simulation.
• Initial conditions - The model configuration after initial conditions were met.
• Equilibrium - The configuration after an equilibrium simulation.
• Forward - One frame forward from the currently displayed frame.
• Backward - One frame backward from the currently displayed frame.

You can view the results in an information window or have Adams/View store the results in a file.

To calculate the distance between markers or points:

1. From the Tools menu, select Measure Distance.
The Measure Distance dialog box appears.
2. Enter the marker or points whose distance you want to calculate in the first three text boxes:
• First Position - Enter the marker or point from which you want to measure the distance.
• Second Position - Enter the marker or point to which you want measure the distance.
• Ref Position - Enter the marker or point defining the coordinate system in which to represent
distance information. Leave blank to represent distance information in global coordinate
system. Using a point as the reference position is the same as using a marker whose orientation
is identical to the global orientation.
 15
Measuring Distance Between Positions

3. In the Write Result to File Name text box, enter the name of the file in which you want to save
the distance information. If you want the information written to a directory other than the one from
which you are running Adams/View, include the path.
4. Select either:
• Model Name if you want to calculate the distance based on the current configuration of a
model.
• Analysis Name if you’d like to calculate the distance based on a configuration, frame, or
Simulation time from a particular simulation.
5. The elements in the dialog box change depending on your selection.
6. Enter the options in the dialog box as explained in the table below and select OK. As you set
options, remember that you can use the shortcut menu that appears when you hold down the right
mouse button in a text box to select an object from the screen or a list.

If you selected: Do the following:

Model Name In the Model Name text box, enter the name of the model. If you
want to measure distances in the current model, you do not need to
enter a model name.
Analysis Name 1. Enter the name of a simulation.
2. Select to use a particular time, frame, or configuration
stored in the selected simulation.
16 Adams/View
Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts

Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts

You can have Adams/View calculate the total mass and inertia of a part or parts in your model.
Adams/View returns the information in the Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground
part or any part that has no mass.
By default, Adams/View calculates all location coordinates and orientation angles in the current global
coordinate system. You can select a different coordinate system or reference frame relative to which you
would like the coordinates and angles returned. When you express the aggregate mass in the global
coordinate system, Adams/View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass location and
then it provides the inertia properties in principal moments, not off-diagonal terms.
The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.

To calculate aggregate mass:

1. From the Tools menu, select Aggregate Mass.
The Aggregate Mass dialog box appears.
2. Set Bodies to one of the following:
• Selected to calculate the mass of only certain parts.
• All to calculate the aggregate mass of all the bodies in your model.
3. If you selected to calculate the aggregate mass of only a selected set of parts, select Select . A list
of parts in your model appears. Select the desired parts. Tips To select objects:.
4. In the Relative to text box, if desired, enter another coordinate system, with respect to which
you'd like calculations to be relative. By default the calculations are relative to the global
coordinate system.
5. Set Info Window to one of the following:
• Replace to replace existing information.
• Append to append existing information.
• None
6. Select how you want the output displayed. You can display it in the information window and to a
file. (Note that currently, Brief Output has no impact on the type of information displayed.)
7. If you want to save the results to a file, in the File Name text box, enter the name of the file in
which you want to save the information. If you want the information written to a directory other
than the one from which you are running Adams/View, enter the path.
8. Select OK.
 17
Defining a New Ground Part

Defining a New Ground Part

Using the Modify Body dialog box, you can define a new part as the ground part.
Learn About the Ground Part.

To define a new ground part:

1. Display the Modify Rigid Body as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set Category to Ground Part.
3. In the New Ground text box, enter a new or existing part to be ground.
4. Select OK.
18 Adams/View
Defining a New Ground Part
Moving Objects
2 Adams/View
Using Object Position Handle

Using Object Position Handle

The Object position handle is a powerful tool for translating and rotating various objects in your model.

Displaying the Object Position Handle

To display the object position handle on an object:
• Select the object on which you want to display the handle. To see the handle, you can have only
one object selected.
The position handle appears over the first point of the geometry that you created or in the center
of spherical geometry.

Translating an Object Along Its Axes

You can use the Object position handle to translate an object along an axis of the object position handle.

To translate an object along its axes:

1. Display the position handle as explained in Displaying the Object Position Handle.
2. Click on any of the axis stems of the object position handle and drag the stem. The position handle
moves the object in either direction along the selected axis.
 Moving Objects 3
Using Object Position Handle

Rotating an Object About Its Axes

You can use the Object position handle to rotate an object about an axis of the object position handle.

To rotate the object about any of its three axes:

1. Display the position handle as explained in Displaying the Object Position Handle.
2. Click on the ball at the end of any of the axes of the handle and pivot the axis around the origin
of the handle. Moving the x-axis ball rotates about the y-axis, moving the y-axis ball rotates about
the z-axis, moving the z-axis ball rotates about the x-axis.
3. You can also use the object position handle to rotate an object in the plane of the screen when one
axis of the object is perpendicular to the screen.

Tip: To gain more precise control on the rotation angles, move the mouse away from the
center of the position handle as you rotate the object. The farther you move the
mouse away from the position handle, the smaller Adams/View makes the angles of
rotation.

Creating a Global Position Handle

You can create a global position handle with respect to the which you can translate and rotate selected
objects.

Tip: You can also locate the global position handle by entering precise locations as
explained in Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly. If other objects are also
selected, Adams/View moves them to positions relative to the new position of the
global position handle.

To set a global position handle:

1. Do either of the following:
• From the Settings menu, select Object Position Handle.
• From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select Object Position Handle tool .
4 Adams/View
Using Object Position Handle

The Object Position Handle dialog box appears.

2. Select Set Handle Location, and then click on the screen to indicate the location for the handle.
3. If desired, orient the axes of the handle as explained below. By default, the orientation of the
position handle is set to that of the current Working grid axes.
• Set Orientation Via to how you want to orient the handle.
• Select Orientation Via, and then define axes as necessary.
4. Select Close.

To reset the global position handle to the default location for the selected object:
• Select Reset from the Object Handle Settings dialog box.

Tip: You can also delete the global position handle just as you would any object as
explained in Deleting Objects.
 Moving Objects 5
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

The move tools available from the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox provide many different ways to
move objects.

Note: Four of the tools in the Move tool stack are not explained here because they are shortcuts
to other operations or apply more to parameterization. The tools are:

• Coordinate System tool

• Working Grid tool
• Parameterization tools f(x) and f(theta)

Translating Objects by Dragging

You can quickly translate objects by dragging them. To protect you from accidentally translating objects,
you need to press Ctrl and Shift before you can translate the objects. You can translate objects in the
Working grid if it is turned on or about the global coordinate system.

To translate objects by selecting and dragging:

1. Select the objects that you want to translate as explained in Selecting Objects.
2. Hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys.
3. Click anywhere on the selected objects and hold down the mouse button.
4. Drag the selected objects to the desired location and release the mouse button.

Moving Objects By Increments

Main toolbox -> Move tool stack -> By Increments

You can position an object incrementally using the By Increments tool . It lets you specify the angle
of rotation or the translational distance. The next two sections explain how to translate and rotate objects
by increments:
• Rotating Object by Increments
• Translating Object by Increments
6 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

Rotating Object by Increments

Rotates an object by increments about the center (origin) of the View window. As you rotate the object,
you can select where the origin of the view window is.

To incrementally rotate an object:

1. Select the object that you want to move.
2. From the Move Toolstack, select the By Increments tool .
See a Picture of rotating by increments.
3. If desired, select a new view center about which to rotate the object. To select a new center:
• Select the blank box in the center of the rotation arrows.
• Select a point on screen about which you want to rotate the object.
4. In the Angle text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the object.
5. Select the appropriate rotation arrows to rotate the object. Adams/View rotates the object each
time you select an arrow.

Translating Object by Increments

Translates an object by increments.

To incrementally translate an object:

1. Select the object that you want to move.
 Moving Objects 7
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the By Increments tool . The settings
in the Main toolbox container change as shown below
.

3. In the Distance text box, set the amount by which you want to incrementally translate the object.
4. Select the appropriate translation arrows to translate the object along the x- or y-axis of the view
coordinate system. Adams/View translates the object each time you select an arrow.

Exact Position Tool - Moving Objects Exactly

Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> Exact Position Tool

You can position an object precisely by specifying the translational coordinates and the rotational angles
of the object’s position handle relative to the Working grid axes, global coordinate system, or any object
on the screen. In addition, you can display the current position of an object’s position handle.
8 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

The following figure shows an example of entering the exact location of a box’s object handle position
so that the handle is in the same position as the handle of a second box.

If more than one object is selected or you’ve created a global position handle, Adams/View moves the
first object you selected or the handle to the specified location and moves all other selected objects to
positions relative to the first selected object or the handle.

To position an object precisely or get the location of an object:

1. Select the object or objects that you want to position or the object whose coordinate location you
want to display.
 Moving Objects 9
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

2. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Exact Position tool . The settings
in the Main toolbox change as shown below.

3. Do one or more of the following:

• Select Get to obtain the coordinates of the selected object.
• In the 1, 2, or 3 Location and Orientation text boxes, enter the locations and orientations to
which you want to move the object.
The coordinate locations are in the current coordinate system. For example, if the coordinate
system is set to Cartesian, then Location 1 is the x coordinate.
Orientation 1 is the first rotation angle, Orientation 2 is the second, and Orientation 3 is the
third. The axis to which Adams/View applies these angles depends on the current rotation
sequence. Learn about Rotation Sequences. For example, if the rotation sequence is body-
fixed 313, Adams/View applies Orientation 1 to the z-axis.
4. Select the object to which the locations and orientations are relative. The coordinates are relative
to the location of the object’s position handle. By default, the coordinates are relative to the
working grid.
5. If you selected that the coordinates are relative to an object, enter the object in the lower text box.
To browse for an object or select an object from a list, right-click the lower text box, and then
select the appropriate command.
6. Select Set.
10 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

Point-to-Point Tool - Translating from Initial Location to

Another
Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> Point-to-Point Tool

Moves objects by translating them from an initial location to another. There are two ways to move an
object from one location to another:
• Pick two locations. The first location defines the location from which to move and the second
location defines the point to which to move the selected object. The objects move relative to the
selected locations.
• Define a distance and a vector along which to translate the selected objects.

The following figures show a link (LINK_2) being centered over a hole of LINK_1 by moving the link
from position A to position B.

As you translate the objects, you can rotate an object that you select during the translation operation or
translate all objects currently selected. In addition, you can translate a copy of the selected objects instead
of the actual objects.

To translate objects from one location to a another by defining two points:

1. From the Move Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Point-to-Point tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• If desired, select Selected to translate the currently selected objects.
• If desired, select Copy to translate a copy of the selected object or objects.
• Select From To from the pull-down menu.
3. If you did not choose Selected in the settings container, select the object that you want to translate.
4. Select the first point on the screen from which to translate the object or objects.
5. Select the second point on the screen to which to translate the object.
 Moving Objects 11
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

To translate objects along a vector:

1. From the Move tool stack, select the Point-to-Point tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• If desired, select Selected to translate the currently selected objects.
• If desired, select Copy to translate a copy of the selected object or objects.
• Select Direction Distance from the pull-down menu, and then enter the distance to translate
the object in the Distance text box.
3. Select the object that you want to translate. if you did not select Selected in the settings container.
4. Select an axis or define the vector along which to translate the object by selecting two points on
the screen.

Align & Rotate Tool - Rotating Objects About or Along Grid

or Features
Main toolbox -> Move tool stack -> Align & Rotate Tool

Rotates objects about an axis or aligns them with the axes of other objects. You can set the alignment in
the following ways:
• About - Rotates an object about the axis of another object.
• Align - Rotates an object about its axis to align it with another object.
• Align Same As - Aligns an object to the orientation of another object.
• Align One Axis - Orients an axis of an object to be in the same direction as the axis of another
object. This is useful if the axis of a joint or force is defined by a marker in your model.
• Align Two Axes - Orients an object so it is the same direction as the axis of another object and
rotates the object about that axis to place a second axis in the plane defined by the two directions.
12 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

You can rotate an object that you select during the rotate operation or rotate all objects currently selected.
In addition, you can rotate a copy of the selected objects instead of the actual objects.

To rotate objects about an axis or axes:

1. From the Move Toolstack, select the Align & Rotate tool .
2. In the settings container, specify the following:
• To rotate the currently selected objects, select Selected.
• To rotate a copy of the selected object or object, select Copy.
• From the pull-down menu, select the method you want to use to rotate or align objects. If you
selected About, enter the amount to rotate the object in the Angle box.
3. If you did not choose Selected in the settings container, select the object or objects that you want
to rotate.
4. Follow the prompts in the status bar to select the axis or axes about which to rotate or align the
objects. Refer to the table below for assistance.

If you
selected: Do the following:
About Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.
Align Select the axis about which to rotate the object or objects.

Select the axis to move.

Select the axis with which to align the object.

Align Same As Select the object to which you want to align the already selected objects.
 Moving Objects 13
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

If you
selected: Do the following:
Align One Axis Select the axis of the object to align.

Select the object to which to align the axis.

Align Two Select the first axis of the object to control (x, y, or z).
Axes
Select the object to which to direct the first axis.

Select the second axis of the object to control.

Select the object towards which to direct the second object.

Note: Adams/View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first
object, and the second axis points as closely as possible towards the second
object.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to
pass through the locations. Adams/View orients the object so that the first axis passes
through the first location, and the plane defined by the two axes passes through the
second location. This means that the second axis comes as close as possible to the
second location, but may not pass through it.

Mate Faces Tool - Positioning Objects by Aligning Faces

Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> Mate Faces Tool

Positions an object by mating one object face with another object face so they are in the same plane. The
following figure shows two objects whose top and bottom faces were mated.
The objects must be in shaded render mode to mate their faces. See Rendering mode.
14 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Move Tools

To align an object’s face with another object’s face:

1. From the Move Toolstack, select the Mate Faces tool .
2. Select the face of the object to be aligned.
3. Select the face with which to align the selected object’s face.
 Moving Objects 15
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

Adams/View provides a Precision Move dialog box to help you move objects:
• By increments
• To precise coordinates

You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object's coordinate system, called the reference
coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the
Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.
The Precision Move dialog box consolidates some operations that are available using the By Increments
and Precise Coordinates tools and provides new functionality for rotating objects by increments relative
to any object.

Overall Procedure for Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

The following provides general instructions for moving objects using the Precision Move dialog box.

To move objects using the Precision Move dialog box:

1. Select the objects to be moved.
2. If you want to move the objects along or about axes that another object in the model defines (the
reference coordinate system), then select either Relative to the or About the, and enter the name
of the object that is to define the reference coordinate system.
3. If you do not enter a reference coordinate system, Adams/View moves the objects about the
default coordinate system.
4. Then, either:
• If you know the destination coordinates of the objects you are moving, enter the destination
coordinates into the C1 through C3 (for translation) and A1 through A3 (for rotation) text
boxes, and then select OK.
• Use the Rotate and Translate dials to move the objects by incremental values.

Accessing the Precision Move Dialog Box

To display the Precision Move dialog box:

• From the Move Toolstack, select the Precision Move tool .

Selecting the Objects to Move

When you display the Precision Move dialog box, Adams/View places all selected objects in it so you can
quickly move them. You can also change the objects to be moved.
16 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

To select an object to move:

1. Set Relocate the to the desired object type (for example, part or marker).
2. Enter the name or names of the objects to move.

Selecting the Reference Coordinate System

By default, the Precision Move dialog box moves the selected objects relative to the default coordinate
system. You can specify that Adams/View use a different coordinate system as the reference coordinate
system. The rotational and translational coordinates you enter for the move or the incremental values you
select are with respect to the origin and orientation of this coordinate system. You can select the following
types of objects:
• Model - Global coordinate system.
• Part or marker - Part or marker in your model.
• View - Adams/View defined view, such as front, right, or left. Use the Database Navigator to
select the name of the view.
• Entity - Any entity, including those that are not on the screen. Entities also include the working
grid and gravity.
• Screen - The plane of the screen. When you select to move objects relative to the screen, the
Precision Move dialog box changes. Learn about Translating and Rotating Objects Using Screen
Coordinates.

You can specify two options for the reference coordinate system: Relative to the or About the:
• If you specify the Relative to the option for rotations, objects rotate in place (their locations do
not change) and their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the Relative
to the text box.
• If you specify the About the option for rotations, the objects rotate about the origin of the
coordinate system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with respect to the
coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
• Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either Relative to the or the
About the.

To set the reference coordinate system:

1. Set the second option to either Relative to the or About the.
2. In the text box to the right, enter the object whose coordinate system is to be used as the reference
coordinate system.
3. If you do not enter a reference coordinate system, the Precision Move dialog box moves the
objects about the current default coordinate system.
 Moving Objects 17
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

Moving Objects Relative to or About Coordinate System by

Increments
The Rotate and Translate dials on the left side of the Precision Move dialog box move an object with
respect to a body-fixed or reference coordinate system in incremental amounts. You specify the reference
coordinate system using the Relative to the and About the options Learn about Selecting the Reference
Coordinate System.

Examples

To change the incremental value:

• Enter new values for translation or rotation in the text boxes below the cubes, and then press
Enter.

To change the direction of the move:

• Click the + or - .

To move an object relative to or about another object:

1. Select the object to move.
2. Set the reference coordinate system.
3. Click a cube for the direction you want to translate or rotate the object.

Example 1
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 180 degrees relative to the y axis of the coordinate system that MAR1 defines:
1. Set Relocate the to marker, and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the, and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 180.
18 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial

.

Example 2
Rotate a marker (MAR2) 45 degrees about the y axis of MAR1:
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set About the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. Set the increment value to 45.
4. Click the y cube on the Rotate dial.

Viewing Locations of Objects Relative to Other Objects

You can use the Precision Move dialog box to view the current coordinates of an object with respect to
the coordinate system of another object (reference coordinate system). Adams/View displays the
coordinates in the six position text boxes (C1 through C3 for translation and A1 through A3 for rotation)
of the Precision Move dialog box.
For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to connect using an inplane joint,
are in the same plane, you can set one marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative
to object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
 Moving Objects 19
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

To view current coordinates:

1. Select the object to move.
2. Set the reference coordinate system.
3. Select Load.
Adams/View loads the current coordinates relative to the reference coordinate system.

Moving Objects Relative to or About Coordinate System by

Precise Coordinates
Using the Precision Move dialog box, you can move an object to precise coordinates relative to another
object's coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You specify the reference coordinate
system using the Relative to the and About the options (Learn about Selecting the Reference Coordinate
System). You enter the coordinates in the six position text boxes (C1 through C3 for translation and A1
through A3 for rotation) of the Precision Move dialog box.

To move an object to coordinates relative to a reference frame:

1. Select the object to move.
2. Set the reference coordinate system.
3. Change the values in the C1 through C3 and A1 through A3 text boxes.
4. Select OK.

Example
Move a marker (MAR2) to (0, -4, -4) in another marker's (MAR1) coordinate system.
1. Set Relocate the to marker , and then enter MAR2 in the text box to the right.
2. Set Relative to the , and then enter MAR1 in the text box to the right.
3. In the C1 through C3 text boxes, enter:
• C1: 0
• C2: -40
• C3: -40
20 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

4. Select OK.

Translating and Rotating Objects Using Screen Coordinates

Using the Precision Move dialog box, you can move an object based on screen-fixed coordinates. The
active view defines the screen-fixed coordinate system. Regardless of the object's orientation in the active
view, the move is relative to the screen coordinates.
When you select to move an object based on screen coordinates, the Precision Move dialog box changes
the dials on the left to those shown in the figure below. The dials translate and rotate the objects:
• Think of the translation as pulling the object in the direction of the arrow. For example, when
you select the small arrow that points up, you pull an object up along the vertical axis. The
double arrows to the right translate an object along an axis that is normal to the screen (works
only if the view is in perspective mode).
 Moving Objects 21
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box

• Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For example, if you select the arrow
that points to the right, you are pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation
around the vertical axis.

To move an object in screen coordinates:

1. Select the object to move.
2. Set the reference coordinate system.
3. Click an arrow for the direction you want to translate or rotate the object.
22 Adams/View
Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box
Modifying Geometry and Part Properties
2 Adams/View
Modifying Rigid Body Geometry

Modifying Rigid Body Geometry

You can modify the geometry of a rigid body using:
• Hotpoints that appear on the geometry when you select it.
• A dialog box to enter information about the geometry, such as the location of anchor points, its
width, or its depth. In addition, some dialog boxes let you easily edit profile point locations
through a Location Table.

Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry

You can use hotpoints to resize and reshape the geometry of a rigid body. The hotpoints appear at various
locations on the geometry depending on the type of geometry.

Refer to the help on creating a geometry to see where Adams/View places hotpoints on the different types
of geometry.

To display hotpoints on geometry:

• Click the geometry using the left mouse button.

To use the hotpoints to resize and reshape geometry:

• Drag the hotpoint to the desired location and release the mouse button. See a Picture of dragging
hotpoints.
 Modifying Geometry and Part Properties 3
Modifying Rigid Body Geometry

Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry

You can precisely control the size, location, and shape of rigid body geometry using modify dialog boxes.
In addition, you can change the name of the geometry as you modify it.

Note: To modify a point, you use the Table Editor because a point only consists of a location. In
addition, for lines, polylines, extrusions, and revolutions, you can use the Location Table
that lets you edit the locations of profile points. For more information, see Editing Locations
Using the Location Table.

To see all the different types of geometry that make up a part:

• Place the cursor on a part and hold down the right mouse button.
Adams/View displays the names of the geometry near the cursor location. If it is a very complex
part, you may need to move the cursor to different locations on the part to see all the different
types of geometry.

Note: You can also use the Info command to view the geometry that belongs to a part. Learn about
Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window.

To display a modify dialog box for geometry and modify geometry:

1. Place the cursor over the part containing the geometry and hold down the right mouse button.
2. Point to the name of the geometry that you want to modify and then select Modify.
The modify dialog box for the geometry appears.
3. Change the name of the geometry, if desired, and assign a unique ID number to the geometry, if
appropriate.
4. Add any comments about the geometry that you want to enter to help you manage and identify
the geometry.
To enter comments for extrusions, revolutions, lines, and polylines, select the Comments tool
at the bottom of the dialog box.
5. Enter the values for the geometry, and then select OK. To get help with entering the values, press
F1 when the cursor is in the dialog box.

Editing Locations Using the Location Table

To specify the location of points in lines, polylines, splines, Extrusions, and revolutions, you can use the
Location table. The Location Table lets you view the points in lines, polylines, splines, extrusions, and
revolutions and edit them. You can also save the location information to a file or read in location
information from a file.
Learn more:
4 Adams/View
Modifying Rigid Body Geometry

• Displaying the Location Table

• Working in the Location Table
• Reading and Writing Location Information

For general information on using tables in Adams/View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.

Displaying the Location Table

To display the Location table:

• From a polyline, extrusion, spline, or revolution modify dialog box, select the More button .

Working in the Location Table

To enter values in a cell of the Location table:

1. Click the cell.
The text cursor appears in the cell.
2. Type the values in the selected cell.

To insert text into multiple cells:

1. In the Set Selected text box, enter the text that you want to insert.
2. Select the cells in which you want to insert the text.
3. Select Set Selected.

To resize a column:
1. Point to the right border of the column heading that you want to resize. The cursor changes to a
double-sided arrow.
2. Drag the cursor until the column is the desired size.
3. Release the mouse button.

To resize all columns equally in the Location table:

• Select either the Widen or Narrow tool.

To insert a row before a row:

1. Select the row above which you want to insert a new row.
2. Select Insert.

To insert a row after a row:

1. Select the row below which you want to insert a new row.
2. Select Append.
 Modifying Geometry and Part Properties 5
Modifying Rigid Body Geometry

To delete a row:
1. Select the row or rows you want to delete.
2. Select Delete.

To reset the Location Table:

• Select Reset.

Reading and Writing Location Information

You can save the current location information in the Location table in ASCII format. Adams/View places
spaces between each cell.
You can also read in location information from an ASCII file to be used as the location of points in the
associated geometry. The information must be in the same format as numeric data that you input into
Adams/View using the Import command. For more information, see File Import dialog box help.

Note: Adams/View reads the location information starting at the first line that has numerical
information. If there are headers in the file, Adams/View reads the header information
when you first read in the file and changes the headers in the Location table accordingly. It
resets the headers to the default headers (X, Y, and Z), however, the next time you open the
Location table.

To read or write in location information:

1. Select Write or Read from the Location table.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
2. Double-click the directory that contains the file.
3. In the File Name text box, type the file name you want to open, or highlight the file in the list.
4. Select OK.
6 Adams/View
Modifying Rigid Body Geometry
 Modifying Geometry and Part Properties 7
Modifying Part Properties

Modifying Part Properties

Each moving part in Adams/View can have the following properties in addition to having geometry:
• Location and name
• Mass and inertia
• Initial velocities
• Initial location and orientation

Adams/View automatically calculates the total mass of the part and its inertia based on the part's volume
and density. It also automatically calculates the initial velocity and position for the part based on any
other initial conditions and connections in your model. You can set how you want Adams/View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself as explained in the next sections.

Note: You can also modify part properties using the Table Editor. Learn about Editing Objects
Using the Table Editor

Modifying Part Name and Location

While you are modifying a part, you can change its name and set its location relative to another location.
You can also set a rigid body so it is a planar part.

To modify part name and location:

1. If you haven't already done so, display the Modify Body dialog box as explained in Accessing
Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set Category to Name and Position.
3. Change the name of the geometry, if desired, and assign a unique ID number to the body, if
appropriate.
4. In the Location text box, enter the location of the rigid body. Adams/View applies your location
coordinates in the coordinate system in the Relative To text box.
5. Specify either of three orientation methods and their appropriate value:
• Orientation
• Along Axis Orientation
• In Plane Oriention
6. In the Relative To text box, enter the reference frame relative to which the location and
orientation entries are defined. Leave blank or enter model name to use the global coordinate
system.
7. For a rigid body, to define it as planar, select Planar.
8. Select OK.
8 Adams/View
Modifying Part Properties

Modifying Mass and Inertia for Rigid Bodies

By default, Adams/View calculates the mass and inertia for a rigid body part based on the part's geometry
and material type. The geometry defines the volume and the material type defines the density. The default
material type for rigid bodies is steel. (Note that any geometry that you deactivate will not be included in
mass calculations.)
You can change the material type used to calculate mass and inertia or simply specify the density of the
part. If you do not want Adams/View to calculate mass and inertia using a part's geometry, material type,
or density, you can enter your own mass and moments of inertia. Learn about Setting Up Material Types.
It is possible to assign zero mass to a part whose six degrees of motion you constrain with respect to parts
that do have mass. You should not assign a part zero mass, however. Any part that has zero mass and
translation degrees of freedom can causes simulation failure (since a = F/m). Therefore, we recommend
that you assign finite masses and inertias to all parts. In addition, a part without mass cannot have mass
moments of inertia.

Methods for Calculating Mass Properties

Adams/View uses two different methods to calculate mass properties. If you modify the number of sides
Adams/View uses to define a part’s geometry, such as cylinder, frustum, or torus, Adams/View may use
a different method to calculate the part’s mass properties depending on the number of sides, as explained
below.
• If the number of sides is greater than or equal to the default number of sides (usually 20),
Adams/View calculates the mass using an analytical equation for the geometry volume. It uses a
true solid that the name of the part indicates.
• If the number of sides is less than the default, Adams/View uses a prismatic solid, which you
actually see on the screen, to calculate mass properties. This method is slower but gives more
accurate results. For example, if you change the number of sides of a cylinder from 20 to 3, the
geometry on the screen is of a triangular solid. This solid’s mass properties will be significantly
different that a cylinder’s mass properties.

To modify mass and inertia:

1. If you haven't already done so, display the Modify Rigid Body dialog box as explained in
Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set Category to Mass Properties.
 Modifying Geometry and Part Properties 9
Modifying Part Properties

3. Set Define Mass By to how you want Adams/View to calculate mass and inertia, enter the
appropriate values, and select OK. Learn About Entering Mass Moments of Inertia.

From the pull-

down menu,
select: And enter:
Geometry and In the Material Type text box, the type of material for the part. Adams/View
Material Type displays the material's composition below the text box. Adams/View uses the
density associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part
to calculate the part's mass and inertia.

To select a material type from the Database Navigator or create a new material
type, right-click the text box, and then select the appropriate command. Learn
about Setting Up Material Types.
Geometry and In the Density text box, enter the density of the part. Adams/View uses the part's
Density density and the volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
User Input Mass - In the Mass text box, enter the mass of the part.

Moments of inertia - Enter the mass moments of inertia.

Center-of-mass marker - In the Center of Mass Marker text box, enter the
marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for the part.

Inertia marker - In the Inertia Reference Marker text box, specify the marker that
defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do not enter an inertia marker,
Adams/View uses the part CM marker for inertia properties.

About Entering Mass Moments of Inertia

In the Rigid Body Modify dialog box, you can enter either just the principal mass moments of inertia (Ixx,
Iyy, Izz) or enter the cross products of inertia (Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz). You will want to enter the mass products
of inertia if the inertia marker or center-of-mass (CM) marker is not at the center of mass of the part and
not aligned with the principal axes.
To enter cross-products of inertia, select the check box Off-Diagonal Terms. The Modify Rigid Body
dialog box displays text boxes for entering the cross products of inertia.
The inertia matrix is defined as follows:
10 Adams/View
Modifying Part Properties

The inertia matrix is a symmetrical, positive-definite matrix. You compute the individual terms in the
matrix as follows:

In the above formula, x, y, and z are the components of the displacement of an infinitesimal mass particle
of mass dm, measured from the origin of the inertia marker in the coordinate system of the inertia marker.
The integral is performed over the entire mass of the body. If you do not specify the inertia marker,
Adams/View uses the CM marker. In that case, you compute these quantities about the origin of the CM
marker in the coordinate system of the CM marker.

Note: Adams/View defines Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz as positive integrals, as shown. Some references
define these terms as the negative of these integrals. You should be sure to compute these
values as shown above.

Displaying Calculated Mass Moments of Inertia

If you select to have Adams/View calculate the mass moments of inertia of a part based on the part's
geometry and material type or density, you can view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams/View
calculates.

To view the matrix:

• In the Modify Rigid Body dialog box, select Show calculated inertia.

Modifying Initial Velocities

You can specify initial velocities for parts. Adams/View uses the initial velocity during the Initial
conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a Simulation of your model.

You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and flexible bodies and only
translational velocity for point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's center of mass with respect to
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
 Modifying Geometry and Part Properties 11
Modifying Part Properties

• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part's rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during initial
conditions simulations regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all
of the velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during
an assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.

To modify initial velocities:

1. If the Modify Body or Create/Modify Point Mass dialog box is not already displayed, display it as
explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set Category to Velocity Initial Conditions.
The dialog box changes so you can enter translational and angular velocity. If you selected
Velocity Initial Conditions from the Modify Point Mass dialog box, only the options for setting
translational velocity are available.
3. Set the translational and angular velocity as explained in the table below, and then select Apply.

To: Do the following:

Select the coordinate system Select the following:
along or about whose axes the
translational or angular velocity For translational velocity, select Ground or select Marker and enter
vector components will be a marker in your model in the text box that appears.
specified.
For angular velocity, select Part CM to select the part's center-of-
mass (CM) marker or select Marker and enter a marker in your
model.
Set the velocity along or about Select the axes along or about which you want to define velocity and
an axis enter the velocity in the text box that appears next to the axes check
boxes. Remember, leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View
calculate the velocity of the part during an initial conditions
simulation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on
the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity to zero.

Modifying Initial Location and Orientation

In addition to specifying initial velocities, you can also control the initial position for a part’s location
and orientation. You should specify the initial position when you do not want Adams/View to reposition
the part. Adams/Solver uses the initial position during an Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before
it runs a Simulation of your model.
12 Adams/View
Modifying Part Properties

You can control initial locations and orientations for rigid bodies and Flexible bodies and only initial
locations for Point masses.
• Location fixes any of the current translational coordinates (x, y, or z) of the part as the initial
location.
• Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi
angles) as the initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed
313 rotation sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling
database. (Learn about Rotation Sequences.)
If Adams/Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial
conditions simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the
initial conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.
If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial
positions sparingly.

To modify initial position and orientation:

1. Display the Modify Body dialog box as explained in Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
2. Set Category to Position Initial Conditions.
The dialog box displays options for setting position initial conditions. If you selected Position ICs
from the Modify Point Mass dialog box, only options for setting location conditions are available.
3. Select the coordinates or angles that you want fixed during initial conditions simulation as
explained in the Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions and select Apply.
Testing Models
Simulation Basics
2 Adams/View
Simulation Basics

Simulation Basics
After creating your model, or at any point in the modeling process, you can run a Simulation of the model
to test its:
• Performance characteristics
• Response to a set of operating conditions

The entries in this section of the table of contents explain how to define the output desired from
simulations and perform simulations
During a Simulation, Adams/View performs the following operations:
• Sets the initial conditions for all the objects in your model.
• Formulates appropriate equations of motion based on the laws of Newtonian mechanics that
predict how objects in your model will move given the set of forces and constraints acting on
them.
• Solves the equations to within your specified accuracy tolerance for such information as part
displacements, velocities, and acceleration, as well as applied and constraint forces.
• Temporarily saves the data calculated so that you can investigate your results using animations,
plots, and numerical signal processing. You can also permanently save your results in your
Modeling database.

As Adams/View simulates your model and solves equations, it displays the calculated results as frames
of an animation. The animation helps you graphically view the overall behavior of your model and
pinpoint specific problems, such as improper connectivity or misapplied motions or forces. After the
simulation is complete, you can replay the animation. For more information, see Animation Controls
Basics.

Adams/View can display this information in Strip charts through measures or you can view the
information in Adams/PostProcessor for more in-depth investigation and manipulation. See the
Adams/PostProcessor online help.

Types of Simulations
You can run five types of Simulations in Adams/View:
• Dynamic simulation
• Kinematic simulation
• Static equilibrium
• Initial conditions simulation
• Linear simulation
 Simulation Basics 3
Simulation Basics

About Dynamic Simulations

Unlike kinematic and static simulations, which involve the solution of only algebraic equations, dynamic
simulations are more complex because they involve the solution of differential and algebraic equations
(DAEs). Two basic types of algorithms are available in Adams/Solver to perform the numerical
integration required for dynamic analyses:
• Stiff solution methods that use implicit, backward difference formulations (BDF) to solve the
DAEs.
• Non-stiff solution methods that use explicit formulations to solve ordinary differential equations
(ODEs) that are obtained from the DAEs by way of coordinate partitioning methods.
In both cases, implicit methods are applied to the formulations to find a solution.
There are four stiff integrators and one non-stiff integrator currently available in Adams/Solver. The four
stiff integrators are:
• Gear (GSTIFF)
• Modified Gear (WSTIFF)
• Constant BDF (Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) only)
• RKF45 (Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) only)

The non-stiff integrator is Adams-Bashforth-Adams-Moulton (ABAM) (Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)

only).
There are two new integrators, HHT (Hilber-Hughes-Taylor) and Newmark, that are only for
Adams/Solver (C++).

About Controlling the Dynamic Solution

When you first build a model and decide to test it by performing a Dynamic simulation, you should always
run two tests: the first using the default integration accuracy and the second using an accuracy 10 times
tighter. Comparing results of these different simulations indicate if the numerical results are good
approximations of the true solution.
If you see noticeable differences in your corresponding plots between the two simulations you ran with
different tolerances, you should tighten the integration tolerance by a factor of 10 again, perform another
test, and compare the results of the last two simulations. Repeat this process until you see no noticeable
differences in results. When this happens, use the looser integration accuracy because it typically results
in a faster simulation.
You can change several dynamic simulation parameters to help you overcome convergence failures:
• Set accuracy - You should always begin by loosening or increasing the convergence tolerance
that must be met by all changes in part displacements and forces during the corrector phase.
• Change number of iterations - You can increase the number of iterations attempted by
Adams/Solver during each corrector phase.
4 Adams/View
Simulation Basics

• Recalculate the Jacobian matrix - You can increase the frequency with which Adams/Solver
recalculates the Jacobian matrix (the matrix of partial differentials) during the corrector phase. In
an attempt to gain greater efficiency, Adams/Solver uses a modified Newton-Raphson approach
that does not update the Jacobian at every iteration.
• Control the maximum step size

Note that you may not always help the solution when you change the default parameters for convergence
tolerance, maximum number of iterations, and pattern for updating the Jacobian. For example, if you
loosen the convergence tolerance, you can allow too much error to build up in your solution over time
and your overall solution accuracy could suffer.
If you increase the number of iterations that Adams/Solver attempts during each corrector phase, you
might be making the solution less efficient. Often, when Adams/Solver cannot get the corrector to
converge using the default number of iterations, it is better to let the solution step back in time and predict
forward using a smaller time step rather than attempt more corrector iterations.
For more information on the effects of making these changes and tips for controlling the dynamic
solution, see the INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Comparison of Integrators

The integrator: Has the following characteristics:

GSTIFF • Uses backward differentiation formulas.
• Uses fixed coefficients for prediction and correction.
• Is the default method.
WSTIFF • Uses backward differentiation formulas.
• Uses variable coefficients for prediction and correction.
Constant BDF • Uses backward differentiation formulas.
• Uses fixed coefficients for prediction and correction.
• The maximum allowed step size controls the integrator accuracy.
• Does not calculate local integration error at each step.
ABAM • Uses coordinate partitioning to reduce the full set of differential and algebraic
equations (DAEs) to a smaller set of ordinary differential equations (ODEs).
• Uses Adams-Bashforth for prediction; uses Adams-Moulton for correction.
RKF45 • Single-step method.
• Primarily designed to solve non-stiff and mildly stiff differential equations
when derivative evaluations are not expensive.
• Not highly accurate.
 Simulation Basics 5
Simulation Basics

The integrator: Has the following characteristics:

HHT • Adams/Solver (C++) only
• Expected to result in a smaller number of Jacobian evaluations.
• Unlike BDF-type formulas, it behaves like a low pass filter; it cuts high
frequency spurious oscillations, while accurately preserving low frequency
oscillations.
• The cutoff frequency can be controlled by adjusting the option Alpha; the
smaller value, the lower the cutoff threshold.
• Stable at small value of the integration step size.
Newmark • Adams/Solver (C++) only
• Behavior similar to HHT.
• Lower order.
• Has two control parameters.

Equation Formulation Comparison

The following briefly compares the different equation formulations. For more information, see the
INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help. See Solver Settings - Dynamic dialog box help.

The equation
formulation: Has the following characteristics:
I3 • Ensures that the solution satisfies all constraints.
• Does not ensure that the the velocities and accelerations calculated satisfy all
first- and second-time derivatives.
• Monitors integration error only in system displacements, not in velocities.
• Is fast.
• The Jacobian matrix can become ill-conditioned at small step sizes.
6 Adams/View
Simulation Basics

The equation
formulation: Has the following characteristics:
SI2 • Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
This process enables the GSTIFF integrator to monitor the integration error of
velocity variables, and, therefore, renders highly accurate simulations.
• Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
SI1 • Takes into account constraint derivatives when solving for equations of motion.
• Monitors the integration error on the impulse of the Lagrange Multipliers in the
system. These additional safeguards enable the integrators to monitor the
integrator error in velocity variables and the impulse of the Lagrange
Multipliers.
• Very accurate.
• Jacobian matrix remains stable at small step sizes, which in turn increases the
stability and robustness of the corrector at small step sizes.
 Simulation Basics 7
About Simulation Output

About Simulation Output

When you perform a Simulation of your model in Adams/View, think of it as performing a physical test
of your physical model. When you perform a physical test, you add instrumentation, such as gauges and
meters, so you can measure and extract useful information. You also examine the data in detail through
plots to see if your design performed as you expected it to.
The same is true in Adams/View. Adams/Solver is automatically set up to output generic information to
help you evaluate the quality of your design. You can also customize the output to obtain more specific
information. In general, you should set up the output for any information you think is useful for model
verification or system analysis.
Learn about:
• Default Simulation Results
• About Customizing Simulation Output
• Comparison of Measures and Requests
• Results Set Components

Default Simulation Results

The Simulation results that Adams/Solver generates by default include:
• Characteristics of objects in your model - Object characteristics return basic information
about parts, forces, and constraints in your model. For example, they return information about
the position of the center of mass of a part.

Note: Object characteristics correspond directly to object measures. You do not need to create
object measures to plot object characteristics because Adams/Solver automatically
calculates and outputs them for you. To use object measures in the definition of your model
or to save the object characteristics from one simulation to another, however, you should
create object measures. Learn about measuring object characteristics.

• Result set components - Result set components are a basic set of state variable data that
Adams/Solver calculates during a simulation. Adams/Solver outputs the data at each simulation
output step. A component of a result set is a time series of a particular quantity (for example, the
x displacement of a part or the y torque in a joint). Learn about result set components.

About Customizing Output

You can do the following to customize the output from a Simulation:
8 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

• Define measures that Adams/View tracks during and after a simulation. You can measure almost
any characteristic of the objects in your model, such as the force applied by a spring or the
distance or angle between objects. As you run the simulation, Adams/View displays strip charts
of the measures so you can view the results as the simulation occurs. Learn About Measures.
• Create requests to ask for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that
helps you investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as
pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a simulation. (Learn
more about Creating Requests.)
• Define FE model data to be output for use in third-party programs. Learn about Defining FE
Model Data for Output.

Measures are more flexible than requests. Besides specifying output, you can use measures in the
definition of your model. Requests, on the other hand, let you specify several types of output through one
request. (See comparison of requests and measures.)

Note: You can also use the Measure Distance command to measure the distance between two
markers at different model configurations. This is a quick way to measure distances and
does not require that you run a simulation. For more information, see About Measuring
Distance Between Positions.
 Simulation Basics 9
About Simulation Output

Comparison of Measures and Requests

Measures: Requests:
Measure one component. Measure up to six components.
Have a variety of different predefined types. Have only four types: Displacement, Velocity,
Acceleration, or Force.
Can be used when plotting and in the Can only be used when plotting.
definition of your model.
Can be viewed during and after a simulation. Can only be viewed after a simulation.
Correspond to VARIABLE statements, Correspond to REQUEST statements in Adams/Solver.
VARVAL functions, and REQUEST
statements in Adams/Solver.

Result Set Components

For: Calculated information is:
Joints, motion generators,
applied loads, and flexible
connectors
• Translational • FX - X component of force
components • FY - Y component of force
(force):
• FZ - Z component of force
• FMAG - Magnitude of force
• Rotational • TX - X component of torque
components • TY - Y component of torque
(torque):
• TZ - Z component of torque
• TMAG - Magnitude of torque
10 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

Result Set Components (continued)

For: Calculated information is:
Screw joint, rackpin joint, Additional angle outputs. These outputs are the total angular
rotational motion, gear, displacements of the element. They are more than +/-360 degrees if the
coupler, torsional spring- object twists more than one turn.
damper, bushing, beam, For the element: Component name(s):
and field
Screw joint ANG
Rackpin joint ANG
Rotational motion ANG
Gear ANG1, ANG2
Coupler ANG1, ANG2, ANG3
Torsional spring-damper ANG
Bushing ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ
Beam ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ
Field ANGX, ANGY, ANGZ
Parts
• Displacement • X - X translational component
• Y - Y translational component
• Z - Z translational component
• MAG - Magnitude
• PSI - First rotation angle
• THETA - Second rotation angle
• PHI - Third rotation angle
Note: PSI, THETA, and PHI are automatically associated with a
body-fixed 313 rotation sequence. Uses measures or requests to
obtain rotation angles associated with different rotation
sequences.
 Simulation Basics 11
About Simulation Output

Result Set Components (continued)

For: Calculated information is:
• Velocity • VX - X translational component
• VY - Y translational component
• VZ - Z translational component
• WX - X rotational component
• WY - Y rotational component
• WZ - Z rotational component
• Acceleration • ACCX - X translational component
• ACCY - Y translational component
• ACCZ - Z translational component
• WDX - X rotational component
• WDY - Y rotational component
• WDZ - Z rotational component
Note: All the results that Adams/Solver calculates automatically for
parts measure the movement of the part’s local coordinate
system, not its center of mass. You should use measures or
Requests if you want to measure the movement of a part’s
center of mass.

Object Characteristics You Can Measure

In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the reference
coordinate system.
12 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

The measurable characteristics of objects are shown in the table below. Click an object characteristic to
view the description.

The object: Has these measurable characteristics:

Marker • Total_Force_On_Point
• Total_Force_At_Location
• Total_Torque_On_Point
• Total_Torque_At_Location
• Translational_Displacement
• Translational_Velocity
• Translational_Acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
Rigid body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• CM_Angular_Velocity
• CM_Angular_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Kinetic_ Energy
• Angular_Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Momentum
• Angular_Momentum_ About_CM
• Potential_Energy_Delta
Point mass body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Kinetic_ Energy
• Translational_Momentum
• Potential_Energy_Delta
 Simulation Basics 13
About Simulation Output

The object: Has these measurable characteristics:

Flexible body • CM_Position
• CM_Velocity
• CM_Acceleration
• CM_Angular_Velocity
• CM_Angular_Acceleration
• Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Kinetic_ Energy
• Angular_Kinetic_Energy
• Translational_Momentum
• Angular_Momentum_ About_CM
• Potential_Energy_Delta
• Strain_Energy
Spring-damper force, single- • element_force
component force, field force, • element_torque
bushing force
• translational_displacement
• ax_ay_az_projection_ angles
• translational_velocity
• translational_acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
Joint constraint, joint primitive • element_force
constraint • element_torque
• translational_displacement
• translational_velocity
• translational_acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
• ax_ay_az_projection_ angles
Curve-curve constraint, point- • pressure_angle
curve constraint • element_force
• contact_point_location
14 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

The object: Has these measurable characteristics:

Joint motion, general point • power_consumption
motion • element_force
• element_torque
• translational_displacement
• translational_velocity
• translational_acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
• ax_ay_az_projection_ angles
Three-component force, three- • element_force
component torque, general • element_torque
force/torque
Contact force • element_force
• element_torque
• Double-click a track to view:
• I_Point
• I_Normal_Force
• I_Friction_Force
• I_Normal_Unit_Vector
• I_Friction_Unit_Vector
• J_Point
• J_Normal_Force
• J_Friction_Force
• J_Normal_Unit_Vector
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector
• Slip_Deformation
• Slip_Velocity
• Penetration
 Simulation Basics 15
About Simulation Output

Object Measure Characteristic Descriptions

The following table describes the characteristics that object measures provide. For information on the
conventions used, see Conventions.

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

CM_Position Position vector of body's center of mass 
relative to the global origin. Rcm
CM_Velocity Translational velocity vector of body's center

of mass relative to the reference frame that
you specify.
R cm
CM_Acceleration Acceleration of body's center of mass relative
to the reference frame that you specify. cm
R
CM_Angular_Velocity Angular velocity of body's center-of-mass

marker that you specify relative to the {cm}or cm
reference frame.

Note: The center-of-mass marker is only

important for flexible bodies. For
rigid bodies, angular velocity is
independent of the marker used.
CM_Angular_Acceleration Angular acceleration of body's center of mass

marker relative to the reference frame that  cm
you specify.

Note: The center-of-mass marker is only

important for flexible bodies. For
rigid bodies, angular acceleration is
independent of the marker used.
Kinetic_Energy Total kinetic energy of body (Translational _Kinetic_Energy +
Angular_Kinetic_Energy)

Note: For a flexible body,

Adams/View obtains the
value directly from
Adams/Solver without
performing additional
calculations.
16 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

Translational_Kinetic_ Body's kinetic energy due to translational
Energy velocity only 1  
MRcm  R cm
2
Note: For a flexible body, this
value is approximate
because the translational and
angular velocity cannot be
separated from the general
motion of the flexible body
in the presence of
deformation.
Angular_Kinetic_Energy Body's kinetic energy due to angular velocity
only 1
{cm}T [ Icm]{cm}
2
Note: For a flexible body, this
value is approximate
because the translational and
angular velocity cannot be
separated from the general
motion of the flexible body
in the presence of
deformation.
Translational_Momentum Body's momentum due to translational

velocity only
M ( R cm)
Angular_Momentum_ Body's angular momentum due to angular
About_CM velocity only [ Icm]{cm}
Note: For a flexible body, this
value may be approximate,
depending on how [Icm] is
computed.
Potential_Energy_Delta Body's current change in potential energy  
from time = 0  M (Rcm  g )
Strain_Energy Flexible body's strain energy
1 T
{q} [ K ]{q}
2
 Simulation Basics 17
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

CM_Position_Relative_ Deformed position of flexible body's center
To_Body of mass relative to undeformed position [ I ]2  [ I ]3{q}
M
element_force Element force vector { FX , FY , FZ } 
relative to the reference frame that you Fe
specify
element_torque Element torque vector { TX , TY , TZ } 
relative to the reference frame that you Te
specify
translational_displacement Translational displacement of Marker I with 
respect to Marker J, relative to the reference Rij
frame that you specify
ax_ay_az_projection_ Rotational displacement (in model units) of
 
angles Marker I about the x-axis, y-axis, or z-axis,  Y i  Zj 
respectively, of Marker J. Ax  tan 1    
Range: -180 to 180 degrees
 Yi  Yj 
 
 Z i  Xj 
Note: These angles are projections onto Ay  tan 1    
planes and are not associated with
any rotation sequence (such as  Zi  Zj 
Body 3-1-3). You typically use  
 X i  Yj 
them to measure planar moments.
Az  tan 1    
 Xi  Xj 
translational_velocity Translational velocity vector of Marker I

with respect to Marker J, in the reference
frame that you specify
R ij
translational_acceleration Translational acceleration vector of Marker I
with respect to Marker J, in the reference ij
R
frame that you specify
angular_velocity Angular velocity vector of Marker I with

respect to Marker J, in the reference frame ij
that you specify
angular_acceleration Angular acceleration vector of Marker I with

respect to Marker J, in the reference frame  ij
that you specify
power_consumption Total power consumed by motion.
   
Fe  R ij  Te  ij
18 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

pressure_angle Acute angle (in model units) between the line
 
1  Zi  Xj 
of motion of the follower and the normal to
the cam surface at the point of contact tan    
between the cam and the follower  Zi  Zj 
(represented by angle  in the figure). Also,
in the figure:

• Line MM is the line of motion of the

follower.
• Line NN is the normal to line TT (the
tangent).

contact_point_location Instantaneous point of contact (location of Currently not available

floating marker)
I_Point/J_Point • I_Point defines the instantaneous contact Picture
point location on the body containing the I
geometry for a given contact track.
Components x, y, and z are provided.
• J_Point defines the instantaneous contact
point on the body containing the J
geometry for the same track. Components
x, y, and z are provided.
By default, all coordinates are calculated in
the ground coordinate system. Furthermore,
the common normal passes through both
points.
 Simulation Basics 19
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

I_Normal_Force/ • I_Normal_Force defines the contact
J_Normal_Force normal force acting at I_Point, in the
direction of I_Normal_Unit_Vector (see
below). Components x, y, z, and
magnitude are provided.
• J_Normal_Force defines the contact
normal force acting at J_Point. (It is equal
but opposite to I_Normal_Force.)
By default, all force components are
calculated in the ground coordinate system.
I_Friction_Force/ • I_Friction_Force defines the contact
J_Friction_Force friction force acting at I_Point. The
direction of the friction force is specified
by I_Friction_Unit_Vector (see below).
• J_Friction_Force defines the contact
friction force acting at J_Point. The
direction of the friction force is specified
by J_Friction_Unit_Vector (see below).
(It is equal but opposite to
I_Friction_Force.)
Additional information provided:

• Mu - The instantaneous coefficient of

friction at the contact point.
• Torque - The net friction torque caused
by the friction forces acting about the
contact point; it opposes the
boring_velocity.
By default, all force components are
calculated in the ground coordinate system.
20 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

I_Normal_Unit_Vector/ • I_Normal_Unit_Vector defines the
J_Normal_Unit_Vector direction of the surface or curve normal at
I_Point. This is also the direction of
I_Normal_Force.
• J_Normal_Unit_Vector defines the
direction of the surface or curve normal at
J_Point. This is also the direction of
J_Normal_Force. (It is opposite to the
direction of I_Normal_Unit_Vector.)
By default, all direction cosines (x, y, z) are
calculated in the ground coordinate system.
I_Friction_Unit_Vector/ • I_Friction_Unit_Vector defines the
J_Friction_Unit_Vector direction of slip at I_Point.
I_Friction_Force opposes motion of the
body containing IGEOM in this direction.
• J_Friction_Unit_Vector defines the
direction of slip at J_Point.
J_Friction_Force opposes motion of the
body containing JGEOM in this direction.
By default, all direction cosines (x, y, z) are
calculated in the ground coordinate system.
Slip_Deformation Defines the three components and magnitude
of the deformation vector at the contact point
since the onset of stiction. Slip_Deformation
is undefined during dynamic friction, and its
components are set to zero.
Slip_Velocity Defines the three components and speed (that
is, magnitude) of the slip velocity vector at
the contact point. By definition, this vector is
orthogonal to the contact normal force.
 Simulation Basics 21
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

Penetration Defines kinematic information pertaining to
the two geometries in contact. Three pieces
of information are provided.

• Depth - The distance between the

I_Contact Point and the J_Contact_Point.
• Velocity - The penetration velocity at the
contact point. This is the relative velocity
along the common normal at the contact
point.
• Boring_Velocity - This is angular
velocity about the common normal of the
two geometries at the contact point.
Total_Force_On_Point Returns the total force acting on a body via
the marker referenced by the measure. If you
have two forces acting on a body in the same
location, and both forces use the same
marker, then the total force at point will be
the sum of the two forces. If a third force also
acts at the same point but was created using a
different marker, then this third force will not
be considered in the first measure.

For example, see Knowledge Base Article

12279.
Total_Force_At_Location Returns the sum of all forces acting on a body
at a specified location, regardless of how
many markers are involved.

For example, see Knowledge Base Article

12279.
Total_Torque_On_Point This is the same as Total_Force_On_Point
except the force is angular.
Total_Torque_At_Location This is the same as Total_Force_At_Location
except the force is angular.
Translational_Displacement Position vector of marker relative to the
global origin.
Translational_Velocity Translational velocity vector of marker
relative to the global reference frame.
Translational_Acceleration Acceleration of marker relative to the global
reference frame.
22 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

Characteristics: Description: Definition/Formula:

Angular_Velocity Angular velocity of marker relative to the
global reference frame.

Note: The marker is only important for

flexible bodies. For rigid bodies,
angular velocity is independent of
the marker used.
Angular_Acceleration Angular acceleration of marker relative to the
global reference frame.

Note: The marker is only important for

flexible bodies. For rigid bodies,
angular acceleration is independent
of the marker used.

Conventions for Measure Characteristics

The measure characteristics in Measure Characteristic Descriptions use the following conventions.

The characters: Represent:

M Total mass of a body.
cm The center of mass of a body.

Note: For flexible bodies, the location of the center of mass changes over
time relative to the body coordinate system.
[Icm] Inertia tensor of body about its center of mass.

Note: For flexible bodies, the inertia tensor actually changes as the body
deforms. Adams/View accounts for this by correcting the inertia
tensor of the flexible body,
[I] according to its specified modal formulation as follows:
• Rigid or Constant:
[I] = [I]7
• Partial Coupling:
[I] = [I]7 - [I]8 {q}
• Full Coupling:

[I] = [I]7 - [I]8{q} - [I]9 {q}.{q}T

The resulting [I] is then transformed from the local body reference frame
(LBRF) to the body's center of mass (cm) to obtain [Icm].
 Simulation Basics 23
About Simulation Output

The characters: Represent:

 Change in position of the center of mass of the rigid body relative to its
Rcm original position (at time=0).

{q} Generalized modal coordinates of active modes of flexible body (modal

deformations).
[K] Generalized modal stiffness matrix of flexible body.

 Prescribed gravity vector.

g
Unit vectors of marker I's x-, y-, and z-axis, respectively.
X̂i ,Ŷi , Ẑi
Unit vectors of marker J's x-, y-, and z-axis, respectively.
X̂j ,Ŷj , Ẑj
N Current number of time steps.
Mi Measured data value in time step i.
Mn Measured data value at the current time step n.
[I]2 Second invariant matrix of flexible body representing the undeformed center
of mass scaled by the total mass.
[I]3 Third invariant matrix of flexible body representing the modal components of
the flexible body's mass.
[I]7 Seventh invariant matrix of the flexible body representing the undeformed
moment of inertia tensor in the LBRF.
[I]8 Eighth invariant matrix of the flexible body representing the first-order
corrections to the inertia tensor due to modal deformation.
[I]9 Ninth invariant matrix of the flexible body representing the second-order
corrections to the inertia tensor [I]7 due to modal deformation.

About Contact Result Tracks

A track is a sequence of individual impacts between two particular geometries specified by a single
contact object. The two geometries for a particular track should always be the same at every impact along
that track.
It is possible for a contact object and two of its geometries to have more than one track. For example, if
a contact and two of its geometries have more than one impact at the same time, each separate impact
must belong to a separate track to remove ambiguity. Also, when the separation between impacts is great
enough according to either an automatic or given criteria, the impacts may be assembled into separate
tracks.
24 Adams/View
About Simulation Output

There is an experimental method of specifying a delta value for the separation criteria that will make the
program skip the automatic criteria, sometimes saving a significant amount of time. This can be done by
setting the tolerance parameter using the analysis collate_contacts command. By using a large tolerance
value, you can coerce tracks together that may have been separated by the automatic criteria. See
Knowledge Base Article 10523 for more information.

Automatic criteria for a contact and an I and J geometry:

1. The geometric center (centroid) of all the impacts over the entire simulation is found in three
frames: the global frame and the I and J part frames.
2. The average distance of the impacts from the centroid is computed, again in each of the three
frames.
3. The standard deviation of the impacts from this average distance is computed in the three frames.
This value for the standard deviation is used as a delta to decide if any two impacts are close
enough to be considered to belong to the same track. The frame with the minimum distance is used
for the comparison.
To force a pair of locations on two different parts to belong to separate tracks you can place a small
separate piece of geometry at that particular point on each part. For example, instead of making a table
out of a single piece of geometry and letting the algorithm try to find the separate legs as four separate
tracks, placing a cap at the end of each leg will force separate tracks.

Defining FE Model Data for Output

You can also set up Adams/View to produce data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or
strains for input to subsequent finite-element or fatigue-life analysis for use in third-party products. You
use the Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Durability command to specify the type of file to produce.
Adams/View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.

To output FE model data:

1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to FEMdata, and then select either New or
Modify.
The Create FEMDATA dialog box appears.
2. In the Name text box, enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the modeling database to
create or modify.
3. Set Type to the information you want to output, and then enter the values in the dialog box as
explained in the FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table, depending on the type of format.
4. In the File text box, enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing
directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the Adams
run ID and body ID according to the type of data and file format that you specified in the Solver
-> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability Files.
5. Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:
 Simulation Basics 25
About Simulation Output

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the start of the
simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a peak load. The
default is to output to the end of the simulation.
6. Select OK.
26 Adams/View
About Simulation Output
Measures
2 Adams/View
About Measures

About Measures
A measure lets you investigate several predefined and user-defined characteristics of your model during
or after a simulation. For example, you can use a measure to find the angle between two links connected
by a revolute joint, the x component of relative velocity between two parts, and more.
The following explain more about measures:
• Types of Measures
• Ways in Which You Can Use Measures
• Limitations of Measures
• Measure Reference Frames and Coordinate Systems
• Using Measures in the Definition of Your Model
• Measures in Adams/Solver Datasets

Types of Measures
There are two types of Measures available:
• Predefined measures that automatically output information.
 Measures 3
About Measures

• User-defined measures that you define to obtain more specific information about your model.

Predefined Measures
This type of
measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Object Characteristics of the parts, forces, and constraints in your model.
Point Characteristics of a point, such as its location relative to the global coordinate
system or the sum of forces acting on it.
Point-to-point Kinematic characteristics of a point relative to another point, such as the
relative velocity or acceleration.
Orientation The orientation of one marker with respect to another marker using a variety
of known schemes, such as successive rotations, Euler parameters, direction
cosines, and so on.
Included angle The included angle defined by three points in space.
Range Statistical characteristics of another measure, such as its maximum, average,
and more.

User-Defined Measures
This type of measure: Lets you capture and investigate:
Adams/View computed A design expression that you want Adams/View to evaluate before or
after a simulation.
Adams/Solver function A function expression that you want Adams/Solver to evaluate during
a simulation.

Ways to Use Measures

You can use measures in a variety of ways. You can use measures to:
• Plot system characteristics during a Simulation. Because Adams/View computes most measures
during a simulation, you can monitor their values in strip charts to view them as the simulation
progresses.
• Plot characteristics after a simulation.
• Define other elements. For example, you can use a measure as an expression in a force
definition.
• Define the objective of a Design study, Design of experiments (DOE), or Optimization analysis.
You can also use the measure in a constraint function during optimization.
• Create user-defined expressions that take advantage of both the Adams/View and Adams/Solver
environments.
4 Adams/View
About Measures

Limitations of Measures
The following are limitations to using measures:
• Many characteristics in measures are computed from the last Simulation of the model. If you
change your model after running a simulation, the characteristics will no longer be correct. You
need to simulate the modified model again.
• You cannot include Adams/View computed measures in an Adams/Solver run-time function
expression. Only Adams/View can process computed measures.
• Only Adams/Solver can evaluate Adams/Solver computed measures. Therefore, you must define
an Adams/Solver computed measure before you run a simulation. Adams/View cannot evaluate
the measure after a simulation.

Measure Reference Frames and Coordinate Systems

Reference Frames
When you define a velocity or acceleration measure, be sure to pay close attention to the motion reference
frame you use in defining the measure. The motion reference frame specifies the observer relative to
whom time-derivatives are performed.

Measure Coordinate Systems

There are two coordinate system options that you specify when you create a measure:
• Type of coordinate system in which location coordinates can be described. You can use any of
the three standard coordinate systems: Cartesian, spherical, and cylindrical.
• The coordinate system in which vector components are expressed. The global coordinate system
is used by default.

Using Measures in Definition of Model

You can use a measure in the definition of your model. For example, you can create two measures that
define a spring force (for example, Fk) and a damping force (for example, Fc), respectively. These two
measures, when combined to define the Single-component force element, actually create the equivalent
of an Adams spring-damper. The use of the measures and the single-component force, however, provides
a few advantages not available with the linear spring-damper. Because you used measures in your model,
you can:
• Automatically see the measures displayed in strip charts during Simulation and subsequent
animations.
• Plot the measures in Adams/PostProcessor after a simulation.
• Plot the individual effects of the spring force and the damping force. A linear Adams/View
spring-damper element shows the combined effects of both forces, and it is very difficult to
determine how much the spring and damping forces contribute individually to the total force.
 Measures 5
About Measures

To use a measure in the definition of your model:

• In a text box that accepts a function expression, create an expression that uses the measure in its
definition.
For example, to use the two measures explained above in the definition of a single-component
force, you would select Custom as you create the force and then modify the force by entering a
function expression, such as:
.model_1.FUNCTION_MEA_Fk + .model_1.FUNCTION_MEA_Fc
You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression.

Measures in Adams/Solver Datasets

How Measures Are Represented in a Dataset
Adams/Solver represents measures in Adams/Solver dataset files as algebraic state variables or
VARIABLE statements. Adams/Solver does not differentiate these variables from any other user-defined
algebraic state variable. If you export your model to an Adams/Solver dataset file, Adams/View defines
the measures as VARIABLE statements. Therefore, when you import your dataset file back into
Adams/View, Adams/View no longer recognizes the original measures, but, instead, recognizes them as
generic algebraic variables.
We recommend that you use Adams/View command files to archive your Adams/View models that
contain measures.

Measures Not Represented in Datasets

There are three kinds of measures that are currently not represented in an Adams/Solver dataset file:
• Kinetic energy associated with parts: rigid bodies, Point masses, Flexible bodies.
• Pressure angle associated with point-on-curve constraints.
• Power consumption associated with motions.

If you export your model to an Adams/Solver dataset, and then import it back into Adams/View, you lose
the associated measure information. We recommend that you use command files to archive models that
contain measures.
6 Adams/View
Point Characteristics you can measure

Point Characteristics you can measure

The characteristics of Markers that you can measure are shown in the table below. All types of markers
have the same measurable characteristics, but markers on flexible bodies have additional characteristics
for deformation.

The object : Has the measurable characteristics:

Markers on a Rigid body, • Total_Force_On_Point
Point mass, or Flexible • Total_Torque_On_Point
bodies
• Total_Force_At_Location
• Total_Torque_At_Location
• Translational_Displacement
• Translational_Velocity
• Translational_Acceleration
• Angular_Velocity
• Angular_Acceleration
Markers on flexible body • angular_deformation
• angular_deformation_velocity
• angular_deformation_acceleration
• translational_deformation
• translational_deformation_velocity
• translational_deformation_acceleration
 Measures 7
Angle Measures

Angle Measures

About Measuring Included Angle Characteristics

The included angle measure captures the instantaneous angle between two vectors defined by three
markers. For example, you can use the angle measure to find the included angle between any two links
connected by a revolute joint. The default unit for angle measures is degrees.
To create an included angle, you select three markers, as illustrated in the figure below. These three
markers define two vectors:

It is the instantaneous angle between these vectors that Adams/View tracks in an included angle measure.
Note that the included angle changes over time as the markers move during a simulation.

Example of Points That Define Included Angles

There are two conventions used in Adams/View to define the sign and magnitude of an included angle
measure as it changes over time:
• The sign and magnitude is always calculated so as to have an initial value within the range [0, PI]
regardless of the order in which you select the points.

• The axis of rotation is automatically calculated as the cross-product of , which is

sensitive to the order in which you select the points. This, along with the right-hand rule,
determines all subsequent changes to the sign and magnitude of the included angle measure.

Methods for Creating Angle Measures

There are two methods you can use to create an angle measure.
• Select method - Lets you graphically select the markers to be measured using the Angle tool
on the Measure Toolstack of the Main toolbox. Learn how to use the Select method.
• Browse method - Displays the Angle Measure dialog box in which you browse for markers.
8 Adams/View
Angle Measures

Browsing for Markers to Define Angle Measures - Browse

Method
To browse for three markers that define the angle measure:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Angle, and then select New.
2. In the First Marker text box, enter the markers that defines the tip of the first vector.
3. In the Middle Marker text box, enter the second marker that defines the vertex.
4. In the Last Marker text box, enter the marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
5. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
6. Select OK.

Selecting Markers to Define Angle Measures - Select Method

To select from the screen three points that define the angle measure:
1. From the Measure Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Included Angle tool .
2. Using the left mouse button, select the following markers:
• The marker that defines the tip of the first vector.
• Second marker that defines the vertex.
• Marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
 Measures 9
Point-to-Point Measures

Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-Point Measures let you measure kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity,
between two locations during a simulation. For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to
calculate the global y-component of distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams/View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.

Point-to-Point Characteristics You Can Measure

The point-to-point kinematic characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below.

The object: Has the measurable characteristics:

Two markers • Translational displacement
• Translational velocity
• Translational acceleration
• Angular velocity (not available when creating a point-to-point measure
from the Main toolbox)
• Angular acceleration (not available when creating a point-to-point measure
from the Main toolbox)

Methods for Creating Point-to-Point Characteristics

There are two methods you can use to create a point-to-point measure.
• Simple method - Lets you graphically select the markers to be measured using the Point-to-
Point tool on the Measure Toolstack of the Main toolbox. This is the easiest method to use
and lets you select geometric vertices as points to measure. It, however, only lets you measure
the translational displacement, velocity, or acceleration between two markers.
In addition, the Simple method does not let you select a reference frame or coordinate system.
Instead, Adams/View uses the global coordinate system and the ground reference frame for
velocity and acceleration. Adams/View also creates a default name for the measure and a strip
chart.
Learn how to use the Simple method.
• Specific method - Displays the Point-to-Point Measure dialog box in which you enter values for
the point-to-point measure. The dialog box lets you select all characteristics listed in Point-to-
Point Characteristics that You Can Measure.
Learn how to use the Specific method.
10 Adams/View
Point-to-Point Measures

Creating a Point-to-Point Measure Using the Simple Method

To use the Simple method to create a point-to-point measure:
1. From the Measure Toolstack on the Main toolbox, select the Point-to-Point tool .
2. The container in the Main toolbox displays settings for creating point-to-point measures.
3. From the Characteristic pull-down menu in the Measure container, select the kinematic
characteristic to be measured.
4. From the Component pull-down menu, select the vector component you want reported (global
coordinates only). You can select global x, global y, global z, or magnitude.
5. Select a marker or geometric vertex from which to measure.
6. Select a marker or geometric vertex to which to measure.

Creating a Point-to-Point Measure Using the Specific Method

To use the Specific method to create a point-to-point measure:
1. On the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Point-to-Point, and then select New.
1. The Point-to-Point Measure dialog box appears.
2. In the Measure Name text box, enter a name for the measure.
3. In the To Point text box, enter the marker or point to which to measure. In the From Point text
box, enter the marker or point from which to measure.
4. Set Characteristic in the Measure container to the kinematic characteristic to be measured.
5. Enter the values in the dialog box, depending on whether you selected a translational or angular
characteristic.
6. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
7. Select OK.
 Measures 11
Orientation Measures

Orientation Measures
To learn about creating orientation measures:
• About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
• Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure
• Creating an Orientation Measure

About Measuring Orientation Characteristics

Orientation measures capture the orientation characteristics of one part or marker relative to another
coordinate system in a specified convention. For example, you could use orientation measures to
determine the:
• Yaw angle associated with a yaw, pitch, roll, or body-fixed 321 rotation sequence.
• First Euler parameter.
• Second rotation associated with a body-fixed 123 rotation sequence.

All such orientation characteristics are simply transformed from the direction cosine matrix.
The following example shows two markers whose orientation relative to each other you can capture using
orientation angles. When associated with a body-fixed 313 rotation sequence, the example returns the
rotation angles 1 = +90 °, 1 = +90 °, and 1 = +90°.
12 Adams/View
Orientation Measures

Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure

The orientation characteristics that you can measure are shown in the table below.

The object: Has the measurable characteristics:

Part or marker • Euler angles
• Yaw, pitch, roll
• Ax, ay, az projection angles
• Bryant angles
• Any of 12 body- or Space-fixed rotation sequences (123, 132, and so on)
• Euler parameters
• Rodriguez parameters
• Direction cosines
Note:
• Euler parameters are P0, P1, P2, and P3. P0 is the cosine of one-half
the angle of rotation of the rotated frame with respect to the reference
frame. P1, P2, and P3 are the x, y, and z components, respectively, of
the unit vector around which the rotation occurs, multiplied by the sine
of one-half the angle. Rodriguez parameters (R1, R2, and R3) define
the relative rotation between two frames of reference. The relationship
between Rodrigues parameters and Euler parameters is R1 = P1/P0,
R2 =P2/P0, and R3 = P3/P0. Rodriguez parameters become undefined
when P0 = 0, that is, when the angle of rotation about the vector is 180
degrees.
• Many dynamics textbooks define some or all of these orientation
schemes. Refer to:
• Meriam, Kraige. Engineering Mechanics, Vol. 2 . John Wiley & Sons,
1992.
• Greenwood. Principles of Dynamics, Second Edition. Prentice-Hall,
Inc., 1988.
• Kane, Likins, Levinson. Spacecraft Dynamics. McGraw-Hill, 1983.
• Nikravesh. Computer-Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems. Prentice-
Hall Inc., 1988.

Creating an Orientation Measure

To access the orientation measure create dialog box, do one of the following:
• From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Orientation, and then select New.
 Measures 13
Orientation Measures

• When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button.

The Orientation Measure dialog box appears.

To define the measure:

1. In the Measure Name text box, enter a name for the measure.
2. Set Characteristic to the characteristic convention with which to associate the component.
3. Set Component to the rotational component you want to measure.
4. In the To Marker text box, enter the coordinate system to which to measure. In the From Marker
text box, enter the coordinate system from which to measure.
5. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
6. Select OK.
14 Adams/View
Object Measures

Object Measures
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.
Learn about:
• Object Characteristics You Can Measure
• Point Characteristics you can measure

To access the object measure create dialog box, do one of the following:
• To create a measure for a selected object, select the object. Then, from the Build menu, point to
Measure, and then select Selected Object.

Tip: Right-click the object, and then select Measure.

• To create a measure for any object in the database, when no objects are selected, from the Build
menu, point to Measure, point to Selected Object, and then select New. From the Database
Navigator, select the object on which you want to define a measure.
• To create a measure while modifying the object, from the object's modify dialog box, select the
Object Measure tool . Learn about Accessing Modify Dialog Boxes.
An Object Measure dialog box appears. Its content corresponds to the object type you are
creating. If you selected an object that is an assembly, the Assembly Measure dialog box
appears.

To define the measure:

1. In the Measure Name text box, enter a name for the measure.
2. Set Characteristic to the object characteristic to measure.
3. From the Component option buttons, select the component to report.
4. Set the pull-down menu to the desired coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical).
5. If it is appropriate, in the From/At area, select a reference point indicating where the force will be
measured or from where the kinematic quantities will be measured.
6. In the Represent coordinates in text box, enter the marker on which the vector quantity is
projected. The default is the global coordinate system.
7. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
8. Select OK.
 Measures 15
Range Measures

Range Measures
You can use range measures to obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure. Ranges
dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any measure.

Range Measure Characteristic Descriptions

The following table describes the characteristics that range measures provide. For information on the
conventions used, see Conventions.

The measure: Description: Definition/Formula:

Average Arithmetic mean of current set of measured data.

Minimum Minimum value in the current set of measured data. Min (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Maximum Maximum value in the current set of measured data. Max (M1, M2, ..., Mn)
Variation Difference between the maximum and minimum value Maximum - Minimum
in the current set of measured data.

To create a range measure:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Range, and then select New.
The Range Measure dialog box appears.
2. In the Name text box, enter a name for the measure.
3. Set Type to the range characteristic to measure.
4. In the Of Measure text box, enter an existing, predefined measure to analyze.
5. To display a Strip chart of the measure, select Create Strip Chart.
6. Select OK.
16 Adams/View
Creating an Adams/View Computed Measure

Creating an Adams/View Computed Measure

Adams/View computed measures allow you to create measures in the Adams/View Expression language
that can be evaluated before a Simulation or any time after. You build them using Design-Time Functions
and typically use them in the initial model set up.
An Adams/View computed measure is convenient because it can reference any Adams/View variable.
For example, if you create two measures and you want to add or subtract them, you can use an
Adams/View computed measure to do so. You can also compute data from a run-time measure.
Be careful, however, about the changes you make in your model. Making changes can cause a potential
problem because model changes can invalidate the accuracy of any measure that depends on the results
of a simulation. The simulation redefines the model data and re-evaluates your Adams/View computed
measures.
Learn more:
• Adams/View Function Builder online help
• Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

To create an Adams/View computed measure:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Computed, and then select New.
The Function Builder dialog box appears in computed-measure mode. Example of Function
Builder in Computed Measure Mode.
2. Build your expression using the functions and object data and format the Strip chart using the
options in the Attributes area.
3. Select OK.
 Measures 17
Creating an Adams/Solver Function Measure

Creating an Adams/Solver Function Measure

An Adams/Solver function measure allows you to create a measure in Adams/View that Adams/Solver
evaluates during Simulations. Because Adams/Solver function measures are only evaluated during
simulations, function measures remain unevaluated until you run a simulation. The Adams/Solver
function measure is convenient because it lets you reference any user-defined Adams/Solver function or
User-written subroutine. Function measures are built from Adams/Solver Run-Time Functions.

Be careful, however, about the number of Adams/Solver function measures you create because
Adams/View writes each measure to the Adams/Solver dataset as a VARIABLE statement. Each
VARIABLE statement adds another equation to the overall set of equations. The more equations
Adams/Solver must solve, the longer your simulation takes.
Learn more:
• Adams/View Function Builder online help
• Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

To create an Adams/Solver function measure:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Function, and then select New.
The Function Builder appears in Adams/Solver function-measure mode.
Example of Function Builder in Function Measure Mode.
2. Build your function expression using the function and object data, and then format the Strip chart
using the options in the Attributes area.
3. Select OK.
18 Adams/View
Deleting Measures

Deleting Measures
To delete a measure:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Delete.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to delete.
 Measures 19
Modifying Measures

Modifying Measures
To modify a measure:
1. For any type of measure, from the Build menu, point to Measure, point to the appropriate type
of measure, and then select Modify.
2. From the Database Navigator, select the measure to modify.

Tip: For a shortcut to steps 1 and 2, in the strip chart containing the measure data, right-
click the background (not a curve), Point to Plot:scht1, and then select Measure
Modify.

3. Change the options as desired.

4. Select OK.
20 Adams/View
Setting Up Strip Charts

Setting Up Strip Charts

By default, Adams/View displays measure data in a Strip chart. Strip charts are interactive and update
with each Output step from the Simulation. They are a convenient way to track the progress of a measure
while the simulation is running, and they let you see the model animation synchronized with the plotting
of the measure. If a strip chart gets in the way, you can delete it without losing the associated measure.
You can also select to create it again, if necessary.

Note: Displaying script charts during a simulation adversely affects the speed of the simulation.
The more strip charts you display, the slower your simulation.

• Creating, Displaying, and Closing Strip Charts

• Deleting Strip Charts and Curves
• Saving Curves to Establish a Baseline
• Setting Strip Chart Attributes
• Transferring a Strip Chart to Adams/PostProcessor

Creating, Displaying, and Closing Strip Charts

If you've made changes to the attributes of a Strip chart, such as changed its legend, you need to close the
strip chart and then redisplay it to see the changes. In addition, the procedure of redisplaying a strip chart
also creates a strip chart for an existing measure.

To create a strip chart as you create a measure:

• Create a measure, and then select Create Strip Chart from the measure create dialog box.

To display a strip chart or create a strip chart for an existing measure:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, and then select Display.
The Database Navigator appears with the current measures in the model.
2. Select the measure whose strip chart you want to display or create.
3. Select OK.

To close a strip chart:

• In the upper right corner of the strip chart, select the Close button (an X in Windows; a - in
UNIX).
 Measures 21
Setting Up Strip Charts

Deleting Strip Charts and Curves

You can delete a Strip chart without deleting the measure associated with it. You can also delete any
curves in a strip chart. If you delete a strip chart and want to create it again, follow the instructions in
Creating, Displaying, and Closing Strip Charts.

To delete a strip chart:

1. In the strip chart, right-click the background (not on a curve).
2. Point to scht1, and then select Delete Strip Chart.

To delete a curve in a strip chart:

1. In the strip chart, right-click a curve.
2. Point to the name of the curve, and then select Delete.

To delete all curves in a strip chart:

1. In the strip chart, right-click the background (not on a curve).
2. Point to scht1, and then select Delete All Curves.

Saving Curves to Establish a Baseline

You can save any curve in a Strip chart. Once you save the curve, Adams/View keeps the curve in the
strip chart so you can use it as a baseline curve, against which you compare other curves that it generates
during a Simulation. Adams/View only preserves a saved curve from simulation to simulation.

To save a curve:
1. In the strip chart, right-click a curve.
2. Point to the name of the curve, and then select Save Curve.

Setting Strip Chart Attributes

When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend,
setting axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.

Note: • You have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend, color,
line type, line symbol, and line thickness. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
• The Lower, Upper, and Label text boxes currently are not available.

To set strip chart attributes:

1. From a measure modify dialog box, select the Measure Attributes tool .
22 Adams/View
Setting Up Strip Charts

2. In the Legend text box, enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents.
The text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to
see the effects of changing the legend.
3. In the Comment text box, enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in
Adams/PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. Learn how to transfer a
strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.
4. Select the type of plot to be displayed in Adams/PostProcessor when you transfer the strip chart
to it for plotting:
• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the default.
• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the same
distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it appears in the default
axis type, which is usually linear.
Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.
5. Set Line Type to the type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
6. Set Symbol to the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
7. In the Color text box, enter the color of the curve.
8. In the Thickness text box, change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5
screen pixels.
9. Select OK.

Transferring a Strip Chart to Adams/PostProcessor

You can transfer a curve in a Strip chart, representing a measure, to Adams/PostProcessor so that you
can further investigate its results.

To transfer a measure:
1. Right-click a strip chart to display a menu of measure results currently in the window.
2. Point to the measure results that you want to display, and then select Transfer to Full Plot.

Note: You can also select to display a measure from Adams/PostProcessor. See the
Adams/PostProcessor online help.

About Strip Charts of Adams/Solver Settings

You can display four types of debugging Strip charts during an Interactive Simulation to help you debug
your simulation. The first three apply to any default Transient simulation, and the last one applies to a
 Measures 23
Setting Up Strip Charts

Static equilibrium or Quasi-static simulation. The strip charts can provide you with insight into how the
Adams/Solver Integrator acts, particularly if you display strip charts of Measures of modeling objects,
such as key forces and accelerations, side-by-side with the debugging strip charts.
To help you interpret the solution-related information in the strip charts, see the DEBUG command in the
Adams/Solver online help.

The strip charts you can display are:

• Step Size - The Step Size strip chart displays the integrator step size (units of model time), as the
simulation progresses, on a logarithmic scale. The step size strip chart provides useful
information for debugging a model because, in general, the integrator step size becomes much
smaller in response to rapidly changing dynamics. Rapidly changing dynamics are, in some
cases, intentional (for example, contacts that engage or disengage over a short duration), but can
often be a symptom of modeling errors. For example, they can indicate that there is an incorrect
damping value in an IMPACT function that causes unrealistically high forces. It also can
indicate the use of discontinuous function expressions, such as an IF function.
• Iterations per Step - The Iterations per Step strip chart displays the number of iterations that
Adams/Solver needed to successfully progress to the next integration time step, over the course
of a simulation. These iterations occur during the corrector phase of the integration. For more
information on the phases in a dynamic simulation, see Extended Definition in the
INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
The information in the Iterations per Step strip chart can provide you with several insights into
your model:
• If your simulation progresses with very few iterations at each time step, Adams/Solver is
having an easy time simulating your model. You can further increase performance or speed
by increasing the allowed maximum time step.
• If Adams/Solver requires many iterations for any particular step, it is likely encountering a
period of rapidly changing dynamics that can require corrective action as described for the
Step Size strip chart explained in the previous section.
• If you notice that Adams/Solver requires many iterations right from the beginning of a
simulation, it is likely that you have chosen an integration step size that is too large for the
dynamics in your model. You can obtain better performance if you choose a smaller time step.
For information on changing the time step, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
• Integrator Order - The Integrator Order strip chart displays the order of the polynomial that
Adams/Solver uses during the predictor phase of integration. Adams/Solver uses a polynomial to
predict the future value of the state variables in an Adams model. In general, lower order
polynomials are required to successfully integrate more difficult portions of a simulation,
characterized either by nonlinearities or rapidly changing dynamics. For more information, see
Solver Settings - Dynamic.
24 Adams/View
Setting Up Strip Charts

Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the
consistent use of high (three or more) order polynomials, you may be able to increase
performance by increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams/Solver consistently or
periodically uses low-order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing
dynamics that may require corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the
integration step size may be too large for the dynamics in your model.
• Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams/Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A
static equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model
assumes a minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium
Simulations.
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your
selected force units.

Note: You need to select the option, Update Every Iteration, to watch the iteration-by-
iteration progress of an equilibrium simulation. For more information, see Solver
Settings - Display.
Requests
2 Adams/View
Creating Requests

Creating Requests
You can create Requests to ask for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information
that will help you investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as
pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a simulation.

To learn more:
• About Naming Results and Components in Requests
• Creating by Specifying Predefined Data Type and Marker
• Creating by Specifying Function Expression
• Creating by Specifying a Subroutine
• Creating by Specifying Variables

To define the output in which you are interested, you can specify:
• Predefined data to be output
• Function expressions
• Subroutine
• Variables (available for XML format only) Learn about Creating and Modifying State Variables.

Adams/Solver generates the data at each Output step in a Simulation. For more on output steps, see
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container.

Note: Unlike measures, you must create requests before you run a simulation. Once you define
them, you can use them with different simulations.

By default, Adams/View does not save the requested data to external files, but will save it to your
modeling database. Learn about Solver Settings.

About Naming Results and Components in Requests

After a simulation, the data output from a request resides beneath an analysis in a results set. By default,
the results set has the same name as the request and its components all have generic names, such as X, Y,
and Z. If you set the output of the results to XML format (see Results (.res) Options), you can set the
name of the results set and its components.
Learn more:
• Results Set Naming
• Component Naming
• Using Naming to Delete Components
 Requests 3
Creating Requests

Results Set Naming

You can specify the name of the results set in which all result set components are placed. If there is an
existing result set with this name, then the result set components are placed in that result set.
This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests into a single results set. For
example, you might have several different requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might
want to place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier viewing in
Adams/PostProcessor.

Component Naming
By default, there are eight components per results set, and they have generic names, such as X, Y, Z, and
MAG. You can specify more descriptive names for them or specify a particular unit label or unit type
associated with each component.
• Component Units - You can identify the unit dimension of the result set components. If you do
not specify units, then the units of the components are predefined based upon standard request
type (for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration).
The units can be:

MASS AREA
TIME VOLUME
FORCE TORQUE
LENGTH PRESSURE
VELOCITY DENSITY
ACCELERATION ENERGY
ANGLE TORSIONAL_STIFFNESS
ANGULAR_VELOCITY TORSIONAL_DAMPING
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION FREQUENCY
INERTIA AREA_INERTIA
STIFFNESS FORCE_TIME
DAMPING TORQUE_TIME

• Component Labels - You can identify the labels to be used when plotting the result set
components.

Using Naming to Delete Components

You can delete result set components from storage in the database by omitting them when you specify
their names. For example, the following lists of names remove the first and fourth components from the
result set:
4 Adams/View
Creating Requests

””, X_Comp, Y_Comp, Z_Comp, ““, R1, R2, R3

This can be helpful if you want to reduce the memory overhead of the simulation data.

Creating Requests by Specifying Predefined Data Type and

Marker
You can create a request by simply requesting predefined data and a marker with respect to which the
output will be calculated. Learn about specifying predefined data to be output.

To create a request by specifying data type and marker:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format (see Results (.res) Options), set the naming for the
results and components. Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the first option menu to either of the following to define a unit type or label
associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Type & Markers.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering a predefined data type and markers.
7. Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or Force).
8. Specify the markers with respect to which the output will be calculated.
9. Select OK.

Creating Requests by Specifying Variables

You can identify one or more variables that represent the components associated with a request.
This option is only available if the format of the results files is set to XML. See setting Results (.res)
Options.
 Requests 5
Creating Requests

To create a request:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components.
Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the first option menu to either of the following to define a unit type or label
associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Variables.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering variables.
7. Enter the variables, separated by commas.
8. Select OK.

Creating Requests by Specifying Function Expressions

You can enter function expressions to specify output. Learn about specifying function expressions.

To create a request:
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request.
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components.
Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
6 Adams/View
Creating Requests

• If desired, set the first option menu to either of the following to define a unit type or label
associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Function Expressions.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering function expressions.
7. Enter function expressions in the boxes f2, f3, f4, f6, f7, and f8. Do no use f1 and f5. Adams/Solver
uses them to hold magnitudes for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a
function in every text box.
8. Select OK.

Creating Requests by Specifying a Subroutine

You can enter subroutines to specify output. Learn about specifying subroutines.

To create a request by specifying data type and marker:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to REQUEST, and then select New.
The Create a Request dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name that you want assigned to the request.
3. In the Adams Id text box, assign a unique ID number to the request.
4. In the Comments text box, add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
the request. .
5. If the output of the results set is XML format, set the naming for the results and components.
Learn About Naming Results and Components in Requests.
• In the Components Name and Results Name text boxes, enter the names of the components
and results. Separate the component names by commas.
• If desired, set the first option menu to either of the following to define a unit type or label
associated with each of the components:
• Component Units, and then enter the units associated with each component. See Available
units.
• Component Labels, and then enter the labels to appear when plotting the result set
components. Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be used to define
the string if special characters or white space are used.
6. Set the option menu to Define Using Subroutines.
The elements of the dialog box change to those for entering subroutines.
 Requests 7
Creating Requests

7. In the User Function text box, enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB or
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine in the Routine text box. (Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.)
Enter the USER function using the following format where r1 through r30 are constants passed to
the subroutine:
r1, ..., r30
8. If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings for columns of request
output. Separate each heading with a comma (,).
Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters, including underscores (_). The
first character in each heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;),
an ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!).
If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two quotation marks (" ") with no
characters between them.
9. Select OK.

About Specifying Predefined Data To Be Output

You can choose to define Requests by specifying a predefined data type and one or more Markers with
respect to which the data is returned. You can select the following types of data, which are commonly
investigated quantities and are, therefore, predefined for you:
• Displacement
• Velocity
• Acceleration
• Force

All information types are vectors, except for rotational displacements. Adams/Solver internally calculates
all data in the global coordinate system, although you can specify that the data be calculated and reported
in another coordinate system.
Note that the units for rotational displacement data in the request output of the tabular output file default
to degrees. The units for all other angular output data default to radians.

Displacement
When you request predefined displacement output, Adams/Solver outputs the displacement of a specified
marker (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you select displacement data,
Adams/Solver generates eight channels of output as follows:
• Time (Time)
• Translational magnitude (Mag)
• X component (X)
• Y component (Y)
8 Adams/View
Creating Requests

• Z component (Z)
• Psi angle (Psi)
• Theta angle (Theta)
• Phi angle (Phi)

The psi, theta, and phi angles are Euler or body-fixed 313 rotations of the I marker with respect to the J
marker. Adams/Solver calculates the displacement data in the global coordinate system. If you specify a
reference marker, Adams/Solver resolves the translational x, y, and z components in the coordinate
system of the reference marker. The reference marker does not affect psi, theta, and phi.
Rotational displacement information differs from all other standard output. Whether this information is
in psi, theta, and phi coordinates or in yaw, pitch, and roll coordinates, the rotation sequence is not a
vector. As a result, Adams/Solver outputs no magnitude column. In addition, the sequence of coordinates
is independent of any frame external to the I and the J markers. The reference marker has no effect on the
angular coordinates.

Velocity
When you request predefined velocity output, Adams/Solver outputs the velocity of the first marker that
you specify (I marker) with respect to a second marker (J marker). When you request velocity data,
Adams/Solver generates nine headings and nine columns of data. The nine columns include:
• Time (Time)
• Translational magnitude (Vm)
• Translational x component (Vx)
• Translational y component (Vy)
• Translational z component (Vz)
• Rotational magnitude (Wm)
• Rotational x component (Wx)
• Rotational y component (Wy)
• Rotational z component (Wz)

Adams/Solver calculates this velocity data (the first derivative of the displacement of the I marker with
respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker, Adams
calculates the translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.

Acceleration
When you request predefined acceleration output, Adams/Solver outputs the acceleration of the I marker
with respect to the J marker. This argument generates nine headings and nine columns of output. The
columns include:
• Time (Time)
 Requests 9
Creating Requests

• Magnitude of translational acceleration (Accm)

• Translational x component (Accx)
• Translational y component (Accy)
• Translational z component (Accz)
• Magnitude of rotational acceleration (Wmdot)
• Rotational x component (Wxdot)
• Rotational y component (Wydot)
• Rotational z component (Wzdot)

Adams/Solver calculates the acceleration data (the second derivative of the displacement of the I marker
with respect to the J marker) in the global coordinate system. If you specify a reference marker,
Adams/Solver calculates the translational and rotational x, y, and z components in the coordinate system
of the reference marker.

Force
When you request predefined force output, Adams/Solver outputs the force associated with the I and the
J markers or outputs the action-only forces on the I marker if you specify the I marker. When you specify
both the I and the J markers, Adams/Solver sums the forces on the I marker due to those forces associated
with the I and the J markers. These forces can include both applied forces (such as Translational Spring
Dampers and Bushings) and reaction forces from constraints (such as Joints and Motions).

When you specify only the I marker, Adams/Solver sums all of the action-only forces that are applied to
the I marker. If you specify a reference marker, Adams/Solver reports the components of the resulting
vectors in the reference frame of the reference coordinate system. If you do not specify a reference
marker, Adams/Solver reports the components in the ground coordinate system.
Adams/Solver outputs nine columns of data:
• Time (Time)
• Translational force magnitude (Fmag)
• Three components of translational force (Fx, Fy, and Fz)
• Rotational force (torque) magnitude (Tmag)
• Three components of torque (Tx, Ty, and Tz)

Applied forces and torques are those generated by Beams, bushings, Field Elements, Single-Component
Forces, and spring-dampers. Adams/Solver outputs the applied forces and torques acting at the request I
marker (which can be either the applied force I marker or the applied force J marker). The magnitude and
point of force application on the part containing the applied force J marker varies according to the type
and source of the force:
• For spring-dampers and action-reaction single-component forces, the forces and torques acting
at the J marker are equal and opposite to the forces and torques acting at the I marker.
10 Adams/View
Creating Requests

• For action-only, single-component forces, there is no force or torque acting at the applied force J
marker.
• For beams, fields, and bushings, the forces acting at the applied force J marker are equal and
opposite to the forces acting at the applied force I marker. As long as the applied force I marker
and the applied force J marker are coincident, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are
equal and opposite to the torques acting at the applied force I marker. If there is a finite
separation between the I and the J markers, the torques acting at the applied force J marker are
opposite, but not equal, to the torques acting at the applied force I marker.
Reaction forces and torques are those generated by constraint-inducing elements. For revolute, spherical,
and universal joints and for orientation, parallel axes, and perpendicular joint primitives, Adams/Solver
outputs the reaction forces and torques acting at the request I marker (which can be either the constraint
I marker or the constraint J marker). The force and torque acting at the request J marker are equal and
opposite to the force and torque acting at the request I marker. Depending on the type of constraint, some
or all of the torques acting at the I marker are zero.
You must be careful when requesting a force with the I and the J markers reversed from those specified
in the force-producing element. Adams/Solver reports the force as if it were applied to the J marker of
the force-producing element. The translational force on the J marker of the force element will be equal
and opposite to the translational force on the I marker of the force element if it is not action only. The
force will be zero if it is action only.
The torque on the J marker of the force element has an extra component that can have significance. The
torque is the sum of two contributions. The first contribution is the opposite of the torque on the I marker.
The second contribution is due to the force acting across the separation between the I and the J markers.
If the force acts along the line of sight of the two markers, this extra torque will be zero. To minimize
misunderstandings, attach your request markers in the same order as the markers on the force-producing
element.

About Specifying a Subroutine

In requests, you can enter parameters that are passed to the user-written Adams/Solver User-written
subroutine REQSUB that is linked to Adams/View as a dynamic-linked library. For more information on
REQSUB and passing parameters to subroutines, see Adams/Solver online help. Also refer to the
appropriate instructions on creating and running the library you make in Running and Configuring Adams.

About Specifying Function Expressions

You can specify up to six function Expressions in one request. The function expressions are labeled f1
through f8, with f1 and f5 reserved by Adams/Solver to hold the magnitude of the function expressions
that follow.
Creating function expressions to define requests provides you with two significant advantages over
specifying a predefined data type and marker. The advantages are:
 Requests 11
Creating Requests

• You can customize the expressions to output just what you want and are, therefore, more
versatile.
• The function expressions are very efficient, calculating in one or two requests what otherwise
might require eight or more requests.
The following example illustrates how to output quantities that could not be captured using predefined
outputs, especially not all within a single request:
f1 = (blank)
f2 = "0.5*17.49*VM(mar15, mar27)**2"
f3 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)*DX(mar18, mar19, mar1)"
f4 = "FX(mar18, mar19, mar1)/TIME"
f5 = (blank)
f6 = "AZ(mar7, mar8)"
f7 = "JOINT(joi26, mar7, fy, mar99)"
f8 = "MOTION(joi26, mar7, tz, mar99)"
The easiest way to enter a function expression in Adams/View is to use the Function Builder. For more
information on the Function Builder and the built-in functions, see the Adams/View Function Builder
online help.
12 Adams/View
Creating Requests
Simulation
2 Adams/View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Before you begin your Simulation, you may want to do one or more preliminary operations to help ensure
a better simulation. You can do any of the following:
• Check to see if you have the expected number of movable parts and the expected number and
type of constraints in your model.
• Determine the total number of system Degrees of freedom (DOF) and which, if any, constraint
equations are redundant. Learn more.
• Check to see if any constraints are broken or incorrectly defined and, if so, perform an Initial
conditions simulation on your model to try to correct these broken joints. Learn more.
• Perform a static simulation to move your model into an equilibrium configuration immediately
before performing a dynamic simulation to reduce some of the initial, transient system response.
Learn more
• Calculate the natural frequencies of your model as linearized about a particular operating
configuration. See LINEAR command for more information.

Verifying Your Model

You can use the Model Verify Tool to check for error conditions in your model, such as misaligned joints,
unconstrained parts, or massless parts in dynamic models. The Model Verify tool alerts you to other
possible problems. It is a good tool to use periodically as you add detail to or refine your model. The
following sections explain how to verify your model and describe more about overconstraining your
model.
To learn more about avoiding improper connections, see Performing Initial Conditions Simulation. To
manage the mass properties of rigid bodies, see Modifying Mass and Inertia for Rigid Bodies.

Running a Verification of Your Model

To verify your model, do one of the following:

• From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select the Model Verify Tool .

• From the Tools menu, select Model Verify.

 Simulation 3
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

An information window appears with information about your model as shown in the figure below.

Tip: Select the Model Verify tool from the Information tool stack on the Status bar.

About the Algebraic Equations of Motion

Constraints in Adams/View remove DOF from your model by adding algebraic constraint equations to
the governing system of DAEs (Differential and Algebraic equations). The different constraints in the
Adams/View constraints library remove different types and number of DOF. Joints can remove anywhere
from one to six DOF, depending on their type. For more information on the type and number of DOFs
that each joint removes, see Constraints and Degrees of Freedom.
Mathematically, however, Adams/Solver represents similarly constrained DOF with similar algebraic
equations. The following are representative of the type of algebraic equations Adams/Solver uses to
represent DOF constrained by joints:

(1)
4 Adams/View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Equation (1) through Equation (3) constrain translational DOF, while Equation (4) through Equation (6)
constrain rotational DOF. The table below explains each of the mathematical equations. In the
explanations, the I marker is on the first part and the J marker is on the second part.

Explanations of Equations of Motion

The equation: Means that:
Global x coordinate of the I marker must always remain identical to the global
x coordinate of the J marker.
Global y coordinate of the I marker must always remain identical to the global
y coordinate of the J marker.
Global z coordinate of the I marker must always remain identical to the global
z coordinate of the J marker.
Z-axis of the I marker must always remain perpendicular to the x-axis of the J
marker (which means no rotation about the common y-axis).
Z-axis of the I marker must always remain perpendicular to the y-axis of the J
marker (which means no rotation about the common x-axis).
X-axis of the I marker must always remain perpendicular to the y-axis of the
J marker (which means no rotation about the common z-axis).

The table below lists some of the most commonly used joints and the equations that are used to represent
them:

Common Joints and Equations Used to Represent Them

The joint: Uses:
Fixed joint Six equations (Equations 1 through 6)
Spherical joint Three equations (Equations 1 through 3)
Revolute joint Five equations (Equations 1 through 5)
Translational joint 5 equations (Equations 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6)
Inline joint Two equations (Equations 1 and 2)
 Simulation 5
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Notice that each of the five joints uses Equations 1 and 2. Duplicating constrained DOF between the same
parts can lead to overconstraining your model and introduce redundant constraint equations.
Adams/Solver outputs warning messages to help you understand which equations are redundant and,
therefore, which DOF are removed more than once. For some examples of warning messages in
Adams/View and how you can remove the redundancy that they indicate, See Examples of Redundant
Constraints Messages.

More on Redundant Constraint Checking

When building a model, you may find that you define a pair of constraints that constrain two parts in
exactly the same way, and so remove identical Degrees of freedom (DOF) from your model. For example,
when modeling a door that is connected to a ground-fixed door frame, you might add two hinges
(revolute joints) to restrict the door's movement but this is unnecessary. In mathematical terms, the
constraint equations of both constraints are redundant with each other because they each remove the same
five DOF.
In a physical mechanical system, it might be necessary to have two constraints that restrict the same DOF
because of deformation of the parts and joint-play in the connections. In an ideal mathematical model,
however, where parts are rigid and joints do not permit any play, only one of the constraints is required
and the other constraint is redundant.
Redundant constraints are considered to be either consistent or inconsistent. Redundant constraints are
consistent if a solution satisfying the set of independent constraint equations also satisfies the set of
dependent or redundant constraint equations. Using the example of the door, the constraints are
consistent whenever the axes of the two hinges are aligned. If, however, the axes of the two hinges are
not aligned, the door cannot move without breaking one of the hinges. In this case, the two hinges are
inconsistent.
When the analysis engine, Adams/Solver, encounters redundant constraints, it determines which
constraints are redundant, removes them from the set of equations, and provides a set of results that
characterizes the motion and forces in the model. In this way, Adams/Solver can solve the equations of
motion but only if the constraints are consistent. Note that models with redundant constraints do not have
a unique solution. Solutions other than the one Adams/Solver provides can also be physically realistic.
Redundant constraints that are initially consistent can become inconsistent as your model simulates over
time. Adams/Solver stops simulating as soon as the redundant constraints become inconsistent. For
example, consider a planetary gear system with redundant constraints. Slight misalignment errors can
accumulate over time, eventually resulting in a failure of the consistency check. If this occurs, you can
remove the redundant constraints or replace them with flexible connections.
6 Adams/View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Consistent Gears that Become Inconsistent

In the case of the door with two hinges, Adams/Solver ignores five of the constraint equations that it finds
redundant. You do not know which equations Adams/Solver ignores, however. If Adams/Solver ignores
all of the equations corresponding to one of the hinges, then all the reaction forces are concentrated at the
other hinge in the Adams/Solver solution. Adams/Solver arbitrarily sets the reaction forces to zero at the
redundant hinge. But Adams/Solver might not discard all the equations for one hinge and retain all the
equations from the other. It might just as easily retain one or more equations from each, and discard one
or more from each.
Although Adams/Solver still provides the physically correct solution, the simulation may require extra
computational effort to constrain the motion when all of the constraint forces and torques are
concentrated at one end of the door. Consequently, it is always a good idea to carefully select your
constraints and define models without any redundancies. For example, you can construct the model of
the door with a spherical joint and a parallel-axes constraint instead of the single revolute joint.

Door Frame with Spherical and Parallel-axes Constraints

When you verify your model or run a simulation, Adams/Solver tells you which constraints are
redundant. To solve the redundancy, try replacing a redundant idealized joint with a joint primitive. You
may also want to replace redundant constraints with approximately equivalent flexible connections.
Adams/Solver does not always check the initial conditions set for a constraint when it performs
overconstraint checking. If you apply a motion on one joint and initial conditions on another joint, check
to ensure that they are not redundant because Adams/Solver does not check them for redundancy and
your model may lock up when simulation begins. As a general rule, do not specify more initial conditions
than the number of DOF in your model. For more on initial conditions for joints, see Setting Initial
Conditions.
 Simulation 7
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Examples of Redundant Constraint Messages

The following sections provide examples of redundant constraint messages and ways to avoid the
redundancies:
• Example 1 - Converting a Revolute to a Spherical
• Example 2 - Converting a Translation to an Inline
• Example 3 - Removing Redundancies from Fourbar Mechanism

Example 1 - Converting a Revolute to a Spherical

If in your model, Joint_7 is a revolute joint, and Adams/View gives you the following warning messages,
then you have two redundant constraint equations:
Joint_7 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Xj
Joint_7 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Yj
These messages indicate that the rotational constraint equations 4 and 5 that the revolute joint introduces
are not needed. Therefore, you could replace the revolute joint with a spherical joint since it does not use
these equations.

Example 2 - Converting a Translation to an Inline

If in your model, Joint_29 is a translational joint, and Adams/View displays the following warning
messages, then you could change Joint_29 from a translational joint to an inline joint to remove the
redundancies:
Joint_29 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Xj
Joint_29 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Yj
Joint_29 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Xi and Yj

Example 3 - Removing Redundancies from Fourbar Mechanism

If you build a fourbar mechanism with four revolute joints, Adams/View displays messages similar to the
following:
Joint_1 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Xj
Joint_1 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Yj
Joint_3 unnecessarily removes Rotation Between Zi and Xj
These messages indicate that you could change Joint_1 from a revolute joint to a spherical joint, and
change Joint_3 from a revolute joint to a universal or Hooke joint. By changing the joint types, you
eliminate the redundant constraint warnings and possibly improve the performance of your solution.
Alternatively, you could also remove the redundancies by changing just one of the revolute joints to an
inline joint. There is almost always more than one way to remove redundant constraints. The best way is
to select joint types so they match the way your physical system can move. Some of the possible
configurations are shown in the figure below.
8 Adams/View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Alternative Configurations for Fourbar Mechanism

Remember that Adams/Solver does not calculate joint reaction forces in any directions associated with
redundant constraint equations because it automatically removes these equations when it performs a
simulation. Therefore, you may also want to select your joint types based on where you want to measure
joint reaction forces.

Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations

When you perform a static equilibrium simulation on your model, Adams/Solver iteratively repositions
all parts in an attempt to balance all the forces for one particular point in time.

To learn more:
• About Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations
• Finding Static Equilibrium for Your Model
• About Performing Dynamic Simulations to Find Static Equilibrium

About Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations

To perform a Static equilibrium simulation, Adams/Solver finds the configuration and static forces for
which all the static forces in the system balance after being evaluated at the current simulation time. This
process requires the solution of a set of nonlinear algebraic equations. Adams/Solver uses the modified
Newton-Raphson iteration to solve these equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see
the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)
If your force and motion inputs change over time and you want to investigate how your equilibrium
configurations change, you can choose to perform a series of static simulations over an interval of time.
A series of static simulations is often referred to as a quasi-static simulation because time is allowed to
vary between static simulations but time-varying inertial effects are neglected for each individual static
simulation. Quasi-static simulations are useful for approximating the dynamic response of models that
move very slowly and for which you can assume that the effects of inertial force can be neglected.
Since Adams/Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium
configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no degrees of
freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.

Finding Static Equilibrium for Your Model

To perform a single static simulation at time 0.0:

• From either the Simulation container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box,
select the Static Equilibrium tool.

To perform a static simulation at a time other than time 0.0:

1. From either the Simulation container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box,
set Simulation Type to Static.
 Simulation 9
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

2. From the option menu, select Duration and enter the desired time.
3. Select Steps and then set the number of output steps to 1.
4. Select the Simulation Start tool .
Adams/View actually calculates an equilibrium configuration for both time 0 and the request
time, so you get two output steps: one automatically at time 0 and one at the requested time.

To perform a series of static simulations until a specified time:

1. From either the Simulation container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box,
set Simulation Type to Static.
2. From the option menu, select Duration and enter the desired time.
3. Select Step Size and then enter the information you desire between time 0 and the desired time.
4. Select the Simulation Start tool .

To perform a static simulation before performing a dynamic simulation:

• Do one of the following:
• On the Simulation Controls dialog box, select Start at equilibrium and then perform a
Dynamic simulation as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.
• Use the Static Equilibrium tool to perform a static equilibrium simulation at time 0.0. Then,
without resetting the simulation and with Start at Equilibrium cleared, perform a dynamic
simulation.

About Performing Dynamic Simulations to Find Static Equilibrium

When you select to perform a Dynamic simulation to find the Static equilibrium, Adams/Solver performs
a standard dynamic simulation, except for the following:
• The function-expression variable, TIME, whether accessed using function expressions or the
TIME variable passed to most User-written subroutines, is set to the starting time for the duration
of the simulation. This setting has the effect of freezing all time-dependent excitations.
• Body forces are applied to all rigid bodies (damping forces) that oppose motion relative to
ground. The magnitude of the forces depends on the velocity of the rigid bodies relative to
ground and on the Global Damping value used in Solver Settings - Equilibrium.
• The simulation time is reset to the starting time once the analysis is complete.
• The analysis terminates when one of the following occurs based on options in Solver Settings -
Equilibrium:
• A norm of the system acceleration falls below Acceleration Error and the system kinetic energy
simultaneously falls below Kinetic Energy Error.
• The simulation time has advanced by Settling Time.

Because a dynamic simulation occurs, the settings in Solver Settings - Dynamic specify the error
tolerances and other parameters normally associated with dynamic simulations.
10 Adams/View
About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation

Performing Initial Conditions Simulation

You can perform an Initial conditions simulation to check for any inconsistencies in your model. The initial
conditions simulation is often referred to as an assemble model operation. An initial conditions
simulation tries to reconcile any positioning inconsistencies that exist in your model at its design
configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or Linear simulation. Most importantly, the
initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.
For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the markers that define the joint
must be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and
needs to be repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute
joint by moving the origins of the two markers until they are coincident, as shown in the following figure.

Repaired Revolute Joint

You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded
view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model.
You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually
without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams/View provides options for specifying
that you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.

To perform an initial conditions simulation:

• From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select the Initial Conditions Tool .
Adams/View tells you when it has assembled your model properly. You can revert back to your
original design configuration or you can save your assembled model as the new design
configuration for your model. For more information on how to do this, see Saving a Simulation
Frame.
 Simulation 11
Performing an Interactive Simulation

Performing an Interactive Simulation

Interactive Simulations are the quickest and easiest way to perform a test of your model. See Interactive
Simulation Palette and Container.

Running an Interactive Simulation

You use either the Simulation container on the Main Toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box to
access the tools to run an interactive simulation. If you use the Simulation Controls dialog box, you have
the additional options to set your simulation so that it runs until you stop and selecting to not display
graphic.
Be sure to read Tips on Running an Interactive Simulation, before you run the simulation.
By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the Modeling database, not to external
Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis files, set the simulation
output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting Simulation Controls. To export the results to
analysis files, see Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files.

To run an interactive simulation:

1. On the Main Toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
2. If you want to display the complete set of tools on the Simulation Control palette, select the More
button.
The Simulation Controls palette appears.
3. Set Simulation Type to the type of simulation you want Adams/View to perform. Select Default
to have Adams/View determine the simulation type: Kinematic if your model contains zero
degrees of freedom (DOF), and dynamic if your model has one or more DOF. For information
checking the number of DOF in your model, see Verifying Your Model. Learn more about Types
of Simulations.
4. Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want it defined. You
can select:
• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to run.
• Forever - Adams/View continues simulating until you stop the simulation or until it can no
longer solve the equations of motion to within your specified tolerance. This option is only
available on the Simulation Control dialog box.
5. Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your simulation. You can specify:
• Step Size, which represents the amount of time, in current model units, between output
steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your simulation end time
or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of
0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100 steps/second.
12 Adams/View
Performing an Interactive Simulation

• Steps, which represents the total number of times you want Adams/View to provide output
information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per step, which yields an
output frequency of 50 steps/second.
6. If you selected the More button to display the Simulation Controls palette, you can clear the
selection of Update graphics display if you do not want the model updated. This saves
simulation time, but you should only select it if you are sure that your simulation will run to
completion without difficulty. See Solver Settings - Display.
7. Select the Simulation Start tool .

Stopping an Interactive Simulation

To stop a Simulation:
• Select the Simulation Stop tool .
Adams/Solver stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the positions that
Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.

Tips on Running an Interactive Simulation

The following are tips for running an Interactive Simulation.
• If you simulate your model once, then stop the simulation and select the Simulation Start tool
again without selecting the Reset tool, the simulation picks up from where it left off and
continues on.
If you want to pick up from where you left off, it is more convenient to set a simulation’s time
interval using the Duration option instead of the End Time option. You can use Duration with
any value because it adds an incremental time on to whatever was the end time of the last
simulation. Using the End option, however, you must be careful to set the end time to a number
greater than the end time of the earlier simulation.
• The model configuration that Adams/View calculates at time 0.0 may be different from your
initial design configuration. If Adams/View finds any conflicts or inconsistencies in the way you
built your model at your design configuration, it tries to reposition the problematic modeling
objects at time 0.0 to remove the inconsistencies before the actual simulation begins.
For more information on how to detect conflicts or inconsistencies in your model, see Verifying
Your Model.
• Give careful consideration to the output step size you specify. If you specify an output step size
that is too large, you may not be able to visualize higher frequencies of response. If you specify
an output step size that is too small, you could end up putting an artificial governor on
Adams/Solver, forcing it to use an internal solution step that is smaller than it really has to be.
This, in turn, would increase the time it would take Adams/View to perform the simulation.
 Simulation 13
Performing an Interactive Simulation

The size of the output time step governs the highest frequency of response that you will be able
to visualize for your simulation. A rough rule-of-thumb is to use at least 5 to 10 output steps per
cycle of the response that you expect. To get a better estimate of the expected response, you
might want to investigate the use of the optional Adams/Linear product, which can calculate the
natural frequencies and mode shapes for your model. For additional information, see the LINEAR
command in the Adams/Solver online help.
14 Adams/View
Performing a Scripted Simulation

Performing a Scripted Simulation

Instead of letting Adams/View set the commands to be run during an Interactive Simulation, you can
create a simulation Script. A simulation script lets you program the simulation and add advanced options
to your simulation. Simulation scripts are useful when you have come up with a good set of simulation
parameters that you want to repeat again and again. They are also needed for Design study, Design of
experiments (DOE), and Optimization simulations.

Learn more:
• Types of Simulation Scripts
• Example Adams/Solver Script
• Creating a Simulation Script
• Modifying a Simulation Script
• Getting Assistance Entering Commands
• Importing an Adams/Solver Command File (.acf)
• Running a Scripted Simulation

Types of Simulation Scripts

You can create the following types of simulation scripts:
• Simple run - A set of options that correspond to the options on the Interactive Simulation
controls. It lets you store simulation settings so that you can use them again. A simple run
performs a single Transient simulation with an optional equilibrium at the start. If you want to do
your simulation in several parts or mix in other types of simulations, such as computations of
linear modes or a state matrix, you must create an Adams/View or Adams/Solver command
script.
• Adams/View - A set of Adams/View commands, including commands that change the model or
Adams/Solver settings. If you enter commands to change the model or Adams/Solver settings,
they do not affect a simulation that is in progress. For example, if you run a simulation to
5 seconds, then change the model, then continue the simulation, the continuation uses the
original model. You must restart the simulation to use the changes during a simulation.
The best way to get started with the Adams/View commands is to use the interactive controls to
perform a simulation, then look at the script that Adams/View creates, called Last_Sim. You can
then modify and rename it. Also, you can get assistance on entering basic simulation options as
you create the script. See Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box.
• Adams/Solver - A set of Adams/Solver commands, including commands that change the model
or Adams/Solver settings. Unlike an Adams/View command script, you can use an
Adams/Solver command script to change your model or Adams/Solver settings during the
simulation. Also, you can get assistance on entering basic simulation options as you create the
script.
 Simulation 15
Performing a Scripted Simulation

Example Adams/Solver Script

The following Adams/Solver script contains four commands that run a Simulation. The commands are
presented in uppercase for emphasis but they are not case-sensitive when you enter them in Adams/View.

Example of Create Simulation Script

The commands are explained in the table below.

Commands in Solver Script

The commands: Do the following:
! Insert ACF commands here Provide comments.
SIMULATE/STATIC Initially, at time 0.0, perform a static simulation to bring the model
into equilibrium.
SIMULATE/DYNAMIC, Starting from equilibrium, perform a dynamic simulation from 0.0
END=4.2, DTOUT=0.1 to 4.2 seconds outputting data every 0.1 seconds.
INTEGRATOR/ERROR=1E-4, At 4.2 seconds, tighten the integration tolerance by reducing the
HMAX=1E-3 default value of 1E-3 down to 1E-4 and manually limit the
maximum solution time step size to 1E-3.
SIMULATE/DYNAMIC, Continue the dynamic simulation from 4.2 to 5.0 seconds, this time
END=5.0, DTOUT=0.01 outputting the data every 0.01 seconds.
16 Adams/View
Performing a Scripted Simulation

You would use a script like this if you wanted to make sure your solution remained more accurate at a
particular point in time, and you wanted to increase the frequency of data output. You would increase the
accuracy and output because you expect a high-frequency response to become active in your model
starting around the specified time. For example, an abrupt event, such as parts coming into contact,
causing forces to change magnitude quickly, might make you increase your number of output steps
during that interval so you can see more fidelity in your animations and plots.

Creating a Simulation Script

The following procedure explains how to create each type of simulation scripts. Learn about getting
assistance entering commands.

To create a script for a simulation:

1. From the Simulate menu, select Simulation Script, and then point to New.
The Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box appears.
2. Set Script Type to the type of script that you want to create. Learn about types of scripts.
3. Do one of the following depending on the type of script you are creating:
• For a simple run script, enter the values as explained in Running an Interactive Simulation.
• For an Adams/View command script, enter commands below the comment line !Insert
/View commands here:. Learn about getting assistance entering commands.
• For an Adams/Solver command script, enter commands below the comment line !Insert
ACF commands here:. Learn about getting assistance entering commands.
4. Select OK.

Modifying a Simulation Script

You can modify any simulation script in your current Modeling database. Modifying a script is a good
way to get started in creating a new one. Also, the best way to get started creating Adams/View command
scripts is to use the script Last_Sim that Adams/View creates each time it runs an interactive simulation.
Note that you cannot change a simulation script's type after you create it. For example, if you create a
simple run script, you cannot change it to an Adams/View command script. Learn about Types of
Simulation Scripts.

To modify a script for a simulation:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Simulation Script, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the script that you want to modify. Learn more about Database Navigator.
The script appears in the Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box.
3. Modify the script as desired, and select OK. Learn about getting assistance entering commands.
 Simulation 17
Performing a Scripted Simulation

Getting Assistance Entering Commands

Adams/View provides you with assistance on entering commands whether you are creating an
Adams/View command script or an Adams/Solver command script. Learn more
• Getting Assistance with Adams/View Commands
• Getting Assistance with Adams/Solver Commands

Getting Assistance with Adams/View Commands

Instead of having to know command names and syntax for many commands for running simulations and
for saving and resetting simulation, Adams/View lets you enter values for the operations and then
appends the appropriate commands to the current selected script. Assistance on modeling commands is
not available.

To get assistance with Adams/View simulation commands:

1. At the bottom of the Create or Modify Simulation Script dialog box when you are creating or
modifying an Adams/View script, select Append Run Commands.
Options for running simulations appear in the dialog box.
2. Select the simulation operation that you'd like to add to your script. For example, select Transient
- Dynamic to enter a command for performing a Dynamic simulation.
Options for the operation you selected appear in the dialog box. For example, text boxes and
button appear for setting the duration of a simulation.
3. Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box, and then select OK.
Adams/View appends the corresponding command and command parameters to your script.
For additional assistance, you can also:
• Use the help for the Adams/View Command language
• Use the Command Navigator to see the available Adams/View commands, their keywords, and
parameters. Learn more about the Command Navigator.
• Look at your aview.log file to see the commands that have been executed and their syntax. Learn
more about Using the Adams/View Log File.

Getting Assistance with Adams/Solver Commands

Instead of having to know command names and syntax for the Adams/Solver commands, Adams/View
lets you enter values for the commands in dialog boxes.

To get help with Adams/Solver commands:

1. Set Append ACF Command ... at the bottom of the Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box
when you are creating or modifying an Adams/Solver script to the operation that you like to
perform. For example, select Dynamic Simulation to get assistance on entering the command to
perform a dynamic simulation.
A dialog box appears with options for the operation that you like to perform.
18 Adams/View
Performing a Scripted Simulation

2. Enter values in the dialog box, and then select OK.

For additional assistance with Adams/Solver commands, see the Commands section of the Adams/Solver
online help. Below is a list of the assist dialog box and its associated Adams/Solver command to help you
more quickly get help:

The dialog box: Contains options for the command:

Initial Conditions SIMULATE/INITIAL_CONDITIONS
Transient Simulation SIMULATE/TRANSIENT
Kinematic Simulation SIMULATE/KINEMATICS
Dynamic Simulation SIMULATE/DYNAMICS
Quasi-static Simulation SIMULATE/STATICS
Static Calculation SIMULATE/STATICS
Nastran Export C++ - LINEAR/EXPORT
Activate ACTIVATE
Deactivate DEACTIVATE
Output File Separator OUTPUT/SEPARATOR and OUTPUT/NOSEPARATOR
Reload RELOAD
Save SAVE
Eigen Solution Calculation FORTRAN- LINEAR/EIGENSOL
C++ - LINEAR/EIGENSOL
General State Matrix FORTRAN- LINEAR/STATEMAT
C++ - LINEAR/STATEMAT
Import Adams Command File ... See the Importing an Adams/Solver Command File (.acf) section
below

Importing an Adams/Solver Command File (.acf)

You can import an Adams/Solver command file (.acf) and run it as an Adams/Solver command script.
When you import an .acf, Adams/View removes the file names at the beginning and the STOP command
at the end. Learn more about Creating an Adams/Solver Command File.

To import a command file:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Simulation Script, and then select Import ACF.
The Create/Modify Simulation Script dialog box appears with options for importing an
Adams/Solver script.
2. Enter the name of the script that you want to import.
3. Select OK.
 Simulation 19
Performing a Scripted Simulation

Running a Scripted Simulation

To run a scripted simulation:
1. Do either of the following:
• On the Simulation Controls dialog box, select Scripted.
• From the Simulate menu, select Scripted Control.
2. In the Simulation Script Name text box, enter the name of the simulation script to use.
3. Select the Simulation Start tool .

See Scripted Simulation pallette dialog box help for more information.
20 Adams/View
Managing Simulation Results

Managing Simulation Results

You can save and delete simulation results, as well as create a new model based on the simulation results.
Learn more:
• Setting Model Back to Initial Design Configuration
• Saving Simulation Results
• Deleting Simulation Results
• Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model

Setting Model Back to Initial Design Configuration

After you animate your simulation results, you must set your model back to its initial design
configuration if you want to modify your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.
Note that you do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to continue simulating. You
can pick up from the last frame of your animation and continue.

To set a model back to its design configuration, do either of the following:

• From either the Simulation container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box,

select the Simulation Reset tool .

• Double-click the Select Tool .

Saving Simulation Results

By default, Adams/View saves the results of the last Simulation that you performed. You can save
simulation results so you can animate or plot the results at a later time. Saving simulation results is
particularly important when you want to compare the results from several design variations.
Be sure to save your Modeling database after you save your simulation results (File -> Save Database).

Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the Modeling database, not to
external Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis
files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting
Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams/Solver
Analysis Files.

To save simulation results:

1. From the Simulation Controls dialog box, select Save Results to Database tool .
The Save Run Results dialog box appears.
 Simulation 21
Managing Simulation Results

2. In the Name box, enter the name that you want to give to the results set that you are storing.
3. If you want Adams/View to automatically increment the run names when you save subsequent
simulations, select Auto-Increment Name.
4. Select OK.

Deleting Simulation Results

Note: Note: You must have saved your Modeling database before you can delete simulation
results (File -> Save Database).

To delete simulation results:

1. From the Simulation Controls dialog box, right-click the Save Results to Database tool to
display its toolstack.
2. From the toolstack, select the Delete Results from Database tool .
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the names of the simulations you want to delete.
4. Select OK.

Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model

You can copy a frame from a simulation as a new model, and use it as your design configuration.
You will find this helpful, for example, when your original design configuration had broken joints in it
that result in warning messages during model verification. After performing an assemble simulation,
which repairs the broken joints, you can use the resulting animation frame as the starting configuration
for a new model. You could also save an equilibrium configuration resulting from a static simulation as
the starting configuration of a new model. This would help you avoid having to perform a static
simulation before each dynamic simulation.

To save a frame as a new model:

1. From the Simulation Controls dialog box or Animation Controls dialog box, select the Save Model
at Simulated Postion tool .
The Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box appears.
2. In the New Model text box, enter the name of the model to be created from the animation frame.
3. Enter the simulation and frame number you want to save as the initial configuration of the new
model.
4. Select OK.
22 Adams/View
Setting Simulation Controls

Setting Simulation Controls

You can change the default simulation settings so you can have greater control over both the performance
of simulations and the output that is generated from them.

About Setting Simulation Controls

The Solver Settings dialog box contains options for controlling and managing Simulations and Parametric
analyses, including:

Setting the types of files output during the simulation

You can set up Adams/View so that it saves simulation data to external Adams/Solver files and control
what data Adams/View saves. Adams/View saves the files in the directory in which you started
Adams/View.
If you are using Adams/Durability, you can also save Adams/View RPC III and DAC output. For more
information, see Adams/Durability online help.

Controlling the display during the simulation

You can control how Adams/View displays your model during a single simulation or how it displays your
model during a parametric analysis, such as a design study or optimization. You can also set the
information that Adams/View displays during a parametric analysis.
Adams/View lets you set display options so you see just the amount of information you need during a
simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, you can set up the display to
see the model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is working properly.
Updating the display of the model frequently can, however, slow down the overall solution process.
Once your model runs properly, you can change Adams/View so it only updates the model at the end of
the simulation. You can even set Adams/View so it never updates the model. You can then play an
animation of the simulation, as required.

Change solution settings for all types of simulations (kinematic, initial conditions,
dynamic, static)
The options for setting simulations match the arguments for the corresponding statements in
Adams/Solver. For example, options for setting a kinematic simulation match the arguments for the
KINEMATICS statement. Therefore, you will find it very easy to refer to the more extensive simulation
setting information in Adams/Solver online help.
Keep in mind that settings for individual simulations also affect the simulations during parametric
analyses, such as during a design study or optimization.

Set what type of Adams/Solver to run

In addition to running Interactive Simulation or Scripted simulations, you have several options for
performing simulations. You can choose:
 Simulation 23
Setting Simulation Controls

• Internal - Run Adams/Solver from within Adams/View and animate the results as they are
calculated, which is the default and is explained in Setting Simulation Controls. In addition, if
you select the Internal option, you can select from two different types of solvers:
• FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams/Solver.
• C++ - Our new version of Adams/Solver, which is C++-based and promises to be faster, provide
new linear analysis capabilities, and have an improved methodology for identifying and handling
redundant constraints. Currently, it does not support all modeling elements that the
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) supports.
• External - Perform a simulation with Adams/Solver while in Adams/View, but without seeing
the model update on your screen during the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an
animation of the simulation when the simulation is complete.
• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams/View to write out the files that are needed to run a simulation
using Adams/Solver from outside of Adams/View.

Accessing the Solver Settings Dialog Box

You can access the Solver Settings dialog box in three ways: from the Settings menu, from the Simulation
Controls dialog box, and from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box.

To access the Settings dialog box from the Settings menu:

• From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select the desired command representing the
setting that you want to change.
The Solver Settings dialog box appears with options for the selected command.

To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Simulation Control dialog box:
1. On the Simulation Control dialog box, select Simulation Settings to display the Solver Settings
dialog box.
2. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to the setting that you want to control.

To access the Solver Settings dialog box from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box:
• From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select a button from the Settings area of the dialog
box.
You can select:
• Display to set the display of simulation results during a parametric analysis.
• Output to manage the results of the analysis.
• Optimizer to set options for optimizing.
24 Adams/View
Adding Sensors to Your Model

Adding Sensors to Your Model

A sensor monitors a simulation for a specified event and changes a set of simulation controls when the
event occurs. Learn more about sensors:
• About Sensors
• Defining Events for Sensors to Detect
• Triggering the Action of a Sensor
• Types of Actions for Sensors
• Creating a Sensor
• Example of Adding a Sensor

Also refer to the cautions for using sensors in the Adams/Solver SENSOR statement.

About Sensors
You can use sensors to trigger actions during simulations when a specified event occurs. The actions you
can trigger include:
• Stopping the simulation completely - You might want to monitor the vertical distance between
a wheel center and the ground and stop the simulation when it exceeds the undeformed radius of
the tire.
• Changing the parameters controlling the solution - You might want to monitor the distance
between two objects that are expected to collide during a simulation. Just before the objects
collide, you reduce the solution step size to avoid convergence problems and reduce the output
step size to capture the magnitude of the contact force.
• Changing inputs to the simulation - Sensors are often used in vehicle applications to transition
between different maneuvers, such as from a controlled, straight-line movement to a J-turn. Any
characteristic of the vehicle's movement that you can measure in Adams/View, you can monitor
through a sensor and trigger a change in simulation conditions. For vehicles, these include the
yaw, lateral, or longitudinal velocity; the yaw or slip angle; the engine or wheel speed; and so on.
 Simulation 25
Adding Sensors to Your Model

• Changing the model topology - You can create a sensor that monitors the reaction force in a
connection and then deactivates the connection when the force exceeds a specified value. A
simple example of this is shown in the figure below.

Defining Events for Sensors to Detect

You define the event that a sensor is to detect by creating a function, which can depend on:
• Distance, velocity, acceleration, or force between markers
• User-defined variables
• Simulation time

You can also reference object data, such as measures.

When performing a Dynamic simulation, Adams/View evaluates the function after every successful
Integration step. When performing other types of simulations, it evaluates the function after every
successful solution step. To define the function, you can use a run-time expression or a user-written
subroutine.
The sensor function should be continuous because Adams/Solver tries to adjust the step size to find the
exact time the sensor becomes active. This process is inaccurate and time consuming when the function
is discontinuous. For that reason, functions of time or displacements work best for sensors; functions of
velocities, accelerations, and forces are less desirable.
Generally, Adams/Solver tests sensors after every successful integration step. If the triggering condition
or event that the sensor is monitoring occurs and persists, you may have to turn off the sensor so it doesn't
continue to trigger. You can turn off a sensor using the DEACTIVATE simulation script command. To
help reduce the possibility of the continuous triggering effect, once the sensor triggers the first time,
Adams/Solver does not test the sensor again until after three subsequent successful integration steps.
26 Adams/View
Adding Sensors to Your Model

Triggering the Action of a Sensor

You set the value to trigger the sensor by specifying a target value, providing an allowable tolerance from
the target value, and then setting a comparison for the sensor to evaluate, as explained in the next
sections:
• About Error Tolerance
• About Setting Comparisons

About Error Tolerance

Because a function rarely equals a target value exactly, you can specify the allowable error tolerance
between the target value and the actual value of the function. Adams/Solver compares the function’s
instantaneous value to the target value +/- the error tolerance at each integration step according to the
comparison that you specify. Note that the sensor error tolerance must be a positive number.

About Setting Comparisons

Specifies what kind of comparison Adams/Solver should make to determine if it should initiate the sensor
action. The comparisons can be one of those in the following table.

The comparison: Initiates the action when the function value is:
Equal From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).
Greater than or equal Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).
Less than or equal Less than or equal to (Value + Error).

The figure below illustrates each of the comparisons. In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value
of the function being monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not evaluate in
 Simulation 27
Adding Sensors to Your Model

the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your sensor to trigger immediately. It is a
good idea to define a measure for your sensor function so you can check it by plotting it.

Types of Actions for Sensors

There are several actions a sensor can trigger. These are grouped into:
• Standard actions - Commonly used actions.
• Special actions - Actions used to assist in debugging your model.

Standard Actions
You can specify one or more of the following standard actions to occur when Adams/View senses the
event.
• Generate additional output step - Creates an extra Output step when Adams/Solver triggers
the sensor so you can capture the action.
• Set output step size - Redefines the time between consecutive output steps. Adams/Solver uses
this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between output steps for the
simulation.
• Terminate current step and stop, or continue with a simulation script - Stops simulation or
stops current command in simulation script and continues with next command. For information
on simulation scripts, see Performing a Scripted Simulation.
28 Adams/View
Adding Sensors to Your Model

Special Actions
• Set integration step size - Redefines the next Integration step size. This change is temporary and
lasts only for the next solution step.
The default is an integrator-determined value except when you’ve included restarting the
integrator as part of the sensor action as explained next. In this case, the step size defaults to the
integrator step size.
• Restart integrator - Restarts integration and reduces the integration order to one. If you also set
integration step size as explained above, Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration step size to
the specified value. If you do not specify the step size, Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration
step size to the integrator step size.
• Refactorize Jacobian - Causes Adams/Solver to generate a new pivot sequence for matrix
factorization. This can help the integrator produce more accurate data or proceed more robustly
through the simulation. Adams/Solver generates a pivot sequence for matrix factorization before
starting the simulation. Adams/Solver does not generate a new pivot sequence unless you specify
to refactorize the Jacobian or it is necessary to refactorize to reach convergence.
• Dump state variable vector - Writes the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your
current working directory.

Creating a Sensor
To create a sensor:
1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
The Create/Modify Sensor dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the sensor.
3. To define the event to be detected:
• To define the event using a function expression, set Event Definition to Run-time
Expression, and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then
select Function Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to
Function Builder: Click the More button .
• To define the event using a subroutine, set Event Definition to User Written Subroutine,
and then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SENSUB in the
Parameter List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to
SENSUB.
4. To specify a function expression or user-written subroutine to be evaluated with the event occurs:
• To define the evaluation using a function expression, set Event Evaluation to Run-time
Expression, and then enter a function expression in the Expression text box.
 Simulation 29
Adding Sensors to Your Model

To get help on entering a function expression, right-click the Expression text box, and then
select Function Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder online help. Shortcut to
Function Builder: Click the More button .
• To define the evaluation using a subroutine, set Event Evaluation to User Written
Subroutine, and then enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine
SEVSUB in the Parameter List text box. Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View
is to pass to SEVSUB.
5. To set up the target value to trigger an action:
• Set the option menu to the comparison to be used to determine if the event is to be triggered.
For information on the different comparisons, see Triggering the Action of a Sensor.
• In the Value text box, enter the value to trigger an action.
• In the Error Tolerance text box, enter the absolute value of allowable error between the
targeted value and the actual sensed value.
6. To set up the action, select an action from the Standard or Special Actions areas of the dialog box
as explained in Types of Actions for Sensors. If you select to continue with a simulation script,
you must run the simulation with a script, as explained in Performing a Scripted Simulation.
30 Adams/View
Adding Sensors to Your Model
Reviewing results
2 Adams/View
Using Animations

Using Animations
You can replay an Animation again after the Simulation ends to investigate the results of a simulation, as
long as the results of the simulation have been stored in your Modeling database. By default,
Adams/View only stores the last simulation you performed. You can either manually store a particular
simulation, or you can set Adams/View so that it automatically stores all your simulations. Learn about
Saving Simulation Results.

You can play animation frames forwards or backwards, speed them up or slow them down, pause and
continue an animation, rewind to an earlier frame, continuously play an animation in a loop, or play only
a certain portion of the entire sequence of frames. The following sections explain how to control the
playing of your animations.
• Playing an Animation
• Stopping an Animation
• Rewinding an Animation
• Skipping Frames During an Animation
• Playing a Subset of Frames
• Repeating an Animation
• Displaying Specific Animation Frames
• Resetting the Model View

Playing an Animation
When you play an Animation, Adams/View plays every frame by default. You can rewind an animation
and play the animation at various speeds as explained in the table below. During fast-forward and fast-
backward play modes, Adams/View plays only every fifth frame.
The table below explains the options available on the Animation Controls dialog box for playing an
animation.

To play an animation: Select the tool:

Forwards Play-forward tool
Backward Play-backward tool
Fast-forward mode Play-fast-forward tool
Fast-backward mode Play-fast-backward tool

Tip: To run an animation using defaults, double-click the Animation tool .

 Reviewing results 3
Using Animations

Stopping an Animation
You can pause an Animation at any time instead of waiting for it to complete.

To stop an animation, do one of the following:

• On the Animation container of the Main toolbox or the Animation Controls dialog box, select the
Pause tool

• . (To display the Animation container, select the Animate tool .)

• On the Status bar, select the Stop tool .

• Press the Esc key.

Rewinding an Animation
After an Animation has ended or stopped, you can rewind it to the beginning of the animation. When you
rewind an animation, Adams/View returns to the first frame calculated during the simulation, and not to
the initial design configuration. You can also rewind or advance one frame at a time. Learn about
displaying specific animation frames.

To rewind an animation to the first frame:

• On the Animation container on the Main toolbox or the Animation Controls dialog box, select the
Rewind tool

• . (To display the Animation container, select the Animate tool .)

Skipping Frames During an Animation

When you don't need to see every frame of an Animation to get an idea of how your model behaves, you
can skip frames. For example, you can skip every other frame or skip every fifth frame. While skipping
frames can help speed up an animation, it can also cause you to miss events that occurred in your
simulation. By default, Adams/View does not skip any frames when playing an animation.

To skip frames while playing an animation:

• On the Animation Controls dialog box, enter the number of frames to skip in the Frame
Increment box. For example, enter 5 to have Adams/View display only every fifth frame.

Playing a Subset of Frames

You can choose to play only a subset of the complete sequence of frames in an Animation. By default,
Adams/View plays the complete sequence of frames. You can set the interval to view based on time or
frame number.
4 Adams/View
Using Animations

For example, if you performed a simulation from 0.0 to 10.0 seconds and asked for output every 0.1
seconds, Adams/Solver records data at 101 steps or frames. It creates an animation frame every tenth of
a second for ten seconds plus one at time 0.0. To only view the animation between 3.0 and 5.5 seconds,
set the start time to 3.0 and the end time to 5.5. To achieve the same effect by specifying the frame
number, set the start frame to 31 and the stop frame to 56. Remember that frame 1 corresponds to time
0.0.

To play frames associated with a time interval:

• On the Animation Controls dialog box, and then do one of the following:
• Set the last option menu to Time Range, and enter a start time and a stop time. Adams/View
replays those frames whose time is within the specified range.
• Select Frame Range and enter a start frame and a stop frame.

Repeating an Animation
By default, Adams/View plays the specified sequence of frames once. You can replay the animation as
many times as desired.

To specify the repetition for an animation, do one of the following:

• On the Animation Controls dialog box, in the Cycles text box, enter a whole number representing
the number of times you want Adams/View to play the animation. Adams/View automatically
rewinds the animation before each replay.
• On the Animation container in Main toolbox, select Loop. (To display the Animation container,
select the Animate tool .)

Displaying Specific Animation Frames

Adams/View provides you with several options for playing specific Animation frames. You can play one
frame, display each frame one at a time, or display a frame associated with a particular time.

To display a frame from an animation, do one of the following:

• On the Animation Controls dialog box or the Animation container on the Main toolbox, click and
drag on the slider until you reach the number of the frame you want to display. (To display the
Animation container, select the Animate tool .)
• On the Animation Control dialog box:
• From last option menu, select Frame.
• In the box that appears to the right of the option menu, enter the number of the frame you want
displayed and select Apply.
 Reviewing results 5
Using Animations

To display the frames of an animation one at a time, do one of the following:

• On the Animation Control dialog box, select the:

• Forward Frame tool to advance one frame.

• Backward Frame tool to rewind one frame.

• From the Animation container on the Main toolbox, select the:

• Forward Frame tool to advance one frame.

• Backward Frame tool to rewind one frame.

To display a frame from an animation associated with a particular time:

1. On the Animation Control dialog box, from the last option menu, select Time.
2. In the box that appears to the right of the option menu, enter the time closest to the frame you want
displayed.
3. Select Apply.

Resetting the Model View

After you've animated your model, you need to set Adams/View to modeling view to make any changes
to your model.

To return to modeling view, do one of the following:

• Close the Animation Controls dialog box.

• Double-click the Select Tool .

Replaying Animation of Simulation Results

You can replay an Animation of the last Simulation. Replaying an animation displays the results much
faster than if you simulate the model again and watch the frames update as the solution calculates results.
You can also replay an animation of a saved simulation.
How Adams/View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you have finished the simulation
and reset the model back to its initial design configuration.
• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the model back to its initial
configuration, when you select to replay the animation, Adams/View animates the model up to
the last simulation step and leaves your model there.
6 Adams/View
Using Animations

• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the animation,
Adams/View automatically sets the model back to the initial design configuration when the
animation is complete.

To replay an animation of simulation results:

• From either the Simulation container on the Main toolbox or the Simulation Controls dialog box,

select the Animation Replay tool .

Animating Natural Frequencies
Learn more about how to view your model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies:
• About Animating Natural Frequencies
• Performing an Animation of Natural Frequencies
• Plotting and Viewing Modes and Frequencies
• Example of Animating Natural Frequencies

About Animating Natural Frequencies

The Linear Modes Controls command lets you view your model oscillating at one of its natural
frequencies. It cycles through the model deformation starting from the operating point of the requested
natural frequency of the eigensolution. You can also see the effect of the damping on the model and
display a table and plot of modes and frequencies.
When you perform a linear simulation of your model using Adams/Linear, Adams/Solver linearizes the
model at an operating point you specify and calculates the eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Adams/View
then uses the information to display the animated deformed shape as predicted from the eigensolution.
Because the linear solution eigenvectors are normalized, you can specify what the maximum amount the
animated deformed shape should translate or rotate to get a meaningful animation or recognizable shape.
The animation frames correspond to a picture of the model interpolated between the maximum
deformation in the positive and negative directions. The animation then cycles through the deformation
of the model mode shape, from undeformed, to maximum deformed, to negative maximum deformed,
and finally to the undeformed shape. This deformation is about the operating point of the requested
natural mode of the eigensolution.
You control the number of frames per cycle and the number of cycles in an animation. Adams/View
performs the interpolation between the frames using trigonometric functions; therefore, the frames tend
to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and negative directions.
You can only animate periodic and aperiodic eigenmodes (that is, modes with an imaginary component
of the eigenvalue = 0). However, when animating aperiodic modes, Adams/View warns you that the node
has no oscillatory motion.

Performing an Animation of Natural Frequencies

To animate the natural frequencies of your model:
1. If necessary, run a Linear simulation.
2. From the Review menu, select Linear Modes Control.
The Linear Modes Controls dialog box appears. It loads the eigensolution associated with the last
linear simulation you ran.
2 Adams/View
Animating Natural Frequencies

3. If desired, enter the name of an eigensolution in an existing analysis and set the view for the
animation. The eigensolution must be in an existing analysis that is associated with the current
model.
4. If desired, set the option menu to define the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the
model. Set it to either:
• Mode and enter the number of the mode to be used.
• Frequency and enter the frequency of the mode.
If you specify the frequency, Adams/View uses the mode closest to the specified frequency. If
you specify neither the mode nor the frequency, Adams/View deforms the model using the first
mode.

Tip: To view the modes in the eigensolution to see which you should use, see Plotting and
Viewing Modes and Frequencies

5. Set up the number of frames per cycle and number of cycles:

Note: A full cycle goes from undeformed, to maximum positive displacement, back to
undeformed, then to maximum displacement in the negative direction, and finally
back to undeformed.

• Frames Per Cycles - Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle.
Adams/View performs the interpolation between the frames using trigonometric functions;
therefore, the frames tend to be segregated at the maximum deformation in the positive and
negative directions.
• Number of Cycles - Parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles to animate.
6. Select any of the following to set up the animation:
• Show time decay - Specifies whether the amplitudes of the deformations are to remain
constant or decay due to the damping factor calculated in the eigensolution.
• Show trail - Shows the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to another. Showing the trail is
useful in showing the relationship of the model parts between frames but often obscures the
view of the motion.
• Show undeformed - Specifies whether the undeformed model is to be displayed with the
deformed shape superimposed on top of it. If you select Show undeformed, select a color for
the undeformed model. If you do not specify a color, Adams/View displays the undeformed
model using the same color as the deformed mode.
• Show icons - Turns on the display icons during an animation.
7. Set the maximum amount parts will translate or rotate from their undeformed position. If you do
not specify maximum amounts, Adams/View translates parts no more than 20 percent of model
size and 20 degrees.
 3
Animating Natural Frequencies

8. Select the Animate tool .

Plotting and Viewing Modes and Frequencies

Plot the eigenvalues or view a table of eigenvalues in the Information window.
• Plotting Eigenvalues
• Viewing Eigenvalues

Plotting Eigenvalues
You can plot the real eigenvalues against the imaginary eigenvalues.

To plot eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Plot.
A Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot window appears.
2. After viewing the plot, select Close and Delete Plot.

To save the plot:

1. Select Save Plot.
2. Enter a name for the plot.
3. Select Close and Save Plot.

Viewing Eigenvalues
You can display information about all an eigensolution's predicted eigenvalues in the Information
window. Once you display the information in the Information window, you can save it to a file.

The information includes:

• Mode number - Sequential number of the mode that was predicted by the eigen solution.
• Frequency - Natural frequency corresponding to the mode.
• Damping - Damping ratio for the mode (the log decrement is another way to represent this
quantity).
• Eigenvalues - List the real and imaginary part of the eigenvalue.

To view eigenvalues:
1. At the bottom of the Linear Modes Controls dialog box, select Table.
The Information window appears.
2. After viewing the information, select Close.
4 Adams/View
Animating Natural Frequencies
Animation Controls Basics

Setting Up Lighting
You can enhance the quality and realism of your Animations. You can set:
• Overall intensity of the light (much like setting a dimmer switch in your home).
• Background, ambient light to control the diffusion of light sources to effect the amount of
lighting on edges.
• Reflections off of parts. (Note that this is computationally expensive and can slow down your
animations.)
• Focused lighting that comes from different directions, and define the angle of that lighting (how
far it is from the centerline). You can think of this as if you were swinging a light boom across
your model.

To access the lighting options:

• From the Settings menu, select Lighting.
• The Lighting Settings dialog box appears.

To set up overall light intensity, ambient lighting, and reflections:

1. Use the Intensity slider to set how bright the overall light is.
2. Use the Ambient slider to set the ambient light.
3. Toggle Reflections to set up reflections off of parts.
See Reflections Example

To set up focused lighting:

1. Use the light buttons to turn on different focused light sources.
2. Use the Angle slider to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate
for all light sources, such as front.

Note: The number of light sources you can select depends on the graphics driver and system you
are using. If you selected OpenGL, the number of light sources depends on your graphics
card.
2 Adams/View
Animation Controls Basics

To set up one-sided lighting:

• Clear the selection of Two-Sided.

Tip: To achieve the fastest animations, set the lighting options to:

• No reflections
• One-sided
• One light source

Specifying Which Simulation Results to Animate

By default, Adams/View animates the results from the last Simulation performed. You can animate the
results of any simulation that you have saved in your Modeling database. You can also animate the results
of more than one simulation at the same time and change the colors of animations belonging to different
simulations to help you differentiate between them.
• To run animations of different simulations in different colors, use Adams/PostProcessor. See the
Adams/PostProcessor online help.
• To store simulation results in your modeling database, see Saving Simulation Results.

To animate a specific simulation:

• On the Animation Controls dialog box, in the Analysis box, enter the name of a saved simulation,
and then play the animation as explained in Playing Animations.

To animate multiple simulations simultaneously:

• On the Animation Control dialog box, enter the names of the simulations that you want to
animate in the Analysis text box, and then play the animations. Separate each simulation name
with a comma.
The animations all play in the currently active or selected view. Learn how to select view
windows in which to display animations.

Note: When animating multiple simulations simultaneously, each simulation must have the same
number of output steps or frames associated with it, as well as the same output time step
size.

Selecting View Windows in Which to Display Animations

By default, Adams/View only displays Animations in the currently active View window. You can choose
to play animations in a different view window or play the animation in multiple view windows at the
same time. For more information on selecting the currently active view window or on setting up multiple
view layouts, see Setting Up the Window Layout.
 3
Animation Controls Basics

To animate your results in a window other than the currently active one:
• On the Animation Controls dialog box, enter the name of any view window that is currently
visible on your screen. The default name is the currently active view.

To animate your results in multiple views simultaneously:

• On the Animation Control dialog box, in the View text box, enter multiple view names,
separating each name with a comma.

Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously, every view specified must
animate the same simulation results. You cannot display one simulation in one view and
another simulation in another view.

Superimposing Animation Frames

By default, during an Animation, Adams/View erases the previous frame before drawing the next frame.
You can also overlay or superimpose frames on top of one another.
We recommend that you use the frame or time range features, as well as the frame increment so that only
certain frames are superimposed on top of one another. See Skipping Frames During an Animation and
Playing a Subset of Frames.

To superimpose animation frames:

• Before selecting the Play-forward tool on the Animation Control dialog box, select
Superimpose.

Setting Screen Icon Display During Animations

By default, Adams/View turns off all Screen icons during Animations to speed up the animation. If you
need to examine the behavior of particular portions of your model to see if they are working properly, it
may be helpful, however, to display the icons. When you display screen icons during an animation, all
the screen icons that are visible when building your model are also displayed in the animation.
For example, displaying screen icons during animations allows you to see if joints or forces applied to
parts are behaving as expected because you can see their icons move as the animation progresses.
Displaying screen icons can also help you see how coordinate system markers move during animations
since they control the locations and directions for constraints and forces.
Learn about Setting Screen Icon Display.

To display screen icons during an animation:

1. On the Main Toolbox, select the Icons button.
2. On the Animation Controls dialog box, select Icons.
4 Adams/View
Animation Controls Basics

3. Run the animation.

Tracing Paths of Points During Animations

During an Animation, you can draw curves on the screen that represent the path that one or more points
in your model traveled. This can be useful when you are trying to design a mechanical system to produce
a certain motion, and you would like to see whether or not the parts move as intended.
Tracing the paths of points can also be useful when performing envelope studies to see if any parts move
outside a particular working envelope as the mechanical system completes a typical work cycle. By
default, Adams/View does not trace the paths of any points in your model during animation.
To draw paths on the screen, you specify one or more markers for which you want paths generated.
Adams/View draws curves representing the path of the marker during each animation frame. The more
frames you have in your animation, the smoother the curves appear.

To trace the paths of particular points during an animation:

1. On the Animation Controls dialog box, from the Point Trace pull-down menu, select Trace
Marker.
2. In the box that appears, enter the names of one or more markers for which you want Adams/View
to generate paths.
To search for or select a marker from the screen, right-click the box, and select the appropriate
command.

Specifying the View Perspective of Animations

By default, Adams/View uses the same view perspective or camera angle for an Animation as that of the
View window you were using just before you ran the animation. You can also change your viewing
perspective. For example, you can change the perspective to always look at a particular part as it moves
or to always look from a particular vantage point, possibly one that moves with a part. Setting different
animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts undergo large motions and move off
your screen during an animation, such as with vehicle simulations.
A good example of setting the view perspective is when you simulate a vehicle driving through a slalom
course on a test track. By default, you view the simulation as a bystander alongside of the road whose
gaze is fixed in one direction. Unfortunately, as the vehicle moves forward, it quickly moves out of your
field of view. You can, however, set the animation view perspective to mimic the movement of your head
as it moves to follow the vehicle. Furthermore, rather than observe the vehicle as a bystander alongside
a road, you can also set your animation view perspective to mimic what the driver sees as he or she looks
out the front windshield of the vehicle.
 5
Animation Controls Basics

The table below explains the different options available to you to set up your view perspective from the
Animation Controls dialog box.

Note: The Camera option menu is only available in the Animation Controls dialog box.

To set the view

perspective to: Do the following:
Be the same as during 1. Set the Base option menu to Fixed Base.
modeling 2. Set the Camera option menu to Std Camera.
Look from a stationary 1. Set the Base option menu to one of the following:
point to a movable point • Base Marker and enter the marker that you want to follow.
• Base Part and enter the part whose center-of-mass marker you
want to follow.
2. Set the Camera option menu to Std Camera.
Look from a movable 1. Set the Base option menu to Fixed Base.
point towards a stationary 2. Set the Camera option menu, to Camera Marker, and then select
point the marker that you want to remain in the center of the screen.
Look from one movable 1. Set the Base option menu on the Animation Control dialog box to
point to another one of the following:
• Base Marker, and then enter the marker that you want to follow.
• Base Part, and then enter the part whose center-of-mass marker
you want to follow.
2. Set the Camera option menu to Camera Marker, and then enter
the marker that you want to remain in the center of the screen.

Note: If you specify a camera and base marker, then the view direction points from the camera
marker towards the base marker. This does not, however, uniquely define the resulting
orientation of the view, so Adams/View uses the positive y-axis of the camera point marker
to define the “up” direction for your animation view perspective.

Setting Up Force Graphics

Learn About Force Graphics.

To specify force graphics for animations:

1. From the Settings menu, select Force Graphics.
The Force Graphics Settings dialog box appears.
6 Adams/View
Animation Controls Basics

2. In the Force Scale and Torque Scale text boxes, enter the amount by which you want to scale
force (straight arrows) and torque (semi-circular arrows) graphics. The default scale is 1.0.
3. If you do not want to see the values of the force and torque magnitudes during animation, clear
Display Numeric Values. If you leave it selected, Adams/View continuously displays the
magnitudes for all force and torque graphics during the animation.
4. If you want to see the force and torque graphic arrows respresented as three-dimensional objects
instead of as simple lines and arcs, clear Always Wireframe Vectors. If you leave it selected
Adams/View shows the force graphics in Wireframe render mode even when you are rendering
the view in Shaded rendering mode.
5. Select Always in Foreground if you want Adams/View to show force graphics in the foreground
of the model so model geometry does not obscure them.

Tips on Speeding Up and Slowing Down Animations

The following tips will help you speed up the replay of Animations. To slow down an animation, do the
opposite of many of the tips below.
• Reduce the graphic information on the screen. You can:
• Turn off the visibility of your screen icons. Learn about setting screen icon display during
animations.
• Turn off the working grid. Learn about Displaying View Accessories.
• Turn off the visibility of parts that you do not need to see. Learn about Setting Part Display.
• Turn off the display of all measure strip charts, status bar, and numeric values associated with
force graphics.
• Skip frames while replaying the animation. Learn about Skipping Frames During an Animation.
• Play only the set of frames within a desired time interval. Learn about Playing a Subset of
Frames.
• Keep complex geometry to a minimum in your model.
• Perform the simulation again and request fewer output steps. You can either set fewer output
steps in the same time interval or use the same number of steps in a longer time interval. Be
careful if you request fewer output steps, however, because it could affect your solution accuracy
as well as the resolution of your plot data. For more on setting output steps, see Performing an
Interactive Simulation.
• Animate in only one view window at a time or animate only one set of simulation results at a
time.
• Use the Consolidate to Shells option when you import CAD geometry. Learn about Exchanging
Data in Adams.
Debugging Your Model
2 Adams/View
About Building Your Model Correctly

About Building Your Model Correctly

Consider the following tips as you build your model:
• Use the Crawl, Walk, Run Approach - As explained in the Modeling Process, you should start
out building a simple model and then add complexity as you are sure that the simple model
simulates correctly. For example, if your physical system has nonlinear bushings, start out by
creating linear bushings. After you've simulated the linear bushings, change them to nonlinear
bushings. Also, be sure to debug your model as you build it as explained in the later sections in
this chapter.
• Make Smart Modeling Choices - The design of a virtual model follows the same principles as
the design of a physical mechanical system. You want to be sure to make it simple. You want to
be sure that it contains the smallest number of parts and mimics the behavior that you are
studying in the physical system. Although Adams/View gives you the power to mimic the
behavior of your entire system, it is often better to only focus the system behaviors that you want
to study.
Be sure to ask yourself many questions as you build your model, including:
• What parts do I really need to include? You should only include those that affect the behavior of
the model. For example, ask yourself whether an anchor plate really matters in the virtual model.
• What forces do I include?
• How do my parts really interact?
• How can I validate my model? Is the model required to accurately portray behavior trends or is
absolute accuracy required?
Those of you with a finite element analysis background may want to consider whether or not certain parts
need to be modeled as flexible or can be approximated as rigid. Defining parts as rigid is easier and
provides a good first step even if you decide to convert them to flexible bodies after your initial
simulations are running smoothly.
Likewise, those of you with a CAD background may want to pay close attention when selecting which
parts are required for your mechanical model. You rarely need to include every nut and bolt from your
physical system or your CAD assembly.
 Debugging Your Model 3
Debugging Your Model Before You Run a Simulation

Debugging Your Model Before You Run a Simulation

Adams/View provides you with several ways to view the connections in your model and verify your
model's correctness before running a Simulation.

View the Construction of Your Model

To view your model, you can:
• Use the Model Topology command to look at your model's topology - As you build your
model, you can display information about its topology, display how its parts are connected to
each other, and display detailed information about each object in the model, such as its parts,
constraints, and forces. For more information, see Viewing Model Topology Map Through
Information Window.
• Use the Table Editor to look at all objects in your model - The Table Editor provides a
spreadsheet-like overview of the objects that are in your model. It is a convenient way to inspect
or modify models, particularly large ones.

Check Your Model Using Model Verify

You can use the Model Verify tool to check for errors in your model, such as misaligned joints,
unconstrained parts, or massless parts in dynamic models. The Model Verify tool calculates the number
of degrees of freedom (DOF) in your model, as well as reports any redundant constraints. It is a good tool
to use periodically as you add detail to or refine your model. Learn about Verifying Your Model.

Visually Inspect Your Model

Adams/View uses broken screen icons to indicate joints or forces that are incorrectly defined. Therefore,
you can simply look at your model on the screen to see how it is constructed.

Check Your Function Expressions

The following are helpful tips for ways to debug your function when building function expressions:
• Verify a function - When working in the Function Builder in run-time mode, you can do a
cursory check of your function expression to determine if its syntax is correct. If the function
syntax is incorrect, Adams/View gives you an error message pointing out the problem area. For
more information on the Function Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.
• Plot a function - The Adams/View Function Builder gives you the option to preview a plot of
your function. You can use the plotting feature whenever your function evaluates to multiple
values. You can plot all design-time functions and the run-time functions that are in the math
category and can be interpreted as design-time functions. For more information on the Function
Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder online help.
4 Adams/View
Debugging Your Model Before You Run a Simulation

• Create a measure of your entire function or key elements of it - In addition, you may find it
helpful to build measures of your entire function or key elements of it and view strip charts of the
measures as your simulation progresses.
For example, if you create a function that defines the force of a spring-damper, you can create an object
measure that tracks the force of the spring-damper over time. In addition, if you create a function that
defines an impact force, you can create a function measure of either the displacement or velocity term in
the impact function. Learn About Measures.
 Debugging Your Model 5
Debugging Your Model Using Eprint

Debugging Your Model Using Eprint

Eprint prints a block of information for each kinematic, static, or dynamic step to a Command window and
to your ADAM/View Log file, aview.log. The information helps you monitor the simulation process and
to locate the source of the error if there is a problem. Each step consists of two phases:
• A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics).
• The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics).

Eprint displays the same information that the DEBUG command does when used with the argument
EPRINT. For more information, see the Adams/Solver online help.

To start Eprint from the Main toolbox:

1. From the Main Toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
2. Set the pull-down menu at the bottom of the toolbox to Eprint.

To start Eprint from the Main toolbar:

1. From the Simulate menu, select Interactive Controls.
2. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the Simulation Controls dialog box to Eprint.
In both cases, a command window appears. It displays the most recent commands that
Adams/View executed.

Note: You can close the command window and use your aview.log file to view the debugging
information. Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.
6 Adams/View
Using the Simulation Debugger

Using the Simulation Debugger

The Simulation Debugger has several options for how you want to view its debugging information:
• Running the Simulation Debugger
• Setting Up Tracking of Modeling Objects
• Stepping Through a Simulation
• Displaying Debugging Information in a Table
• Highlighting Objects During a Simulation
• Displaying Strip Charts of Adams/Solver Settings

You can select to view any or all of these options during a single simulation. Note, however, that the
options significantly slow down your simulation.

Note: You can only use the Simulation Debugger with an Adams/View interactive custom or
standard library, not an Adams/Solver stand-alone executable. Learn how to Set what type
of Adams/Solver to run.

Running the Simulation Debugger

There are several ways to access the Simulation Debugger. You can access it from the Settings menu or
through the Solver Settings dialog box.

To access the Simulation Debugger from the Settings menu:

1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
The Solver Settings dialog box appears with options for the Simulation Debugger.
2. Set Debugger to On.
3. Select OK.

To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Simulation Control
dialog box:
1. From the Simulate menu, select Interactive Controls.
2. Set the pull-down menu in the middle of the Simulations Control dialog box to Table.

To turn on the Simulation Debugger and Debug table from the Main toolbox:
1. On the Main Toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
2. Set the pull-down menu at the bottom of the toolbox to Table.
 Debugging Your Model 7
Using the Simulation Debugger

Setting Up Tracking of Modeling Objects

As you run an Interactive Simulation, you can track modeling objects based on their having the most error
or the greatest change, acceleration, or force. You can display the objects in a table or highlight the
objects during a simulation. You can only select to track one element at a time. For more information on
how Adams/Solver tracks elements, see the DEBUG command in the Adams/Solver online help.

To set up the elements to be tracked:

1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
2. Set Track Maximum to one of the values explained below:
• Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number is an indicator of
how far Adams/Solver is from a solution. It should decrease with every iteration.
• Force - Track objects generating the greatest force. Includes forces and constraints.
• Change - Track variables with the most change.
• Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration. Includes only parts.
3. Select OK.

Stepping Through a Simulation

You can set up the Simulation Debugger so it pauses after each Simulation Output step, time step, or
iteration so you can closely inspect the simulation behavior. You can step through a simulation with any
of the other debugger options selected, such as strip charts, tables, or object highlighting.

To step through a simulation:

1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
2. Select More and then set Single Step to Yes.
As you run a simulation, Adams/View displays a dialog box that gives you the option to continue
with the simulation or cancel it.
3. Select either Continue or Cancel.

Displaying Debugging Information in a Table

You can display debugging information in the Debug table (see Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)
dialog box help). The table lets you track the object with the most error or the greatest amount of change,
acceleration, or force. You can also track Adams/Solver Integrator progress. The Debug table contains a
running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations of motion for the current simulation. You
can use the information as a measure of how many computations Adams/Solver is performing.
8 Adams/View
Using the Simulation Debugger

Displaying the Debug Table

To display the Debug table from the Solver Settings dialog box:
1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
2. In the Solver Settings dialog box, set Display to Table.
The Debug table appears.
3. Set Track Maximum to the element that you want to track. Learn about Setting Up Tracking of
Modeling Objects.
4. Run an interactive simulation as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.
5. Select Debug from the Simulation container on the Main Toolbox or the Simulation Controls
dialog box.

Setting Debug Table Options

You can set the following options for the information that the Debug table displays:
• Number of objects that can appear in the maximum element list. By default, Adams/View
displays three objects in the list at any one time.
• Number of elements that appeared in the last number of iterations.

To set the maximum number of objects:

• In the Show text box in the Debug table, enter the number of objects, and select Apply.

To set the history:

• In the History text box in the Debug table, enter the number of iterations to track, and select
Apply.

Highlighting Objects During a Simulation

Throughout a Simulation, you can highlight those objects experiencing the most error or the most change,
force, or acceleration, depending on the element you selected to track. If you selected to also display the
Debug table, the objects highlighted are the same objects shown at the top of the Element list in the
Debug table.

Note: Selecting highlighting of objects will significantly slow down your simulation.

To highlight objects:
1. Turn on the debugging tool as explained in Running the Simulation Debugger.
2. From the Solver Settings dialog box, set Track Maximum to select the element that you want to
track. Learn about Setting Up Tracking of Modeling Objects.
3. Set Display to Highlighting.
 Debugging Your Model 9
Using the Simulation Debugger

4. Run an interactive simulation as explained in Performing an Interactive Simulation.

As the simulation runs, Adams/View highlights the objects.

Displaying Strip Charts of Adams/Solver Settings

You can display four types of debugging strip charts during an Interactive Simulation to help you debug
your simulation. The first three apply to any default Transient simulation, and the last one applies to a
static or quasi-static equilibrium simulation. The strip charts can provide you with insight into how the
Adams/Solver Integrator acts, particularly if you display strip charts of measures of modeling objects,
such as key forces and accelerations, side-by-side with the debugging strip charts.

To turn on the display of strip charts:

1. From the Settings menu, point to Solver, and then select Debugging.
2. At the bottom of the Solver Settings dialog box, select More.
3. From the Display Stripcharts area of the dialog box, select the type of strip chart you want to
display, as explained below. Learn about the Types of Strip Charts.
4. To help you interpret the solution-related information in the strip charts, see the DEBUG
command in the Adams/Solver online help.

Types of Strip Charts

The strip charts you can display are:
• Step Size - The Step Size strip chart displays the integrator step size (units of model time), as the
simulation progresses, on a logarithmic scale. The step size strip chart provides useful
information for debugging a model because, in general, the integrator step size becomes much
smaller in response to rapidly changing dynamics. Rapidly changing dynamics are, in some
cases, intentional (for example, contacts that engage or disengage over a short duration), but can
often be a symptom of modeling errors. For example, they can indicate that there is an incorrect
damping values in an IMPACT function that causes unrealistically high forces. It also can
indicate the use of discontinuous function expressions, such as an IF function.
For more information on the step size and how to control it, see Running an Interactive
Simulation.
• Iterations per Step - The Iterations per Step strip chart displays the number of iterations that
Adams/Solver needed to successfully progress to the next integration time step, over the course
of a simulation. These iterations occur during the corrector phase of the integration. For more
information on the phases in a dynamic simulation, see the INTEGRATOR statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.
The information in the Iterations per Step strip chart can provide you with several insights into
your model:
10 Adams/View
Using the Simulation Debugger

• If your simulation progresses with very few iterations at each time step, Adams/Solver is
having an easy time simulating your model. You can further increase performance or speed
by increasing the allowed maximum time step.
• If Adams/Solver requires many iterations for any particular step, it is likely encountering a
period of rapidly changing dynamics that can require corrective action as described for the
Step Size strip chart explained in the previous section.
• If you notice that Adams/Solver requires many iterations right from the beginning of a
simulation, it is likely that you have chosen an integration step size that is too large for the
dynamics in your model. You can obtain better performance if you choose a smaller time
step. For information on changing the time step, see Running an Interactive Simulation.
• Integrator order - The Integrator Order strip chart displays the order of the polynomial that
Adams/Solver uses during the predictor phase of integration. Adams/Solver uses a polynomial to
predict the future value of the state variables in an Adams model. In general, lower order
polynomials are required to successfully integrate more difficult portions of a simulation,
characterized either by nonlinearities or rapidly changing dynamics.
Similar to the Iterations per Step strip chart, if the Integrator Order strip chart shows the
consistent use of high-order (three or more) polynomials, you may be able to increase
performance by increasing the maximum allowed time step. If Adams/Solver consistently or
periodically uses low-order polynomials, it is symptomatic of a period of rapidly changing
dynamics that may require corrective action as described for the Step Size strip chart or the
integration step size may be too large for the dynamics in your model.
• Static Imbalance - The Static Imbalance strip chart displays the current imbalance in the
equilibrium equations that Adams/Solver computes during a static equilibrium simulation. A
static equilibrium simulation is an iterative process to compute a position in which your model
assumes a minimum energy configuration. Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium
Simulations.
The Static Imbalance strip chart displays a measure of how close the solution is coming to a
complete balance of the equilibrium equations at each equilibrium iteration, in units of your
selected force units.
You need to select Update Every Iteration to watch the iteration-by-iteration progress of an
equilibrium simulation. Learn about Setting Simulation Controls.
 Debugging Your Model 11
Setting Simulation Display

Setting Simulation Display

To help you view a simulation, you should be sure to set up Adams/View to:
• Update Every Iteration
• Make Icons Visible During Simulation
• Use Force Graphics

Update Every Iteration

You will find it helpful to set up the display of your simulation so you can view the simulation at different
times. For example, you need to select the option, Update Every Iteration, to watch the iteration-by-
iteration progress of an equilibrium simulation. For more information, see Setting Simulation Controls.

Make Icons Visible During Simulation

To help you monitor the behavior of modeling objects, you should turn on the display of screen icons.
You have a variety of options for how you want to set up the display. Learn about Setting Screen Icon
Display. Note, however, that turning on the display of screen icons significantly slows down your
simulation.

Use Force Graphics

Adams/View, by default, creates force and torque graphics that illustrate the magnitude and direction of
your applied force. It creates the graphics during a simulation and an animation. You will find these
graphics very helpful for debugging force elements, such as IMPACT functions. We recommend that you
do not turn off the graphics. Learn about Setting Up Force Graphics.
12 Adams/View
Possible Errors when Using Adams/View

Possible Errors when Using Adams/View

The above are some common errors in Adams/View.
• Errors in Geometric Associativity
• Errors as a Result of Mass Properties
• Errors from Incorrect Gravity and Inconsistent Units

For tips on how to build modeling objects so that you avoid problems when building or simulating your
model, see:
• Tips on Constraining Your Model
• Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Tips on Running an Interactive Simulation

Errors in Geometric Associativity

It is possible for you to create geometry or markers on the wrong part. If this occurs, your simulation
results can be invalid. If geometry belongs to the wrong part, it can change the mass properties and,
therefore, the dynamics of the model. If markers belong to the wrong part, you can get erroneous loads
or connections.

To ensure that you assigned geometry and markers to the correct parts, do one of the
following:

• Use the Model Topology by Connection tool to check the connections of your parts.
• Turn on icons during animations and watch carefully how markers move.

To assign geometry and markers to the correct part:

• Rename the markers so they belong to the correct part.

Errors as a Result of Mass Properties

Adams/View automatically calculates mass and inertia properties for geometric bodies that you create in
Adams/View. It does not, however, assign mass and inertia properties to geometric bodies that you
imported into Adams/View. For example, it does not assign mass and inertia to IGES geometry that you
imported.

To check and set mass and inertia:

• Use the Aggregate Mass command to perform a quick check of the total mass and inertia for
your entire model or any subset of parts. Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.
 Debugging Your Model 13
Possible Errors when Using Adams/View

• Use the Table Editor to display all parts in your model so you can perform a quick check of each
part's mass and inertia and quickly fix the individual part masses and inertia. Learn about Editing
Objects Using the Table Editor.
• Use the Modify command to check an individual part's mass and inertia and to change it as
appropriate. Learn about modifying mass and inertia for rigid bodies in Modifying Part
Properties.

Errors from Incorrect Gravity and Inconsistent Units

Make sure the magnitude and direction that you selected for gravity is appropriate for your model. In
addition, make sure that the units that you are using are consistent throughout the model for:
• Time
• Geometric elements
• Mass
• Stiffness and damping

For example, often you set your length units in meters but data for bushing stiffness are given in Newtons
per millimeters. In this case, you need to convert your units.
Also, be sure that the constants that you use in applied force expressions and user-written subroutines are
consistent with the current set of Adams/View units. Adams/View does not change the units of constants
if you change the default units settings.
In addition, make sure that you select a set of units that minimizes the difference in magnitude (scale) of
all of your input data. For example, if you are modeling the vibration of a 75-ton industrial press, you
might want to select mass = Kilopounds mass and displacement = inches.
If you divide the mass (about 150 klbm) by the expected vibration magnitude (1.5 inches), you obtain a
model scale number of approximately 100, which is well within the range for an easy numerical solution.
Using grams and meters in the same model would result in a scale number of about 109; other units would
be even worse. Poorly scaled models can present numerical difficulties to Adams/Solver, and you should
avoid them.
14 Adams/View
Possible Errors when Using Adams/View
Improving Your Model Designs
Using the Adams/View parameterization and parametric analysis tools, you can efficiently improve your
model design. The entries below explain how to improve your model using these tools. It assumes that
you have a moderate level of knowledge about Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization and that
you have access to in-depth references on them.
You can also perform more sophisticated design of experiments using Adams/Insight. Adams/Insight lets
you design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your mechanical system model.
It also provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your experiments so that you
can better understand how to refine and improve your model. For more information on Adams/Insight,
see Adams/Insight online help, if installed, or contact your MSC sales representative.

Parameterization Basics
2 Adams/View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

You can learn a great deal by running an Adams Simulation of a single configuration. You can learn even
more by manually changing your model, and running simulations again and again, but the process
quickly becomes tedious. Instead, you can use parameterization and the parametric tools that
Adams/View provides to automate your changes.
Using parameterization, you can make a single change and your entire model automatically updates.
Using Parametric analyses, you can automatically run a series of simulations to see the effects of varying
your model.

About Parameterizing Your Model

Manually updating your model can be time-consuming because rarely is it as simple as changing just one
modeling object. Frequently, other objects depend on the object you are changing, which forces you to
change those objects as well.
Therefore, the first step in creating a parameterized model is to select the critical design inputs that you
want to vary to perform "what if" studies. When you change a critical design input, dependent model
characteristics update automatically. You parameterize your model by creating parameters and defining
how the model depends on them. You can parameterize your model as you build it, or build it first and
then add the parametric relationships.
Adams/View provides several parameterization methods. For example, you can parameterize your model
using:
• Points
• Design variables

• Parameterization move tools (f(x) and f(  )that let you specify how one objects moves relative to
another object.
• Expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.

About Parametric Analysis Tools

Parametric analyses help you investigate the influence of design variables on model performance.
During a parametric analysis, Adams/View runs a series of simulations with different values for the
design variables and gives you feedback on the effects of the changes.
• Adams/View has three types of parametric analyses:
• Design study, which shows the effects of varying one design variable.
• Design of Experiments (DOE), which shows the effects of varying several design variables
simultaneously.
• Optimization, which adjusts design variables to minimize or maximize a particular aspect of
your model's performance.
 Parameterization Basics 3
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

The first step in using parametric analyses is to understand design studies, DOEs, and optimizations, what
they do for you, and how they can work together. Depending on your model and interest, you may use
one, two, or all three to explore your model.
In all cases, you start by deciding which design variables to vary and how to measure the performance of
your model. In the latch model from the guide, Getting Started Using Adams/View, for example, the
design variables are the coordinates of the pivot points, and the performance measure is the maximum
spring force during the simulation.
Learn more about the different types of parametric analyses you can run and how you can use them
together:
• About Design Studies
• About Design of Experiments
• About Optimization
• Using Design Study, DOE, and Optimization Together

About Design Studies

A design study analysis is useful for understanding one design variable. A design study varies a single
design variable across a range or series of values you specify, runs a simulation at each value, and reports
the performance measure for each simulation.
Using a design study analysis, you can determine:
• How the performance varies with changes in the design variable.
• The best value for the design variable among the values simulated.
• The approximate design sensitivity of the variable; that is, the rate of change of the performance
measure with respect to the variable.

About Design of Experiments

A Design of Experiments (DOE) helps you understand how several design variables interact. While
design study analyses vary only one design variable at a time, a DOE varies as many variables as you
want. You specify the range or series of values for each variable and which combinations of values you
want to simulate. Adams/View runs the simulations and records the performance measure for each run.
If your model is complex and involves many design variables, choosing the runs by intuition or trial-and-
error can give you results that are more confusing than they are helpful. If so, you should consider using
a structured approach based on DOE techniques.
The field of DOE (also called experimental design) offers a collection of procedures and statistical tools
for planning experiments and analyzing the results. Although DOE techniques were developed around
physical experiments, they work just as well with virtual experiments in Adams/View. We've designed
DOE analyses to make it easy to apply DOE techniques to your model. For more information on DOE
techniques, see About Design of Experiments.
Using a DOE and appropriate DOE techniques, you can:
4 Adams/View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

• Identify which design variables and combinations of design variables most affect the
performance of your model (screening).
• Control the effects of variations due to real-world manufacturing and operating conditions
(robust design or the Taguchi method).

About Optimization
An optimization adjusts design variables to minimize or maximize a performance measure. You can set
ranges on how far to vary the design variables and add general constraints to keep the optimized design
within overall limits. Using an optimization, you can find the best performing values for design variables.
For more information on optimization techniques, see About Optimization and Running Parametric
Analyses.

Using Design Study, DOE, and Optimization Together

• A design study, DOE, or optimization are useful individually, but combining several parametric
analyses can give you a fuller understanding of your model's performance. Design studies and
DOEs help you explore variations and trade-offs in performance, while optimizations try to find
a specific combination of design variable settings that achieve optimal performance.
• For example, you might start exploring your model with one or two design studies on design
variables that you know are important. The design studies show you the major effects of
changing your design and allow you to make a first guess at good values for these variables.
• You might then do a few more design studies or a screening DOE to find out if there are other
important design variables or interactions between design variables that you should consider.
• When you have determined which design variables are the most important, you can use
optimization to fine-tune their values.
• Once you have final values for the design variables, a design study or DOE can tell you what
happens when those values vary. This is important if you are concerned about variations in real-
world performance or you want to adjust your design to gain other advantages without
sacrificing performance.
• A design study or DOE can also help you set up an optimization. If you do not have good initial
values for the design variables, the optimization can fail, be slow, or may converge to a design
that is not an overall optimum. A design study or DOE over a range of values can help find good
initial values for optimization. It also can give you a polynomial approximation that you can
optimize separately to find a starting point for a full optimization.

Using Expressions
Expressions are the basis of all parameterization. You can specify most modeling data in Adams/View as
either a constant value or an expression that can change its value based on other objects and values in
your model. When you specify an expression, Adams/View stores the expression and automatically
updates the value whenever a value in the expression changes.
 Parameterization Basics 5
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

For example, when you specify the mass of a part, you can supply a constant value, such as 5.0, or an
expression, such as:
(2 * .model_1.part_1.mass)
Using the expression above, the new part mass is always twice the mass of part_1, even if you change
the mass of part_1.
Expressions are always enclosed in parentheses and can include:
• Constants
• Standard mathematical operators and functions
• Special Adams/View functions
• References to other object data in your model

You enter an expression directly in the text box for the value you want to parameterize. You can enter an
expression when you create the object or modify it later to use an expression.
Adams/View contains a Function Builder to help you construct expressions. You access the Function
Builder by displaying the shortcut menu in a text box that accepts an expression, as explained in the next
section.

To access the Function Builder:

• Right-click a text box where you want to place an expression, point to Parameterize, and then
select Expression Builder.
For more information on creating expressions and using the Function Builder, see Adams/View
Function Builder online help.

To remove an expression, do either of the following:

• Modify the object and enter a constant value in the text box.
• Place the cursor in a text box containing the expression and hold down the right mouse button.
From the shortcut menu that appears, point to Parameterize, and select Unparameterize.

Using Points
Points are the easiest way to parameterize the geometry of your model. Points let you specify important
locations once and build other modeling objects from them. When you move a point, the related objects
update automatically.
You create points using the Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack on the Main toolbox. For
information on points, also see the following sections:
• Building Parameterization into Your Model as You Create Parts
• Creating Points
6 Adams/View
Introducing Parameterization and Parametric Tools

You attach new modeling objects to points by selecting the points as you graphically construct the object.
When you build objects on points, Adams/View creates the necessary expressions for you.

Tip: Right-click near the point to display a list of all objects in the area and then select the
desired point from the list to ensure it gets selected.

You can also attach existing objects to a new point by using the Attach Near option when creating the
new point. In this case, Adams/View creates expressions, using the function LOC_RELATIVE, to attach
any nearby markers to the new point. With this option, you can parameterize model geometry, forces, and
constraints as you need to rather than creating all points first.
If you later try to move an object that is attached to a point, Adams/View warns you that doing so can
break the parameterization and asks you how you want to continue. The warning prevents you from
accidentally removing a relationship and also allows you to delete the relationship.
Usually you do not need to look at or understand the expressions that tie geometry to points. If you want
to create more complicated geometric relationships, however, understanding how points work can help
you write your own expressions.
If you draw a link between two points, for example, Adams/View locates markers at each end of the link
on top of the points. Adams/View also creates expressions to keep the markers tied to the points. If you
request information on one of the markers at the ends, you see something like the following for the
location of the marker:
Location: -150.0, 250.0, 0.0 (mm, mm, mm)
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO({0, 0, 0}, .model_1.ground.POINT_1))
The first line is the current value of the location of the marker relative to the link part. The second line is
the expression that Adams/View created to keep the marker at the point. If you change the location of the
point, Adams/View automatically evaluates the expression and computes a new location for the marker.
LOC_RELATIVE_TO is one of the Adams/View functions that lets you locate points and markers
relative to other objects in your model. For more on Adams/View functions, see the Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
 Parameterization Basics 7
Using the Parameterization Move Tools

Using the Parameterization Move Tools

You can also create geometric relationships using the parameterization move tools on the Move Toolstack
and palette:
• f(x) tool controls modeling object locations.

Note: The f(x) tool described in this section is not the same as the f(x) tool explained in the Table
Editor. They perform different operations. For more information on the f(x) tool in the
Table Editor, see Working with Cells in the Table Editor.

• f(  ) tool controls modeling object orientations.

For general information about the move tools, see Moving Objects Using the Move Tools.

f(x) Tool
Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> f(x) Tool

Ties the location of a modeling object to a point or marker. You can either superimpose the object on the
point or marker (collapse the two objects) or keep the object offset from a point or marker (maintain
current distance).
The following figures show the two options for parameterizing locations using f(x). The first figure
shows how you can use the f(x) tool to collapse a marker that belongs to a link on a point. In the figure,
Adams/View replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ( {0,0,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))

The second figures shows the effects of using the f(x) tool to maintain the position of a marker on the
link, relative to a point. If you set Adams/View to maintain their distance, when you move the point, the
marker moves so it and the point are always the same distance relative to each other. In the figure,
Adams/View replaces the specific location of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
8 Adams/View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools

(LOC_RELATIVE_TO ({0,10,0}, .model_1.part_1.POINT_1))

Using the F (x) Tool

To collapse an object onto another point or marker and lock it there:

1. From the Move Toolstack, select thef(x) Tool.
2. Select the option Collapse.
3. Select the object to lock.
4. Select the point or marker to which to lock.
Adams/View moves the object to the location of the point or marker and creates an expression in
the object to keep it superimposed on the point or marker. If you move the point or marker,
Adams/View moves the object to the same location.

To keep an object fixed relative to a point or marker:

1. From the Move tool stack, select the f(x) tool.
2. Position the objects as desired.
3. Select the option Maintain.
4. Select the object to lock.
5. Select the point or marker to which to lock.
Adams/View creates an expression in the object to maintain it at its current position relative to the point
or marker. If you move the point or marker, Adams/View moves the object to the same relative offset.
If you offset an object from a marker, Adams/View maintains the offset in the coordinate system of the
marker. This means that if you rotate the marker, Adams/View moves the object to the same position in
the marker’s coordinate system.
 Parameterization Basics 9
Using the Parameterization Move Tools

f(  ) Tool
Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> f(  ) Tool

Ties the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force to a marker. You have three options for tying the
orientation:
• Same As
• Along Axis
• In Plane

f(  ) - Same As
Same As is similar to using the f(x) Tool. It keeps the orientation of the object the same as a marker or
keeps the orientation offset from a marker. The Collapse and Maintain options are similar to those in the
f(x) tool, and the steps for parameterizing are the same as when using the f(x) tool.
The following two figures show the two options you have available for parameterizing locations using
Same As. The first figure shows how you can use the maintain option. The maintain option sets one
object so its current orientation is locked relative to a second object. In the figure, when you rotate
MAR_2, MAR_1 on the cylinder also rotates so it maintains its orientation relative to MAR_2. In the
figure, Adams/View replaces the orientation of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
(ORI_RELATIVE_TO ({90d, 90d, 0}, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_2))

The next figure shows how to use the collapse option. The collapse option keeps the orientation of two
objects the same. The figure shows that when you lock the orientation of MAR_1 to that of MAR_2, the
cylinder changes accordingly when you rotate MAR_2. In the figure, Adams/View replaces the
orientation of MAR_1 in the database with the expression:
10 Adams/View
Using the Parameterization Move Tools

(ORI_RELATIVE_TO ({0, 0, 0}, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_2))

f(  ) - Along Axis
Keeps an axis of a marker, constraint, or force pointed toward a marker. This is useful if a marker in your
model defines a unique axis used in a joint or force.
Along Axis only controls one axis of the object. Adams/View positions the object at an arbitrary angle
about the axis. If you need to completely control the orientation of the object, use the Same As or In Plane
options.
The following figure shows how you can set the alignment of the unique axis (z) of a revolute joint to that
of a marker using Along Axis so the joint always aligns to the marker. In the figure, Adams/View replaces
the orientation of the I and J markers that JOINT_1 references with the expression:
(ORI_ALONG_AXIS (.MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_4, .MODEL_1.PART_1.MAR_1,
“z”))

f(  ) - In Plane
Controls the orientation of a marker, constraint, or force by pointing one axis towards one marker and
another axis towards another marker. This completely determines the orientation because the third axis
 Parameterization Basics 11
Using the Parameterization Move Tools

must be perpendicular to the first two, with the positive direction based on the right-hand rule. In Plane
uses the function expression ORI_IN_PLANE.

Using the f(  ) Tool

To tie an axis of a marker, constraint, or force so it points along the axis of another point or
marker:
1. From the Move Toolstack, select the f(  ) tool.
2. Select the Along Axis option.
3. In the settings container, select the axis of the object to control (X, Y, or Z). For example, select
Z to control the z-axis of the object.
4. Now define two objects (markers or design points) that define the vector to use for the specified
axis. These are the axis start and end locations. The selected object can be one of these two
locations.
Adams/View rotates the object so that the axis you selected points toward the marker you
selected, and creates an expression to keep the axis directed at the marker. If you move the marker,
Adams/View rotates the object to realign the axis with the marker.

To tie two axes of a marker, constraint, or force to a plane defined by three markers:
1. From the Move tool stack, select the f(  ) tool.
2. Select the option In Plane.
3. In the settings container, set the first and second axes of the object to control (X, Y, or Z).
4. Select the marker, constraint, or force to control.
5. Now define three locations to define the plane:
• The marker defining the axis start location.
• The marker defining the axis end location.
• A final location to complete the plane.

Adams/View rotates the object so that the first axis points toward the first point or marker, and the second
axis points as closely as possible towards the second point or marker. Adams/View also creates an
expression to keep the axes directed at the markers. If you move either of the markers, Adams/View
rotates the object to realign the axis with the marker.
Depending on the locations that you selected, it may not be possible for both axes to pass through the
locations. Adams/View orients the object so that the first axis passes through the first location, and the
plane defined by the two axes passes through the second location. This means that the second axis comes
as close as possible to the second location, but may not pass through it.
12 Adams/View
Using Design Variables

Using Design Variables

Design variables let you invent your own independent parameters and tie modeling objects to them. For
example, if you have three cylinders in your model that you want to keep the same length, you can create
a design variable called cylinder_length and control all three cylinder lengths with the design variable.
Design variables also let you organize the critical parameters in your design into a concise list of values
that you can easily review and modify. In addition, you can use Parametric analyses to automatically
execute a series of simulations that vary your design variables.
Design variables are Adams/View variable objects. Variable objects are general-purpose places to store
data or expressions. A design variable is a variable you use specifically to parameterize your model. This
chapter and the parameterization tools use the term design variable. Some tools, such as the Command
Navigator and the Table Editor, apply to all variables, however. In those contexts, you see just the term
variable. It it applies to all variables, including design variables.
Also see Updating Variables.

Creating Design Variables

You create Design variables using the Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box or the Create Design
Variable command that appears in the shortcut menu of any text box that accepts a design variable.
• The Create Design Variable dialog box lets you select the type of design variable you want and
assign a value to the variable. It does not place the variable in your model where it is to be used,
however.
• The Create Design Variable command on the shortcut menu lets you create a design variable and
places the variable in your model where it will be used, all in one operation. It uses default
values for your variable. You must modify the variable to change its type or name.
You should choose whichever method is most convenient:
• Creating Design Variables using a Dialog Box
• Creating a Design Variable using the Shortcut Menu

Creating Design Variables using a Dialog Box

The following procedure explains how to create a design variable using a dialog box. You can create a
design variable of the following types: real, integer, string, and object. For real and integer variables, you
can also specify information about how to vary the value during a parametric analysis. These options are
described in Controlling Variable Values.

To create a design variable using the Create Design Variable dialog box:
1. From the Build menu, point to Design Variable, and then select New.
The Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box appears.
 Parameterization Basics 13
Using Design Variables

2. In the Name text box, enter the name of the design variable. Adams/View creates a default name
for you. Select the type of design variable to create.
3. If you selected the type real, optionally select the type of units.
4. Enter a standard value for the design variable, and set any other options as explained in the
Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box.
5. Select OK.
Adams/View creates the design variable.
Now that you've created a design variable, you'll need to reference it in your model. You can enter the
design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or you can type it into a text
box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more complex expression using the design
variable. When you reference your design variable, Adams/View places parentheses () around the
variable because you are creating a simple expression that references the value of the design variable.

To reference a design variable in your model:

1. Display the text box containing the value you want to parameterize:
• If you are creating a new object, select a tool from the Main toolbox to display a settings
container or display the appropriate create dialog box.
• If you are parameterizing an existing object, modify the object to display its modify dialog
box.
• If you are using the Table Editor, select the cell to parameterize and place your cursor in the
Input text box.
2. Right-click the text box representing the value to be parameterized, point to Parameterize, and
then select Reference Design Variable.
Adams/View displays the Database Navigator.
3. Select the design variable you just created, and then select OK.
Adams/View inserts an expression such as (.my_model.my_design_var) into the text box.
4. Create or modify the object as appropriate.
Adams/View creates or modifies the object using your design variable for the value you selected.

Creating a Design Variable using the Shortcut Menu

You can use the Create Design Variable command on the shortcut menu to create a design variable and
place the appropriate expression in a text box all in one operation. Adams/View uses the value currently
in the text box as the standard value.

To create a design variable using the Create Design Variable option:

1. Display the text box for the value you want to parameterize.
• If you are creating a new object, select a tool from the Main toolbox to display a settings
container or display the appropriate create dialog box.
• If you are parameterizing an existing object, display its modify dialog box.
14 Adams/View
Using Design Variables

• If you are using the Table Editor, select the cell to parameterize, and then place your cursor in
the Input text box.
2. Enter the desired value for the variable into the text box, if necessary.
3. Right-click the text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Create Design Variable.
Adams/View creates a new design variable with a default name and the value that was in the text
box and inserts an expression such as (.my_model.DV_1) into the text box.
4. Create or modify the object as appropriate.
Adams/View creates or modifies the object using your design variable for the value you selected.

Modifying Design Variables

You can modify a design variable, such as change its standard value. You can use the Create/Modify
Design Variable dialog box or the Table Editor.

To modify a design variable using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. From the Build menu, select Design Variable, and then point to Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the design variable you want to modify, and then select OK.
Adams/View displays the Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box and loads the current
properties for the design variable you selected.
3. Change the properties as desired, following the instructions in the Create/Modify Design Variable
dialog box.
4. Select OK.
If you changed the value of the design variable, Adams/View immediately updates any objects
that refer to the design variable.

To modify a design variable using the Table Editor:

1. From the Tools menu, select Table Editor.
The Table Editor appears.
2. To display the variables in your model, at the bottom of the Table Editor window, select the
Variable check box.
3. Change the properties of any design variable as desired. Learn about Editing Objects Using the
Table Editor.
4. Select OK.
 Parameterization Basics 15
Using Design Variables

If you changed the value of a design variable, Adams/View immediately updates any objects that
refer to the design variable.

Note: By default, the Table Editor displays only variables of the type real in your model. You can
display other types of variables, such as string, object, or integer, and control the columns
that are displayed using the Filters button, which displays the Variables Table Editor Filters
dialog box. Learn about Setting Types of Objects Displayed in the Table Editor.

Using Design Variables with Points

As explained in Using Points, points are an easy way to parameterize the geometry of your model. To
vary a point in a parametric analysis, however, you must create Design variables for one or more
coordinates of the point.

To parameterize a point coordinate:

1. Create the point as described in Creating Points.
Modify the point.
Adams/View displays the Table Editor showing the points in your model.
2. Select the cell for the coordinate you want to parameterize.
Adams/View displays the cell value in the Input text box.
3. Right-click the Input text box, point to Parameterize, point to Create Design Variable, and then
select Real.
Adams/View creates a new design variable with a default name and the value that was in the text
box and inserts an expression, such as (.my_model.DV_1), into the text box.
4. Select OK.
Adams/View modifies the point to use the design variable as the coordinate value.
16 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

Preparing for Parametric Analyses

Before running a parametric analysis, you may need to make some changes or additions to your model.

Controlling Variable Values

Before you run a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE), you must specify a range of values or
list of values for each design variable used in the analysis. These determine the values that Adams/View
uses during the design study or DOE simulations. These values are called the levels of the variable.
Before you run an Optimization analysis, you can optionally specify a range of values to keep design
variable values within particular limits.
If you specify only a value range (an upper and lower limit), then a design study and DOE use equally
spaced levels starting from the lower limit and ending with the upper limit. You specify the number of
levels to use when you run the design study or DOE.
If you want to use unequally spaced values or always use the same set of values, you can specify a list of
the values for the design study and DOE to use. By default, the list of values takes precedence over the
range in a design study or DOE.
If you specify a range, an optimization analysis only varies the variable value within that range, by
default. An optimization ignores a list of values.
For each design variable, you also specify whether the range and allowed values (if any) are absolute
(literal) values, increments relative to the standard value, or percentage increments relative to the
standard value. For example, if the value of the variable is 5, and you enter any of the following, they all
give an actual range of 4 to 6:
• Absolute range of 4 to 6
• Relative range of -1 to +1
• Percent relative range of -20 to +20

Adams/View may have set a default range when you created the design variable, so you may not need to
change the variable to run a parametric analysis. It is a good idea, however, to review the settings for a
variable before using it in a parametric analysis.
A good way to start is to set the variable range to include values you think are interesting and realistic for
your design. Using a range gives you the most flexibility in selecting the number of values to use in a
design study or DOE and it also keeps the optimization analysis from changing the variable to an
unrealistic value.
If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the variable within that fixed
range. Otherwise, use relative or percent relative limits to include a reasonable amount above and below
your initial value. Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the variable, so if you
change the value of the variable, the limits automatically change with it.
You control design variable values using the:
 Parameterization Basics 17
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

• Create/Modify Design Variable dialog box

• Table Editor

To control variable values using the Modify Design Variable dialog box:
1. From the Build menu, point to Design Variable, and then select Modify.
Adams/View displays the Database Navigator.
2. Select the design variable, and then select OK.
Adams/View displays the Modify Design Variable dialog box and loads the current properties for
the design variable you selected.
3. Set the Value Range option menu to absolute, relative, or percent-relative limits and enter the
limits in the Min/Max or +/- Delta text boxes. Adams/View applies the Value Range setting to
both the range limits and the allowed values, if any.
4. If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select Allow Optimization
to ignore range.

Note: Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range also disables the range for a design study and
DOE, however, so you should turn off this option when you are preparing for a design study
or DOE. If you try to start a design study or DOE while this option is selected, Adams/View
issues an error (unless you have also entered a list of values).

5. If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and enter the values in the
text box that appears. To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and DOE,
select the Allow Design Study to ignore list check box. By selecting Allow Design Study to
ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range and the list of values without
re-entering the list each time.

Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you enter. For example, if you
selected a Value Range of percent relative, then Adams/View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.

6. Select OK.

To control variable values using the Table Editor:

1. From the Tools menu, select Table Editor.
The Table Editor appears.
2. To display the variables in your model, at the bottom of the Table Editor window, select Variable.
3. Display all the variable properties for design variables:
• Select Filters.
18 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

• In the dialog box that appears, select Range, Allowed Values, and Delta Type.
• Select OK.
The Table Editor displays columns for Range, Use_Range, Allowed_Values,
Use_Allowed_Values, and Delta_Type.

Note: The Table Editor column headings are based on the Adams/View command language and
are more concise than the dialog box labels.

4. Change the properties of a design variable as explained the table below for the columns you
displayed, and then select OK. Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
Options for Controlling Design Variables

The column: Does the following:

Range Contains both the upper and lower limits.
Use_Range Turns the range on and off. Turning the range off allows an optimization to use
any value, but also hides the range from a design study or DOE. If you try to
start a design study or DOE with the range turned off, Adams/View issues an
error unless you have also entered a list of values.
Allowed_Values Contains the list of allowed values, if any.
Use_Allowed_Values Turns the allowed values on and off. Turning the allowed values off allows a
design study and DOE to use the range without losing the list of values.
Delta_Type Sets absolute, relative, or percent-relative range limits and allowed values. You
can enter absolute, relative, or percent_relative.

Computing a Measure of Performance (Objective)

To run a parametric analysis, you must measure the performance of your design and reduce it to a single
value that Adams/View can compute for each simulation. In an optimization, this is called the objective
function or objective. In a design of experiment (DOE), this is called the response characteristic or
response. We will use the term objective for all types of parametric analyses.
Learn more about finding and creating objectives:
• Finding a Good Objective to Measure
• Using Measures
• Using Objective Objects

Finding a Good Objective to Measure

Many useful objectives are easy to define. You may want to minimize the maximum loads on one or
several components to improve product durability. You may want to minimize the time to run through a
 Parameterization Basics 19
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

work cycle for a piece of machinery. Finding a good objective, however, is not always easy. How do you
quantify a goal such as: Keep this component in position during a disturbance? Depending on your
application, it might mean:
• Keep the position from changing abruptly.
• Keep the maximum movement small.
• Return the component to position quickly.

In addition, improving one aspect can hurt others. It may take you some thought and experimentation to
formulate the right objective for your needs.
On the other hand, if you are concerned about aspects of performance such as noise, wear, or operator
comfort, you may need to do some investigation to be able to relate the objective to quantities you can
measure in Adams/View. Just as you model the mechanical aspects of your system, you may need to
develop a model of the performance of your system.
In many cases, the System elements (differential equations, transfer functions, and so on) can be helpful
in numerically integrating, filtering, or transforming model outputs into more useful objectives. Learn
more about System Elements.

Using Measures for Objectives

Once you have determined what to compute, you must create either a measure or an objective object to
compute the objective value for each Simulation.
The easiest way to compute an objective is to use a measure. When you run a design study, DOE, or
optimization, you select the measure and specify whether to use the minimum, maximum, average, or
last simulated value of the measure as the objective value.
Using measures, you can easily reference model outputs and do many types of computations on model
outputs or other measures. The minimum, maximum, average, and last options allow you to select most
points of interest from the measure's transient data. Learn About Measures.

Using Objective Objects

If a measure is not flexible enough, you can create an objective object instead. Objective objects have
options for processing simulation results and are valuable when you want to do complex or multi-step
computations on model outputs. The following sections explain the types of objectives you can create
and how to create them:
• Types of Objectives
• Creating an Objective Object
20 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

Types of Objectives
Adams/View gives you four options for the type of objective to create:

This type of function: Is the following:

Minimum, maximum, average, This is the same as directly specifying the measure and value of
last value, absolute minimum, and interest. The only advantage to doing this with an objective,
absolute maximum of a measure rather than directly, is that you can specify more than one
objective for a DOE. The DOE allows any number of objective
objects, but only one measure. So if you want to compute more
than one objective value, you must create objective objects for
each value.
Minimum, maximum, average, or This is similar to the measure option, but lets you reference any
last value of a result set Adams/Solver output data, such as data from a request. You enter
component just the name of the Result set component, for example req1.x.
Adams/View uses the result set component in the analysis for
which Adams/View is computing the objective function. Learn
more about result set components.

This is similar to the measure option, but lets you reference any
Adams/Solver output data, such as data from a request. You enter
just the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
Adams/View uses the result set component in the analysis for
which Adams/View is computing the objective function. For
more on result set components, see About Simulation Output.

For example, if you wanted to monitor the maximum height

attained by a certain point during a simulation, you would create
a request to output the position of the point. If the request is REQ1
and the z component is the height, you would create an objective
as follows:

result_set_component = "REQ1/Z"
output_characteristic = maximum
 Parameterization Basics 21
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

This type of function: Is the following:

Adams/View function Adams/View applies the specified Adams/View function object
to the simulation results allowing you to compute any scalar
function of the model outputs. For example, this is useful for
combining scalar values from different outputs, such as summing
the maximums from several outputs.

The function must have one argument, which is an analysis object

containing the results. Adams/View evaluates the function with
the argument set to the name of the actual analysis for which
Adams/View is computing the objective.

You can create a function object through the Command Navigator

or use the command Function Create on the shortcut menu that
appears in the Function text box of the Create Objective Design
dialog box when you right-click the text box.

The following are two examples of creating objective functions.

Example 1: Function of Analysis Data

To compute the maximum height of a point using a function, first

create a request as shown on the previous page for result set
components, and then create a function using the following:

function_name = FUN1
text_of_expressions =
"max(analysis.req1.z.values)"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Then, create the objective as explained in Creating an Objective
Object.

To compute the objective value, ADAM/View evaluates function

FUN1, substituting the name of the actual analysis being
evaluated. In this case, the expression for FUN1 computes the
maximum z value reported in request REQ1.
22 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

This type of function: Is the following:

Example 2: Function of Model Data

If you want to measure model data in an objective, you can create

a function that includes references to model data. For example, to
create a constraint to limit the total mass of parts and par5 to 50,
first create a function as shown below:

function_name = FUN1
text_of_expression =".mod1.par4.mass +
.mod1.par5.mass - 50.0"
argument_names = analysis
type = real
Note that you still specify one argument named analysis, even
when you do not use analysis data.

Then, create the constraint as explained in Creating an Objective

Object.
Adams/View variable and macro Adams/View executes the macro you specify and uses the
resulting value of the specified variable as the objective value.
Entering a macro and variable lets you to execute a set of
Adams/View commands to compute the objective, which gives
you access to any capability in Adams/View, as well as external
utilities through the System command.

The macro must have one parameter, and the parameter must be
named analysis. Adams/View invokes the macro with parameter
analysis set to the name of the analysis for which Adams/View is
computing the objective. Your macro must perform the
computations, and put the resulting objective value into the
specified variable. For more information on creating macros and
parameters, see About Creating Macros.
 Parameterization Basics 23
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

This type of function: Is the following:

The following is an example of a variable and macro:

output_control create request &

request_name = .model_1.req4 &
adams_id = 1 &
output_type = displacement &
i_marker_name = .model_1.PART_3.MARKER_9 &
j_marker_name = .model_1.ground.MARKER_6
variable create
variable=.model_1.macro_objective_value &
real_value = 0.0
macro create macro=.objective_macro &
commands = "!$analysis:t=analysis", &
"variable modify &", &
"
variable=.model_1.macro_objective_value &", &
" real_value=(eval($analysis.req4.x[1] -
6))"
optimize objective create &
objective_name = .model_1.OBJ_mac &
variable_name =
.model_1.macro_objective_value &
macro_name = .objective_macro &
comments = "macro-base objective"

Creating an Objective Object

To create an objective object:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Design Objective, and then select New.
The Create Design Objective dialog box appears.
2. Set Definition by to the type of objective function that you want to use.

Note: Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required to do so.
You can create an objective that depends only on the model data, such as overall
weight or size. You can then use Adams/View to vary, or even optimize, the design
variables and immediately see the results on the model.

In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the objective, and ignore
the analysis argument or parameter that Adams/View supplies. Because you do not
need simulation results, you should also create a dummy simulation script that does
nothing (see Creating a Simulation Script). Then, Adams/View repeatedly sets the
variables and evaluate the objective, but does not run any simulations.

3. Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and variable. If you are
entering a result set component, enter the name of the result set and component, for example
req1.x.
24 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

4. If you are using a measure or result set component, set the Design Objective's value is the option
menu to the selected value.
5. Select OK.

Creating Constraints (Optimization Only)

If you are preparing for an Optimization, you can create constraint objects to limit the changes that the
optimizer can make. Often an optimization finds a configuration that optimizes the objective you
provided, but is unrealistic because it violates overall design constraints such as weight, size, speed, or
force limits.
To avoid results that violate the design constraints, you can create constraints for the optimization. The
optimization analysis improves the objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.

Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable. See Controlling Variable Values.

Each constraint object creates an inequality constraint. The optimization keeps the value of the constraint
less than or equal to zero. You can create an equality constraint, in effect, by creating a pair of constraint
objects, each the negative of the other.
Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall
size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or
macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams/View supplies. Instead,
compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.

To create a constraint object:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Design Constraint, and then select New.
2. Follow the procedures for creating an objective object as explained in Creating an Objective
Object.

Creating a Simulation Script

Before running a parameteric analysis, you must create a simulation script. To know more about this, read
about creating scripts and preforming a scripted simulation.

As those sections explain, there are three types of scripts: simple run, Adams/View, and Adams/Solver.
You can use a script of any type for a parametric analysis. An Adams/View script can be particularly
useful for complex parametric analysis.
An Adams/View script usually contains one or more Adams/View simulation commands, but it can
contain other commands as well. For example, if you want to activate or deactivate portions of your
model before each simulation you can include those commands before the simulation commands. If you
 Parameterization Basics 25
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

want to do some post-processing of results before computing the objective, you can add those commands
after the simulation commands.
If you do not need a simulation to evaluate your model, you can even use a script with no simulation
commands or no commands at all. Perhaps your objective is a function of model data only and you want
to see the effects of the design variables on the model itself. In this case, you can use a dummy script with
only a blank line or comments in it. In addition, if you want to evaluate your model with an outside
program, your script can contain commands to write data, run an external utility, and read results back
into Adams/View.

Ensuring Accurate Run Results

It may seem strange at first, but Adams/View can introduce seemingly random variations in results from
run to run that affect the results of your parameteric analysis. This can lead to erratic results from any
parametric analysis and poor performance from the Optimization analysis in particular.
Even with the correct setup of simulation parameters, when you change a design variable even a small
amount, you can trigger other variations that obscure the actual effects of the design variable change.
An optimization is especially sensitive to these variations because it generates small differences itself to
approximate derivatives. By default, an optimization perturbs design variables by .1% to compute
derivatives. If the resulting output is not consistent to at least four digits, the derivative is inaccurate and
the optimization flounders or fails.
It is important to understand these variations and minimize them as much as possible. Three common
sources of unexpected variations are:
• Adams/Solver error tolerances that are too large.
• Output steps that are too large.
• Simulations that end too soon.

You should first check your settings for Adams/Solver error tolerances, such as digits of precision under
Dynamic on the Solver Settings dialog box. An error tolerance that is acceptable for a single run may not
accurately show the effects of a small design variable change. When Adams/View changes a design
variable, the results of the new simulation are still within the tolerance you specified, but if that tolerance
is large compared to the change due to the design variable, then comparing the results may be useless.
Learn about Setting Simulation Controls.
If your objective is the minimum or maximum value of an output, check the size of your output steps.
Adams/View reports the smallest or largest value seen at an output step. If your output step size is too
large, the reported value may not be accurate and may suddenly jump from output point to output point
as the model varies, giving discontinuous results.
Make sure that there are enough output steps to capture the peak or valley of the output. If not, you can
decrease the step size for the whole simulation, or if the minimum or maximum point falls in a predictable
time range, you can run the simulation in several parts and decrease the step size only in the portion
containing the minimum or maximum.
26 Adams/View
Preparing for Parametric Analyses

If your objective is the last value of an output, check to make sure the simulation is not ending too soon.
If the output should reach a steady state, make sure that it really converges to an accurate value for all
simulations.
In all these cases, you may need to experiment to find the right setting. For example, you might try a
design study over a small range and check if the response is smooth and fairly linear. If not, you may need
to adjust one or more of these settings.
 Parameterization Basics 27
Running Parametric Analyses

Running Parametric Analyses

After preparing your model, you are ready to run a parametric analysis.

Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis

The first steps in running a parametric analysis are the same for all types of parametric analyses. Follow
the instructions below to begin a parametric analysis and then follow the instructions at the end for
completing the different types of parametric analysis.

Note: You may want to change the display, output, and optimizer options before you run a
parametric analysis. Learn more about Optimization Settings.

To begin a design study, DOE, or optimization analysis:

1. From the Simulate menu, select Design Evaluation.
The Design Evaluation Tools dialog box appears.
2. In the Model text box, enter the name of the model to analyze.
3. In the Simulation Script text box, enter the name of the simulation script to use. Learn about
Creating a Simulation Script.
4. Select either Measure or Objective to define the type of objective you are using. Learn about
computing a measure of performance (objective).
• If you selected Measure, select Last, Minimum, Maximum, or Average from the pull-down
menu, and enter the name of the measure in the text box.
• If you selected Objective, enter the name of the objective in the Objective text box.
Optimizations are limited to one objective. You can monitor more than one objective in a
design study or DOE, however, by entering more than one name separated by a comma.
5. Select Design Study, Design of Experiments, or Optimization. For a comparison of the types
of parametric analyses, see About Parametric Analysis Tools.
6. Follow the instructions in the following to complete the parametric analyses:
• Completing a Design Study
• Completing a DOE
• Completing an Optimization

Tip: Before running the parametric analysis, you can preview it by selecting Preview. Preview
shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable. It displays an alert
box asking you if you want to pause after each configuration. Select YES to pause.
28 Adams/View
Running Parametric Analyses

Completing a Design Study

Learn about how to complete a Design study and how Adams/View stores the results of an analysis:
• Completing and Executing a Design Study
• Analysis Results

Completing and Executing a Design Study

To complete the information for a design study and execute the analysis:
1. Begin the analysis as explained in Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis.
2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the
design variable that you want to vary.

Note: You cannot enter more than one design variable in the text box. If you need to enter more
than one design variable, then perform a DOE.

3. If you specified only a range for the design variable, enter the number of levels (values) you want
to use in the Default Levels text box.
4. Select Start.
Adams/View runs a simulation for each level of the design variable. When the simulations are
done, Adams/View returns the variable to its original value.
• If you specified only a range for the design variable, Adams/View uses equally spaced levels
across the range. You specify the number of levels in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for the design variable, Adams/View runs a simulation using
each value, ignoring the Default Levels text box.
For more information about variable ranges and values, see Controlling Variable Values.

Analysis Results
Adams/View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a
result set named Design_Study_Results. The result set contains the following components:

• Trial, which contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
• Component with the same name as the design variable, which contains the values used for the
variable for each run.
 Parameterization Basics 29
Running Parametric Analyses

• For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure,
which contains the values of the performance measure for each run.

Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already exists from a previous parametric analysis, Adams/View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn how to save
results permanently at Saving Results.

Completing a DOE
Learn how to complete a Design of experiments (DOE) analysis and how Adams/View stores the results
of the analysis:
• Completing and Executing a DOE
• Analysis Results

Note: The enhanced DOE capabilities found in Adams/Insight, provide you with more
sophisticated experiments and improved results in an easy-to-use interface. For more
information, see the Adams/Insight online help, or contact your MSC sales representative.

Completing and Executing a DOE

To complete the information for a DOE and execute the analysis:

1. Begin the analysis as explained in Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis.
2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the
design variables that you want to vary.
3. If you specified only a range for one or more of the design variables, enter the number of levels
(values) you want to use for those variables in the Default Levels text box.
4. Set Trails defined by to Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input.
• If you selected built-in techniques, use DOE Technique to select the technique. If you want
to check that the variables have the same number of levels and display the required number of
runs, select Check Variables, Guess # of Runs.
• If you selected direct input, enter the number of trials (simulations) and the trial matrix.
• If you selected file input, enter the name of the file containing the trial matrix.
5. Select Start.
Adams/View runs a simulation for each trial that the DOE technique or trial matrix defines. When
the simulations are done, Adams/View returns the variables to their original values.
30 Adams/View
Running Parametric Analyses

The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the number of simulations and the combination of
variable values to use for each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates
every possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels each,
Adams/View runs nine simulations. For more information on the DOE techniques and entering
your own trial matrix, see About Design of Experiments.
The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the range or list of values
you defined for the variable.
• If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams/View selects from equally spaced
values across the range. You enter the number of values in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View selects directly from those
values, ignoring the value in the Default Levels text box.
• For more information about variable ranges and values, see Controlling Variable Values.

Analysis Results
Adams/View creates an analysis named Last_Multi under your model. The analysis contains a result set
named DOE_Results. The result set contains:
• Component named Trial that contains the number of each run (one through the number of runs).
• For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable, which contains the
values used for the variable in each run.
• For each measure or objective, a component with the same name as the objective or measure,
which contains the values of the performance measure for each run.

Note: If analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis, Adams/View
deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. For instructions on
permanently saving previous results, see Saving Results.

Completing an Optimization
Learn how to complete an Optimization and how Adams/View stores the results of an analysis:
• Completing and Executing an Optimization
• Analysis Results

Note: If you simultaneously run optimizations of two Adams/View models, from the same
working directory, Adams/View may crash.

Completing and Executing an Optimization

To complete the information for an optimization and execute the analysis:

1. Begin the analysis as explained in Beginning a Design Study, DOE, or Optimization Analysis.
 Parameterization Basics 31
Running Parametric Analyses

2. In the Design Variable text box in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, enter the name of the
design variables to vary.
3. If you want to automatically save the original values of the design variables before starting the
optimization analysis, select Auto. Save.
4. If you want to immediately save the current values of the design variables, select Save.
5. Set Goal to Maximize or Minimize.
6. If you want to add constraints, select Constraints and enter the names of the constraints in the
text box that appears.
7. Select Start.
If you selected Maximize as the goal, Adams/View adjusts the design variable values to increase
the measure or objective as much as possible. If you selected Minimize, Adams/View reduces the
objective as much as possible.
If you specified value ranges on any of the design variables, Adams/View increases or decreases
the objective as much as possible without exceeding the value limits. For more information about
variable ranges, see Controlling Variable Values.
If you specified constraints, Adams/View increases or decreases the objective as much as possible
without violating the constraints. For information about using constraints to control the
optimization, see Creating Constraints (Optimization Only).
Adams/View iteratively adjusts the design variable values, attempting to improve the model
performance with each iteration. Adams/View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a
constraint or limit on a variable value. Therefore, the model performance does not necessarily
improve with each iteration. At each iteration, Adams/View runs several simulations to
approximate derivatives and converge on the next iteration.
The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find without violating
constraints or limits. Adams/View normally leaves the design variables set to the optimized
values. If you interrupt the analysis or Adams/View encounters an error during the analysis,
Adams/View resets the variables to their original values.
If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto. Save check box or
used the Save button to save the original values, you can select the Restore button to return the
variables to their original values.

Analysis Results
Adams/View creates an analysis object named Last_Multi under the current model in the Modeling
database. The analysis contains a result set named Optimization_Results. The result set contains:

• Component named Iteration that contains the number of each iteration (one through the number
of iteration). Iteration zero is the initial model configuration.
• For each design variable, a component with the same name as the variable that contains the
values used for the variable for each iteration.
32 Adams/View
Running Parametric Analyses

• Component with the same name as the objective or measure that contains the values of the
performance measure for each iteration.

Note: If the analysis Last_Multi already existed from a previous parametric analysis,
Adams/View deletes the previous results and replaces them with the new results. Learn
about Saving Results.
 Parameterization Basics 33
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

After running a parametric analysis, you can examine the results in tabular or plotted format. You can
also save or delete results or update your model to match one of the runs. You can perform these
operations using the tools at the bottom of the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box.

Saving Results
By default, Adams/View overwrites the current results if you perform another parametric analysis. You
can automatically and permanently save all parametric results using the Solver Settings dialog box. Learn
About Setting Simulation Controls. You can also save a single set of results using the Save Design Results
to Database tool at the bottom of the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box.

Note: Be sure to save your modeling database after you save the parametric analysis results.
Learn about Saving Modeling Database.

To save parametric analysis results:

1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Save Design Results to Database tool
.
The Save Design Evaluation Results dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the analysis.
3. If you want Adams/View to add a unique number at the end of the name, select Auto-Increment
Name.
4. Select OK.
Adams/View copies the current parametric results to a new analysis with the name you specify.

Deleting Results
To delete a single set of simulation results:
1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, right-click the Save Design Results to Database
tool to display its Tool stack.
2. From the tool stack, select the Delete Results from Database tool .
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the names of the Simulations that you want to delete from your Modeling database. Learn
About the Database Navigator.
4. Select OK.
34 Adams/View
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

Generating Plots
You can plot parametric results in the following ways:

Plotting using: Does the following:

Strip charts By default, Adams/View creates strip charts of the following:

• Objective versus variable value for a Design study.

• Objective versus trial for a Design of experiments (DOE).
• Objective versus iteration number for an Optimization.
Adams/View also saves curves on any displayed measure for each trial or
iteration. You turn these on or off by doing the following in the Solver
Settings dialog box:

1. At the top of the Solver Settings dialog box, set Category to Display.
2. Select More.
3. In the Design Evaluation Display area, select Chart objective and
Save Curve.
For more information, press F1 when the Solver Settings dialog box is
active.
Manual plots You can also transfer the strip chart to the plotting window for further use,
or you can use the Results option in the plotting window to plot the
parametric results directly. For more information on creating and modifying
plots using the plotting window, see Transferring a Strip Chart to
Adams/PostProcessor, and the Adams/PostProcessor online help.
 Parameterization Basics 35
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

Plotting using: Does the following:

Automatic plots You can also automatically generate detailed plots using the Plot Results
tool. The plots are similar to the strip charts of the measure and objective, but
Adams/View adds appropriate titles, legends, and labels.

To automatically plot results of a parametric analysis:

1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Plot Results
tool .
Adams/View displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box.
2. In the Result Set text box, enter the name of the parametric analysis
result set you want to plot.
3. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus the variable
value, trial number, or iteration number, select Measure/Objective
vs. Run.
4. To generate a plot of the measure or objectives versus time with a
curve for each trial or iteration, select Measure vs. Time For All
Runs. If you use this option, you must have specified a measure or an
objective that refers to a measure or result set component (not a
macro or function). In addition, you must have saved the results from
the individual runs. For information on saving results from individual
runs, see Setting Simulation Controls.
5. Select OK.
Adams/View generates one or two plots and displays the plotting
window showing the last plot.

Generating a Table
You can set up Adams/View to create a table that contains the following:
• Description of the model.
• measure or objective.
• Constraints (if any).
• Design variables used in the analysis.
• Table of the objective, constraint, and variable values for each trial or iteration.

For a Design study, the table also includes a column of approximate design sensitivities for each trial.
The approximate design sensitivity is the average of the sensitivity with respect to the preceding trial and
36 Adams/View
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

the sensitivity with respect to the following trial, as shown in the formula below:

where:
• O - Objective value
• V - Design variable value
• i - Iterations

Note: For the first trial, Adams/View computes the value from the changes between the first and
second trial. For the last trial, it computes the value from the changes between the next-to-
last trial and the last trial.

You can control the format of the numbers in the table, the width of the columns, and the precision of the
numbers. For the format of the numbers, you can select:
• Automatic - Selects either exponential or fixed, depending on the size of the number and the
column width. If you select automatic format, the value you enter for the precision of the
numbers sets the overall number of digits.
• Exponential or fixed - The value you enter for the precision sets the number of digits past the
decimal point.

Note: You can set Adams/View to automatically display a table at the end of a parametric
analysis. Setting Simulation Controls.

To generate a table of results:

1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Tabular Report tool .
Adams/View displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box.
2. In the Result Set text box, enter the name of the parametric analysis result set you want to display.
3. Enter values for column width and precision, and select the format that you want to use to control
the numeric format of the table.
4. If you want to write the table to a file, in the File Name text box, enter the file name.
5. If you want to display the table in the Information window, select the Display in Information
Window.
Adams/View displays the information window showing a tabular summary. If you entered a file
name, Adams/View writes the table to the specified file.
 DOE/Optimization 37
Reviewing and Using Parametric Analysis Results

Updating Variables
You can use the Update Variables tool from the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box to set the design
variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:

• Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE)
analysis.
• Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
• Use an intermediate iteration in an Optimization instead of the final values.

To update the design variable values:

1. From the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box, select the Update Variables tool .
The Update Design Variables dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set that you want to use to update the variables.
3. In the Trial text box, enter the trial or iteration number you want to use.
4. Select OK.
Adams/View sets the design variable values to match those used in the specified trial or iteration,
and updates the model graphics to reflect the new values.

DOE/Optimization
38 Adams/View
About Design of Experiments

About Design of Experiments

Learn more about general information on Design of experiments (DOE) techniques and a description of
the DOE tools in Adams/View:

Note: For more on DOE techniques, see the Adams/Insight online help, if installed.

What is DOE?
Design of experiments (also called experimental design) is a collection of procedures and statistical tools
for planning experiments and analyzing the results. In general, the experiments may measure the
performance of a physical prototype, the yield of a manufacturing process, or the quality of a finished
product.
Although DOE techniques were developed around physical experiments, they work just as well with
virtual experiments in Adams/View. In the case of Adams/View, the experiments help you better
understand and refine the performance of your mechanical system. DOE techniques can improve your
understanding of your design, increase the reliability of your conclusions, and often get you an answer
faster than trial-and-error experimentation.
For simple design problems, it is often possible to explore and optimize the behavior of your system using
a combination of intuition, trial-and-error, and brute force. As the number of design options increases,
however, it becomes more and more difficult to do this quickly and systematically. Varying just one
parameter at a time does not tell you a lot about the interactions between parameters. Trying many
different parameter combinations can require many simulations, therefore leaving you with a great deal
of output data to sift through and understand.
DOE methods provide planning and analysis tools for running a series of experiments. The basic process
is to first determine the purpose of the experiments. You might want to identify which variations have the
biggest effect on your system, for example. You then choose a set of parameters (called factors) for the
system you are investigating and develop a way to measure the appropriate system response. You then
select a set of values for each parameter (called levels) and plan a set of experiments (called runs, trials,
or treatments) in which you vary the parameter values from one experiment to another. The combination
of actual runs to perform is called the design.
An experiment set up in this way is called a designed experiment, or matrix experiment. The runs are
described by the design matrix, that has a column for each factor and a row for each run. The matrix
entries are the level for each factor for each run. For an example of a design matrix, see Specifying a
Design Matrix.

You then execute the runs, recording the performance of the system at each run and analyze the changes
in performance across the runs. The type of analysis depends on the purpose of the experiment. Common
analyses are analysis of variance (ANOVA) that determines the relative importance of the factors, and
linear regression, which fits an assumed mathematical model to the results.
 DOE/Optimization 39
About Design of Experiments

Experiments with two or three factors may only require five or ten runs. As the number of factors and
levels grows, however, the number of runs can quickly escalate to dozens, even hundreds. As a result, a
good design is critical to the success of the experiment. It should contain as few runs as possible, yet give
enough information to accurately depict the behavior of your system. The best design depends on the
number of factors and levels, the nature of the factors, assumptions about the behavior of the product or
process, and the overall purpose of the experiment.
DOE methods allow you to combine all of these requirements into a efficient, effective design for your
problem, and couple it with the appropriate analysis of the results.

What is DOE Used for For?

Three common uses of Design of experiments (DOE) are:
• Screening
• Robust design (the "Taguchi Method")
• Response surface methods (RSM)

Screening identifies which factors and combinations of factors most affect the behavior of the system.
You consider every factor that may potentially affect the response, and use a screening analysis to
determine how much each contributes to the response. This helps you narrow down further
experimentation to just the important factors, and also ensures that you do not leave out significant
factors. Screening is usually followed by a more in-depth experiment on the most important factors.
Robust design, developed by Dr. Genichi Taguchi, is a methodology for improving quality by controlling
the effects of variations in a system. All real-world systems encounter variations due to manufacturing
tolerances, material properties, age, wear, or operating conditions. These variations often decrease the
quality of the system. Robust design identifies which parameters contribute most to quality variations,
and helps you discover how to best minimize their impact on quality. This might mean choosing the least-
sensitive configuration from the best-performing combinations, or modifying your system to react less
to the variations.
Response surface methods (RSM) fit polynomials to the results of the runs, which gives you an easy-to-
use approximation of your system's behavior. The fitted relationships estimate the performance of your
system. You may use this model for plotting and evaluating, quick what-if studies, as input for an
optimization algorithm, or as a subsystem model in a larger system.
Although screening, robust design, and RSM all use the same basic DOE process as described above,
they use different means to generate the designs and analyze the results. Screening, robust design, and
RSM are all applicable to Adams models, and you can use Adams as the experimental evaluation for
screening and robust design methods.
40 Adams/View
About Design of Experiments

What About Optimization?

It may seem that automated Optimization techniques should make Design of experiments (DOE)
unnecessary with Adams/View. After all, you should be able to automatically perfect your design using
Adams/View since it includes optimization features. So, why use DOE?
Actually, DOE complements optimization techniques, and is often used in conjunction with optimization.
A screening analysis can determine which parameters are good candidates for optimization that improve
the reliability and speed of an optimization algorithm. Response surface methods can also create a
simplified mathematical model for optimization, that can be evaluated much more quickly and easily
than a full simulation or experiment. Even if the simplified model gives only an approximate optimum,
it can be used as a good starting point for a full optimization.
More than just helping you find the right answer, however, DOE also helps you explore the relationships
between the parameters and your system's performance. A design may combine the optimum parameters,
but what are the effects of real-life variations due to manufacturing, wear, or changes in operating
conditions? Or perhaps you only need to ensure that the performance stays within a certain tolerance, and
you want to know the range of values that will meet that tolerance.
Knowing the optimum point for your system is often important, but may not be the whole story. In many
cases, it is just as important to understand what happens in the area surrounding the optimum, and why.

DOE Tools in Adams/View

Adams/View contains very flexible tools for applying Design of experiments (DOE) techniques to your
models. You can build parametric relationships into your model and take advantage of them to run a
designed experiment and collect the results. For information on parameterizing your model and running
parametric analyses, including DOE, see Preparing for Parametric Analyses.
Adams/View also offers simple experiment design and analysis capabilities:
• Built-in Designs
• Using Adams/View with Outside Programs
• Specifying a Design Matrix

Built-in Designs
When you run a DOE in Adams/View, you may select from several built-in designs. If you select any one
of these, Adams/View generates the design matrix for you. Adams/View generates full-factorial designs.

The full-factorial design uses all of the combinations of levels. The total number of runs will be mn, where
m is the number of levels and n is the number of factors. Because this grows very quickly, full factorial
is only practical for a small number of factors and levels.
 DOE/Optimization 41
About Design of Experiments

Using Adams/View with Outside Programs

For more sophisticated cases, or other types of DOE methods, MSC's Adams/Insight provides a better
means for performing DOE. For more information, see your MSC sales representative and the
Adams/Insight online help, if installed.

You should also consult a good reference guide on the particular method you are using. There are many
textbooks on DOE and related methods, such as robust design. Any math library should have references
on the statistical aspects of DOE, and engineering libraries have references on applying DOE to quality
and design problems.
For information about specifying your own trial matrix or transferring a design matrix from an outside
program into Adams/View, see Specifying a Design Matrix.

Specifying a Design Matrix

You can specify a design of your own, or a design you generated in an outside program, by directly
entering the design matrix or reading it from a file. You can specify the design matrix or file containing
the design matrix in the Design Study, DOE, Optimize dialog box or you can run the simulation
multi_run doe command.
The design matrix does not directly specify factor values. Instead, it specifies indexes to the levels for
each factor. The indexes center on zero. This means that for a two-level factor, the only possible values
are -1 and +1; for three-levels, -1, 0 and +1; for four-levels, -2, -1, +1, +2; and so on.
This convention implies that the levels (allowed values or range of values) are ordered from smallest to
largest, and cover a range above and below a baseline value. For example, if a factor has three levels, you
can think of the -1 index as the low value, the 0 index as the middle or baseline value, and the +1 index
as the high value. Note that Adams/View does not make any assumptions about the order of the allowed
values, therefore, you can use whatever order you find most convenient.
For example, consider an experiment with two factors, each with three levels, and four runs. A design
matrix might look like this:
0 +1
-1 0
+1 -1
+1 +1
Each row of the matrix represents a run, and each column represents a factor. A -1 indicates the first level
for the factor, a 0 the second, and a +1 the third.
If the levels for the first factor are 9, 10, and 11, and the levels for the second factor are 85, 90, and 95,
then the matrix would give the following runs:
run Factor 1 2 10 95<br> 2 9 90
3 11 85
4 11 95
To specify this matrix using the simulation multi_run doe command, enter the matrix by row:
user_matrix = 0,+1, -1, 0, +1,-1, +1,+1
42 Adams/View
About Design of Experiments

To specify the matrix in the Design Evaluation Tools dialog box:

1. From the Trials defined by: option menu, select Direct Input.
2. In the Number of Trials text box, enter 4.
3. Enter the following in the Trial Matrix text box:
0, +1,
-1, 0,
+1, -1,
+1, +1
You can also store your design matrix in a file and then specify the file name when running a DOE
analysis. The first line of the file contains three numbers. The first number is the number of factors
for this DOE. The second number is the number of levels for each factor. The third number is the
number of trials to be found on the subsequent lines of the file. Each line that follows contains
indexes to the levels for each factor.
The following is an example of a file that you could use for an experiment with two factors, three
levels, and four trials:
2 3 4
0 +1
-1 0
+1 -1
+1 +1
 DOE/Optimization 43
About Optimization

About Optimization
Learn general information on Optimization, tips on using the optimization tools in Adams/View, and
additional reference material for the Adams/View optimization analysis:

Optimization Background
Learn general information on Optimization:
• Why Optimize?
• What is Optimization?
• Mathematics and Methods
• Additional References

Why Optimize?
Optimization is a sophisticated tool that helps you improve the overall design of your product. Having a
good design early in the process helps you shorten your design cycle.
Most designs have specific requirements, such as to support a specified load or trace a specified path.
There is usually some means of distinguishing a good design from a bad design: it is too heavy or it will
cost too much to produce. Some requirements can be restrictions on a design: packaging, end conditions,
or material availability.
Part of the design process is to manipulate the unknowns (variables) in a design to arrive at a good design
that satisfies all goals (objectives) and restrictions (constraints). If these features can be quantified,
optimization techniques can be used to analytically arrive at the theoretical best solution. The process of
optimization can also provide you with important information such as:
• Are there too many constraints on the solution, where relaxing certain specifications might
provide an acceptable result?
• Are there superfluous design constraints, and do some design constraints dictate the results?
• Is the overall design sensitive to certain design parameters and not others?

What is Optimization?
In general, an optimization problem is described as a problem to minimize or maximize an objective
function over a selection of design variables, while satisfying various constraints on the design and state
variables of the system. Various algorithms are available for finding a solution to an optimization
problem, given the problem has been formulated in the manner described in this section.
The objective function is a numerical representation of the quality, efficiency, cost, or stability of the
model. You decide whether the optimization chooses to find the minimum or maximum of the function.
The optimum value of this function corresponds to the best design possible using that particular
mathematical model. Examples of objective functions include execution time, energy (effort) required,
and total material costs.
44 Adams/View
About Optimization

Design variables can be thought of as the unknowns for the design problem. These are the parameters
you can alter to define the design. Changes in the design variables should result in changes to the
objective. Examples of design variables are part dimensions, force amplitudes, and individual part
masses.
Constraints are boundaries that directly or indirectly eliminate unacceptable designs. Constraints often
take the form of additional goals for the design:
• The overall weight of the machine must be less than 1 ton.
• The path traced by a robot arm must pass through certain points
• The fundamental frequency of a vehicle must be greater than 1 Hz.

Mathematics and Methods

A mathematical language for describing an optimization problem is typically used in textbooks. The
optimization problem is described with a set of conditions such as:

minJ  x u  
u
(read as: minimize the objective function J over choices of u, the design variables)
subject to:

x· = f  x u 
g  x u   0
with initial and final conditions given by:
If a solution exists, the output of the optimization gives the optimal design variables u* that satisfy all of
the constraints and minimize the objective function J. The formulation and solution of such an
optimization problem involves standard techniques of mathematical programming. You are only required
to describe the optimization problem in the terms outlined above.

Solutions
A local minimum or maximum exists where the gradient, or derivative of J with respect to u, goes to zero.
For this reason, the solution to an optimization is the solution to a system of nonlinear equations.
Nonlinear solvers are iterative methods that take steps of the form:

i + 1 i
u u – S
Where the u's are the iterates, S is referred to as the search direction, and is the step size. In English,
each step of the process tries to get close to the solution by traveling along the direction S by an amount
. The determination of and S distinguishes the solution algorithms. S is usually of the form:

S = HJ
 DOE/Optimization 45
About Optimization

-J denotes the gradient of J. H is referred to as the Hessian (matrix) of J and is constructed to improve
the convergence of the algorithm. The best convergence is achieved when H is the Jacobian matrix of
second partial derivative of J. This is the Newton-Raphson method. Newton-Raphson is rarely used,
since the computation of these derivatives is often impossible or too expensive to calculate. Other
methods use various, less expensive approximations to the Jacobian.
Once the search direction, S, is chosen, the step size is chosen using a one-dimensional minimization
of J with as the design variable. This is usually referred to as the line search and uses the bisection
algorithm, golden search, or any of a number of minimization methods.

Additional References
• VMA Engineering. DOT User's Manual. Goleta, CA, 1993.
• J. J. More and S. J. Wright. Optimization Software Guide, SIAM, Philadelphia, 1993.
• D. E. Kirk. Optimal Control Theory. Prentice - Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1970.
• U. Kirsch. Optimum Structural Design. McGraw-Hill, 1981

Tips on Using Optimization

Preparing for Parametric Analyses contains detailed information on preparing your model for
Optimization and performing an optimization analysis. The following contain tips on getting the most
from an optimization analysis:
• Creating the Objective
• Testing the Objective or Constraint
• Making Your Model Robust
• Finding Global versus Local Optima
• Predicting Execution Time
• Validating the Optimum
• Refining an Optimization

Creating the Objective

The objective function, also called the cost functional, performance measure, or performance index, is a
numerical quantification that distinguishes or rates candidate designs. The optimum design is achieved
when the objective function is minimized or maximized. In the case of minimization, the objective grows
smaller as the design improves. In the case of maximization, the objective grows larger as the design
improves.
Typical objectives include time, energy, or displacement from a path. Some standard objective functions
may be created as follows:
46 Adams/View
About Optimization

• Minimum time - Use a SENSOR to stop an analysis when the conditions of the optimization are
satisfied. The time for the analysis is then written as the last record of a result set. If you use a
SENSOR to HALT the analysis, also set the PRINT argument on that SENSOR. Otherwise, the
optimizer only uses information from the previous output step.
• Minimum mass - Write an Adams/View function that sums the masses of all applicable parts.
The masses of the parts are the design variables.
• Minimum effort - Write a DIFF that describes the torques applied to the system that are to be
minimized. The integral of this differential equation is given as the last record in the result set.

Testing the Objective or Constraint

Adams/View allows you to interactively apply the objective or constraint to an analysis and print the
resulting value. This helps you develop and debug objectives and constraints. It is a good idea to test your
objective or constraint on an existing analysis before using it in an optimization.

To test one objective or constraint:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Design Objective or Design Constraint, and then select
Evaluate.
Adams/View displays the Optimize Objective Evaluate dialog box or the Optimize Constraint
Evaluate dialog box.
2. In the Objective or Constraint Name text box, enter the objective or constraint name.
3. In the Analysis Name text box, enter the name of an analysis.
4. Select OK.
Adams/View prints the objective or constraint value in the Information window.

To test all objectives or constraints:

• From the Simulate menu, point to Design Objective or Design Constraint, and then select
Evaluate All with Default Analysis.
Adams/View prints the objective or constraint value in the Information window.

Making Your Model Robust

Optimization works best on robust models. There are two key elements to model robustness. First, you
should be sure that the model is physically realistic for the entire range of your design variables. For
example, it is usually impractical to allow zero damping, so keep the lower bound above zero if you use
damping as a design variable.
Second, you should make sure that your model is stable. Small changes in the design variables should
not lead to gross changes in the objective function. Like everything else, optimization algorithms work
best with smooth, stable functions. For more information on improving optimizer performance, see
Ensuring Accurate Run Results.

If the model is not robust, optimization is still possible, but more effort is required. In particular, the
parameters for the finite differencing need to be massaged. The key to accurate optimization is good
 DOE/Optimization 47
About Optimization

gradient information. Presently, Adams uses finite differences to compute gradients. You have control
over the method and step size used. The forward difference method passes a line through the design point
and a forward perturbation. The central difference method passes a parabola through the design point and
both a forward and backward perturbation.
If you are certain that your model is robust, use forward differences since it is faster. If not, use central
differences to focus in on the optimum, then switch to forward differences.
The size of the perturbation can also reduce the effect of errors in the analysis. Naturally, you want to
remove as much of this as you can. If you are uncertain of the accuracy and smoothness of your model,
use a large perturbation at first, then reduce it as you get better designs. Remember that the accuracy of
the gradients generally improves as the perturbations get smaller.
When optimizing curves, try to define the curve using analytical functions. If you must use discrete
values, use control points. The optimizer tends to perturb curve points one at a time. The interpolation
using curve points (cubic splines) tends to be more oscillatory under single point perturbation, which can
confuse an optimization algorithm.
The scaling of the optimization variables (design, constraints, and objective) also affects the
performance. It is best to choose variables and functions that are similar in magnitude.
Monitor the scale of objectives, gradients, and constraints. Large values for objectives and gradients
impede optimization. Small values of constraints under-emphasize the constraints.

Finding Global versus Local Optima

One way to make sure you have converged to the global optimum is to cut local optima out of the design
space using constraints. If the optimizer has computed a local optimum (for example, OPT1) re-run the
optimization with a constraint that forces the objective function to be less than (for example, .8*OPT1).
The constraint function is the same as the objective function shifted 0.8*OPT1 downward. This has the
effect of removing the local optima from the design space and shifting the initial guess for the next
optimization closer to the global optimum. If OPT1 is the global optimum, the optimizer is not able to
find a solution. Otherwise, the new solution, OPT2, may be the global optimum, and you may want to
repeat the process.

Predicting Execution Time

You can compute a rough estimate of the number of runs that a particular model requires for each
iteration. You must know the number of design variables and the differencing technique.
Each iteration is broken into two phases: computing gradients and performing a line search. To compute
gradients in Adams/View, finite differencing is used. Each design variable is perturbed slightly and the
difference in the objectives and constraints is measured with respect to the change in the design variables.
When using forward differencing, one analysis is performed for each design variable. When central
differencing is used, two analyses are performed for each design variable.
Once the gradients are computed, the optimization algorithm determines a search direction. A line search
is performed in this direction, attempting to improve the design. The number of iterations performed by
the line search is determined greatly by the accuracy of the gradients. If the gradients are highly accurate,
48 Adams/View
About Optimization

then the line search often terminates after one or two analyses. If the gradients are poor, then the line
search can cause ten or more analyses to be performed. These estimates vary widely depending upon your
particular optimization algorithm.
So, for forward differencing:
runs_per_iteration =number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search
For central differencing:
runs_per_iteration =2 * number_of_design_variables + length_of_line_search

Validating the Optimum

Always plot or chart the objective value versus the iteration. If it is not flat at the end, this indicates that
you have not reached the optimum design. You need to reduce the convergence tolerance in the Optimizer
settings section of the Solver Settings dialog box to force the optimization to proceed further and reach
the optimum. For more information on plotting the objective, see Generating Plots.

Refining an Optimization
Optimization is an iterative process in more ways than one. You will probably perform several
optimizations before you are satisfied with the results.
The way you define design variables, constraints, and objective functions has a profound effect on the
performance of the optimizer and on the results of the optimization. You may need to change your
objective, add constraints, or make other changes before you pose your problem in the right way.
The default values for optimization parameters may not always give the final answer, but can bring you
closer to the final answer. You may need to experiment with optimization settings to arrive at the best
combination for your application.

Optimization Settings
The optimization settings are accessible from the Solver Settings dialog box when you select
Optimization. Learn about Accessing the Solver Settings Dialog Box.
Learn about each of the optimizer settings:
• Algorithm
• Convergence Tolerance
• Maximum Iterations
• Rescale Iterations
• Differencing Technique
• Differencing Increment
• Debugging Output
• Minimum Number of Converged Iterations
• User Parameters
 DOE/Optimization 49
About Optimization

Algorithm
Algorithm specifies the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms are
provided with Adams/View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You
can also include your own optimization algorithm. The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
is:
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.
1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100
Colorado Springs, CO 80906
http://www.vrand.com/
http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm

• OPTDES-GRG - Use the GRG (Generalized Reduced Gradient) algorithm from the OptDes code
of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits, since it
works in scaled space.
• OPTDES-SQP - Use the SQP (Sequential Quadratic Programming) algorithm from the OptDes
code of Design Synthesis. This algorithm requires that design variables have range limits, since
it works in scaled space.
• DOT1 - Use DOT with BFGS (Broydon-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) for unconstrained
problems. Use DOT with MMFD (Modified Method of Feasible Directions) for constrained
problems.
• DOT2 - Use DOT with FR (Fletcher-Reeves) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SLP
(Sequential Linear Programming) for constrained problems.
• DOT3 - Use DOT with FR (same as DOT2) for unconstrained problems. Use DOT with SQP
(Sequential Quadratic Programming) for constrained problems.
• User 1, User 2, User 3 - Allows you to invoke a user-written optimization algorithm that has
been linked to Adams/View. (See Linking External Algorithms.)

Convergence Tolerance
Convergence tolerance is the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall before
an optimization is considered successful. If the condition ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) <
convergence_tolerance is true for a certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence
tolerance criterion is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms
before they terminate successfully.
Like other Adams/Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this tolerance to find the right
value for your application. Display the objective versus iteration strip chart. If the optimizer quits even
though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the optimizer continues
iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very much, make the tolerance larger.

Maximum Iterations
Maximum iterations tells the optimization algorithm how many iterations it should take before it admits
failure.
50 Adams/View
About Optimization

Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis runs (see Predicting Execution
Time).

Rescale Iterations
Rescale iterations is the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled. If you
set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.

Differencing Technique
The differencing technique controls how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions.
Centered differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the nominal value,
then again in the positive direction using finite differencing between the perturbed results to compute the
gradient. If you choose forward differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction
only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients (especially in noisy
models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be performed.

Differencing Increment
The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing finite differencing to
compute gradients. When using forward differencing this value is added to the nominal value of each
design variable on successive runs. When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from
the nominal value and then added to it.
Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are also more susceptible
to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help minimize the effects of variations, but gives
less accurate gradients. For more information on controlling variations, see Ensuring Accurate Run
Results.

Debugging Output
Turning on debugging output sends copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched
Adams/View. Keep an eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from Adams/View, among other
things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may help you determine the source of the problem.

Minimum Number of Converged Iterations

The number of consecutive iterations for which the absolute or relative convergence criteria must be met
to indicate convergence in the DOT Sequential Linear Programming method.

User Parameters
Adams/View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm. Realizing that there
may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the existing parameter set, this parameter was
added to allow you to pass any real numeric data to your algorithm.
 DOE/Optimization 51
About Optimization

Linking External Algorithms

In addition to the algorithms provided in Adams/View, you have the option of linking in up to three other
Optimization algorithms of your choice. Once you have written the appropriate interface, compiled and
linked your code, you can invoke your algorithm by setting the optimization algorithm to user1, user2,
or user3.
User-supplied optimization algorithms must be registered by calling a function built in to Adams/View.
This function call must be placed in the registration function supplied in source code form with
Adams/View. Follow these steps to add your own optimization algorithm to Adams/View:
1. Locate and copy the appropriate source code templates from:
$topdir/aview/usersubs
2. Write your interface function by modifying the template.
3. Add your new function to the registration function.
4. Link your interface function and the modified registration function with Adams/View as
described in Running and Configuring Adams.
52 Adams/View
About Optimization
Customizing Adams/View
You can customize Adams/View so that it works and looks the way you want it to and mimics your design
environment. There are four major ways to customize it. You can:
• Customize the graphical interface - For example, you can create your own set of menus or
dialog boxes.
• Automate your work using macros - You can also speed up your work by creating macros to
perform complex or repetitive tasks. You can edit the macros to include design variables to
further customize and automate the modeling process.
• Create your own Adams/View library - The library you create can read in different
Adams/View functions and execute commands. For information on creating libraries, refer to
Running and Configuring Adams.
• Edit Adams/View startup files - You can edit the files that Adams/View reads when it first
starts. These files can automatically load a model, execute commands, or change menus or
dialog boxes. For information on editing startup files, refer to the Running and Configuring
Adams.

Automating Your Work Using Macros

You can automate repetitive processes by creating a macro of a command or a group of commands that
you use frequently. You can record, edit, save, and replay as many macros as you like.
Once you have your macros working properly, you can make them easier to use by associating them with
graphical user interface (GUI) objects you create. For more information, see Customizing Menus Using
the Menu Builder and Creating Dialog Boxes
2 Adams/View
About Adams/View Macros

About Adams/View Macros

A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams/View commands. To create a
macro, you give Adams/View the list of commands you want executed, as well as a new command that
will execute them. You write the commands that the macro executes using the Adams/View command
language.
You can use parameters in macros. Parameters give you a way to send data to the macro each time you
use it. They are placeholders for information that you will provide when you actually execute the macro.
When you issue a macro command containing a parameter, Adams/View substitutes the values that you
provide into the commands contained in the macro.
Adams/View treats a macro as it does all other Adams/View commands. You can enter the macro in the
command window, select it from the Command Navigator, include it in other macros, or execute it from
your own custom menus, dialog boxes, or buttons.
Among the tasks you can perform with macros are:
• Automate repetitive procedures.
• Build general-purpose extensions to Adams/View.
• Automatically create an entire model.
• Quickly build many variations of a mechanism.

To make it easy for you to create a macro, Adams/View contains tools to automate the creation of macros.
The tools let you interactively record, play, and test your macros and command files. You can also use
text-editing applications to modify existing macros or create them from scratch.

About Creating Macros

To create a Macro, give Adams/View the list of commands you want executed, as well as a new command
that will execute them. You write the commands that the macro executes using the Adams/View
command language.
You can use parameters in macros. Parameters give you a way to send data to the macro each time you
use it. They are placeholders for information that you will provide when you actually execute the macro.
When you issue a macro command containing a parameter, Adams/View substitutes the values that you
provide into the commands contained in the macro.
You can create macros in four different ways:
• Interactively by recording key strokes. Learn about how to record key strokes in Recording
Macros.
• Typing the commands to be executed into the Macro Editor. You can also use the Macro Editor to
edit an existing macro.
• Reading in a command file that contains the commands that the macro will execute. Learn about
Creating Macros from Existing Files.
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 3
About Adams/View Macros

• Using the Command Navigator or Command window to type in the commands to create macros
as well as the commands to be executed. Learn about using the Command Navigator and
Command Window.

Recording a macro is easiest for simple macros, while reading in a file is best for more complex macros.
When you read in a file, you can also specify the help file or string that you want associated with the
macro. Using the Macro Editor is best for editing existing macros. If you use the Macro Editor to create
macros, you must type in the commands that the macro is to execute.

Editing and Creating Macros Using the Macro Editor

You can use the Macro Editor to edit macros that you recorded or that you created by importing a macro
file. You can also use the Macro Editor to create a macro.

To use the Macro Editor:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Edit, and then select either New or Modify.
2. If you selected Modify, the Database Navigator appears. Select a macro to modify.
The Macro Editor appears as shown below. If you chose to edit a macro, the macro commands
appear in the Commands text area of the Macro Editor.

3. If you are creating a macro, in the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro.
4 Adams/View
About Adams/View Macros

4. In the Command text box, enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of
the macro, select Use Macro Name.

Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot redefine an existing command,
although you can add a new keyword at any level to an existing command. For instance,
entering MARKER CREATE is invalid, because a MARKER CREATE command already
exists, but entering MARKER GENERATE is valid.

5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that a
single Undo=yes, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros,
or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not ever use the Undo. You might want to
specify Undo=yes during initial creation and debugging until your macro works properly, then
switch to Undo=no to improve performance.
6. In the Commands text area, enter the commands that the macro is to execute, and select OK.

Recording Macros
Recording a Macro is easiest for simple macros.

To record a macro:
1. From the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and then select Record Start.
2. Perform the operations you want included in the macro.
3. To stop recording the macro, from the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and
then select Record Stop.

To play back a macro you recorded:

• From the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and select Execute Recorded
Macro.

To save a recorded macro:

• From the Tools menu, point to Macro, point to Record/Replay, and then select Write
Recorded Macro.
Adams/View saves the macro as the command file macro.cmd. If a file called macro.cmd already
exists, Adams/View asks you if you want to overwrite it or create a backup copy of it.

Creating Macros from Existing Files

You can use the Read command to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be
executed. You can also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 5
About Adams/View Macros

The file you supply that contains the macro definition is a command file that can also contain parameters
embedded in the commands and can have special comments at the top.
Some of the comments in the file you supply can correspond to Read command parameters that are listed
in the Macro Read dialog box, such as the command users enter to execute the macro. These comments
must appear at the beginning of the file and must contain the name of one of the reserved parameters
(USER_ENTERED_COMMAND, WRAP_IN_UNDO, HELP_STRING, or HELP_FILE) followed by
an appropriate value.
These reserved parameters must be in uppercase letters and must immediately follow the comment
character (!). You enter the values without equal signs or quotes. Adams/View treats the values in the
comments as defaults. For example, the following comments set the default values for
USER_ENTERED_COMMAND and HELP_STRING.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND lmark
!HELP_STRING This command lists information on all markers in your database.
list_info marker marker_name=.*
If you specify values for these parameters using the Macro Read dialog box, the values in the dialog box
override the values in the comments.

To create a macro by reading in a file:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Macro, and then select Read.
The Macro Read dialog box appears.

Note: The Macro Read dialog box contains an option to create a panel. This option is no
longer supported or recommended.

2. In the Macro Name text box, enter the name of the macro that Adams/View uses to store the
macro in the current database.
3. In the File Name text box, enter the name of the file containing the commands to be executed.
4. In the User Entered Command text box, specify the command string that will execute the macro.
The command string defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command string.
5. Specify whether or not the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command. Note that
a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of memory for very large macros or
slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not actually use the Undo.
6. Specify a text file containing help on the macro or enter a text string describing the macro.
Currently, you can only specify help for the entire macro command, not its parameters or leading
keywords.
7. To ensure that you do not create an outdated dialog box, from the Create Panel option menu,
select no.
6 Adams/View
About Adams/View Macros

8. Select OK.

Note: To create an up-to-date dialog box to execute your macro, go to the Command
Navigator and double-click on the name of your macro after you have created it.
Adams/View automatically creates a dialog box whose name is based on the user-
entered commands associated with the macro. For example, if you create a macro
called mar_scale_down and associated with it the user-entered commands: marker
scale down, then Adams/View names the auto-generated dialog box
.gui.mar_sca_dow (Adams/View uses the first three characters of each command in
the user-entered commands to create the name of the dialog box). See also
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder, and the example.

Saving Macros
Adams/View automatically stores your macros in the current modeling session. You can also export your
macros to command (.cmd) files, which allows you to edit, archive, or import them into other modeling
session. It also lets you give the macro to another user, and also helps you to modify long macros when
you do not have the original file
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values. You can read in the command file using the Macro Read command.

To save a macro to a command file:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Macro, and then select Write.
The Macro Write dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the macro to save to a file.
3. Enter the file name in which to save the macro.
4. Select OK.

Deleting Macros
To delete objects using the Database Navigator:
1. Clear the select list of any existing selections by selecting the Select Tool .
2. On the Edit menu, select Delete.
The Database Navigator appears.
3. Select the macro or macros that you want to delete. Learn about navigating through a modeling
database using the Database Navigator.
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 7
About Adams/View Macros

4. Select OK.

Note: If the Database Navigator does not appear as indicated in Step 2, the select list was
not cleared before executing the Delete command. You can always use the Edit ->
Select List commands to be sure it is cleared.

Debugging Macros
Adams/View provides a debugging tool to help you troubleshoot your macros if they don't run or work
as expected. You can use the debugging tool to:
• View your macro and the output from it.
• Step through each command in the macro.
• Print your macro.

To access the macro debugging tool:

• On the Tools menu, point to Macro, and then select Debug.

Executing Macros
Once you have created a macro, you execute it by issuing the command that you specified when you
created the macro. You can issue the command by:
• Entering the command in the Command window. The full command is a combination of the
command and macro parameters, if any.
• Using the Command Navigator to execute the command. Selecting the macro command in the
Command Navigator, automatically displays a dialog box in which to enter parameters.
• Using a custom dialog box and menu command that you created to execute the macro. Learn
more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.
Adams/View treats the macro as it does other Adams/View commands. For example, if you enter the
command in the command window, but do not enter all required parameters, Adams/View prompts you
for the missing required parameters.

Tips on Writing Macros

Command Echo and Screen Update
As Adams/View executes a macro, it updates the view windows each time their content changes. If you
execute a macro from the command window, Adams/View, by default, echoes each command to the
command information area of the command window as it executes the macro. This can be useful when
debugging because you can see the executed commands and their immediate effects.
8 Adams/View
About Adams/View Macros

It can also be slow and distracting, however, once your macro is working properly. You can prevent this
by including the following as the first command in the macro:
defaults command_file echo=off update=off
Including the command allows macros to run more quickly because Adams/View does not echo the
macro commands to the command information area and updates the views only once, when the macro is
finished. You can reset the defaults by including the following command as the last line in your macro:
defaults command_file echo=on update=on
If you execute a macro from a dialog box or menu, Adams/View, by default, updates the screen at each
change, but does not echo the macro commands to the command information area.

Using Conditionals and Loops

The Adams/View command language contains commands for creating conditional constructs and loops.
You will find these very useful in writing macros. The constructs are:
• FOR/END
• WHILE/END
• CONTINUE
• BREAK
• IF/ELSE/ELSEIF/END
• RETURN

For example, you can use an IF command to conditionally execute commands within your macro. You
can create a parameter to specify a choice of options, then use the IF statement to determine which option
was chosen and execute the appropriate commands.
For more information on the different conditional constructs, see Conditional Constructs and Loops.

Writing Text Files

To create macros that write formatted reports, command files, or other data files, you can use the
commands:
file text write=...
This command writes information from Adams/View into a text file. You control the format of the output
and, using database access expressions, you can write any model or simulation data from the
Adams/View database.

Executing System Commands

You can execute system commands using the Adams/View System command. Its Adams/View command
language is:
system command_text=...
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 9
About Adams/View Macros

By including the System command, you can create macros that invoke outside utilities and programs.
You could, for example, create a macro that generates hardcopy files for a standard series of plots, then
use the System command to issue comments to print and delete the plots.

Ensuring Unique Names and Adams Identifiers

If your macro creates new entities, you must take special care to construct unique names and unique
Adams identifiers each time you execute the macro. Otherwise, the macro fails the second time you run
it because the names or identifiers already exist. One way to construct unique names is to create a string
parameter and use it in creating all the new names. If, for example, a macro creates three plots, use a
string parameter $pname to create three plot names such as $'pname'_1, $'pname'_2, and $'pname'_3.
Each time you run the macro, enter a new string and all the new names are unique.
If you want a special numbering scheme for the Adams identifiers, you can also pass in an integer
parameter for constructing them. It is usually easier, however, to leave them out and let Adams/View
create them automatically. If you do not specify an adams id, then it defaults to adams id=0. The next
time you write an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View replaces zero identifiers with unique, nonzero
identifiers.

Including a Literal "$" in a Macro

Normally, Adams/View interprets any "$" character as the start of a parameter name. You can avoid this
by using a backslash first: "\$". Adams/View deletes the "\ " and keeps the "$" as part of the macro text.

Speeding up Object References in Expressions

When Adams/View executes expressions in the macro command text, it must look up each referenced
object name in the database. Object names in expressions can refer to almost anything, so if you use a
local name such as MAR1, Adams/View must search the entire database for any object named MAR1.
This is relatively slow, and in large macros with several object references, it can consume a large portion
of the overall macro execution time.
You can drastically reduce the lookup time by using full database names in expressions within the macro.
Instead of referencing variable DV1, use .MOD1.DV1 for example. This way, Adams/View only needs
to search a fraction of the database to find the proper object.
10 Adams/View
Using Parameters in Macros

Using Parameters in Macros

Parameters are placeholders for information that you will provide when you actually execute a macro.
You include parameters in the text of the commands to be executed by a macro. You write parameters as
a "$" followed by the name of the parameter (the full format is explained below). You can include many
different parameters, and you can include the same parameter more than once.
When you create a macro, Adams/View scans the command text to identify all the parameters. When you
issue the command to execute the macro, you provide values for the parameters, or they assume a default
value. Adams/View substitutes the values into the commands in place of the parameters, then executes
the commands. If you used the same parameter more than once in the command text, Adams/View
substitutes the same value each place the parameter appears.

Example of a Macro with a Parameter

For example, the following macro shows how to change the size of all force and constraint icons in your
modeling sessions. The command in the macro, named icon_size, contains a parameter named size:
constraint attributes constraint_name=.* size_of_icons = $size
force attributes force_name=.* size_of_icons = $size
When you enter the command:
icon_size size=1.5
Adams/View executes the commands:
constraint attributes constraint_name=.* size_of_icons = 1.5
force attributes force_name=.* size_of_icons = 1.5

Expanding Parameter Values

In some cases, Adams/View may reformat or expand parameter values before substituting them into the
command text. Adams/View never changes values, however. In particular, Adams/View does not convert
units during the macro substitution. It passes the values you enter directly to the commands. The
commands themselves may convert units, as usual.
Adams/View expands database names into full names before substituting them into the macros. The
expanded names use "." to separate levels in the name. Using "." allows you to directly access database
values in expressions.
For example, the following is a macro lpart that contains a parameter name:
list_info part part_name=$name
When you enter the following command:
lpart name=left_wheel
Adams/View substitutes the full name of part left_wheel (for example, .mod1.left_wheel) for $name and
executes the command:
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 11
Using Parameters in Macros

list_info part part_name=.mod1.left_wheel

Generalized Parameter Format

The general format of a parameter is $'name:q1:q2:q3...', where:
• name is the name of the parameter.
• q1, q2, q3... are one or more qualifiers that specify the characteristics of the parameter.

The single quotes and qualifiers are optional (see below), giving four possible formats:
• $name
• $'name'
• $name:q1:q2:q3...
• $'name:q1:q2:q3...'

Parameter Naming Conventions

A parameter name must start with an alphabetic character. The rest of the name can include numeric
characters and underscores ("_") as well as alphabetic characters (a-z, A-Z) but no spaces. The name ends
at the first character that is not alphabetic, numeric, or an underscore. Therefore, $P, $P1, and $PART_1
are valid parameter names while $PART#1 and $1P are invalid. Parameter names are not case sensitive,
meaning $PART, $Part, and $part are all the same parameter.
You use single quotes to explicitly separate the name or qualifiers from command text immediately
following the parameter. Normally, you place a space, comma, colon, or other special character after a
parameter, which separates it from the following text. If you want to concatenate text to the end of a
parameter, however, you must enclose the parameter name in single quotes. If, for example, you want to
add "_1" onto the end of parameter $part, you cannot write $part_1, because Adams/View would interpret
it as a parameter named part_1. Instead, you must write $`part'_1.

Parameter Qualifiers and Formats

You can use qualifiers on the first occurrence of the parameter to control the parameter characteristics.
Qualifiers are optional and can only be used the first time the parameter appears in the macro text.
Parameter can have one or more of the following qualifiers:
• Type
• Range
• Count
• Defaults
12 Adams/View
Using Parameters in Macros

You can use the qualifiers in any combination and any order, and you do not need to define all of them.
If you repeat a qualifier, Adams/View uses the last value. Qualifiers can be in upper or lowercase.
Examples of qualifiers are:

Examples of Qualifiers
The qualifiers: Specify that the parameter requires:
$parts:t=part:c=2 Names for two existing parts.
$NSpokes:T=INTEGER:GE=3:LE=8:D=3 An integer from 3 to 8 and a constant default of 3.
$infile:t=file(*.dat) A file name. The File Selection dialog box lists all files
with the extension .dat.

Type Qualifier
The type qualifier specifies the type of value a user must enter. The format for the type qualifier is:
• T = type
• T = type(additional data)

where:
• type is a basic type, database object type, or database object class type as explained in the next
sections.
• Additional data is either optional or required depending on the type.

Range Qualifiers
A range qualifier specifies the minimum and/or maximum values allowed. It only applies to numeric
types. The formats for the range qualifiers are listed in the table below.

Range Qualifier Formats

The format: Specifies values must be:
GT=r Greater than r
GE=r Greater than or equal to r
LT=r Less than r
LE=r Less than or equal to r
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 13
Using Parameters in Macros

Count Qualifiers
Count qualifiers specify the number of values required. The formats for the count qualifier are listed in
the table below.

Count Qualifier Formats

The format: Specifies:
C=0 One or more values
C=n n values
C=n,0 n or more values
C=n,m n to m values

Default Qualifiers
Default qualifiers are optional. If a parameter has no default, users must enter a value when executing the
macro. There are three types of default qualifiers as well as a default value:
• Constant - The parameter is optional. Adams/View uses the default value if a user does not
supply a parameter value.
• Updated - The parameter is optional and Adams/View uses the last value the user entered if the
user does not supply a parameter value. If a user has not yet entered any value for a parameter,
Adams/View uses the default value.
• Database object - The default for database objects is automatic. If the type is an existing
database object, the automatic default is the current default object.
The table below lists the formats for the default qualifiers.

Default Qualifier Formats

The format: Specifies:
D=value Constant default
U=value Updated default
A Uses the default object for the specified type if no explicit value is given

Default Parameter Characteristics

The first occurrence of a parameter in the command text defines the parameter characteristics. This is true
even if the first occurrence is in a comment. If the first occurrence includes qualifiers, the qualifiers
determine the parameter characteristics. If there are no qualifiers and the parameter appears immediately
after an "=" in a valid command, then the parameter inherits the type, range, count, and default from the
14 Adams/View
Using Parameters in Macros

preceding command parameter. If there are no qualifiers and the parameter does not appear immediately
after an "=" in a valid command, the default characteristics are one string value with no default.

Tip: To avoid unexpected results, we recommend that you explicitly set the characteristics of
your parameters in comments at the beginning of your macro. For examples of setting the
characteristics in comments, see Example Macros.

In the example below, parameter $text defaults to a string because it has no qualifiers and is not in a
command. Parameter $numbers has qualifiers that specify it as one or more integers greater than zero.
Parameter $part_1 is a part because it immediately follows an "=" and, therefore, inherits the type from
parameter part_name. Parameter $part_2 defaults to string because it does not immediately follow the
"=". Parameters $part_3 and $part_4 have qualifiers that specify them both as parts.
! Parameter $text is a string.
! $numbers:t=integer:c=0:gt=0
list_info part part_name=$part_1, $part_2
list_info part part_name=$part_3:t=part, $part_4:t=part
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 15
Helpful Commands in Macros

Helpful Commands in Macros

Two commands are particularly helpful in creating macros:
• FILE TEXT WRITE
• SYSTEM

Tip: For more help on using commands, see the online help available from the Command
Navigator. Simply select a command and then select the Help button at the bottom
of the Command Navigator.

file text write

Lets you write a general-purpose text file from Adams/View, using information and formatting that you
control. You can use a text file to create:
• Standard reports
• Data files for other applications
• Adams/View command files
• Scripts for executing other applications

You can specify to write to a file, a variable, both, or neither. If writing to a file, you must open it first
using the file text open command.
If you specify:
• Just the file_name, Adams/View writes the output to that file.
• Just the variable_name, Adams/View assigns the text string to that variable.
• Both file_name and variable_name, Adams/View performs both actions.
• Neither, Adams/View assumes the last opened, written, or read file is the intended destination. If
you perform a write after a read, you should explicitly identify the file with the file_name
parameter, so Adams/View does not overwrite the file you last read from.
16 Adams/View
Helpful Commands in Macros

Parameters

file_name Specifies the name of the text file to be written. The proper extension is the
(optional) default, but you can be override it by supplying a different extension.

It's not necessary to enclose the file name in quotes if it only contains alpha-
numeric characters and starts with a letter. If you want to include other
characters, such as a '.' for an extension or '/' or '[]' for directory paths, you
must enclose the name in quotes.
variable_name Specifies a variable to which Adams/View stores a formatted string.
(optional)
format_for_output Specifies the format of the output text. Output formats are a mixture of text
(required) and conversion specifications. Each conversion specification usually has a
matching argument in the values_for_output parameter. A conversion
specification begins with a percent sign, %, and is terminated by a letter or
another percent sign.

The conversion specifications provided by Adams/View are a subset of those

used in the ANSI-C programming language. Valid conversion specifiers are:

% - Literal percent sign ("%%" is output as "%")

d - Integer in base 10, 1, or 123
e - Exponential floating point, 1.23e-04
E - Exponential floating point, 1.23E-04
f - Fixed point real, 345.67
g - General fixed or floating point (depending upon magnitude)
G - General fixed or floating point (depending upon magnitude)
i - Same as d, above
o - Unsigned integer in base 8 (o is for octal)
s - Character string
u - Unsigned integer in base 10
x - Unsigned integer in base 16 (decimal 10 is "a", 11 is "b", and so on)
X - Unsigned integer in base 16 (decimal 10 is "A", 11 is "B", and so on)
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 17
Helpful Commands in Macros

Most conversion specifications can contain flags between the leading percent
sign and the terminating conversion specifier. These flags allow you to further
refine the format of your output. Some of the valid flags are:

- Indicates that the output is to be left justified in the field, with the default
being right justification. This is only useful when the field width is specified
(see below).

+ Forces a sign to be output for all numeric values. For example:

... FORMAT="%+d %+d" VALUES=(-1), (1)

produces:
-1 +1
0 Forces output of leading zeros when a field width is specified.

" " Blank. Same as + but no explicit + sign, only a blank.

Field width is specified by prefixing the conversion specifier with a number.

It determines how much space is to be reserved for the output text. For
example, the following format and values:

... FORMAT="%03d%6d" VALUES=(5),(7)

generates the following as output ('.' is used to denote blank space in this
example only):

"005.....7"
You specify precision by entering a decimal point followed by a number. You
enter the precision after the field width. For example:

... FORMAT="%5.2f %010.3e" VALUES=(2.3),(5.4)

produces the output:

" 2.30 05.400e+00"

Values for output are converted to the appropriate type for the conversion
specifier, and using expressions is extremely useful here.

You can write information from the Adams/View database to the text file by
using data access references in the value expressions. For example,
VALUES= (.mod1.par1.mass) writes the mass of part par1. For more
information on expressions and database access, see Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
18 Adams/View
Helpful Commands in Macros

values_for_output Specifies the values to be placed in the output string.

(optional)
newline Controls whether or not file write text causes the output to terminate the line
(optional) with this write command. If newline is no, then subsequent write commands
produce output on the same line. If newline is yes (the default), then any
succeeding write command produces content on a new line.

Values are: yes and no. The default is yes.

system
Issues a device-dependent operating system command. You can select to display the results of the
command in the Information Window or the Adams/View Log file.

Parameters

command_text Specifies the text for a device-dependent operating system

command. See your operating system documentation for more
information.
send_output_to_info_window Specifies whether or not to send the output from the command
to the Information window. The default is to send the output to
the Information window (on).
echo_to_logfile Specifies whether or not to send the standard output and
standard error streams from a system command to the
Adams/View log file. The default is to not send the output to the
log file (off).

Examples
The following example issues a UNIX-appropriate command to remove the file named test.txt without
displaying the command in either the Adams/View Information window or a log file:
SYSTEM COMMAND="rm test.txt" SEND=OFF ECHO=OFF
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 19
Conditional Constructs and Loops

Conditional Constructs and Loops

Learn about each of the conditional constructs in the Adams/View command language. The constructs
are listed in alphabetical order for reference.

BREAK
Use the BREAK command to exit the innermost FOR or WHILE loop immediately and stop execution
of the loop.
When Adams/View encounters a BREAK command inside a loop, it immediately exits the loop without
executing the remaining commands for that iteration.
The BREAK command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.

Format
BREAK

Example
In this example, Adams/View creates markers, named MAR1, MAR2, MAR3, MAR4, and MAR5,
unless a marker already exists with one of those names. As soon as it encounters an existing marker,
Adams/View exits the loop and does not create any more.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(eval(DB_EXISTS ("MAR"//ip)))
break
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip

CONTINUE
Use the CONTINUE command to skip commands inside the innermost FOR or WHILE loop and
continue with the next iteration of the loop.
When Adams/View encounters a CONTINUE command inside of a loop, it skips over the remaining
commands of the loop and goes directly to the END of the innermost loop. Adams/View tests the loop
condition and continues looping if the condition is still valid.
The CONTINUE command affects only the innermost FOR or WHILE loop.

Format
CONTINUE
20 Adams/View
Conditional Constructs and Loops

Example
In this example Adams/View creates four markers on the default part: MAR1, MAR2, MAR4, and
MAR5. Adams/View skips MAR3, because when ip evaluates to 3, Adams/View encounters the
CONTINUE command and skips to the END of the WHILE loop.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 5)
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
if condition=(ip == 3)
continue
end
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip)) &
location=(eval(ip-1)),0,0
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
The results of the example would be:

Results of CONTINUE Example

Name: Loc_X: Loc_Y: Loc_Z:

MAR1 0.0 0.0 0.0
MAR2 1.0 0.0 0.0
MAR4 3.0 0.0 0.0
MAR5 4.0 0.0 0.0

IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END
Use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END commands to execute a group of commands conditionally. The
execution of commands bracketed by IF and END depends on the value of an expression.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).

Note: As with all Adams/View commands, you can use the IF, ELSE, ELSEIF, and END
commands on the command line, in macros, and in command files.

Format
You can use the IF command with or without the ELSE command. A few examples of many variations
are shown below.

Tip: You can have any number of ELSEIF CONDITION commands.

 Automating Your Work Using Macros 21
Conditional Constructs and Loops

IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
END
IF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSEIF CONDITION=(expression)
...
ELSE
...
END
If the expression evaluates to a non-zero value, Adams/View executes the commands following the IF or
ELSEIF command up to the ELSE, when present, or the END if you do not use the ELSE. If the
expression evaluates to zero and you used ELSE, Adams/View executes the commands between the
ELSE and the END commands.
The question-mark/colon (?:) operator used in a conditional expression replaces and IF/ELSE command
that distinguishes one of two values. The expression consists of three parts, a condition whose truth
determines which value is selected, and two expressions for the values.
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question-mark is interpreted as boolean-valued. If it is true (non-zero), then expression a is used as the
value of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b) variable set variable =
variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a)) else variable set
variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b)) end
This can be expressed more concisely by using a ?: conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min & real = (EVAL((variable_a <
variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))

Example
In the following example, if the marker MAR1 exists, Adams/View modifies its location. If the marker
does not exist, Adams/View creates it and sets its location.
if condition=(DB_EXISTS ("MAR1"))
marker modify marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
else
marker create marker=mar1 location=2,0,0
end
22 Adams/View
Conditional Constructs and Loops

The next example illustrates how to use ELSEIF to determine the type of object and then perform an
operation on the object based on the object's type. The example assumes that an Adams/View variable
named .mdi.org exists and its type is database object.
! Bodies
variable create variable=object_type string=(eval(DB_TYPE(.MDI.obj)))
if condition=(object_type == "marker")
interface command_builder command="marker modify marker" initial=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.main_objecttable parameter="Points"
elseif condition=(object_type == "flexible_body")
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.flx_dia_panel parameter=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - complex joints
elseif condition=(object_type == "coupler" )
interface dialog display dialog=.gui.coupler_cremod parameter=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "gear" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify complex_joint gear"
initial=(.MDI.obj)
! Constraints - Higher Pair contact
elseif condition=(object_type == "curve_curve" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify higher_pair_contact
curve_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
elseif condition=(object_type == "point_curve" )
interface command_builder command="constraint modify higher_pair_contact
point_curve" init=(.MDI.obj)
end

FOR/END
The FOR and END commands allow you to execute a group of commands a fixed set of times. You can
use FOR either to perform numeric iteration or to operate on a set of Adams/View objects, such as
markers or parts. Adams/View executes the commands bracketed by the FOR and END for each value
of a variable in the specified range or upon the specified set of objects.
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSEIF/ELSE/END).

Format

Using FOR/END to Perform Numeric Iteration

To perform numeric iteration, use this form of FOR/END:
FOR VARIABLE_NAME=var START_VALUE=REAL &
INCREMENT_VALUE=REAL &
END_VALUE=REAL
...
END
Adams/View executes the commands between the FOR and END for each value of var, in the range
START_VALUE to END_VALUE. At the beginning of the FOR loop, Adams/View creates a temporary
Adams/View variable named var of type REAL. Adams/View deletes the variable when the loop
terminates. If you use the loop variable in an expression that requires it to persist, Adams/View issues a
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 23
Conditional Constructs and Loops

warning message and does not delete the variable at the termination of the loop. If you do not want this
behavior, you can use the EVAL function as described in Examples of Numeric Iteration for FOR/END.
START_VALUE, INCREMENT_VALUE, and END_VALUE can be any valid real expression.
INCREMENT_VALUE can be either positive or negative, and defaults to 1.0 if not specified. If
INCREMENT_VALUE is positive, Adams/View increments the value of var by the increment for each
iteration and stops looping when the value of var is greater than END_VALUE.
If INCREMENT_VALUE is negative, Adams/View decrements var by the increment for each iteration
and continues looping until var is less than END_VALUE.
The commands inside the FOR/END loop can use var as they would any other Adams/View variable of
type REAL.

Examples of Numeric Iteration for FOR/END:

In this example, Adams/View creates 10 markers, MAR1 through MAR10, on the default part, and
locates them one unit apart on the x-axis of the part's coordinate system.
for variable_name=tempreal start_value=1 end_value=10
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR" // RTOI(tempreal))) &
location=(eval(tempreal-1)), 0, 0
end
The example demonstrates the use of the EVAL function when you want to assign the instantaneous value
of an expression rather than the expression itself. An expression's value changes whenever the value of
any variable in it changes. Sometimes you want this behavior; other times you do not. Using EVAL
avoids this behavior.
When Adams/View applies EVAL to an expression, it obtains the current value of the expression. For
example, when you use EVAL with the expression (tempreal-1), Adams/View assigns 0.0 to the x
component of the location for MAR1, 1.0 to MAR2, and so on. Without EVAL, Adams/View assigns the
expression, (tempreal-1), to the x component of the location, resulting in all the markers having locations
at (9, 0, 0) at the termination of the FOR loop. Another effect is that Adams/View does not delete the
variable tempreal when the FOR loop terminates, because the locations of the markers still depend on it.
The locations change again if you subsequently assign a different value to tempreal.

Using FOR/END To Operate on a Set of Objects

Use the following form of FOR/END to operate on a set of objects (for how to view the list of database
object types, see Database Object Type):
FOR VARIABLE_NAME=var OBJECT_NAMES=objects &
TYPE=database_object_type
...
END
For this type of FOR loop, Adams/View creates a temporary Adams/View variable named var of type
OBJECT and successively assigns the value of each object in the set to the variable. The commands
inside the FOR/END pair can use var as they would any other Adams/View variable of type OBJECT.
Adams/View deletes the variable when the loop terminates.
24 Adams/View
Conditional Constructs and Loops

In this example Adams/View renumbers the Adams IDs of markers belonging to the part follower,
starting at 5000, and incrementing by one for each marker in the set.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=5000
for variable_name=the_marker object_names=.fourbar.follower.*
type=marker
marker modify marker_name=(eval(the_marker))
adams_id=(eval(ip))
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
As in the previous example, you can use the EVAL function to get the instantaneous value of an
expression rather than assigning the expression itself.
As shown, you can use wildcards to specify the objects for the OBJECT_NAME parameter. The TYPE
parameter applies a filter to the set of objects, in this case, matching only children of the part that are
markers.
If you use a more general wildcard, Adams/View may execute the command more slowly than if you use
a more specific wildcard. For example, if you want all the markers in the model MOD1, use
OBJECT_NAME=.MOD1.* type=MARKER instead of OBJECT_NAME=* type=MARKER.
For more sophisticated searching and filtering, see the database functions, such as DB_CHILDREN, in
the Design-Time Functions section of the Adams/View Function Builder online help. You also may want
to use the miscellaneous function SELECT_OBJECT of the same guide.

WHILE/END
Use the WHILE and END commands to execute a group of commands zero or more times. Adams/View
executes the commands that WHILE and END bracket repeatedly until the condition associated with the
WHILE command is FALSE (zero).
You can nest any combination of looping (FOR/END, WHILE/END) and conditional constructs
(IF/ELSE/ELSEIF/END).

Format
The format of the WHILE command is:
WHILE CONDITION=(expression)
...
END
Adams/View evaluates the value of expression and executes the commands between the WHILE and the
END command if the value is non-zero. Adams/View evaluates the expression at the end of the loop and
continues looping as long as the value of the expression is non-zero.
 Automating Your Work Using Macros 25
Conditional Constructs and Loops

Examples
In this example, Adams/View creates 10 markers, MAR1 through MAR10, on the default part, and
locates them one unit apart on the x-axis of the coordinate system.
variable create variable_name=ip integer_value=0
while condition=(ip < 10)
marker create marker_name=(eval("MAR"//ip+1)) &
location=(eval(ip)),0,0
variable modify variable_name=ip integer_value=(eval(ip+1))
end
variable delete variable_name=ip
You can use the EVAL function to get the value of an expression rather than assigning the expression
itself. Use of the EVAL function with loops is described in the FOR/END.

RETURN
Use the RETURN command to exit a command file or macro and return to the command file or macro
that invoked it. Its effect is similar to BREAK when you use it to exit a loop, skipping all remaining
commands in the command file or macro (including any cleanup commands you may have at the end of
your macro).
If a RETURN is executed within loops (nested to any depth), it exits those loops and performs all required
cleanup, just as multiple BREAKs would do. You can have as many RETURN commands in your
command files or macros as you want.

Format
RETURN

Example
RETURN is often used as a means for recovering from an error condition or allowing a user to cancel an
operation. Below are two examples.

Example 1
In the example, the RETURN command lists information on the contents of the select list, but only if
there are objects on the list. If it finds no objects, it returns and issues an error message.
if condition=(DB_COUNT(.SELECT_LIST, "objects_in_group")==0)
mdi gui_utl_alert_box_1 type="Error" text="Select List is
empty. Select objects first."
return
end !if
!
info empty
!
list_info group &
group_name = .SELECT_LIST &
brief = on &
26 Adams/View
Conditional Constructs and Loops

write_to_terminal = on
!

Example 2
This example macro determines if a particular file exists and asks the user if it should overwrite the
existing file.
variable create variable=$_self.fileName string="file.dat"
if condition=(file_exists($_self.fileName))
if condition=(alert("warning", "Delete existing
"//$_self.fileName//"?", "Ok", "Cancel", "", 2) == 2)
variable create variable=$_self.junk &
int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" not
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
variable delete variable=$_self.*
return
end

variable create variable=$_self.junk &

int=(alert("information", "File "//$_self.fileName//" was
destroyed.", "Ok", "", "", 1))
end

! Write the new file.

file text open file=($_self.fileName) open_mode=overwrite
file text close

! Clean up.
variable delete variable=$_self.*

Ternary Conditional Operator

The ternary conditional operator used in a conditional expression replaces an IF/ELSE command that
distinguishes between one of two values. The expression consists of three parts: a condition whose truth
determines which value is selected, and two expressions for the values.

Format
condition expression ? expression a : expression b
When evaluated, the conditional takes on one of the two values. The expression that comes before the
question mark is interpreted as Boolean-valued. If it is true (nonzero), then expression a is used as the
value of the conditional, otherwise expression b is used as the value.

Example
For example, consider the commands below:
if condition = (variable_a < variable_b)
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_a))
else
variable set variable = variable_min real = (EVAL(variable_b))
end
 Interface 27
Conditional Constructs and Loops

You can express this more concisely using the ternary conditional operator:
variable set variable = variable_min &
real = (EVAL((variable_a < variable_b)? variable_a : variable_b))

Note: The ternary conditional operator has lower precedence than all other operators. Any
operations performed in sub expressions are performed before the ternary operator is
evaluated:
x < 10 ? x + 10 : x * 10
is the same as:
(x < 10) ? (x + 10) : (x * 10)
Likewise:
s == "Bob" ? "Hello" : "Goodbye" // ", " // s
is evaluated as:
(s == "Bob") ? ("Hello") : ("Goodbye" // ", " // s)

Interface
28 Adams/View
About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

Many of the windows, menus, and dialog boxes you see in Adams/View are interface objects in the
Adams/View Modeling database. Using Adams/View commands, the Menu Builder, and the Dialog-Box
Builder, you can modify, delete, or add to the standard windows, menus, and dialog boxes. You can make
changes such as:
• Remove menu entries that you seldom use.
• Add a new shortcut menu to display a standard dialog box that you often use.
• Add a set of menus and dialog boxes to execute your own macros or command files. (For more
on macros, see Automating Your Work Using Macros.)
• Create a custom interface for your particular Adams application, perhaps simplifying virtual
prototyping for novice users.

Note: You cannot customize all Adams/View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.

Adams/View Interface Objects

Most of the Adams/View interface is stored in the Modeling database in a hierarchy similar to that of
modeling objects. All standard, customizable interface objects are stored under a library named GUI. The
library is a convenient place to collect all the standard interface objects.
The two top-level interface objects are windows and dialog boxes. The main modeling window, for
example, is named main. Its full database name is .gui.main.
Windows and dialog boxes look similar, although they are quite different. Windows usually stay on the
screen for some time as you work in them, while dialog boxes come and go as you need to enter data or
access controls. Windows can contain toolbars and menu bars. Both windows and dialog boxes contain
other interface objects such as buttons, labels, and so on.
Most customizing involves creating new dialog boxes or modifying standard dialog boxes. Unless you
are creating an entirely custom interface, you will not need to modify the standard windows themselves.
You may want to modify the menu bars, menus, and toolbars.
Dialog boxes and toolbars can contain interface objects such as labels, fields, buttons, toggle buttons,
radio boxes, option menus, and sliders. In addition, containers and button-stack objects allow you to
group other objects.
Most of the modeling menus and dialog boxes ar e available in the database, and you can customize these.
Some dialog boxes are controlled entirely from within Adams/View. These do not appear in the database,
and you cannot customize them. They include:
• Database Navigator
 Interface 29
About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

• Dialog-Box Builder
• Command Navigator
• Data Browser in the plotting window
• File Selection dialog box
• Coordinate window
• Plugin Manager

List of Interface Objects

Below is a list of objects you can add to dialog boxes and their intended uses.

Object: Does the following:

Label Displays text or an image in a dialog box.
Field Provides space where you can enter text or numbers.
Button Activates an operation; has a picture (icon), label, or text on it, indicating what the
operation is.
Toggle Button Indicates an active status.
Separator Draws a horizontal line. Does not allow application interaction.
Slider Sets the numerical value of an object without having to type in data.
Option Menu Allows one of many selections; with a push graphic to allow the entire list to
appear.
Radio Box Sets states or modes.
Button Stack Allows multiple buttons to come up so you can select one by clicking and dragging
the right mouse button.
Container Allows overlaid information.
Tab Container Similar to a container but can be added to a dialog box or another container. When
you add a tab container, a tab appears in the parent container.
Data Table Displays numbers and allows you to add columns or rows.
30 Adams/View
About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

Hierarchy of Interface Objects

 Interface 31
About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

Examples of Interface Objects

How the Interface Works

As you use the Adams/View interface to make changes to your model, the interface executes
Adams/View commands. For example, if you use a dialog box to change a spring's stiffness, when you
select OK, the interface issues the commands to modify the spring object, including the spring stiffness
you specified in the dialog box. You can see these commands in the Command window or in the
Adams/View Log file.
You control the behavior of your custom interface by programming commands for it to issue. For
example, you specify the commands a button executes when the user selects it. Fields, option menus,
radio boxes, toggle buttons, and sliders can also execute commands.
There are no restrictions on the commands that the interface can execute. A button can change your
model, display a dialog box, or change another setting or object in the dialog box. It can also execute a
macro you wrote. Adams/View macros allow you to create your own commands that automate complex
or repetitive procedures. For more information on macros, see Automating Your Work Using Macros.

Changing the Interface

The Menu Builder and Dialog-Box Builder are interactive tools that you can use to customize the interface.
They allow you to quickly access and change most Interface objects and capabilities. Using these, you
can do a great deal of customization without going into the details of the interface commands and how
they are stored.
The command interface in the Command Navigator contains full creation, deletion, and modification
commands for all the interface objects. These commands give you access to all capabilities, some of
which are not available from the builders. You will find these commands useful within the interface itself
to display objects, change settings, or change appearances depending on a user's input.
32 Adams/View
About Adams/View Menus and Dialog Boxes

Saving Interface Changes

There are several ways to save your interface changes. One option is to save the objects in the standard
Modeling database, aview.bin, or in any modeling database you create. Whether you save your changes
in the standard modeling database or your own depends on the extent to which you want the menu
changes available in future work:
• Storing the changes in the standard modeling database aview.bin makes the changes available
whenever a user starts Adams/View.
• Storing the changes in a particular modeling database makes the menus available only when a
user opens that database.
Another option is to save the new or modified objects in a command or menu text file that you can reload
as needed. The Dialog-Box Builder’s Export command writes a dialog box to an Adams/View command
file. To reload this file, use the Import command or the file command read command to read the
command file. This is the most reliable way of making your GUI customization upwardly compatible in
future versions of Adams/View.
The Menu Builder Export Text menu writes the text outline for the menu to a text file. To reload the
menu, use the Menu Builder Import Text menu or the interface menubar read command to read the
text file into a menubar.
For a comparison of modeling databases and command files, see Comparison of Adams File Formats. For
information on using aview.cmd to execute commands automatically when you start Adams/View, see
Running and Configuring Adams.
 Interface 33
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

You can use the Menu Builder to modify and create menus to better suit your needs and preferences. With
the Menu Builder, you can change the structure of an existing menu to match your industry's terminology
or create new menus. For example, you can use the Menu Builder to change the main window's menu bar
so it includes a Tire menu for adding tires to your model. You can build menus for a particular model or
for an entire application.

When you create menus in Adams/View, you can specify keyboard accelerators (shortcuts) and
mnemonics.

Menu Entry Syntax

The Menu Builder uses an outline-like format to display menus. You modify the menus by directly
editing the text outline.
Each line defines an object and its name, or specifies information about the parent object. For clarity,
Adams/View indents the lines. As you edit the text, you can also indent the lines.
There are four types of objects in menus: menus, push buttons or icon buttons, toggle buttons, and
separators. The text lines that define these are shown in the table below. Click a text line to learn more.

Text Lines Defining Objects

The text line: Its parameter is:
MENUn label
BUTTONn label or name of icon file
TOGGLEn label
SEPARATORn (none)
34 Adams/View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

The text lines have the following parameters:

• n is an integer between 1 and 10, usually 1, 2, or 3. It defines the menu level in which the object
appears. Level 1 is the first level. MENU1 appears on the menu bar, for example, while
BUTTON2 appears under the preceding MENU1. The n is required for MENU, but is optional
for the other objects. If you omit the level, Adams/View assumes the object belongs under the
last MENU.
You can cascade menus up to 10 deep by nesting MENUs below other MENUs. You can include
as many buttons in a menu as you want, although you should not create more than will fit on
your screen.
• label is the text that appears in the menu. For an icon button, you specify the icon name instead
of the text. In Motif, the icon name is the name of a XBM (X BitMap) or XPM (X PixMap)
format file. In Windows, the icon name is the name of a bitmap (.bmp) format file.
labels can contain ampersand (&) characters that specify keyboard mnemonic shortcuts for a
menu item (for example, ALT-F opens the File menu).
Note that with the exception of CMD=lines, spaces are not permitted in the menu structure input.
Therefore, NAME = my_menu is not valid, but NAME=my_menu is. This differs from Adams/View
command language where spacing rules are flexible.
The following shows a portion of the Menu Builder could be used to define a Help menu in Adams/View.
To the right of the Menu Builder is the corresponding Help menu as it appears in Adams/View.

Menu Builder and Corresponding Help Menu

MENU1 &Help NAME=help

HELP=Get Help on Adams
BUTTON2 &Toggle Tip Text
NAME=tips
HELP=Toggle popup descriptions on/off
CMD=help tips=toggle
SEPARATOR2
BUTTON2 Adams/View &Help
NAME=view_help
HELP=Help for Adams/View
CMD=interface help file="view/view_hlp/view_home.htm"
BUTTON2 &Other Product Help
NAME=other_help
HELP=Help for other products
CMD=interface help file=products.htm"
SEPARATOR2
BUTTON2 &About...
HELP=Display product info
CMD=int dia disp dia=.gui.about_adams
 Interface 35
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

MENU
A MENU entry creates a pull-down or pull-right menu. First-level menus, MENU1, appear in the menu
bar and pull downward. Lower-level menus, such as MENU2 and MENU3, appear as cascading pull-
right menus.

Syntax
MENUn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=Help

Parameters
• n = Number identifying whether the menu appears on the menu bar or on a pull-down menu. Can
be either:
• n = 1 - Menu appears on menu bar.
• n 2 - Menu appears on pull-down menus.
• TITLE = Text string that appears in the menu bar. You can also place an & in the title in front of
the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter &File to have the resulting
menu be File and the mnemonic would be Alt+F).
• NAME = Name of the object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams/View
constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar and in the tool tips, and describes the menu group.

Example
MENU1 File
NAME=file
HELP=Read and write files

BUTTON (Menu Command)

A BUTTON entry defines a menu command. You can place a button either on a pull-down menu or on a
sub-menu. BUTTONS can specify an accelerator key (for example, Ctrl+M, Shift+G, or F12) that
invokes the button's action.

Syntax
BUTTONn LABEL :: ACCELERATOR
NAME=name
HELP=help
CMD=command

Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the button. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Button appears on pull-down menu.
36 Adams/View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

• n = 3 - Button appears on a sub-menu.

• LABEL = Button name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu. By convention, you should
include ellipsis (...) after the button name if the button displays a dialog box. You can also place
an & in the label in front of the letter to be used as the keyboard mnemonic (for example, enter
&Save to have the resulting menu command be Save and its mnemonic be Alt+S.)
• ACCELERATOR = Key or series of keys that execute the menu command. To create a series of
keys, you use the Shift, Ctrl, or Alt keys followed by the plus symbol (+) and any letter (a to z)
or function key (F1, F2, and so on). No spaces can be between any of the keys (for example,
Alt+A, instead of Alt + A).
The Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys are case sensitive (the first letter must be capitalized), while the
key letters are not (user can enter A or a). You also can group the Shift key with the Ctrl and Alt
keys (for example, Shift+Ctrl+A). If you combine the keys, the Shift key must be executed first.
• NAME = Name of the menu object in the modeling database. If you omit NAME, Adams/View
constructs a default identifier, such as MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the button.
• CMD = Command, sequence of commands, that the button executes.

Note: Multiple-line commands need CMD before each line.

Example
BUTTON2 &Export
NAME=export
HELP=Write data to file
CMD=interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name=.gui.file_export

TOGGLE
A toggle creates a menu entry that toggles between two states. It creates a check mark depending on the
state value (on or off). Make sure that if you create a toggle, you maintain its state. A TOGGLE can be
on a pull-down or sub-menu.

Syntax
TOGGLEn TITLE
NAME=name
HELP=help
STATE=state
CMD=command

Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the toggle. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Toggle appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Toggle appears on a sub-menu
 Interface 37
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

• TITLE = Toggle name that appears in the pull-down or sub-menu.

• NAME = Text that identifies the toggle so that you can define keyboard shortcuts and
mnemonics for it. If you omit NAME, Adams/View constructs a default identifier, such as
MENU_4 or BUTTON_7.
• HELP = Text that appears in the status bar or tool tips describing the toggle.
• STATE = Current state of toggle (on or off).
• CMD = Command to execute.

SEPARATOR
A separator creates a horizontal line between menu entries on either a pull-down or sub-menu to indicate
groups of comments.

Syntax
SEPARATORn

Parameters
• n = Number identifying the placement of the separator. Can be either:
• n = 2 - Separator appears on pull-down menu
• n = 3 - Separator appears on a sub-menu

Example
SEPARATOR2

Creating or Modifying a Menu

The Menu Builder lets you create and modify menu bars for existing Adams/View windows. If you don't
want to use the Menu Builder to create and modify menus, you can create a text file that defines a menu
and then import that text into the Menu Builder.

To create or modify a menu in the Menu Builder:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Menu, and then select Modify.
The Menu Builder appears, displaying the main menu.
2. Scroll to the menu you want to modify or to the location where you want to add a menu.
3. Type in your changes.
4. From the Menu Bar, select Apply.

Restoring a Customized Menu

There are two menu commands that read in your customized menus:
38 Adams/View
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder

• Read local Main Menu - Reads in the file main.mnu, which must be located in the local
directory (the directory where you started Adams/View or the current directory set using the
commands File - Select Directory).
• Read - Reads in a .mnu menu file of any name and location.

These menu commands are helpful if you have a new version of Adams/View or created a new Modeling
database and want to read in your customized menus.

To read a main.mnu file in the local directory:

• From the Tools menu, point to Menu, and then select Read local Main Menu.

To read in any .mnu file:

1. From the Tools menu, point to Menu, and the select Read.
2. Enter the name and location of the file.
3. Select OK.

Importing and Exporting Menus

You can import text from a .mnu file at the current position of the cursor in the Menu Builder. You can
also export the menu to a .mnu text file, for example, for review by others or use in another Modeling
database.

To import text:
1. In the Menu Builder, place the cursor at the location you want to bring in the text.
2. From the Menu Builder File menu, select Import.
3. Enter the name and location of the text file containing the menu text.
4. Select OK.

Loading a Menu into the Menu Builder

After opening the Menu Builder, you can load any .mnu menu file in the current modeling database for
editing or review. After loading the menu, Adams/View also displays it in its window.

To load a menu into the Menu Builder:

1. From the Menu Builder File menu, select Load.
The Database Navigator appears with a list of menus in the modeling database.
2. Select the desired menu, and then select OK.
 Interface 39
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box

Builder
Adams/View uses dialog boxes that contain a variety of Interface objects, such as labels, fields, buttons,
and more. You can use the Adams Dialog-Box Builder to create and modify dialog boxes to better suit
your needs and preferences. For example, you can add a new button to a standard dialog box that selects
options you commonly use, or create a new dialog box to execute special procedures you run often,
including one or more macros.

Note: You cannot customize all Adams/View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.

Creating Dialog Boxes

To create a dialog box:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Create.
The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
2. On the Dialog Box menu in the Dialog-Box Builder, select New.
3. Enter the library to which the new dialog box should belong. By default, it belongs in the library
.gui.
4. In the Name text box, enter a title for your dialog box.
5. Select any predefined buttons you'd like on your dialog box.
6. Select OK.
A new dialog box appears.

Modifying Dialog Boxes

Once you create a dialog box, the Dialog-Box Builder changes to modify mode. You can then add a variety
of interface objects to the dialog box, as well as customize the layout, appearance, commands, and size
of the objects in the dialog box.

Note: You cannot customize all Adams/View dialog boxes and tools. For example, you cannot
customize the Plugin Manager or the Information window. The Dialog-Box Builder's
Dialog Box -> Open menu provides access to those dialog boxes, containers, and toolbars
that you can customize.
40 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

To modify an existing dialog box:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the desired dialog box.
The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
3. Modify the dialog box as desired.

Tip: After displaying a dialog box from the Tools menu, you can double-click the
background of a displayed dialog box to display the Dialog-Box Builder and modify
the dialog box.

Renaming Dialog Boxes

To rename a dialog box:
1. From the Tools menu in the Dialog-Box Builder, point to Dialog Box, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Select the desired dialog box by double-clicking the name. The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
3. From the Dialog Box menu, select Rename.
4. Enter a new name for the dialog box.
5. Select OK.

Adding Interface Objects to Dialog Boxes

Learn about:
• Adding Objects
• Adding Predefined Objects
• Adding Images

Adding Objects
You can add Interface objects to your dialog box.The instructions for adding objects to your dialog box
are the same for all types of objects.

To add interface objects to a dialog box:

1. On the Create menu in the Dialog-Box Builder, select the object you want to add.
2. Place the cursor in the dialog box to which you are going to add the object.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to create your object.
 Interface 41
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

You can also click the left mouse button, and Adams/View creates an object of default size.

Example of Adding an Object to a Dialog Box

Adding Predefined Objects

You can add more standard buttons to your dialog box even after you've created several using the
Predefined menu. For example, if you did not place an Apply button on your dialog box and would like
to add one after you created your dialog box, you can do so from the Predefined menu.

To add a predefined object:

• On the Create menu, point to Predefined, and select a predefined object to add.

Adding Images
You add an image to your dialog box just as you add a label. The image format for the label must be:
• Motif - .xbm (X BitMap) or .xpm (X PixMap)
• Windows - .bmp (must be a 16-color bitmap)

You cannot size the image in the Dialog-Box Builder. Therefore, if you want to fill the entire dialog box,
you'll need a very big image.
For sample images, see the directory /install_dir/aview/bitmaps where install_dir is the directory where
you installed your Adams products.

To add an image:
1. On the Create menu, select Label.
2. Draw the label so it fits the size of the image.
3. Double-click the label to activate it.
42 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

4. From the option menu, select Appearance.

5. Clear the value in the Label Text box.
6. In the Icon File box, enter the path to and name of the image.
7. From the Justified option buttons, select the alignment for the image.
8. Select Apply.

Tip: To see the image, you may need to select Test Box from the Options menu.

Moving Interface Objects

You can move Interface objects:
• Using the mouse.
• By entering coordinate locations in the Dialog-Box Builder.

• Using the Arrow tools in the Dialog-Box Builder. The tools move objects
to the edges of the dialog box or to the edges of other objects. The tools are located along the top
of the Dialog-Box Builder.
Learn about Setting Distance Between Interface Objects.

To move objects using the mouse:

1. Select the object to move by clicking it. If you want to select more than one object, hold down the
left mouse button and drag across all the objects you want to select.
You can also click the middle mouse button to select more objects.
2. Hold down the left mouse button, with the cursor over a selected object, and move the mouse in
the direction you want to move the object.
The selected object or objects move as you move the mouse.

To move objects using coordinate locations:

1. Select the object to move by clicking it.
2. On the Edit menu, select Attributes to load the object’s attributes for that object into the Dialog-
Box Builder.
You can also double-click on the object to select and load its attributes at the same time.
3. If it is not already selected, set Attributes to Layout.
4. In the Left: and Top: boxes, enter your coordinate values. The lower the value, the closer your
object is to the upper left corner of your dialog box or container.
5. From the Units option buttons, select the type of locations you entered in Step 4. You can define
the location of the objects by entering absolute pixel locations (Absolute) or relative locations
(Relative) as a percentage of the parent object.
 Interface 43
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

6. Select Apply.

To move objects using the Arrow tools :

1. Select the object or objects to move.
2. Select the Arrow tool indicating the direction in which to move your object.
The object moves next to the edge of the dialog box. If another object is in the way, the selected
object stops next to that object.

Resizing Interface Objects

Adams/View provides several ways to resize your Interface objects, as described below. The tools are
located along the top of the Dialog-Box Builder.

To increase the size of objects using the last four arrow icons on the
Dialog-Box Builder toolbar:
1. Select the object(s).
2. Click on the arrow icon indicating the direction in which you want to increase your object(s).

To resize objects in small increments using the mouse:

1. Double-click on the object.
Adams/View selects the object and displays reshaping handles around it.

2. Increase or decrease the size of your object by moving the reshaping handles.

To resize objects by entering measurements in the Dialog-Box Builder:

1. Select the object.
2. On the Edit menu, select Attributes to load the object’s attributes for that object into the Dialog-
Box Builder window.
You can also double-click on the object to select and load its attributes at the same time.
3. Set Attributes to Layout, if it is not already selected.
4. Enter measurements in the Width: and/or Height: boxes.
44 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

5. Select Apply.

To make two or more objects the same height or width with respect to the first object
you select:
1. Select the objects. The height and width are with respect to the first object you select.
2. Select one of the following:
• Height tool to make objects the same height.
• Width tool to make objects the same width.

To make two or more objects identical in size, as well as align them:

1. Select the objects. The alignments are with respect to the first object you select.
2. Select one of the following:
• Horizontal Alignment tool to make the objects identical in size and align them
horizontally.
• Vertical Alignment tool to make the objects identical in size and align them vertically.
 Interface 45
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

Aligning Interface Objects

You can use the Alignment tools to align Interface objects with respect to the first
object you select. The tools are located along the top of the Dialog-Box Builder.

To align dialog box objects:

1. Use the middle mouse button to select one or more objects.
2. Select the appropriate alignment tool.

Setting Distance Between Interface Objects

In the Dialog-Box Builder, you can specify the distance between Interface objects and their distance from
the border of the dialog box.

To set distance between objects:

1. From the Preferences menu on the Dialog-Box Builder, select Separation.
46 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

2. Enter a value for Horizontal and Vertical Border Width to specify the distance from the object
to the dialog box border.
3. Enter a value for Horizontal and Vertical Separation to specify the distance between other
interface objects.

Restricting the Size and Position of Interface Objects

In the Dialog-Box Builder, you can restrict the size and position of Interface objects by using the Snap
Grid option. It works similar to the grid in the modeling window. When you drag an item with the mouse
to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest grid point.

Note: Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel
distance), snapping is not very noticeable by default.

To restrict the position and size of objects:

1. On the Preferences menu on the Dialog-Box Builder, select Snap Grid.
2. Enter values for the Horizontal and Vertical Grid Spacing to set the spacing distance between
grid points.
3. Enter values for the Horizontal and Vertical Grid Offset to set where to begin snap grid points
from the top and left borders.

Deleting Interface Objects

To delete interface objects from a dialog box in the Dialog-Box Builder:
1. Select the interface object you want to delete.
2. On the Edit menu in the Dialog-Box Builder, select Delete.

Adding Online Help to Your Dialog Box

You can add an online help file to your dialog box by linking an HTM or HTML file to your customized
dialog box

Note: The following steps only include instructions for linking your dialog box to a help file; they
do not explain how to create HTML help files. Refer to HTML reference guides.

To attach a help file to your dialog box:

1. From the Attributes option menu, select Help.
 Interface 47
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

2. In the Tip Text text box, enter the text you want displayed in the Status toolbar (at the bottom of
the Adams/View window) when your dialog box is open.
3. In the Help File text box, enter the complete path and file name of your help file.

Note: You do not need to complete the Help Link text box. It is used for backward
compatibility only.

Using Commands in Dialog Boxes

Most objects have commands that Adams/View executes when the object changes or a user selects it.
These commands do the real work of the interface, changing your model or changing the interface as
users enter data and make selections.
Learn more about using commands in dialog boxes:
• Viewing and Generating Object Commands
• Substituting Text into Commands
• Conditional Command Expansion
• Special Commands for Windows, Dialog Boxes, and Containers
• Editing Commands

Viewing and Generating Object Commands

You use the Adams/View command language to create commands for objects. You can use the Command
Navigator to find the commands you need. Once you find the commands, copy the commands from the
command window or log file, and paste or type them in to the command text box for the dialog box
object.
You can view and edit the commands in an existing dialog box. Some objects have more than one set of
commands. Push buttons, for example, have commands for a single-click and additional commands for
a double-click. Note that single commands are executed even on double-click. Windows, dialog boxes,
and containers also have special sets of commands which are described below.

To view the commands for an object:

1. Double-click an object containing the commands you want to view.
2. From the Attributes pull-down menu, select Commands.

Substituting Text into Commands

Before executing the commands, Adams/View performs several types of text substitutions. These
substitutions let you include values from interface objects into commands. For example, you can include
a value a user has entered in a text box.
48 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

Include identifiers starting with the symbol $, to indicate where to substitute text. There are four kinds of
substitutions:

$object_name $object_name refers to an interface object whose name is the same as

object_name. When Adams/View executes the command, it substitutes the
current value of object_name for $object_name. For example, $my_field
substitutes the value of the interface object my_field. The following table lists
the values for different interface objects:

IFor example, to include the contents of the field my_value in a command, you
enter:

my_command my_parameter = $my_value

If the field contains 123, then Adams/View executes the command:

my_command my_parameter = 123

By default, the value of an option menu or radio box is the text of the displayed
or selected button. By default, the value of a toggle is on or off.

You can specify other values for Adams/View to substitute. In the toggle
button Value attributes, there are fields to set the toggle values. In the Option
Menu and Radio Box Value attributes, you can add a substitution value after
the text for each choice, separated by a vertical bar "|". The values do not affect
the displayed text; they are only used in commands.
The Object: Has the value:
Field Contents of field
Option-menu Selection of value for current selection
Radio-box Selection or vale for current selection
Toggle button On/off or specified on/off value.
Slider Integer slider value
 Interface 49
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

$_value $_value substitutes the value of the object that contains the command. For
example, if the commands are on a button named my_toggle, $_value is the
same as $my_toggle. Another example might be if you want to create a toggle
button that returns a value of "1" or "0". You would do so with commands like
the following:

if condition=($_value)
! commands executed when user turns on toggle
else
! commands executed when user turns off
toggleend
Wherever possible, you should use $_value instead of the name of the actual
object because it is easier to understand and maintain since it does not rely on
the name of the object holding the command. If you see $_value in a
command, you know immediately that it refers to the value of the interface
object. In addition, if you change the name of the object, you do not need to
change the commands. You will find this especially helpful for toggle buttons,
radio boxes, and option menus, where you almost always want the value of the
object in the associated commands.
$_self, $_parent, These substitute the name of the object executing the commands, the object's
$_topgui immediate parent, or the parent dialog box, window, or toolbar. When
Adams/View executes the commands, it substitutes the full database name of
the appropriate object.

$_self, $_parent, and $_topgui help you make your dialog boxes easier to read
and maintain. For example, a dialog box can load one of its child fields with
this command:

interface field set field=$_self.myfield

strings=...
If you use this command and you rename the dialog box, you don't have to
change the command. Wherever possible, it's a good idea to make your object
names refer to $_self or $_parent rather than literal full names.

Note that $_value and $_self are different, but easy to confuse. $_value inserts
the value of the object, $_self inserts the name of the object.
50 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display
command.

The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams/View executes the commands,
it substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass
information to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for
example, pass the name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by
the dialog box or objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.
$_1, $_2, $_3,... These refer to parameters passed with a window or dialog-box display
command.

The window or dialog-box, and any child of the window or dialog box, can
include $_1,... in the commands. When Adams/View executes the commands,
it substitutes the current value of the parameter. This allows you to pass
information to a window or dialog box as you display it. You might, for
example, pass the name of an object to a dialog box. Commands executed by
the dialog box or objects in the dialog box can then refer to this object.

Conditional Command Expansion

Back quotes contain a conditional substitution. If any $name or $value substitution inside the quotes is
empty, then Adams/View removes the text between the . $name is empty if the text returned is empty
( ) or if the object is disabled or not displayed.
Conditional substitution makes it easier to handle optional or mutually-exclusive parameters in
commands. For example, if you use a command such as the following and the user does not supply a
value, the command fails:
my_command my_parameter = $my_value ...
Instead, if you use a command like the following Adams/View only includes my_parameter =
$my_value, if the user has entered a value:
my_command my_parameter = $my_value ...
The same technique handles mutually-exclusive parameters. As long as the parameters are wrapped in
, and only one option is displayed or enabled at a time, the command only includes the displayed
parameter.

Example
Conditional expansion allows for the commands for custom interface objects to ignore parameters in
which the user does not enter any value. Back quotes [ parameter=value ] indicate parameters that will
be collapsed when the command is executed. This makes the resulting custom interface object easier to
use and relieves you from having to handle error checking for empty fields.
 Interface 51
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

The Easy Beam Properties custom dialog box below shows how conditional expansion can be used.

The command for this dialog box modifies the indicated beam's properties as shown below:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
The problem with this configuration is that the user must enter all of the fields in the dialog box or the
entire command fails. For example, if the user left the Damping Ratio Field blank, its command would
fail with the following error:
ERROR: ---------------------------------------
ERROR: Invalid input. Enter a number.
ERROR: The command was not executed.
ERROR: &> damping_ratio =
ERROR: -------------------------------
If the command is modified to incorporate conditional expansion, the user could leave fields blank
without affecting the execution of the command.

To add the conditional expansion, you add back quotes ( ) for each parameter. The resulting command
looks like the following:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = $f_beam_name &
youngs_modulus = $f_youngs_modulus &
shear_modulus = $f_shear_modulus &
damping_ratio = $f_damping_ratio
Now the command can handle blank fields. For example, if the user of the dialog box leaves the Shear
Modulus field blank with the new command, the following command is executed:
force modify element_like beam &
beam_name = .model_1.ebm_beam4 &
52 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

youngs_modulus = 2.07E+05 &

damping_ratio = 1.0E-02
Adams/View did not include the parameter for the blank field.
Conditional expansion is valid for all parameter types in addition to fields that can return no value.
Conditional expansion can be included for none, some, or all parameters in a command. In the example
above, the beam_name parameter is required by the command, so the single quotes are not included.

Special Commands for Windows, Dialog Boxes, and Containers

Windows, dialog boxes, and containers have special sets of commands: start, execution, and finish
commands. Adams/View automatically executes start commands when the object is displayed and
automatically executes finish commands when an object is undisplayed. Execution commands are
executed by the interface dialog_box/window/container execute command.
Start and finish commands help you initialize settings and put default values into fields when an interface
object is displayed. If necessary, finish commands also allow you to clean up when the object is not
displayed.
Execution commands are not required, but are a useful place to put a set of commands that several objects
can execute. The default OK and Apply buttons use execution commands, for example.

Example
You can display windows and dialog boxes with a list of parameters. These parameters can be used by
the interface objects and commands within that interface object. The parameters are passed as quoted text
strings into the interface object.
Once the window or dialog box is displayed, it can make use of these parameters in its own commands.
These parameters are automatically assigned the special names $_1, $_2, ..., $_n, for each parameter that
is passed to it.
This functionality is especially useful for specifying default values for fields or other interface objects in
the new window or dialog box. For example, a button labeled Easy Beam Size has been added to the
 Interface 53
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

custom Easy Beam Properties dialog box. The button contains commands that display a new dialog box
for further modification of a beam:

The name of the beam is passed to the new dialog box so that it automatically loads the relevant
parameters. The command for the Easy Beam Size button is:
interface dialog_box display &
dialog_box_name = .gui.db_beam_size &
'parameters="$f_beam_name"'
In addition to specifying the name of the dialog box to open, the command also specifies a parameter to
pass to the new dialog box.
The start command for the new Easy Beam Size dialog box uses this passed parameter to automatically
load the current values for the beam as shown below:
if condition=("$_1" != "")
interface field set field_name=$_self.f_beam_name str="$_1"
end
if condition=("$f_beam_name" != "")
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_length &
database_field="$f_beam_name.length"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_area_of_cross_section &
data_base_field="$f_beam_name.area"
interface field set &
field_name=$_self.f_i_marker_name &
database_field="$f_beam_name.i_marker_name"

interface field set &

field_name=$_self.f_j_marker_name &
database_field="$f_beam_name.j_marker_name"
end
The if statements check to see if the passed parameter "$_1" contains a value. If a value is found, the
interface field set command loads with the name passed from the calling interface object (in this case, the
54 Adams/View
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

name of the beam). The second if statement checks to see if the field was set to a beam name. If so, it gets
the current values for the beam and sets the appropriate fields.
Window and dialog box parameters are useful tools for communicating information between interface
objects. To pass multiple parameters, separate them with commas, as in the following example:
interface dialog_box display dialog_box=my_dialog_box
parameters="parameter1", "parameter2", "parameter3"
When the new dialog box appears, it has access to those parameters as $_1, $_2, and $_3, respectively.

Editing Commands
Holding down the right mouse button over the Commands area of the Dialog-Box Builder displays a
shortcut menu with several options for editing the commands as shown in the table below.

Command Editing Options

The command: Does the following:
References Displays and inserts the available $xxx references.
Pick Lets you select an object and insert selected name into commands.
Browse Displays the Database Navigator and inserts selected name into commands.
Cut Removes selected text and places it in the system clipboard.
Copy Copies selected text to system text buffer.
Paste Pastes from system clipboard to cursor location or over selected text.
Edit Displays the text editor vi (by default) with text loaded (UNIX only).

Testing Your Dialog Box

You can test the execution of your dialog box without saving it to your database.

To test your dialog box changes:

1. On the Options menu, select Test Box.
Adams/View displays the dialog box without any object highlighting.
2. Execute your dialog box as desired.

Saving and Reloading Custom Dialog Boxes

Saving your dialog boxes as Adams/View command files is the most reliable way of ensuring that your
custom dialog boxes are upwardly compatible with new versions of Adams/View.
 Authoring Plugins 55
Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder

To save your dialog box:

• On the Dialog Box menu on the Dialog-Box Builder, point to Export, and then select Command
File.

Note: You can also save your dialog box by saving your modeling database as a binary file.
All of your changes are saved if you save a binary file.

Before you reload your dialog box, note that Adams/View does not allow the command file to create
interface objects with the same names as objects that already exist in the database. You must delete or
rename to read in the command file.
This is the most reliable way of ensuring your custom dialog boxes are upwardly compatible with new
versions of Adams.

To reload your custom dialog box:

• On the File menu, select Import, and then read in the desired command file.

Displaying Dialog Boxes

You can display dialog boxes using the Database Navigator. Standard Adams/View dialog boxes are
listed first, in alphabetical order, followed by your custom dialog boxes.
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Display.
The Database Navigator appears, listing all dialog boxes.
2. Select the desired dialog box, and then select OK.
As an alternative, you can create a menu that displays your dialog boxes. For more information, see
Customizing Menus Using the Menu Builder.

Exiting the Dialog-Box Builder

To exit the Dialog-Box Builder:
• From the Dialog Box menu of the Dialog-Box Builder, select Exit.
The Dialog-Box Builder exits but Adams/View still displays your custom dialog box.
See Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface.

Authoring Plugins
56 Adams/View
Introduction

Introduction
By definition, a plugin is a computer program that can or must interact with some other program to
provide a specific functionality. Plugins typically use the UI of their parent program and rely on the native
environment of their parent to provide this functionality.

Plugins in Adams
Adams provides plugins as a very powerful way of customization. With plugins, the end user can modify
the Adams environment to suit their needs. This may involve anything from personalizing the UI (menus,
adding custom dialogs etc.) to writing custom routines, directly called by the Adams/Solver at runtime.
Information is organized into the following sections:
• Section 1 - This section talks in brief about the files that constitute a plugin, their contents and
their role
• Section 2 - This section talks about the locations in which the plugin files can reside
• Section 3 - This section talks about the directory structure in which the files should reside in one
of the locations.
 Authoring Plugins 57
Section 1: The basic plugin

Section 1: The basic plugin

The following files constitute a basic plugin,
1. Plugin xml (plugin_plg.xml)
2. One or both of the ‘plugin binary file’ (plugin.bin) and the ‘The plugin View Dll’ (plugin_view.dll)
3. Solver DLL (plugin.dll)

Plugin xml
The plugin xml serves to publish the existence of a plugin to the product (View, Car, PPT etc). The plugin
manager makes use of the xml files that belong to the individual plugins to create a consolidated list of
plugins that is available for use with the current product.
Among other things, the xml contains information such as the plugin name, version and author as well
as the list of products with which the plugin is compatible. This information is made use of by the plugin
manager to display the information about the plugin in its UI as shown below,

It is recommended, that while creating new plugins, existing plugin xml files be used as reference.
Explanation for some of the most common tags in the xml file is given below,
• Description - Specifies a short multi-line description of the plugin.
• Version - Specifies the version number of the plugin.
58 Adams/View
Section 1: The basic plugin

• Author - Contains information such as the name of the person/organization that created the
plugin.
• LicenseFeature - Contains information related to the licensing feature used by the plugin. The
plugin manager uses this information to denote the number of available licenses.
• ValidWith / NotValidWith - List of the products that the plugin is valid for use with and
otherwise. Only plugins specified in the ValidWith list are displayed in the plugin manager.
The naming convention for the plugin xml file is (plugin_plg.xml), where plugin is the placeholder for
the actual name of the plugin.

The plugin View Dll

The view dll contains a collection of custom written functions/routines to be registered with
Adams/View. The custom routines are written in C or FORTRAN and can reside in any number of files.
Registering a function with Adams/View makes it accessible from the Adams/View command language
for use in expressions.
Apart from the custom functions, a view dll must contain 2 other functions named plugin_initialize and
plugin_terminate (where plugin is a placeholder for the name of the actual plugin). The initialize function
takes care of the function registration, performing license checkouts if necessary etc. The terminate
function on the other hand does exactly the opposite, in un-registering the functions and any other clean
up tasks involved in unloading of the plugin.
The plugin view DLL is created using the ‘mdadams2010 –c aview cr-u’ command. The naming
convention for the view dll is plugin_view.{so, sl, dll}, with the extension specific to the platform under
consideration.

View GUI
The view GUI is a full or a partial binary file containing a View library object. The library has the same
name as that of the plugin (.plugin). The library object typically contains all the macros, UDE definitions
and dialog boxes which the plugin makes use of.
The library object also contains a load macro (.plugin.load). The load macro is typically responsible for
making changes to the parent UI (like adding plugin specific menus to the parent UI) during the plugin
load operation. It is important that the load macro uses a User-Entered Command, for instance:
myplugin load
The user-entered command is required to have the load macro called upon plugin startup. For this, it
might reference other menu or command files. After Adams/View loads the binary, the plugin library will
be searched for this macro for the load process to continue.
The View library object will also contain a corresponding unload macro (.plugin.unload). The unload
macro is complementary to the load macro and usually restores the parent environment when the plugin
is unloaded.
 Authoring Plugins 59
Section 1: The basic plugin

Also, plugin dialog boxes should have commands which call plugin specialized macros instead of
building long command structures in the dialog boxes itself. The plugin load operation automatically sets
an environment variable within the Adams/View session which helps locate the binary file from which
the plugin was loaded. The variable name is plugin_BIN_DIR where plugin is the upper-cased version
of the plugin name. This can be used in the plugin load macro, for instance, to read gui components that
are inside the plugin library.

Example:
macro create macro = .plugin.load &
user = “mdi plugin load” &
com = “file binary read &”, &
“ file = (getenv(\” PLUGIN_BIN_DIR \”) // \” plugin.bin \”) & “, &
“ entity = .gui.main.mbar.my_menu”

This plugin binary must be named plugin.bin (where plugin is the name of the plugin).
Note that no database object in the plugin library references any object outside of the library, otherwise
an unresolved dependency would be introduced between the plugin and the parent application.
60 Adams/View
Section 1: The basic plugin

The bitmap below shows the controls plugin components as seen through the database navigator. Note
the library name (which is the name of the plugin) and the load/unload macros beneath the library.

Solver DLL
This binary contains the custom written functions/routines which are used by the solver during analysis.
The functions can be written in C or FORTRAN and can reside in any number of files. The solver dll is
created using the ‘mdadams2010 –c cr-u’ command.
The naming convention for the solver dll is plugin.{so, sl, dll}, with the extension specific to the platform
under consideration. The convention is not a requirement. It is a recommendation, just so that the solver
dll is easily distinguished from the view dll.
It is recommended that the solver dll have the two standard functions DLL_INIT and
DLL_TERMINATE, although having them is not a requisite. The INIT and TERMINATE functions have
the same role as the initialize and the terminate functions of a View dll. Typical initialization operations
for a solver dll include allocating memory for the plugin, checking out licenses and opening device
 Authoring Plugins 61
Section 1: The basic plugin

handles while termination operations include de-allocating the memory, returning licenses and closing
any open device handles.
The init function is called by the solver as soon as the statements FUNCTION = USER(…), ROUTINE
= libname::fname1 are encountered by the solver. Solver will not initialize the same DLL more than once.
Conversely, DLLs are automatically unloaded under the following conditions,
• A new database is opened
• Solver changed from C++ to FORTRAN or vice-versa.
• The STOP command is issued
• The FILE command is used to read a new model

Again, solver will not call the DLL_TERMINATE function more than once for each dll. Also note that
the terminate function will be called only if the init function was called in the first place.
62 Adams/View
Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin discovery

Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin

discovery
There is a definite manner in which a product/vertical (such as View, Car, and Engine) searches for a
plugin, when the plugin load command is issued by the user. The method in which a product searches a
given plugin is termed here as the search path algorithm.
The following section, describes the locations in which a plugin will be searched. The search order will
be exactly as mentioned below. Note that the plugin files (Plugin xml, view GUI, view dll and solver dll)
that we discussed in the earlier sections need to reside in any one of these locations, in order for the plugin
to be discoverable. The directory structure in which the files should reside in a location is described in
the next section.
1. MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR
This environment variable contains a list of colon separated (semi-colon separated on windows)
directories, set by the user. Each individual directory in this path will be searched for the plugin.
2. Private location for the product
The private location is specific to verticals and is not applicable to View. The set of environment
variables that define the private location for a product are as follows,

Product Private environment variable

Adams/Car MDI_ACAR_PRIVATE_DIR
Adams/Engine (FEV) MDI_AENG_PRIVATE_DIR
Adams/Rail (VI Grade) MDI_RAIL_PRIVATE_DIR
Adams/Aircraft (VI Grade) MDI_AIR_PRIVATE_DIR
Adams/Driveline MDI_ADRV_PRIVATE_DIR

3. Site location
The site location is specific to verticals and is not applicable to View. This location is defined by
an environment variable which has the format MDI_<product_name>_SITE, where
product_name is the product under consideration. The environment variable is set to the desired
location/locations by the user in the form of a colon separated (semi-colon separated on windows)
list of directories. The site environment variable for individual products is listed below,

Product Old private environment variable

Adams/Car MDI_ACAR_SITE
Adams/Engine (FEV) MDI_AENGINE_SITE
Adams/Rail (VI Grade) MDI_ARAIL_SITE
 Authoring Plugins 63
Section 2: The search path algorithm for plugin discovery

Product Old private environment variable

Adams/Aircraft (VI Grade) MDI_AIRCRAFT_SITE
Adams/Driveline MDI_ADRIVELINE_SITE

For a given product, the list of directories in the corresponding environment variable will be
checked for the existence of a plugin.
4. Installation path
The environment variable $topdir is set to the installation path of the Adams product. The
platform specific sub-directory (win32, hpux11 etc.) as applicable, will be searched for in the
plugin directory, if present in the installation path. Note that the environment variable
$MDI_CPU is set to the appropriate platform. So essentially, the location
$topdir/plugin/$MDI_CPU will be searched for the existence of the specified plugin.
5. Library path
On different platforms, the library path is specified using different environment variables. The list
of the library path environment variable on individual platforms is as specified below,

Platform Library Path Environment variable

Windows PATH
HPUX SHLIB_PATH
IBM LIBPATH
Sun and Linux LD_LIBRARY_PATH

This variable contains a colon/semi-colon separated list of directories. Individual directories will
be searched for during the plugin load operation.
6. Current working directory
The current working directory is the last location which will be searched for the existence of the
plugin.
64 Adams/View
Section 3: The Plugin directory structure

Section 3: The Plugin directory structure

A plugin X is represented by a directory X. We already have seen the locations where this plugin
directory should reside, in order for the plugin to be discoverable. We will call this directory as the plugin
root directory or simply, the root.
Also, a plugin may make use of platform specific files for its functionality (such as a solver.dll or a
solver.so as the case may be). Such files should reside in platform specific directories (e.g. win32,
rh_linux, hpux11 etc.) within the root. The platform specific directories are searched automatically for
each specified location and as such should not be explicitly specified.
For example,
Lets say that the a user has set the location “C:/Plugins/X” through the environment variable
MDI_USER_PLUGIN_DIR on the windows platform, then the following locations will be searched, for
a plugin X,
1. C:/Plugins/X
2. C:/Plugins/win32
This applies to all locations mentioned in the previous section.
The help files associated with a plugin should be placed in the help directory located inside the root.
Similarly examples associated with the plugin should be placed in a directory called as examples. Both,
the xml file and the bin file should be located directly in the root and not inside any directory.
A possible directory structure is shown below,
<Plugin searchable location>
X (root directory)
- rh_linux (o)
- win32 (o)
- hpux11 (o)
- help (o)
- examples (o)
Directories that are optional are marked with an (o) beside them.
 Authoring Plugins 65
Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files:

Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files:

1. Create a new library in Adams/View to hold any customization:
library create library_name = .mylibrary
2. Place any customization into this library within Adams/View, for example:
macro create macro_name = .mylibrary.firstmacro
commands_to_be_executed = "list_info variable variable=*"
user_entered_command = all_variables
3. Save this library as a partial binary file. Specifying the proper library name as the entity is very
important:
file binary write entity_name = .mylibrary file_name =
"mylibrary.bin"
4. This partial binary can be read in, for testing or use, via a similar 'read' command that specifies
the entity:
file binary read file_name = "mylibrary.bin" entity_name =
.mylibrary
66 Adams/View
Creating Partial Binary (.bin) Files:
Exchanging Data in Adams
Adams products import and export modeling data in many different formats so you can exchange
modeling data with other Adams products, as well as other software manufacturer’s products.
This entries in this section of the table of contents explain how to import and export modeling data in
Adams products and the optional module, Adams/Exchange. The dialog boxes shown are Adams/View
dialog boxes. The available options may change depending on the Adams product you are using.
2 Adams/View
Supported File Formats for Import and/or Export

Supported File Formats for Import and/or Export

The following table shows the formats that Adams/View, Adams/Exchange, and Adams/Durability
support. The only formats that require an additional product are:
• STEP, IGES, DXF, DWG, and Parasolid - Require Adams/Exchange
• RPC III and DAC - Require Adams/Durability

You can import all other formats using standard Adams/View.

Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
Adams/Solver Describes a model using Adams/Solver Data Yes Yes
dataset (.adm) Language (ADL) statements.
Adams/Solver Set of three Adams/Solver analysis files: request, Yes Yes
analysis files (.req, results, and graphics. You can import the entire set
.res, .gra) or just a single analysis file.
Adams/View Set of Adams/View commands. You can use Yes Yes
command file command files to automate the creation of a model
(.cmd) or the investigation of simulation results.
Test data Numerical results generated from an external Yes No
program.
Numeric data Numerical results generated during an No Yes
Adams/View session.
CAD files Requires Adams/Exchange. Yes Yes

Model geometry. You can import and export the

following formats: STEP, IGES, DXF, DWG, and
Parasolid.
Stereolithography Polygonal representation of surfaces. Yes No
and render files
Wavefront files Set of output files that contain a description of the Yes Yes
model graphics and motion data.
FEA loads Complete load histories. No Yes
Spreadsheet Simulation results in a spreadsheet format. No Yes
Shell Geometry representations. Yes (Adams/ Yes
PostProcessor)
 Exchanging Data in Adams 3
Supported File Formats for Import and/or Export

Can be:
File format: Description: Imported Exported
Adams/ All the files required to view the results of No Yes
PostProcessor simulations in a stand-alone version of
Adams/PostProcessor.
RPC III and DAC Requires Adams/Durability. For more Yes Yes
information, Adams/Durability online help.

MTS Systems Corporation's RPC III and nCode's

DAC files that let you interface with durability
test machines and fatigue life calculation
programs.
4 Adams/View
Comparison of Adams File Formats

Comparison of Adams File Formats

The advantages and disadvantages of the different Adams file formats in which you can save or export
your modeling data are listed in the table below.

Format: Advantages: Disadvantages: Upward Compatibility:

Adams/Solver • Creates a model definition for • Saves ADL for a single • Upwardly compatible with
dataset Adams/Solver analysis. model only. Adams for two major
• Uses standard Adams data • Doesn't contain releases. For example, files
language (ADL) commands. Adams/View created in version 7.0 are
environment information compatible with versions 8
• ASCII format that is easy to read and 9.
and portable to different (modeling entity color,
computer platforms. size, and visibility • Files created in a Beta
attributes). version are never
• Enables you to build and compatible with the final
investigate the results of the • Doesn't save all types of
geometry, such as version.
analysis on a different platform
from your analysis. polylines, revolutions,
extrusions, ellipsoids,
• Provides a standardized format links, and toruses.
and allows extensive comments.
Adams/View • Restores an Adams/View session • The file size can be large. • Interface customization is
Modeling exactly as it was when you saved • You have to load the lost between versions.
database the file. binary file into the Before upgrading, export
(binary) • Saves an entire database with product to debug your the customization content
multiple models, analysis cases, mode. as text files (macros, dialog
and simulation results. boxes, menus, and so on)
and then import the files
• Provides unified, precise storage into Adams.
and fast read/write capability.
• Files created in a beta
version are never
compatible with the final
version.
Adams/View • Defines a single model. • Reads slower than binary. • Upwardly compatible with
command • Allows reading and writing of • Contains only a single Adams for two major
file since it is in text format. model definition, with no releases. For example, files
simulation data. created in version 7.0 are
• Enables transferring of data to compatible with versions 8
different computer systems. • Doesn't contain and 9.
• Saves all types of geometry, such Adams/View
environment information • Files created in a beta
as polylines, and links. version are never
(view layouts, menu
definitions, and so on). compatible with the final
version.
 Exchanging Data in Adams 5
Comparison of CAD File Formats

Comparison of CAD File Formats

The following compares the different CAD file formats for importing geometry using Adams/Exchange
or Adams/View.

The file format: Has the advantages/disadvantages:

IGES • When exporting geometry from a CAD program, the shapes are represented by
triangles and rectangles. You can adjust the tolerance on the approximated
shape when importing in Adams/View.
• Volume information is not supported in Adams/Exchange if the geometry is
imported as a polygon or if the original shape is not a solid. Therefore,
Adams/View cannot calculate the mass properties of the imported shape. You
have to define them manually.
• Color information is retained.
• To import shells as solids, be sure to set the options Solids instead of Polygons
and turn off Consolidate to shells. Also the originals have to be solid to be
imported as solid. If something goes wrong during the import process,
approximation will be tried and the imported shape will be represented by
polygons. Note that if you import the geometry as a solid, Adams/View can
calculate mass properties.
Render • Volume information is supported in Adams/Exchange, within the given
tolerance in the shape. Adams products, therefore, can calculate mass
properties.
• Each render file can contain many shapes, but when you import it,
Adams/Exchange attaches all its geometry to only one part.
• Color information is retained.
• Importing your geometry as Stereolithography (STL) or render geometry is
more reliable than using other CAD formats, such as IGES or STEP.
• File format is very simple.
• The files are much larger than IGES and DXF files.
• Because the surfaces have been represented as polygons, you cannot change
the accuracy of the surface representations in Adams/View. You must specify
the accuracy when you create the files in your CAD program.
6 Adams/View
Comparison of CAD File Formats

The file format: Has the advantages/disadvantages:

STEP • Adams/Exchange supports STEP AP203 and AP214. Note, however, as stated
in the ITI PDELIB manual:
It is important to realize that AP 214 is still at the "Committee Draft" stage of
its development and as such is a continuously changing and evolving beast.
While it is our intent to update this subsystem as necessary, no guarantees are
expressed or implied, that is, use at your own risk!
• Adams/Exchange does not support conformance class 5, which contains
faceted B-rep shape representation. ITI explains that faceted B-rep shape
representation takes up too much memory to exchange, and most vendors do
not support it.
• Volume information is supported in Adams/Exchange, within the given
tolerance in the shape. Adams products, therefore, can calculate mass
properties. You may find a small difference between the mass properties
calculated in Pro/ENGINEER and those calculated in Adams.
• Each STEP file can contain many shapes, but when you import it,
Adams/Exchange attaches all its geometry to only one part.
• Color information is not retained.
Stereolithography • When exporting geometry from a CAD program, shapes are represented by
triangles. Most CAD programs support the ability to specify a tolerance, and,
therefore, the number of triangles.
• Volume information of solid bodies is supported in Adams/View, within the
given tolerance in the shape. Using that shape, Adams products can calculate
mass properties. Volume information of thin-walled bodies is not supported, so
no mass properties can be calculated for it.
• Only one body for each STL file.
• Color information is not retained.
Parasolid • Currently, Adams/Exchange supports Parasolid version 19.0.17.
• Using Parasolid files, you can import the whole model while you can only
import part by part using STEP, IGES, STL, DWG, and DXF.
 Exchanging Data in Adams 7
Exporting Data Defining a Geometric Spline

Exporting Data Defining a Geometric Spline

You can export data defining a geometric spline element (for example, a spline that you created by
following a point during an animation. Learn about Creating Trace Spline).

To export the data:

1. Right-click the spline geometry, point to its geometry name, and then select Modify.
2. To the right of the Values text box, click the More button .
3. The Location Table appears.
4. Use the Write button to export the data. Learn about Reading and Writing Location Information..
8 Adams/View
Import and Export

Import and Export

Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
See File Import and Export Dialog Box help.

Sources of Command Files

There are three possible sources for a command file:
• Use your system editor to type in Adams commands.
• Convert a Log file from a previous Adams session into a command file. You should be careful,
however, to avoid recursive execution of command files (command file that calls itself). This can
happen easily if you try to execute the log file that the system is currently writing. Learn about
Using the Adams/View Log File.
• Export a command file to reproduce a model currently in the Adams Modeling database into
Adams command.

Command File Format

A command file contains the following types of elements:
• Comments, which Adams does not read or execute. Begin comments with exclamation points
(!).
• Executable Adams commands, including your responses to prompts from Adams/View. The
commands are the same ones that you enter in the Command window or that Adams executes in
response to menu and dialog box choices.
You can also enter pauses in your command file so that Adams/View stops and waits for input or a
specified time before preceding.
You can use any combination of upper or lowercase characters for commands in a command file, except
for text system commands and filenames.
Each command must start a new line. Remember to include the response to any prompts that you expect.
If you find you need more than a single line for a command and its associated parameters, place an
ampersand (&) as the last character on the line to be continued. In this way, you can use as many lines as
you need for each command.

Command File Example

To help make the command file easier for you to read, many of the lines are blank comment lines.
! Read Adams files eject.gra, eject.req, and eject.res. The data
! will be put into an analysis, named ‘eject’, by default.
 Exchanging Data in Adams 9
Import and Export

!
file analysis read file_name=eject
!
! Remove all but one view (the one that will remain is, the “active”
view),
! and display the bottom view in it (this actually recalls from the
data
! base the set of view attributes saved under the name “bottom”).
!
view management delete view_name=all
view management restore saved_view_name=bottom
!
! Display frame 150 from the simulation graphics file.
!
graphic_results single_frame_display frame_number=150
!
! Create a Postscript hardcopy file of this frame.
!
hardcopy generate
! Done
!
exit confirmation=yes

Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files

If you want to ensure upward compatibility of your command files with subsequent releases of Adams,
use the complete names of commands, not their abbreviations. If you use the menus and dialog boxes in
Adams to execute commands, then all the commands are fully expanded in the Adams/View log file,
which you can then use as source of your command file.

To expand the abbreviations in a command file to complete commands:

1. Add the following commands to the beginning of the command file:
FILE LOG_FILE SET EXPAND_COMMANDS=ON &
COMMAND_WRITE=ON
2. Import the command file into Adams/View at the start of a new session.
3. Exit as soon as Adams has read and executed the complete command file.
4. Remove the following commands from the log file:
FILE COMMAND READ FILE_NAME=file_name &
EXIT CONFIRMATION=YES
5. Rename the log file from this session and give it a name to indicate that it is a command file. It is
now the original command file with expanded command abbreviations.
10 Adams/View
Import and Export

Command File Import Error Options

You can specify that Adams do one of the following as it imports command files:
• Ignore command - Instructs Adams to ignore the line on which it found the error and start
processing the next line as a new command. Adams can usually recover and execute subsequent
commands in the file. If subsequent commands depend on the results of the invalid command,
however, they may fail or give unexpected results.
• Continue the command file execution - Instructs Adams to continue processing the line as if it
were typed interactively. This can be dangerous if there is no correction later on in the line,
because Adams keeps issuing error messages until the error is corrected. The errors can continue
beyond the end of the line, even to the end of the file, if carriage returns are invalid. Use this
value only if the command file is a literal recording of your key strokes, complete with back
spaces or other corrections of mistakes.
• Cancel the command file execution and abort file - Instructs Adams to immediately close all
the command files and returns control to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting
because it guarantees subsequent commands will cause no further errors or unexpected results.

About Exporting FEA Loads

You can export Adams/View dynamic load information about any rigid or flexible body in your model to
a finite element analysis (FEA) program for modeling and analysis. Adams/View gives you the option to
export complete load histories that include load information for all output steps in a Simulation or export
load information for only those Output steps of interest. The FEA program uses the load information for
a variety of purposes, such as stress and strain analyses.
You can export load information from Adams/View in the following formats:
• ANSYS from Swanson Analysis Systems, Inc.
• MSC.Nastran from MSC.Software
• ABAQUS from Hibbitt, Karlsson & Sorensen, Inc.
• DAC or RPC III file formats (available with Adams/Durability only)

Adams/View calculates the loads on a desired body at the specified output steps in a simulation and
exports the load information to a loads file. The loads file contains a series of load cases where the body
is at an instantaneous dynamic equilibrium, such that the external (applied) forces and joint reactions are
in balance with the inertial and gravitational forces. The loads file can be in any of the three formats listed
above. After Adams/View exports the file, you can use the loads file directly in the FEA program without
any conversions or edit the file in a text editor, as desired.
See Export - FEA Loads dialog box help.
 Exchanging Data in Adams 11
Import and Export

Process for Exporting FEA Loads

When exporting dynamic load information, you perform the following general steps:
• Run a Simulation - Before exporting FEA loads, you need to run a Simulation of your model so
that Adams/View can determine the loads acting on the bodies in the model. There is no special
preparation needed for this simulation; you run it just like any other simulation.
• Identify the Body - You identify the body whose load information you want to export by
specifying a marker belonging to a rigid body or directly selecting a flexible body. For a rigid
body, Adams/View calculates all load information relative to the marker you select. Therefore,
the marker’s location must correspond to the origin of the body as it appears in the FEA tool. For
a flexible body, Adams/View assumes that its FEA origin is unchanged.
• Find Load Points - After identifying a body whose load information is to be exported,
Adams/View finds all locations (load points) on the body that have external loads placed on
them and displays the locations in a table. The node coordinate locations are displayed relative to
the FEA origin of the body.
For a flexible body, Adams/View also populates the table with the node IDs of the load points
that correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program. For a rigid body, you assign
node IDs to the load points as explained next.
• Assign Node IDs to Load Points, if desired - For a rigid body, you can assign IDs to the load
points that correspond to the node IDs on the part in the FEA program before exporting the load
information. You can assign the IDs using either of two ways:
• Type the node IDs into the table in Adams/View.
• Store the node IDs in a text file and have Adams/View read the file. As Adams/View reads a
file, it associates the load points it found on the part with the node IDs and locations listed in
the file. Adams/View searches the file for node IDs with locations closest to the ones it found
and fills the node IDs into the table in Adams/View.
The node location file must be in the following format with commas (,) separating each
element:
Node IDn, X, Y, Z
Node IDn+1, X, Y, Z
...
If your model contains several node IDs, you might want to create a text file of node IDs.
If you choose not to specify any node IDs, the FEA input file that is generated will contain the locations
(with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and ADAMS ID labels of the specified marker forces. You
will need to replace the ADAMS ID labels with node IDs in the input file before submitting an analysis.

Limitations for Exporting FEA Loads

The following are limitations for exporting FEA loads from Adams/View.
12 Adams/View
Import and Export

Redundant Constraints
You cannot export loads at the locations of redundant constraints. This is because Adams removes all
redundant constraints in the simulation. Therefore, forces are not computed for these constraints. It is best
to manually remove redundant constraints defined at a part before simulating if you want to export FEA
loads.

Couplers and Gears

Loads due to couplers or gears are only exported on a part if the motion of that part is driving the coupler
or gear. If, instead, the motion of the part is being driven by a coupler or gear, then the load resulting from
that constraint will not be included in an FEA loads export of that part.

Friction
Reaction loads resulting from friction in joints are not supported. In fact, you receive an error if you
attempt to export loads on joints that include friction.

Floating Markers
You cannot export FEA loads if the part has a floating marker. You receive the following error message
from Adams/View when you try to export loads for a part with a floating marker:
No application point for reaction force. Unable to export loads on floating markers.
This can happen if there are forces, such as six-component general force, three-component force, or
three-component torque, or higher-pair constraints, such as curve-point or curve-curve, are defined on
the part. In the case of forces, there is a workaround:
• Redefine the force by swapping the I- and J-parts so that the part in question does not have a J-
floating marker.

Missing Result Set Components

Adams/View exports an incomplete load set if results of components defined on the part are missing from
the simulation. This condition is checked and a warning message is issued for each component that does
not have a result component. This usually happens when the computation of certain types of results, such
as forces, is turned off.

HTML Files Created for HTML Reports

When you export Adams/PostProcessor files to an HTML report, the result is a series of HTML pages,
images, and style sheets, including a main homepage. The homepage is an HTML page with two frames:
 Exchanging Data in Adams 13
Import and Export

the left frame is a treeview of the top-level objects, the right frame displays the object selected in the
treeview.

In the treeview, there are three top-level objects:

• Title Page - Displays a title page with general information about the data exported.
• Pages - Lists the pages exported from Adams/PostProcessor. Click a page to display an image of
a plot or animation or play a movie of an animation.
• Model - Lists the models for which you selected to export information. When you click a model,
its different objects (parts, forces, constraints, requests, measures, and assembly objects) appear
in the treeview. Click an object to display information about the object in the right frame.

To display the main HTML homepage:

1. In a Web browser, change to the folder containing the results of the export.
2. Select the file with the same name was you entered in the Files tab. For example, if you entered
suspension_1, select suspension_1.htm.

Test Data Format

The test data that you want to import into Adams must be in an ASCII file composed of columns of
values. Each column should hold the values for a separate component. The values in each column should
be in order by the time step, from earliest to latest.
Adams reads the columns from left to right and from top to bottom. One or more blank spaces separates
each column from the column on either side, and one or more comment lines separates columns placed
beneath each other. You can separate numbers with a comma (,) and you do not have to line them up
evenly. Adams considers any lines that do not begin with a number as a comment line.
Adams reads a column until it reaches a comment line, which indicates the end of the component. For
example, in the sample numeric data file the columns beginning with 1 and 10.0 are the first two
components. The third component is the column beginning with 22. Each component has ten numbers.
14 Adams/View
Import and Export

If you specify that one of the columns contains a time index, then Adams stores the data in that column
as the x data for each spline it creates. In addition, you can specify that Adams assign the names for the
splines using the text in the column headers. If you do not specify that Adams obtain the names from the
column headers, Adams automatically generates their names.
Be sure that any text in the file does not begin with a number. If it does, Adams tries to read the line. To
prevent Adams from reading text as a value, place a non-numeric character in front of text that you want
Adams to ignore. We recommend that you use an exclamation point (!).

Test Format Example

Test Format Example
1 10.0
2. 11.0
3.4 12.5
-4 13.0
5 +14.0
6 15.5
7 17
8 18
9 ,19
10, 20
22
23
.24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Example of Number in Text

This sample file contains only one component but contains the number
3 at the beginning of a line in this header paragraph. Adams/View will
try to read
this line because it is not considered a comment.
1.5
3.0

! This sample file contains only one component and contains the number
! 3. Because we used an exclamation point (!) in front of each line in
this header
! paragraph, however, Adams/View does not read the line starting with
3.
1.5
3.0
 Exchanging Data in Adams 15
Import and Export

Tips on Importing Wavefront Files

The Wavefront file is unitless even though most of the ViewPoint graphics internally use one hardcoded
unit system. You will need to scale the vertices to make them fit the units set in the Adams/View model.
For example, if the Viewpoint graphics were originally created using the length unit, mm, then, if your
Adams/View session units are in meters, you’ll use a scale factor of .001.
You may find that you need to experiment with different scale factors to create a model that contains
practical scales. To experiment with the different scale factors, just undo the import if it does not work
using the Undo command.
Before importing the graphics, create a dummy part to which you’ll attach the Wavefront graphics.
Creating dummy parts is helpful because the orientation within the Viewpoint dataset is usually different
than the orientation of your model. Dummy parts provide an easy method of moving and rotating the
graphics to match your Adams model. To move the graphics, you just move the dummy part.
Here is a procedure for ensuring that the geometry is attached to the correct part:
1. From the View menu, select Part, and select the dummy part to view.
2. Rename each shell so that it belongs to the correct part.
Different shells start disappearing from the dummy part while in View Part Only mode.
3. After renaming all the geometry, delete the dummy part.
4. Display the model.
Now you have the model with different graphics elements attached to correct parts and at correct
locations and orientations.
A convenient way to read in an entire Viewpoint dataset and avoid some of the problems mentioned
earlier is to reduce the number of group names in the dataset before importing it into Adams/View.
Generally, groups in the Wavefront file become parts in Adams/View. If a part already exists that has the
same name as a group, however, the graphics simply attach to the existing part without creating a new
part. If Adams/View finds a group with no corresponding part, it creates a new part for the group.
If you have multiple groups with the same name in the Wavefront file, all groups attach to the same
Adams/View part but become separate geometric entities. This allows you to use different colors within
the same Adams part to create more realistic images.
The only lines that are significant in the Wavefront file are the ones that begin with g (groups), f (facets),
and v (vertex). Adams/View ignores everything else.
To reduce the number of group names, open the dataset in a text editor and substitute names before
importing the set into Adams/View. For example, a car body dataset typically has the following group
names:
• g hood
• g fender
• g windows
16 Adams/View
Import and Export

• g bumper

Change them to the same name so they attach to a single part. For example:
• g body
• g body
• g body
• g body
 Exchanging Data in Adams 17
About Adams/Exchange

About Adams/Exchange
Adams/Exchange supports four data exchange formats:

• IGES
• STEP
• DXF/DWG
• Parasolid

The geometry translator underneath Adams/Exchange that supports IGES, STEP, and DXF/DWG is
PDE/Lib. It was provided by International Technegroup Incorporated (ITI) of Milford, Ohio. You can
contact them at 513-576-3900. ITI reserves all rights with respect to PDE/Lib.

About Importing and Exporting CAD Data Using

Adams/Exchange
Adams/Exchange imports standard geometry files from any software package that supports IGES, STEP,
DXF/DWG, and Parasolid file formats, and converts the data into a set of Adams/View geometry
elements. These elements correspond to standard Adams/Solver GRAPHICS statements, polylines, or
shells. You associate the geometry with any rigid body part of the Adams/View model before or after you
run an Adams/View simulation.
Adams/Exchange reduces the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams/View and enhances
your ability to realistically view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems. You can also use the
imported geometry for model building in Adams/View and for locating parts, constraints, and forces
based on the imported geometric data.
For recommendations of the best ways to export data from the CAD packages so you can import it
effectively into Adams, see Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data.

About Exporting CAD Data

Adams/Exchange exports the geometric definition of an Adams model from Adams/View to the
geometry file format, whether IGES, STEP, DXF/DWG, or Parasolid. The geometry file can then be read
into CAD or CAE software.

About IGES Import and Export

The Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) was originally developed in 1979, by the National
Bureau of Standards (NBS), to facilitate the transfer of geometry and annotations from one CAD/CAM
system to another. IGES is the predominant format used for the transfer of geometry information. The
IGES specification defines a structured hierarchical file format and the representation of a variety of
entities within the format. The entity set includes: geometric, annotation, structure, associativity,
property, and attribute entities.
18 Adams/View
About Adams/Exchange

The next sections explain how Adams/Exchange works with IGES files. For a detailed explanation of the
IGES entity types, please refer to The Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) Version 5.0
manual.

Linear Approximation
Adams/View directly supports only a subset of the geometry encountered in the IGES file. Some of the
unsupported IGES entities are approximated using a technique called linear approximation.
Adams/Exchange translates the nonlinear entities (for example, surface, curve, and so on) it encounters
in the IGES file to polylines. For IGES curves, surfaces, and annotation entities that are nonlinear in
definition, linear approximation produces a piecewise linear string of points or polygons that
approximates the geometry to within a specified tolerance. For more information, refer to the discussion
of the tolerance option in Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG.

Unit Conversion
Adams/Exchange automatically converts all coordinate data in the IGES file to the internal units (meters,
kilograms, seconds) of Adams/View.

Automatic Import of a CAD Mechanism

Some CAD packages support the automatic transfer of a mechanism model that was developed using an
integrated Adams interface to Adams/View. These packages include:
• Mechanical Dynamics MECHANISM/Pro for PTC Pro/ENGINEER
• Mechanical Dynamics Adams/MS Mechanisms for Bentley MicroStation
• I-DEAS Mechanism Design for I-DEAS (embedded starting with MS7)
• Unigraphics UG/Mechanisms (available as a macro/user function)
• Adams/MechanismWorks for Solidworks (available with initial release)

Manually Importing Assemblies

The concept of assemblies within IGES only exists within the IGES CSG definition (Constructed Solid
Geometry; entity type 184). Adams/Exchange explodes all of the instances of the assembly into
individual Adams parts.
There are three methods of importing assemblies into Adams/View from an IGES file.
• Defining Levels Before Generating IGES File (this is the recommended method)
• Generating Separate IGES File
• Importing Assembly as One Part

The different method are explained in the next sections.

Defining Levels Before Generating IGES File

Defining levels in the IGES file is the best method to import an assembly into Adams/View. When using
this method, before importing the IGES file to Adams/View, place each part in the assembly that
 Exchanging Data in Adams 19
About Adams/Exchange

corresponds to an Adams/View part on a separate level. Refer to the CAD program that you are using to
generate the IGES file for information on IGES levels.
After you generate the IGES file with the parts separated by levels, import the file into Adams/View.
Follow the instructions in Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG. or use the IGES FILE READ command once
for each part in the model using the PART_NAME parameter and the LEVEL parameter to ensure that
the geometry from the appropriate level is placed on the correct part. You might find it easier to use the
IGES FILE READ command than using the dialog box explained in the earlier section because you can
create a command file that repeats the IGES FILE READ command as necessary.
For example, if you wanted to import an assembly of a pendulum, you first generate the IGES file with
the ground part on level 1 and the pendulum on level 2. The complete geometric definition of the
pendulum assembly exists in the IGES file but the levels identify the geometry on the ground part and
the geometry on the pendulum part. Execute the following commands to read the IGES file and associate
the desired geometry with the appropriate part:
FILE GEOM READ TYPE=IGES FILE= "pendulum.igs" PART_NAME= /pend/ground LEVEL= 1
FILE GEOM READ TYPE=IGES FILE= "pendulum.igs" PART_NAME= /pend/mass LEVEL= 2

Generating Separate IGES File

The second method to import an assembly is to generate a separate IGES file for each part in the
assembly. For the previous example, you would generate two files: pendulum_ground.igs and
pendulum_mass.igs. You would then execute the following commands to read the IGES files and transfer
the geometry to the appropriate part:
FILE GEOMETRY READ TYPE=IGES FILE= "pendulum_ground.igs" PART_NAME= /pend/ground
FILE GEOMETRY READ TYPE=IGES FILE= "pendulum_mass.igs" PART_NAME= /pend/mass
This method has the advantage of not requiring the existence of levels in the IGES file but does require
that you create multiple IGES files.

Importing Assembly as One Part

The third method is to import the geometry for the entire assembly onto one part and then use
Adams/View commands to move the geometry to the appropriate part. This method is tedious if the IGES
file contains a large number of parts or a large number of geometric entities.

IGES Input Log File

Adams/Exchange generates a log file containing a list of any warnings or errors that may have occurred
during the translation to Adams/View. Adams/Exchange creates the log file in the current directory and
assigns it the same name as the IGES file with the extension .log.

Imported Mass Properties

Adams/Exchange does not support mass properties for IGES files if you import the geometry as a
polygon or if the original shape is not solid.
20 Adams/View
About Adams/Exchange

Imported Subfigures
Adams/Exchange does not support subfigures. Therefore, Adams/Exchange does not translate any
geometry defined as subfigures in an IGES file to Adams/View.

Exported IGES Levels

When Adams/Exchange exports geometry in IGES format, it places the geometry for each Adams/View
part on a separate level within the IGES file. This provides for easier handling of geometry for individual
parts after the IGES file has been written.
Adams/Exchange uses the Adams ID of the part as the integer ID identifying the IGES level. It writes
dynamic geometry (graphic spring dampers and outlines that span multiple parts) to a separate level with
an integer ID that is equal to 1 greater than the highest Adams part ID.

Exported Colors
Adams/Exchange writes the colors of geometric entities in Adams/View to the IGES file. It supports any
color defined within Adams/View. The RGB (red, green, blue) values are stored as entity number 314,
Color Definition, in the IGES file. Note that not all IGES vendors support RGB color values.

Exported Visibility
Adams/Exchange translates invisible geometric objects to the IGES file as blanked entities. The visibility
of the object as it appears in Adams/View determines how it is interpreted when written to the IGES file
as shown in the table below.

Adams/View visibility: IGES translation:

On Normal
Off Blanked
No Opinion Normal

Supported IGES Entities

A summary of the supported IGES entities is shown in the table below. Note that the three-dimensional
graphic icons representing Adams modeling elements (joints, and so on) are not translated to the IGES
file.

Adams/ View Entity type Import, export,

object: number: IGES entity: or both:
Arc 100 Circular arc Both
Circle 100 Circular arc Both
Graphic force 102 Composite curve Export
Spline 102 Composite curve Export
 Exchanging Data in Adams 21
About Adams/Exchange

Adams/ View Entity type Import, export,

object: number: IGES entity: or both:
Outline 102 or 106 Composite curve or Export
copious data
Polyline 102 or 106 Composite curve or Both
copious data
Ellipse/nurbcurve 104 Ellipse/nurb_curve Both
Block 106 Copious data Export
Cylinder 106 Copious data Export
Ellipsoid 106 Copious data Export
Extrusion 106 Copious data Export
Frustum 106 Copious data Export
Link 106 Copious data Export
Graphic spring 106 Copious data Export
damper
Revolution 106 Copious data Export
Shell 106 Copious data Export
Tire 106 Copious data Export
Torus 106 Copious data Export
Face (trimmed surf) 108:1 Plane Both
Polyline 110:0 Line Both
nurb_curve 112:0 Parametric spline Both
curve
nurb_surf 114:0 Parametric spline Both
surface
Marker 116 Point NS
Polyline 116:0 Point Import
nurb_surf 118 Ruled surface Import
nurb_surf 120:0 Surface of Import
revolution
nurb_surf 122:0 Tabulated cylinder Import
Explode 125:0 Flash entity Import
Polyline 125:2 Polyline Import
arc 125:3 Arc Import
polyline 125:4 Polyline Import
22 Adams/View
About Adams/Exchange

Adams/ View Entity type Import, export,

object: number: IGES entity: or both:
nurb_curve 126 Rational b-spline Import
curve
nurb_surf 128 Rational b-spline Import
surface
nurb_curve 130:0 Offset curve Import
explode 132:0 Connect point entity Import
nurb_surf 140:0 Offset surface Import
Chain 141:0 Composite edge Import
curve (boundary)
Chain 142:0 Composite edge Import
curve
Face 143:0 Bounded surface Both
Face 144:0 Trimmed parametric Both
surface
Solid 186:0 Manifold solid B- Import
rep object
Explode 202:0 Angular dimension Import
Explode 204:0 Curve dimension Import
Explode 206:0 Diameter dimension Import
106:11 and explode 208:0 Flag note Import
Explode 210:0 General label Import
Polyline 212 Polyline Import
Polyline 214 Leader Import
Explode 216 Linear dimension Import
Explode 220:0 Point dimension Import
Explode 222 Radius dimension Import
Explode 228 General symbol Import
106 and explode 230 Sectioned area Import
Explode 308:0 Subfigure definition Import
Explode 320:0 Network subfigure Import
definition
Explode 408:0 Singular subfigure Import
instance
 Exchanging Data in Adams 23
About Adams/Exchange

Adams/ View Entity type Import, export,

object: number: IGES entity: or both:
Explode 412:0 Rectangular array Import
subfigure
Explode 414:0 Circular array Import
subfigure
Explode 420:0 Network subfigure Import
instance

About STEP Import and Export

STEP is officially known as ISO 10303 - Exchange of Product Model Data. A summary of STEP is
provided in the ISO document, STEP Part 1: overview and fundamental principles. The following is a
paragraph from the ISO document describing STEP format.
The Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data (STEP) is a neutral mechanism capable of
completely representing product data throughout the life cycle of a product (Neutral in this context
indicates independence from any particular CAx software system). The completeness of this
representation makes it suitable not only for neutral file exchange, but also as a basis for implementing
and sharing product databases and archiving. There is an undeniable need to transfer product data in
computer-readable form from one site to another. These sites may have one of a number of relationships
between them (contractor and subcontractor, customer and supplier); the information invariably needs to
iterate between the sites, retaining both data completeness and functionality, until it is ultimately
archived. The most cost effective manner to encapsulate such information is in a neutral format,
independent of any Computer-Aided (CAx) software system.
Contact the U.S. Product Data Association (USPRO) for more information on STEP. Their address is P.O
Box 3310, Gaithersberg, Maryland, 20885-3310. Their phone number is 301-975-4658, their FAX
number is 310-926-8730, and their e-mail is [email protected].

Imported Mass Properties

Adams calculates mass properties for parts using STEP geometry by multiplying the volume of the STEP
geometry by the material density defined in the Adams part. Mass properties that are explicitly defined
in Adams will continue to be used.

Supported STEP Entities

Adams/Exchange supports STEP applications protocols AP 203 and AP 214 for import and AP 203 for
export. A summary of the supported STEP entities is provided in the table below. Note that the three-
dimensional graphic icons representing Adams modeling elements (joints, and so on) are not translated
to the STEP file.
24 Adams/View
About Adams/Exchange

In addition, note that we do not support conformance class 5, which contains faceted B-rep shape
representations. AP 214 is still in the committee-draft stages of its development and, therefore, we do not
encourage its use.

Adams/View object: STEP entity: Import, export or both:

Arc step_circle Both
Polyline step_cartesian_point Import
Polyline step_line Both
Polyline step_polyline Both
Cone step_conical_surface Import
Cylinder step_cylindrical_surface Import
Ellipse step_ellipse Both
Sphere step_spherical_surface Import
Torus step_toroidal_surface Import
nurb_curve step_bezier_curve Import
nurb_curve step_b_spline_curve_with_knots Both
nurb_curve step_offset_curve_2d Import
nurb_curve step_offset_curve_3d Import
nurb_curve step_parabola Import
nurb_curve step_hyperbola Import
nurb_curve step_quasi_uniform_curve Import
nurb_curve step_rational_bezier_curve Import
nurb_curve step_rational_b_spline_curve_with_knots Both
nurb_curve step_rational_quasi_uniform_curve Import
nurb_curve step_rational_uniform_curve Import
nurb_curve step_trimmed_curve Import
nurb_curve step_uniform_curve Import
nurb_surf step_bezier_surface Import
nurb_surf step_offset_surface Import
nurb_surf step_b_spline_surface_with_knots Both
nurb_surf step_quasi_uniform_surface Import
nurb_surf step_rational_bezier_surface Import
nurb_surf step_rational_b_spline_surface_with_knot Both
s
nurb_surf step_rational_quasi_uniform_surface Import
 Exchanging Data in Adams 25
About Adams/Exchange

Adams/View object: STEP entity: Import, export or both:

nurb_surf step_rational_uniform_surface Import
nurb_surf step_rectangular_trimmed_surface Import
nurb_surf step_surface_of_linear_extrusion Import
nurb_surf step_surface_of_revolution Import
nurb_surf step_uniform_surface Import
Solid step_brep_with_voids Both
Solid step_manifold_solid_brep Both
Chain step_composite_curve Both
Face (trimmed surf) step_curve_bounded_surface Both

About DXF/DWG Import and Export

Adams/Exchange imports and exports geometry in DXF/DWG file format. A summary of the supported
DXF/DWG entities is provided in the table below. Note that the three-dimensional graphic icons
representing Adams modeling elements (joints, and so on) are not translated to the DXF/DWG file.
Contact Autodesk, Inc. for more information on the DXF and DWG file formats. Their address is 111
McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California, 94903. Their telephone number is 415-507-5000 and their
FAX number is 415-507-5100. Autodesk has a web site at http://www.autodesk.com.

Adams/View object: DXF/DWG entity: Import, export or both:

Arc dxf_arc Both
Circle dxf_circle Both
Polyline dxf_2dpolyline Import
Polyline dxf_3dpolyline Both
Polyline dxf_line Both
Polyline dxf_point Import
Polyline dxf_polygon_mesh Import
Ellipse dxf_ellipse Both
nurb_curve dxf_bezier_bspline_curve Import
nurb_curve dxf_bspline_curve Both
nurb_curve dxf_spline Import
nurb_curve dxf_spline_fit Import
Shell dxf_3dface Import
Shell dxf_polyface_mesh Import
26 Adams/View
About Adams/Exchange

Adams/View object: DXF/DWG entity: Import, export or both:

nurb_surf dxf_2dpolyline_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_3dface_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_3dpolyline_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_arc_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_bezier_bspline_curve_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_bezier_bspline_surf Import
nurb_surf dxf_bezier_bspline_surf_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_bspline_curve_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_bspline_surf Import
nurb_surf dxf_bspline_surf_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_circle_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_circle_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_ellipse_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_line_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_point_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_polyface_mesh_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_polygon_mesh_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_spline_ext Import
nurb_surf dxf_spline_fit_ext Import
Explode dxf_block Import
Explode dxf_insert Import
Chain dxf_curve_fit Both
 Exchanging Data in Adams 27
Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

The following sections provide recommendations for how you should export data from different CAD
packages so you can best import them into Adams:
• General Comments on Exporting
• Table of Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

General Comments on Exporting

For those CAD systems based on the Parasolids kernel, there are many benefits to transferring geometry
in Parasolid files. Adams/View creates solid bodies from the Parasolids information that allows for
further Boolean operations as well as the selection of geometric features such as the center of a circle. It
is important that you export the version of the Parasolids file that Adams/View supports.
In general, the simpler the representation of the geometric information the better. This is why we often
recommend that you used Stereolithography over formats such as IGES and STEP. Other simple formats
include render and shell files. Shell files are Adams-specfic so you will not find them as part of the
standard CAD export formats. Please remember that some of these formats do not have colors.
Successful transfer of IGES and STEP files from CAD systems to Adams/View depends on both systems.
Some CAD systems export information that is easily processed by Adams/View while others CAD
systems generate files that are difficult or impossible for Adams/View to import. We have taken this into
consideration in the Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data.

Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

The following table provides recommendations for the file formats in which you should export data from
a CAD program so you can import it effectively into Adams. Please note that the recommendations are
28 Adams/View
Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

in order of preference. For a comparison of the different file formats, see Comparison of CAD File
Formats.

For the CAD Recommendations in order

package: of preference: Comments:
Unigraphics (UG) Export from UG/Mechanism or • Exporting from the embedded motion
Scenario for Motion in these file products automates the geometry
formats in order of preference: export/import process. Only three-
dimensional solids are transferred.
• Parasolids
• Using Parasolids (without the
• Stereolithography embedded motion products) is
Or, export from UG in these file convenient because one file contains
formats in order of preference: all the geometry and Adams/Exchange
creates a separate part for each solid.
• Parasolids • Stereolithography is dependable but
• Stereolithography requires you to output each part
separately. It only works on solid
bodies.
CATIA Export using CAT/Adams in these • Exporting from the embedded motion
file formats in order of preference: product automates the geometry
export/import process. It transfers
• Quickshell two-dimensional and three-
• STEP dimensional geometry.
• IGES • IGES and STEP export is time
consuming and Adams/Exchange can
Or, export from CATIA in these
have difficulties reading the resulting
formats in order of preference:
files.
• Stereolithography
• STEP
• IGES
I-DEAS Export using Mechanism Design or • Exporting from the embedded motion
Mechanism Simulation export with product automates the geometry
shells. export/import process.
• IGES geometry transfer is without
Or, export from I-DEAS in these
colors.
formats in order of preference:
• Stereolithography only works for a
• Stereolithography part, not an assembly.
• IGES
 Exchanging Data in Adams 29
Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

For the CAD Recommendations in order

package: of preference: Comments:
Pro/ENGINEER Export using MECHANISM/Pro in • Exporting from the embedded motion
these formats in order of product automates the geometry
preference: export/import process.
• Render files contain color, while
• Render
Stereolithography files do not.
• Stereolithography
Or, export from Pro/ENGINEER in
these formats in order of
preference:

• Render
• Stereolithography
• IGES
Solidworks Export using Dynamic Designer • Exporting from the embedded motion
with Shells (v2000) product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from Solidworks in
• Using Parasolid is convenient because
these formats in order of
one file contains all the geometry and
preference:
Adams/Exchange creates a separate
• Parasolid part for each solid.

• Stereolithography • Stereolithography is dependable but

requires you to output each part
• IGES separately. It only works on solid
bodies.
SolidEdge Export using Dynamic Designer • Exporting from the embedded motion
with Shells (v2000). product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from SolidEdge in these
• Using Parasolid is convenient because
file formats in order of preference:
one file contains all the geometry and
• Parasolids Adams/Exchange creates a separate
part for each solid.
• Stereolithography
• Stereolithography is dependable but
• IGES requires you to output each part
separately. It only works on solid
bodies.
30 Adams/View
Recommendations for Exporting CAD Data

For the CAD Recommendations in order

package: of preference: Comments:
Mechanical Export using Dynamic Designer • Exporting from the embedded motion
Desktop with Shells (v2000). product automates the geometry
export/import process.
Or, export from Mechanical
• IGES transfers are complicated but are
Desktop in these file formats in
reasonably dependable.
order of preference:
• Stereolithography exports are
• IGES unpredictable because the model has
• Stereolithography to be in a particular quadrant before
exporting.
• DXF
• DXF can be used to transfer two-
dimensional information.
Microstation Parasolid Using Parasolid is convenient because
one file contains all the geometry and
Adams/Exchange creates a separate part
for each solid.
SimManager Integration
2 Adams/View
Introduction

Introduction
The SimManager integration functionality provides a GUI interface which enables you to publish and
retrieve model and results data to/from a SimManager server.
The functionality provides you with the ability to:
1. Configure a desired SimManager server as the default for publish-retrieve of data.
2. Open and close a user session with the SimManager server (Log on and log off from the
SimManager server)
3. Publish and retrieve a model along with the results to the SimManager server.
4. Retrieve a published model and the results from a SimManager server.
The functionality can be accessed from both the main menu as well as the command line. The
SimManager commands issued from the command window bring up the corresponding dialog boxes.
Further interaction is then done via the GUI. Note that the functionality cannot be accessed in batch
mode.
 SimManager Integration 3
Introduction

Access to the SimManager functionality in Adams/View is provided from the main menu as shown in
Figure 1.

Figure 1 The SimManager menu in Adams/View

4 Adams/View
Introduction

A similar menu exists for Adams/Car. The menu for accessing the SimManager functionality in
Adams/Car can be seen in Figure 2.

Figure 2 The SimManager menu in Adams/Car

 SimManager Integration 5
Setting up the Connection Properties

Setting up the Connection Properties

Before you can log into a SimManager server, the server connection properties need to be configured.
Here you need to specify the connection parameters like protocol, host, port number and web context.
1. The connection Properties dialog box is accessible from File -> SimManager -> Connection
Properties menu or by issuing the command ‘file simmanager
connection_properties’ from the command prompt. In either case, the connection
properties dialog box would be shown as seen in the Figure 3.

Figure 3 The SimManager connection properties dialog box

Note: Empty fields as seen in the Figure 3 would be observed typically when you are configuring
the SimManager server for the first time. Thereafter the connection properties that were
configured (successfully) in previous sessions will be displayed in the dialog box.

2. Once the respective values have been entered in the dialog box, the validity of the connection can
be tested by selecting the Test URL check box on the dialog box before clicking the OK button.
In that case, the dialog box for testing the Connection properties is opened as shown in Figure 4.
6 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

Figure 4 The SimManager ‘test URL’ dialog box

3. Clicking the Test button would validate the entered connection properties and a message
indicating the validity of the URL will be seen as in the Figure 5.

Figure 5 Message seen upon testing a valid URL

Logon to a SimManager server

To publish and retrieve data to a configured sever, you need to logon to a SimManager server. The Logon
dialog box is accessible from File -> SimManager -> Logon menu or by issuing the command ‘file
 SimManager Integration 7
Setting up the Connection Properties

simmanager logon’ from the command prompt. The screen shot of the dialog box is shown in
Figure 6.

Figure 6 The SimManager logon dialog box

Note that valid connection properties as set from the Connection Properties dialog box in Setting up the
Connection Properties are used to pre-populate the Address field of the logon dialog box with the
connection URL.
Only upon specifying valid logon data, the user session with the SimManager server be established
successfully and the publish-retrieve functionality is accessible. If a wrong/empty username or password
is given, the relevant error messages will be seen and the logon dialog box will remain open.

Logoff
The logoff functionality is used to logoff the user session from the SimManager server. Note that once
you have logged off from the SimManager Server, publish and retrieve functionality will be disabled. The
logoff dialog box is accessible from File -> SimManager -> Logoff menu or alternatively from the
command ‘file simmanager logoff’.

Publish data to a SimManager server

1. Publishing data in Adams/View
The publish functionality in Adams/View is used for publishing the model and optionally, the
corresponding results and Simulation scripts in the model, to a SimManager server. The model data is
published along with all its references (for example, MNFs in case the model has flexible bodies). The
references (or model dependencies) are automatically published as additional files along with the model.
The publish dialog box is accessible from File -> SimManager -> Publish Data main menu. The dialog
box is shown in the Figure 7. Note that this is the first of the two dialog boxes presented to you during
8 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

the publish operation. This dialog box enables you to specify the Adams specific options for a model
publish.

Figure 7 The SimManager publish dialog box in Adams/View

You can choose to publish the model in the Adams Command File format (*.cmd) or Adams Dataset File
(*.adm) format.
Also, you can either publish existing results file(s) or choose from existing analyses in the model
(whereupon results files will be automatically written and published along with the model). Figure 8
shows the available options for publishing results along with the model.

Figure 8 The available results-publish options in Adams/View

 SimManager Integration 9
Setting up the Connection Properties

If you choose to publish the model in the Adams Dataset File format (.adm), then you have the option
to publish existing simulation scripts, in the form of ACF files or can choose one or more simulation
scripts from the model (whereupon Simulation Script file(s) (.acf) will be automatically written and
published along with the model as additional model files). The available options can be seen in Figure 9

Figure 9 The available simulation script-publish options in Adams/View

It is required that the simulation script file being published belongs to the model being published. If it is
not, a warning message will be reported as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10 Warning message for a ‘model-simulation script’ mismatch

At this point, you may choose to continue or abort the publish operation. The parameters discussed so
far, can be entered from the command prompt directly. In either case (GUI or command prompt), you
would be presented with the SimManager publish dialog box.
10 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

The Figure 11 shows the SimManager publish dialog box while publishing an Adams Input Deck. The
dialog box is used to enter the SimManager specific options, required for the publish operation. Note that
the Model file, Model Type and the additional model files (model dependencies) are set automatically.

Figure 11 The SimManager publish dialog box

You would then typically select the Project/Study to which the model will be published, by clicking on
the corresponding button marked Select... on the dialog box. This opens up the project selection dialog
box as shown in the Figure 12.
 SimManager Integration 11
Setting up the Connection Properties

Figure 12 The SimManager project selection dialog box

This dialog box is used to select the project under which the model is to be published. Once you select
the desired project, you would then select the Variant by clicking on the corresponding button marked
Select... on the publish dialog box (Figure 11). This opens the Variant selection dialog box as shown in
the Figure 13.

Figure 13 The SimManager variant selection dialog box

You can also add/edit/remove key-results to any results being published along with the model. This is
done from the Advanced Inputs tab on the publish dialog box, as shown in the Figure 14.
12 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

Figure 14 The SimManager ‘Advanced Inputs’ section on the publish dialog box

Once you entered complete and valid data in the publish dialog box and click on the Submit button, the
model data would be published to the selected project.

2. Publishing data in Adams/Car

The SimManager functionality in Adams/Car allows you to publish entire subsystems or assemblies to
the SimManager server. The Figure 15 shows the publish menu in Adams/Car.
 SimManager Integration 13
Setting up the Connection Properties

Figure 15 The SimManager publish menu in Adams/Car

To publish a subsystem in Adams/Car you will select the Subsystem sub-menu which opens the
Subsystem publish dialog box as shown in Figure 16. You can select the desired subsystem to publish
from among the available subsystems. Note that a subsystem needs to be open in the session, in order to
be publishable.

Figure 16 The Adams/Car publish subsystem dialog box

14 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

When you click the OK or Apply button, the selected subsystem

(MDI_Demo_Vehicle.TR_Front_Suspsension in this case) is bundled into a *.zip file on the
windows platform (or a *.tar on linux) and the SimManager publish dialog box is seen as in Figure 17.

Figure 17 The SimManager publish dialog box

Note that this is the same dialog box as seen when publishing Adams/View models. The only noticeable
difference is in the title (Publish Adams Car Analysis Model) and the Model Type
(AdamsCarAnalysisModel) both being relevant to the model being published.
Also note that any and all subsystem dependencies are bundled in the .zip/.tar itself and as such
Adams/Car models (subsystems and assemblies) do not have any additional model files published
separately. Further interaction with the dialog box to publish the model is as explained in Publishing data
in Adams/View
 SimManager Integration 15
Setting up the Connection Properties

If you are publishing a Car assembly, you have an option of selecting one or more results files/one or
more Analyses to be published along with the assembly. If one or more Analyses are selected, the
corresponding results files will be automatically written and published along with the model. This is
shown in the Figure 18

Figure 18 The Adams/Car publish assembly dialog box

The procedure to publish a Adams/Car assembly remains the same as a subsystem. Like subsystems,
Adams/Car assemblies too are bundled along with their dependencies and then published as a single
zip/tar file.
The results however are published separately along with the model and are not part of the zip/tar.

Important: • For the publish functionality in Adams/Car to work on windows, make sure that
Winzip (a popular archiving utility on the windows platform) is installed on the
system. The SimManager functionality currently supports only Winzip for
archiving purposes on the windows platform.
• Ensure that the environment variable ZIP_UTILITY is set and points correctly to
the winzip path. A possible value for ZIP_UTILITY could be C:/Program
Files/WinZip/WINZIP32.EXE.
16 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

Retrieve data from the SimManager server

1. Retrieve Adams/View data from a SimManager server
The retrieve functionality is used to retrieve a model (Adams/View or Adams/Car) (and any
results/simulation scripts published along with it) from the SimManager server. The retrieve dialog box
is accessible from File -> SimManager -> Retrieve Data menu or alternatively from the ‘file
simmanager retrieve’ command.
You can choose:
1. Retrieve and open the model in the current session
2. Only retrieve (download from the SimManager server) the model along with results to the desired
location
Once you select the retrieve option (from the main-menu or by issuing the retrieve command), the
SimManager retrieve dialog box is shown as seen in Figure 19.

Figure 19 The empty SimManager retrieve dialog box

 SimManager Integration 17
Setting up the Connection Properties

To begin with the dialog box is empty. You need to select the model to retrieve, by hitting the
corresponding Select… button. This opens the model selection dialog box shown in Figure 20.

Figure 20 The SimManager model selection dialog box

Once you select the model to retrieve, this dialog box closes and the retrieve dialog box is populated with
the model details. One such instance is shown in the Figure 21.
18 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

Figure 21 The SimManager retrieve dialog box upon model selection

The Model files section will contain all the model dependency files such as MNF, Parasolid, matrix files,
that are automatically published along with the model, as well as the additional files such as simulation
scripts that you can explicitly publish along with the model. The results files can be seen in the Related
Objects section of the dialog box.
You can select from these files, the ones which you want to retrieve/open in the current session. This is
done by checking the box provided beside the file name. You will also have to specify the location on the
local system to which the files will be retrieved. Here you have the option to overwrite any existing files,
if present at the specified location.
For the Open Model option, you need to click the Open Model… button. Once you do this, the selected
model will be retrieved from the SimManager server to the specified location and the model (along with
the selected results/simulation scripts) imported into the current session.
For the retrieve only operation, you need to click the Submit button. This will only download, all the
selected files from the SimManager server to the specified location.
 SimManager Integration 19
Setting up the Connection Properties

Note that for the Open Model operation, it is mandatory that all the model dependency files (such as
‘mylink.mnf’ in this case) be selected, otherwise the model dependency files will be left out from the
retrieve operation and the open model operation will fail. The model-dependency files are marked with
a role on the lines of Model_Dependency_File_xxx. This can help you to differentiate between which
files are being referred to by the model and which ones are simply additional model files.

2. Retrieve Adams/Car data from a SimManager server

The data retrieval procedure for Adams/Car is pretty much the same as that for Adams/View. The only
addition in Adams/Car is that you need to specify an existing database to which you want to retrieve the
subsystem/assembly.
When you specify the retrieve command in Adams/Car you are presented with the dialog box as shown
in the Figure 22

Figure 22 The SimManager retrieve dialog box upon model selection

This is where you specify the database to which the model files will be retrieved, during the Open Model
operation. Upon clicking the OK button, the SimManager retrieve dialog box will be displayed. Further
interaction with the dialog box, is as explained in Retrieve Adams/View data from a SimManager server.
Note that during the Open Model operation, the subsystem/assembly selected for retrieval will be first
published to the selected database and then opened in the current session.
20 Adams/View
Setting up the Connection Properties

Web Client
The functionality provides access to the web interface to the SimManager as shown in Figure 23. This is
the only functionality (apart from connection properties) which does not require you to be logged on to
the SimManager server.

Figure 23 The Web-client UI

Examples of Using Adams/View
Tutorials of overall product use:
• Getting Started Using Adams/View
• Using Adams/Insight with Adams/View

Examples of Adams/View features:

• Example of Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit
• Example of Animating Natural Frequencies
• Example of Using Contact Forces
• Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface
• Example Macros
• Example of Adding a Sensor
• Example of Using Splines
• Example of Using System Elements
• Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves
• Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

Examples of Using Adams/Solver with Adams/View:

• FORTRAN
• C++

Adams Verification Guide

2 Adams/View
Example of Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Example of Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

Overview
The following example illustrates how you can use the Adams/View Controls Toolkit to control the speed
of a part in your model based on a known speed profile. To download the model for this example
(ControlVelocity.cmd), go to the following knowledge base article (KBA) in the Adams Knowledge
Base:
http://support.adams.com/kb/faq.asp?ID=kb8747.html

To see other examples of the Adams/View Controls Toolkit, see the following articles in the Knowledge
Base

Table 1 Examples in Knowlege Base

Example of: In the KBA:
General use of Adams/View Controls Toolkit http://support.adams.com/kb/faq.asp?ID=8726
Feedback control system without using controls http://support.adams.com/kb/faq.asp?ID=8727
package elements
Proportional feedback control http://support.adams.com/kb/faq.asp?ID=8458

Figure 1 Control Block Diagram

All of the connecting lines in the diagram are elements that you can create using the Adams/View
Controls Toolkit. The specified speed profile is entered into a spline element named SpeedSpline. You
can create this using Build -> Data Elements -> Spline -> New, and then entering the speed vs. time
profile that you want. (Alternatively, you could select File -> Import Test Data to enter your values.)
 Examples of Using Adams/View 3
Example of Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit

The lines in Figure 1 correspond to the following toolkit elements

Table 1 Example Toolkit Elements

VActual • Block Type: Input Function (input-signal block)
• Function: VX(.ControlVelocity.PART_2.cm). This is the
measured velocity of the ball with respect to ground.
VDesired • Block Type: Input Function (input-signal block)
• Function:
AKISPL(time,0,.ControlVelocity.SpeedSpline, 0).
This is a look-up in the defined spline element SpeedSpline.
VDifference • Block Type: Summing Junction
• Input1: VDesired (+)
• Input2: VActual (-)
ForceGain • Block Type: Gain
• Input: VDifference
• Gain: 100

After you run the model for one second and 100 time steps, you see two strip charts:
• The actual ball speed measure
• The desired speed versus time profile (using the defined spline element SpeedSpline)

They should look very similar when the simulation is run.

4 Adams/View
Example of Using Contact Forces

Example of Using Contact Forces

Overview
The following example demonstrates how to create a contact between a cam and follower on a cam valve.
In the example, you import an Adams/View command file that builds the valve cam model for you. You
then create a curve-to-curve contact force to define how the cam and follower come into contact. Finally,
you run a simulation of the model to see the forces acting between the cam and follower. The model is
shown in Figure1.

Figure 2 Valve Cam Example

The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide, where
install_dir is the directory in which Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Creating the Contact Force
• Simulating the Contact Force
 Examples of Using Adams/View 5
Example of Using Contact Forces

Importing the Command File

To import the command file to create the valve cam:
1. Copy the command file valve.cmd to your local directory. It is located in the
install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide directory, where install_dir is the directory in which the
Adams software is installed.

Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During
installation, your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so
you can write to the installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need
to change the permissions of the above file when you copy them to your working
directory.

2. Start Adams/View and import valve.cmd.

3. Zoom in on the location where the cam and follower meet so that your window looks similar to
the one shown in Figure 2.

Figure 3 Zoomed Valve Cam Example

Creating the Contact Force

Now you’ll create a contact force between the cam and follower. When modeling contacts, you will
typically have several options for how you define the contact. In this example, you could define the
contact between three-dimensional solid objects (for example, the cylinder on the follower and the
extrusion representing the cam). You will, however, use two-dimensional elements to reduce the time it
takes to solve the simulation.

To create the contact:

1. From the Force tool stack, select the Contact Force tool .
6 Adams/View
Example of Using Contact Forces

The Create Contact dialog box appears.

2. Set Type to Curve to Curve.
3. Right-click the I Curve text box, point to Contact_Curve, and then select Pick.
4. Select the follower geometry on the part Rod (Circle_1). For the location of Circle_1,
see Figure 3.
The I Direction pull-down menu fills with the selected geometry.
5. Right-click the J Curve text box, point to Contact_Curve, and then select Pick.
6. Select the cam geometry. It is a BSPLINE with the name .valve.cam.GCU173. For the
location of .valve.cam.GCU173, see Figure 3.
The J Direction pull-down menu fills with the selected geometry.
7. Select OK.
Adams/View creates a contact force between the cam and follower. Notice that it places a white
arrow on each curve to show the direction of the force. Figure 4 shows the arrows. For this
example, you don’t need to change direction. If you did need to change it, you’d select the
geometry in a Direction pull-down menu, and then select the Change Direction tool .

Figure 4 Arrow Indicating Contact-Force Direction

Simulating the Contact Force

Now you’ll simulate the model to see how the cam and follower come into contact now that you’ve added
a contact force.

To run a simulation:
1. From the Main toolbox, select the Simulation tool .
 Examples of Using Adams/View 7
Example of Using Contact Forces

2. Set the simulation to have an end time of 1.0 second and 100 output steps.
3. Select the Simulation Start tool .
Notice how the follower lifts off the cam during the simulation.

Viewing the Results of the Simulation

Now you’ll review the results of the simulation.

To view results of the simulation:

1. From the Review menu, select PostProcessing.
2. Load the animation of the simulation.
3. To divide the window into two viewports, right-click the Page Layout tool stack , and select
the 2 Views - side by side tool.
4. Plot the results of the contact force in the right view.
5. Animate and observe the animation as the cam goes through three cycles. Notice the increased
force as the lifter begins movement and the spline when it loads.
8 Adams/View
Example of Animating Natural Frequencies

Example of Animating Natural Frequencies

The following example demonstrates how to view natural frequencies. In the example, you import an
Adams/View command file of a two-mass, two-degree of freedom (DOF) model. The model is shown in
Figure 5.

In the model, a spring damper, SPRING_1, connects the larger part, PART_2, to the smaller part,
PART_3. Another spring damper, SPRING_2, connects PART_3 to ground2. Both parts slide with
respect to the ground in translational joints, JOINT_1 and JOINT_2, respectively.
In this example, you will load a command file that builds the model for you. You then use the
Adams/View linear modes controls to view the different modes in the model and plot and view a table of
the eigenvalues.

Figure 5 Two-DOF Example

The command file that you’ll use is in the directory install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir
is the directory in which the Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Animating Modes
• View the Eigenvalues
 Examples of Using Adams/View 9
Example of Animating Natural Frequencies

Importing the Command File

To import the command file to create the two-DOF model:
1. Copy the command file mode_animation_example.cmd to your local directory. It is located in the
install_dir/aview/examples/user_guide directory, where install_dir is the directory in which the
Adams software is installed.

Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.

2. Start Adams/View, and then import mode_animation_example.cmd.

Animating Modes
To animate the modes:
1. Run a linear simulation.
2. From the Review menu, select Linear Modes Control.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Mode, and then enter mode 1 as the mode to be
animated.
4. Select the Animate tool .
The principal motion in this mode is in PART_2. PART_3 has a relatively small amount of
motion.
5. To reduce the amount of gross motion on the parts, set Max. translation to 20.
6. To animate the second mode, enter 2 for the mode number and select the Animate tool.
In this mode, PART_3 has greater motion than PART_2.

View the Eigenvalues

To plot and view a table of the eigenvalues for this model:
1. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Plot.
The Eigenvalue plot shows two pairs of eigenvalues as shown in Figure 6.
10 Adams/View
Example of Animating Natural Frequencies

Figure 6 Plot of Two-DOF Model Eigenvalues

The pair of values closest to the real axis corresponds to mode 1 and the other pair corresponds to
mode 2.
2. Select Close and Delete Plot.
3. In the Linear Modes Control dialog box, select Table.
Two rows of data appear in the information window as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7 Table of Two-DOF Model Eigenvalues

 Examples of Using Adams/View 11
Example Macros

Example Macros

Overview
The following are some example macros:
• Create Marker Macros
• Create Extrusion Macros

For more examples of macros, see:

• Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface.
• The examples directory in the Adams/View installation area.
• Adams Knowledge Base at http://support.adams.com/kb. Many of the example files use macros.

Create Marker Macros

The following macros create coordinate system markers between existing markers. They differ only in
how the newly created marker is oriented.
• Example 1 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers
• Example 2 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers (Variation)

Example 1 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers

The macro shown below creates a new marker at a location midway between the location of two existing
markers. It creates the new marker so its orientation is the same as the global coordinate system's.
The macro expects you to specify three parameters when you execute the macro, as indicated by the three
names preceded immediately by a dollar sign ($). Note that the three parameters used by the macro are
defined up front, at the beginning of the macro, before they are ever used in an executable Adams/View
command. Defining macro parameters at the beginning of a macro allows you to explicitly declare a type
for each parameter. The T=marker or T=new_marker string associated with the parameters indicate
that a user can only specify an existing marker or a new marker, respectively, for that particular
parameter. Although declaring the type in advance is not required, we recommend it.
! $FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
! $SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location = (( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x) )/2
),&
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y) )/2 ),&
(( ($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z) )/2 )&
orientation = 0,0,0&
relative_to = ground
12 Adams/View
Example Macros

Example 2 - Macro to Create Marker Midway Between Two Existing Markers (Variation)
The macro shown below is similar to the first macro example in that it creates a new marker midway
between two existing markers. It, however, directs the new marker's z-axis so it points from the first
marker towards the second marker. The two markers that a user specifies must both belong to the same
part and to the same part as the new marker being created.
!$FIRST_MARKER: T=marker
!$SECOND_MARKER: T=marker
! $NEW_MARKER_NAME: T=new_marker
!
defaults orient_axis_and_plane
axis_and_plane_setting=z_axis_zx_plane
!
marker create marker_name=$NEW_MARKER_NAME &
location =
((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_x)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_x))/2), &

((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_y)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_y))/2), &

((($FIRST_MARKER.loc_z)+($SECOND_MARKER.loc_z))/2) &
along_axis = $FIRST_MARKER, $SECOND_MARKER &
relative_to = ground

Create Extrusion Macros

The following macros extrude existing geometry. They differ only in how you specify the path of the
extrusion.
• Example 3 - Macro to Extrude Geometry Along Specified Z-axis of a Specified Marker
• Example 4 - Macro to Extrude Geometry Along Reference Marker of Curve

Example 3 - Macro to Extrude Geometry Along Specified Z-axis of a Specified Marker

The following macro helps you create an extrusion from an existing curve that you specify. When
executing the macro, you specify a real number for the length for the extrusion as well as the name of an
existing marker along whose z-axis the curve will be extruded. The macro automatically makes the new
extrusion geometry belong to the same part as the curve geometry that you also specify. It supplies a
unique name for each new extrusion, such as EXT_1, EXT_2, and so on.
! $curve_to_extrude: T=geometry
! $extrusion_length: T=real
! $along_Z_axis_of_marker: T=marker
defaults model part_name=($curve_to_extrude.parent)
!
geometry create shape extrusion &
extrusion_name=(UNIQUE_NAME("EXT"))&
profile_curve=$curve_to_extrude&
length_along_z_axis=$extrusion_length&
reference_marker=$along_Z_axis_of_marker&
relative_to=ground
 Examples of Using Adams/View 13
Example Macros

Example 4 - Macro to Extrude Geometry Along Reference Marker of Curve

The following macro is identical to the third macro example, except it automatically sets the direction
along which the extrusion will occur to that of the z-axis of the reference marker of the curve. In this case,
you only need to specify the curve to extrude and the extrusion’s length to execute the macro.
! $curve_to_extrude: T=geometry
! $extrusion_length: T=real
!
defaults model part_name=($curve_to_extrude.parent)
!x
geometry create shape extrusion&
extrusion_name=(UNIQUE_NAME("EXT"))&
profile_curve=$curve_to_extrude&
length_along_z_axis=$extrusion_length&
reference_marker=($curve_to_extrude.ref_marker_names)&
relative_to=ground
14 Adams/View
Example of Using Splines

Example of Using Splines

Overview
In this example, we use a spline to relate the force of a spring to its deformation. The values in Table 1
show the relation of a force in a spring to its deformation.

Table 1 Data Relating Spring Force to Spring Deflection Force

When the deflection is: The force is:
-0.33 -38.5
-0.17 -27.1
-0.09 -15.0
0.0 0.0
0.10 10.0
0.25 30.0
0.40 43.5
0.70 67.4

Using this table, you can determine the force when deflection equals -0.33, and the force when deflection
equals -0.17. You cannot, however, determine the force when the deflection is -0.25. To determine the
force at any deflection value, Adams/View creates a continuous function that relates deflection and force.
The continuous approximation is then used to evaluate the value of the spring force at a deflection of -
0.25. If you input two sets of values (x and y) using a spline data element, you can define the curve that
the data represents.
You would then use the spline data element in a function or subroutine that uses cubic spline functions
to fit a curve to the values. The curve allows Adams/View to interpolate a value of y for any value of x.

Procedure
Briefly, the steps that you’d perform to use the spline data element to define the force deflections are:
1. Create the spline using the spline editor or the general method.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 15
Example of Using Splines

2. Build a simple nonlinear spring-damper, and then modify it to use the spline. To use the spline in
the spring-damper definition, under Stiffness and Damping in the Spring-Damper Modify dialog
box, change the stiffness coefficient to Spline: F=f(defo). Adams/View builds a function
expression for you, using AKISPL and modeled spring length as free length.

Note: You can also use a single- or multi-component force to define the force deflections. In this
case, you would select Custom as you create the force, and then modify the force by
entering a function expression, such as:

You can use the Function Builder for assistance in building the expression.
16 Adams/View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves

Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to

Create Curves

Overview
To create geometric splines from a file you must create a matrix, create a curve using the matrix, and then
create a bspline using the curve. The following steps outline this process.
• Importing Test Data
• Creating a Matrix
• Creating a Curve
• Creating Geometry

Importing Test Data

To import test data:
• Import test data and create a spline as explained in the Adams/View online help.

Creating a Matrix
Now, you create a matrix. Note that you can also import a matrix from a file formatted as explained in
the MATRIX statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

To create a matrix:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Matrix, and then select New.
2. Do the following:
• Select Enter input ordered by columns.
• Define the number of rows in matrix (number of points used to define curve).
• Define the Column Count as 3 (x,y,z coordinates).
3. Display the Expression Builder to define the x matrix column from a previously created spline:
• Right-click the Values text area, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder.
• Set Getting Object Data to All Objects.
• Right-click All Object text area, point to All, and then select Browse.
The Database Navigator appears.
4. From the Database Navigator, select the spline containing the x values necessary to define your
curve. For example:
model_1 -> spline_1
 Examples of Using Adams/View 17
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves

The spline name appears in the text area.

5. Select Get Data Owned By Object.
A selection box appears for these items,
6. Select the column of data containing the x values necessary to define your curve.
The expression appears in the text box. For example:
.model_1.spline_1.x
7. Because you want these numbers represented by this expression, frame the expression with the
evaluation expression:
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.x))
8. Repeat Step 7 to define the y and z matrix columns expressions (or cut and paste from the x value
column expression).
9. Make sure the column expressions are separated by commas. For example:
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.x)),
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.y)),
(eval(.model_1.spline_1.z))
10. Select OK to create the matrix.

Creating a Curve
To create a curve:
1. From the Build menu, point to Data Elements, point to Curve, and then select New.
2. Select the matrix name of the matrix you created in Creating a Matrix.
3. Select OK.

Creating Geometry
To create geometry:
1. On the Main toolbox, from the Rigid Body tool stack, select the Spline tool .
2. Create a spline using a few points.
3. Right-click the spline you created, point to its geometry name, and then select Modify.
4. In the Curve Name text box, select the name of the curve created in Creating a Curve.
5. Select a reference marker for the geometry.
6. Select OK to create the bspline.
18 Adams/View
Example of Using Splines Imported from Test Data to Create Curves

Note: To have your geometry tightly line up with your curve, you should edit it so that the
segment count is very high (for example, 1000 for a 51-point curve). This will give you a
good representation of the curve shape. Remember, however, that geometry is not crucial
to simulation results. Adams/Solver will use your curve information. Therefore, if your
curve shape is not what you would expect, it is your curve that must be modified, not your
geometry.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 19
Example of Adding a Sensor

Example of Adding a Sensor

Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use a sensor to stop a simulation. In the example, you import
an Adams/View command file that builds a model of a garage-door mechanism. In the example, you will
add a sensor to the model to stop the simulation when the bottom of the door reaches the ground. The
garage door model is composed of several rigid sections hinged together, just as many typical garage
doors are.
You construct the sensor so it monitors the vertical component of distance between a point on the bottom
tip of the lowest door section and the global xz plane and stops the simulation when this distance becomes
approximately equal to zero.
Mathematically, the following relationship defines the sensor:
Halt the simulation if DY between tip and ground  1.0E-3
If this never occurs, run to normal completion
We’ve provided you with two command files that you can use depending on how much of the example
you want to do yourself:
• gdoor_without.cmd - Model with no sensor defined.
• gdoor_with.cmd - Model with sensor defined.

You can also use gdoor_with.cmd if you encounter difficulties with the example or want to check
your work. Use the Simulate  Sensor  Modify menu to see how we created SENSOR_1.
The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Simulating the Model without a Sensor
• Adding a Sensor
20 Adams/View
Example of Adding a Sensor

Importing the Command File

To import the command file to create the garage door:
1. Copy the command file gdoor_without.cmd to your local directory.

Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.

2. Start Adams/View and import gdoor_without.cmd.

You should see the model, shown on the next page, in your modeling window. A strip chart also
appears. It tracks the height of the door.

Figure 8 Garage-Door Mechanism

Simulating the Model without a Sensor

First, you’ll run a simulation of this model to see how it acts when it does not have a sensor. As the door
moves, the measure tracks its height.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 21
Example of Adding a Sensor

To perform a simulation:
1. Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
Without a sensor, the simulation runs to time = 5 seconds even though the bottom tip of the door
goes into the ground (that is, below the global xz plane). This does not sufficiently model what
happens in the physical world, so you need to add a sensor to enhance the realism of your
simulation.
2. Reset the model to its initial configuration.

Adding a Sensor
You’ll now add a sensor that uses the run-time function DY to monitor when the tip of the garage door
crosses ground. DY returns the y component of translational displacement from one object, in this case
ground, to another object, the bottom tip of the lowest door section. When the y component is 0 within a
tolerance of 1.0E-3, the sensor stops the simulation.

To add a sensor:
1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
2. Set Event Definition to Run-Time Expression.
3. Define the Expression to be:
DY(.gdoor.PART_2.tip, .gdoor.ground.frame, .gdoor.ground.frame)

Note: The shortened form DY(tip, frame, frame) also works. For help in defining this function,
right-click the Expression text box and use the Function Builder.

4. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
5. Now set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to less than or equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0, which is the value to trigger an action.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, use the default 1.0E-03, which is the allowable error
between the targeted value (0) and the actual sensed value.
6. In the Standard Actions section, select Terminate current simulation step.
7. Select Stop.
8. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected.
9. Select OK.

Simulating the Model with a Sensor

Now you’ll simulate the model again to see the effect of adding the sensor.
22 Adams/View
Example of Adding a Sensor

To perform a simulation:
• Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
The simulation now stops before reaching 5.0 seconds. The last output step should be at time =
4.6 seconds, and you should receive a message similar to the following:
WARNING: Sensor .gdoor.SENSOR_1 halting simulation at time 4.617.

Creating a Sensor with an Event Evaluation

Now you'll create a new sensor that evaluates the y-displacement of the bottom of the door with respect
to ground.

To add the sensor:

1. From the Simulate menu, point to Sensor, and then select New.
2. Set Event Definition to Run-Time Expression.
3. Define the Expression to be:
MOD(time, .5)

Note: This will cause the sensor to evaluate every .5 seconds.

4. Set Event Evaluation to Run-Time Expression.

5. Define the Expression to be:
DY( PART_2.tip, ground.frame, ground.frame)

Note: This will measure the y-displacement of the bottom of the door with respect to ground.

6. Select Non-Angular Values to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
7. Set the value to trigger the sensor action:
a. Set the pull-down menu to equal.
b. In the Value text box, enter 0.
c. In the Error Tolerance text box, enter 0.05.
8. In Standard Actions, select Generate additional Output Step at event.
9. Ensure that all other standard and special actions are not selected
10. Select OK.
Now you'll create a function measure to track the evaluation of the sensor.

To create a function measure:

1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Function, then select New.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 23
Example of Adding a Sensor

2. In the function work area, enter:

SENVAL(SENSOR_2)
3. Select OK.
A strip chart appears to track the value of the function measure.
Now you’ll simulate the model.

To simulate the model:

• Perform a dynamic simulation from 0 to 5 seconds with 200 steps.
The strip chart shows the y-position of the door every 0.5 seconds.
24 Adams/View
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model

of a Pendulum

Overview
The following example demonstrates how to use user-defined measures and illustrates some of the useful
capabilities of measures. In the example, you import an Adams/View command file that builds a model
of an ideal pendulum. The simple mathematical model of the ideal pendulum assumes the following:
• The link defining the pendulum has no mass or inertia.
• The sphere is a point mass.
• There is no friction in the revolute joint.
• The pendulum oscillates through a small angle.

You will then create an object measure and a user-defined analytical solution to measure the pendulum’s
kinetic energy. After simulating the model, you will use another user-defined measure to compare the two
kinetic energy measurements.
We’ve provided you with three command files that you can use depending on how much of the example
you want to do yourself:
• test_measures_without.cmd - Model with no measures defined.
• test_measures_with.cmd - Model with two of the four required measures.
• test_measures_final.cmd - Model with all four required measures.

The files are in the directory /install_dir/examples/user_guide, where install_dir is the directory in which
Adams software is installed.
The example is divided into the following sections:
• Importing the Command File
• Creating an Object Measure of Kinetic Energy
• Creating a User-Defined Analytical Measure
• Creating a User-Defined Comparison of the Measures
 Examples of Using Adams/View 25
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

Importing the Command File

To import the command file to create a simple pendulum:
1. Copy the command file test_measures_without.cmd to your local directory.

Note: By default on Windows, files in the installation directory are read-only. During installation,
your system adminstration can choose to change the permissions so you can write to the
installation directory. If this has not been done, you will need to change the permissions of
the above file when you copy them to your working directory.

2. Start Adams/View, and then import test_measures_without.cmd.

You should see the model, shown on the next page, in your modeling window.

Figure 9 Simple Pendulum

26 Adams/View
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

Creating an Object Measure of Kinetic Energy

The following steps describe how to measure the kinetic energy of a pendulum.
1. Right-click the sphere part, and select Measure.
2. In the Part Measure dialog box, change the name of the measure to Adams_KE.
3. From the Characteristic option menu, select Kinetic Energy.
4. Select OK.
A strip chart titled Adams_KE appears. Because you have not run a simulation, the chart contains
no information.

Creating a User-Defined Analytical Measure

The following steps describe how to build an analytical measure for kinetic energy. You will use an
Adams/Solver function measure because you can conveniently use the Adams/Solver variable time to
parametrize the equation.
Here is a brief review of the mathematical model for kinetic energy of a pendulum. The last portion of
the equation divides by 1000 to convert from millimeters to meters.

To build a function measure:

1. On the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Function, and then select New.
The Function Builder appears.
2. Change the function measure name to .model_1.MY_KE.
3. Type the following lines into the work area of the Function Builder:
0.5*wz(.model_1.PART_2.cm)**2*(15*(50**2 + 300**2) + 15000)/1000

Note: The Function Builder can only process 80 characters per line. To avoid any problems, use
multiple lines to input the kinetic energy expression.

4. Select OK.
A strip chart titled MY_KE appears. Because you have not run a simulation, the chart contains no
information.
5. Run an interactive dynamic simulation for 2.0 seconds with 50 steps (the default). Watch the
feedback of both measures.
Both plots should appear similar in period and magnitude. If not, double check the syntax of your
function.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 27
Example of Using User-Defined Measures in a Model of a Pendulum

Creating a User-Defined Comparison of the Measures

The following steps describe how to build a measure comparison of the analytic and Adams kinetic
energy results. You use an Adams/View computed measure because the information is already stored in
the measures .model_1.ADAMS_KE and .model_1.MY_KE.
1. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Range, and then select New.
2. Change the name of the range to MY_AVERAGE. Then, select the range type Average, and
specify the measure of .model_1.MY_KE.
3. Select OK.
A strip chart titled MY_AVERAGE appears. You do not need to run another simulation because
the strip chart already contains useful information based on the last simulation.
4. From the Build menu, point to Measure, point to Computed, and then select New. The Function
Builder appears.
5. Change the name of the computed measure to .model_1.PERCENT_ERROR.
6. Type the following line into the working area of the Function Builder:
100*(.model_1.ADAMS_KE - .model_1.MY_KE)/322.6
7. Select OK.
A strip chart titled PERCENT ERROR appears. You do not need to run a simulation because the
strip chart should already contain useful information. Remember that if you make any significant
changes to the model, these results are no longer valid.
You should see that the maximum percentage of error between the two curves is less than 3%.
28 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Overview
The following examples illustrate basic tasks you can perform with the Menu and Dialog-Box Builders:
• Modifying a Standard Menu
• Modifying a Standard Dialog Box
• Creating and Modifying a Custom Dialog Box
• Using Command Files to Customize the Interface

Modifying a Standard Menu

In this example, you’ll add a button to an existing menu.

To modify a standard menu:

1. On the Tools menu, point to Menu, and then select Modify.
The Menu Builder appears.
2. Scroll down to the Build menu section.
3. Add a button called Verify (see syntax below).

4. In the Menu Builder, on the Menu Bar menu, select Apply.

The Build menu now contains a button called Verify. To test it, create a model and then select
the Verify button. An information dialog box appears, and tells you whether or not your model
verified successfully.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 29
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Modifying a Standard Dialog Box

In this example, you delete a tool from the Main toolbox. It shows you how easy it is to edit existing
dialog boxes.

To delete a tool:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Modify.
The Database Navigator appears.
2. Double-click moag.
The Dialog-Box Builder appears.
3. Double-click the Main toolbox tool that you want to delete. For example, double-click the Select
tool.
4. In the Dialog-Box Builder, on the Edit menu, select Delete.
Adams/View removes the selected tool from the Main toolbox.

Creating and Modifying a Custom Dialog Box

In this example, you create a custom dialog box that you’ll modify to include buttons that let you set the
material type of a selected part in Adams/View. You’ll then create a custom menu to display the dialog
box.
• Creating a Custom Dialog Box
• Modifying Your Dialog Box
• Writing Commands for Your Dialog Box Objects
• Creating a Custom Menu on the Menu Bar

Creating a Custom Dialog Box

To create a custom dialog box:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Dialog Box, and then select Create.
2. On the Dialog Box menu, select New.
3. Assign a name to your dialog box. In this case, use Materials.
4. Select the OK, Apply, and Close predefined buttons.
5. Select OK to display your dialog box.
30 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Figure 10 Example Dialog Box with Predefined Buttons

Modifying Your Dialog Box

Now you can modify the dialog box you’ve created to create a field for selecting a part and create a
material type button.

To modify the dialog box:

1. Once you’ve created your dialog box, double-click its background to modify it.
2. Use the Dialog-Box Builder to create a label and name it Part.
3. Create a field next to the Part label. You will use the field to indicate the part for which you want
to change the material type. In the next steps, you set up the field to accept parts.
4. Double-click the field and in the Dialog Box Builder set Attributes to Value.
5. Set Object Type to Any.
6. In Type Filter, enter Part.
7. Select Apply.
8. Align the two fields using the tools on the Dialog-Box Builder toolbar.
9. Create another label and name it Material.
10. Create one button and align it next to the Material label.
11. Label the button Aluminum.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 31
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Figure 11 Example Dialog Box with One Field and One Button

Writing Commands for Your Dialog Box Objects

In this section, you’ll create commands for the button you created in the last example, and you’ll also
create buttons for all material types in Adams/View. You can use the Command Navigator, the command
window, or the log file to find the commands you need.

To see the default material types Adams/View supplies, do the following in the
Command Navigator:
1. Double-click +material, and then double-click modify.
A dialog box appears.
2. Right-click the Material Name box, point to Material, and select Browse.
The Database Navigator lists all the default material types.

To create the buttons and add commands:

1. Double-click the Aluminum button and write the command corresponding to its material type.
Make sure your command indicates the field you want to associate with the Aluminum button.
The next figure shows the commands that you’d enter.
32 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Figure 12 Example of Entering Commands for Aluminum Button

2. Copy the Aluminum button.

3. Paste it next to the existing Aluminum button, and change its name to Brass.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until your dialog box resembles the one shown next.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 33
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Figure 13 Example Dialog Box Containing all Material-Type Buttons

5. Copy the command used for the Aluminum button and modify it for the other buttons.
6. From the Options menu, select Test Box to activate the new dialog box for testing.
7. Use the right mouse button to click in the field next to the Part label in your dialog box, and select
the part to which you want to apply a certain material type.
8. Click the desired Material button.
Your part now has the assigned material type.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Creating a Custom Menu on the Menu Bar

Now, you’ll create a custom menu to display the dialog box you created and modified in the previous
steps.

To create a custom menu:

1. On the Tools menu, point to the Menu, and then select Modify.
2. Enter the syntax necessary to create a new menu, following the format in the Menu Builder. Name
your menu Custom.
3. Under the new menu, create two buttons: Menu Builder and Custom Dialog Box.
4. Write the commands for the two buttons such that Menu Builder displays the Menu Builder and
Custom Dialog Box displays your Materials dialog box.
34 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

Using Command Files to Customize the Interface

We’ve provided eight command files containing macros and interface changes as an example of using
Adams/View command (.cmd) files to customize your interface.
The example consists of a build command file, build_my_gui.cmd, that you import into
Adams/View. The build file imports the seven other command files, four of which contain the macros
and three of which contain the custom dialog boxes to run the three macros. The dialog boxes have fields
for entering data that is passed to the parameters of the macros. The build_my_gui.cmd file also
creates the custom menus that are used to execute the macros.
When you import the build command file into Adams/View, it creates a new set of menus in the main
menu bar (at the top of the Adams/View window). The top menu is called Marker. Under this are:
Toggle all visibility
Toggle some visibility
Scale Up
Scale Down
The .cmd files for this example are listed in Command Files. You can also find the files in the Adams
knowledge base article 8829 (http://support.adams.com/kb). If you do not have access to the knowledge
base, you can use the text copy file tool in Adobe Acrobat Reader to copy the text in Command Files to
files and save the files with a .cmd extension. The text copy tool is available in most browsers when you
are viewing a pdf.

Importing and Running this Example

To run this example:
1. Download all the .cmd files to the same directory on your computer and start Adams/View from
that directory. If you do not start Adams/View from this directory, you will received errors.
2. Use the File  Import (or the file command read commands) to import the file
build_my_gui.cmd.
3. Experiment with each menu to see what it does to the markers in your sample model. Then, edit
the various .cmd files to better understand how everything works.

What This Example Illustrates

We recommend the following when creating macros as command files as this example illustrates:
1. Create all your macros, test them to make sure they work correctly, and then save them as .cmd
files. If you use the Macro Builder to create your macros, export each to a .cmd file when you
are finished. Once you get familiar with the Adams/View commands necessary to create macros,
you may find it faster and easier to create your associated .cmd files using a text editor.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 35
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

2. Create all your custom dialog boxes that are required to execute the macros, test them to make
sure they work correctly, and then save them as .cmd files. If you create your dialog boxes in
Adams/View (by either using the Dialog Box Builder or double-clicking on the name of the macro
from within the Command Navigator), then you should export each to a .cmd file when you are
finished. As with macros, once you get familiar with the Adams/View commands necessary to
create custom dialog boxes, you may find it faster and easier to create your associated .cmd files
using a text editor.
3. Create a build .cmd file that contains the commands required to accomplish three main objectives:
• Import each of your macro .cmd files into Adams/View.
• Import each of your custom dialog box .cmd files into Adams/View.
• Create each of the custom menus in Adams/View needed to execute the macros, either directly
or indirectly (by displaying the custom dialog boxes).

Command Files
Table 1 lists and briefly explains the command files that make up this example. The text of the command
files follows the table.

Table 1 Example Command Files

The file: Does the following:
build_my_gui.cmd Reads in the other command files (file command read file_name = ...)

Creates the macros contained in the four mac_ command files (macro create
macro_name = ...)

Customizes the interface (interface menu create menu_name = ...)

dbox_sca_down.cmd Creates a dialog box for reducing the size of markers.
dbx_sca_up.cmd Creates a dialog box for increasing the size of markers.
dbx_vis_some.cmd Creates a dialog box to set the visibility of selected markers.
mac_sca_down.cmd Contains a macro that reduces the size of selected markers.
mac_sca_up.cmd Contains a macro that increases the size of selected markers.
mac_vis_all.cmd Contains a macro that turns on the visibility of selected markers.

build_my_gui.cmd
Customizes the interface and imports macros.
! --- Import macros
!
!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_vis_all &
file_name = "mac_vis_all.cmd" &
36 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

user_entered_command = "marker visibility all"

!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_vis_some &
file_name = "mac_vis_some.cmd" &
user_entered_command = "marker visibility some"
!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_scale_up &
file_name = "mac_scale_up.cmd" &
user_entered_command = "marker scale up"
!
macro read &
macro_name = mac_scale_down &
file_name = "mac_scale_down.cmd" &
user_entered_command = "marker scale down"
! --- Import dialog boxes (to execute those macros having
parameters)
!
file command read file = "dbox_vis_some.cmd"
file command read file = "dbox_sca_up.cmd"
file command read file = "dbox_sca_down.cmd"
! --- Create custom menus
!
interface menu create &
menu_name = .gui.main.mbar.markers &
label = "&Markers"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.main.mbar.markers.b_vis_all &
label = "&Toggle all visibility" &
commands = "int com com=\"marker vis all\""
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.main.mbar.markers.b_vis_some &
label = "&Toggle some visibility..." &
commands = "interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name =
.gui.mar_vis_som"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.main.mbar.markers.b_scale_up &
label = "Scale &Up..." &
commands = "interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name
=.gui.mar_sca_up"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.main.mbar.markers.b_scale_dn &
label = "Scale &Down..." &
commands = "interface dialog_box display dialog_box_name
=.gui.mar_sca_dow"

dbox_sca_down.cmd
Creates a dialog box for scaling markers.
 Examples of Using Adams/View 37
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow &
help_text = "Marker Scale Down" &
location = 410.0, 120.0 &
height = 68.0 &
width = 404.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Scale Down" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker scale down &", " ‘markers =
$f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
justified = left &
text = "Markers"
!
interface field create &
field_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.f_markers &
location = 162.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 240.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
scrollable = no &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 0 &
object_type = old &
type_filter = marker
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.OK &
location = 138.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "OK" &
38 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent

undisplay=yes" &
default = true
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.Apply &
location = 228.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Apply" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=no"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_dow.Cancel &
location = 318.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Cancel" &
commands = "interface dialog undisplay dialog=$_parent"

dbx_sca_up.cmd
Creates a dialog box for increasing the size of markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_sca_up &
help_text = "Marker Scale Up" &
location = 410.0, 120.0 &
height = 68.0 &
width = 404.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Scale Up" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker scale up &", " ‘markers =
$f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
 Examples of Using Adams/View 39
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

horiz_resizing = attach_left &

vert_resizing = attach_top &
justified = left &
text = "Markers"
!
interface field create &
field_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.f_markers &
location = 162.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 240.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
scrollable = no &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 0 &
object_type = old &
type_filter = marker
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.OK &
location = 138.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "OK" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=yes" &
default = true
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.Apply &
location = 228.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Apply" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=no"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_sca_up.Cancel &
location = 318.0, 35.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
40 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

label = "Cancel" &

commands = "interface dialog undisplay dialog=$_parent"
dbx_vis_some.cmd
Sets the visibility of selected markers.
!
interface dialog_box create &
dialog_box_name = .gui.mar_vis_som &
help_text = "Marker Visibility Some" &
location = 184.0, 108.0 &
height = 118.0 &
width = 425.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
title = "Marker Visibility Some" &
iconifiable = no &
execution_commands = "marker visibility some &", &
" ‘markers = $f_markers‘" &
decorate = yes &
resizable = yes &
grab_all_input = no
!
interface label create &
label_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.l_markers &
location = 2.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 160.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
justified = left &
text = "Markers"
!
interface field create &
field_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.f_markers &
location = 162.0, 2.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 261.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = expand &
vert_resizing = attach_top &
scrollable = no &
editable = yes &
required = yes &
execute_cmds_on_exit = no &
number_of_values = 0 &
object_type = old &
type_filter = marker
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.OK &
location = 159.0, 85.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
 Examples of Using Adams/View 41
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

units = pixel &

horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "OK" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=yes" &
default = true
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.Apply &
location = 249.0, 85.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Apply" &
commands = "interface dialog execute dialog=$_parent
undisplay=no"
!
interface push_button create &
push_button_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.Cancel &
location = 339.0, 85.0 &
height = 25.0 &
width = 76.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_right &
vert_resizing = attach_bottom &
label = "Cancel" &
commands = "interface dialog undisplay dialog=$_parent"
!
interface separator create &
separator_name = .gui.mar_vis_som.sep_1 &
location = 4.0, 44.0 &
height = 3.0 &
width = 417.0 &
units = pixel &
horiz_resizing = attach_left &
vert_resizing = attach_top

mac_sca_down.cmd
Creates a macro that scales selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale down
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
!$MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale=0.5 marker_name=$MARKERS

mac_sca_up.cmd
Creates a macro that increases the size of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker scale up
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
42 Adams/View
Examples of Customizing the Adams/View Interface

! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes scale_of_icons=2.0 marker_name=$MARKERS

mac_vis_all.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of all markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility all_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=.*

mac_vis_some.cmd
Creates a macro that turns on the visibility of selected markers.
!USER_ENTERED_COMMAND marker visibility some_on_off
!WRAP_IN_UNDO NO
! $MARKERS:t=marker:c=0
marker attributes visibility=toggle marker_name=$MARKERS
 A-D 1

Dialog box - F1 help

A-D
2 Adams/View
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool

2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Curve-Curve Constraint

Creates a curve-curve constraint that restricts a curve defined on the first part to remain in contact with
a second curve defined on a second part. The curve-curve constraint is useful for modeling cams where
the point of contact between two parts changes during the motion of the mechanism. The curve-curve
constraint removes three Degrees of freedom from your model.
Learn more about Curve-Curve Constraints.

For the option: Do the following:

First and Second For the first and second parts, select whether you are defining the curve-curve
constraint along a curve or an edge of a part:

• Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered

curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you
imported into Adams/View.
 A-D 3
3D Plot Viewer

3D Plot Viewer
Build -> Data Elements -> Spline -> New -> Type -> 3D -> 3D Preview

Lets you view a plot of a three-dimensional spline.

• Right-click on the background to use the Shortcut menus of view controls.
• Right-click on the plot to display information about the plot, delete the plot, or rename it.

Learn about Viewing a Three-Dimensional Plot in the Spline Editor.

4 Adams/View
About Adams

About Adams
Help -> About

Displays the following information:

• Software version number and the date it was built
• Directory where Adams is installed
• Copyright statement
 A-D 5
About the Adams/View Modeling Database

About the Adams/View Modeling Database

The Adams/View Modeling database is a hierarchical database. Each object in the database has an object
that owns it, called its parent, and many objects own other objects, called their children. The top level
objects in the database are models, views, plots, and libraries containing such things as dialog boxes.
The following shows the hierarchy of a database called Database_1 that contains one model and a plot
of the model.

Names of objects in the database use a hierarchical naming structure. For example, a block built on the
ground part is named .model_1.ground.block.
6 Adams/View
Activate/Deactivate

Activate/Deactivate
Right-click object -> (De)activate

Sets the Activation status of a selected object and whether or not the object’s children inherit the
activation status of the parent.
Learn about About the Adams/View Modeling Database.

For the option: Do the following:

Object Enter the name of the object.
Object Active Select if you want the object active during a Simulation.

Learn About Activation Status.

Object's Dependent's Active Select if you want the object's children to also be active.

Learn About Inheriting Activation Status.

 A-D 7
Adams/Insight Display

Adams/Insight Display
Simulate -> Adams/Insight -> Display

Opens an existing experiment file from the current directory.

After you complete the dialog box and select OK, Adams/View closes and starts Adams/Insight,
displaying the specified experiment. After you've completed your work in Adams/Insight and exited,
Adams/View appears.
If you exit Adams/Insight by using the Run Simulations tool or the Data -> Simulation menu,
Adams/View will execute the experiment runs. If you exit Adams/Insight by using the File -> Close
Adams/Insight Window menu or the window manager, Adams/View will return, waiting for your next
interactive input.

For the option: Do the following:

Experiment Enter the name of the experiment to be opened. The file is saved with an .xml
extension in the current directory.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes

Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.

simulate multi_run set save_analysis=no

simulate multi_run set chart_objectives=no
simulate multi_run set chart_variables=no
simulate multi_run set show_summary=no
simulate single_run set save_analysis=no
simulate single_run set update=none
simulate single_run set monitor=none
8 Adams/View
Adams/Insight Export

Adams/Insight Export
Simulate -> Adams/Insight -> Export

Creates a new experiment file or overwrites an existing experiment file.

After you complete the dialog box and select OK, Adams/View populates the Adams/Insight experiment
file (in the current directory) with the factors and responses that have been defined in the specified model.
Factors consist of design variables, hardpoint x,y,z components, and UDE parameters. Responses consist
of design objectives.
Next, Adams/View closes and starts Adams/Insight.
If you reused an old experiment and Adams/Insight is able to use it to create a work space for the new
experiment, Adams/Insight immediately adds the work space to the new experiment file and returns to
Adams/View. Adams/View then appears and begins running the experiment.
Otherwise, Adams/Insight opens and displays the new experiment. After you've completed your work in
Adams/Insight and exited, Adams/View appears.
If you exit Adams/Insight by using the Run Simulations tool or the Data -> Simulation menu,
Adams/View will execute the experiment runs. If you exit Adams/Insight by using the File -> Close
Adams/Insight Window menu or the window manager, Adams/View will return, waiting for your next
interactive input.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Experiment Enter the name of the experiment to be created. The file is saved with an .xml
extension in the current directory.
Model Enter the name of the model to use for the investigation. The contents of the
specified model will be interrogated to build up the Candidate list of responses and
factors.
Simulation Script Enter the simulation script you want to use during the experiment.
Reuse Experiment Optionally, enter the name of an existing experiment file. If you enter an
experiment to reuse, Adams/Insight will reuse as many components of the old
experiment as possible in the new experiment. For more information, see Reusing
Components.
 A-D 9
Adams/Insight Export

Note: If you want to run all the investigation simulations in the current Adams/View session, you
can alter some of the Simulate settings to enable the entire series of simulations to run more
efficiently. Alternately, you can run all the simulations external to Adams/View with the
MDI INSIGHT BUILD command. This can be accomplished by saving the experiment
after the workspace has been defined, returning to Adams/View, and then issuing the MDI
INSIGHT BUILD command.

simulate multi_run set save_analysis=no

simulate multi_run set chart_objectives=no
simulate multi_run set chart_variables=no
simulate multi_run set show_summary=no
simulate single_run set save_analysis=no
simulate single_run set update=none
simulate single_run set monitor=none
10 Adams/View
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

The entries in this section show the keyboard shortcuts for Adams/View organized by operation.
Keyboard shortcuts are key combinations that access commands quickly. When you enter a keyboard
shortcut, the focus must be in the main window except when entering a keyboard shortcut that works in
dialog boxes.
The shortcuts are organized into the following operations:
• File Operations
• Edit Operations
• Display Operations
• Viewing Operations
• Drawing Operations

File Operations

To: Select:
Create a new modeling database Ctrl + n
Open an existing modeling database Ctrl + o
Save the current modeling database Ctrl + s
Print Ctrl + p
Read command file F2
Exit Ctrl + q

Edit Operations

To: Select:
Undo the last operation Ctrl + z
Redo the last undone operation Ctrl- Shift + z
Copy objects Ctrl + c
Paste text in text boxes in dialog boxes and as comments Ctrl + v
Cut text from text boxes in dialog boxes Ctrl + x
Quickly clear text from text boxes Left-click at the start of the text box, and
then press Ctrl-k or Ctrl-K
Delete selected object Del
Modify object Ctrl + e
Escape operation Esc
 A - D 11
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

Display Operations

To display: Select:
Command window F3
Coordinate window F4
Menu Builder F5
Dialog Box Builder F6
Working grid g
Plotting window (Adams/PostProcessor) F8
Help window F1

Viewing Operations

To: Select:
Rotate view in the XY directions r
Rotate view in the Z direction (s pin) s (lowercase)
Translate view t
Change perspective depth d
Dynamically zoom view z
Use dynamic increment Shift
Define a zoom area w
Center view c
Orient view to object (e lement) e
Fit view f
Fit view - no ground Ctrl + F
Orient view to front F
Orient view to right R
Orient view to top T
Orient view to isometric I
Toggle render mode between wireframe and shaded S (Uppercase)
Toggle screen icons on and off v
12 Adams/View
Adams/View Keyboard Shortcuts

Drawing Operations

To: Select and hold:

Turn off snapping to geometry Ctrl
Turn off highlighting of geometry during selection Ctrl
 A - D 13
Adams2Nastran

Adams2Nastran
Simulate -> Adams2Nastran

Export a linearized NASTRAN model from Adams at the current-time/dynamic/kinematic/static/quasi-

static equilibrium operating point.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Name Select the model which you want to export
Type Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity
(black box)
Nastran Output File Prefix Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).
Operating Point Choose the operating point at which the model will be exported (options
are current-time, dynamic, kinematic, static and quasi-static)
If you chose current-time then Adams exports a NASTRAN model immediately with no further analysis
specification, in other words model is exported at any current and valid operating point (i.e. static,
quasi-static, dynamic, and kinematic)
If you chose a dynamic/kinematic/quasi-static operating point following four options will be available
End Time Specify the simulation end time as an alternative to the duration of
simulation
Duration Specify the duration of simulation as an alternative to the simulation end
time
Number Of Steps Specify the number of steps, as an alternative to the step size
Step Size Specify the step size as an alternative to the number of steps parameter
Configuration File Name Specify a configuration file to be used to control the exporting of the
model. See Nastran bulk data deck export for more information.
Reset After Export Select if the simulation has to be reset automatically after the export
operation
Export all graphics Select if all the graphics are to be exported
Write To Terminal Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the
export operation
14 Adams/View
Add/Replace Simulations

Add/Replace Simulations
File -> Replace Simulations

Updates the data in the plots with that stored in simulation result files, without recreating the plots. Also
lets you add data from other Simulations to your existing plots.
When you update your plots, Adams/PostProcessor looks for simulation results in the original simulation
Results file (for example, a Request file) from which you imported the current data. If the time and date
stamp on the original file is more recent than the time and date stamp on the plot, Adams/PostProcessor
reloads the plot with the updated data.
If you use the Add Simulation option, a new legend, called the simulation legend, appears on the left side
of the plot. The simulation legend identifies the source of the data grouped by color or line style. The
original legend, called the curve legend, continues to show information about the original curves.

For the option: Do the following:

Add Simulation Select to add new curves.
Replace Simulation Select to update the curves already on the plot.
New Runs/ Enter the name of the simulation containing the simulation results to be replaced.
By default, the results of the last simulation (Last_run) replaces any simulation
Last Runs results that the curves use.
If you selected Add Simulations, the following options are available:
Auto Color/ You can:

Auto Style/ • Select Auto to allow Adams/PostProcessor to automatically assign

colors, styles, or weights to the curves.
Auto Weight
• Clear the selection of Auto to use the pull-down menu to set the colors,
styles, or weights. If you select No Change, Adams/PostProcessor uses
the current color of the curve representing the data to be added.
Update Pages Select the pages containing the plots that you want to update. Enter a range of
pages in the Start Page and End Page text boxes.
 A - D 15
Aggregate Mass

Aggregate Mass
Tools -> Aggregate Mass Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the total mass of a part or parts in your model. Adams/View returns the information in the
Information window or in a specified file. It ignores the ground part or any part that has no mass.

By default, Adams/View calculates all location coordinates and orientation angles in the current global
coordinate system. You can select a different coordinate system or reference frame relative to which you
would like the coordinates and angles returned. When you express the aggregate mass in the global
coordinate system, Adams/View essentially places a temporary marker at the center of mass location and
then it provides the inertia properties about the CM location with respect to the global coordinate system
orientation.
The orientation shown is the orientation of the principal moments of inertia.
Learn about Calculating Aggregate Mass of Parts.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Enter the name of the model whose parts you want to calculate total mass for.
Bodies Choose one of the following:

• All - Calculates the aggregate mass of all bodies in your model.

• Selected - Calculates the mass of only certain parts.
Select Select if you chose to calculate the mass of certain parts.

Select the desired parts from the list of parts in your model.

Tips To select objects:

Relative To Optional. Enter another coordinate system with respect to which you'd like
calculations to be relative. Default calculations are relative to the global coordinate
system.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Info Window If aggregate mass is written to Information Window, replace or append existing
information. Choose one of the following:

• Replace
• Append
• None
File Select if you want the output displayed to a file.

Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the information in the text box.
Brief Output Select to show only a brief summary of aggregate mass information.
16 Adams/View
Angle Measure

Angle Measure
Build -> Measure -> Angle -> New/Modify

Creates an angle measure.

Learn more about:
• Angle Measures
• About Simulation Output

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Change the name for the measure.
First Marker Enter the marker that defines the tip of the first vector.
Middle Marker Enter the second marker that defines the vertex.
Last Marker Enter the marker that defines the tip of the second vector.
Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you are modifying a
measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
 A - D 17
Animation Controls

Animation Controls
Review -> Animation Controls
Main toolbox ->

Allows you to work with Animations and control the frames from your simulation. Animations provide
instant feedback to you as your simulation runs.
By default, each time you run a simulation, Adams/Solver replaces the previous animation frames. To
replay earlier animations, you must save them in your modeling database.
18 Adams/View
Animation Controls

During animations, Adams/View displays frames as quickly as it can based on the graphics capabilities
of your computer hardware.

Animation Controls Container on Main Animation Controls Dialog Box

Toolbox
 A - D 19
Animation Controls

Option/Icon Description
Plays the animation backward.

Stops the animation.

Plays the animation forward.

Rewinds the animation.

Advances one frame.

Rewinds one frame.

Plays the animation in fast-backward mode.

Plays the animation in fast-forward mode.

Slider Click and drag until you reach the number of the frame you want to display.
Base Part/ Lets you set the view perspective or camera angle for an Animation. Setting
Fixed Base/ different animation view perspectives can be especially useful when parts
Std Camera undergo large motions and move off your screen during an animation, such
as with vehicle simulations.

Learn about Specifying the View Perspective of Animations.

Contour plots Toggles the display of Contour plots of flexible bodies. The default is set to
off to improve the speed of the animation, and to remove any caching of the
animation before playing it.

To learn about setting defaults for caching animations see PPT Preferences
- Animation.

To learn about displaying contour plots on flexible bodies see Animating

Deformations, Modal Forces, and Stress/Strain.
20 Adams/View
Animation Controls

Option/Icon Description
Cycles/Loop Sets how many times to replay the animation. The default is to play the
specified sequence of frames once.

In the Cycles box, enter a whole number representing the number of times
you want Adams/View to play the animation. It automatically rewinds the
animation before each replay.
Displays the full Animation Controls dialog box.

Render See Rendering mode.

Icons Toggles the Screen icons during animations.

Shortcut: Type a lowercase v.

Analysis Do one of the following:

• Enter the name of a saved Simulation.

• To animate multiple simulations simultaneously, enter the names of the
simulations you want to animate. Separate each simulation name with a
comma.
Note: When animating multiple simulations simultaneously, each
simulation must have the same number of output steps or frames
associated with it, as well as the same output time step size.
View Do one of the following:

• Play animations in a different view window, by entering the name of

any view window that is currently visible on your screen. The default
name is the currently active view.
• Play animation in multiple view windows at the same time by entering
multiple view names, separating each name with a comma.
Note: If you choose to animate in more than one view simultaneously,
every view you specify must animate the same simulation results.
You cannot display one simulation in one view and another
simulation in another view.
No Trace/Trace You can trace the paths of points during animation. See Tracing Paths of
Points During Animations.
 A - D 21
Animation Controls

Option/Icon Description
Time Range Defines a subset of the complete sequence of frames in an animation to
play. By default, Adams/View plays the complete sequence of frames. You
can set the interval to view based on time or frame number.

Choose from:

• Time Range - Enter a start time and stop time in the text box.
Adams/View replays those frames whose time is within the specified
range.
• Time - Enter an interval and select Apply.
• Frame Range - Enter a start frame and an end frame.
• Frame - Enter a frame number and select Apply.
Frame Enter a number of frames to skip. For example, enter 5 to have
Increment Adams/View display only every fifth frame.
Superimpose Toggles the overlay of frames on top of one another. By default, during an
animation, Adams/View erases the previous frame before drawing the next
frame.

We recommend that you use the frame or time range features, as well as the
frame increment so that only certain frames are superimposed on top of one
another.
Saves the model to the database at a simulated position, and under a new
name.

See Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.

Displays the Simulation Controls dialog box.

Learn about:
• Using Animations
• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes
22 Adams/View
Append Run Commands

Append Run Commands

Instead of having to know command names and syntax for many commands for running Simulations and
for saving and resetting simulation, you can enter values for the operations and then append the
appropriate commands to the current selected Script. Assistance on modeling commands is not available.
For additional assistance, you can also:
• Use the Command Navigator to see the available Adams/View commands, their keywords, and
parameters.
• Look at your aview.Log file to see the commands that have been executed and their syntax.

For the option: Do the following:

Run command to Select the simulation operation that you’d like to add to your script. For example,
be appended to select Transient - Dynamic to enter a command for performing a dynamic
script simulation.

Options for the operation you selected appear in the dialog box. For example, text
boxes and option button appear for setting the duration of a simulation.
If you select Transient - Dynamic or Transient - Kinematic, the following options appear:
Start at For a Transient Dynamic or Kinematic, select to have Adams/View perform a
equilibrium static simulation before performing a Dynamic simulation.
End Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how you want
Time/Duration it defined. You can select:

• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want the
simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the simulation to
run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your simulation.
You can specify:

• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want Adams/View to provide
output information over your entire simulation. For example, specify 50 steps
over a 1-second simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds
per step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units, between
output steps. The output frequency remains constant even if you change your
simulation end time or duration. For example, enter a step size of 0.01 seconds
to specify an output period of 0.01 seconds per step, which yields an output
frequency of 100 steps/second.
If you select Transient - Static Steps/Step Size and End Time/Durations options appear
If you select Equilibrium no other options will appear
 A - D 23
Append Run Commands

For the option: Do the following:

If you select Eigensolution following options appear:
Employ Damping Select if you would like apply damping during simulation
Generate Select if you would like to generate eigen vectors
Eigenvectors
If you select Nastran Export - Static following options appear:
Write To Terminal Select if the output file is to be displayed in the info window after the export
operation
Type Choose the type of export, that is low fidelity (white box) or high fidelity (black
box)
Nastran Output Choose the file prefix to be used for the exported Nastran file(s).
File Prefix
Configuration File Specify a configuration file to be used to control the exporting of the model
Name
If you select Nastran Export - Quasi Static along with the options for Nastran Export - Static, Steps/Step
Size and End Time/Duration options appear:
If you select Sate Matrix following options appear:
Plant Input Select an existing Plant Input
Plant Output Select an existing Plant Output
Matrix Format Select suitable controls design and analysis package format
Matrix File Name Specify a file name to which Adams/Solver (C++) writes the state matrices. If the
output is in the MATRIXX format, all matrices are written to this file. For the
MATLAB format, the file name is used as a base name. Each matrix is written to
a separate file, whose name Adams/Solver (C++) automatically constructs by
appending the matrix name to the user-specified base name.
If you select Assemble no options will appear
If you select Scripted following options will appear
Simulation Script Specify an existing script
Do a ‘simulation Select if you would like to reset the simulation controls to their initial configuration
single_run reset’
first
OK Will insert the appropriate Adams/View commands based on the options and
entries you selected/specified
Cancel Cancels the insertion of Adams/View commands
Enter any comments to help you manage and identify the script. Learn about
Comments.
24 Adams/View
Arc Tool

Arc Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Arc Tool

Creates arcs and circles centered about a location. You begin drawing an arc by specifying its starting and
ending angles. You then indicate its center location and set its radius and the orientation of its x-axis. You
can also specify the arc’s radius before you draw it. The Arc tool draws the angle starting from the x-axis
that you specify and moving counterclockwise (right-hand rule).
See Elements of an arc.
Before you create arc geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the arc geometry or add
the arc geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry. You can extrude a circle into solid geometry that has mass. Learn about Extruding
Construction Geometry Along a Path.

Learn about Creating Arcs and Circles.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/ Select either:
Add to Part/
On Ground • New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the arc to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the arc to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence
the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a
car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race
track can be added to ground.
Radius Enter the radius of the arc
Start Angle Enter the angle at which to start the arc. The default is to create a 90-degree arc
from a starting angle of 0 degrees.
End Angle Enter the angle at which to end the arc.
Circle Select to create a circle.
 A - D 25
Assembly Measure

Assembly Measure
Creates a measure on an assembly.
See Measures and Assemblies.

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Change the name for the measure.
Object Select the object to be measured.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Characteristic Select the object characteristic to measure.
Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to display the attributes of the measure. Not available for all types of
assembly measures, such as a spring-dampers, and only available when you are
modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help for more
information.
26 Adams/View
Associativity

Associativity
Database Navigator -> Associativity

Allows you to display the objects that a selected object uses. For example, you can select a joint in the
tree list to show the I and J markers that the joint uses. You can also select to view the objects that use
the selected object.
Learn about Viewing the Associativity of Objects.

For the option: Do the following:

Uses Select if you want to show the objects that the selected object uses.
Is Used By Select if you want to show the objects that use the selected object.
Auto Navigate Select if you want to set up an automatic navigation of the objects.
Save to File Select if you want to save the current associativity information to a file.
 A - D 27
Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy

Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy

Flexible Body Modify dialog box -> auto

Lets you disable or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy. Learn more about Enabling
and Disabling Modes Based on Strain Energy Contribution.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Name Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.
Analysis Name Enter the name of a pilot simulation.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Energy Tolerance Enter a fractional value. Adams/Flex will disable all modes that contributed less
than the specified fraction to the total strain energy during the test simulation.
For example, to disable all modes that contributed less than 0.1% of the strain
energy, enter 0.001.
28 Adams/View
Background Color Tool Stack

Background Color Tool Stack

Main Toolbox -> Background Color Tool Stack

Contains four colors to which you can set the background of the View window.

To change the background color:

• Select a color from the Background Color tool stack.
The background of all view windows changes to the selected color.
Learn about Setting View Background Colors.
 A - D 29
Beam

Beam
Build -> Forces -> Beam Tool

Creates a massless beam with a uniform cross-section.

You enter values of the beam’s physical properties, and Adams/Solver calculates the matrix entries
defining the forces that the beam produces. The beam transmits forces and torques between the two parts
in accordance with Timoshenko beam theory.
Learn about:
• Creating Beams
• Modifying Beams
30 Adams/View
Bode Plots

Bode Plots
Plot -> Bode Plots

Creates a Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor. Bode plots provide a way to study frequency response
functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations of nonlinear systems. The frequency
response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit harmonic excitation at the inputs at
various frequencies. A Bode plot in Adams/PostProcessor shows the amplitude gain and the phase shift
between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.

For the option: Do the following:

Input Format Select the type of input format.

Learn about Ways to Construct Bode Plots.

The elements in the dialog box change depending on the input format you selected. You can select any
one of the following input formats:

• Adams/Linear State Matrices

• Adams Matrices
• Linear State Equation
• TFSISO
• Transfer Function Coefficients
• Time Domain Measures
• Time Domain Results Set Components
Adams/Linear State Enter values for the following:
Matrices
• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending
frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
• In the State Matrices text box, the state matrices.
• In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
 A - D 31
Bode Plots

For the option: Do the following:

Adams Matrices Enter values for the following:

• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending

frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
• In the A through D Matrix text boxes, the A through D matrices
that define the state matrix.
• In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
Linear State Equation Enter values for the following:

• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending

frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
• In the Linear State Equation text box, the linear state equation to
be plotted.
• In the Inputs and Outputs text boxes, the input and output results
you would like to use for bode plot calculations. If you do not select
any inputs or outputs, Adams/PostProcessor computes all
combinations.
TFSISO Enter values for the following:

• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending

frequencies for the bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
• In the TFSISO text box, the transfer function to be plotted.
Transfer Function Enter values for the following:
Coefficients
• The frequency sweep by entering the starting and ending
frequencies for the Bode plot in the From and To text boxes and
selecting the frequency step (either Linear Samples, Log Samples,
or Step Size).
• In the Numerator Coefficients text box, the coefficients of the
transfer function numerator polynomial.
• In the Denominator Coefficients text box, the coefficients of the
transfer function denominator polynomial.
32 Adams/View
Bode Plots

For the option: Do the following:

Time Domain Measures Enter values for the following:

• In the Input Measure text box, the pre-defined or user-defined

measure of the system input.
• In the Output Measure text box, the pre-defined or user-defined
measure of the system output.
Note that the data determines the frequency range, unlike the previous
options.
Time Domain Results Enter values for the following:
Set Components
• In the Input Component text box, the results set component
characterizing system input.
• In the Output Component text box, the results set component
characterizing system output.
Note that the data determines the frequency range, unlike the previous
options.
 A - D 33
Border and Separation

Border and Separation

Dialog- Box Builder -> Preferences -> Separation

Allows you to enter values to be used by the Dialog-Box Builder functions that change the geometry of
Interface objects such as align, move, and create predefined. See Aligning Interface Objects and Moving
Interface Objects for more information.

For the option: Do the following:

Horizontal Border Width Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance from the object to the dialog
box border.
Vertical Border Width Enter a value to specify the vertical distance from the object to the dialog
box border.
Horizontal Separation Enter a value to specify the horizontal distance between dialog box objects.
Vertical Separation Enter a value to specify the vertical distance between dialog box objects.
34 Adams/View
Boss Tool

Boss Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Boss Tool

Creates circular protrusions or bosses on the face of solid objects

As you create a boss, you can specify its radius and height.
Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.

For the option: Do the following:

Radius Enter the radius of the boss.
Height Enter the height of the boss.
 A - D 35
Box Tool

Box Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Box Tool

Creates a three-dimensional solid block.

You draw the box’s length and width in the plane of the screen or the working grid, if it is turned on. The
Box tool creates a solid box with a depth that is twice that of the shortest dimension of the box (d = 2 *
min(l,h)). You can also specify the length, height, or depth of the box before you draw it.
The box dimensions are in screen coordinates with the height up, length to the left, and depth out of the
screen or grid:

Learn about Creating a Box.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the box to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the box to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence
the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a
car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race
track can be added to ground.
Length Enter the length of the box, if desired.
Height Enter the height of the box, if desired.
Depth Enter the depth of the box. If you do not specify a depth, Adams/View creates a
solid box with a depth that is twice that of the shortest dimension of the box (d = 2
* min(l,h)).
36 Adams/View
Box Tool

Note: One hotpoint appears after you draw the box. It lets you modify the length, height, and
depth of the box. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry
 A - D 37
Bushing Tool

Bushing Tool
Build -> Forces -> Bushing Tool

A bushing is a linear force that represents the forces acting between two parts over a distance. The
bushing applies a force and a torque. You define the force and torque using six components (Fx, Fy, Fz,
Tx, Ty, Tz).
To define a bushing, you need to create two markers, one for each part. The marker on the first part that
you specify is called the I marker. The marker on the second part that you specify is called the J marker.
Learn about:
• Bushings

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
Rotational K Enter the rotational stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the rotational damping coefficients.
38 Adams/View
Chain Tool

Chain Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Chain Tool

Links together wire Construction geometry to create a complex profile, which you can then extrude. The
geometry to be chained together must touch at one endpoint and cannot be closed geometry.
The Chain tool adds the final chained geometry to the part that owns the first geometry that you selected

Note: If you want to use the chained geometry with a pin-in-slot or curve-to-curve constraint, you
must turn the geometry into a spline. See the Spline Tool.

Learn about Chaining Wire Geometry.

 A - D 39
Chamfer Tool

Chamfer Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Chamfer Tool

Creates beveled (chamfered) edges and corners on a solid geometry:

Note: You will get different results when you chamfer one edge at a time than when you chamfer
all edges at once. Also, you may not be able to chamfer an edge if an adjoining edge has
already been chamfered. It depends on the complexity of the chamfering.

For the option: Do the following:

Width Specify the width of the bevel.

Learn about:
• Chamfering and Filleting Objects
• Fillet Tool
40 Adams/View
Clearance Compute

Clearance Compute
Tools -> Clearance ->Compute

When you request to run a Clearance study, Adams/PostProcessor calculates the minimum and
maximum distances between a pair of objects using data from a selected Simulation. It adds the
information to the animation associated with the simulation, which you can subsequently run. You can
also generate a report of the data and plot it.

Note: The number of frames in your animation can have a significant effect on the accuracy of
the distances reported. Therefore, for best results, we recommend that you perform at least
one clearance study with a large number of frames in the animation (time steps in the
simulation).

Learn about Defining a Clearance Study.

For the option: Do the following:

Simulation Select the simulation data against which you want to run the clearance study.
Treat Flexible Select if you want to calculate the clearance study as if flexible bodies were
Bodies as Rigid rigid. This reduces computations and allows the clearance study to run faster but
does not give you information about the effects of flexibility.
 A - D 41
Clearance Export Results

Clearance Export Results

Tools -> Clearance -> Write

Export reports of clearance studies. See Clearance study.

Learn about Viewing Clearance Data as Reports.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name of the file to which to export the clearance study.
Simulation Enter the name of the Simulation result against which you created the clearance
study.
42 Adams/View
Color Picker

Color Picker
Settings -> Colors -> Color Picker

Lets you select a basic color or create a custom color to be used for displaying objects and the background
of the Main window and any View windows that you create.

For the option: Do the following:

Basic Colors Select a color from the 48 basic colors available.

Tip: You can define a custom color by clicking the closest basic color,
modifying it, and then selecting Add to Custom Colors.
Custom Colors Select an empty box to create a custom color or select a custom color you've
already defined so you can modify it.
Color Matrix Click anywhere to select a custom color. Use the pointer to change the hue
and Saturation. Change hue by moving the pointer horizontally; change
saturation by moving the pointer vertically.

Luminosity Slider Drag the slider to change the luminosity or relative lightness or darkness of
a color. Changes the value in the Value text box.
Hue Specify the hue of a color. The values range from 0 to 239.
Saturation Specify the saturation of a color.
Value Specify the luminosity of a color.
Red Specify the amount of red in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Green Specify the amount of green in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Blue Specify the amount of blue in a color. You can use any combination of red,
green, or blue to define a color.
Add to Custom Colors Select to add the color currently displayed in the color matrix to the palette
of custom colors.
 A - D 43
Command File

Command File
Settings -> Command File

Allows you to specify whether Adams/View displays the command that it executes in the Command
window or displays the results of the commands on the screen. In addition, it lets you specify what
Adams/View should do when it encounters an error while reading an Adams/View command file.
Learn more with Import - Adams/View Command Files dialog box help.

For the option: Do the following:

Echo Commands Select if you want to see the commands that Adams/View executes as it
imports the file.
Update Screen Select if you want to see the results of the commands in the main window. If
you do not select this, Adams/View displays the results when it finishes
reading the command file.
If Adams/View encounters an error, you can select to:
Continue the Command Select if you want Adams/View to continue processing the line as if it were
typed interactively. This can be dangerous if there is no correction later on in
the line because Adams/View keeps issuing error messages until the error is
corrected. The errors can continue beyond the end of the line, even to the end
of the file, if carriage returns are invalid.

Note: Use this value only if the command file is a literal recording of
your key strokes, complete with back spaces or other corrections
of mistakes.
Ignore Command Select if you want Adams/View to ignore the line on which it found the error
and start processing the next line as a new command.

Note: Adams/View can usually recover and execute subsequent

commands in the file. However, if subsequent commands depend
on the results of the invalid command, they may fail or give
unexpected results.
Abort Execution Select to instruct Adams/View to immediately close all the command files
and return control to interactive input. This is the most conservative setting
because it guarantees that subsequent commands will cause no further errors
or unexpected results.
44 Adams/View
Command Navigator

Command Navigator
Tools -> Command Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Enables you to enter Adams/View commands without having to know the entire syntax of the commands.
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams/View command Keywords. A plus (+) in front of a
keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-)
indicates that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates
that there are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog
box appears in which you enter parameters for executing the command.
Learn about:
• Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords
• Getting help in the Command Navigator
 A - D 45
Command Window

Command Window
View -> Command Window
F3

Provides a text-based way to enter Adams/View commands. Learn About Adams/View Commands. It
assumes that you understand the Adams/View command language underlying the Adams/View interface.
The command window contains both a command entry area for entering commands and a command
information area for displaying informational and error messages:

Learn about Using the Command Window.

46 Adams/View
Comments

Comments
Database Navigator -> Comments

Allows you to add comments to any object in the Modeling database.

Learn about Adding Comments Through the Database Navigator.

For the option: Do the following:

Text Box Enter or modify comments associated with the selected object.
Apply Select to add the comment to the selected object.
Save to File Select to save the comment to a file.
 A - D 47
Compute Linear Modes dialog box

Compute Linear Modes dialog box

Simulate -> Interactive -> ->

Adams/Solver (C++only). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Lets you run a linear simulation using a plant state. Learn about Creating Plant States.

For the option: Do the following:

Plant State Specify the plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme.
Reference Marker Specify the reference marker.
48 Adams/View
Compute and Export Linear States

Compute and Export Linear States

Simulate -> Interactive ->

Generates a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system, for use with a control system
design application, such as MATLAB, MATRIXx, or EASY5.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the object.
Plant Input Specify the plant input that Adams/Solver uses as plant inputs in the state matrices
computation. If you do not specify a plant input, Adams/Solver does not output the
B and D matrices. Learn about creating plant inputs with Data Element Create
Plant State dialog box help.
Plant Output Specify the plant output that Adams/Solver uses as plant outputs in the state
matrices computation. If you do not specify a plant output, Adams/Solver does not
output the C and D matrices. Learn about creating Data Element Create Plant
Outputs.
Plant State Specify a plant state to be used to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. Learn about Creating Plant States. Adams/Solver C++ only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
Reference Marker Specify the reference marker.
File Format Specify the name of the software in whose input format Adams/Solver is to output
the state matrices. Currently, two software formats are supported: MATRIXx
(FSAVE format) and MATLAB (ASCII flat file format).
 A - D 49
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Creates a constant-velocity joint that allows two rotations on one part with respect to another part, while
remaining coincident and maintaining a constant velocity through the spin axis.
50 Adams/View
Constant-Velocity Joint Tool

Learn about Creating Idealized Joints.

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want to orient the joint:
Pick Geometry Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
 A - D 51
Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear

Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear

Right-click joint -> Modify

Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Name Enter the name for the gear. If you are creating a gear, Adams/View assigns a
default name to the gear.
Adams Id Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID for
you. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear. See
Comments.
52 Adams/View
Constraint Create Complex Joint Gear

For the option: Do the following:

Joint Name Enter the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical joints to be geared together.
Adams/View automatically separates the joint names with a comma (,).
Common Velocity Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You
Marker need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of motion
of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how the z-axis
of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.

To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and then
select Create.

Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a suspicious
configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is probably oriented
incorrectly.
 A - D 53
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

Build -> Joints -> Gear Joint Tool

Modifies a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the
common velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact. Learn more About Gears.

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Name Displays the name of the gear.
Adams Id Enter a positive integer for the ID or enter 0 to let Adams/Solver set the ID
for you. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the gear to help you manage and identify the gear.
See Comments.
54 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Complex Joint Gear

For the option: Do the following:

Joint Name Enter the two translational, revolute, or cylindrical joints to be geared
together. Adams/View automatically separates the joint names with a comma
(,).
Common Velocity Enter the marker defining the point of contact between the geared parts. You
Marker need to make sure the z-axis of the CV marker points in the direction of
motion of the gear teeth that are in contact. The following figure shows how
the z-axis of the CV marker is tangent to the pitch circle of the spur gears.

To create a marker, right-click the Common Velocity Marker text box, and
then select Create.

Tip: If you encounter a warning message that the gear has a

suspicious configuration, the z-axis of the CV marker is
probably oriented incorrectly.
 A - D 55
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

Right-click 2D curve-curve constraint -> Modify

Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a 2D curve-curve constraint. Learn more with
2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.

Learn about working with Curve-Curve Constraints.

For the option: Do the following:

Point Curve Name Enter the 2D curve-curve to modify.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the 2D curve-curve. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the 2D curve-curve to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve that moves along the
second curve (J curve). You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element.
Learn about working with Curves.
J Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape of the curve along which the first
curve (I curve) moves. You can enter a curve on a part or a curve element.
Learn about working with Curves.
I Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the first curve (I curve).
Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape defined by
the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
J Ref Marker Name Enter a marker that is fixed on the part containing the second curve (J
curve). Adams/View uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The
curve coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the
reference marker.
I Floating Marker Name Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating
marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the first curve, which is also
the global position of the J floating marker on the second curve.
Adams/View orients the marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the
instantaneous contact point, its y-axis is along the instantaneous normal,
and its z-axis is along the resultant binormal.
56 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

For the option: Do the following:

J Floating Marker Name Enter a floating marker. Adams/View positions the origin of the floating
marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the second curve, which is
also the position of the I floating marker on the first curve. Adams/View
orients the marker so that its x-axis is along the tangent at the instantaneous
contact point, its y-axis is along the instantaneous normal, and its z-axis is
along the resultant binormal.
Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
I Displacement Ic/ No I Select either:
Displacement Ic
• I Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the first
curve (I curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve,
Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you
specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in the
coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it in
the coordinate system of the marker you specify for I Ic Ref Marker
Name.
• No I Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
J Displacement Ic/ No J Select either:
Displacement Ic
• J Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the
second curve (J curve). If the point you specify is not exactly on the
curve, Adams/View uses a point on the curve nearest to the point
you specify. By default, you specify the initial point of contact in
the coordinate system of the part containing the curve or specify it
in the coordinate system of the marker you specify for J Ic Ref
Marker Name.
• No J Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
I Velocity Ic/No I Select either:
Velocity Ic
• I Velocity - Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the
first curve (I curve). This is the speed at which the contact point is
initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the
curve.
• Positive if it is moving towards the end of the curve.
• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
 A - D 57
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Curve Curve

For the option: Do the following:

J Velocity Ic or No J Select either:
Velocity Ic
• J Velocity- Enter the initial velocity of the contact point along the
second curve (J curve). This is the speed at which the contact point
is initially moving relative to the curve. The velocity is:
• Negative if the contact point is moving towards the start of the
curve.
• Positive if it is moving toward the end of the curve.
• Zero if it is stationary on the curve.
• No J Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
I Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact

(displacement) on the first curve (I curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
J Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact

(displacement) on the second curve (J curve) is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve
58 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

Right-click point-curve constraint -> Modify

Changes the basic properties and sets initial conditions for a point-curve constraint. Learn more with
Point-Curve Constraint Tool.

Learn more about Working with Higher-Pair Constraints.

Note: You can also modify constraint properties using the Table Editor.

For the option: Do the following:

Point Curve Name Enter the name of the constraint to modify.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the constraint. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the constraint to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Curve Name Change the curve that defines the shape on which the point can move. You
can enter a curve on a part or a curve element. Learn about working with
Curves.
I Marker Name Point that moves along the curve.
 A - D 59
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

For the option: Do the following:

J Floating Marker Enter a marker that is a floating marker. Adams/Solver positions the origin
Name of the floating marker at the instantaneous point of contact on the curve. It
orients the marker so that its x-axis is tangent to the curve at the contact
point, its y-axis points outward from the curve’s center of curvature at the
contact point, and its z-axis is along the binormal at the contact point.
.

Ref Marker Name Enter marker that is fixed on the part containing the curve on which the point
must move. Adams/Solver uses the reference marker to associate the shape
defined by the curve to the part on which the reference marker lies. The curve
coordinates are, therefore, specified in the coordinate system of the reference
marker.
Displacement Ic/ No Select either:
Displacement Ic
• Displacement Ic - Enter the initial point of contact along the curve.
If the point you specify is not exactly on the curve, Adams/View
uses a point on the curve nearest to the point you specify. By default,
you specify the initial point of contact in the coordinate system of
the part containing the curve or specify it in the coordinate system of
the marker you specify for Ic Ref Marker Name.
• No Displacement Ic - Leaves the initial displacement unset.
Learn about Higher-Pair Constraints Initial Conditions.
60 Adams/View
Constraint Modify Higher Pair Contact Point Curve

For the option: Do the following:

Velocity Ic/No Velocity Select either:
Ic
• Velocity Ic - Velocity with which the point (I marker) moves along
the curve. You specify the velocity in the coordinate system of the
part containing the curve.
• No I Velocity Ic - Leaves the initial velocity unset.
Ic Ref Marker Name You can:

• Enter the marker with which the initial point of contact on the curve
is specified.
• Leave blank. Adams/View uses the coordinate system of the part
containing the curve.
 A - D 61
Controls_measure_panel

Controls_measure_panel
Modify Controls Block dialog box -> Output Measure button

Creates an output measure for a control block.

Learn about adding controls Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the measure.
Controls Block Enter the control block to be measured.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Create Strip Chart Select to create a Strip chart of the measure.
62 Adams/View
Coordinate System

Coordinate System
Settings -> Coordinate System

Main toolbox -> Move toolstack -> Coordinate System Tool

Lets you set the default coordinate system for a Modeling database.
Learn about Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.

For the option: Do the following:

Location Coordinate Select the type of location coordinate systems:

• Cartesian.
• Cylindrical.
• Spherical.
Rotation Sequence Select the type of rotation sequence. See Rotation Sequences.
Body Fixed/Space Fixed Select either:

• Space fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that

remain in their original orientation.
• Body fixed - Adams/View applies the rotations about axes that
move with the body as it rotates.
As Adams/View applies each rotation to an axis, it produces a new set of
axes.
 A - D 63
Coupler Joint Tool

Coupler Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Coupler Tool

Creates a coupler between two or three Joints.

It relates the translational and/or rotational motion of the joints through a linear scaling of the relative
motions or through nonlinear relationships that you define by entering parameters to be passed to a user-
written subroutine that is linked into Adams/View. Couplers are useful if your model uses belts and
pulleys or chains and sprockets to transfer motion and energy. Although you can couple only two or three
joints, more than one coupler can come from the same joint, as shown in the figure above.
When you create a coupler, you can only create a two-joint coupler. You select the driver joint, the joint
to which the second joint is coupled, and the coupled joint, the joint that follows the driver joint. To
specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or to create a three-joint coupler, you
modify the coupler.
Learn about Creating Couplers.
64 Adams/View
Create Butterworth Filter

Create Butterworth Filter

(Adams/PostProcessor)

Curve Edit toolbar -> Filter Curve Tool -> Right-click Filter Name text box -> filter_function -> Create -> Create from
Butterworth Filter

Creates a Butterworth filter to define the coefficients of a transfer function when creating a curve filter
function. The first four options in the dialog box are the same as when you are creating a Butterworth
filter directly. See Create/Modify Filter Function dialog box help. To generate these options based on
Passband and Stopband options, select the Generate Filter Order _ Frequency checkbox.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.

For the option: Do the following:

Digital/Analog Select analog or digital filtering.
Filter Type Select the type of filter:

• Low Pass - Removes frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

• High Pass - Removes frequencies below the cutoff frequency.
• Band Pass - Removes frequencies outside the two cutoff
frequencies.
• Band Stop - Removes frequencies between the two cutoff
frequencies.
Order Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency,
often referred to as how sharp the filter is.

• First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.

• Second-order filter damps 6dB.
• Third-order filter damps 9dB.
Scaled Cutoff Set the frequency of cutoff.
Frequency
• For a digital filter - Determines the cutoff frequency as a ratio of
the Nyquist frequency (half the sample frequency). Therefore, for a
signal sampled (simulated) with 100 Hz, the Nyquist frequency is
100/2=50Hz. A scaled cutoff frequency=0.3 then has a cutoff
frequency=0.3*50=15 Hz.
Note that if the same filter is applied to a signal sampled at 200 Hz,
the filter cutoff is at 30 Hz. If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop
for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
• For an analog filter - Enter the cutoff frequency in the current units
(rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter
Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
 A - D 65
Create Butterworth Filter

For the option: Do the following:

Generate Filter Order _ Select to enable more options to define the Butterworth filter, and use those
Frequency options to define the order and cutoff frequency above.
If you selected Generate Filter Order _ Frequency, the options listed below appear.

Using the notation Passband Corner Frequency=fp and Corner Frequency=fs, the following rules apply
for the options below:

• To create a low-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp < fs.
• To create a high-pass filter, give one value each for fp and fs, and fp > fs.
• To create a bandpass filter, specify two values each for fp and fs, such that fs1< fp1< fp2 < fs2.
You cannot create a bandstop filter using the options below.

See an Example of Defining a Transfer Function from a Butterworth Filter.

Passband Corner Enter the frequency where the damping is at least Passband Ripple dB.
Frequency (Wp) (Hz -
for analog)
Stopband Corner Enter the frequency outside of which the damping is at least Stopband
Frequency (Ws) (Hz - Attenuation dB.
for analog)
Passband Ripple (Rp) Enter the passband ripple.
(Hz - for analog)
Stopband Attenuation Enter the stopband attenuation.
(Rs) (Hz - for analog)
Generate Order _ Calculates the appropriate order and cutoff frequency (frequencies) based on
Frequency the values in the lower portion of the dialog box and loads them in the upper
portion. It does not transfer them to the Create Filter Function dialog box
until you select OK or Apply.
66 Adams/View
Create Clearance

Create Clearance
Tools -> Clearance -> Create

Defines a Clearance study.

Learn more about Defining a Clearance Study.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Select the model to be used for the study.
I Body Select the first object in the pair.

You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select
more than one object at a time.)
J Body Select the second object in the pair.

You can also select Pick to select the object from the screen. (You can select
more than one object at a time.)
Name Enter a name for the study. If you are creating several studies (by selecting more
than one I and J body), you can enter a base name for the studies, and
Adams/PostProcessor will add a suffix to the name (base_1, base_2, and so on).
Maximum Set the maximum distance for the clearance beyond which clearances will not
be computed at any given frame. Leave the text box empty if you always want
to calculate the minimum distance.
Method Select the method for calculating the minimum distances.

• Polygon
• Vertex
 A - D 67
Create Design Constraint

Create Design Constraint

Simulate -> Design Constraint -> New

For Optimization only.

Allows you to create constraint objects to limit the changes that the optimizer can make. Often an
optimization finds a configuration that optimizes the objective you provided, but is unrealistic because it
violates overall design constraints such as weight, size, speed, or force limits.
To avoid results that violate the design constraints, you can create constraints for the optimization. The
optimization analysis improves the objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.
Each constraint object creates an inequality constraint. The optimization keeps the value of the constraint
less than or equal to zero. You can create an equality constraint, in effect, by creating a pair of constraint
objects, each the negative of the other.

Note: You do not need to create an explicit constraint to limit the value of a design variable. You
can do this directly by setting properties for the variable.

Constraints can involve the simulation results, but are not required to do so. You can constrain overall
size, weight, or other factors that depend only on model data. In these cases, use the function or
macro/variable option for the constraint, and ignore the analysis data that Adams/View supplies. Instead,
compute the constraint directly from the appropriate model data.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Displays the name of the constraint.
Definition by Select the type of function you want to use from the pull-down
menu.

Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or

macro and variable. If you are entering a Result set component,
enter the name of the result set and component, for example req1.x.
Design Constraint's value is the Select a value.
Select to add comments to help you manage and identify the
constraint object. See Comments.
68 Adams/View
Create Design Objective

Create Design Objective

Simulate -> Design Objective -> New

Allows you to create an objective object if a measure is not flexible enough. Objective objects have
options for processing simulation results and are valuable when you want to do complex or multi-step
computations on model outputs.
Learn more about Creating an Objective Object.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the design objective.
Definition by Select the type of object function you want:

• Measure - Use a measure. Learn about Using Measures for Objectives.

• Result set component - Select to use a new Result set component
produced by a subsequent simulation.Learn about using a result set
component.
• Existing result set component - Select to use an existing results set.
• /View function - Select to use an Adams/View function. Learn about
using functions.
• /View Variable and Macro - Select to use a variable and macro. Learn
about using variable and macro.
Note: Objectives usually involve simulation results, but they are not required
to do so. You can create an objective that depends only on the model
data, such as overall weight or size. You can then use Adams/View to
vary, or even optimize, the design variables and immediately see the
results on the model.
Tip: In this case, use the function or variable/macro option for the
objective, and ignore the analysis argument or parameter that
Adams/View supplies. Because you do not need simulation results,
you should also create a dummy simulation script that does
nothing. Then, Adams/View repeatedly sets the variables and
evaluates the objective, but does not run any simulations.
Measure/Result Set Enter the name of the measure, result set component, function, or macro and
Comp./Function/Va variable. If you are entering a result set component, enter the name of the result
riable and Macro set and component, for example req1.x.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

 A - D 69
Create Design Objective

For the option: Do the following:

Design objective's If you are using a measure or result set component, set the design objective’s
value is value. For a measure, enter minimum, maximum, average, last value, absolute
minimum, and absolute maximum of the measure. For a results set component,
enter minimum, maximum, average, or last value of the result set component.
Select to add any comments for the objective to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
70 Adams/View
Create FEMDATA

Create FEMDATA
Build -> Data Elements -> FEMdata -> New/Modify

Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis for use in third-party products. You use the Settings -> Solver -> Output
-> More -> Durability Files to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver
Settings - Output dialog box help and the Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to
any files unless you specify the format. For more information, see About Setting Simulation Controls.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the FEMDATA element in the Modeling database to create or
modify.
Type Select the information that you want output:

• Loads on Rigid Body/Flex Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction

and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and,
optionally, inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and
acceleration, including effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load
data will be output in the simulation set of units.
• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of
time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only export
coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.
• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time
of the specified flexible. Adams/View writes the deformations in the
simulation set of units.
• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the
Modal Neutral File (MNF) of the specified flexible body and an
Adams/Durability license is available. Adams/Durability outputs all six
components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-
YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of
the flexible body except where specified below.
• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the
MNF of the flexible body and an Adams/Durability license is available.
Adams/Durability outputs all six components of stress (normal-X,
normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs stresses
in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA coordinate system of the
flexible body except where specified below.
 A - D 71
Create FEMDATA

For the option: Do the following:

Inertia Check Inertia if you want Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear
acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the loads
acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you
will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite element program to
balance the external loads with the internal loads.
If you selected Loads on Rigid Body, the following options appear:
R Marker Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output
loads. Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the
coordinate system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA
basic coordinate system of the part's finite element (FE) model.
Peak Slice Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where
the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time
options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for
the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX,
TY, TZ, and TMAG.
If you selected Loads on Flexible Body, the following options appear:
Inertia Check Inertia if you want Adams/View to include inertial loads (linear
acceleration, angular acceleration, and velocity) when outputting the loads
acting on the body. Otherwise, Adams/View outputs no inertial loads and you
will need to rely on an inertia relief capability in the finite element program to
balance the external loads with the internal loads.
Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Peak Slice Select that FE model load data are to be output only at those time steps where
the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time
options, Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for
the peak load. You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG, TX,
TY, TZ, and TMAG.
If you selected Modal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
If you selected Nodal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
72 Adams/View
Create FEMDATA

For the option: Do the following:

Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do
not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point
of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is specified that
does not belong to the flexible body.
Datum Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements.
Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you
do not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of
nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does
not belong to the flexible body.
If you selected Stress or Strain, the following options appear:
Flex Body Enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/Durability
outputs the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the
flexible body.
On Nodes/Hot Spots Lets you select either output on nodes or Hotspots. The options in the dialog box
change depending on the selection, as explained in the next rows of the table.
For an example of defining hot spots, see the FEMDATA statement and near the
end of it, the Definition of Hotspots.
If you selected On Nodes, the following options appear:
Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do
not specify a node list, Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point
of the flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that
does not belong to the flexible body.
R Marker Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform
the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation
of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, you can
reference a marker whose orientation does match.
If you selected Hot Spots, the following options appear:
Hotspots Enter the number of hot spots to locate and output. With this option, a text file
containing a tab-delimited table of hot spot information, such as node ID,
maximum value, time when the maximum value occurred, and location, is
generated.

Note: When you set the Time options, Adams/Durability only checks the
time steps within those specifications for the hot spots.
 A - D 73
Create FEMDATA

For the option: Do the following:

Von Mises/Max Specify the value of stress/strain in determining hotspots from one of Von
Prin/Min Prin.,/Max Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin., Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z,
Shear/Normal- Shear-XY, Shear-YZ, or Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA
X/Normal- statement.
Y/Normal-Z/Shear-
XY/Shear-
YZ/Shear-ZX
Radius Enter a radius that defines the spherical extent of each hotspot. A default value
of 0.0 (zero) means that all nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
R Marker Enter a coordinate reference marker in the model that will be used to transform
the stress or strain data. If not specified, the stress or strain will be output in the
basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the orientation
of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate system, one can reference
a marker whose orientation does match.
The following options appear for all types of FE model data:
File Enter the output file name for the FE model data. You can specify an existing
directory, root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be
composed of the Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file
format that you specified in Solver -> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability
Files (for more information, see the Adams/Durability online help).
Time Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default
is the start of the simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search
of a peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
74 Adams/View
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack

Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack

Build -> Forces
Main toolbox -> Right-click Create Forces tool stack

Displays tools for creating forces. The Create Forces palette and tool stack are shown below. Learn about
Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Learn more about Forces.

Forces Tool Stack Create Forces Palette (from Build Menu)

 A - D 75
Create Forces Palette and Tool Stack

Icon Link
Translational Spring Damper Tool

Single-Component Force tool

Create/Modify Contact

Torsion SpringTool

Single-Component Torque tool

Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

Bushing Tool

Six-Component General Force tool

Create/Modify Modal Force

Field ElementTool

Three-Component Force tool

Gravity

Beam

Three-Component Torque tool

76 Adams/View
Create New Color

Create New Color

Settings -> Colors -> New Color

Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to Edit Color
dialog box to define its red, green, and blue values.

For the option: Do the following:

Color Name Enter the name of the new color.
 A - D 77
Create Spec Line

Create Spec Line

Adams/PostProcessor -> Plot -> Create Spec Line

Adds Spec lines to your plots to help you compare curves to a constant baseline value. A spec line can
be a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal line that indicates a value of significance on the vertical axis. You
can start the spec line at any X or Y position.
For example, if you are plotting acceleration and you want to keep the acceleration below a certain value,
you can add a spec line marking that value on the plot. You can then compare any curves that you add to
that plot to see if the curves fall beneath the spec line. There are no limits to the number of spec lines you
can add to a plot.

For the option: Do the following:

Spec Line Name Enter the name you want to assign to the spec line. The box shows the complete
name of the spec line, including its parents
in the database.
Y Value Enter a Y value if you want a horizontal spec line.
X Value Enter an X value if you want a vertical spec line.
Note: To create a diagonal spec line, enter a value for both X and Y.
Color Select a color for the spec line.
Line Style Select a line style.
Thickness Select the thickness for the spec line.
78 Adams/View
Create State Variable for Plant State

Create State Variable for Plant State

Data Element Create Plant State dialog box -> Create State Variable for Plant State

Creates state variables for use in a plant state object. The variables that a plant state object can only
contain functions of displacement:
• Learn more about plant state objects in the LINERAR command
• Learn about plant states with Data Element Create Plant State dialog box help.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
State Variable Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the state variable.
To Marker Enter the marker to which to measure.
From Marker Enter the marker or point from which to measure.
Along Marker Enter the reference marker along which the measure is to be taken.
From Component Select the component in which you are interested. The components available
depend on the coordinate system.
 A - D 79
Create a Flexible Body

Create a Flexible Body

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Adams/Flex

Imports a flexible body into Adams/Flex. You specify a Modal Neutral File (MNF) or an MD DB file
(.master) and Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the flexible body.
It also creates a mesh on the flexible body representing the flexible body nodes.
By default, Adams/Flex places the flexible body so the flexible body’s local body reference frame
(LBRF) is at the origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the location and
orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element in Adams/View.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Name Enter the name you want assigned to the flexible body.
Modal Neutral File Name Select the appropriate option and enter the name of the MNF or the MD
DB file.
or
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
MD DB File Name
Note: When you use the Browse command to search for a file, it
places the absolute path to the file in the text box. When you
save the database or a command file, Adams/View uses the
absolute path in the saved file. If you are sharing the database or
command file with other users, you may want to edit the path
that the Browse command places in the text box so it is a
relative path or remove it altogether if the MNF/MD DB file is
in the current working directory.
Index The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out
of the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in
the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is
assumed to have the value 1.

Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
Import All This option can be used as an alternative to specifying an index. Using this
option will import all flexible bodies in the specified MD DB at once. All
the created bodies will have a default location and orientation as (0,0,0).
80 Adams/View
Create a Flexible Body

For the option: Do the following:

Damping Ratio Do one of the following:

• Leave use default selected to accept the default nonzero damping

as follows:
• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
• Clear the selection of use default, and then enter:
• Scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
• Adams run-time function expressions to create complex
damping phenomena in your flexible body. In addition,
function expressions, such as FXFREQ and FXMODE, allow
you to apply different levels of damping to individual modes.

To get help entering a function expression, right-click the

Damping text box, and then select Expression Builder to
display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Adams/View Function Builder
online help.
Shortcut to Function Builder: Click the More button .

Learn more about Specifying Damping.

Generalized Damping Select one:

• Off - Disables the generalized damping.

• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix,
including the effects of a resultant damping force.
• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized
damping matrix corresponding to the modal coordinates (that is,
ignore the resultant damping force).
Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the flexible body's location in the default
coordinate system.
Orientation Specify either of these three orientation methods:

• Orientation
• Along Axis Orientation
• In Plane Oriention
 A - D 81
Create a Flexible Body

For the option: Do the following:

Relative to You can:

• Specify the orientation coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
FEM Translate Select to display the FEM Translate dialog box to translate either:

• MSC.Nastran output data into a MNF. You generate the output

data by first running MSC.Nastran with the AdamsMNF Case
Control command or a special DMAP alter.
• Universal file into a MNF that you can use to create a flexible
body with a constant coupling inertia invariant formulation.
MNF XForm Select to display the MNF XForm dialog box to transform the flexible
body.
If you check the More option following parameters will appear
Dynamic Limit Specify the threshold frequency for quasi-static modes. Any mode with
frequency higher than this value will be treated as quasi-static.
Stability Factor Specify the amount of damping needed to add to the quasi-static modes.
This is required to stabilize the simulation.
82 Adams/View
Create a Request

Create a Request
Build -> Measure -> REQUEST -> New

Creates a request. Note that the options for providing result and component names are only available if
the output of the results set is XML format. See Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
Learn more about Requests.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Request Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the request in the Modeling
database.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the request. See Adams/Solver ID.
Component Names Available for XML result files only.

Enter one or more strings that identify the names of the result set
components the request produces. Learn more about About Naming
Results and Components in Requests.
Component Available for XML result files only.
Labels/Component Units
Select either of the following to further identify the components of the
results set:

• Component Units - Enter one or more strings that identify

the unit dimension of the result set components in XML result
files. If you do not specify units, then the units of the
components are predefined based upon standard request type
(for example, displacement, velocity, and acceleration). See
standard units.
• Component Labels - Enter one or more strings that identify
the labels to be used when plotting the result set components.
Labels can be strings that include white space. Quotes must be
used to define the string if you se special characters or white
space.
 A - D 83
Create a Request

For the option: Do the following:

Results Name Specifies the name of the result set in which all result set components
produced by this request are placed when the result file is written in
XML. If there is an existing result set with this name, then the result
set components are placed in that result set. If there isn't an existing
result set, then a new one is created and all the result set components
are placed there.

This is helpful if you want to group the output from multiple requests
into a single result set. For example, you might have several different
requests measuring driver input for a vehicle, and you might want to
place them all within a result set named Driver_Inputs for easier
viewing in Adams/PostProcessor.
Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Define Using Type & Set to:
Markers/
• Define Using Type & Markers
Define Using Function • Define Using Function Expressions
Expressions/
• Define Using Subroutines
Define Using • Define Using Variables
Subroutines/Define Using
Variables
If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:
Output Type Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or
Force).
I Marker, J Marker, R Marker Specify the Markers with respect to which the output will be
calculated.
If you selected Define Using Subroutines, the following options appear:
User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB. Enter the
user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are
constants passed to the subroutine:

r1, ..., r30

Learn About Specifying a Subroutine.

Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
REQSUB. Learn about ROUTINE Argument.
84 Adams/View
Create a Request

For the option: Do the following:

Title If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight headings
for columns of request output. Separate each heading with a comma
(,).

Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric characters,

including underscores (_). The first character in each heading must be
alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a semicolon (;), an ampersand
(&), or an exclamation point (!).

If you do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.
If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 .
Do not use f1 and f5 . Adams/Solver uses them to hold magnitudes for
the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a function in
every text box. Learn About Specifying Function Expressions.
Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
If you selected Define Using Variables, the following options appear:
Variables Enter the variables in the text box. Learn about Creating and Modifying
State Variables.
 A - D 85
Create/Modify Contact

Create/Modify Contact
Build -> Forces -> Contact Force Tool

Creates or modifies a contact force between two geometries. Learn About Contact Forces. For solids and
curves, you can select more than one geometry as long as the geometry belongs to the same part. The first
geometry is called the I geometry and the second geometry is called the J geometry. For sphere-to-sphere
contacts, you can specify that the contact be inside or outside the sphere.
Learn more about Contacts.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

If you type a geometry object name directly in the text box, you must press Enter to register the value.
Contact Name Enter the name of the contact to create or modify.
Contact Type Set to the type of geometry to come into contact. The text boxes change
depending on the type of contact force you selected.
If you selected Solid to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
J Solid Enter one or more geometry solids. The solids must all belong to the same part.
If you selected Curve to Curve, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
I Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Enter one or more geometry curves. The curves must all belong to the same
part.
J Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Curve, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
Curve Enter one or more curves.
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Point to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Marker Enter a marker.
Plane Enter a plane.
86 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

If you selected Curve to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Curve Enter one or more curves.
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
Plane Enter a plane.
If you selected Sphere to Plane, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
Direction(s) Select the geometry on which you want to change the direction of the force, and
then select the Change Direction tool .
Plane Enter a plane.
If you selected Sphere to Sphere, Adams/View displays the following two options:
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
Sphere Enter a sphere. To change the direction of the force, select the Change
Direction tool .
If you selected Flex Body to Solid, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
J Solid Select a Geometry Solid.
If you selected Flex Body to Flex Body, Adams/View displays the following two options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
J Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.
If you selected Flex Edge to Curve, Adams/View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .

I Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.

To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
J Curve Select a Curve. Multiple curves are not allowed.
If you selected Flex Edge to Flex Edge, Adams/View displays the following four options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .

 A - D 87
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

I Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.

To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
J Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .

J Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on J Flexible Body .

To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
If you selected Flex Edge to Plane, Adams/View displays the following three options:
I Flexible Body Select a Flexible Body.

To reset the Edge, select the Reset The Edge tool .

I Flex Edge Select a Flex Edge on I Flexible Body.

To change the direction of the force, select the Change Direction tool .
Plane Select a Plane. Multiple Planes are not allowed.
The following options apply to all types of geometry:
Force Display/Color Select to turn on the force display of both normal and friction forces, and select
a color for the force display.

Note: If you are using an External Adams/Solver, you must set the output
files to XML to view the force display. See Solver Settings - Output
dialog box help.
Normal Force Select either:

• Restitution - To define the normal force as restitution-based. This

option is not available with Flex Body to Solid and Flex Body to Flex
Body type of contacts.
• Impact - To define the normal force based on an impact using the
IMPACT function.
• User Defined - To define the force based on a User-written subroutine.
Learn about the types of Contact Force Algorithms and also see Learning More
about the Contact Detection Algorithm.
If you selected Restitution for Normal Force, define the following two options:
88 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

Penalty Enter a penalty value to define the local stiffness properties between the
contacting material.

A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another
will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration
difficulties. A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec.
For more information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition
for the CONTACT statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
Restitution Enter the coefficient of restitution, which models the energy loss during
Coefficient contact.

• A value of zero specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two

colliding bodies.
• A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy
loss.
The coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming
into contact. For information on material types versus commonly used values
of the coefficient of restitution, see the table for the CONTACT statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.
If you selected Impact for Normal Force, define the following four options:
Stiffness Enter a material stiffness that is to be used to calculate the normal force for the
impact model. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard the
bodies in contact are.

Note: When changing the length units in Adams/View, stiffnesses in

contacts are scaled by (length conversion factor**exponent). When
changing the force unit, stiffness is only scaled by the force
conversion factor.
Force Exponent Adams/Solver models normal force as a nonlinear springdamper. If the
damping penetration, below, is the instantaneous penetration between the
contacting geometry, Adams/Solver calculates the contribution of the material
stiffness to the instantaneous normal forces as:

STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT
For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams/Solver online
help.
Damping Enter a value to define the damping properties of the contacting material.
Consider a damping coefficient that is about one percent of the stiffness
coefficient.
 A - D 89
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

Penetration Depth Enter a value to define the penetration at which Adams/Solver turns on full
damping. Adams/Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping
coefficient from zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the penetration
reaches the damping penetration. A reasonable value for this parameter is 0.01
mm. For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams/Solver
online help.
If you selected User Defined for Normal Force, define the following two options:
User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine CNFSUB.
For more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams/Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
ROUTINE Argument.
The following option is available for all choices:
Augmented Select to refine the normal force between two sets of rigid geometries that are
Lagrangian in contact. When you select Augmented Lagrangian, Adams/View uses
iterative refinement to ensure that penetration between the geometries is
minimal. It also ensures that the normal force magnitude is relatively
insensitive to the penalty or stiffness used to model the local material
compliance effects.

Note: Augmented Lagrangian is only available when defining a Restitution-

based contact.
Friction Force Select to model the friction effects at the contact locations using the Coulomb
friction model, no friction, or as user-defined subroutine. The Coulomb friction
model models dynamic friction but not stiction in contacts.

For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In

addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.
If you selected Coulomb for Friction Force, define the following four options:
Coulomb Friction Specify whether the friction effects are to be included at run time:

• On
• Off
• Dynamics Only
90 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

Static Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is
smaller than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material
types versus commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see
Material Contact Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Static Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.

Range: Static Coefficient 0

Dynamic Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is
larger than the value for Friction Transition Vel.

For information on material types versus commonly used values of the

coefficientof the dynamic coefficient of friction, see Material Contact
Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Dynamic Coefficient can cause integration

difficulties.

Range: 0 Dynamic Coefficient Static Coefficient

 A - D 91
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

Static Transition Vel. Enter the static transition velocity.
The figure below shows how the coefficient of friction varies with slip velocity
at a typical contact point.

In this simple model:

•   –Vs  = s

•   Vs  = – s

• 0 = 0

•   –Vd  =  d

•   Vd  = d

•   V  = – sign  V    d for  V  V d 

•   V  = – step  V  V d  d V s  s   sign  V  for  V s  V  V d 

•   V  = step  V – V s  s V s –  s  for  – V s  V  V s 
92 Adams/View
Create/Modify Contact

For the option: Do the following:

Static Transition Vel. In the figure:
(cont.)
• Vs, the slip velocity at which the coefficient friction achieves a
maximum value of  s , is denoted as
STICTION_TRANSITION_VELOCITY.
•  s is the coefficient of static friction.

•  d is the coefficient of dynamic friction.

For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In

addition, read the information for the CONTACT statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.

Range: 0 < Static Transition Vel. Friction Transition Vel.

Friction Transition Enter the friction transition velocity.
Vel.
Adams/Solver gradually transitions the coefficient of friction from the value for
Static Coefficent to the value for Dynamic Coefficient as the slip velocity at the
contact point increases. When the slip velocity is equal to the value specified
for Friction Transition Vel., the effective coefficient of friction is set to
Dynamic Coefficient. For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction
Force Calculation. In addition, read the information for the CONTACT
statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

Note: Small values for this option cause the integrator difficulties. You
should specify this value as:
Friction Transition Vel. 5* ERROR

where: ERROR is the integration error used for the solution. Its
default value is 1E-3.

Range: Friction Transition Vel. Static Transition Vel. > 0

If you selected User Defined for Friction Force, define the following two options:
User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine. For more
on user-written subroutines, see Adams/Solver online help.
Routine Enter the name of the function to call. The default is CNFSUB.
 A - D 93
Create/Modify Contact Arrays

Create/Modify Contact Arrays

Contact arrays define the characteristics of force-based contacts. You specify a contact array for each
force-based contact. You can, however, use the same contact array with multiple contact forces.
The options for defining the normal force magnitudes for contact arrays are identical to the parameters
in the IMPACT function. For information on the IMPACT function, see Adams/View Function Builder
online help.

For the option: Do the following:

Contact Array Name Enter the name of the contact array to modify.
Stiffness Force Enter the force generated for each unit of penetration depth.
Force Exponent Enter the exponent of the force deformation characteristic.
Damping Maximum Enter the viscous damping coefficient.
Penetration Depth Enter the penetration depth at which full damping is applied.
Static Friction Coefficient (µs) Enter the proportion of normal force applied in the opposite
direction of relative motion, from zero velocity to static threshold
velocity.
Static Friction Slip Velocity (Vs) Enter the velocity at which full value of the static friction
coefficient is applied.
Dynamic Friction Coefficient (µk) Enter the proportion of normal force applied in the opposite
direction of relative motion, from slip velocity to dynamic
transition velocity.
Dynamic Friction Transition Enter the velocity at which the value of the dynamic friction
Velocity (Vk) coefficient has fully transitioned from the static friction
coefficient.
94 Adams/View
Create/Modify Design Variable

Create/Modify Design Variable

Build -> Design Variable -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a design variable.

 A - D 95
Create/Modify Design Variable

Learn more about Using Design Variables.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the design variable.
Type Select Real, Integer, String, or Object.
If you selected the type Real, you have the option:
Units Optionally, select the type of units.
If you selected the type Real or Integer, the following four options appear:
Standard Value Enter or change the default value for the design variable.
Value Range by Set the one of the following and enter the limits in the Min/Max or +/- Delta
text boxes:

• Absolute Min and Max Values - Specifies a value range (an

upper and lower limit)
• +/- Delta Relative to Value - Specifies increments relative to the
standard value.
• +/- Percent Relative to Value - Specifies percentage increments
relative to the standard value.
If only a certain range of values is possible, use absolute limits to keep the
variable within that fixed range. Otherwise, use relative or percent relative
limits to include a reasonable amount above and below your initial value.
Relative and percent-relative limits tie the range to the value of the
variable, so if you change the value of the variable, the limits automatically
change with it.To learn more about the choices, see Preparing for
Parametric Analyses.
- Delta/Min Value Enter the lower limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage
below the standard value.
+ Delta/Max Value Enter the upper limit for the range or the relative amount or percentage
above the standard value.
Allow Optimization to If you want to allow an optimization to use any value for the variable, select
ignore range Allow Optimization to ignore range.

Selecting Allow Optimization to ignore range does not disable the range for
a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE). The range is used for a
design study or DOE only if a list of values has not been specified or is to
be ignored.
96 Adams/View
Create/Modify Design Variable

For the option: Do the following:

List of allowed value If you want to specify a list of values, select List of allowed values and
enter the values in the text box that appears. This lets you to use unequally
spaced values or always use the same set of values. By default, the list of
values takes precedence over the range in a design study or DOE.

Note: The Value Range setting also affects the allowed values you
enter. For example, if you have selected a Value Range of
percent relative, then Adams/View interprets your entered
allowed values as percentages relative to the standard value.
If you selected List of allowed values, the following two options appear:
Generate Creates a list of values for you automatically.
Allow Design Study to To keep the list of values and still use the range for a design study and
ignore list DOE, select Allow Design Study to ignore list. By selecting Allow Design
Study to ignore list, you can switch back and forth between using the range
and the list of values without re-entering the list each time.
If you selected String, the following option appears:
String value Enter the alphanumeric string for the design variable.
If you selected Object, the following option appears:
Object value Enter the database object for the design variable (for example,
.model_1.part_1). For more on objects and their database name, see Getting
Object Names and Data Dictionary in the Adams/View Function Builder
online help.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.

Note: Now that you have created a design variable, you’ll need to reference it in your model. You
can enter the design variable directly, using the Reference Design Variable command, or
you can type it into a text box. You can also use the Function Builder to create a more
complex expression using the design variable. When you reference your design variable,
Adams/View places parentheses () around the variable because you are creating a simple
expression that references the value of the design variable.
 A - D 97
Create/Modify Differential Equation

Create/Modify Differential Equation

Build -> System Elements -> Differential Equation-> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a differential equation.

Learn about:
• About Using Differential Equations.
• Creating and Modifying Differential Equations.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the differential equation.
Type Select either Explicit or Implicit to indicate that the function expression or
subroutine defines the explicit or implicit form of the equation.

Learn about Ways to Define Differential Equations.

Definition Set to either:

• Run-time Expression to enter a function expression that

Adams/Solver evaluates during a Simulation. In the function
expression, the system variable DIF(i) is the value of the dependent
variable that the differential equation defines, and DIF1(j) is the first
derivative of the dependent variable that the differential equation
defines.
• User written subroutine to enter a subroutine that defines the
equation.
y' = • If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression

that defines the differential equation. Select the More button to

display the Function Builder and build an expression. See the
Adams/View Function Builder online help.
• If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the
User-written subroutine DIFSUB to define a variable. see the
Adams/Solver Subroutines online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine DIFSUB.
Learn about ROUTINE Argument.
98 Adams/View
Create/Modify Differential Equation

For the option: Do the following:

Initial Conditions Specify:

• The initial value of the differential equation at the start of the

simulation.
• Optionally, if you are defining an implicit equation, an approximate
value of the initial time derivative of the differential equation at the
start of the simulation. (You do not need to supply a second value
when you enter a explicit equation because Adams/Solver can
compute the initial time derivative directly from the equation.)
Adams/Solver might adjust the value of the time derivative when it performs
an initial conditions simulation. Entering an initial value for the time
derivative helps Adams/Solver converge to a desired initial conditions
solution.
Keep value constant Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the
during static analyses. differential equation during Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.
Learn about Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
 A - D 99
Create/modify an External System

Create/modify an External System

Build -> External Systems -> New…

The dialog box operates in two modes,

• Create mode: To create a new External system in the model. When the dialog is opened from
the menu (Build->External Systems->New…) it opens in ‘Create’ mode.
• Modify mode: To modify an existing External System in the model. If an existing external
system in the model, is selected for modification (by right clicking the body and choosing the
'Modify' option) then the same dialog opens in 'Modify' mode. In the Modify mode, the fields on
the dialog will be pre-populated with the values of the external system being modified.

Note: By default, the external system is placed so its local body reference frame (LBRF) is at the
origin of the global coordinate system. The LBRF corresponds to the origin of the finite
element (FE) environment in which the body was originally modeled. You can also set the
location and orientation as you import the body or after it is imported as you do any element
in Adams/View. This is applicable only for external systems that have a visual
representation.

For the option: Do the following:

External System Name Enter the name you want assigned to the external system.
type The type of external system. Select one from the following options,

1. Nastran
2. User
The default option when the dialog is opened in the Create mode is
‘Nastran’.
input_file_name File containing the input source parameters for the external system. The

button provided on the side of the field can be used to view and / or
edit the specified file.
modal_neutral_file_name An optional (rigid only) MNF, if a visual representation of the external
system is required.
md_db_file_name An optional MD DB, if a visual representation of the external system is
required.
index_in_database Index of the body in the specified MD DB. Valid only if the parameter
md_db_file_name is specified.
100 Adams/View
Create/modify an External System

For the option: Do the following:

Note: You may optionally specify a modal neutral file (MNF) or an MD DB file (.master) and
Adams/View creates the necessary Adams/View geometry for displaying the external
system. It also creates a mesh on the external system representing the external system nodes.
The external system will have a visual representation only if either of MNF/MD DB is
specified.
user_function Specifies up to 30 values for Adams/Solver to pass to a user-written
subroutine. Valid only if the external system type is 'user'. Otherwise the
corresponding fields will be disabled for input.
interface_routines Specifies an alternative library and subroutine names for the user
subroutines EXTSYS_DERIV, EXTSYS_UPDATE, EXTSYS_OUTPUT,
EXTSYS_SAMP, EXTSYS_SET_NS, EXTSYS_SET_ND,
EXTSYS_SENSUB, EXTSYS_SET_STATIC_HOLD,
EXTSYS_SET_SAMPLE_OFFSET, respectively. Valid only if the
external system type is 'user'. Otherwise the corresponding fields will be
disabled for input.
Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the flexible body's location in the default
coordinate system.
Orientation Specify either of these three orientation methods,

• Orientation
• Along Axis Orientation
• In Plane Orientation
Relative to You can:

• Specify the orientation coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system
 A - D 101
Create/Modify Filter Function

Create/Modify Filter Function

(Adams/PostProcessor)

Plot -> Filter -> Create/Modify

Shortcut: Curve Edit toolbar -> Filter Curve Tool -> Right-click Filter Name text box -> filter_function -> Create

Creates or modifies a curve filter to eliminate noise on time signals or to emphasize a specific frequency
content of a time signal. Adams/PostProcessor supports two different types of filters:
• Butterworth filter - butter() in MATLAB™ developed by The MathWorks, Inc.
• Transfer function - A filter you define by directly specifying the coefficients of a transfer
function.
Once you create a filter, you can apply it to any curve.
Learn about Filtering Curve Data.

For the option: Do the following:

Filter Name If creating a filter function, enter a name for the filter.
Defined by Select to create either a Butterworth filter or a transfer function.
If you selected Butterworth, Adams/PostProcessor displays the following options:
Analog/Digital Select to create either an analog or digital Butterworth filter. Learn About
Filtering Methods.
Filter Type Select the type of filter:

• Low Pass - Removes frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

• High Pass - Removes frequencies below the cutoff frequency.
• Band Pass - Removes frequencies outside the two cutoff frequencies.
• Band Stop - Removes frequencies between the two cutoff
frequencies.
Order Set how much the filter will have damped the signal at the cutoff frequency,
often referred to as how sharp the filter is.

• First-order filter damps 3dB at the cutoff frequency.

• Second-order damps 6dB.
• Third-order damps 9dB.
102 Adams/View
Create/Modify Filter Function

For the option: Do the following:

Cutoff Frequency Set the frequency of cutoff.
(Scaled) - Digital
filters • For a digital filter - Determines the cutoff frequency as a ratio of the
Nyquist frequency (half the sample frequency). Therefore, for a
Cutoff Frequency (Hz) signal sampled (simulated) with 100 Hz, the Nyquist frequency is
- Analog filters 100/2=50Hz. A scaled cutoff frequency=0.3 then has a cutoff
frequency=0.3*50=15 Hz.
Note that if the same filter is applied to a signal sampled at 200 Hz,
the filter cutoff is at 30 Hz. If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop
for Filter Type, you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
• For an analog filter - Enter the cutoff frequency in the current units
(rad/s or Hz). If you selected Band Pass or Band Stop for Filter Type,
you must provide two cutoff frequencies.
If you selected Transfer Function, Adams/PostProcessor displays the following options:
Analog/Digital Select to create either an analog or digital Butterworth filter.
Create from Select to display the Create Butterworth Filter dialog box to define the transfer
Butterworth Filter function coefficients based on a Butterworth filter.
 A - D 103
Create/Modify Filter Function

For the option: Do the following:

Numerator/Denominat Specify the coefficients for the transfer function that define the filter.
or Coefficients
• For an analog filter, the transfer function is defined by the continuous
Laplace s polynomial.
• For a digital filter, the transfer function is defined in the z-plane.
The coefficients should be given according to MATLAB convention, which is
descending powers of s (or z):

This differs from how a transfer function is defined for Adams/Solver, where
the coefficients are given in increasing order:

Check Format and Select to display a plot of the transfer function's gain (magnitude) or phase.
Display Plot Always check the filter before using it.

Note:
• If you have not defined the filter correctly, an error message appears.
• If you’ve defined the filter correctly, a plot appears in which you can
switch between the filter’s gain and phase plots and change scales.
104 Adams/View
Create/Modify Friction

Create/Modify Friction
Right-click joint -> Modify -> Friction tool

Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints. You cannot apply friction to joints connected to Flexible bodies or
Point masses.

For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, select a type of joint below:
• Revolute Joint Options
• Cylindrical Joint Options
• Translational Joint Options
• Spherical Joint Options
• Universal/Hooke Joint Options

Learn about:
• Friction Regime Determination (FRD)
 A - D 105
Create/Modify General Constraint

Create/Modify General Constraint

Build -> Joints -> General Constraint Tool
Edit -> Modify -> select general constraint

Available with Adams/Solver (C++) only

Creates or modifies a general constraint that lets you define an arbitrary constraint specific to a particular
model. As its name implies, it is more general than the idealized joints, which describe physically
recognizable combination of constraints that are used to connect bodies together. You can also use the
general constraint to equivalently define an existing idealized joint. Read more about the GCON
statement in Adams/Solver (C++).
We advise that you use the general constraint with caution. Be sure to read the Known Limitations in the
GCON statement.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name for the general constraint. If you are creating a
general constraint, Adams/View assigns a default name to it.
f(q)= Enter a runtime expression that Adams/Solver (C++) forces to zero
during the simulation. To enter a function expression, next to the f
(q)= text

box, select the More tool to display the Adams/View Function

Builder. For information on using the Function Builder, see the
Function Builder online help. Learn more about defining a runtime
expression for a general constraint with Extended Definition of
GCON statement.
Report action forces on marker Enter a marker to have the reaction force on this marker measured
and reported as part of standard results. The reaction force reported
is the force that is exerted on the marker to satisfy the constraint
equation. Note that if you specify a marker and the runtine
expression has no dependency on it, the general constraint reports a
zero force.

Default value is the ground coordinate system (GCS).

Note: You cannot enter the Adams ID for the marker; you must
enter the name of the marker. Learn about Adams/Solver
IDs.
Add any comments about the general constraint that you want to
enter to help you manage and identify it. See Comments.
106 Adams/View
Create/Modify General State Equation

Create/Modify General State Equation

Build -> System Elements -> General State Equation -> New/Modify

Lets you represent a subsystem that has well defined inputs (u), internal states (x), and a set of well
defined outputs (y).
Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying General State Equations
• System Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
General State Equation Enter the name of the GSE.
Solver ID Assign a unique ID number to the GSE. See Adams/Solver ID.
U Array (Inputs) Specify the array element that defines the input variables for the GSE.
The U array is optional. When not specified, there are no system
inputs. The number of inputs to the GSE is inferred from the number
of variables in the U array.
Y Array (Outputs) Specify the array element that defines the output variables for the
GSE.
User Function Parameters Specifies the parameters that are to be passed to the User-written
subroutines that define the constitutive equations of a GSE, viz.,
Equations (1), (2), and (3).

Three user subroutines are associated with a GSE:

• GSE_DERIV is called to evaluate fc() in Equations 1.

• GSE_UPDATE is called to evaluate fd() in Equations 2.
• GSE_OUTPUT is called to evaluate g() in Equations 3.
See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
Interface Function Names If you specify a user function, enter function names to use other than
the standard names GSE_DERIV, GSE_UPDATE, and
GSE_OUTPUT.
States Set to:

• Continuous
• Discrete
• Sampled
• None (No options appear)
If you selected Continuous or Sampled, the following options appear:
 A - D 107
Create/Modify General State Equation

For the option: Do the following:

X Array (Continous) Enter the array element that defines the continuous states for the GSE.
The array element must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any
other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Continous) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
continuous states in the system.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the continuous
states are initialized to zero.
Static Hold Indicate whether or not the continuous GSE states are permitted to
change during static and Quasi-static simulations.
If you selected Discrete or Sampled, the following options appear:
X Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that is used to access the discrete states for the
GSE. It must be of the X type, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
IC Array (Discrete) Enter the array element that specifies the initial conditions for the
discrete states in the system. The array is optional. The array element
must be of the IC type.

When you do not specify an IC array for a GSE, all the discrete states
are initialized to zero.
First Sample Time Specify the Simulation time at which the sampling of the discrete states
is to start. All discrete states before the first sample time are defined to
be at the initial condition specified. The default is zero.
Sample Function/Sample Specify the sampling period associated with the discrete states of a
User Parameters GSE. This tells Adams/Solver to control its step size so that the
discrete states of the GSE are updated at:

last_sample_time + sample_period

In cases where an expression for the sampling period is difficult to

write, you can specify it in a user-written subroutine GSE_SAMP.
Adams/Solver will call this function at each sample time to find out
the next sample period.

Select the More button to display the Function Builder and build
an expression. See Function Builder and the Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
Add any comments about the GSE to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
108 Adams/View
Create/Modify Material

Create/Modify Material
Build -> Materials

Creates or modifies a material, which you can then assign to parts.

You define a material by its composition, such as restitution coefficient, Young's modulus, Poisson’s
ratio, and mass density. Part material properties are important in determining the mass moments of inertia
of a part.
Learn about the Standard Material Properties.

For the option: Do the following:

Name If desired, change the default name assigned to the new material type.
Youngs Modulus Enter the values for Young’s Modulus.
Poissons Ratio Enter Poisson’s Ratio.
Density Enter mass density.
Select to enter any comments you want associated with the material type.
See Comments.
 A - D 109
Create/Modify Matrix

Create/Modify Matrix
Build -> Data Elements -> Matrix -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a Data element matrix.

Learn about creating and modifying Matrices.

Note: You must create additional matrix elements in your Adams/View model if multiple
matrices are to be read from the same file.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Matrix Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the matrix.
Units Select the units that you want assigned for values in your matrix. Select
no_units if you do not want units associated with the values. If you set the
units for your matrix values, Adams/View automatically performs any
necessary unit conversions if you ever change your default modeling units.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the
array. See Comments.
Full Matrix/ Set to:

Sparse Matrix/ • Full Matrix

• Sparse Matrix
From a File
• From a File
Learn more about Matrix Format Types.
If you selected Full Matrix, the following options appear:
Enter Input Ordered by Set to either:
Columns/
• Enter Input Ordered by Columns - Specify that matrix values are
Enter Input Ordered by arranged in order by column.
Rows • Enter Input Ordered by Rows - Specify that matrix values are
arranged in order by row.
User Entered Numbers/ Select either:

Result Set Component • User Entered Numbers to enter the values yourself.
Names • Result Set Component Names to obtain the values from the results
of a Simulation from a Result set component.
See an Example of Entering Matrix in Full Format.
110 Adams/View
Create/Modify Matrix

For the option: Do the following:

Row Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of rows in the matrix.
Column Count For user-entered numbers only, enter the number of columns in the matrix.
Values Enter the values in the matrix in either row or column order depending on
the order you selected above. You can separate the values using a comma or
by pressing Enter after each value.
Result Set Component For result set components only, enter the names of the components.
Names
If you selected Sparse Matrix, the following option appears:
Row Index Enter the row numbers, separated by commas, in your matrix containing
nonzero values. Enter the row number each time there is a value in the row.
Column Index Enter the column numbers, separated by commas, containing nonzero
values. Enter the column number each time there is a value in the column.
Values Enter the nonzero values in your matrix starting with the first column.
Separate each value with a comma.
If you selected From a File, the following option appears:
File Enter the name of the file containing the matrix values and the name of the
matrix in the file. The name of the matrix is necessary even if the file
contains only one matrix. You will need to create additional matrices to read
other matrices from the same file.

Learn About the Format for Matrix Data Files.

 A - D 111
Create/Modify Modal Force

Create/Modify Modal Force

Build -> Forces -> Modal Force Tool
Creates or modifies a modal force (MFORCE).

For more information, see:

• Modal Forces
• Modeling Distributed Loads and Predeformed Flexible Bodies

For the option: Do the following:

Force Name Enter the default MFORCE name to create or modify. When creating a
MFORCE, Adams/View automatically assigns a default name of MFORCE
followed by an underscore and a number to make the name unique (for example,
MFORCE_1).
Flexible Body Specify the flexible body to which the MFORCE is applied.
Reaction Part If desired, in the text box, enter the name of an existing part to which to apply the
reaction of the modal force resultant. If you enter a part name, Adams/View
automatically creates a Floating marker associated with this part when it creates
the MFORCE. Adams/View keeps the marker coincident with the flexible body
analysis coordinate system during the simulation. Therefore, the need for the
point of reaction to be a floating marker.

In addition, because floating markers cannot be defined on flexible bodies, the

reaction part is restricted to rigid bodies only. You can use the Info command to
see the floating marker that Adams/View creates when you reference a reaction
part.
112 Adams/View
Create/Modify Modal Force

For the option: Do the following:

Define Using Select how you want to define the modal force:

• Function - Lets you select the modal loadcase and scale function of the
MFORCE. Note that you cannot select Function when defining an
MFORCE on a flexible body that does not contain any modal load case
information in its corresponding MNF.
• Subroutine - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be
passed to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the
modal load case and scale function whose product is the modal force
applied to the flexible body. The scale function can depend on time or the
state of the system. The load case can only be a function of time.
• Force - Lets you specify up to thirty user-defined constants to be passed
to the user-defined subroutine, MFOSUB to directly compute the modal
force on the flexible body. Each component of the modal force can
depend on time or the state of the system. (Adams/Solver (C++) only.
Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog
box help.)
To use a subroutine, you need to build a version of the Adams/Solver that
contains your version of the MFOSUB routine that quantifies the modal force.
For more information, see the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online
help. You can also specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
in the Routine text box. Learn about specifying your own routine with ROUTINE
Argument.
If you selected to specify a flexible body with modal load case information, you also specify the
following two options:
Load Case Select a modal load case label from a list. The list of modal loadcase labels is
generated from the MNF. Learn about Creating Loadcase Files.
Scale Function Specify an expression for the scale factor to be applied to the modal load case.
 A - D 113
Create/Modify Point Mass

Create/Modify Point Mass

Build -> Point Mass -> New/Modify

Point masses are points that have mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities. They are
computationally more efficient when rotational effects are not important.
For example, you could use point masses to represent the concentrated masses in a net. You could then
represent the ropes between the masses as forces or springs.

For the option: Do the following:

Name If you are creating a point mass, enter a name for the point mass.
Mass Set the mass of the point mass.

Note: By default, Adams/View creates a point mass with a mass of 1 in

current units.
Location Set or adjust its location as desired.

Note: By default, Adams/View places the point mass in the center of the
main window.
Select to enter comments to help you manage and identify the point mass. See
Comments.

If you are modifying a point mass, the following also appear:

Displays the Precision Move dialog box to let you change the position of the
point mass.

Displays the Point Mass Measure dialog box to let you create a measure for the
point mass. Learn about creating Object Measures.

Position ICs/ Displays the Modify Body dialog box set to let you change the initial position or
velocity of the point mass.
Velocity ICs
114 Adams/View
Create/Modify Road

Create/Modify Road
Adds a road assembly to your model. If your model includes tires, you must specify a road because each
tire must reference a road. The road determines the surface friction, bumps, and other inputs to tires.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the road to create or modify.
Part Enter a part, typically the ground part, to which the road belongs. Generally the
road is fixed in ground but in some cases, the road may move (for example, a
military vehicle driving on the deck of a warship).
Property File Enter the name of a road property file. The road property file determines the kind
or road (smooth or rough, wet or dry). You can view the contents of the road
property file using the View File button

.
Graphics Select On to display road graphics or select Off to hide any road graphics. You may
want to hide the road graphics when you work on your model. Roads graphics are
typically large and can affect operations such as fitting to view.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter a location for the road. The location determines the origin of the road and,
along with the road property file, determines whether any tires referencing this
road are initially contacting the road.
Orient Using Select a method to orient the road, either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors. The
z direction of the road orientation is always vertical direction. Therefore, you
should orient this axis of the road so it matches the vertical direction in your model.
If you selected Euler Angles, the following option is available:
Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3) to orient the road.
If you selected Direction Vectors, the following two options become available:
X Vector/ Enter the x- and z-direction vectors to orient the road. The x-, y-, and z-axes of the
Z Vector road are determine from the direction vectors as follows:

• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-vector |
• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method in Adams/Solver, see argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
 A - D 115
Create/Modify Road

For the option: Do the following:

Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.

Select to display the contents of the road property file in the Information window.
This helps you determine what kind of road the file models.
116 Adams/View
Create/Modify Sensor

Create/Modify Sensor
Simulate -> Sensor -> New

Right-click sensor -> Modify

Allows you to add a sensor to your model or modify an existing one. A sensor monitors a Simulation for
a specified event and changes a set of simulation controls when the event occurs.
Learn about:
• Adding Sensors to Your Model
• SENSOR statement in the Adams/Solver online help

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter a name for the sensor.
Event Definition Choose either:

• Run-Time Expression - Defines the triggering event using a run-time

function expression.
• User-Written Subroutine - Defines the triggering event using a
subroutine.
If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:
Expression Enter a function expression.
Select to display the Adams/View Function Builder.

If you selected User-Written Subroutine, the following option is available:

Parameter List Enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SENSUB.
Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to SENSUB.

For more information on user-written subroutines, see the Subroutines section

of the Adams/Solver online help.
The following option is available for all choices:
 A - D 117
Create/Modify Sensor

For the option: Do the following:

Event Evaluation Choose either:

• Run-Time Expression - Specifies an expression that is evaluated

when the event Adams/View is monitoring becomes true. You can
obtain the scalar value of the expression using the SENVAL function
expression.
• User-Written Subroutine - Defines and passes constants to a user-
written subroutine that is evaluated when the event Adams/View is
monitoring becomes true. You can obtain the return value of the user-
written subroutine using the SENVAL function.
Example:

If you set the following values, you can retrieve the distance between two
markers. You use the SENVAL function to retrieve the distance.

• Event Definition: Run-time Expression

• Expression: MOD (time, .5)
• Event Evaluation: Run-Time Expression
• Expression: DY(3,2)
• Target: 0
If you selected Run-Time Expression, the following two options are available:
Expression Enter a function expression.
Select to display the Adams/View Function Builder.

If you selected User-Written Subroutine, the following option is available:

Parameter List Enter the parameters to be passed to the user-written subroutine SEVSUB.
Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to SEVSUB.

For more information on user-written subroutines, the Subroutines section of

the Adams/Solver online help.
The following options are available for all choices:
Non-Angular Values Select to indicate that the expression measures non-angular values.
Angular Values Select to indicate that the expression measures angular values.
118 Adams/View
Create/Modify Sensor

For the option: Do the following:

Pull-Down Menu Select one of the following:

• Equal - From (Target - Error) to (Target + Error).

• Greater than or equal - Greater than or equal to (Target - Error).
• Less than or equal - Less than or equal to (Target + Error).

See example of the choices

.

In the figure, the sensor triggers whenever the value of the function being
monitored is in the shaded areas. Be careful that your function does not
evaluate in the shaded area at the start of your simulation unless you want your
sensor to trigger immediately. It is a good idea to define a function measure
using the same expression used for your sensor so you can check it by plotting
it.
Value Enter the target value that triggers an action.
End Tolerance Enter the absolute value of allowable error between the targeted value and the
actual sensed value.
Generate additional Select to create an extra Output step when Adams/Solver triggers the sensor so
Output Step at event you can capture the action.
Set Output Stepsize Select to redefine the time between consecutive output steps. Adams/Solver
uses this value until it is changed. The default is the current time between
output steps for the simulation.
 A - D 119
Create/Modify Sensor

For the option: Do the following:

Terminate current Select to:
simulation
and...[stop, or • Stop the simulation
continue with a • Stop the current command in the simulation Script and continue with
simulation script] the next command.
Set Integration Select to redefine the next integration step size. This change is temporary and
Stepsize lasts only for the next solution step.

The default is an integrator-determined value except when you’ve included

restarting the integrator as part of the sensor action as explained next. In this
case, the step size defaults to the integrator step size.
Restart Integrator Select to restart integration and reduce the integration order to one. If you also
set integration step size as explained above, Adams/Solver reinitializes the
integration step size to the specified value. If you do not specify the step size,
Adams/Solver reinitializes the integration step size to the integrator's default
step size.

To define integration order, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.

Refactorize Jacobian Select to cause Adams/Solver to generate a new pivot sequence for matrix
factorization. This can help the integrator produce more accurate data or
proceed more robustly through the simulation. Adams/Solver generates a pivot
sequence for matrix factorization before starting the simulation. Adams/Solver
does not generate a new pivot sequence unless you specify to refactorize the
Jacobian or it is necessary to refactorize to reach convergence.
Dump State Variable Select to write the entire array of state variable values to a text file in your
Factor current working directory.
Select to add any comments about the sensor to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.

Only available for Run-Time Expression.

Create two measures to monitor the expression and state of a sensor during
simulation. Learn about Object Measures.
120 Adams/View
Create/Modify Simulation Script

Create/Modify Simulation Script

Simulate -> Simulation Script -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a simulation Script.

Learn about Performing a Scripted Simulation.

For the option: Do the following:

Script Enter the name of the script to create or modify.
Script Type Select either:

• Simple Run
• Adams/View Commands
• Adams/Solver Commands
Learn more about the Types of Simulation Scripts.
If you select Simple Run:
End Time/Duration Enter the time interval over which the Simulation takes place and set how
you want it defined. You can select:

• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
the simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:

• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want

Adams/View to provide output information over your entire
simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per
step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even
if you change your simulation end time or duration. For example,
enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01
seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100
steps/second.
 A - D 121
Create/Modify Simulation Script

For the option: Do the following:

Simulation Type Select a type of simulation to run:

• Transient - Default
• Transient - Dynamic
• Transient - Kinematic
• Transient - Static
Learn more about Types of Simulations.
Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams/View perform a static simulation before performing
a dynamic simulation.
If you select Adams/View Commands:
Adams/View Commands Enter commands below the comment line
!Insert /View commands here:.
Append Run Commands Select to get assistance with Adams/View simulation commands. See
Getting Assistance with Adams/View Commands.
Select and enter any comments you want associated with the script. See
Comments.

If you select Adams/Solver Commands:

Adams/Solver Enter commands below the comment line
Commands !Insert ACF commands here:.
Append ACF Command Select to get assistance with Adams/Solver commands. See Getting
Assistance with Adams/Solver Commands.
Select and enter any comments you want associated with the script. See
Comments.
122 Adams/View
Create/Modify Solver Array

Create/Modify Solver Array

Build -> Data Elements -> Array -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a data element Array.

Learn more about data element Arrays.

For the option: Do the following:

Array Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.

Tips: You might find it easier to track which array element goes with
which system element if you name the array elements and the
corresponding system elements with like names. For example, the
states (X) array that goes with general state equation GSE_100 would
be ARRAY_100 ; the inputs (U) array would be ARRAY_101 ; and
the outputs (Y) array would be ARRAY_102 .
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify
the array. See Comments.
General/Initial Conditions Set to:
(ICs)/
• General
X (States)/ • Initial Conditions (ICs)
Y (Outputs)/ • X (States)
• Y (Outputs)
U (Inputs)
• U (Inputs)
Learn more about Types of Arrays.
If you selected Define General or Initial Conditions, Adams/View displays the following option:
Numbers Enter the values to be stored in the array.
If you selected X (States) or Y (Outputs), Adams/View displays the following option:
Size Enter the size of the array.
If you selected U (Inputs), Adams/View displays the following option:
Variables Enter the variables to be stored. If the array is used as input to a
transfer function, then you can only enter one variable.
 A - D 123
Create/Modify Spline

Create/Modify Spline
Build -> Data Element -> Spline -> New/Modify

The Spline Editor provides a tabular or plot view of your spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on your spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline.
You can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
Using the Spline Editor, you can create a two- or three-dimensional splines. Note, however, that the
Spline Editor does not display a three-dimensional spline in plot view.
Learn about Creating Splines Using the Spline Editor.
To set the view of the Spline Editor:
• Set View As to either Tabular Data or Plot.
124 Adams/View
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block

Create/Modify Standard Controls Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit

Displays the Adams/View Controls toolkit, which provides basic control elements such as filters, gains,
and PIDs.
Adams/View implements these controllers within the model as differential equations (that is, linear
continuous control). You can modify the user-defined control inputs and outputs for later use with
Adams/Linear and Adams/Controls.
Learn more about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.
 A - D 125
Create/Modify Standard Controls Block

Icon Link
Input-Signal Function Block

Summing Junction Block

Gain Block

Integrator Block

Low-Pass Filter Block

Lead-Lag Filter Block

User-Defined Transfer Function Block

Second-Order Filter Block

PID Controller

Switch Block
126 Adams/View
Create/Modify State Variable

Create/Modify State Variable

Build -> System Elements -> State Variable -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a state variable.

Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying State Variables
• System Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the state variable.
Definition Set to either:

• Run-time Expression
• User written subroutine
Learn more about Ways to Define State Variables.
F(time...,) = • If you selected Run-time Expression, enter the function expression

that defines the variable. Select the More button to display the
Function Builder and build an expression. See the Adams/View
Function Builder online help.
• If you selected User written subroutine, enter constants to the user-
written subroutine VARSUB to define a variable. See the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine VARSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Guess for F(1, 0..) and Select and then specify an approximate initial value for the variable, if
desired. Adams/Solver may adjust the value when it performs an Initial
conditions simulation. Entering an accurate value for initial conditions can
help Adams/Solver converge to the initial conditions solution.
 A - D 127
Create/Modify String

Create/Modify String
Build -> Data Elements -> String -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a string element that defines a character string that you can refer to later in the
execution of Adams/View or Adams/Solver. The character string cannot be broken and continued on the
next line. It can, however, be longer than a single line. You can use the GTSTRG subroutine to retrieve
the character string in a User-written subroutine. For example, you could use a string element to pass a
file name to a user-written subroutine. For more information, see Subroutines section of the
Adams/Solver online help.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the string.
String Enter the string values.
128 Adams/View
Create/Modify Transfer Function

Create/Modify Transfer Function

Build -> System Elements -> Transfer Function -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a transfer function.

Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions
• TFSISO statement.
• System Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the transfer function.
Input Array Name (U) Enter the array that defines the input (or control) for the transfer function. The
array must be an inputs (U) array. If you specified the size of the array when
you created it, it must be one.
State Array Name (X) Enter the array that defines the state variable array for the transfer function.
The array must be a states (X) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specified the
size of the array when you created it, it must be one less than the number of
coefficients in the denominator.
Output Array (Y) Enter the array that defines the output for the transfer function. The array must
be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in any other linear state
equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you specify the size
of the array when you created it, its size must be one.
IC Array Name (IC) Enter the array that defines the initial conditions array for the transfer
function. The array must be an IC array, and it cannot be used in any other
linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer function. If you
specified the size of the array when you created it, it must be equal to the size
of the state array.
Numerator Coefficients Specify the coefficients of the polynomial in the numerator and denominator
and Denominator of the transfer function. List the coefficients in order of ascending power of s,
Coefficients starting with s to the zero power, including any intermediate zero coefficients.
The number of coefficients for the denominator must be greater than or equal
to the number of coefficients for the numerator.
Check Format and Display a plot of the transfer function.
Display Plot
 A - D 129
Create/Modify Transfer Function

For the option: Do the following:

Keep value constant Select whether or not Adams/Solver should hold constant the value of the
during static analyses. transfer equation during static and Quasi-static simulations. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
Select to enter comments about the transfer function to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
130 Adams/View
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

Adds a wheel and tire assembly to your model. Learn about Defining Tires in Adams/View.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the wheel-tire assembly to create or modify.
Side (left,right) Select the side of the vehicle on which this wheel-tire assembly will
be located. Some road use this information to apply different inputs
to left and right tires (for example, the 2D stochastic (random) road).
If you are modeling a motorcycle, we recommend selecting left for
both the front and rear wheel tires.
CM Offset Optionally, enter the wheel center of mass offset. This is the distance
the wheel center of mass is offset along the wheel-spin (z) axis from
the wheel center.
Mass Enter the mass of wheel. Typically, the mass of the wheel and tire are
lumped together. If you select a property file for the SWIFT or FTIRE
models, however, enter only the mass of the wheel itself as these
models include the mass affects of the tire.
Ixx Iyy Enter the moment of inertia about the x- and y-axes (camber and steer
axes). Enter one value because Ixx is assumed to equal Iyy for wheel-
tire.
Izz Enter the moment of inertia about the wheel-tire's z- (Spin) axis.
Wheel Center offset (0ptional) Enter the offset of the wheel center geometry along the z-axis of the
wheel part.
Tire Property File Specify the property file containing the data for the tire. When the
dialog box is first displayed, the default filename mdi_0001.tir
appears in the text box. Use the View File button to view the
contents of the tire property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Longitudinal Velocity (Optional)

Enter the initial longitudinal velocity of the wheel-tire. The

longitudinal velocity is velocity along the X axis of the wheel-tire.
Spin Velocity (Optional)

Enter the initial spin velocity of the wheel-tire. The spin velocity is
the rotational velocity of the wheel-tire about its z-axis. A good
approximation of the initial spin velocity is the longitudinal velocity
divided by the unloaded radius of the tire:

Spin Velocity = Longitudinal Velocity / Unloaded Radius)

 A - D 131
Create/Modify Wheel and Tire

For the option: Do the following:

Road Enter the name of an existing road property file. To create a road,
right-click the text box, point to vpg_road, and then select Create.
The Create/Modify Road dialog box appears. The road determines the
input your tire sees—rough or smooth, wet or dry, and so on.
Location and Orientation
Location Enter the location of the wheel center.
Orient using Select either Euler Angles or Direction Vectors.
Euler Angles Enter the euler angles (body 3,1,3 angles) to orient the wheel-tire
assembly.
X Vector Enter the x-direction vector. The x- and z- direction vectors determine
the x,y,z orientation of the wheel-tire in the following way:

• Z = z-vector / | z-vector |
• Y = z-vector x x-vector / | z vector x x-
vector |
• X = Y x Z / | Y x Z |
For more information on XP-ZP method, see the argument XP in the
MARKER statement.
Z Vector Enter the z-direction vector (see X Vector above).
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage
and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the contents of the road or tire property file in the
Information window. This helps you determine what kind of road the
file models.
132 Adams/View
Create/Modify model

Create/Modify model
Build -> Model -> New/Modify

Creates or modifies a Model. You can store more than one model in a Modeling database. You may find
it helpful to store multiple models in the same database because it lets you:
• Keep multiple versions of the same mechanical system in the same file.
• Store models of subsystems in one file that you want to combine and simulate as a whole.
• Compare results between models.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Name Enter a name for the model. You can enter up to 80 alphanumeric
characters. You cannot include special characters, such as spaces or
periods.
Copy gravity settings of Only available if creating a model.
current model.
Select whether or not you want to use the same gravity settings as the
current model in your database. Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.
Select to add any comments about the marker to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
 A - D 133
Custom Inertial Modeling

Custom Inertial Modeling

Flexible Body Modify dialog box -> Custom

Use to select the inertia invariants to define the modal formulation of the flexible body. Use the Tool tips
to help you decide which invariants to select. Learn more about defining the modal formulation.
134 Adams/View
Cut Tool

Cut Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Cut Tool

Removes the volume where one solid intersects another solid to create a new solid. It subtracts the
geometry of the second part that you select from the geometry of the first part. The remaining geometry
belongs to the second part that you selected. The following is an example of cutting a solid:

You cannot cut the geometry so that the remaining geometry is split into two solids. For example, you
cannot cut a block from the center of a cylinder so that two cylinders remain after the cut. The following
is an example of cutting a solid into two solids:
 A - D 135
Cut Tool

If a part completely envelopes another part, you cannot cut that part from the enveloped part because no
geometry would result. For example, if a box completely envelopes a sphere, you cannot cut the box from
the sphere and leave a zero mass part. The following is an example of cutting a solid into a zero-mass part

:Learn about Cutting a Solid.

136 Adams/View
Cylinder Tool

Cylinder Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Cylinder Tool

Creates a Solid geometry with a circular base. You draw the cylinder’s centerline and Adams/View
creates the cylinder with a radius 25% of the length of the centerline. Before you draw a cylinder, you
can also specify its length and radius:

The Cylinder tool draws the centerline of the cylinder in the plane of the screen or the Working grid, if
you have it turned on.
Learn about Creating a Cylinder.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the cylinder to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the cylinder to ground.
Tip: Add the geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you
are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry
that defines the race track can be added to ground.
Length Enter the length of a cylinder, if desired.
Radius Enter a radius, if desired.

If you do not enter a radius, Adams/View creates the cylinder with a radius
25% of the length of the center line.

Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw a cylinder. One lets you modify the length of the
cylinder and one lets you set its radius. For more information on modifying geometry using
hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
 A - D 137
Cylindrical Joint Tool

Cylindrical Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Cylindrical Joint Tool

Creates a cylindrical joint that allows both relative rotation as well as relative translation of one part with
respect to another part. A cylindrical joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the parts
can rotate or slide with respect to each other.

The orientation of the cylindrical joint defines the direction of the axis about which the parts can rotate
or slide along with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the cylindrical joint is parallel to the
orientation vector and passes through the location.

Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
138 Adams/View
Cylindrical Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
2 Bodies - 2 Locations there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
 A - D 139
Data Element Create Array U Input Array

Data Element Create Array U Input Array

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> U Input Array

Groups together a set of variables to define the inputs for a system element, either linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.

For the option: Do the following:

Array Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Size Specify the size of the array.

If you enter a size, it should match the number of variables. Adams/View provides
the size parameter mainly for your convenience in model creation (it is not
required).
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
140 Adams/View
Data Element Create Array X State Array

Data Element Create Array X State Array

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> X State Array
Defines a list of state variables (X) associated with a system element, such as a linear state equation,
general state equation, or transfer function. To use this array, you must reference the array name as the
state variable array in the system element definition. You can use each X state array with only one system
element in your model.

For the option: Do the following:

Array Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.
Adams ID Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Size Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system element automatically
determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you entered.

• For linear state equation, the X state array size is the row dimension of the
A state matrix.
• For transfer functions, the transformation from polynomial ratio type to
canonical state space type internally determines the X state array size.
• For general state equations, the X state array size is the state equation
count as defined in the general state equation.
 A - D 141
Data Element Create Array Y Output Array

Data Element Create Array Y Output Array

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Y Output Array

Specifies the output array for a system element, either linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function. To use these arrays, you must reference the array name as the output array in the system
element definition. You can use each Y output array with only a single system element.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Controls Toolkit.

For the option: Do the following:

Array Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the array.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the array to help you manage and identify the array. See
Comments.
Size Specify the size of the array. The corresponding system's modeling element
automatically determines the size of the array and checks it against the size you
entered.

• For linear state equations, the Y output array size is the row dimension of
the C output matrix or the D feedforward matrix.
• For transfer functions, the Y output array size is always 1.
• For general state equations, the Y output array size is the output equation
count, as defined in the general state equation.
142 Adams/View
Data Element Create Curve

Data Element Create Curve

Build -> Data Elements -> Curve -> New

Creates a data element curve.

Learn more about Curves.

For the option: Do the following:

Curve Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the curve.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the curve. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Closed Set to either no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.
Define Using Matrix/ Set to either:

Define Using Subroutine • Define Using Matrix

• Define Using Subroutine
Learn about Defining Data Element Curves.
If you selected Define Using Matrix, the following option appears:
Matrix Name Enter the matrix name.
Interpolation Order Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is
1 plus the degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order
also affects the number of points used to determine each spline
segment. For example, splines of order 2 are basically polylines, while
the segments used to create an spline of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4
is the default order of splines, which is a cubic b-sline.

Note: B-splines of order K will have K - 2 continious derivatives.

The discontinuities appear where the polynomial segments
joint together. Increasing the order of the b-spline arbitrarily
may introduce unwanted oscillation into the curve.
If you selected Define Using Subroutine, the following options appear:
User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine CURSUB. Enter the
user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are
constants passed to the subroutine:

r1, ..., r30

Learn About Specifying a Subroutine.
Minimum Parameter Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter for a user-written
curve.
 A - D 143
Data Element Create Curve

For the option: Do the following:

Maximum Parameter Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for a user-written
curve.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
144 Adams/View
Data Element Create Plant Input

Data Element Create Plant Input

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Plant Input

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant Input -> New...

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Linear States Tool -> Right-click Plant Input text box

Defines a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as system
input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant input acts
only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.

For the option: Do the following:

Plant Input Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant input.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant input. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
 A - D 145
Data Element Create Plant Output

Data Element Create Plant Output

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Plant Output

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant Output -> New ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Linear States Tool -> Right-click Plant Output text box

Defines a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an
Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a
pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.

Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

For the option: Do the following:

Plant Output Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant output.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant output. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
146 Adams/View
Data Element Create Plant State

Data Element Create Plant State

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Plant State

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant State -> New ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Linear States Tool -> Right-click Plant State text box

Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
• For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Knowledge Base Article 12721.
• For an example of using PSTATE, see Knowledge Base Article 12663.

For the option: Do the following:

Plant State Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the plant state.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant state. See Adams/Solver
ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box,
which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state
object.
 A - D 147
Data Element Create Spline

Data Element Create Spline

Build -> Data Elements -> Spline -> General

Creates data element splines using the general method.

Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Spline Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the spline.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the spline. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it.
See Comments.
Linear Extrapolate Set to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the
first or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files,
Adams/Solver extrapolates a spline that exceeds a defined range by
applying a parabolic function over the first or last three data points. For
RPC III or DAC files, the default method of extrapolation is zero-order
(constant).

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

Units Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.
File/Result Set Set to:
Component/Numerical
• File
• Result Set Component
• Numerical
If you selected File, the following three options appear:
File Name Enter the name of the file.
Block Name If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want
Adams/View to take the data. The block must be specifically named in
the file.
Channel Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with
time response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see
Adams/Durability online help.
If you selected Numerical, the following options appear:
148 Adams/View
Data Element Create Spline

For the option: Do the following:

X, Y, Z Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.

• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x

values, n, depends on whether you specify a single curve or a
family of curves.
• Values must be constants; Adams/Solver does not allow
expressions.
• Values must be in increasing order: x1 < x2 < x3 , and so on.
If you selected Result Set Components, the following options appear:
X, Y, Z Result Set Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in
Component the text boxes.
 A - D 149
Data Element Modify Curve

Data Element Modify Curve

Build -> Data Elements -> Curve -> Modify

Modify a data element curve.

Learn more about working with data element Curves.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Curve Name Enter the name of the curve being modified.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the curve. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the curve to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Closed Set to either no to create an open curve or yes to create a closed curve.

Learn About Specifying Open or Closed Curves.

Define Using Matrix/ Set to either:

Define Using • Define Using Matrix

Subroutine • Define Using Subroutine

Learn about Defining Data Element Curves.

If you selected Define Using Matrix, the following option appears:
Matrix Name Enter the matrix name.
Interpolation Order Specify the order of the b-spline interpolating the curve. The order is 1 plus the
degree of the functions used to define the spline. The order also affects the
number of points used to determine each spline segment. For example, splines
of order 2 are basically polylines, while the segments used to create an spline
of order 4 are of the 3rd order. 4 is the default order of splines, which is a cubic
b-sline.

Note: B-splines of order K will have K - 2 continious derivatives. The

discontinuities appear where the polynomial segments joint together.
Increasing the order of the b-spline arbitrarily may introduce
unwanted oscillation into the curve.
If you selected Define Using Subroutine, the following options appear:
User Function Specify up to 30 values to pass to the user-written subroutine.
Minimum Parameter Enter the minimum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.
Maximum Parameter Enter the maximum value of the curve parameter for a user-written curve.
Routine Enter the function to be called. The default is CURSUB.
150 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Plant Input

Data Element Modify Plant Input

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant Input -> Modify...

Modifies a set of inputs (state variables) to the mechanical system that Adams/Solver recognizes as
system input during an Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant
input acts only as a pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant input:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function PINVAL(i i), where i
specifies the PINPUT ID and i specifies the ith variable in the plant input list. Note that i is not
the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines call the subroutine SYSFNC to access single elements of the plant input
list and call the subroutine SYSARY to access all values for a PINPUT (see the Subroutines
section of the Adams/Solver online help).
Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant input. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.

For the option: Do the following:

Plant Input Name Select an exisitng plant input.
New Plant Input Name Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant input.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant input. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant input to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
 A - D 151
Data Element Modify Plant Output

Data Element Modify Plant Output

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant Output -> Modify ...

Modifies a set of output (state variables) that Adams/Solver recognizes as system output during an
Adams/Linear simulation. When you run any other type of simulation, the plant output acts only as a
pointer to the list of the specified variables.
Both function expressions and user-written subroutines can access the plant output:
• Function expressions access the values by using the Adams/Solver function POUVAL(i1,i2),
where i1 specifies the plant output ID, and i2 specifies the i2th variable in the plant output list.
Note that i2 is not the ID of the variable.
• User-written subroutines access single elements of the plant output list and call the subroutine
SYSFNC to access all values for a POUTPUT by calling the subroutine SYSARY (see the
Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help).

Note: Variables can appear in more than one plant output. This allows you to output two or more
sets of state matrices at the same time.

Learn more:
• Plant Inputs and Outputs
• Ways to Use Plant Input and Output

For the option: Do the following:

Plant Output Name Select an exisitng plant output.
New Plant Output Name Enter the new name that you want assigned to the plant output.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant output. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant output to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
152 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Plant State

Data Element Modify Plant State

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Plant State

Build -> Data Elements -> Plant -> Plant State -> Modify ...

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Linear States Tool -> Right-click Plant State text box

Adams/Solver (C++) only. Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box
help.
Adams/Linear requires a minimum representation of the system to generate the state matrix from which
eigenvalues can be computed. For non-stationary systems, the state matrix is a function of the states used
to linearize the system. This dialog box lets you to define a set of states that are to be used in the
linearization scheme. You can specify as many states as there are degrees-of-freedom. If a smaller set of
states are provided, then the system will "fill in" by choosing a set of internally available states for the
ones that were not explicitly specified. If too many states are specified, Adams/Solver identifies and
discards the redundant states.
Plant states are a list of variables. The variables contain expressions that specify the states that are to be
used in linearizing the system. Plant state objects are defined in the model. The LINEAR command can
instruct Adams/Solver to use a specific plant state object for generating the linear model. A model can
contain any number of plant state objects. You can use any one of them with the LINEAR command.
• For more information, see the Adams/Solver (C++) LINEAR command.
• For theoretical details, see the white paper in Knowledge Base Article 12721.
• For an example of using PSTATE, see Knowledge Base Article 12663.

For the option: Do the following:

Plant State Name Enter the name of existing plant state.
New Plant State Name Enter a new name of plant state.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plant state. See Adams/Solver
ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plant state to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Variable Name Enter the list of variables.
Create State Variable for Plant State Displays the Create State Variable for Plant State dialog box,
which allows you to create state variables for use in a plant state
object.
 A - D 153
Data Element Modify Spline

Data Element Modify Spline

Build -> Data Elements -> Spline -> Modify

Modifies a spline created using the general method and a file as input.
Learn more about creating and modifying data element Splines.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Spline Name Enter the name of the spline to modify.
New Spline Name Enter a new name for the spline, if desired.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the spline. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the spline to help you manage and identify it. See
Comments.
Linear Extrapolate Set to yes to extrapolate a spline by applying a linear function over the first
or last two data points. By default, for user-defined files, Adams/Solver
extrapolates a spline that exceeds a defined range by applying a parabolic
function over the first or last three data points. For RPC III or DAC files,
the default method of extrapolation is zero-order (constant).

Learn about Curve-Fitting Techniques in Adams/View.

Units Enter the units that you want assigned for values in your spline.
File/Result Set Set to:
Component/Numerical
• File
• Result Set Component
• Numerical
If you selected File, the following three options appear:
File Name Enter the name of the file.
Block Name If desired, enter the block within the file from which you want Adams/View
to take the data. The block must be specifically named in the file.
Channel Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with time
response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see
Adams/Durability online help.
If you selected Numerical, the following options appear:
154 Adams/View
Data Element Modify Spline

For the option: Do the following:

X, Y, Z Enter the x, y, and, optionally, z values in the text boxes.

• Specify at least four x and y values. The maximum number of x

values, n , depends on whether you specify a single curve or a
family of curves.
• Values must be constants; Adams/Solver does not allow
expressions.
• Values must be in increasing order:
x1 < x2 < x3 , and so on.
If you selected Result Set Components, the following options appear:
X, Y, Z Result Set Enter the Result set components to be used for the x, y, and z values in the
Component text boxes.
 A - D 155
Database Navigator

Database Navigator
Tools -> Database Navigator Shared Dialog Box
Displays the types of objects appropriate for the command you are executing and shows objects in their
database hierarchy. You can browse for objects or set it to rename objects, view information about the
objects and view dependencies. You can also set a filter for the types of objects displayed in the Database
Navigator.
Learn more about Database Navigator.

For the option: Do the following:

Pull-Down Menu Use the pull-down menu to choose a mode option. Select one:

• Browse (the default; the options on this page describe Browse)

• Display Attribute
• Rename
• Comments
• Information
• Topology By Parts
• Topology By Connections
• Graphical Topology
• Associativity
• Select List
Filter Select if you want to filter the types and names that you want displayed in the
Database Navigator. Then, enter the name of the objects you want to display in the
text box and use the pull-down menu to the right to select the type of object(s) you
want to display. You can also use the pull-down menu below the Filter text box to
only display those objects that are active or inactive.
Sort by Use the pull-down menu to choose how you want the objects sorted. You can also
select to not sort the objects so they appear in the order they are stored in the
modeling database.
Highlight Off by default. Select if you want an object to appear selected in the main window
and the reverse.
Use the plus sign (+) or the minus (-) (--) signs to display or hide all of the children
hidden/shown in the tree view.
156 Adams/View
Database Storage

Database Storage
Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Database Storage

Selecting Database Storage as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set how
Adams/View handles the results for:
• Single Simulations - As you perform a single Simulation, ADAM/View stores the results of the
simulation under the current model in your Modeling database. By default, when you perform
another simulation, Adams/View overwrites the results of the previous simulation. You can store
simulations results in your database after a simulation has finished so that Adams/View does not
overwrite them. For information on saving the results of individual simulation, see Saving
Simulation Results.
• Multi-run Simulations - For a parametric analysis, Adams/View stores the parametric analysis
(multi-run) results in an analysis object called Last_Multi. This analysis is not a full analysis—it
simply contains a summary of the design variable variations and Objective values for each
model that was analyzed in the parametric study. Unless you rename or copy Last_Multi before
running another parametric analysis, subsequent parametric study summaries will overwrite
Last_Multi.
Saving Multi-Run simulations does not save each individual trial resulit simply saves a summary
of the parametric study. To save each individual trial result, use Save Analysis for Individual
Simulations.
Parametric analyses can run many simulations. Use care in saving individual analyses and/or
mult-run analyses. It is possible to exhaust the memory or file space available on your computer.
Running out of memory or file space can lead to unpredictable system problems, and cause the
parametric analysis to fail.
You can use measures to compare specific data between runs without saving all the results.
Create and display a measure for the data of interest, then select Save Curves under the Display
settings of the Solver Settings dialog box. Adams/View charts the measure for each simulation
and saves all the curves. At the end, you have a strip chart showing the measure for all
simulations.
Stored simulation results remain in your modeling database when you save your modeling database. Be
careful not to save more simulation results than you need since they require quite a bit of storage space.
To delete simulation results from your modeling database, see Deleting Simulation Results.

For the option: Do the following:

Single Simulations
Save Analysis Set to Yes to automatically store simulation results in the modeling database.
Prefix After selecting Save Analysis, enter the prefix you want Adams/View to use as the
name of each simulation. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to
form the complete name of the new analysis object.
Multi-Run Simulations
 A - D 157
Database Storage

For the option: Do the following:

Save Analysis Set to Yes to automatically a copies the parametric analysis results to a permanent
location when the analysis is complete.
Prefix After selecting Save Analysis, enter the name you want to use for each analysis
object. Adams/View appends a unique number to the prefix to form the complete
name of the new analysis object. Adams/View creates the new analysis under the
model you analyzed.
Stop on error Set to Yes a to stop the parametric analysis if Adams/Solver encounters an error
during a simulation. If you set it to No, Adams/Solver continues running
simulations even if a simulation fails or another error occurs. Use care if you turn
this option off. Optimizations probably do not recover well from an error. In some
cases, you may want to continue a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE)
even if a few of the simulations fail.
158 Adams/View
Defaults Names

Defaults Names
Settings -> Names

Allows you to determine whether Adams/View uses full object names, short object names, or
Adams/Solver IDs when displaying run-time functions or object names in the Information Window and
dialog boxes. This also determines the naming the Function Builder Assist box uses for object names or
Adams/Solver IDs to generate run-time functions.

For the option: Do the following:

Display database Choose from the following:
references using
• Full Names - The object's full name. For example:
DX(Model_1.Part_2.Mar_15).
• Short Names - Only the specific portion of the object's name required to
uniquely identify it. Example: DX(Mar_15).
• Adams IDs - An integer used to identify the object in Adams/Solver dataset
(.adm) file. Example: DX(15). If you select Adams IDs, then Adams/View
displays short names for cases that do not involve functions (object names in
dialog box text boxes).

Note: Regardless of the option you choose, you can enter the object's full or short name or its
Adams/Solver ID while writing functions.
 A - D 159
Delete Group

Delete Group
Build -> Ungroup

Ungroups a Group of objects.

Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.

For the option: Do the following:

Group Name Enter the name of the group of objects you want to ungroup.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

160 Adams/View
Design Evaluation Results Table

Design Evaluation Results Table

Simulate -> Design Evaluation ->

Allows you to create a report of the results of the Parametric analyses in a table. Learn more about
Generating a Table.

For the option: Do the following:

Result Set Enter the parametric analysis result set you want to display.
Column Width Enter values for the column.
Precision Enter values for the precision.
Format Select either Automatic, Exponential, or Fixed.
File Name Enter the file name if you want to write the table to a file.
Display in Select if you want to display the table in the Information window.
Information Window Adams/View displays the Information window showing a tabular summary.
 A - D 161
Design Evaluation Tools

Design Evaluation Tools

Simulate -> Design Evaluation

Allows you to begin a parametric analysis.

Note that some of the options change depending on what you are creating.
Learn more about parametric analyses with Parameterization Basics.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Enter the name of the model to simulate.
Simulation Script Enter the name of the simulation Script to use.
Study a Select either Measure or Objective to define the type of objective you are
using.

• If you selected Measure, select Last, Minimum, Maximum, or

Average from the pull-down menu, and then enter the name of the
measure in the text box.
• If you selected Objective, enter the name of the objective in the
Objective text box. Optimizations are limited to one objective. You
can monitor more than one objective in a Design study or Design of
experiments (DOE), however, by entering more than one name
separated by a comma.
Select Design Study, Design of Experiments, or Optimization.

Note that each type displays some different dialog box options. Learn about options available for all
types.
Design Study
Design Variable Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.

• If you specified a range for the design variable, Adams/View uses

equally spaced levels across the range. You specify the number of
levels in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for the design variable,
Adams/View runs a simulation using each value, ignoring the
Default Levels text box.
162 Adams/View
Design Evaluation Tools

For the option: Do the following:

Start Begins the simulation.

After you select Start, Adams/View runs a simulation for each level of the
design variable. When the simulations are done, Adams/View returns the
variable to its original value.
Design of Experiments
Design Variables Enter the name of the design variable that you want to vary.
Default Levels Enter the number of levels (values) you want to use only if you specified a
range for the design variable.
Trials defined by Select either Built-In DOE Technique, Direct Input, or File Input from
the pull-down menu.

• If you selected built-in techniques, use the DOE Technique pull-

down menu (see below) to select the technique. If you want to
check that the variables have the same number of levels and display
the required number of runs, select Check Variables, Guess # of
Runs.
• If you selected direct input, enter the number of trials (simulations)
and the trial matrix.
• If you selected file input, enter the name of the file containing the
trial matrix.
DOE Technique (Appears only if you selected Built-in DOE Technique above)

Select a DOE technique. The DOE technique or trial matrix controls the
number of simulations and the combination of variable values to use for
each simulation. For example, the Full Factorial technique simulates every
possible combination of levels. If you use two variables with three levels
each, Adams/View runs nine simulations.

The DOE technique or trial matrix selects values for a variable based on the
range or list of values you defined for the variable.

• If you specified only a range for a design variable, Adams/View

selects from equally spaced values across the range. You enter the
number of values in the Default Levels text box.
• If you specified a list of values for a design variable, Adams/View
selects directly from those values, ignoring the value in the Default
Levels text box.
Check Variables Guess # (Appears only if you selected Full Factiorial as the DOE Technique above)
of Runs.
Select if you want to check that the variables have the same number of
levels and display the required number of runs.
 A - D 163
Design Evaluation Tools

For the option: Do the following:

Number of Trials (Appears only if you selected Direct Input for Trials Defined by)

Enter the number of trials (simulations) and the trial matrix.

Trial Matrix File (Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)

Enter the name of the file containing the trial matrix.

Edit Trial Matrix File (Appears only if you selected File Input for Trials Defined by)

Select to edit the trial matrix file.

Preview Shows you each configuration of your model for every design variable.
Displays an alert box asking you if you want to pause after each
configuration. Select YES to pause.
Start Begins the simulation. Adams/View runs a simulation for each trial that the
DOE technique or trial matrix defines. When the simulations are done,
Adams/View returns the variables to their original values.
Optimization
Design Variables Enter the name of the design variables to vary.

• If you specified value ranges on any of the design variables,

Adams/View increases or decreases the objective as much as
possible without exceeding the value limits.
• If you specified constraints, Adams/View increases or decreases the
objective as much as possible without violating the constraints.
As Adams/View runs the optimization, it iteratively adjusts the design
variable values, attempting to improve the model performance with each
iteration. Adams/View may need to backtrack to avoid violating a
constraint or limit on a variable value. Therefore, the model performance
does not necessarily improve with each iteration. At each iteration,
Adams/View runs several simulations to approximate derivatives and
converge on the next iteration.
Auto. Save Select if you want to automatically save the original values of the design
variables before starting the optimization analysis.
Goal Select either Maximize or Minimize. If you select Maximize as the goal,
Adams/View adjusts the design variable values to increase the measure or
objective as much as possible. If you select Minimize, Adams/View reduces
the objective as much as possible.
Contraints Select if you want to add contraints and then enter the names of the
constraints in the text box that appears.
164 Adams/View
Design Evaluation Tools

For the option: Do the following:

Start Begins the simulation.

The last iteration will be the best values that the optimization could find
without violating constraints or limits. Adams/View normally leaves the
design variables set to the optimized values. If you interrupt the analysis or
Adams/View encounters an error during the analysis, Adams/View resets
the variables to their original values.

If you do not want to keep the optimized values, and you selected the Auto.
Save check box or used the Save button to save the original values, you can
select the Restore button to return the variables to their original values.
The following buttons are available for all three types:
Display, Ouput, and Displays the Solver Settings dialog box for either display, output, or
Optimizer optimizer options.

Note that each button brings up a different option in the Solver Settings
Dialog Box.
You can:

• Select to display the Save Design Evaluation Results dialog box to

save the simulation results. (Be sure to save your modeling
database after you save the parametric analysis results.)
• Right-click to delete the simulation results.
Learn about parametric simulation results for:

• Design studies
• DOE
• Optimizations
Displays the Plot Design Evaluation Results dialog box to display the
results as a plot.

Displays the Design Evaluation Results Table dialog box to display the
results as a table.

Displays the Update Design Variables dialog box to let you update the
design variables.
 A - D 165
Dialog-Box Builder

Dialog-Box Builder
Tools -> Dialog Box -> Create

Allows you to create and modify Dialog boxes to better suit your needs and preferences.

For more information, see Customizing Adams/View.

166 Adams/View
Discrete Flexible Link

Discrete Flexible Link

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Discrete Flexible Link

Creates a discrete flexible link consisting of two or more rigid bodies connected by beam force elements.

You indicate the following and Adams/View creates the appropriate parts, Geometry, Forces, and
Constraints at the endpoints:

• Endpoints of the link

• Number of parts and the material type
• Properties of the beam
• Types of endpoint attachments (flexible, rigid, or free)

Learn about working with Discrete Flexible Links.

Note: For more information on beam force elements, see Beam. Also note the caution about the
asymmetry of beams.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter a text string of alphanumeric characters. Adams/View prepends the
text string you specify to the name of each object it creates. For example, if
you specify the string LINK, the first rigid body is LINK_1, the first marker
is LINK_MARKER_1, and so on.
 A - D 167
Discrete Flexible Link

For the option: Do the following:

Material Enter the type of material to be used for the rigid bodies and beam
properties. Learn about Standard Material Properties.
Segments Enter the number of rigid bodies that you want in the link.
Damping Ratio Enter the ratio of viscous damping to stiffness for the beam forces.
Color Enter the color to be used for the geometry in the flexible link.
Marker 1 Enter the marker that defines the start of the link. Learn about Positioning
Flexible Links.

Note: Marker 1 and Marker 2 are also used to calculate the orientation
of the link.
Attachment Select how to define the start of the link:

• free - The end is unconnected.

• rigid - A fixed joint is created between the parent of Marker 1 and
the first part of the discrete flexible link.
• flexible - The link has discrete flexibility all the way to the
endpoint. To create this flexibility, Adams/View creates an
additional beam force between the first segment of the link and the
parent part of Marker 1. The length of the beam is one half of the
segment length.
Marker 2 Enter the marker that defines the end of the link.
Cross Section Select one of the following to define the geometry of the link or specify the
area and area moments of inertia of the flexible link.

• Solid Rectangle
• Solid Circle
• Hollow Rectangle
• Hollow Circle
• I-Beam
• Properties
168 Adams/View
Display Attribute

Display Attribute
Database Navigator -> Display Attribute

Allows you to set how individual, types of objects, and children of objects appear in Adams/View.
Learn about Setting Appearance of Objects Through the Database Navigator.

For the option: Do the following:

Visibility Select the visibility of the object
Name Vis Select the visibility of the name of the object.
Color Select a color in which to display the object.
Transparency The higher the value, the more transparent the object is, allowing other
objects to show through. The lower the value, the more opaque the object
is, covering other objects.

Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact

on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card
without hardware acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting
an object’s transparency, consider Setting Rendering Mode to
wireframe.
Line Style Select the type of line style for the object border.
Line Width Select the weight for the line style. The weight values range from 1 to 5
screen pixels
Icon Size Enter the size you want for the icons. Note that these changes take
precedence over the size you specify globally for the modeling database as
explained Setting Screen Icon Display.
Active Set the state of the object during a simulation: active or inactive
Apply Select to apply the attributes to the objects
Object/Siblings/All • Object - Only apply to the selected object.
• Siblings - Apply changes to all objects of the same type that are
children of the parent of the selected object.
• All - Apply changes to objects matching the filter you set in the
Filter text box.
Filter Use to set the types and names to which you want the display attributes
applied. In the text box, enter the name of the objects you want to display
in the text box, and then use the pull-down menu to the right to select the
type of object(s) you want to display.
 A - D 169
Display Log File

Display Log File

Tools -> Log File Shared Dialog Box

Shows you a log of the commands you executed and messages that you receive. The Log file marks
messages as comments so Adams/View does not try to execute them. It indicates a comment by placing
an exclamation mark (!) in front of the message.
Adams/View also displays as comments any commands that it executes when it starts up. To help you
distinguish the startup commands from messages, Adams/View follows the exclamation mark (!) with
the command prompt (>>).
Adams/View does not update the Display Log File dialog box each time you enter a command. You must
select Update to see the new command/message.
By default, Adams/View only shows warning, errors, and fatal messages that you have received. To
change the type of messages displayed and to display commands that Adams/View executed, use the
options below.
Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.

For the option: Do the following:

Show only lines of type Select if you want to change the type of messages displayed.
You must have Show only lines of type selected to select one of the following:
Info Select if you want to show information messages.
Warning Select if you want to show warning messages.
Error Select if you want to show error messages.
Fatal Select if you want to show fatal error messages.
Show only lines containing Optional. Select if you want to apply a string filter so the log file only
displays lines that contain certain information, such as display only
commands that create links.

Enter the text that the line must contain in the text box. You can also enter
wildcards.
Suppress duplicate lines Select if you want to remove any duplicate lines that occur if you
encounter the same error again.
Update Select to redisplay the log file and apply filters.
170 Adams/View
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Main Toolbox -> Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Contains tools for dynamically rotating the View in the View window.

Learn about Dynamically Rotating a View.

 E - I 171
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

E-I
172 Adams/View
Edit Appearance Dialog Box

Edit Appearance Dialog Box

Edit -> Appearance

Sets how individual objects or types of objects appear in Adams/View. You can set the appearance of any
modeling object in your Modeling database or for a group of objects.
Learn about:
• Setting object appearance
• Using Wildcards
• Icon Settings Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Entity To explicitly specify an object, enter the name of the object whose appearance
you want to set.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Once the name of the object is in the text box, press Enter to update the dialog
box.
Types To specify a group of similar objects, enter a filter or wildcard. For example,
enter Parts to set the appearance of all rigid bodies or Markers to set the
appearance of all markers.
Visibility Select how you want to set the visibility of the selected object or objects. You
can select:

• On - Turns on the display of the objects.

• Off - Turns off the display of the objects.
• Inherit - Lets the objects simply inherit the display settings from its
parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings
from its parent part.
Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the name of the objects displayed in the View
window. Refer to the options above for Visibility for an explanation of the
choices.
 E - I 173
Edit Appearance Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Color and Color Scope Enter the color you want used for the objects and set which elements of the
objects should be affected by the selected color. You can select:

• Polygon Fill - Sets the color of those areas of a graphic that can be
shaded (they include sides of a cylinders, frustums, boxes, and so
on).
• Edge - Sets the color of the lines making up the edges of the facets of
a graphic that can be shaded.
• Outline - Sets the color of the lines that make up those graphics that
cannot be shaded or filled like the coil of a spring damper.
• All - Sets the selected color for all elements of an object.
To browse for a color in the Database Navigator or create a new color, right-
click the Color text box, and then select Browse or Create.
Render Set the rendering for the geometry:

• Filled - Adds shading to a solid fill to give a more realistic

appearance. It does not show edges. The light source is from the
upper left.
• Wireframe - Shows only the edges of objects so that you can see
through the objects. Helps you select points and edges.
Transparency Set how transparent the object or objects are. The higher the value, the more
transparent the object is, allowing other objects to show through. The lower
the value, the more opaque the object is, covering other objects.

Tip: Setting the transparency of objects can have a negative impact

on graphical performance if you are using a graphics card
without hardware acceleration for OpenGL. Instead of setting
an object’s transparency, consider setting the object’s render
mode to wireframe.
Icon Size/Icon Scale Enter the size you want for the icons or the amount by which you want to
scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale
factor of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1 reduces
the size of the icons and a scale factor greater than 1 increases the size of the
icons. Note that these changes take precedence over the size you specify
globally for the modeling database.
174 Adams/View
Edit Background Color

Edit Background Color

Settings -> View Background Color

Lets you create a background color for the View window by setting its red, green, and blue light
percentages and change the background of all view windows to this new color. You cannot add the color
to the preset palette of colors or change the colors in the preset palette.

Learn about Setting View Background Colors.

Note: You can also change the background color using the Edit Color dialog box. Learn about
changing object colors, including the background.

For the option: Do the following:

Displays current color and color as you edit.

R Resets the color to the original color of the background.

Palette of preset Shows the preset colors that appear in the Main toolbox when you select a
colors background color from the Background color tool stack. You cannot change these
colors.
Red Use the slider to change the red values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
 E - I 175
Edit Background Color

For the option: Do the following:

Green Use the slider to change the green values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
Blue Use the slider to change the blue values, as desired. As you change the color
values, the New color box changes to reflect the new values.
176 Adams/View
Edit Color

Edit Color
Settings -> Colors

Allows you to modify the colors used for displaying objects or create a new color.

For the option: Do the following:

Color Select a predefined color.
New Color Displays the Create New Color dialog box so you can define a new color name
in the Modeling database.
Displays the old or default color on the left side. Displays the new color on the
right side and changes shades as you move the sliders below.

Red Use the slider to determine the amount of red to be used in the new color.
Green Use the slider to determine the amount of green to be used in the new color.
Blue Use the slider to determine the amount of blue to be used in the new color.
 E - I 177
Enable or Disable a Range of Modes

Enable or Disable a Range of Modes

Flexible Body Modify dialog box -> range

Lets you disable or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency by entering
a range of values. Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Name Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.
Disable/Enable Select whether or not to disable or enable modes.
frequency/mode number Select whether or not to disable or enable by frequency or mode
number.
between/above/below and Select whether the range of modes to enable or disable is between,
text boxes above, or below the specified values. Then, specify the values between,
above, or below which you want to disable or enable modes.
178 Adams/View
Entering File Names in Text Boxes

Entering File Names in Text Boxes

To enter file names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
• Enter the file name directly in the text box.
• Clear the text box and then double-click to open a selection window.
• Right-click to either:
• Search a database
• Browse a database
 E - I 179
Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

To enter object names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
• Enter the object name directly in the text box.
• Clear the text box and then double-click to open the Database Navigator.
• Right-click to either:
• Pick an object shown on the screen.
• Browse a complete list of available objects.
• Choose from a product-generated list of guesses.
180 Adams/View
Example of Information Window

Example of Information Window

 E - I 181
Execute System Command

Execute System Command

Tools -> System Command Shared Dialog Box
You can execute an operating system command from within Adams/View so that you do not have to leave
the Adams/View window.
You can select to display the results of the command in the Information Window or the Log file. If you
select to display the results of the command in the Information window, you can:
• Clear the window and only view the results of the command.
• Save the results of the command to a file.

If you select to display the results in the log file, you can keep the command results with the other
commands that you execute so that you can cut and paste the information together into a new file.

For the option: Do the following:

Command Enter the operating system command that you want to execute.
Write Output to Command Select if you want the output of the command to be displayed in both
Window and Logfile the Information window and log file.
Write Output to Info Window Select if you want the output of the command to be displayed in the
Information window.
182 Adams/View
Exit and Save?

Exit and Save?

File -> Exit

If you did not save your work, asks you if you want to save your work:
• To save your work and exit Adams/View, select OK. If you want to save the model with a new
name in the current directory, enter the new name in the Filename text box.
• To exit without saving your work, select Exit, Don’t Save.
• To continue using Adams/View, select Cancel.

Note: If you accidentally exit without saving your work, you can use the Adams/View Log file
(aview.log) to recover your work. Learn about Using the Adams/View Log File.
 E - I 183
Export Dialog Box

Export Dialog Box

File -> Export

Exports data from Adams/PostProcessor. You can export the following formats:
• Numeric Data
• Spreadsheet Data
• Table
• DAC/RPC (For Adams/Durability only; see the Adams/Durability online help.)
• HTML Report
184 Adams/View
Export - Adams/PostProcessor Files

Export - Adams/PostProcessor Files

File -> Export -> Adams/PostProcessor Files Shared Dialog Box
Exports data from Adams/View for use with a stand-alone version of Adams/PostProcessor. When you
export Adams/PostProcessor files, Adams/View generates a command file (.cmd) and all required
supporting files, including:
• Dataset (.adm) file
• Shell (.shl) files needed for geometry representation
• Matrix (.mtx) files for use with the .adm file, if needed

The command file also contains commands to read in the other files when you import the command file
into Adams/PostProcessor.

Note: The simulation results are not referenced in the command file. You must import the
analysis files (graphics, request, and results files) separately into Adams/PostProcessor.
For more information, see Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files.

Adams/View names the command file ModelName_to_ppt.cmd, where ModelName is the name of the
model. For example, if the model from which you are exporting data is suspension14, then the command
file is suspension14_to_ppt.cmd.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Adams/PostProcessor Files.
Model Name Enter the name of the model from which you want the data exported.
 E - I 185
Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

Export - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

File -> Export -> Adams/Solver Analysis, Graphics, Request, or Results Shared Dialog Box
Exports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during
a single Simulation. You can export them as a set or individually. The files include:
• Graphics
• Request
• Results

Adams/View exports only a set of output files generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the analysis file or files. You do not need to
enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extensions for you.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation whose data you want to export.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

186 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

File -> Export -> Adams/Solver Dataset Shared Dialog Box

Exporting a model as an Adams/Solver dataset is a convenient method for transferring a model from one
computer platform to another. When you export a model as an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View
preserves the database names in your model by writing them as comments in the Adams/Solver dataset.
This allows you to import the dataset at a later date and still have the original database names.
Your model does not have to be complete to be exported as an Adams/Solver dataset. If you want to check
your model for completeness and consistency, verify your model before exporting the dataset.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the dataset file. You do not need to enter
the file extension .adm, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse
for the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the
File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog
box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Use Parasolid Select either:

• As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a

Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The
command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other
geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined
using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.
• Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of
using Adams/View command language. This includes cylinders, shells,
Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not include dynamic outlines, spring-
damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics continue to be
defined in the Adams/View command language.
Write to To specify where the text of the dataset is to be written and displayed, select
Window/Write to File one of the following:
Only
• Write to Window - To display the dataset in an information window,
as well as save it in a file.
• Write to File Only - To only write the dataset to a file and not display
it in an information window.
 E - I 187
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

For the option: Do the following:

Indent Spaces Enter the number of spaces used to indent the continuation line of a statement.
The allowed values are between 0 and 4 spaces. (Five or more spaces make the
subsequent text on the line a comment.) The default is 1 space.

Adams/View does not indent the text for continuation lines of function
expressions. It assumes that you will add any leading spaces that you want for
indentation of functions. Any indentation Adams/View would enter would
interfere with the indention used to show nesting of IFfunctions. Adams/View
does, however, indent the argument list of a user function if it requires more
than one line.

Adams/View precedes the values of an argument that has multiple string values
separated by colons with a comma and indents the values if you place them on
a continuation line. This applies to the PART/EXACT and COUPLER/TYPE
arguments. It does not apply to the REQUEST/TITLE argument, which doesn't
allow embedded spaces. Instead, Adams/View precedes a REQUEST/TITLE
argument with a comma.
Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places written after the decimal point for real
numbers
Zero Threshold Enter the threshold value for numbers being written to an Adams/Solver
dataset. When Adams/View writes a number that has an absolute value smaller
than the zero threshold value, it writes it as zero. The zero threshold value is
independent of units.
Significant Digits Control how many significant digits of a real number Adams/View retains
during round off. The default is 10. The number you enter is distinct from the
number of places actually printed for real numbers, which the Decimal Places
value controls. Be sure to select Round Off Values so rounding off occurs.
Scientific Notation Specify where the format for real numbers switches from a fixed point format
to scientific notation. Enter the lower and upper power of 10. Separate the
values with commas (,). The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that
Adams/View writes any number less than or equal to 1.0E-04 or greater than
or equal to 1.0E+05 in scientific notation.
188 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

For the option: Do the following:

As Found In Original Control the organization of the statements within the dataset by specifying one
File/ of the following:
Put Markers Where
Used/ • As Found In Original File - Maintains the order of the statements in the
Keep Markers with original dataset when Adams/View writes the model back to an existing
Parts dataset. To indicate which statements came from the original dataset and
which statements are new, Adams/View writes any new statements that you
have added to the original model after all the original statements, and also
labels both sections.
• Put Markers Where Used - Writes the marker statements immediately
after statements that depend on the markers. These include the statements:
BEAM, BUSHING, FIELD, SFORCE, SPRINGDAMPER, VFORCE,
VTORQUE, GFORCE, NFORCE, JOINT, JPRIM, REQUEST,
MREQUEST, CVCV, and PTCV.
If none of these types of statements use a marker, Adams/View writes the
marker statement after the part statement to which it belongs.
Adams/View writes graphic statements that belong to a single part after the
markers for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or
more parts after all the part statements are written.
It writes statements of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs,
BUSHINGs, as a group, in order of ascending Adams IDs.
• Keep Markers with Parts - Writes the markers that belong to a part as a
group after the part to which they belong. In addition, Adams/View writes
the graphic statements that belong to a single part after the marker
statements for that part, and writes graphic statements that connect one or
more parts after all the part statements. Adams/View also writes statements
of the same type, such as JOINTs, JPRIMs, and BUSHINGs, as a group, in
order of ascending Adams IDs.
In general, Adams/View writes any statements that depend on other statements
before the statements that depend on them. For example, it writes marker
statements before the joint statements that use them, and writes joint statements
before any coupler statements that connect them.
Roundoff Values To control the numerical rounding of real numbers, select Roundoff Values to
enable the rounding of real numbers. When you enable the rounding of
numbers, Adams/View retains the numbers of places you enter in the
Significant Digits text box.
Write Default Values Select to set whether or not arguments that have default values are written
explicitly into the dataset. The default is to not write default values into the
dataset.
 E - I 189
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

For the option: Do the following:

Multiple Select to write as many parameters and their values that fit within 80 columns
parameters/Line for each line of the statement. For example:

PART/1, QG = 0.5, 0, 0, REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D, MASS = 1.2

If you do not select Multiple Parameters/Line, Adams/View writes only one
parameter and its values on each line of the statement. For example:

PART/1 ,
QG = 0.5, 0, 0 ,
REULER = 0D, 90D, 0D ,
MASS = 1.2
Upper Case Text/ To control the case of the text of statement keywords and parameters, select one
Lower Case Text, of the following:
Mixed Case Text
• Upper Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in uppercase letters (BEAM). Uppercase is the default.
• Lower Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in lowercase (beam).
• Mixed Case Text- Text for keywords and parameters in the dataset are
written in initial case (Beam). The first character of each word is in
uppercase, and the rest are in lowercase.
Note that the text case control does not affect certain types of string-valued
arguments. For a listing of the arguments to which the text case does not apply,
see Arguments Not Affected by Case Control.
Include Trailing Select Include Trailing Zeros to print all the digits after the decimal point
Zeros whether they are zero or not. If you do not select Include Trailing Zeros,
Adams/View drops any zeros at the end of the fractional part of the number
leaving the last digit as a non-zero digit.
Export All Graphics Select Export All Graphics to write all the graphics into the dataset. If this
option is not checked, only the dataset graphics that are supported by the solver
(such as BOX) and those that are referenced by contacts, are included in the
dataset.
Verify Model Select to verify the model before exporting

Arguments Not Affected by Case Control

The text case control selection in the Export Adams/Solver Dataset dialog box does not affect certain
types of string-valued arguments. Adams/View writes the following arguments into the dataset the way
they were stored in your modeling database:
TIRE:
TPF and RDF RESULTS:
COMMENT MATRIX:
FILE and NAME MADATA:
190 Adams/View
Export - Adams/Solver Dataset

COMMENT STRING:
STRING REQUEST:
TITLE, COMMENT, FUNCTION, and F1 to F8 MREQUEST:
COMMENT UCON:
FUNCTION MOTION:
FUNCTION FIELD:
FUNCTION SFORCE:
FUNCTION GFORCE:
FUNCTION VFORCE:
FUNCTION VTORQUE:
FUNCTION VARIABLE:
FUNCTION CURVE:
FUNCTION DIFF:
FUNCTION GSE:
FUNCTION SENSOR:
FUNCTION:
 E - I 191
Export - Adams/Solver Script Files

Export - Adams/Solver Script Files

File -> Export -> Adams/Solver Script Shared Dialog Box
Exports an existing Simulation Script to an Adams/Solver script file (*.acf)

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Script
File Name File Name is optional. If not specified, a file with the same name as that of the
script, will be exported to Adams/View working directory. You do not need to
enter the file extension, because Adams/View adds the extension (.acf) for you.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name and the file name in the File Name
text box. To browse for the directory in which you want to export the command
file, right-click the File Name text box, and then select Browse to display the
File Selection dialog box.
Sim Script Name An existing Simulation Script to export.
192 Adams/View
Export - Adams/View Command File

Export - Adams/View Command File

File -> Export -> Adams/View Command File Shared Dialog Box
When you export a model as a command file, Adams/View creates a file containing all the commands
necessary to create the selected model. Exporting a model as an Adams/View command file is helpful
when you want to move a model from one type of computer platform to another. Note that the order of
commands in the command file may not be in the same order as you entered them in Adams/View.
Saving a model as a command file does not save your simulation results or analysis files. To save your
analysis files, set up Adams/View so that it saves the analysis files.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the command file. You do not need to enter
the file extension .cmd, because Adams/View assumes that is the file extension.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box. To browse for
the directory in which you want to export the command file, right-click the File
Name text box, and then select Browse to display the File Selection dialog box.
Model Name Enter the name of the model you want exported as a command file.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Use Parasolid Select either:

• As is - Adams/View exports any geometry that was imported from a

Parasolid file out to a Parasolid file when it writes the command file. The
command file references the newly created Parasolid file. All other
geometry (for example, cylinder, shell, and spring-dampers) are defined
using Adams/View command language and included in the command file.
• Full - Adams/View exports all static geometry to Parasolid files instead of
using Adams/View command language. This includes cylinders, shells,
Parasolid, solids, and so on. It does not include dynamic outlines, spring-
damper graphics, and graphic force vectors. These graphics continue to be
defined in the Adams/View command language.
 E - I 193
Export - CAD (IGES, STEP, DXG, DWG, and Parasolid)

Export - CAD (IGES, STEP, DXG, DWG, and Parasolid)

File -> Export -> IGES, STEP, DXG/DWG, or Parasolid Shared Dialog Box
Exports CAD geometry using Adams/Exchange. It writes the geometric definition of an Adams model
or part from to the specified CAD file format. You can then read the CAD file into a CAD program.
You can export an entire model, an individual part of a model, or a model as it exists at a particular
simulation time, which is helpful for transferring position data of an Adams model to a drafting program
to prepare drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to type of geometry that you want to export (IGES, STEP, DXF, DWG,
or Parasolid).
File Name Enter the name of the file that you want to create. The file will contain the
exported CAD geometry. You do not need to enter a file extension.
Adams/Exchange automatically generates the appropriate extension for the
type of geometry you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting IGES
geometry, Adams/Exchange adds an .igs extension.
File Type For Parasolid geometry only, set to the type of Parasolid geometry file to
create.
Part/Model/Analysis • Select the geometry that you want to export, and then enter the name of
Name the geometry in the text box next to the pull-down menu. You can select:
• Model Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View model to be written to
the CAD file. Adams/Exchange places each rigid body in the model on a
separate level. All geometry written to the IGES file is defined with
respect to the global coordinate system of the Adams/View model.
• Part Name - Lets you specify the Adams/View part to be written to the
CAD file. Adams/Exchange writes all the geometry owned by the part
to the CAD file. It defines all geometry in the CAD file with respect to
the part coordinate system.
• Analysis Name - Lets you export a model at a particular simulation
frame (time) of a particular analysis. This is helpful for transferring
position data of an Adams/View model to a drafting program to prepare
drawings of the mechanism at various states of operation.
Adams/Exchange writes all parts and geometry to the CAD file in the
same relative position as they appear in a single frame display.
194 Adams/View
Export - DAC or RPC III

Export - DAC or RPC III

File -> Export -> DAC/RPC III Shared Dialog Box
You can export either DAC Format or RPC III Format request files from Adams/View after a simulation
completes. This technique does not require you to set up requests before running the simulation.
By definition, results output to an RPC III or DAC file must have constant time steps. If the results data
being output includes non-constant time steps, Adams/View issues a warning, and the time axis of the
data will be warped so that the time interval is constant.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to DAC or RPC3.
File to Read Enter the name of the DAC or RPC III file that you want to export.
Results Data Select the result set components you want to export. The result set components
can come from results sets, measures, or requests. You can only have one
result set per DAC file. To select the data, right-click the Result Data text box,
point to Result_Set_Component, and then select Browse to display the
Database Navigator.
 E - I 195
Export - FEA Loads

Export - FEA Loads

File -> Export -> FEA Loads Shared Dialog Box
Export FEA load information.
Before exporting FEA load information, you must run a Simulation of your model.
Learn about:
• About Exporting FEA Loads
• Process for Exporting FEA Loads
196 Adams/View
Export - FEA Loads

• Limitations for Exporting FEA Loads

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to FEA Loads.
File Format Select the file format for the loads file that you want Adams/View to
create.
Inertia Clear the selection of this option if you would like to output external
loads only.

• When selected, Adams/View outputs inertia loads in addition to

external loads. Inertia loads include linear acceleration, angular
acceleration, and angular velocity of the part or flexible body.
Reaction loads include applied and reaction forces acting on the
body.
• When cleared, Adams/View specifies a load imbalance for the
body, and you must employ a technique, such as inertia relief in
the finite element program, to recover the inertia loads based on
external loads.
File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. If you want the file written to a
directory other than the one from which you are running Adams/View,
enter the path name in the File Name text box.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Analysis Enter the simulation containing the information you want to export.
Loads on Rigid Body/ Select whether the body whose load information you want to export is a
Loads on Flexible Body rigid or flexible body.
Rigid Body FEA origin For a rigid body only, enter the marker to which all load information will
marker be relative. The marker location and orientation must correspond to the
origin of the part in the FEA program.
Flexible Body Name For a flexible body only, enter the name of the flexible body. Adams/View
assumes that its FEA origin is the same as it was when the flexible body
was defined.
You can skip the next two options in the following cases:

• For flexible bodies because the node IDs at each load location are known.
• For rigid bodies if the node IDs are not available. Then, the FEA input file will contain the
locations (with respect to the FEA coordinate reference) and Adams ID label of the marker at
each load location. You will need to edit the file, however, replacing these labels with the
actual node IDs, once they are known.
 E - I 197
Export - FEA Loads

For the option: Do the following:

Add Load Points to Nodes Select to have Adams/View calculate the points on the part where forces
Table are applied.

Adams/View calculates the load points and places the points and their
locations in the Nodes table of the File Export dialog box. The node
coordinates are displayed relative to the FEA origin of the rigid or
flexible body. You might need to resize the File Export dialog box to see
all the point locations. See Example of Nodes Table.
Node_id/Scan file for IDs For rigid bodies only, assign node IDs to the load points Adams/View
found, if desired. You can do one of the following:

• Type in the node IDs in the Node Id column fields.

• Select Scan file for IDs to have Adams/View read in a text file
containing the node IDs. For more information using a text file,
see Process for Exporting FEA Loads.
Because the loads file is a text file, you can always add the node IDs to
the file as you add the load case to your FEA dataset.

Note: For flexible bodies, Adams/View automatically assigns node

IDs to the load points based on the actual node IDs of the
flexible body at these load locations.
Output at times Do one of the following depending on the load information you want
Adams/View to export:

• To generate a complete loads history, leave the Output at times text

box blank. Adams/View exports load information at every output step
in the simulation. This is the default setting.
• To generate only load information for certain output times, enter the
desired output times, separated by commas (,) in the Output at times
text box. Adams/View exports a single load case at the time closest to
the requested time.
For ABAQUS, ANSYS, and NASTRAN, you can also enter a tolerance
(+ or - a value) for the output times. For example, if you requested output
at time steps 2 and 5 with a tolerance of 0.1, Adams/View generates a load
case for all output steps between 1.9 and 2.1 and 4.9 and 5.1.

For DAC and RPC III, you can enter a start output time and an end output
time.
198 Adams/View
Export - FEA Loads

Caution: Note that loads are output in the Adams/View modeling units. These units must be
consistent with those specified in the finite element model or the results of the FE analysis
that includes the Adams loads will be incorrect. After completing the Export FEA Loads
dialog box, Adams/View displays the current modeling units and gives you a chance to
modify them before continuing with the FEA loads export.
 E - I 199
Export - HTML Report

Export - HTML Report

File -> Export -> HTML Report

Exports data in the current session of Adams/PostProcessor as HTML pages for viewing by others in your
organization. It also creates
• Plots and animations as png or jpg images
• Movies of animations
• Information on the parts, constraints, forces, and more in the selected models. This is the same
information that appears when you select Info.
When you export an HTML report, Adams/PostProcessor creates main homepage with a left frame
containing a tree of information in your model. Learn about the resulting HTML pages.

Tab Link
Files Export - HTML Report - FIles
Title Page Export - HTML Report - Title Page
Pages Export - HTML Report - Pages
Models Export - HTML Report - Models
200 Adams/View
Export - HTML Report - FIles

Export - HTML Report - FIles

File -> Export -> HTML Report -> Files

Defines the name of the files in which to export Adams/PostProcessor data and where to place the files.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name you want applied to each of the resulting HTML files and
style sheets.
Output Directory Enter where you want the resulting HTML files and folders to be stored.
 E - I 201
Export - HTML Report - Models

Export - HTML Report - Models

File -> Export -> HTML Report -> Models

Selects the models for which you want to export information. When you export model information, you
output information about the model objects: parts, constraints, forces, measures, requests, and assembly
objects. Adams/PostProcessor creates a folder for each model and objects in the model, grouped by type.

For the option: Do the following:

Models Enter the name of the models.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

202 Adams/View
Export - HTML Report - Pages

Export - HTML Report - Pages

File -> Export -> HTML Report -> Pages

Defines the pages of data you want to export and in which formats to publish them.

For the option: Do the following:

Pages Select the pages of plots and animations you want exported. If you select Range,
enter the pages you want included.
Image Format For the pages of plots, enter the image format in which to store the pages of plots.
You can select png or jpg.
Image Width and Enter the pixel size of the exported pages. By default, Adams/PostProcessor
Height maintains the aspect ratio of the images so if you enter a value for width,
Adams/PostProcessor automatically calculates the height based on the current
aspect ratio, and the reverse. See Maintain Aspect Ratio below. If you leave both
text boxes blank, Adams/PostProcessor uses their default size in
Adams/PostProcessor.
Maintain Aspect Clear to change the proportions of the page sizes, and then enter new values for
Ratio Image Width and Height (see above).
Export Select to export the animations as a movie. Clear to just save an image of the first
Animations frame of the animation in the same format selected in Image Format.
Movie Format Select the type of movie to export the animation as. You can select: Compressed
.avi, Uncompressed .avi, .jpg, .mpg, or .png (AVI format is only available on
Windows).

• If you select .jpg or .png, Adams/Processor, exports each frame as an png or

jpg file, and then plays them as a movie.
• If you select compressed AVI format, set the frame rate, interval between key
frames, and quality (percentage of compression). The default is 75%
compression with each key frame 500 frames apart, and a frame rate of 10
seconds per frame.
• If you select .mpg, set either of the following:
• Compress the file using P frames - Turning off the compression using P
frames ensures your movie plays in many playback programs, including
as xanim. It results, however, in a much larger file (up to 4 times as large).
• Round size to multiples of 16 - Some playback programs require the
pixel height and width to be multiplies of 16. Turning this option on
ensures that you movie plays in many playback programs.
 E - I 203
Export - HTML Report - Title Page

Export - HTML Report - Title Page

File -> Export -> HTML Report -> Title Page

Defines what you want displayed on the title page to provide basic information about the exported data.
The title page appears when you first display the homepage. You can also enter an image to appear in the
upper right corner of the title page. The image must be a format supported in Web browsers (.gif, .jpg,
.png).

For the option: Do the following:

Title Enter a title for the published data.
Author Enter the author of the data.
Date Enter the date the data was published. Adams/PostProcessor enters the
current date by default.
Comment Enter any comments about the data.
Image File Enter the path and file of an image to appear in the upper right corner.
204 Adams/View
Export - Numeric Test Data

Export - Numeric Test Data

File -> Export -> Numeric Test Data Shared Dialog Box

You can export the data that Adams generates during Simulations for use in other applications.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Numeric Data.
Result Set Comp. Name Enter the name of the results set component or components that you
want to export.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Sort By Set to either:

• Value to sort the values in the result set by the magnitude.

• Time (the default) to sort the values in the result set by the
simulation time associated with the value.
Order Specify the order in which you want the values listed in the file. Select
either ascending or descending.
File Name Specify the name of the file in which you want to save the data. If you
want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you
are running Adams, enter the path name.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Above Value/ Enter limits of values to be exported:
Below Value
• Above Value to specify the highest value to be exported.
• Below Value to specify the lowest value to be exported.
Write to Terminal Select to display the data in an Adams Information window as well as
save it in a file. If you do not select Write to Terminal, Adams only
writes the data to a file.
 E - I 205
Export - Shell

Export - Shell
File -> Export -> Shell Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams geometry for use as shell geometry in other applications.

For the option: Do the following:

Shell Name Enter the name of the shell object that you want to export.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

File Name Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the geometry.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

206 Adams/View
Export - Spreadsheet Data

Export - Spreadsheet Data

File -> Export - Spread Sheet Shared Dialog Box
You can export an Adams/View result set to a file in spreadsheet format. By exporting the result set to a
spreadsheet, you can view and manipulate the information in spreadsheet software packages including
formatting it or performing additional calculations on it. Tabs separate the data in the exported file.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Spread Sheet.
File Name Enter the name you want to assign to the spreadsheet file. By default, Adams
creates the spreadsheet with a .tab extension.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Result Set Name Enter the name of the results set that you want to export.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

 E - I 207
Export - Table

Export - Table
File -> Export -> Table

Exports plotting data as tables (HTML or spreadsheet format).

For the option: Do the following:

File name Enter the name of the file in which to store the table data.
Plot Enter the name of the plot containing the data. Tips on entering object
names in text boxes.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Format Select either html or spreadsheet.
208 Adams/View
Export - Wavefront

Export - Wavefront
File -> Export -> Wavefront Shared Dialog Box
You can export Adams/View graphics and motion data to Wavefront to help you create animations in
Wavefront Technologies advanced photorealistic rendering product, the Advanced Visualizer. You can
also select to only export the model geometry, in which case Adams/View only creates object files.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Wavefront File.
Model Name/ Select either depending on what information you want to export, and then enter the
Analysis Name name of the model or analysis you want exported in the text box next to the pull-
down menu:

• If you select Model Name, you export only your model geometry.
• If you select Analysis, you export all motion and geometry data. You can enter
multiple models or simulations by separating the names with commas.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
 E - I 209
Extrusion Tool

Extrusion Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Extrusion Tool

Creates an Extrusion. To create an extrusion, you can specify points or select a curve that defines the
extrusion’s profile:

The Extrusion tool extrudes the points or curve along the z-axis of the screen or Working grid, if it is
turned on. When you specify points, you can also specify the direction along the z-axis that the Extrusion
tool extrudes the profile. You can also select to extrude along a path.
You can select to create the extrusion using the Analytical Method or Non-analytical Method.
210 Adams/View
Extrusion Tool

Learn about Creating an Extrusion.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the extrusion to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the extrusion to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence the
simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car driving
around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be added to
ground.
Create profile by Select how you want to define the shape of the extrusion:

• Points: Lets you select points.

• Curve: Lets you select existing curve geometry.
Closed If creating the extrusion based on points, select to create a closed profile. If
you close the profile, Adams/View creates a solid shape. If you leave the
profile open, Adams/View creates a skin that has no mass properties.
Forward/ Select the direction you want the profile to be extruded relative to the global
About Center/ coordinate system or working grid. You can set the direction to one of the
Backward/ following:
Along Path
• Forward - Extrude the profile along the +z-axis.
• About Center - Extrude the profile half the depth in both the +z and
-z directions.
• Backward - Extrude the profile along the -z-axis.
• Along Path - Select the path along which to extrude the wire
geometry.
Learn more about Extruding Construction Geometry Along a Path. See an
Example of Extrusion Directions.
Length Enter the depth of the extrusion. (Not available when you select Along Path,
as explained above.)
Analytical Select to create an extrusion using the Analytical Method. Clear to use the
Non-analytical Method.
 E - I 211
Extrusion Tool

Note: After you draw the extrusion, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the extrusion, hotpoints appear at every vertex in the profile and at the point directly
opposite from where you began drawing the profile. If you used the analytical method,
hotpoints appear along the curves that define the extrusion. Use the vertex hotpoints to
modify the profile of the extrusion and the opposite hotpoint to control the depth of the
extrusion. See Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also use the extrusion modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. See Using Dialog Boxes to
Precisely Modify Geometry and using the Location Table.
212 Adams/View
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

Edit -> Plot -> FFT

Constructs a two-dimensional Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot.

You can either determine the magnitude (Mag), the phase (Phase), or determine the power spectral
density (PSD) based on Welch's method.

For the option: Do the following:

Curve Name Displays the name of the curve you are plotting.
Y-Axis Select one of the following:

• Mag
• Phase
• PSD
Start Time Enter the start time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
End Time Enter the end time on the curve for which you want the signal
processing performed.
Window Type Select the type of window type you want to use. Learn more about the
window functions.
Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.

Tips on Selecting Points.

The following option is only available if you selected Mag or Phase.
Detrend Input Data Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least
square fit from the data stream.
The following options are only available if you selected PSD.
Number of Segments/Segment Enter the number of segments, which means that the signal will be
Length split in that many segments of equal length (window length).

Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to
as the window length.
Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal
samples are used.
 E - I 213
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 3D

Edit -> Plot -> FFT 3D

Constructs a three-dimensional (3D) Fast fourier transform (FFT) plot by performing signal processing
on individual slices of a curve. You define a slice size, and Adams/PostProcessor slides this over a range
of a curve, overlapping the slices as specified. Each slice of the curve becomes a row in the 3D plot
surface.

For the option: Do the following:

Curve Name Displays the name of the curve you are plotting.
Y-Axis Select one of the following:

• Mag
• Phase
• PSD
Start Time/End Time Enter the start and end time to define the entire range of the curve on
which you want signal processing performed.
Time Slice Size Enter the width of a slice of the curve on which to perform signal
processing
Percentage Overlap Enter the percentage amount the slices can overlap.
Window Type Select the type of window you want to use.
Points/Points (Power of 2) Select the number of points to be used for the FFT.

Tips on Selecting Points

The following option is only available if you selected Mag or Phase.
Detrend Input Data Select if you want to detrend the signal. This subtracts the linear least
square fit from the data stream.
The following options are only available if you selected PSD.
Number of Segments/ Enter the number of equal segments into which the signal will be split.
Segment Length
Or, you can enter the segment length directly. This is often referred to as
the window length.
Overlap Points Enter the number of overlaps, which indicates how many signal samples
are used.
214 Adams/View
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

If you selected: Set the following options:

Loads on Rigid Body 1. In the R Marker text box, enter the rigid body marker to be the
reference coordinate system to output loads. Because Adams/Solver
resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate system
of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic
coordinate system of the part's finite element (FE) model.
2. In the Peak Slice text box, select that FE model load data are to be
output only at those time steps where the specified peak load
occurred in the simulation. When you set the Time options in Step
5 of the procedure, Adams/View only checks the time steps within
those specifications for the peak load. You can specify one or more
of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, or GMAG.
Loads on Flex Body • Select Peak Slice to output FE model data only at those time steps
where the specified peak load occurred in the simulation. When
you set the Time options in Step 5, Adams/View only checks the
time steps within those specifications for the peak load. You can
specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, or GMAG.
Modal Deformation • In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data
Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE
modal basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
 E - I 215
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

If you selected: Set the following options:

Nodal Deformation • In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data
Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE
model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
• In the Nodes text box, enter the node numbers of a flexible body
whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list,
Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is
specified that does not belong to the flexible body.
• In the Datum text box, enter a node ID of the flexible body to be
the datum of the nodal displacements. Adams/Solver computes all
nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do not specify a
datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of
nodal displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified
node does not belong to the flexible body.
216 Adams/View
FEMDATA Output Dialog Box Options Table

If you selected: Set the following options:

Stress and Strain You can select to either output the stress/strain on nodes or hotspots:

To output them on nodes:

1. In the Nodes text box, enter the node numbers of a flexible body
whose data is to be output. If you do not specify a node list,
Adams/View exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node ID is
specified that does not belong to the flexible body.
2. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the
model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not
specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA
coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the
orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate
system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.

To define hotspots:
1. In the Hotspots text box, enter the number of hotspots to locate and
output. With this option, a text file containing a tab-delimited table
of hotspot information, such as node ID, maximum value, time
when the maximum value occurred, and location, is generated.
2. From the option menu, specify the value of stress/strain in
determining hotspots from one of Von Mises, Max Prin., Min Prin.,
Max Shear, Normal-X, Normal-Y, Normal-Z, Shear-XY, Shear-
YZ, or Shear-ZX. For more information, see the FEMDATA
statement.
3. In the Radius text box, enter a radius that defines the spherical
extent of each hotspot. A default value of 0.0 (zero) means that all
nodes in the flexible body will be hotspot candidates.
4. In the R Marker text box, enter a coordinate reference marker in the
model that will be used to transform the stress or strain data. If not
specified, the stress or strain will be output in the basic FEA
coordinate system of the flexible body (LPRF). This option can be
useful when correlating strain gauge data from a physical test. If the
orientation of the strain gauge does not match the FEA coordinate
system, you can reference a marker whose orientation does match.
 E - I 217
Field ElementTool

Field ElementTool
Build -> Forces -> Field Element Tool

Creates a Field element.

Learn more about:
• Field Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
218 Adams/View
File Export

File Export
File -> Export Shared Dialog Box

Exports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
Learn about exporting:
• Adams/Solver Dataset
• Adams/Solver Analysis Files (Graphics, Requests, and Results)
• Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)
• Adams/View Command Files
• Numeric Data
• CAD (STEP, IGES, DXG/DWG, Parasolid) (Adams/Exchange only)
• Wavefront
• Shell Geometry
• FEA Loads
• Spreadsheet Data
• Adams/PostProcessor
• DAC/RPC III
 E - I 219
File Import

File Import
File -> Import Shared Dialog Box

Imports modeling data in a wide variety of formats so you can exchange modeling data among different
Adams products, as well as with other software manufacturer’s products.
Learn about importing:
• Adams/View command files
• Adams/Solver datasets
• Adams/Solver analysis files
• Adams/Solver Script files (*.acf)
• Test data
• STEP, IGES, DXF, DWG (Adams/Exchange only)
• Parasolid (Adams/Exchange only)
• Wavefront files
• Stereolithography and Render
• Shell
• DAC and RPC III files
220 Adams/View
File Import - Adams/PPT

File Import - Adams/PPT

File -> Import

Imports data into Adams/PostProcessor. In addition to importing the same data you can import into
Adams/View, Adams/PostProcessor also imports Reports and plot configuration files for template-based
products.

To import standard data:

• See the Adams/View File Import dialog box.

To import a report:
1. From the File menu, point to Import, and then select Report.
2. Enter the name of the file to import.
3. Select OK.

To load a report in a viewport:

• Right-click the background of a viewport, and then select Load Report.

To import a plot configuration file for template-based products:

• See Creating Plots Using a Plot Configuration File.
 E - I 221
Files

Files
Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Files

Selecting Files as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box, lets you set advanced options
for Adams/Solver analysis files.

For the option: Do the following:

Request Tables Specify whether or not Adams/View prints time-response-request tables in the
Tabular output file.

• If you set to On, Adams/View writes tables for each request in your model.
• If you set to Off, Adams/View does not write the tables. If your simulation
has many output steps or you have many requests, specifying Off results in a
much smaller tabular output file and conserves disk space.
Separator Specify whether or not Adams writes separators to the request, graphics, results,
and tabular output files when you modify the model topology in the middle of a
Simulation. When running a Scripted simulation, you can change the model
topology by adding Adams commands to your script file to activate an element,
deactivate an element, change a marker position, or change the type or point of
application of a force or constraint.

• If you set to On (which is the default), Adams/Solver reads the analysis

information into Adams/View, one analysis for each block of output between
the separators.
• If you set to Off, Adams/Solver reads the analysis information into
Adams/View as a single simulation. This allow you to plot or animate the
simulation from beginning to end.
Yaw Pitch Roll Set to Yes to specify that rotational values are to be output in yaw, pitch, and roll
coordinates, rather than in psi, theta, and phi coordinates. First Adams rotates
about the z-axis, then about the new negative y-axis (y'), and then about the
second new x-axis (x"). Note that Yaw Pitch Roll only affects rotational
displacement output. Adams/View always outputs angular velocities and
accelerations as vectors, with orthogonal x, y, and z components.
222 Adams/View
Fillet Tool

Fillet Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Fillet Tool

Creates rounded (filleted) edges and corners

You can think of creating filleted edges as rolling a ball over the edges or corners of the geometry to round
them.
 E - I 223
Fillet Tool

When filleting an edge or corner, you can specify a start and an end radius for the fillet to create a variable
fillet:

Adams/View begins creating the variable fillet using the start radius and then slowly increases or
decreases the size of the fillet until it reaches the end radius. Using the ball analogy again, Adams/View
starts rounding edges and corners using one size ball and finishes using a different size.

Note: You will get different results when you fillet one edge at a time than when you fillet all
edges at once. Also, you may not be able to fillet an edge if an adjoining edge has already
been filleted. It depends on the complexity of the filleting.

Learn about:
224 Adams/View
Fillet Tool

• Chamfering and Filleting Objects

• Chamfer Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Radius Enter the radius for the fillet.
End Radius To create a variable fillet, enter the end radius. The Fillet tool uses the value you
enter for radius as the starting radius of the variable fillet.
 E - I 225
Fixed Joint Tool

Fixed Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Fixed Joint Tool

Creates a fixed joint that locks two parts together so they cannot move with respect to each other. The
effect is similar to defining two parts as a single part. If you want to have the two parts move relative to
each other in a future Simulation, simply delete the fixed joint and use another type of joint.

For a fixed joint, the location and orientation of the joint often do not affect the outcome of the simulation.
In these cases, you can place the joint at a location where the graphic icon is easily visible. However,
occasionally the placement of the fixed joint can allow force moments to become quite large depending
on where you place the joint, as shown in this example. In this case, be sure to place it where you get the
results you want.
226 Adams/View
Fixed Joint Tool

Learn about Creating Idealized Joints.

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want to connect the joint to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
Learn about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want to orient the joint:
Pick Geometry Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
 E - I 227
Flexible Body Mode Filter

Flexible Body Mode Filter

Right-click flexible body -> Modify (shortcut: Double-click) -> Mode Filter

Lets you select a filter type to remove modes from the animation display. By default, all enabled modes
are used to generate nodal displacements for each flexible body during animations. To increase animation
performance, Adams/Flex has three filters that let you remove graphically insignificant modes for
animations. A mode that is filtered out is excluded from the modal superposition and any contribution to
the deformation of the body is ignored. Note that these modes are not filtered out for numeric operations,
such as signal processing or xy plotting.

For the option: Do the following:

Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body.
Filter Modes By Select one of the following:

• None - Includes all modes for computing the graphics display.

• Frequency - Excludes any mode that is activated above the specified
frequency.
• Min Displacement - Excludes any mode that does not contribute the
minimum displacement specified for at least one vertex of the flexible
body. For example, if you are viewing the animation of a vehicle driving
down the road, it is unlikely that you would be able to see deformations of
0.5 mm or less. Therefore, if you set a mode filter value of 0.5, any mode
that contributes less then 0.5 is considered insignificant and is ignored for
animations. This calculation is performed at each frame of the animation,
allowing the set of significant modes to change throughout the simulation.
• Percentage - Determines the maximum displacement contributed by all
modes, and excludes any mode that doesn't contribute displacement of one
vertex at least as significant as a percentage of the maximum. For example,
setting the percentage filter at 15% excludes any mode not contributing at
least 15% of the most dominant mode. This calculation is performed for
each frame of the animation, therefore, allowing the set of significant
modes to change throughout the simulation.
Filter Value Enter the frequency, minimum displacement, or percentage for the specified filter.
228 Adams/View
Flexible Body Modify

Flexible Body Modify

Right-click flexible body -> Modify (shortcut: Double-click)

Lets you modify a flexible body. For example, you can change its modal content to improve the efficiency
or accuracy of a Simulation.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Enter the name of the flexible body to modify.
Damping Ratio Do one of the following:

• Accept the default. If you accept the default, Adams/Flex applies non-zero
damping as follows:
• 1% damping for all modes with frequency lower than 100.
• 10% damping for modes with frequency in the 100-1000 range.
• 100% critical damping for modes with frequency above 1000.
• Clear the selection of default, and then either:
• Enter the scalar damping ratio that you want applied to all modes.
• Enter a function. To get help building the function, next to the

Damping Ratio text box, select the More button .

Learn more about Specifying Damping.
Datum Node Set the datum node for which you want deformation color changes to be
relative to using Adams/Flex. Adams/Flex considers the deformation to be
relative to the origin of the flexible body (its local body reference frame
(LBRF) or coordinate system) by default. For example, if you were modeling
a cantilever beam in Adams/Flex, you could specify that deformations should
be relative to the clamped end as is illustrated in the first tutorial, Building and
Simulating a Flexible Model, in Getting Started Using Adams/Flex.

To set the datum node:

1. Clear the selection of LBRF.
2. In the Datum Node text box, enter the number of the desired node.
Tip: To select a node from the screen, right-click the Datum Node
text box, and then select Pick Flexbody Node. Select the node
from the screen. The node number appears in the Datum Node
text box.
 E - I 229
Flexible Body Modify

For the option: Do the following:

Generalized damping Select one:

• Off - Disables the generalized damping.

• Full - Enables the complete generalized damping matrix, including the
effects of a resultant damping force.
• Internal Only - Only enables the portion of the generalized damping
matrix corresponding to the modal coordinates (that is, ignore the
resultant damping force).
Location Click to display the Modify Body - Name and Position dialog box and set the
name, Adams/Solver ID, and location of the flexible body.
Position ICs Click to display the Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions dialog box and set
the initial position for a flexible body before the simulation starts, just as you
can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.
Velocity ICs Click to display the Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions dialog box and set
the initial velocity for a flexible body before the simulation starts just as you
can for any part in Adams/View. You can set how you want Adams/View to
calculate these properties as well as define these properties yourself.
Modal ICs Click to display the Modify Modal ICs dialog box to disable or enable range of
modes using a table. Learn About Flexible Body Modal Content.
Mode Viewing and Animation
Mode Number Enter the number of the mode in the flexible body to view, and then press
Enter. The total number of modes in the flexible body appear to the right of the
Mode Number text box.

When you display a mode, Adams/Flex displays its frequency in the

Frequency text box. Also, when you display a mode, the mode deformations
appear along with the undeformed flexible body. You can turn this off to
display only the deformed mode.

Learn more about Viewing Modes.

Select to display the next mode.

Select to animate the specified mode to see how it deforms. By default, the
animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles. (Use the Cycles text box (described
below) to change the number of cycles.)

Tip: You can also use the Animation tool on the Main toolbox to
animate the entire model containing the flexible body after you've
run a simulation.
230 Adams/View
Flexible Body Modify

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display the previous mode.

Frequency Enter the frequency of the mode you'd like to view, and then press Enter.

The mode closest to the specified frequency appears.

Cycles Enter the number of times Adams/Flex should run the animation. By default,
the animation runs 3 times or through 3 cycles.
Superimpose Clear to display only the mode deformations. Select to display both the mode
deformations and the undeformed flexible body.
Disabling/Enabling Modes (Learn more about Enabling and Disabling Modes.)
Enable/Disable Enable or disable the mode number in the Mode Number text box. If you
disable a mode, its mode number and natural frequency appear in parentheses.
range Click to display the Enable or Disable a Range of Modes dialog box to disable
or enable a group of modes based on either their mode number or frequency.
auto Click to display the Auto Disable Modes by Strain Energy dialog box to disable
or enable modes based on their contribution of strain energy.
Substituting Graphics with an Outline (Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite
Element Mesh.)
full MNF graphics Select to turn on the viewing of the full MNF graphics; clear to turn off the
viewing.
Outline Select to turn on the viewing of the Outline.
Select to sketch an outline.

To sketch the outline:

• Select nodes on the flexible body using the left mouse button.
• When the outline is complete, right-click.
Modifying Modal Formulation
Inertia Modeling Select a formulation option or select Custom. Learn more about the options.

When you select Custom, Adams/Flex displays a Custom Inertial Modeling

dialog box that lets you set up the invariants that you want selected.
Setting Plot Type
 E - I 231
Flexible Body Modify

For the option: Do the following:

Plot Type Select a plot type to view in Adams/Flex:

• Contour - Sets Adams/Flex so that it displays Contour plots. In

addition, you can view contour plots in Adams/PostProcessor.
• Vector - Sets Adams/Flex so that it displays Vector plots.
• None - Sets to display no plots.
• Both - Sets the display of both contour and vector plots.
Learn to set plot types in Adams/PostProcessor.
Mode Filter Select to display the Flexible Body Mode Filter dialog box to exclude nodal
deformations from animations to increase animation performance.
Setting Deformation Scale
Deformation Scale Move the Deformation Scale Factor slider to change the amount by which
Adams/Flex deforms a mode. For greater exaggeration, type a value in the text
box next to the slider. Changing the deformation scale lets you exaggerate
deformations that might otherwise be too subtle to see, or lets you limit the
deformations. The default scale factor is 1.

Note that setting the scale factor to a value other than 1 can make the joints at
the flexible body appear to separate. This is because the motion of a point on a
flexible body is the sum of the deformation that has been scaled and a rigid
body motion that is not scaled.

In addition, if you set the scale to 0, Adams/Flex treats the flexible body as a
rigid body during animations.
Select to add any comments to help you manage and identify the flexible body.
See Comments.

Select to create a flexible body measure. Learn about creating Object Measures
232 Adams/View
Force Create Element Like Friction

Force Create Element Like Friction

Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints.
For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, follow the information for the
Adams/Solver FRICTION statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
 E - I 233
Force Graphics Settings

Force Graphics Settings

Settings -> Force Graphics

Allows you to specify settings for force graphics.

Learn about Setting Up Force Graphics.

For the option: Do the following:

Force Scale Enter the amount by which you want to scale force (straight arrows)
graphics. The default scale is 1.0.
Torque Scale Enter the amount by which you want to scale torque (semi-circular
arrows) graphics. The default scale is 1.0.
Display Numeric Values Select if you want Adams/View to continuously display the magnitudes
for all force and torque graphics during the animation.
Decimal Places Enter the number of decimal places to be written for force graphics
numeric values. The default value is 4.
Always in Foreground Select if you want Adams/View to show force graphics in the foreground
of the model so model geometry does not obscure them.
Always Wireframe Vectors Select if you want Adams/View to show the force graphics in wireframe
render mode even when you are rendering the view in shaded mode.

Note: • If you defined force graphics for any force elements in your model, but do not see the
associated arrows during animation, you should probably increase the appropriate scale
and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until the arrows of interest are visible.
• Conversely, if you see force graphic arrows on the screen, but they are too large or not
completely visible, you should either zoom out, fit your view, or decrease the scale
factor and animate again. Repeat the scaling process until at least the arrows of interest
are completely visible.
234 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Beam

Force Modify Element Like Beam

Right-click beam -> Modify

After you’ve created a beam, you can modify the following:

• Markers between which the beam acts.
• Stiffness and damping values.
• Material properties of the beam, such as its length and area.

Learn more about Beams.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Beam Name Enter the name of the beam to modify.
New Beam Name Enter a new name for the beam, if desired.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the beam. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Enter any comments about the beam that might help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Ixx Enter the torsional constant. The torsional constant is sometimes referred to
as the torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness coefficient. It is expressed
as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is
identical to the polar moment of inertia J= . For thin-walled
sections, open sections, and non-circular sections, you should consult a
handbook.
Iyy/Izz Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam cross
sectional areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second
moment of area about a given axis. They are expressed as unit length to the
fourth power. For a solid circular section, Iyy=Izz= . For thin-
walled sections, open sections, and non-circular sections, you should
consult a handbook.
Area of Cross Section Enter the uniform area of the beam cross-section geometry. The centroidal
axis must be orthogonal to this cross section.
 E - I 235
Force Modify Element Like Beam

For the option: Do the following:

Y Shear Area Ratio/ Z Specify the correction factor (the shear area ratio) for shear deflection in the
Shear Area Ratio y and z direction for Timoshenko beams. If you want to neglect the
deflection due to shear, enter zero in the text boxes.

For the y direction:

where:

• Qy is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a

force in the z direction.
• lz is the cross section dimension in the z direction.
For the z direction:

where:

• Qz is the first moment of cross-sectional area to be sheared by a

force in the y direction.
• Iy is the cross section dimension in the y direction.
• Common values for shear area ratio based on the type of cross
section are:
• Solid rectangular - 6/5
• Solid circular - 10/9
• Thin wall hollow circular - 2
Note: The K1 and K2 terms that are used by MSC.Nastran for defining
the beam properties using PBEAM are the inverse of the y shear
and z shear values that Adams/View uses.
Young's Modulus Enter Young’s modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
Shear Modulus Enter the shear modulus of elasticity for the beam material.
Beam Length Enter the undeformed length of the beam along the x-axis of the J marker
on the reaction body.
236 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Beam

For the option: Do the following:

Damping Ratio/Matrix Select either:
of Damping Terms
• Damping Ratio and enter a damping value to establish a ratio for
calculating the structural damping matrix for the beam. To obtain
the damping matrix, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix
by the value you enter for the damping ratio.
• Matrix of Damping Terms and enter a six-by-six structural
damping matrix for the beam. Because this matrix is symmetric,
you only need to specify one-half of the matrix. The following
matrix shows the values to input:

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to
right. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero
entries; that is, r1 through r21 each default to zero.
The damping matrix should be positive semidefinite. This ensures
that damping does not feed energy into the model. Adams/Solver
does not warn you if the matrix is not positive semidefinite.
 E - I 237
Force Modify Element Like Beam

For the option: Do the following:

I Marker/ J marker Specify the two markers between which to define a beam. The I marker is
on the action body and the J marker is on the reaction body. The J marker
establishes the direction of the force components.

By definition, the beam lies along the positive x-axis of the J marker.
Therefore, the I marker must have a positive x displacement with respect to
the J marker when viewed from the J marker. In its undeformed
configuration, the orientation of the I and the J markers must be the same.

When the x-axes of the markers defining a beam are not collinear, the beam
deflection and, consequently, the force corresponding to this deflection are
calculated. To minimize the effect of such misalignments, perform a static
equilibrium at the start of the simulation.

When the beam element angular deflections are small, the stiffness matrix
provides a meaningful description of the beam behavior. When the angular
deflections are large, they are not commutative; so the stiffness matrix that
produces the translational and rotational force components may not
correctly describe the beam behavior. Adams/Solver issues a warning
message if the beam translational displacements exceed 10 percent of the
undeformed length.
238 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Field

Force Modify Element Like Field

Right-click field element -> Modify

Modifies a field element to define a linear or nonlinear force.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Field Name Enter the name of the field element to modify.
New Field Name Enter a new name for the field element, if desired.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the field element. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Enter any comments about the field element that might help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I marker Name/ Specify the two markers between which the force and torque are to be exerted.
J marker Name Adams/View applies the component translational and rotational forces for a
field to the I marker and imposes reaction forces on the J marker.
Translation at Enter the preload translational and rotational force for the field element.
Preload/ Rotation at
Preload • Translation at Preload to define three reference lengths. This is the
nominal (x0, y0, z0) position of the I marker with respect to the
J marker, resolved in the J marker coordinate system.
• Rotation at Preload to define the reference rotational displacement of
the axes of the I marker with respect to the J marker, resolved in the
J marker axes (a0, b0, and c0) (specified in radians).
If the reference force is zero, then the preload is the same as the free length.
Entering preload values is optional and defaults to a six zero entry.
Define Using Select one of the following:
Standard
Values/Define Using • Define Using Standard Values and enter values for the text boxes that
Subroutine appear in the dialog box as explained in the next rows of this table.
• Define Using Subroutine and enter parameters to be passed to the
user-written subroutine FIESUB to define a nonlinear field. Enter up to
30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/View is to pass to FIESUB. For
more on the FIESUB subroutine and nonlinear fields, see the
Adams/Solver online help.
If you selected Define Using Standard Values, the following options appear:
 E - I 239
Force Modify Element Like Field

For the option: Do the following:

Force Preload/Torque Define three preload force components and three preload torque components
Preload transferred by the field element when the I and J markers are
separated/misaligned by the values specified in the Translation at Preload and
Rotation at Preload text boxes.The terms are the force components along the x-
, y-, and z-axis of the J marker and the torque components about the x, y-, and
z-axis of the J marker, respectively. Entering values for Force Preload and
Torque Preload is optional and defaults to six zero entries.
Stiffness Matrix Define a six-by-six matrix of stiffness coefficients. The following matrix
shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.
Learn about units.

Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
stiffness matrix.
240 Adams/View
Force Modify Element Like Field

For the option: Do the following:

Matrix of Damping Enter either a matrix of damping terms or a damping ratio if you want to
Terms/Damping include damping coefficients in the calculation of the field forces as explained
Ratio below. The damping matrix defaults to a matrix with thirty-six zero entries.

• To define a six-by-six matrix of viscous damping coefficients, select

Matrix of Damping Terms and enter the elements. The following
matrix shows the values to input.

Enter the elements by columns from top to bottom, then from left to right.

• To enter a damping ratio that defines the ratio of the damping matrix to
the stiffness matrix, select Damping Ratio and enter the value. If you
enter a damping ratio, Adams/Solver multiplies the stiffness matrix by
the ratio to obtain the damping matrix. Do not enter a ratio without also
entering a stiffness matrix.
Tip: A finite element analysis program can give you the values for the
damping matrix.
If you selected Define Using Subroutine, the following options appear:
User Function Enter up to 30 values (r1[,...,r30]) that Adams/Solver is to pass to Learn about
units. For more on FIESUB and nonlinear fields, see the Adams/Solver online
help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying your own routine with ROUTINE Argument.
 E - I 241
Force Modify Element Like Friction

Force Modify Element Like Friction

Models both static (Coulomb) and dynamic (viscous) friction in revolute, translational, cylindrical,
hooke/universal, and spherical joints.
For more information on the values to be entered in the dialog box, follow the information for the
Adams/Solver FRICTION statement in the Adams/Solver online help.
242 Adams/View
Frustum Tool

Frustum Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Frustrum Tool

Creates a frustum, which is a cone, the top of which has been cut off. You create a frustum by drawing
its length. The Frustum tool makes the bottom radius 12.5% of the length and makes the top radius of the
frustum 50% of the radius of the base radius. Before drawing, you can also specify the frustum's length
and the radii of its bottom and top

Learn about Creating a Frustum.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the frustum to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the frustum to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are
simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that
defines the race track can be added to ground.
Length If desired, select and enter the length for the frustum.
Bottom Radius If desired, select and enter the bottom radius for the frustum.
Top Radius If desired, select and enter the top radius for the frustum.
 E - I 243
Frustum Tool

Note: Three hotpoints appear on a frustrum after you draw it. One controls the length of the
frustum, one controls its top radius, and the other controls the bottom radius. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
244 Adams/View
Function Builder

Function Builder
Tools -> Function Builder

Helps you create and modify functions and parameterize values for various entities. You can either work
in the Expression mode or the Run-time mode.
Expression Mode
 E - I 245
Function Builder

Run-time Mode
246 Adams/View
Function Builder

For more information on Function Builder, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

For the option: Do the following:

Create/modify a function object You can type in a function or choose from the list of system supplied
functions.
Function Categories Use the pull-down menu to choose from:

• All Functions
• Math Functions
• Location/Orientation Functions
• Modeling Functions
• Matrix/Array Functions
• String Functions
• Database Functions
• File Functions
• Misc. Functions
Information on Types of Functions.
Assist Only available for certain functions. Displays a dialog box to help
you with function parameters.
Click to add a plus (+) sign or right-click for more operators.

Name Enter a name of a new or existing function object.

Load Select to update with the properties of the current function object.
Type Select the type of value you want the function to return. Choose
from:

• real
• integer
• array
• string
• object
• location_orientation
Arguments Enter the names of arguments for the function object.
Assumed Values Select to specify assumed values for arguments to be used during
validation and/or plotting.
 E - I 247
Function Builder

For the option: Do the following:

Getting Object Data Select a type object allowed in the object field. Choose from:

• Markers
• Parts
• Design Points
• Design Variables
• Results Data
• Measures
• All Objects
Enter the name of an object to insert into your function definition in
the field next to the pull-down menu.
Get Data Owned By Object Select if you want to get the name of a data field owned by the object
and insert it into your function definition.
Insert Object Name Select if you want to insert the object name into your function
definition.
Plot Select to plot your function.
Plot Limits Select to specify the horizontal limits for plotting your function.
Evaluate Select to evaluate your function.
248 Adams/View
Function Builder Plot Limits

Function Builder Plot Limits

Tools -> Function Builder -> Plot Limits

When working in the Function Builder in Run-time mode, you can set limits for the horizontal axis
values. Adams/View plots the independent data on the horizontal axis.
For more information, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.

For the option: Do the following:

Begin Value Enter a value with which you want to start.
End Value Enter a value with which you want to end.
Number of Computed Points Enter the number of points to be computed.
 E - I 249
Gain Block

Gain Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Gain blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer functions. You
specify the gain as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize this constant with an
Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Gain Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

250 Adams/View
Gear Joint Tool

Gear Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Gear Joint Tool

Creates a gear pair that relates the motion of three parts and two joints using a marker, called the common
velocity (CV) marker, to determine the point of contact.

Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying Gears
• About Gears
• Equations for Gears
 E - I 251
General Point Motion Tool

General Point Motion Tool

Build -> Joints -> General Point Motion Tool

Creates a general Point Motion.

Learn about:
• Motion
• Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools

For the option: Do the following:

1 location (Bodies Set how you want the motion connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies -1 Location/ • 1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies -2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the motion oriented:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the motion along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the motion along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
252 Adams/View
Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Build -> Bodies/Geometry

Main toolbox -> Right-click Geometry tool stack

Displays tools for creating rigid body geometry.

Geometric Modeling Palette (from Build

Geometric Tool Stack Menu)
 E - I 253
Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Icon Link Icon Link

Link Tool Arc Tool

Box Tool Spline Tool

Cylinder Tool Unite Tool

Sphere Tool Intersect Tool

Frustum Tool Cut Tool

Torus Tool Split Tool

Extrusion Tool Merge Tool

Revolution Tool Chain Tool

Plate Tool Fillet Tool

Point Tool Chamfer Tool

Marker Tool Hole Tool

Plane Tool Boss Tool

Polyline Tool Hollow Tool

Construction or Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change
Settings depending on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when
Container you create a link, Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height
before creating it. Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set
regardless of how you move the mouse. You can also define design variables
or expressions for many values.
254 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Curve Arc

Geometry Modify Curve Arc

Right-click an arc -> Modify

Allows you to control the size and location of an arc. You can modify a circle by following the same steps.
Learn about the Arc Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Arc Name Enter the name of the arc you want to modify.
New Arc Name If you want, enter a new name for the arc.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Enter any comments about the geometry to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker Enter values for the marker at the center of the arc or circle. The plane
of the arc is normal to the z-axis of the center marker.
Angle Extent (arcs only) Enter values for the extended angle measured positive (according to the
right-hand rule) about the z-axis of the center marker of an arc. The
angle starts at the positive x-axis of the center marker and extends the
arc.

Radius/Ref Radius By Choose either Radius or Ref Radius By Marker.

Marker
Enter either the radius of the arc or circle or enter a radius marker. If you
specify a radius marker, Adams/View calculates the radius of the arc or
circle as the distance from the center marker origin to the radius marker
origin. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you
later move the marker, the radius does not change.
 E - I 255
Geometry Modify Curve Arc

For the option: Do the following:

Segment Count Displays the number of straight line segments Adams/View uses to
draw the circle or arc.
Close For an arc, select one of the following:

• Chord or Yes - Closes the arc from the starting point to the
ending point.
• Sector - Closes the arc so that it creates a pie-shaped arc.
• No - Creates an open arc.
256 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Curve Polyline

Geometry Modify Curve Polyline

Right-click a polyline -> Modify

Allows you to control the size and location of the polyline. Learn about the Polyline Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Polyline Name Enter the name of the polyline to modify.
New Name If you want, enter a new name for the polyline.
Relative To Specify the location and orientation coordinates in the coordinate system.
Location/Path Curve Select either Location or Path Curve and then specify:

• Locations to be used to define the polyline. By default, you supply

Cartesian (x, y, z) coordinates. Adams/View applies the location
coordinates in the coordinate system you identify using the Relative To
parameter.

To easily edit the locations, select the More button to display the
Location table.
• A geometry object whose path defines the polyline. You can select arcs,
circles, spline curves, polylines, and outlines. Adams/View extracts the
values of the vertices of the path curve and uses them to create the
polyline.
Close Select if you want to create a closed polyline. If closed, the polyline can be filled
(shaded). The endpoints of the polyline do not need to be coincident for you to
close it; the two endpoints will be connected with a line segment.

If you do not select Close, you create a polyline that appears as a segmented
curve. Adams/View creates the polyline by connecting the locations you
specified in the Location text box together with straight line segments in the
order in which you specified them.
Select to add any comments about the polyline that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

 E - I 257
Geometry Modify Feature Blend - Chamfer or Fillet

Geometry Modify Feature Blend - Chamfer or Fillet

Right-click a chamfer or fillet -> BlendFeature -> Modify

Allows you to control the radius of the chamfer or fillet. Learn more about:
• Chamfer Tool
• Fillet Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Blend Name Enter the name of the chamfer or fillet to modify.
New Blend Name If you want, enter a new name for the chamfer or fillet.
Radius 1 Enter the width of the chamfer bevel or radius of the fillet.
Radius 2 Enter the ending radius of the fillet. You specify the end radius if you are creating
a variable blend fillet.
258 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Feature Hole

Geometry Modify Feature Hole

Right-click a hole or boss -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and dimensions of a hole or boss.

Learn more:
• Hole Tool
• Boss Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Hole Name Enter the name of the hole to modify.
New Hole Name If you want, enter a new name for the hole.
Center Specify the location of the center of the hole or boss.
Radius Specify the radius of the hole or boss.
Depth Specify the depth of the hole or boss.
 E - I 259
Geometry Modify Feature Thinshell

Geometry Modify Feature Thinshell

Right-click a hollow -> Modify

Allows you to control the thickness of a hollowed shell. Learn about the Hollow Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the thinshell to modify.
New Name If you want, enter a new name for the thinshell.
Thickness Specify the depth of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.
260 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Block

Geometry Modify Shape Block

Right-click a block -> Modify

Allows you to control the corner marker used as the anchor point of a block (box). By controlling the
corner marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the block's location
and orientation.
Learn about the Box Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Block Name Displays the name of the block you are modifying.
New Block Name If you want, enter a unique name for the block.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the block. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the block that you want to enter to help you manage
and identify it. See Comments.
Corner Marker Specify a marker used to define the anchor point for the block.
Diag Corner Coords Specify the location of the diagonal corner from the marker measured in the
coordinate system of the corner marker.

• Block Modify Options

 E - I 261
Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder

Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder

Right-click a cylinder -> Modify

Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a cylinder. By controlling the center
marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the cylinder's location and
orientation.
Learn about the Cylinder Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Cylinder Name Displays the name of the cylinder you are modifying.
New Cylinder Name If you want, enter a unique name for the cylinder.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the array. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the cylinder that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Cylinder Options

Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of base of the cylinder.
The length of the cylinder is oriented along the z-axis of the center marker.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive
x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the cylinder.
Length Enter the length of the cylinder. Adams/View uses the value of length to
specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a
cylinder along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Radius/Ref Radius By Specify the radius of circles at the top and bottom of the cylinder or a radius
Marker marker. If you enter a radius marker, Adams/View calculates the radius of
the cylinder as the distance from the center marker z-axis to the radius
marker. Adams/View stores the radius value, not the marker name. If you
later move this marker, the radius does not change.
262 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Cylinder

For the option: Do the following:

Side Count for Body Enter the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the
cylinder. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.
Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of straight line segments Adams/View uses to draw
the circles at the ends of the cylinder.
 E - I 263
Geometry Modify Shape Ellipsoid (Spheres)

Geometry Modify Shape Ellipsoid (Spheres)

Right-click a sphere -> Ellipsoid -> Modify

Allows you to control the center marker used as the anchor point of a ellipsoid (sphere). By controlling
the center marker, such as changing the marker used or changing its location, you change the ellipsoid's
location and orientation.
Learn about the Sphere Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Ellipsoid Name Displays the name of the ellipsoid you are modifying.
New Ellipsoid Name If you want, enter a unique name for the ellipsoid.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the ellipsoid. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the ellipsoid that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker Specify the center marker that defines the center of the ellipsoid.
X Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's x-axis.
Y Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's y-axis.
Z Scale Specify the diameter dimension along the center marker's z-axis.
264 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Frustum

Geometry Modify Shape Frustum

Right-click a frustum -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a frustum.

Learn about the Frustum Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Frustum Name Enter the name of the frustum to modify.
New Frustum Name If you want, enter a new name for the frustum.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the frustum. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the frustum that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker Specify the marker at the center of the bottom of a frustum. Orient the center
marker so that its z-axis is normal to the bottom of the frustum and points
towards the top of the frustum.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive
x-axis of the center marker and extends the arc of the frustum.
Length Specify the height of the frustum. Adams/View uses the length value to
specify the z distance between the two circles. A positive value specifies a
frustum along the positive z-axis of the center marker.
Side Count for Body Specify the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on the side of the
frustum. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.
Top Radius Specify the radius at the top of a frustum. The top is perpendicular to the
center marker z-axis.
Bottom Radius Specify the radius at the bottom of the frustum. The bottom is perpendicular
to the center marker z-axis, and the center of the bottom is at the center
marker origin.
Segment Count for Ends Displays the number of segments Adams/View uses to draw the circles at
the ends of the frustum.
 E - I 265
Geometry Modify Shape Link

Geometry Modify Shape Link

Right-click a link -> Modify

Allows you to precisely control the size, location, and shape of a Link. Learn about the Link Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Link Name Enter the name of the link to modify.
New Link Name If you want, enter a new name for the link.
Comments Add any comments about the link that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
I marker Specify the marker at one end of the link. Adams/View calculates the length of
the link as the distance between the I marker and J maker.
J marker The J marker must lie along the I marker's x-axis.
Width Specify the width of the link. The width of the link also controls the radius of the
semicircular ends (the radius is equal to one half of the link’s width).
Depth Specify the depth of the link.
266 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Plane

Geometry Modify Shape Plane

Right-click a plane -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of planes and change the name of the planes.
Learn about the Plane Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Plane Name Enter the name of the plane to modify.
New Plane Name If you want, enter a new name for the plane.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the plane. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the plane that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Ref Marker Name Specify the reference marker used to locate and orient the plane.
X Minimum Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the
reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner
of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20,
place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
X Maximum Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to
the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right
corner of the plane.
Y Minimum Specify the location of one corner of the plane in coordinates relative to the
reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the lower left corner
of the plane. For example, the values of X Minimum = 10 and Y Minimum = 20,
place the lower left corner at 10,20 in the reference marker's coordinate system.
Y Maximum Specify the location of the opposite corner of the plane in coordinates relative to
the reference marker. If all values are positive, the values indicate the upper right
corner of the plane.
 E - I 267
Geometry Modify Shape Plate

Geometry Modify Shape Plate

Right-click a plate -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a plate and allows you to rename the plate.
Learn about the Plate Tool.
See an example of Plate.

For the option: Do the following:

Plate Name Displays the name of the plate you are modifying.
New Plate Name If you want, enter a unique name for the plate.
Comments Add any comments about the plate that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Marker Name Specify the markers used to define the vertices of the plate. The first marker listed
is the anchor point for the plate. It is the first point that you specified when you
created the plate.
Width Enter the thickness of the plate measured along the z-axis of the corner marker.
Radius Specify the radius of the corners of the plate.

Note: To change the corner locations of a plate, modify the markers that define the corner
locations.
268 Adams/View
Geometry Modify Shape Torus

Geometry Modify Shape Torus

Right-click a torus -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a torus.

Learn about Torus Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Torus Name Displays the name of the torus you are modifying.
New Torus Name If you want, enter a unique name for the torus.
Adams Id Specify an integer to be used to identify this element in the Adams data file.
Comments Add any comments about the torus that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it. See Comments.
Center Marker Specify the marker at the center of the torus.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the center marker. The angle starts at the positive
x-axis of the center marker and subtends the arc of the torus.
Major Radius Specify the radius of the circular spine of the torus.
Minor Radius Specify the radius of the circular-cross sections of the torus.
Side Count for Perimeter Enter the number of circular cross-sections to create along the spine of the
torus. The number of sides you specify affects the calculations
Adams/View uses to determine a part’s mass and inertia.
Segment Count Enter the number of sides for each of the circular cross-sections of the torus.
 E - I 269
Graphical Topology

Graphical Topology
Database Navigator -> Graphical Topology

Allows you to display a representation of the selected part and shows its connections to other parts. The
connections represent the joints or forces between the parts. Each time you select a different part in the
tree list of the Database Navigator, the graphical display changes to show the selected part at the center
of the display. If the object is inactive, the part appears dimmed.
Below is an example of graphical view topology.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.
270 Adams/View
Gravity

Gravity
Settings -> Gravity

Build -> Forces -> Gravity Tool

You can specify the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of gravity. For each part with mass, the
gravitational force produces a point force at its center of mass.
When you turn on gravity, an icon appears in the middle of the Adams/View Main window. To turn off
the display of the gravity icon, see Displaying View Accessories.
Learn about setting gravity.

For the option: Do the following:

Gravity Select to turn on gravity. Clear to turn off gravity.
X Enter the acceleration value in the x direction or select + or - to enter a standard
positive or negative value.
Y Enter the acceleration value in the y direction or select + or - to enter a standard
positive or negative value.
Z Enter the acceleration value in the z direction or select + or - to enter a standard
positive or negative value.
 E - I 271
Group Create

Group Create
Build -> Group -> New ...

Lets you group several objects so that you can work on them as a single object. This is particularly helpful
for objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of
a latch. Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can
perform editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and
deactivation status during simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.

For the option: Do the following:

Group Name Enter a name for the group of objects or accept the default name.
Comments Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the group. See Comments.
Objects in Group To explicitly specify the objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut
menu, Adams/View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be
included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies
or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.
Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We
recommend that you not use it.
Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
272 Adams/View
Group Modify

Group Modify
Build -> Group -> Modify ...

Lets you modify an exisitng group. A group is particularly helpful for objects that make up a unit or
subsystem of your model, such as a suspension system or a handle of a latch. Once you’ve grouped the
objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform editing operations on them,
such as move or copy them. You can also set up their activation and deactivation status during
simulations. (Learn about Activating and Deactivating Objects.)
When you create a group, you can specify the objects to be included or set up a filter to specify the objects
in the group. You can also enter an expression that sets whether or not the objects are active or deactive
during a simulation.
Learn about the procedures for Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.

For the option: Do the following:

Group Name Enter a name of existing group.
New Group Name Enter a new name for the group.
Comments Add any comments about the group that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify the group. See Comments.
Objects in Group To explicitly specify the objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter the names of the objects.
Separate each name with a comma (,).
You can select an object on the screen or browse for an object in the
Database Navigator. If you select objects to group using the shortcut
menu, Adams/View enters commas between the objects.
To set filters for specifying objects to be grouped:

• In the Objects in Group text box, enter a wildcard, and then specify
the type of objects in the Type Filter text box. For example, enter
Parts to include only rigid bodies or Markers to include only
coordinate system markers.
Type Filter If you set a filter in Objects in Group, specify the type of objects to be
included in the group. For example, enter Parts to include only rigid bodies
or Markers to include only coordinate system markers.
Expand Group Do not use. It is only present to provide backward compatibility. We
recommend that you not use it.
Expr Active Specify whether or not the group of objects is active during a simulation. You
can enter an expression that evaluates to 0 (not active) or 1 (active) or enter
1 or 0. If you do not specify a value, Adams/View uses the activation status
you set using the Activate and Deactivate commands.
 E - I 273
Hole Tool

Hole Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Hole Tool

Creates circular holes in solid objects.

As you create a hole, you can specify its radius and depth.

Note: You cannot specify the radius and depth of a hole so that it splits the current geometry into
two separate geometries.

Learn about Creating a Hole or Boss.

For the option: Do the following:

Radius Enter the radius of the hole.
Depth Enter the depth of the hole.
274 Adams/View
Hollow Tool

Hollow Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Hollow Tool

Hollows out one or more faces of a solid object to create a shell. As you hollow an object, you can specify
the thickness of the remaining shell and the faces to be hollowed. You can also specify that Adams/View
add material to the outside of the object. In this case, Adams/View uses the original object as a mold.
Adams/View adds material of the specified thickness to the original object and then takes the original
object away, leaving a shell.
Example of Hollowed Boxes.

Note: You can hollow any object that has a face. You cannot hollow spheres, revolutions, or
Construction geometry

Learn about Hollowing Out a Solid.

For the option: Do the following:

Thickness Specify the thickness of the remaining shell after you hollow the object.
Inside Clear if you want to add the shell to the outside of the object.
 E - I 275
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

Creates a hooke/universal joint that allows the rotation of one rigid body to be transferred to the rotation
of another rigid body.

This joint is particularly useful when transferring rotational motion around corners, when you need to
simulate the non-constant velocity of a physical universal joint, or when transferring rotational motion
between two connected shafts that are permitted to bend at the connection point (such as the drive shaft
on an automobile).
The location point of the universal joint represents the connection point of the two parts. For a hooke
joint, two shaft axes leading to the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted
to rotate with respect to each other. Note that Adams/View uses rotational axes that are parallel to the
rotational axes you identify but that pass through the location point for the hooke joint. For a universal
joint, the cross bars identify the axes about which the two parts are permitted to rotate with respect to
each other.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
276 Adams/View
Hooke/Universal Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
 E - I 277
Hot Point Snapping Increments

Hot Point Snapping Increments

There is currently no help available for this dialog box. To return to the previous online help, select the
browser Back button, or select Show to see the table of contents for the entire help system.
278 Adams/View
Icon Settings Dialog Box

Icon Settings Dialog Box

Settings -> Icons

Sets up how you want Screen icons displayed for the entire Modeling database or a particular type of
object, such as all parts or joints. By default, all objects inherit the screen icon display options that you
specify for the modeling database. You can set screen icon options for the following types of objects:
• Curve-curves
• Couplers
• Data elements
• Equations (System elements)
• Forces
• Gears
• Joints
• Markers (Note that markers belong to parts and, therefore, by default, inherit screen icon display
options for parts.)Motion
• Parts
• Points
• Point-curves

Learn more about Setting Screen Icon Display.

For the option: Do the following:

The next two options apply to the entire modeling database:
New Value Choose one of the following to select whether or not you want to turn on screen
icons:

• No Change - Select No Change to not change the current settings.

• On - Turns on all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for
individual objects or types of objects.
• Off - Turns off all icons regardless of how you set the icon display for
individual objects or types of objects.
New Size Enter the size you want for the screen icons. Note that any changes you make to
the size of icons for individual objects or types of objects take precedence over
this size setting.
The remaining options apply to a particular type of modeling object:
Specify Attributes Select the type of object for which you want to set the screen icon options
for
 E - I 279
Icon Settings Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Visibility Select whether or not you want to turn on screen icons for the selected object
type. You can select:

• On - Turns on the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
• Off - Turns off the display of screen icons for the selected type of object.
Remember, however, that turning on the display of screen icons for the
entire database overrides this setting.
• Inherit - Lets the object type simply inherit the display settings from its
parent. For example, a coordinate system marker inherits settings from
its parent part.
• No Change - Does not change the current settings. Lets you make
changes to other display options without affecting the visibility of the
icons.
Size of Icons/Scale Enter the size you want for the icons or select the amount by which you want to
of Icons scale the icons. The scale factor is relative to the current size set. A scale factor
of 1 keeps the icons the same size. A scale factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of
the icons and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases the size of the icons. Note
that these changes take precedence over the size you specify globally for the
modeling database.
Color Enter the color you want to use for the icons.

To browse for or create a color, right-click the Color text box, and then select
Browse or Create.
Name Visibility Select whether or not you want the names of objects of the selected type
displayed in the view. Refer to Visibility option above for choices.
Reset Select to reset the screen icon display to the previous values.
280 Adams/View
Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

File -> Import -> Adams/Solver Analysis, Adams Graphics, Adams Request, or Adams Results Shared Dialog Box
Imports Adams/Solver analysis files, which are a set of output files that Adams/Solver generates during
a single Simulation. The files include:
• Graphics
• Request
• Results

You can import multiple files if you associate and store the files with a model. Adams/View reads and
creates all analyses under the specified model. If you do not provide a model name, Adams/View reads
each analysis into its own model. For request files, when you specify multiple files, the Request IDs
button only displays the requests from the first file listed. The list of IDs will, however, be applied to all
files.
If you select to associate the files with a particular simulation, you can only import one set of output files
generated from the same Adams/Solver simulation. Adams/View uses the time-date stamp placed at the
beginning of each output file to determine if the files were generated by the same simulation run.
If you have very large request files that you want to import, Adams/View lets you read in only a subset
of the request file to conserve memory use. You can specify to read in only the request IDs in which you
are interested and skip time steps. Note that this is only available when reading in a single request file,
not when reading in an entire set of analysis files.

Note: Importing an entire set of analysis files works even if you have only one of the three files
included in the analysis set as explained below.

If Adams/View cannot find any of the three files, it issues a message. The most common
reasons that Adams/View cannot find one or more of the files are that the path to the files
is incorrect or you do not have permission to read the file. You can either:

• Import the files again using the correct path name.

• Move the files into the directory from which you are running Adams/View and
check the file permission. Then, import the files again. You do not need to specify
the file locations.
 E - I 281
Import - Adams/Solver Analysis Files

For the option: Do the following:

File Type • To import sets of analysis files, select Adams/Solver Analysis Files.
• To import individual analysis files one at a time, select Graphics, Request,
or Results.
Note: When you import only a graphics file, you can select to display the
graphics and choose to store the data on your disk drive and not in the
Adams Modeling database. Then when Adams/View or
Adams/PostProcessor animates the model, it references the data on
disk. By saving the data on disk and not in the Adams database you
can save substantial amounts of memory, especially if the files are
large (containing 20,000 output steps or more). Note that storing the
data on disk results in slightly longer animation time.
File(s) to Read Enter the base name of the file or set of files. You do not need to enter their
extension.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Model/Analysis Enter either the model or analysis name under which you want to store the
analysis files in the modeling database. You can enter multiple files if you select
to store them under a model.
View (Adams/PostProcessor only)
Enter the viewport in which to display the data.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Display Model (Graphics file only)
After Completion
Select if you want to display the final results of the import.
Keep Results Data Select if you want to avoid reading the entire contents of the graphics, request,
On Disk or results data (XML only) into the database. Adams/View references the data
only when needed for animations or xy plotting. Storing the data on disk reduces
the memory footprint and improves performance for very large simulations, for
example, those containing durability results. Learn more about storing results
files in XML format with Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
If you selected to import a request file, the following two options appear:
Request IDs Enter the IDs of the requests in which you are interested and want read into the
Adams/View database. Select the More tool to select from a list of all the
requests and their IDs in the specified request file.
Time Step Skip Enter whether or not to skip time steps by specifying a pattern of time steps to
skip. If you have a large request file with unnecessarily fine time resolution, this
can significantly reduce the amount of memory used to store the data. For
example, enter 1 to have Adams/View store only the following time steps in the
database: 1st, 3rd, 5th, and so on. Enter 2 to store only the 1st, 4th, 7th, and so
on.
282 Adams/View
Import - Adams/Solver Dataset

Import - Adams/Solver Dataset

File -> Import -> Adams/Solver Dataset Shared Dialog Box
Imports datasets that you created for Adams/Solver into Adams/View.
When you import an Adams/Solver dataset, Adams/View creates a new Model using the model
description defined in the dataset. It makes the model part of the current Modeling database. To display
the model, see Displaying Models in the Database.

Note: If Adams/View encounters special characters in the file, such as <CTRL m>, it cancels the
operation. Special characters can appear in files that have been transferred between
different computer systems (for example, from Windows NT to UNIX). If Adams/View
cancels the operation, edit the file to remove the special characters and import the file into
Adams/View again.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Dataset.
File to Read Enter the name of the dataset that you want to import. You do not
need to enter the file extension .adm, since Adams/View assumes
that this is the file extension.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Model to Create Enter the name of the model you want to create from the dataset.
Set Default Units Set the default units for the model. For more information, see Units
Dialog Box.
Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.
 E - I 283
Import - Adams/Solver Script

Import - Adams/Solver Script

File -> Import -> Adams/Solver Script (*.acf) Shared Dialog Box
Imports an Adams/Solver script file (*.acf) into Adams/View. After importing Adams/View creates a
Simulation Script in the database.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Adams/Solver Script.
File to Read Enter the name of the solver script file that you want to import. You do not
need to enter the file extension .acf, since Adams/View assumes that this is
the file extension.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Simulation Script Name A new or an existing Simulation Script. If an existing script is specified, then
the import operation will modify the script with the commands from the
specified file.
284 Adams/View
Import - Adams/View Command Files

Import - Adams/View Command Files

File -> Import -> Command Files Shared Dialog Box
Imports a command file into Adams/View so that Adams/View executes the commands stored in the
command file.

Tip: You can also use Tools -> Read Command File to import a command file, and set the
options using Settings -> Command File.

Learn about:
• Sources of Command Files
• Command File Format
• Ensuring Upward Compatibility of Command Files
• Reading Command Files

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Adams/View Command File.
File to Read Enter the name of the command file that you want to import. You
do not need to enter the file extension .cmd since Adams/View
assumes that it is the file extension.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Echo Commands Select to display the commands that Adams/View executes as it
imports the file.
Update Screen Display the results of the commands in the main window. If you
do not select Update Screen, Adams/View displays the results
when it finishes reading the command file.
Display Model Upon Completion Display the final results of the import.
On Error Set what Adams/View does when it encounters an error.
 E - I 285
Import - DAC or RPC III

Import - DAC or RPC III

File -> Import -> DAC/RPC III Shared Dialog Box
You can import test data in DAC or RPC III format. The steps involved in importing the data are
essentially the same for both formats; however, it is important to remember that RPC III format supports
multiple channels per file while DAC format only has one channel per file.
Adams/View creates a DAC_FILE or RPC_FILE object below Root in the database after you
successfully import these files. It only stores information about the imported file from the file header. It
does not store time history data in the database. Adams/View also creates Result_Set_Component
placeholders below the file object for each RPC III data channel or DAC file.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to DAC or RPC3.
File to Read Enter the name of the file or files that you want to import. With DAC
files, you may want to select multiple files because each file has only
one result set. You can use Shift+click or Ctrl+click multiple selection
techniques.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

RPC Object Name/DAC Enter the RPC or DAC objects that you want to import.
Object Name
286 Adams/View
Import - Parasolid

Import - Parasolid
File -> Import -> Parasolid Shared Dialog Box
Imports Parasolid geometry. Requires Adams/Exchange.
When you import Parasolid geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the file and converts the geometry into a
set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce
the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Parasolid.
File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

File Type Select the type of Parasolid file that you are importing.
Model Name/Part Name Select whether or not you want to store the geometry under a model or part
name in the Modeling database and enter the name of the object in the text
box.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

 E - I 287
Import - Shell

Import - Shell
File -> Import ->Shell Shared Dialog Box
Imports shell geometry to enhance animations.

Note: In Adams/PostProcessor, you can specify whether or not you want Adams/PostProcessor
to import triangular geometry into trimesh strips when you import CAD geometry. Trimesh
strips display significantly faster than individual polygons, resulting in faster animations.
Adams/PostProcessor automatically imports shell files (.shl , .slp, and .stl) as trimesh
strips. For more information, see PPT Preferences - Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter the name of the file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Shell Name Enter the name with which you want to associate the imported shell geometry.
Reference Marker Enter the name of the marker to which the shell is paired. During animations, the
shell geometry moves with the marker.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Wireframe Only Set to import the shell geometry as wireframe.
288 Adams/View
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

File -> Import -> STEP, IGES, or DXF or DWG Shared Dialog Box
When you import CAD geometry, Adams/Exchange reads the CAD file and converts the geometry into
a set of Adams geometric elements. By importing geometry from standard CAD packages you can reduce
the need to recreate geometry primitives within Adams, and you can enhance your ability to realistically
view the behavior of complicated mechanical systems.
Be sure that the model into which you want to import the geometry is currently open and displayed in
Adams. You can associate the geometry that you import with an existing part or create a new part with
which to associate it.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to the type of geometry that you want to import.
File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Part Name Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported
geometry. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Tolerance Enter the tolerance for the geometry. The tolerance value is the measure of the
midpoint chordal distance from the approximated curve/surface to the true
curve/surface:

Schematic of the Tolerance Value

Be careful when specifying the tolerance. You should have advanced knowledge
of the units and size of the geometry in the CAD file before setting the tolerance.
If you do not know the size of the geometry in the file, Adams/Exchange may
translate the geometry so it is too coarse, or too fine. A tolerance that is too fine
can potentially cause Adams/Exchange to use excessive computing power and
memory.

The tolerance reported in the log file is the tolerance of the data defined in the
CAD file. This is the maximum tolerance available in the CAD file and is usually
too fine for efficient translation to Adams/View. We recommend, therefore, that
you try a tolerance several orders of magnitude greater then the tolerance specified
in the CAD file.
 E - I 289
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

For the option: Do the following:

Level Enter the level or levels to be translated in the CAD file for IGES, DXF, and DWG
files. Levels let you associate geometry into a group. These groups can be
manipulated as a single entity for purposes of visibility and color. The CAD
program that generated the CAD file defines the levels and are labeled with
integers greater than or equal to 0. Levels are typically used to organize data for
viewing and are similar to layers. If you do not specify the levels you want
translated, Adams/Exchange reads all levels.

You can specify a single level or a range of levels. Separate the range with a
comma (,). For example, enter 10, 15 to translate levels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15.
Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams/Exchange. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in
Adams/Exchange will be the same size as the geometry in the CAD file. A scale
factor less than 1.0 reduces the size of geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0
increases the size of the geometry.

For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams/Exchange translates a

cylinder of length 2 meters and diameter of .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and
diameter of .25 meters. Adams/Exchange also scales the distance from the
geometry to the coordinate system specified in the Relative To text box according
to the scale value. If the cylinder was located at 3, 2, 0 in the file, it would be
located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry
is not effected by scale value.
Create Select either:

• Polygons to represent surfaces as polygons. Selecting Polygons allows for the

quickest animations and rendering.
• Solids to represent surfaces as solid representations. Selecting Solids allows
for the greatest precision and mass property calculations.
Blanked Entities Select to translate entities that are blanked (made not visible). Adams/Exchange
translates the blanked entities and makes them invisible. If you do not select
Blanked Entities, Adams/Exchange does not translate the blanked entities.

Blanked entities are typically construction entities that are used in the definition of
another geometric entity. For example, a line can be used as the center of rotation
of another line in the definition of a cylinder. The center line and the sweep line
rotated about the center line are both blanked because they are temporary entities
used in the construction of the cylinder.

Once you translate blanked entities to Adams, there is no distinction between

construction entities and other geometry. You can change the visibility of the
entities.
290 Adams/View
Import - STEP, IGES, DXF/DWG

For the option: Do the following:

Location Specify the translational position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be
located, relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the CAD file is to be oriented
relative to the Adams part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles. Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system relative to which the translated geometry will be
defined. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text boxes
are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a coordinate
system, part, or model.
Mesh Density Enter the density of the mesh in uv coordinates.
Consolidate To Set to import all the geometry as one shell. If you do not select Consolidate To
Shells Shells, Adams/Exchange imports the geometry as individual entities. We
recommend that you select Consolidate To Shells to receive the best animation
results.
Display Select to display a summary of the exporting in a message window.
Summary
 E - I 291
Import - Stereolithography and Render Files

Import - Stereolithography and Render Files

File -> Import -> Stereolithography, Render Shared Dialog Box
You can import both Stereolithography (SLA) and render geometry into Adams. As you import the SLA
and render geometry, you associate the geometry with an existing part or you create a new part with
which to associate it.
Importing your geometry as SLA or render geometry is more reliable than using other CAD formats, such
as IGES or STEP, and the file formats are very simple. There are, however, the following disadvantages:
• The files are much larger than IGES and DXF files.
• Because the surfaces have been represented as polygons, you cannot change the accuracy of the
surface representations in Adams/View. You must specify the accuracy when you create the files
in your CAD program.

Note: Only ASCII .stl files (Stereolithography) are supported. Binary .stl files are not currently
supported.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Stereolithography or Render.
File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Part Name Enter the name of the part with which you want to associate the imported geometry.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Scale Enter the factor by which you want to scale the size of the geometry created in
Adams. The default scale factor is 1.0, meaning that the geometry in Adams will
be the same size as the geometry in the SLA or render file. A scale factor less than
1.0 reduces the size of the geometry and a scale factor greater than 1.0 increases
the size of the geometry.

For example, if you specify a scale factor of 0.5, Adams translates a cylinder of
length 2 meters and diameter .5 meters to a length of 1 meter and diameter of .25
meters. Adams also scales the distance from the geometry to the coordinate system
specified in the Relative To text box according to the scale value. If the cylinder
was located at 3, 2, 0 in the imported file, it would be located at 1.5, 1, 0 after it is
translated to Adams. The orientation of the geometry is not affected by scale value.
292 Adams/View
Import - Stereolithography and Render Files

For the option: Do the following:

Location Specify the translational position where the geometry in the file is to be located
relative to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the convention
for entering translational positions. Learn about Setting Default Coordinate
System.
Orientation Specify the angular position where the geometry in the file is to be oriented relative
to the Adams/View part coordinate system. These orientation coordinates can be
relative to any other coordinate system defined in the model.

Adams/View orients the coordinate system starting from the initial coordinate
system and applying three successive rotations. By default, you supply body-fixed
313 angles. You can change the convention for entering orientation angles.Learn
about Setting Default Coordinate System.
Relative To Enter the coordinate system to which the translated geometry will be defined
relative to. The coordinates you specified in the Location and Orientation text
boxes are relative to the coordinate system that you specify. You can specify a
coordinate system, part, or model.
 E - I 293
Import - Test Data

Import - Test Data

File -> Import -> Test Data Shared Dialog Box
You can import test data, such as the results of hardware prototype testing, calculations, or Simulations
performed by other software or earlier sessions. When you import test data, you can compare it with
Adams simulation results or use the data in the definition of your model. For example, you might want
to import the results from physical tests of a mechanical system and compare them to the results of
simulations in Adams of the same mechanical system to evaluate the accuracy of a model or to help you
improve your model.
Learn about Test Data Format.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set it to Test Data.
File to Read Enter the name of the file that you want to import. Tips on Entering File
Names in Text Boxes.
Create Splines/ Select whether you want to import the data as splines or as measures.
Create Measures
Time Column Index For measures only, specify which column in the data file contains the x-
axis data. Enter the column number. Adams uses all other columns as the
y-axis data.
Independent Column Index For splines only, enter the column number to specify which column in the
file to use for the independent data (X parameter) in the Adams spline.
The columns are numbered sequentially from left to right starting with 1,
2, 3, and so on.

If you specify an independent data index for splines, Adams does not
create a spline for the column of the file with that index. Instead, that
column of data is used as the x data for all splines. If you do not include
an independent column index, then the series of numbers 1, 2, 3, and so
on is used for the x data of all splines.
294 Adams/View
Import - Test Data

For the option: Do the following:

Units Specify the unit category to be applied to the dependent data for the
spline. You can provide a unit category for each dependent column in the
file.

Once Adams assigns the units to the spline, it performs automatic unit
conversions based on the current default units specified (Settings ->
Units). For example, if you import test data and assign the unit category
of length, and then you change the length unit from millimeter to meter,
Adams/View automatically converts the test data by 0.001.

Note that you should take care to ensure the current units in Adams are
set to the appropriate units for the data in the file before importing the file.
If the Adams default units are millimeter, and you are importing data in
inches, the data in the file will be interpreted as millimeters.

The units field is optional. If you omit it, Adams assigns no_units to the
imported data, and performs no automatic unit conversion.
Model Name/ Specify the name of the model or, for measures, the name of the analysis
Analysis Name in which you want to store the data. Select:

• Model Name and then enter the name of the model in the text box
next next to the pull-down menu.
• Analysis Name and then enter the name of the simulation in the text
box next to the pull-down menu. You can only store measures under
simulation results. (Not available if you are importing the data as a
spline.)
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Names in File Specify how to define the names of the splines or measures

• If there are textual column headers in the file, select Names in File.
Adams uses the column header text as the names of each spline.
• If there are no textual column headers, do not select Names in File.
Adams automatically generates names for the splines (for example,
SPLINE_1, SPLINE_2, and so on).
 E - I 295
Import - Wavefront Files

Import - Wavefront Files

File -> Import -> Wavefront Shared Dialog Box
Lets you import Wavefront geometry (.obj) files to define polygon vertices and connectivity for all
Adams graphics, except deformable geometry (springdampers, force/torque vectors, and multi-part
outlines). When you import a Wavefront .obj file, Adams only interprets vertex, face, and group
information. It ignores smoothing groups, textures, and material properties.
You can associate the imported geometry with an entire model, single part, or marker. Each option is
explained below:
• Entire model - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with an entire model, Adams
creates a new part for each unique group name in the .obj file.
• Single part - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a single Adams part, Adams
creates a separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file.
• Marker - If you associate the contents of a Wavefront .obj with a marker, Adams creates a
separate shell graphic object for each occurrence of a group in the .obj file. These shells become
the children of the part to which the marker belongs. The selected marker is the reference marker
for the shells.
Learn about Export - Wavefront.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Set to Wavefront.
File to Read Enter the name of the Wavefront .obj file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

296 Adams/View
Import - Wavefront Files

For the option: Do the following:

Part Name/ Set to whether you want to associate the geometry with a part or a model, and then
Model Name enter the name of the part or model in the text box located next to the pull-down
menu:

• Model Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a model,

Adams/View creates a new part for each unique group name that appears in the
file. If the same group name appears more than once, Adams/View adds a
separate shell geometric entity to the part with the same name as the group. It
assigns names to the shell using the convention SHLx, where x is a unique
integer.
• Part Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a single part,
Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It
assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a
unique integer.
• Marker Name - If you select to associate the geometry with a marker,
Adams/View creates a new shell for each group that appears in the file. It
assigns names to the shells using the convention group_name_x where x is a
unique integer.
The parts Adams/View creates are massless and editing their properties and then
attaching them to your model could be cumbersome. Therefore, we suggest you
use the Part Name option. See also Tips on Importing Wavefront Files.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Scale Factor Enter the amount you want to scale the geometry in the Wavefront .obj file.
Adams/View scales the geometry uniformly in the x, y, and z directions.
Geometry Placed Set to define whether the coordinates in the Wavefront file are to be interpreted as
relative to the part (relative_to_part) or relative to ground (relative_to_ground). By
default, Adams/View writes Wavefront files with the coordinates relative to the
part.
Set Read Only Set if you want all shells that are created as a result of importing a WaveFront file
to be tagged as read only. If you select read-only, Adams/View does not export the
read-only shells, which protects your shell files from being overwritten. You
cannot remove the read-only setting once Adams/View creates the shells.
 E - I 297
Impose Motion(s)

Impose Motion(s)
Right-click general motion -> Modify

Lets you modify a general Point Motion. It displays a set of options for each of the motion's six Degrees
of freedom (DOF). It displays a pull-down menu next to a DOF if it is free and can have motion applied
to it, and displays the label fixed if the DOF is constrained and cannot move.
Learn more:
• About Motion
• Modifying General Point Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the point motion to modify.
Moving Point Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn
About Point Motion. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Reference Point Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.
Type Enter how you want to define the motion.
F(time) Enter the following in the F(time) text boxes. The text boxes that appear
depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.

• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in

radians.)
• Function expression
• Parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More tool to display the Function Builder.
Disp. IC and Velo. IC Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
298 Adams/View
Information

Information
Database Navigator -> Information

Allows you to view information about the selected object. This lists the database fields for the selected
object.
Learn Viewing Object Information Through Database Navigator.

The option: Does the following:

Select to go back to the previous object.
Save to File Select to save the information to a file.
 E - I 299
Information Window

Information Window
Tools -> Model Topology Map/Model Verify or Right-click on a part -> Info

Adams/View uses the Information window to display many different types of information about your
model, simulation, or motion data. In addition to just viewing information about your model, you can
perform a variety of operations in the Information window.
The information includes:
• Topology on the different objects in your model
• Object information, such as information about a part or a view
• Model verification results
• Measurements from one coordinate system marker to another
• Result set component information
• View attributes
• Results from a system command you run using the Tools -> System Command

Learn more about:

• Information Window
• Viewing Model Topology Map Through Information Window
• Verifying Your Model

For the option: Do the following:

Apply Executes the command but leaves the dialog box open so you can execute the
command again.
Parent Displays an object's parent.
Children Displays an object's children.
Modify Select to display the modify dialog box for the object displayed in the text box at
the top of the Information window.
Verbose Select if you want to display more information about the object such as children of
the object, its geometry, whether or not commands are associated with it, and its
attributes like color and visibility.
Clear Removes all current information in the window.
Read from File Allows you to read information from a saved file.
Save to File Allows you to save the information.
300 Adams/View
Initial Conditions Tool

Initial Conditions Tool

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Initial Conditions tool

Performs an initial conditions simulation to check for any inconsistencies in your model. An initial
conditions simulation tries to reconcile any positioning inconsistencies that exist in your model at its
design configuration and make it suitable for performing a nonlinear or linear simulation. Most
importantly, the initial conditions simulation tries to ensure that all joint connections are defined properly.
For example, for a revolute joint to be defined properly, the origins of the Markers that define the joint
must be coincident throughout a simulation. If the markers are not coincident, the joint is broken and
needs to be repaired. In this example, the initial conditions simulation helps repair the broken revolute
joint by moving the origins of the two markers until they are coincident
You can also use the initial conditions simulation if you are creating parts in exploded view. Exploded
view is simply creating the individual parts separately and then assembling them together into a model.
You might find this convenient if you have several complicated parts that you want to create individually
without seeing how they work together until much later. Adams/View provides options for specifying
that you are creating your model in exploded view as you create constraints.
After selecting the Initial Conditions tool, Adams/View tells you when it has assembled your model
properly. You can revert back to your original design configuration or you can save your assembled
model as the new design configuration for your model.
Learn about Performing Initial Conditions Simulation.
 E - I 301
Inline Joint Tool

Inline Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Inline Joint Tool

Constrains one part so that it can only move along a straight line defined on a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The location of the inline joint on the first part must remain on the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
2 Bodies - 2 Locations there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
302 Adams/View
Inplane Joint Tool

Inplane Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Inplane Joint Tool

Constrains one part so that it can only move in a plane of a second part as shown below. In the figure, the
solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates the second part
that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The origin of the inplane joint on the first part must remain in the xy plane of the second part.
 E - I 303
Inplane Joint Tool

Learn about Creating Joint Primitives.

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
2 Bodies - 2 Locations there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints
to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
304 Adams/View
Input-Signal Function Block

Input-Signal Function Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Input function blocks are needed wherever a control or filter block does not receive its input from another
control or filter block. This includes external time functions that need to be passed into a block, as well
as measures of your model that represent error signals to pass into a block.
An input function block takes any valid Adams/Solver (run-time) expression as its input. The input
function block is a valid controls block to reference as the input to any other controls block.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Function Enter the function expression that defines the function block. Select the More
button to display the Function Builder and build an expression. See Function
Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

 E - I 305
Integrator Block

Integrator Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Integrator filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Initial Condition Specify the initial conditions.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

306 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Simulate -> Interactive

Main toolbox -> Click

Display tools for controlling Simulation. The dialog box contains a complete set of simulation controls,
while the Simulation container contains only a subset of the most commonly used simulation controls.

Simulation Controls Palette

Simulation Container (from Simulate Menu)

Learn about:
• Simulation Basics
• Types of Simulations
 E - I 307
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

• Performing an Interactive Simulation

• About Adjusting Your Model Before Simulation
• Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes

Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.

You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.

Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.

Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the
positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.

Starts the Simulation.

Replays an Animation of the last Simulation. Replaying an animation

displays the results much faster than if you simulate the model again and
watch the frames update as the solution calculates results. You can also
replay an animation of a saved simulation; for more information, see
Animation Controls.

How Adams/View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you

have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.

• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
to replay the animation, Adams/View automatically sets the model back
to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool
308 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Icon Description
Sim. Type Sets the type of Simulation:
• Default
• Dynamic simulation
• Kinematic simulation
• Static equilibrium
End Time/ Enter the time interval over which the simulation takes place and set how
Duration/Forever you want it defined. You can select:
• End Time - Specify the absolute point in time at which you want
the simulation to stop.
• Duration - Specify the amount of time over which you want the
simulation to run.
• Forever - Adams/View continues simulating until you stop the
simulation or until it can no longer solve the equations of motion to
within your specified tolerance. This option is only available on the
Simulation Control dialog box.
Steps/Step Size Set the frequency with which Adams/View outputs data during your
simulation. You can specify:
• Steps - Represents the total number of times you want
Adams/View to provide output information over your entire
simulation. For example, specify 50 steps over a 1-second
simulation interval to define an output period of 0.02 seconds per
step, which yields an output frequency of 50 steps/second.
• Step Size - Represents the amount of time, in current model units,
between output steps. The output frequency remains constant even
if you change your simulation end time or duration. For example,
enter a step size of 0.01 seconds to specify an output period of 0.01
seconds per step, which yields an output frequency of 100
steps/second.
Static Equilibrium Tool

No Debug/Eprint/Table Select either:

• No Debug - Display no debugging information.
• Eprint
• Table
More button Displays the full Interactive Simulation dialog box.

Render See Rendering mode.

 E - I 309
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Icon Description
Icons By default, Adams/View turns off all Screen icons during animations to
speed up the animation.

To turn on and off icons:

• On the Main toolbox, select the Icons button.
• On the Animation Controls dialog box, select Icons.
Shortcut: Type a lowercase v.
Start at equilibrium Select to have Adams/View perform a static simulation before performing
a dynamic simulation.
Reset before running Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the
Simulation.
Initial Conditions Tool

Allows the user to grab a part and drag it while the C++ Solver honors all
of the model's constraints. Useful for quickly verifying a model's behavior.

Displays the Compute Linear Modes dialog box.

Displays the Perform Vibration Analysis dialog box. Only available when
you have Adams/Vibration. For more information, see the Adams/Vibration
help.
See Linear Modes.

Displays the Compute and Export Linear States dialog box letting you
generate a state-space matrix representation of your mechanical system.

Displays the Adams2Nastran dialog box allowing the export of a linearized

NASTRAN model from Adams.

Update Graphics Display Clear the selection to never have your model updated during the simulation.
Select this when you are sure that your simulation will run to completion
without difficulty, and you want to maximize the efficiency of the
simulation.

Learn about setting more options for simulation display with Solver
Settings - Display dialog box help.
Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.
310 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Icon Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results

• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
save the simulation results.
• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position

Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save
the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new
name.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.

Displays the Linear Modes Controls dialog box.

Displays Adams/PostProcessor.

Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
 E - I 311
Intersect Tool

Intersect Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Intersect Tool

Creates a single part that is made up of only the intersecting geometries of two solids. It merges the
second part that you select with the geometry of the first part that you select and forms one rigid body
from the two geometries.

Learn about Creating One Part from the Intersection of Two Solids.
312 Adams/View
Intersect Tool

J-O
 J - O 313
Joint Initial Conditions

Joint Initial Conditions

Modify Joint dialog box -> Initial Conditions

Sets initial conditions for revolute, translational, and cylindrical joints, including translational and
rotational displacement and velocity. If you specify initial conditions, Adams/View uses them as the
initial displacement velocity of the part during an Initial conditions simulation regardless of any other
forces acting on the part.
Some options in the dialog box are not available (ghosted) depending on the type of joint for which you
are setting initial conditions.
Learn more about initial conditions for joints.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Joint Name Enter the name of the joint to modify.
Trans. Displ. Set the translational displacement.
Trans. Velo. Set the translational velocity.
Rot. Displ. Set the rotational displacement.
Rot. Velo. Set the rotational velocity.

Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint varies by anywhere
from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the joint, Adams/Solver issues a warning
message and continues execution. If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams/View
issues an error message and stops execution.
314 Adams/View
Joint Motion

Joint Motion
Right-click joint motion -> Modify

Lets you modify a Joint motion.

Learn more:
• Modifying Joint Motion
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Defining the Motion Magnitude
• DOF Removed by Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the joint motion to modify.
Joint Change the joint to which the motion is applied. The Joint Type text box
automatically updates to the selected type of joint.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Joint Type Displays the type of joint motion. For information only.
Direction Set to the desired motion direction (rotational or translational). You can select
only translational motion for a translational or cylindrical joint. You can select
only rotational motion for a revolute or cylindrical joint.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a
numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
Function If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the
Function (time) text box that appears:

• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in

radians.)
• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button

to display the Function Builder.

Tip: Use the DTOR or RTOD functions to specify rotation in

degrees.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be
passed to the MOTSUB user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is
optional.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
 J - O 315
Joint Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Type Set to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion
magnitude is defined.
Displacement IC and Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
Velocity IC appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
316 Adams/View
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Build -> Joints

Main toolbox -> Right-click Joints and Motion tool stacks

Displays tools for creating joints. The palette contains the entire library of joints while the tool stacks on
the Main toolbox contain only subsets of the most commonly used joints.
Learn about Using Toolboxes, Tool Stacks, and Palettes. Also learn about:
• Types of Motion
 J - O 317
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

• Overview of Constraints
318 Adams/View
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Create Joints Palette (from Build

Joint Toolstack Motion Toolstack Menu)
 J - O 319
Joint Palette and Joint and Motion Tool Stacks

Icon Link Icon Link

Revolute Joint Tool Gear Joint Tool

Hooke/Universal Joint Tool Rotational Motion Tool

Fixed Joint Tool Single Point Motion Tool

Translational Joint Tool Translational Motion Tool

Constant-Velocity Joint Tool General Point Motion Tool

Point-Curve Constraint Tool Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Cylindrical Joint Tool Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Coupler Joint Tool Orientation Joint Tool

2D Curve-Curve Constraint Tool Inplane Joint Tool

Spherical Joint Tool Inline Joint Tool

Screw Joint Tool Single Point Motion Tool

Create/Modify General Constraint Translational Motion Tool

Planar Joint Tool

Construction Contains options for creating the selected object. The options change depending
or Settings on the type of object that you are creating. For example, when you create a link,
Container Adams/View lets you specify its width, length, and height before creating it.
Then, as you create the link, these dimensions are set regardless of how you move
the mouse. You can also define design variables or expressions for many values.
320 Adams/View
Lead-Lag Filter Block

Lead-Lag Filter Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Lead-lag filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parameterize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Low Pass Specify the low pass constant.
Constant
The lead-lag filter is represented as: T(s) = s+ b/s+a
Lead constant Specify the value of b above.
Lag constant Specify the value of a above.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

 J - O 321
Lighting Settings

Lighting Settings
Settings -> Lighting Settings

Helps you enhance the quality and realism of your animations.

Click a tool below for more information.
Learn more about Setting Up Lighting.

Icon Description
Intensity Slide to set how bright the overall light is.
Ambient Slide to set the ambient light.
Angle Slide to set how far from the center line the light source is. May not be appropriate
for all light sources, such as front.
Reflections Toggle to set up reflections off of parts. See Reflections Example.
Two-Sided Turn on to have lighting come from two sides.
Turns on and off the light
322 Adams/View
Lighting Settings

Icon Description
Set from upper left corner.

Set from top

 J - O 323
Lighting Settings

Icon Description
Set from upper right corner

Set from left side

324 Adams/View
Lighting Settings

Icon Description
Set from right side

Set from lower right corner

 J - O 325
Lighting Settings

Icon Description
Set from bottom

Set from lower left corner

326 Adams/View
Linear Modes Controls

Linear Modes Controls

Review -> Linear Modes Controls

Allows you to view your model oscillating at one of its natural frequencies. It cycles through the model
deformation starting from the operating point of the requested natural frequency of the eigensolution.
You can also see the effect of the damping on the model and display a table and plot of modes and
frequencies.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.

For the option: Do the following:

Eigen Enter the name of an eigensolution in an existing analysis. The
eigensolution must be in an existing analysis that is associated with the
current model.
View Enter the name(s) of view(s) in which to display.
Mode Number/Frequency Select the mode to be used to calculate the deformation of the model. Set
to either:

• Mode - Enter the number of the mode to be used

• Frequency - Enter the frequency of the mode
Displays the next mode.

Select to animate the model.

Displays the previous mode.

Frames Per Cycle Enter the number of frames to be displayed for each cycle.

Adams/View performs the interpolation between the frames using

trigonometric functions; therefore, the frames tend to be segregated at the
maximum deformation in the positive and negative directions.
Number of Cycles Enter the parameter used to specify the number of complete cycles to
animate.
Show time decay Select if you want the amplitudes of the deformations to remain constant
or decay due to the damping factor calculated in the eigensolution.
 J - O 327
Linear Modes Controls

For the option: Do the following:

Show trail Select if you want to show the path, or trail, of parts from one frame to
another.

Showing the trail is useful in showing the relationship of the model parts
between frames but often obscures the view of the motion.
Show undeformed Select if you want the undeformed model to be displayed with the
deformed shape superimposed on top of it.

If you select Show undeformed, select a color for the underformed model.
If you do not specify a color, Adams/View displays the undeformed model
using the same color as the deformed mode.
Show icons Select to turn on the display icons during an animation.
Undef. Color Specify the color for undeformed shape or use original colors.
Max. Translation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that translations are smaller than it.
Max. Rotation Enter a value to scale mode shape so that rotations are smaller than it.
Table Select to display eigenvalues in a tabular form.
Plot Select to plot complex eigenvalue scatter.
Select to switch to Simulation Controls.
328 Adams/View
Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot

Linear Modes Eigenvalue Plot

Review -> Linear Modes Controls -> Plot

Displays the plot of eigenvalues and allows you to save or delete the plot.
Learn about Animating Natural Frequencies.

For the option: Do the following:

Delete Plot Select if you want to delete the plot.
Save Plot Select if you want to save the plot.
Name Only available if you selected Save Plot. Enter a name for the plot you want to
save.
 J - O 329
Link Tool

Link Tool
Buid -> Bodies/Geometry -> Link Tool

Creates a link by drawing a line indicating the link’s length. By default, the Link tool creates the link with
a width that is 10% of the indicated length and a depth that is 5% of the length. The radius of the ends of
the link is equal to half the width. Before drawing, you can also define the length, width, and depth of the
link.

Learn about Creating a Link.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the link to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the link to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence
the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a
car driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race
track can be added to ground.
Length If desired, select and enter the length for the link.
Width If desired, select and enter the width for the link.
Depth If desired, select and enter the depth for the link.

Note: Two hotpoints appear after you draw the link: one hotpoint lets you modify the length of
the link and the other hotpoint lets you modify the depth, width, and height. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
330 Adams/View
Location Table

Location Table

Polyline, Spline, Extrusion, Revolution Modify dialog box -> More button

Lets you view the points in polylines, splines, extrusions, and revolutions and edit them. You can also
save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.
Learn more:
• Displaying the Location Table
• Working in the Location Table
• Reading and Writing Location Information

For general information on using tables in Adams/View, see Using Tables to Enter Values.
 J - O 331
LocationEvent

LocationEvent
When Adams/View asks you for a location, right-click

Lets you enter location coordinates to precisely set the location of an object, such as a design point or a
force. You can enter the location relative to the origin of the Working grid, the global coordinate system,
or any other object on the screen.
Learn about:
• Entering Precise Location Coordinates
• Selecting Objects from a Crowd

For the option: Do the following:

Upper box (no title) Enter the coordinates at which to place the object. By default, displays the
current coordinates of the cursor.
Pull-down menu Select the element (working grid, global coordinate system, or modeling object)
to which the coordinates are relative. By default, the coordinates are relative to
the working grid.
Lower box (no title) In the lower box, enter the object to which the coordinates are relative. You only
need to enter an object if you selected that the coordinates are relative to an
object.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

332 Adams/View
Low-Pass Filter Block

Low-Pass Filter Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Low-pass filter blocks create the s-domain (Laplace domain) representation of basic linear transfer
functions. The filter coefficients are specified as an Adams/View scalar real value. You can parametrize
this constant with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the gain of
the associated block.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input field to these blocks.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Low Pass Specify the low pass constant.
Constant
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

 J - O 333
MDI Insight Build

MDI Insight Build

Command Navigator -> MDI -> Insight -> Build

This command enables you to write all the investigation .adm and .acf files out to disk. This can be
helpful if you do not want to run all the simulations in one Adams/View session or if you want to
distribute the jobs to multiple CPUs. This command temporarily sets solver preferences to
write_files_only and creates the simulation and command files. You can subsequently use the primary
driver .acf file (<prefix>_bat.acf) to run all the simulations. When all the jobs have completed
successfully, you use the commands MDI INSIGHT LOAD to load the results back into the
Adams/Insight experiment file with the use of <prefix>_bat.cmd.
If you use the <prefix>_bat.acf file to launch all the simulations, note the following:
• Be sure your SENSOR statements do not have the HALT qualifier.
• If one job fails, the process will need to be restarted manually.
• Instead of the <prefix>_bat.acf you can create a script to run the jobs.
• Set nosep.

Once the analysis files have been written, it is important to check a few of the files to verify that the
factors are actually being altered the way you expect them to. Using a text file differencing tool is a
convenient way to accomplish this task.
To run the simulations external to Adams/View, make sure you select the appropriate simulation script
type and that you're saving the appropriate OUTPUT files. It is recommended that you perform a
Perimeter Study exercising each aspect of this process before running the longer set of simulations.
Once the simulations have completed, be sure to review the simulations results by checking .req and .msg
file sizes. Also, perform a grep for ERROR in the .msg files.
After the simulation results have been completed and read back into Adams/Insight, make sure you
review the contents of the response columns in the WorkSpace matrix.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Experiment Enter the name of a previously-defined experiment. This experiment will be
referenced to build all the .adm and .acf files required to complete the investigation
defined in the experiment.
Ain Prefix Enter the prefix that will be added to the beginning of all the files generated during
the build process, and then subsequently during the simulations.
334 Adams/View
Macro Editor

Macro Editor
Tools -> Macro -> Edit -> New

Edits Macros that you recorded or that you created by reading in a macro file. You can also use the Macro
Editor to create a macro.

Note: If you select Modify from this menu, the Database Navigator appears. From the Database
Navigator, select a macro to modify.

Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.

For the option: Do the following:

Macro Name Enter the name of the macro.
User-Entered Command Enter the command string that executes the macro. To use the name of the
macro, select Use Macro Name.
Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command.
Note that a single undo command can consume a great deal of memory for
very large macros, or slow macro execution noticeably, even if you do not
actually use the Undo.
Commands Enter the commands the macro is to execute.
 J - O 335
Macro Read

Macro Read
Tools -> Macro -> Read

Allows you to read in an existing command file containing the commands to be executed as a macro. You
can also assign a help file or text string to the macro that explains the macro's use.
Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.

For the option: Do the following:

Macro Name Enter the name of the macro that Adams/View uses to save the macro in the
Modeling database.
File Name Enter the name of the file containing the commands to be executed.
User Entered Command Specify the command string that executes the macro. The command string
defaults to the name of the macro if you do not enter a command sting.

Note: The command string you enter must be unique. You cannot
redefine an existing command, although you can add a new
keyword at any level to an existing command.
Wrap in Undo Specify if the entire macro can be undone with a single Undo command.
Note that a single Undo, while convenient, can consume a great deal of
memory for very large macros or slow macro execution noticeably, even if
you do not actually use the Undo.
Create Panel Select Yes if you want to create a dialog box, or select no if you do not want
to create a dialog box.
336 Adams/View
Macro Write

Macro Write
Tools -> Macro -> Write

Saves the macro to a command file. Saving the macro to a command file lets you give the macro to
another user, and also helps you modify long macros when you do not have the original file.
If you used non-default values for the other macro data, such as the help string, the command file includes
comments with those values.

Note: Adams/View saves all macros in the current Modeling database when you save the
database.

Learn about Automating Your Work Using Macros.

For the option: Do the following:

Macro Name Enter the name of the macro to save to a file.
File Name Enter the file name in which to save the macro, and then select OK.
 J - O 337
Main Toolbox

Main Toolbox
Displays commonly used tools for creating, editing, and selecting modeling elements, as well as
simulating the model and undoing operations. The tools are shortcuts to using the menus in the menu bar.
In addition, many of the tools are Tool stacks. Right-click a tool to display its tool stack.
338 Adams/View
Main Toolbox

Icon Description
Select Tool

Geometric Modeling Palette and Tool Stack

Measure Toolstack

Undoing and Redoing Operations

Joint Toolstack

Interactive Simulation Palette and Container

Object Color Tool Stack

Motion Toolstack

Animation Controls

Move Toolstack

Forces Tool Stack

Displays Adams/PostProcessor

See Fitting a Model in a Window

See Defining a Zoom Area

See Setting the Center of a View Window

 J - O 339
Main Toolbox

Icon Description
Dynamic Rotation Tool Stack

Translate Tool Stack

See Dynamically Zooming the Display

Increment Entering a value lets you more precisely control the view display changes,
such as zooming and rotations.
View Orientation Tools

See Orienting the View Using an Object XY

See Orienting the View Using Three Points

Background Color Tool Stack

Toggle Tool Stack

Window Layout

Grid See Working grid

Depth See Setting the View Perspective
Render See Rendering mode
Icons Toggles the display of icons.
340 Adams/View
Marker Modify

Marker Modify
Right-click a marker -> Modify

Allows you to precisely control the location and orientation of your marker. The options available depend
on whether or not the marker is attached to a part, ground, or curve or a node on a flexible body. Select
a topic below:
• Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve
• Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system (when an MNF/MD DB is
specified)

Marker on Part, Ground, or Curve

When you modify a marker on a part or ground, you can define its location and orientation more precisely
than when you created it.
If you are using Adams/Solver (C++), you can define a curve along which the marker will move (splines
and data-element curves are all considered curves) and be oriented. You can then use the marker to define
constraints. For example, you could use it to define the position and orientation of a joint or joint
primitive. This requires two markers, one in each part that the joint or joint primitive connects. Learn
about switching solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the marker you are modifying.
Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the marker's location in a given
reference frame.
Location Relative To You can:

• Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Curve Enter the curve along which the marker will move. The curve (its
direction and curvature) define the position and orientation of the marker.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Curve Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline.
The marker acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate
values used to define the reference curve points.
 J - O 341
Marker Modify

For the option: Do the following:

Tangent Velocity/Vector Define the velocity of the marker origin along the curve. Select either:
Velocity
• Tangent Velocity - Defines the initial velocity of the marker
origin along the curve. It is negative if the marker is initially
moving toward the start of the curve, and it is positive if the
marker is moving toward the end of the curve.
• Vector Velocity - Specifies the initial translational velocity of
the maker along the x-, y-, and z-axes of the Curve Reference
Marker coordinate system. Adams/View projects the initial
velocity onto the curve. Therefore, any contribution of the
specified initial velocity vector that is not along the curve is
discarded.
Orientation/ Specify either of these three Orientation Methods:

Along Axis Orientation/ • Orientation

• Along Axis Orientation
In Plane Orientation
• In Plane Orientation
Orientation Relative To You can:

• Specify the orientation coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Solver ID Enter a unique ID number for the marker. See Adams/Solver ID.
Select to add any comments about the marker that you want to enter to
help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

Marker Attached to Node on Flexible Body or an external system

When you modify a marker attached to a node on a flexible body, you can define its location and
orientation more precisely than when you created it. If you are using Adams/Solver (C++), you can define
342 Adams/View
Marker Modify

the marker so it is offset from the node or you can attach it to several nodes. Learn about Adding Markers
to Flexible Bodies.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the marker you are modifying.
Location Enter x, y, z coordinate defining the marker's location in a given
reference frame. You can enter a location that is offset from the node ID
to which the marker is attached.
Location Relative To You can:

• Enter the marker in which you specify the location coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Node ID Enter a node ID to which the marker is attached. If you are using
Adams/Solver (C++), you can enter a comma-separated list of
attachment nodes, or right-click the text box, select Pick FlexBody
Node, and then click the desired attachment nodes with the mouse.
Snap Select to define the location of the marker so it is coincident with the
node listed in the Node ID text box. Note that when the option is
checked, the Node ID parameter is compulsory. If left unchecked, it is
NOT mandatory to define the Node Id parameter.
Orientation/ Specify either of these three Orientation Methods:

Along Axis Orientation/ • Orientation

• Along Axis Orientation
In Plane Orientation
• In Plane Orientation
Orientation Relative To You can:

• Specify the orientation coordinates.

• Leave blank to use the default coordinate system.
Solver ID Enter a unique ID number for the marker. See Adams/Solver ID.
Select to add any comments about the marker that you want to enter to
help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

 J - O 343
Marker Tool

Marker Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Marker Tool

Creates a marker on:

• Ground
• A part (including a flexible body or an external system)
• A curve (available in Adams/Solver (C++) only) (Learn about switching solvers with Solver
Settings - Executable dialog box help.)

When you select to create a marker using the Marker tool, you specify the marker's location and
orientation (when you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly). You can align
the orientation of the marker with the global coordinate system, the current view coordinate system, or a
coordinate system that you define. When you define a coordinate system, you specify one or two of its
axes and Adams/View calculates the other axes accordingly.
After you create the marker, you can make changes to it, such as attach it to several nodes of a flexible
body and align it so it stays along a specified curve. Learn about modifying marker with Marker Modify
dialog box help.

Note: You can parameterize the locations and orientations of other objects to that of markers. For
example, you can align the location of a part to be the same as a marker regardless of how
the marker moves. Unlike points, whose parameterization is automatic, you must set up
relationship of markers to other objects. For more information on establishing parameteric
relationships, see, Improving Your Model Designs.

Tip: To reorient the marker, use the Align & Rotate tool from the Move tool stack, select Align
One Axis, and then follow the prompts:

• Select the object to align (the first marker)

• Select the axis on object to align (z-axis on first marker)
• Select the direction for the axis:
• Select the center of the first marker
• Select the center of the second marker
344 Adams/View
Marker Tool

Learn about Creating Markers.

For the option: Do the following:

Add to Part/Add to Select either:
Ground/
• Add to Part - Adds the marker to another part in your model.
• Add to Ground - Adds the marker to ground.
• Add to Curve - Adds the marker to a spline curve.
Tip: Add the geometry to ground if the geometry does not move
or influence the simulation of your model. For example, if
you are simulating a car driving around a race track, the
geometry that defines the race track can be added to ground.
For flex markers or markers on an external system (with a MNF/MD DB
specified), you can turn the snapping behavior on and off using the Snap
to Node checkbox. Note that the checkbox is seen, only while adding
markers to a flexible body or an external system with an MNF/MD DB
specified.
Orientation Select an orientation method for how you want the marker oriented. When
you define a marker on a curve, its orientation is prescribed implicitly.
 J - O 345
Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

Simulate -> Interactive -> Table

Displays the Debug table, which contains a running count of the iterations needed to solve the equations
of motion for the current Simulation. You can use the information as a measure of how many
computations Adams/Solver is performing.
Learn more about Debugging Your Model.

The option: Displays the following:

Time The value of time at the beginning of a step.
Type The type of simulation currently being run. It can be one of the following:

• DYN for a Dynamic simulation.

• KIN for a Kinematic simulation.
• STA for a Static equilibrium simulation.
• TRA for Transient simulation.
• QST for Quasi-static simulation.
• ICD for initial conditions displacements.
• ICV for initial conditions velocity.
• ICA for initial conditions acceleration.
• EIG for Eigen solution.
• STM for state matrix solution.
Steps The current Output step number. It is a running count of the number of integration
steps taken, and you can use it as a measure of how hard Adams/Solver is working.
Learn about displaying a strip chart of this information.
Step Size The current size of the integration time step.
Iterations The number of the current iteration. It is one at the beginning of each time step and
increments by one until Adams/Solver converges to a solution or exceeds the
maximum allowable number of iterations.
Order The order of the predictor. It corresponds to the order of the polynomial Adams/Solver
uses to predict the solution at the end of an integration step.
Rank The current ranking of the modeling objects in order of their experiencing the most
error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force, depending on the element that you
are currently tracking.
Element The modeling objects experiencing the most error or the greatest change, acceleration,
or force, depending on the element that you are currently tracking. The number of
objects listed depends on the number you requested in the Show box.
346 Adams/View
Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table)

The option: Displays the following:

Hits The number of times the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects
where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You
specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.
Percent The percentage of time the modeling object was placed in the top n of modeling objects
where n is the number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You
specify the number of objects in the maximum list in the Show box.
History Depth Number of iterations for which the listed modeling objects appeared. You can change
this value.
Show The number of modeling objects that appear in the maximum list. You can change this
value. By default, Adams/View displays three objects in the list at any one time.
 J - O 347
Measure Attributes

Measure Attributes
Build -> Object Measure -> Modify -> Measure Attributes Tool

When you modify a measure, you can set the attributes for a Strip chart, including creating a legend,
setting axis limits, and setting the color and line type for the curve.

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Enter the name of the measure whose attributes you want to set.
General Attributes
Legend Enter text that describes the data that the curve in the strip chart represents. The
text appears in the title bar of the strip chart. Note that you have to redisplay the
strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend. Learn about redisplaying
strip charts.
Comments Enter text that describes the measure. The text appears in Adams/PostProcessor
when you transfer the strip chart to it for plotting. See Comments.

Learn how to transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.

Axis Attributes
Lower/Lower/Label Currently not available.
Type Select the type of plot to be displayed in Adams/PostProcessor when you
transfer the strip chart to it for plotting:

• linear - Performs no transformation of data or axis values. This is the

default.
• logar (Logarithmic) - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is
separated by the same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100,
1000, and 10,000 are equally spaced.
• db (Decibel) - Displays 20 * log 10 (value) for each value.
• default - Selecting this means no specific axis type is requested and it
appears in the default axis type, which is usually linear. Learn how to
transfer a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor.
Axis Attributes

Note that you have to redisplay the strip chart to see the effects of changing the legend using the options
below. Learn about redisplaying strip charts.
Line Type Select a type of line style for the curve. For example, you can select a line that
alternates between dots and dashes.
Symbol Set the type of symbol displayed at data points along the curve.
348 Adams/View
Measure Attributes

For the option: Do the following:

Color Change the color of the curve.
Thickness Change the weight of the curve line. Weight values range from 1 to 5 screen
pixels.
 J - O 349
Measure Distance

Measure Distance
Tools -> Measure Distance Shared Dialog Box
Calculates the relative distance and orientation between two positions in your model (Markers, Points, or
a marker/point) and ground. Adams/View calculates the following distance information:
• Magnitude
• x, y, and z component
• Angular displacement

You can also select that Adams/View calculate the results relative to a reference marker. You can select
to measure the distance at the model's initial configuration (how you built it) or at a particular simulation
step. You can specify a time, frame number, or a configuration of the model. You can view the results in
an Information window or have Adams/View store the results in a file.
Learn more about Measuring Distance Between Positions.

For the option: Do the following:

First Position Enter the marker from which you want to measure the distance.
Second Position Enter the marker to which you want to measure the distance.
Ref Position You can:

• Enter a marker or point that defines the coordinate system in

which to represent distance information. Using a point as the
reference position is the same as using a marker whose
orientation is identical to the global orientation.
• Leave blank to define the distance information in the global
coordinate system.
Write Result to File Name Enter the name of the file in which you want to save the distance
information. If you want the information written to a directory other
than the one from which you are running Adams/View, include the
path.

Note: If you do not specify a file, your results will appear in an

Information window.
Model Name/ Choose either:

Analysis Name • Model Name - To calculate the distance based on the current
configuration of a model.
• Analysis Name - To calculate the distance based on a
configuration or simulation time in a particular Simulation.
If you selected Model Name, the following option appears:
350 Adams/View
Measure Distance

For the option: Do the following:

Model Name Enter the name of the current model in the text box. If you want to
measure distance in the current model, you do not need to enter a
model name.
If you selected Analysis Name, the following options appear:
Analysis Name Enter the name of the simulation.
Configuration/Time/Frame Select to use a particular time, frame, or configuration store in the
Number selected simulation.
 J - O 351
Measure Toolstack

Measure Toolstack
Main toolbox -> Measure toolstack

Displays a shortcuts to creating measures.

See Creating a Point-to-Point Measure Using the Simple Method.

See Selecting Markers to Define Angle Measures - Select Method.
352 Adams/View
Merge Tool

Merge Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Merge Tool

Merges two non-intersecting rigid body geometries into one without performing any Boolean operations
on the geometry. The geometry can contain any type of geometry: solid, wire, or complex. The geometry
can also belong to the same part. If the geometry belongs to the different parts, The Merge tool merges
the parts into one.
Because Adams/View does not perform any Boolean operations on the merged geometries, overlapping
volumes produce double-density mass in the part and change the results of the mass property
calculations. Therefore, you should use this operation only for non-intersecting rigid bodies that the Unite
Tool cannot combine.

Adams/View merges the second geometry that you select into the first geometry you select.
Learn about Merging Geometry.
 J - O 353
Merge Two Models

Merge Two Models

Tools -> Merge Two Models

Allows you to merge one Model in your Modeling database into another model. Adams/View maintains
the source model and does not change it after the merge operation.
This is helpful for merging two subsystems stored in the same database into a single model. It allows you
to work on each subsystem individually and merge them together when you are ready to work on them
as a whole.
Learn about the procedure for Merging Models.

For the option: Do the following:

Base Model Name Enter the name of the destination model.
Model to be merged Enter the name of the source model that you want merged into the
destination model.

You can browse for a model by right-clicking the text boxes and selecting
the appropriate commands.
Translate Specify the translations to apply to the source model before merging it
with the destination model.

By default, you enter Cartesian (x,y,z) coordinates. You can change the
convention for entering translational positions. Learn more about
Coordinate Systems in Adams/View.
Rotation Specify the angular position of the parts and polylines in the source
model.
Add all elements to a Optional. Enter a new or existing group into which Adams/View adds all
Group named merged objects. Learn about Grouping and Ungrouping Objects.
Merge/Rename Select either:

• Merge - Merge parts that have the same name.

• Rename - Rename the parts before merging the models.
354 Adams/View
Message (.msg) Content

Message (.msg) Content

Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Message (.msg) Content

Selecting Message (.msg) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the contents of the Message file. You only receive a message file when you are using External
Adams/Solver. Learn about setting the type of Adams/Solver.

For the option: Do the following:

Topology Select to print model topological data in the message file.
Statistics Prints a block of information for each kinematic, static, or dynamic step. This
information helps you monitor the simulation process and locate the source of the
error if there is a problem. Each step consists of two phases:

• A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics)

• The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics)
For more information, see the argument EPRINT in the DEBUG command in the
Adams/Solver online help.
Verbose Prints additional information, such as the name of the subroutine from which
Adams/Solver sends each diagnostic, explanations, and possible remedies (when
available). If you set Verbose to No, Adams/Solver outputs only basic error
messages.
 J - O 355
Message Settings

Message Settings
View -> Message Window -> Settings

Allows you to set the messages displayed in the Message Window and clear the messages from the
window. By default, the message window only displays error and fatal messages and messages from
commands that you execute from the user interface (for example, menus and dialog boxes). You can also
display messages that you execute from the Command window, Command Navigator, and command files.
In addition, you can set the severity level of the messages displayed, from informational to fatal
messages. Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.

For the option: Do the following:

only Graphical User Interface Select if you want to display messages that are generated from
(GUI) widgets commands you execute from the user interface.
the GUI, the command line, Select if you want to display messages that you execute from the user
and command files interface, command window, Command Navigator, and command
files.
Don't display messages Select if you want to turn off the display of all messages.
Information Select to display messages about what is occurring during a
command. Setting the message window to display these types of
messages helps you understand what is happening in Adams/View
but requires no action from you.
Warning Select to display messages that warn you that something unusual
occurred but the operation can continue. You may want to fix or
change something to complete the operation without warnings.
Error Select to display messages that indicate that the operation cannot be
executed. You need to fix or change something to complete the
operation.
Fault Select to display messages that indicate that a programming error
occurred. You should report the message to MSC’s Technical Support
staff.
Clear Select to clear the messages displayed.
356 Adams/View
Message Window

Message Window
View -> Message Window

Provides you with messages on the status of Adams/View and displays helpful information while you are
using Adams.
Adams/View displays messages about the execution of a command in the message window. By default,
the message window only displays messages about commands you execute from the user interface. You
can also set it to display messages about commands that you execute from the Command window,
Command Navigator, and command files.

Learn about Managing Messages in Adams/View.

 J - O 357
MNF and MD DB Transformation

MNF and MD DB Transformation

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> MNF XForm...

It performs transformation on an already existing flexible body or Modal Neutral File (MNF) or MD DB
File (.master). The types of transformation operations that can be performed are:
• Translation - Translate along a vector, by specified distance.
• Rotation - Rotate about an axis, by specified angle.
• Mirroring - Mirror about a plane.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Select either:
Name/MNF File/MD
DB • Flexible Body Name, and then select a flexible body that already
exists.
• MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.
• MD DB, and then select the name of the MD DB to import.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Index The parameter applies only, when you select MD DB file. The parameter
specifies the index of the flexible body in the specified MD DB. The parameter
is optional. Default value is 1.

Note: You can view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB, using the “…”
button provided beside the Index. The desired flexible body can be
selected by double-clicking on the displayed list.
MNF/MD DB Select the appropriate option for Output File and enter the name of the MNF
or the MD DB file.
Create Flexible Select to open Create a Flexible Body dialog box after the intended
Body... transformation is carried out, so that you can create the flexible body and see
the transformation.
Mirror Select to perform mirroring operation. You need to specify mirroring plane to
perform mirroring operation.
Translate Select to perform translation operation. You need to specify a direction for
translation and a distance to translate.
Rotate Select to perform rotation operation. You need to specify the axis about which
rotation can be done and an angle for rotation.
If Mirror option is selected, following options are available.
358 Adams/View
MNF and MD DB Transformation

For the option: Do the following:

Plane Normal to Specify either of these three methods to specify the mirroring plane:
Vector/
Plane From 3 Points/ • Plane Normal to Vector - This option allows you to specify a vector
Plane Normal to 2 which is normal to the plane about which you want to mirror the
Points flexible body.
• Plane From 3 Points - This option allows you to specify three points
to define the mirroring plane.
• Plane Normal to 2 Points - This option allows you to specify 2 points
which define a vector normal to the plane about which you want to
mirror the flexible body.
If Plane Normal to Vector is selected, following options are available.
Direction Direction can be one of the following:

• Global X - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global X axis.
• Global Y - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Y axis.
• Global Z - This option specifies that the mirror plane is normal to the
global Z axis.
• X axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's X axis.
• Y axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's Y axis.
• Z axis of Marker - This option specifies that the mirror plane is
normal to the specified Marker's Z axis.
• User Defined - This option specifies the mirror plane is normal to the
user entered vector.
Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.

Mirroring will be done with respect to marker's orientations (X Axis, Y Axis or

Z Axis) respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
Location Enter a location on the mirror plane.
If Plane From 3 Points is selected, the following options will be available.
Point 1, Point 2, Specify the coordinates of three points that define the mirroring plane.
Point3
If Plane Normal to 2 Points is selected, the following options will be available.
 J - O 359
MNF and MD DB Transformation

For the option: Do the following:

From Location, To Enter the coordinates of two end points of a vector that is normal to the
Location mirroring plane.
If Translate option is selected, the following options are available.
Direction From Specify either of these three methods to define the direction of translation:
Vector/
Direction Normal to 3 • Direction From Vector - direction is specified as a vector.
Points/ • Direction Normal to 3 Points - direction is specified as normal to a
Direction From 2 plane.
Points
• Direction From 2 Points - direction is specified by two end points of
a vector.
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options will be available.
Direction Direction can be one of the following:

• Global X - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of

global X axis.
• Global Y - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of
global Y axis.
• Global Z - This option translates the flexible body in the direction of
global Z axis.
• X axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the
direction of the specified Marker's X axis.
• Y axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the
direction of the specified Marker's Y axis.
• Z axis of Marker - This option translates the flexible body in the
direction of the specified Marker's Z axis.
• User Defined - This option translates the flexible body in the specified
direction.
Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.

Translation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis

or Z Axis) respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
Point 1, Point 2, Specify the coordinates of three points that define a plane. Translation will be
Point3 performed in the direction which is normal to the plane.
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options will be available.
From Location, To Enter the coordinates of two end points; translation will be done in the
Location direction of the two end points.
360 Adams/View
MNF and MD DB Transformation

For the option: Do the following:

Distance Enter the distance for translation of the flexible body. Except for the Direction
From 2 Points option you are required to specify a value for Distance. For
Direction From 2 Points option, if Distance is not specified it is calculated to
be the distance between the two points.
If Rotate option is selected, following options will be available.
Direction From Specify either of these three methods to specify an axis of rotation:
Vector/
Direction Normal to 3 • Direction From Vector - rotation axis is defined as a vector.
Points/ • Direction Normal to 3 Points - rotation axis is defined as a plane
Direction From 2 normal.
Points
• Direction From 2 Points - rotation axis is defined by two end points.
If Direction From Vector option is selected, the following options are available.
Direction Direction either can be

• Global X - The rotation axis is parallel to the global X axis.

• Global Y - The rotation axis is parallel to the global Y axis.
• Global Z - The rotation axis is parallel to the global Z axis.
• X axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified
Marker's X axis.
• Y axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified
Marker's Y axis.
• Z axis of Marker - The rotation axis is parallel to the specified
Marker's Z axis.
• User Defined - The rotation axis is parallel to the user specified
vector..
Marker Only available if Direction is either X Axis, Y Axis or Z Axis of Marker.

Rotation will be done with respect to marker's orientation (X Axis, Y Axis or Z

Axis) respectively.
Direction Vector Only available if Direction is User Defined.
Center of rotation Enter the coordinates for the center of rotation.
If Direction Normal to 3 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
Point 1 (center of Enter the coordinates of the three points that define a plane; rotation will be
rotation), Point 2, done about the axis which is normal to the plane, using Point 1 as the center of
Point3 rotation.
If Direction From 2 Points option is selected, the following options are available.
From Location, To Enter the coordinates of end points; the end points define the axis for rotation.
Location
 J - O 361
MNF and MD DB Transformation

For the option: Do the following:

Angle Enter the angle for rotation of the flexible body.
Node Offset/ New This option allows you to offset all the node IDs or to specify new interface IDs
Interface IDs of the flexible body. This option is common for all the transformation options
(that is, Mirroring, Translation and Rotation).

• Node Offset - Enter a value to offset all the node IDs.

• New Interface IDs - Enter new interface IDs for the current interface
node IDs. Here the number of interface node ids entered have to be
less than or equal to current interface node IDs of the flexible body.
If you check the More option following parameter will appear.
MNF Write Options This option optimizes the MNF through Adams/Flex toolkit. It corresponds to
the parameters in the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS environment variable.

For more information on the MDI_MNFWRITE_OPTIONS, see Setting Up

Translation Options through the MNF Toolkit.
362 Adams/View
Model Verify Tool

Model Verify Tool

Interactive/Scripted Simulation Dialog Box -> Model Verify Tool
Tools -> Model Verify

Checks for error conditions in your model, such as misaligned joints, unconstrained parts, or massless
parts in dynamic models, and alerts you to other possible problems. It is a good tool to use periodically
as you add detail to or refine your model.
The Model Verify tool calculates the number of Degrees of freedom (DOF) in your model. It gives you
two separate calculations:
• The Gruebler count, which is a rough estimate of the number of DOF in your model using the
Gruebler equation to add up the number of DOF introduced by parts and to subtract the number
of DOF removed by constraints.
• The actual number and type of movable parts and constraints in the model that Adams/Solver
determines after it formulates your model’s equations of motion.
It issues warning messages to alert you to any inconsistencies in your model. For example,
inconsistencies can occur when you have not defined connections properly or parts are free to move but
have no mass properties assigned to them.
The verification results appear in the Information Window.
Learn about Verifying Your Model.
 J - O 363
Modify Body

Modify Body
Right-click part -> Part name -> Modify

Modifies the following for a part:

• Name, location, and orientation
• Mass and inertia
• Initial velocities
• Initial location and orientation

In addition, it also defines a new ground part.

To modify these properties:

• Set Category to:
• Name and Position
• Mass Properties
• Velocity Initial Conditions
• Position Initial Conditions
• Ground Part
364 Adams/View
Modify Body - Ground Part

Modify Body - Ground Part

Defines a new or existing part as the ground part.
Examples of where defining a new part may be helpful:
• If you merge two models, each of which has its own ground part, after the merge, the resulting
ground part may not be what you want so you will need to define another part as the ground part.
• You build a model that represents a small subset of your actual system, and then want to expand
the model and need to redefine what is ground. For example, if you were modeling a door handle
on a car door, you might just have a simple model where the door is ground. Later, you may want
to expand the model so that the door swings on the car frame. In that case, you would want to
define a new part representing the car body as ground and attach the old ground to the car body
with a revolute joint.

For the option: Do the following:

New Ground Enter a new or existing part to be used as the ground part. Tips on Entering
Object Names in Text Boxes.
Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
Learn about Comments.
 J - O 365
Modify Body - Mass Properties

Modify Body - Mass Properties

By default, Adams/View calculates the mass and inertia for a rigid body part based on the part’s geometry
and material type. The geometry defines the volume and the material type defines the density. The default
material type for rigid bodies is steel.
You can change the material type used to calculate mass and inertia or simply specify the density of the
part. If you do not want Adams/View to calculate mass and inertia using a part’s geometry, material type,
or density, you can enter your own mass and moments of inertia.
It is possible to assign zero mass to a part whose six Degrees of freedom you constrain with respect to
parts that do have mass. You should not assign a part zero mass, however. Any part that has zero mass
and translational degrees of freedom can causes simulation failure (since a = F/m). Therefore, we
recommend that you assign finite masses and inertias to all parts. In addition, a part without mass cannot
have mass moments of inertia.
Learn about Methods for Calculating Mass Properties.

For the option: Do the following:

Define Mass By Set to:

• Material Type
• Geometry and Density
• User Input
If you selected Material Type, the following options appears:
Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams/View displays the
material’s composition below the text box. Adams/View uses the density
associated with the material type and volume of the geometry of the part to
calculate the part’s mass and inertia. Learn about Standard Material
Properties. Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams/View calculates.
If you selected Geometry and Density, the following options appears:
Density Enter the density of the part. Adams/View uses the part’s density and the
volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
Show calculated inertia Select to view the mass-inertia tensor matrix that Adams/View calculates.
If you selected User Input, the following options appear:
Mass Enter the mass of the part.
Moments of inertia Enter the mass moments of inertia. Learn About Entering Mass Moments of
Inertia.
Center of Mass Marker Enter the marker that is to be used to define the center-of-mass (CM) for
the part.
366 Adams/View
Modify Body - Mass Properties

For the option: Do the following:

Off-Diagonal Terms Select to enter the cross-products of inertia (Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz). Clear to enter
just the principal mass moments of inertia (Ixx, Iyy, Izz).
Inertia Reference Marker Specify the marker that defines the axes for the inertia properties. If you do
not enter an inertia marker, Adams/View uses the part CM marker for
inertia properties.
Add any comments about the variable to help you manage and identify it.
You can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the
request, in the Adams/View Log file, and in a command or dataset file when
you export your model to these types of files.
 J - O 367
Modify Body - Name and Position

Modify Body - Name and Position

Changes the name of a part and sets its position. Learn about Modifying Part Name and Location.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the rigid body.
Solver ID Assign a unique ID number to the rigid body. See Adams/Solver ID.
Location Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object. If you enter a location
in the Relative To text box, Adams/View applies the coordinates relative to that
coordinate system.
Orientation/ Select one of the following to set different Orientation Methods:
Along Axis/
In Plane • Orientation
• Along Axis
• In Plane
Relative To Enter a reference frame relative to which the location and orientation are defined.
Planar Available for rigid bodies only

Set to identify a three-dimensional rigid body as a planar part.

If the selected part is a flexible body following 3 options will appear
Char Length Specify the characteristic length of the flexible body for linear limit check. This
should be in the model length unit.
Dynamic Limit Specify the threshold frequency for quasi-static modes.
Stability Factor Specify the amount of damping needed to add to the quasi-static modes.
Select to add any comments about the body to help you manage and identify it.
Learn about Comments.
368 Adams/View
Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions

Modify Body - Position Initial Conditions

In addition to specifying initial velocities, you can also control the initial position for a part’s location
and orientation. You should specify the initial position when you do not want Adams/View to reposition
the part. Adams/Solver uses the initial position during an Initial conditions simulation, which it runs before
it runs a Simulation of your model.
You can control initial locations and orientations for rigid bodies and flexible bodies but only initial
locations for Point masses.
• Location fixes any of the current translational coordinates (x, y, or z) of the part as the initial
location.
• Orientation fixes any of the current body-fixed 313 rotational coordinates (psi, theta, or phi
angles) as the initial orientation. These rotation angles are those associated with a body-fixed
313 rotation sequence regardless of which sequence you set as the default for the modeling
database. (Learn about Rotation Sequences.)
If Adams/Solver has to alter part positions to obtain consistent initial conditions during an initial
conditions simulation, it does not vary the coordinates you specify, unless it must vary them to satisfy the
initial conditions you specify for a joint or a motion.
If you fix the initial positions of too many parts, the initial conditions simulation can fail. Use initial
positions sparingly.

For the option: Do the following:

Positions held FIXED during assembly
Global X, Global Select the coordinates that you want fixed during initial conditions
Y,Global Z simulation.
Orientations held FIXED during assembly
PSI Orientation,THETA Select the angles that you want fixed during initial conditions simulation.
Orientation,PHI
Orientation
Add any comments about the part to help you manage and identify it. Learn
about Comments.
 J - O 369
Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions

Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions

You can specify initial velocities for parts. Adams/View uses the initial velocity during the Initial
conditions simulation, which it runs before it runs a Simulation of your model.

You can specify translational and angular velocities for rigid bodies and only translational velocity for
point masses.
• Translational velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s center of mass with respect to
ground or another marker in your model. You can specify translational velocity for each vector
component of the marker.
• Angular velocity defines the time rate of change of a part’s rotational position with respect to the
CM marker of the part or another marker in your model. You can specify angular velocity for
each vector component of the marker.
If you specify initial velocities, Adams/View uses them as the initial velocity of the part during assemble
model operations, regardless of any other forces acting on the part. You can also leave some or all of the
velocities unset. Leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part during an
assemble operation depending on the other forces and constraints acting on the part. Note that it is not
the same as setting the initial velocity to zero. Setting an initial velocity to zero means that the part will
not be moving in the specified direction when the simulation starts, regardless of any forces and
constraints acting upon it.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Translational Velocity
Ground Select to specify the global reference coordinate system as the system in
which the translational velocity vector components will be specified.
Marker Select and enter a marker along whose axes the translational velocity vector
components will be specified.
X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity
in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember,
leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part
during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and
constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity
to zero.
Angular Velocity (Not available if you are modifying a point mass.)
Part CM Select to specify the part’s center-of-mass (CM) marker as the coordinate
system about whose axes the translational or angular velocity vector
components will be specified.
Marker Select and enter a marker about whose axes the translational or angular
velocity vector components will be specified.
370 Adams/View
Modify Body - Velocity Initial Conditions

For the option: Do the following:

X Axis/Y Axis/Z Axis Select the axes in which you want to define velocity and enter the velocity
in the text box that appears next to the axes check boxes. Remember,
leaving a velocity unset lets Adams/View calculate the velocity of the part
during an initial conditions simulation, depending on the other forces and
constraints acting on the part. It is not the same as setting the initial velocity
to zero.
Add any comments about the body to help you manage and identify it.
Learn about Comments.
 J - O 371
Modify Bushing

Modify Bushing
Right-click bushing -> Modify

Modifes the following for a bushing:

• The two bodies to which the forces are applied.
• Translational and rotational properties for stiffness, damping, and preload.
• Force graphics.

Learn more about Modifying Bushings.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the bushing to modify.
Action Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Translational Properties:
Stiffness Enter three stiffness coefficients.
Damping Enter three viscous-damping coefficients. The force due to damping is
zero when there are no relative translational velocities between the
markers on the action and reaction bodies.
Preload Enter three constant force (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the force components along the x-, y-, and z-axeis of the
coordinate system marker of the reaction body (J marker) when both the
relative translational displacement and velocity of the markers on the
action and reaction bodies are zero.
Rotational (Torque) Properties:
Stiffness Enter three stiffness coefficients.
Damping Enter three viscous-damping coefficients. The torque due to damping is
zero when there are no relative rotational velocities between the markers
on the action and reaction bodies.
Preload Enter three constant torque (preload) values. Constant values indicate the
magnitude of the torque components about the x-, y-, and z-axes of the
coordinate system marker on the reaction body (J marker) when both the
relative rotational displacement and velocity of the markers on the action
and reaction bodies are zero.
Force Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts,
both, or none.
372 Adams/View
Modify Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.

Select to change the position of the force using the Precision Move dialog
box.

Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures

 J - O 373
Modify Comment

Modify Comment

Modify/Create Dialog Box -> Shared Dialog Box

Adds notes about the objects in your Model, and for Template-Based products, about entities in your
subsystem, to help you manage and identify them. The types of objects about which you can add
comments in Adams/View are listed below. For parts, constraints, and forces, you add comments when
you modify the object. For models, you can add the comments as you create the model, and you can also
modify the comments.
• Models
• Parts
• Constraint
• Forces
• Materials

The comments that you create appear in the following:

• Information window
• Adams/View Log file
• Command or dataset files

For the option: Do the following:

Object Enter the name of the object or entity.
Type Enter the type of object for which you are creating comments.
Comment Text Enter your comments.
Date Select to add the date when you created the comments. In template-based products,
it adds both date and time.
Time Select to enter the time when you created the comments.
Clear Clear the text, time, and date.
Reset Set the comments to the previous ones.
374 Adams/View
Modify Coupler

Modify Coupler
Right-click coupler -> Modify

Modifies a coupler allowing you to specify the relationship between the driver and the coupled joint or
to create a three-joint coupler.
Learn about:
• Modifying Couplers
• Creating Couplers

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the coupler to modify.
Two Joint Coupler/ Three Joint Select whether you want a two- or three-joint coupler.
Coupler
By Scales/By Select the relationship between the joints (either linear or
Displacement/User Defined nonlinear).
Driver and Coupler Change the joints to be coupled, and then set Freedom Type to their
type. If you have any cylindrical joints, you can specify either
translational or rotational displacement. Translational joints always
have translational displacements. Revolute joints always have
rotational displacements.
Scale If the coupler is linear, enter a scale for the second and third coupled
joints. The scales are r2 and r3 in the following equation:

delta1 + r2 * delta2 + r3 * delta3 =0

If the joint displacement is rotational, its corresponding delta in the
equation above is in radians.
If you selected User Defined, the following options appear:
User-Written Subroutine If the coupler is nonlinear, specify the user parameters to be passed
Parameters to the User-written subroutine COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2. For
more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams/Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
COUSUB, COUXX, COUXX2.
 J - O 375
Modify Extrusion

Modify Extrusion
Right-click an extrusion -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of an Extrusion and allows you to rename the extrusion.
Learn about Extrusion tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Extrusion Name Displays the name of the extrusion you are modifying.
New Name If you want, enter a unique name for the extrusion.
Reference Marker Specify the marker used to locate and orient the extrusion.
Relative To Specify the coordinate system in which the location and orientation coordinates
are specified. If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View uses the reference
marker.
Profile Points/ Select either:
Profile Curve
• Profile Points - Enter the locations of the points that define the profile. The
points are relative to the reference marker.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location table.
• Profile Curve - Enter the object used to define the profile of the extrusion.
You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline as the
profile curve. The object should be in the xy plane of the reference marker.
Path Points/ Select either:
Path Curve/
Length along Z • Path Points - Enter points used to define the path of the extrusion. The points
are relative to the reference marker. The points define the path along which the
profile curve will be extended.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to display the
Location Table.
• Path Curve - Enter the object used to define the path of the extrusion. You can
specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline, chain, or outline. The object
defines the path along which the profile curve is extended.
• Length along Z - Z-axis of the reference marker defining the straight line
along which the profile curve will be extruded. Enter a positive length to
extrude along the +z-axis.
376 Adams/View
Modify Extrusion

For the option: Do the following:

Select to add any comments about the extrusion that you want to enter to help you
manage and identify it.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

 J - O 377
Modify FEMDATA

Modify FEMDATA
Build -> Data Elements -> FEMDATA -> Modify

Produces data files of component loads, deformations, stresses, or strains for input to subsequent finite
element or fatigue life analysis. You use the Solver -> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability Files
to specify the type of file to produce (for more information, see Solver Settings - Output dialog box help
and Adams/Durability online help). Adams/View will not output to any files unless you specify the format.

For the
option: Do the following:
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the FEMDATA element to modify.
Type Select the information that you want output:

• Loads on Rigid Body/Flexible Body - Outputs all external forces (reaction

and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and inertial
forces of the specified body (angular velocities and accelerations including
effects of gravity) as a function of time. Load data will be output in the
simulation set of units.
• Modal Deformation - Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of
the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only export coordinates of the
active modes in the simulation.
• Nodal Deformation - Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of
the specified flexible body. Adams/View writes the deformations in the
simulation set of units.
• Strain - Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal
neutral file (MNF) of the specified flexible body. Adams/View outputs all
six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-
YZ, shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the
flexible body.
• Stress - Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the
Modal Neutral File (MNF) of the flexible body. Adams/View outputs all six
components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ,
shear-ZX). It outputs stresses in the simulation set of units in the basic FEA
coordinate system of the flexible body
If you selected Loads on Rigid Body, the following options appear:
R Marker Enter the rigid body marker to be the reference coordinate system to output loads.
Because Adams/Solver resolves all loads acting on the rigid body in the coordinate
system of the specified marker, the marker should represent the FEA basic
coordinate system of the part's finite element model (FEM).
378 Adams/View
Modify FEMDATA

For the
option: Do the following:
Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END,
Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load.
You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, and GMAG.
If you selected Loads on Flexible Body, the following options appear:
Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Peak Slice Select that FEM load data are to be output only at those time steps where the
specified peak load occurred in the simulation. With the START and END,
Adams/View only checks the time steps within those specifications for the peak load.
You can specify one or more of FX, FY, FZ, FMAG, GMAG.
If you selected Modal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
If you selected Nodal Deformation, the following option appears:
Flex Body Enter the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
Datum Enter a node ID of the flexible body to be the datum of the nodal displacements.
Adams/Solver computes all nodal displacements relative to this node ID. If you do
not specify a datum node, Adams/Solver generates an arbitrary relative set of nodal
displacements. It displays a warning message if the specified node does not belong
to the flexible body.
If you selected Stress or Strain, the following two options appear:
Flex Body Specifies the name of the flexible body whose data FEMDATA outputs. FEMDATA
outputs the data in the FEM basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible
body.
Nodes Enter the node numbers of a flexible body whose data is to be output. If you do not
specify a node list, FEMDATA exports nodal data at each attachment point of the
flexible body. Adams/Solver issues a warning if a node id is specified that does not
belong to the flexible body.
For all types, set the following options:
 J - O 379
Modify FEMDATA

For the
option: Do the following:
File Enter the output file name for the FEM data. You can specify an existing directory,
root name, and/or extension. By default, the file name will be composed of the
Adams run and body IDs according to the type of data and file format that you
specified in the Solver -> Settings -> Output -> More -> Durability Files (for more
information, see Adams/Durability online help).
Time Specify the start and end times for outputting the data:

• From - Enter the time at which to start outputting the data. The default is the
start of the simulation.
• To - Enter the time at which to end the output of the data or the search of a
peak load. The default is to output to the end of the simulation.
380 Adams/View
Modify Force

Modify Force
Right-click single-component force -> Modify

Modifies the following for a Single-component force:

• Force direction, if only one part is affected.
• Action body to which the force is applied. If you created the force between two parts, you can
also change the reaction body. You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a
force created between two parts because the direction methods are not compatible. You’ll have to
delete the force and create it again.
• Force magnitude.
• Force graphics

The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn more about:
• How To create a single-component force:
• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces
• Modifying Single-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Name Displays the name of the force.
Direction Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the force:

• On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied to

a part. The force direction is fixed on ground.
• On One Body, Moving with Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a
part. The part defines the direction of the force.
• On One Body, Moving with Other Body - Sets the force so it is applied
to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction of the
force.
• Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the
parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force
defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a
torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.
The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force.
Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Action Body For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the force
is applied.
Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
 J - O 381
Modify Force

For the option: Do the following:

Direction Body Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the direction
option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:

• Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.

• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine SFOSUB.
Function If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the Function
(time) text box that appears:

• Constant force value

• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the

Function text box, select the More button to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is optional.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine SFOSUB. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Force Display Set whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or none.
By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for single-
component forces.
382 Adams/View
Modify General Force

Modify General Force

Right-click six-component general force -> Modify

Modifies the following for a Six-component general force:

• Action and reaction body to which the force is applied or the action and reaction markers
• Reference marker
• Force magnitude
• Force graphics

Learn about Multi-Component Forces.

For the option: Do the following:

Force Name Enter the name of the general force to modify.
Action Part/ Change the action body or marker to which the force is applied.

Action Marker
Reaction Part/ Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.

Reaction Marker
Reference Marker Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:

• Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.

• Subroutine to define using a User-written subroutine.
X Force/ If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each
component of the force:
Y Force/
• Constant force value
Z Force/
• Function expression
AX Torque/ To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select
the More button
AY Torque/
to display the Function Builder.
AZ Torque
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be
passed to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the force being modified.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine GFOSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
 J - O 383
Modify General Force

For the option: Do the following:

Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action
body.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.

Select to create a force measure. Learn about creating Object Measures

384 Adams/View
Modify Geometric Spline

Modify Geometric Spline

Right-click a spline -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of your splines.

Learn about the Spline Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the spline to modify.
Closed Select Yes if you want the spline to be closed or select no if you want the spline to
be open.
Segment Count Displays the number of segments Adams/View uses to graphically display the
fitting of the points in the curve. To have Adams/View automatically calculate the
number of segments, select the Calculate tool .

For an open curve, Adams/View defaults to a segment count that is five times the
number of curve points that you have provided. Specifying fewer segments results
in a coarser curve. For a closed curve, Adams/View defaults to a segment count
that is five times the number of points, plus one. In mathematical terms:

5 * ( #pts + 1 )

For both closed and open curves, there are no limits to how many or how few
segments you use (other than hardware limitations), but for every curve there is a
plateau, beyond which increasing the number of segments does not enhance the
graphics of your spline.
Values Enter values for the locations of the points that define the spline. The points are
relative to the reference marker.

You can edit the locations of the points by selecting the More button to
display the Location table. The values cannot be modified if a reference_profile is
specified.
Reference Marker Enter the marker that defines the location and orientation of the spline. The marker
acts as a reference coordinate system for the coordinate values used to define the
reference curve points.
Reference Curve Displays the existing data element curve that is used to mathematically define the
spline. When you define the points that make up the spline, Adams/View creates
a curve fit through the points. Learn about Data Element Modify Curve dialog box.
Reference Profile Enter an existing Wire Geometry from which the bspline is to be created. Note that
the ref curve and matrix will be automatically generated and hence the
corresponding fields are disabled if a profile is specified.
 J - O 385
Modify Geometric Spline

For the option: Do the following:

Reference Matrix Displays a data element matrix that contains all the spline point coordinates. Learn
about Create/Modify Matrix dialog box.
Spread Points Specify the value to ‘yes’ or ‘no’ (applicable only when a ref profile is specified).
If specified to ‘yes’, then the generated bspline will have its points equally spaced.
Num new pts Specify the number of points on the bspline. This parameter is usable only if
spread points is specified to ‘yes’.
Select to enter any comments about the geometry that you want to enter to help
you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

386 Adams/View
Modify Joint

Modify Joint
Right-click idealized or primitive joint -> Modify

Changes several basic properties about an idealized or primitive joint, including:

• Parts that the joint connects. You can also switch which part moves relative to another part.
• What type of joint it is. For example, you can change a revolute joint to a translational joint.
• For a screw joint, you can also set the pitch of the threads of the screw.
 J - O 387
Modify Joint

For the option: Do the following:

Joint Name Enter the name of the joint to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Select the type of joint to which you want to change the current joint.

The following are exceptions to changing a joint’s type:

• You can only change a simple idealized joint to another type of simple
idealized joint or to a joint primitive.
• You cannot change a joint’s type if motion is applied to the joint. In
addition, if a joint has friction and you change the joint type, Adams/View
returns an error.
First Body Change the part that moves relative to the second body.
Second Body Change the part that the first body moves relative to.
Force Graphics Select to display force graphics.
Pitch Value For a screw joint, enter its pitch value (translational displacement for every full
rotational cycle).
Impose Motion Select to impose motion on the joint. After selecting, set the translational or
rotational displacement or velocity, and then select OK.

Note: If the initial rotational displacement of a revolute or cylindrical joint

varies by anywhere from 5 to 60 degrees from the actual location of the
joint, Adams/Solver issues a warning message and continues execution.
If the variation is greater than 60 degrees, Adams/View issues an error
message and stops execution.
Initial Conditions Select to set initial conditions for a revolute, translational, or cylindrical joint using
the Joint Initial Conditions dialog box. Learn About Initial Conditions for Joints.
Add any comments about the joint that you want to enter to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.

Select to change the position of the joint using the Precision Move dialog box.

Select to create a joint measure. Learn about creating Object Measures

Select to apply friction to the joint. See Create/Modify Friction dialog box help.
388 Adams/View
Modify Modal ICs

Modify Modal ICs

Flexible Body Modify dialog box -> Modal ICs

Displays all the modes in the flexible body and lets you enable and disable them, and set their initial
conditions. An asterisk (*) appears next to all modes that are enabled.
To enable or disable modes:
• Highlight the modes that you want to enable or disable.
• Select Disable Highlighted Modes or Enable Highlighted Modes.

Learn more about:

• Enabling and Disabling Modes
• About Flexible Body Modal Content

For the option: Do the following:

Disabled Highlighted Modes Select to disable highlighted modes.
Enable Highlighted Modes Select to enable highlighted modes.
Set Exact Select to make Adams/Flex enforce the initial conditions for
displacements exactly as specified.
Clear Exact Select to allow Adams/Flex to modify the initial conditions for
displacements at the beginning of the simulation as necessary.
Text box and Apply In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal displacement, and
Displacement IC then select Apply Displacement IC to set the initial condition for the
highlighted mode.
Text box and Apply Velocity In the text box, enter the initial condition for modal velocity, and then
IC select Apply Velocity IC to set the initial condition for the highlighted
mode.
 J - O 389
Modify Surface of Revolution

Modify Surface of Revolution

Right-click a revolution -> Modify

Allows you to control the location and orientation of a revolution. Learn about the Revolution Tool.

For the option: Do the following:

Revolution Name Displays the name of the revolution you are modifying.
New Name If you want, enter a unique name for the revolution.
Reference Marker Specify the marker used to locate and orient a revolution.
Relative To Specify the coordinate system in which the location and orientation
coordinates are specified. If you do not specify this parameter, Adams/View
uses the reference marker.
Angle Extent Specify the extended angle measured positive (according to the right-hand
rule) about the z-axis of the reference marker. The angle starts at the x-axis
of the reference marker and extends the arc of the revolution.
Number of Sides Enter the number of flat sides Adams/View draws on a revolution. The
number of sides you specify affects the calculations Adams/View uses to
determine a part’s mass and inertia.
Profile Points/Profile Select either:
Curve
• Profile Points - Enter points used to define the profile of the
revolution. The points are relative to the revolution’s reference
marker. The profile defined by the points is swept around the
reference marker’s z-axis.

To edit the locations of the points, select the More button to

display the Location table.
• Profile Curve - Enter an object used to define the profile of the
revolution. You can specify an arc, circle, spline curve, polyline,
chain, or outline.
Select to add any comments about the revolution that you want to enter to
help you manage and identify it. See Comments.

Select to display the Edit Appearance Dialog Box.

390 Adams/View
Modify Torque

Modify Torque
Right-click single-component torque -> Modify

Modifies the following for a single-component torque:

• Force direction, if only one part is affected.
• Action body to which the force is applied.
• Force magnitude.
• Force graphics.

The options available in the dialog box change depending on the direction of the force.
Learn about:
• Single-Component Torque tool
• Modifying Single-Component Forces
• Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the torque to modify.
Direction Set the number of parts affected and the direction of the torque:

• On One Body, Fixed in Space - Sets the force direction so it is applied

to a part. The force direction is fixed on ground.
• On One Body, Moving with Body - Sets the force so it is applied to a
part. The part defines the direction of the force.
• On One Body, Moving with Other Body - Sets the force so it is
applied to a part. A second part (the direction part) defines the direction
of the force.
• Between Two Bodies - Creates a force between two parts. One of the
parts can be ground. You cannot change a force on one part to a force
defined between two parts or the reverse. You can, however, change a
torque on one part to a torque on two parts or the reverse.
Note: You cannot change a force created on one part and ground to a force
created between two parts because the direction methods are not
compatible. You’ll have to delete the force and create it again.
The following text boxes are available depending on how you defined the direction of the force:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Action Body For a force defined between two parts, change the action body to which the
force is applied.
 J - O 391
Modify Torque

For the option: Do the following:

Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Direction Body Change the body that defines the direction of the force if you selected the
direction option, On One Body, Moving with Other Body.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:

• Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.

• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
Function If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the Function
(time) text box that appears:

• Constant force value

• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function text box, select the More
button to display the Function Builder.
Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and its ID.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Torque Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body for
single-component torques.
392 Adams/View
Modify Torque Vector

Modify Torque Vector

Right-click multi-component torque -> Modify

Modifies the following for a Three-component torque:

• Action and reaction body to which the force is applied or the action and reaction markers
• Reference marker
• Force magnitude
• Force graphics

Learn about Multi-Component Forces.

For the option: Do the following:

Force Name Enter the name of the force to modify.
Action Part/Action Change the action body or marker to which the force is applied.
Marker
Reaction Change the reaction body or marker that receives the reaction forces.
Part/Reaction Marker
Reference Marker Change the reference marker that indicates the direction of the force.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the force. Select:

• Function to define using a numerical value or function expression.

• Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
AX Torque/ If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following for each
component of the force:
AY Torque/
• Constant force value
AZ Torque
• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button

to display the Function Builder.

Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be passed
to a user-written subroutine and the ID of the torque being modified.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the standard user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument..
Force Display Set to whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both, or
none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action body.
 J - O 393
Modify Torque Vector/Modify General Force

Modify Torque Vector/Modify General Force

Right-click multi-component torque -> Modify

Right-click six-component force -> Modify

Modifies either a Three-component torque or a Six-component general force. Its title and options change
depending on the type of force. Select a title below for more information on the options available:
• Modify Torque Vector (three-component torque)
• Modify General Force
394 Adams/View
Modify a Request

Modify a Request
Build -> Measure -> REQUEST -> Modify

Modifies a request.
Learn about Creating Requests.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Request Name Enter the name of the request to modify.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the request. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the request to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.
Define Using Type & Set to:
Markers/Define Using Function
Expressions/Define Using • Define Using Type & Markers
Subroutines • Define Using Function Expressions
• Define Using Subroutines
If you selected Define Using Type & Markers, the following options appear:
Output Type Select the type of output (Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, or
Force).
I Marker/J Marker/R Marker Specify the markers with respect to which the output will be
calculated.
If you selected Define Using Subroutines, the following options appear:
User Function Enter parameters to the user-written subroutine REQSUB. Enter the
user function using the following format where r1 through r30 are
constants passed to the subroutine: r1, ..., r30. Learn About
Specifying a Subroutine.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine
REQSUB. Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE
Argument..
Title If you specified to write an output file (.out), enter up to eight
headings for columns of request output. Separate each heading with
a comma (,). Each heading can have as many as eight alphanumeric
characters, including underscores (_). The first character in each
heading must be alphabetic. You cannot use a comma (,), a
semicolon (;), an ampersand (&), or an exclamation point (!). If you
do not want to specify a title for a particular column, use two
quotation marks (" ") with no characters between them.
 J - O 395
Modify a Request

For the option: Do the following:

If you selected Define Using Function Expressions, the following options appear:
f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 Enter function expressions in the boxes f2 , f3 , f4 , f6 , f7 , and f8 .
Do not use f1 and f5 . Adams/Solver uses them to hold magnitudes
for the three functions that follow. You do not need to enter a
function in every text box. Learn About Specifying Function
Expressions.
Title Enter a title for the top of each set of information output. The entire
comment must be on one line. The title can be only eighty characters
long. You can use blank spaces and all alphanumeric characters.
However, you cannot use the comma (,), the semicolon (;), the
ampersand (&), and the exclamation point (!).
396 Adams/View
Modify a Spring-Damper Force

Modify a Spring-Damper Force

Right-click spring damper -> Modify

For a Translational spring damper, you can modify:

• Parts between which the spring damper acts.
• Stiffness and damping values, including specifying splines that defines the relationship of
stiffness to displacement and damping to velocity. Learn about defining Splines.
• Preload values.

Learn about:
• Translational Spring Damper Tool
• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Name Enter the name of the spring damper to modify.
Action Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Stiffness and Damping:
Stiffness Coefficient/ Select one of the following:

No Stiffness/ • Stiffness Coefficient and enter a stiffness value for the spring
damper.
Spline: F=f(defo)
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damper.
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to deformation.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:

No Damping/ • Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping value for the
spring damper.
Spline: F=f(velo)
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
force to velocity.
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the spring damper. Preload force is the force of
the spring damper in its reference position.
 J - O 397
Modify a Spring-Damper Force

For the option: Do the following:

Default Length/ Select either:

Length at Preload • Default Length to automatically use the length of the spring damper
when you created it as its reference length.
• Length at Preload and enter the reference length of the spring at its
preload position.
Tip: If you set preload to zero, then displacement at preload is the
same as the spring’s free length. If the preload value is non-
zero, then the displacement at preload is not the same as the
spring’s free length.
Spring Graphic Specify whether coil spring graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a spring coefficient.
Force Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none. By default, Adams/View displays the force graphic on the action
body.
Damper Graphic Specify whether cylinder damper graphics are always on, always off, or on
whenever you have defined a damping coefficient.
Select to add any comments about the variable to help you manage and
identify it. See Comments.

Select to change the position of the spring damper using the Precision Move
dialog box.

Select to create a force measure.

Learn about creating Object Measures.

398 Adams/View
Modify a Torsion Spring

Modify a Torsion Spring

Right-click torsion spring -> Modify

After you’ve created a Torsion spring, you can modify:

• Parts between which the torque acts
• Stiffness and damping values
• Preload values
• Force graphics

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the torsion spring to modify.
Action Body Change the action body to which the force is applied.
Reaction Body Change the body that receives the reaction forces.
Stiffness and Damping:
Stiffness Coefficient/ Select one of the following:

No Stiffness/ • Stiffness Coefficient to enter a stiffness value for the torsion spring.
• No Stiffness to turn off all spring forces and create a pure damping force.
Spline: F=f(defo)
• Spline: F=f(defo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of
stiffness to rotational deformation (radians). Learn about defining Splines.
Damping Coefficient/ Select one of the following:

No Damping/ • Damping Coefficient and enter a viscous damping coefficient for the
torsion spring.
Spline: F=f(velo)
• No Damping to turn off all damping forces and create a pure spring force.
• Spline: F=f(velo) and enter a spline that defines the relationship of force to
angular velocity (radians per second).
Length and Preload:
Preload Enter the preload force for the torsion spring. Preload force is the force of the
torsion spring in its preload position.
Default Angle/ Select one of the following:

Angle at Preload • Default Angle to set the rotation angle of the spring when you created it at
its preload position.
• Angle at Preload and enter the angle of the spring at its preload position.
Torque Display Specify whether you want to display force graphics for one of the parts, both,
or none.
 J - O 399
New Color

New Color
Postprocessing -> Edit -> Preferences -> Colors Tab -> New Color button

Defines a new color name in the Modeling database. After creating the new color, return to the Colors
tab in the PPT Preferences dialog box to define its color values. See PPT Preferences - Colors.

For the option: Do the following:

Color Name Enter a name for the new color.
400 Adams/View
New Dialog Box

New Dialog Box

Tools -> Dialog Box -> Create -> Dialog Box -> New

Creates a new dialog box.

Learn Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.

For the option: Do the following:

Library Enter the library in which to store the dialog box. By default, the library is .gui.
Name Enter a title for your dialog box.
Create Buttons Select any predefined buttons you'd like on your dialog box.
 J - O 401
No Help Available

No Help Available
There is currently no help available for this dialog box.
402 Adams/View
Node Finder Dialog Box

Node Finder Dialog Box

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Rigid to Flex/Flex to Flex -> Node Finder

Searches for nodes on the replacement flexible body that are within a specified radius or closest to a given
marker. It displays the nodes that it found in the lower portion of the dialog box. This is helpful if you are
not sure to which node to transfer a marker.
Learn about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.

For the option: Do the following:

Find Nodes Select how you want to find nodes:

• Closest to Marker - Find those nodes closest to the marker specified.

• By Radius Around Marker - Find those nodes within a specified radius of
the marker.
Marker Name Enter the name of the marker that you want to search for nodes closest to.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Number of Nodes Available only when Closest to Marker is selected.

Enter the number of nodes to search for which are closest to the specified
marker. For example, find the 10 nodes closest to a marker.
Radius Available only when By Radius Around Marker is selected.

Enter the radius around the marker to search for nodes.

Interface Nodes Only Select to search only interface nodes.
Find Nodes Select to search for closest nodes.
Node listing Lists the nodes found. You can copy one of the nodes to the Swap a rigid body
for another flexible body or Swap a flexible body for another flexible body dialog
box:

1. Right-click a node, and then select Copy.

2. In the swap a rigid body/flexible body dialog box, right-click the Node
ID text box, and then select Paste.
 J - O 403
Object Color Tool Stack

Object Color Tool Stack

Main Toolbox -> Object Color Tool Stack

Contains 15 colors to which you can set the color of an object.

Learn about Changing an Object's Color.

404 Adams/View
Object Measure

Object Measure
Select object -> Build -> Measure -> Object -> Create/Modify

Creates a measure on an object in your model, including Point Measures. Its title changes depending on
the type of object. For example, its title is Joint Measure if you are creating a measure on a joint.
In general, all objects in your model have some pre-defined measurable characteristics. For example, you
can capture and investigate the power consumption of a motion, or measure a part’s center-of-mass
velocity along the global x-axis, taking time derivatives in the ground reference frame. The default
coordinate system is the ground coordinate system, but you can use any marker as the coordinate system.

Note: You cannot modify a point measure from the Build menu as noted above. Instead, right-
click in the Strip chart of the point measure and select Modify Measure. You can also clear
the select list and, from the Edit menu, select Modify.

Learn more about:

• Object Characteristics You Can Measure
• Point Characteristics you can measure
• About Simulation Output

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Enter the name for the measure.
Characteristic Select the object characteristic to measure.
Component Select the component on which to report. You can select x, y, z, or
magnitude (Mag).
Cartisian/Cylindrical/Spherical Set to the desired coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or
cylindrical).
From/At area If it is appropriate, select a reference point indicating where the force
will be measured or from where the kinematic quantities will be
measured.

Note: The From/At selection does not apply to point measures

because all forces are measured at the selected marker point
and all kinematic quantities are measured from the global
origin to the selected marker point.
Orientation Select to help you keep track of the orientations of your local part
coordinate systems as you define them. See Orientation Measure
dialog box help.
Represent coordinates in Enter the marker on which the vector quantity is projected. The
default is the global coordinate system.
 J - O 405
Object Measure

For the option: Do the following:

Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you
are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
406 Adams/View
Object Position Handle

Object Position Handle

Settings -> Object Position Handle

Main toolbox -> Move toolstack ->

Allows you to create a global position handle with respect to the which you can translate and rotate
selected objects. When you create a global position handle, Adams/View turns off the object position
handle for individual objects.
Learn more about Using Object Position Handle.

For the option: Do the following:

Set Handle Location Select and click on the screen to indicate the location of the handle.
Orientation Via First, in the pull-down menu, select how you want to orient the handle. You can
orient the axes of the handle. By default, the orientation of the position handle
is set to that of the current working grid axes.

Next, select Orientation Via to set.

Reset Select if you want to reset the location of the global position handle to the
location of the selected object's position handle.
 J - O 407
Optimize Constraint Evaluate Dialog Box

Optimize Constraint Evaluate Dialog Box

Simulate -> Design Constraint -> Evaluate

Lets you interactively apply the design constraint to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug constraints. It is a good idea to test your constraint on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams/View prints the constraint value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Constraint Name Enter the name of a constraint.
Analysis Name Enter the name of an analysis
408 Adams/View
Optimize Objective Evaluate Dialog Box

Optimize Objective Evaluate Dialog Box

Simulate -> Design Objective -> Evaluate

Lets you interactively apply the design objective to an analysis and print the resulting value. This helps
you develop and debug objectives. It is a good idea to test your objective on an existing analysis before
using it in an optimization.
Adams/View prints the objective value in the Information window.
Learn more About Optimization.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Objective Name Enter the name of a objective.
Analysis Name Enter the name of an analysis
 J - O 409
Orientation Joint Tool

Orientation Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> orientation Joint Tool

Constrains the marker of one part so that it cannot rotate with respect to a second part as shown below.
In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle indicates
the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part. The axes
of the coordinate systems must maintain the same orientation.

The location of the origins of the coordinate systems does not matter.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
410 Adams/View
Orientation Joint Tool

• Creating Joint Primitives

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
(Bodies Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and
2 Bodies - 1 have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
Location/ Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only one
part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and ground.
2 Bodies - 2
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
Locations
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains fixed on
the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should
use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded
view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid, if it
Feature is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on
a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
 J - O 411
Orientation Measure

Orientation Measure
Build -> Measure -> Orientation -> New/Modify

Measures an orientation characteristic listed in Orientation Characteristics You Can Measure.

Note: When creating an object or point measure, select the Orientation button from the Object
Measure Dialog Box.

Learn more :
• About Measuring Orientation Characteristics
• About Simulation Output

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Enter the name of the measure.
Characteristic Select a characteristic convention with which to associate the component.
Component Set to the rotational component you want to measure.
To Marker Enter the marker representing the coordinate system to which to measure.
From Marker Enter the marker representing the coordinate system from which to measure.
Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you are modifying
a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
412 Adams/View
Output (Out) Content

Output (Out) Content

Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Output (.out) Content

Selecting Output (Out) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set
the format of the tabular output file. You only receive a tabular output file when you are using External
Adams/Solver. Learn about setting type of Adams/Solver.

For the option: Do the following:

Jacobian Matrix Prints the Jacobian matrix at each iteration. Learn about setting Jacobian matrix.
Request Data Prints the requests output at each iteration.
RHS and States Prints the YY array (state vector), RHS array (error terms), and DELTA array
(increment to state vector) at each iteration.
Degrees of Freedom Prints a degree-of-freedom table in the tabular output file. The table indicates
whether or not each of the six components of motion (that is, translation along
the x- , y- , and z-axis and rotation about the x- , y- , and z-axis) is constrained
for each part center of mass relative to the origin of the ground reference frame.
These are the degrees of freedom as input.

To determine the degrees of freedom for the degree-of-freedom table,

Adams/Solver factorizes the constraint matrix. Adams/Solver then checks for
columns that are linear combinations of the other columns of the matrix. The
components of motion corresponding to these columns are not constrained. After
the matrix has been factored, Adams/Solver selects the components
corresponding to the zero pivot elements as the degrees of freedom.
Adams/Solver reports these as the independent coordinates in the degree-of-
freedom table.
Equation Map Writes the internal representation of a model in the tabular output file after
Adams/Solver reads and checks the input. It maps the equations and variables in
the system and provides their numeric codes.
 P - Z 413
Output (Out) Content

P-Z
414 Adams/View
PPT Preferences

PPT Preferences
Edit -> Preferences

Changes the ways in which Adams/PostProcessor works. In addition, you can specify the directory to
which Adams/PostProcessor saves files.

For description on each tab click the link below

Tab Link
Animation PPT Preferences - Animation
Colors PPT Preferences - Colors
Curves PPT Preferences - Curves
Files PPT Preferences - Files
Fonts PPT Preferences - Fonts
Geometry PPT Preferences - Geometry
Orientation PPT Preferences - Orientation
Page PPT Preferences - Page
Plot PPT Preferences - Plot
Units PPT Preferences - Units
Stereo PPT Preferences - Stereo
 P - Z 415
PPT Preferences

Tab Link
Restore Select to restore the settings to their defaults
Save Save
416 Adams/View
Page Layouts

Page Layouts
View -> Page-> Page Layouts

Allows you to select different page layouts so you can see more than one viewport. Page layout is also
referred to as the viewport layout.

Note: A page that contains a Fast fourier transform (FFT) or Bode plot has two viewports. For an
FFT plot, the top viewport contains the plot with the input data and the bottom viewport
contains the plot with the output from the FFT. For a Bode plot, the top viewport contains
the gain plot and the bottom viewport contains the phase plot.

Selecting a Layout
You can access the page layout palette in two ways. Both methods contain the same set of viewport
options.

To select a layout:
1. Do either of the following:
• On the View menu, point to Page, and then select Page Layouts. The palette appears.

• On the Main toolbar, right-click the Page Layout tool stack . A selection of layouts
appears.
2. Select a layout.
3. If you used the palette, select Close to close the palette. You can leave the palette open and
continue working so you can quickly change the window.
 P - Z 417
Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Parallel Axes Joint Tool

Constrains the z-axis of the marker of one part so that it remains parallel to the z-axis of the marker of a
second part, as shown below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects
and the hollow circle indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative
to the second part.

The marker of the first part can only rotate about one axis with respect to the coordinate system of the
second part.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
418 Adams/View
Parallel Axes Joint Tool

• Creating Joint Primitives

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only
2 Bodies - 2 Locations one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and
ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
 P - Z 419
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation

Part Create Equation Linear State Equation

Build -> System Elements -> Linear State Equation -> New

Creates a linear state equation.

Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying Linear State Equations
• System Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Linear State Equation Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the equation. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
X State Array Name Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system.
The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
U Input Array Name Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must
be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also
specify either a B input matrix, a Dnbsp;feedforward matrix, or both.

The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is
optional. If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C
output matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix
elements must have the same number of rows as there are elements in
the outputs (Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot
be used in any other linear state equation, general state equation, or
transfer function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.
420 Adams/View
Part Create Equation Linear State Equation

For the option: Do the following:

A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as
the number of rows in the states (X) array.
B Input Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows
as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of
elements in the inputs (U) array.

Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you

must also include an inputs (U) array.
C Output Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of
columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the
number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix
is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an
outputs (Y) array name.
D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feedforward matrix for
the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same
number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the
same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U)
array.

When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes to hold states at the constant value determined during static
and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change. Learn about
Controlling Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements.
 P - Z 421
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation

Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation

Build -> System Elements -> Linear State Equation -> Modify

Modifies a linear state equation.

Learn about:
• Creating and Modifying Linear State Equations
• System Elements

For the option: Do the following:

Linear State Equation Name Change the name that you want assigned to the linear state equation.
Adams Id Assign a unique ID number to the equation. See Adams/Solver ID.
Comments Add any comments about the equation to help you manage and identify
it. See Comments.
X State Array Name Enter the array element that defines the state array for the linear system.
The array must be a states (X) array. It cannot be used in any other linear
state equation, general state equation, or transfer function.
U Input Array Name Enter the array element that defines the input (or control) array for the
linear system. Entering an inputs (U) array is optional. The array must
be an inputs (U) array. If you enter an inputs (U) array, you must also
specify either a B input matrix, a D feedforward matrix, or both.

The B and D matrices must have the same number of columns as there
are elements in the inputs (U) array.
Y Output Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of output
variables for the linear system. Entering an outputs (Y) array is optional.
If you enter an outputs (Y) array, you must also specify a C output
matrix or a D feedforward matrix. The corresponding matrix elements
must have the same number of rows as there are elements in the outputs
(Y) array. It also must be an outputs (Y) array, and it cannot be used in
any other linear state equation, general state equation, or transfer
function.
IC Array Name Enter the array element that defines the column matrix of initial
conditions for the linear system. Entering the IC array is optional. The
IC array must have the same number of elements as the states (X) array
(equal to the number of rows in the A state matrix). When you do not
specify an IC array, Adams/Solver initializes all states to zero.
A State Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the state transition matrix for
the linear system. The matrix must be a square matrix (same number of
rows and columns), and it must have the same number of columns as the
number of rows in the states (X) array.
422 Adams/View
Part Modify Equation Linear State Equation

For the option: Do the following:

B Input Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the control matrix for the
linear system. The B input matrix must have the same number of rows
as the A state matrix and the same number of columns as the number of
elements in the inputs (U) array.

Entering a B input matrix is optional. If you enter a B input matrix, you

must also include an inputs (U) array.
C Output Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the output matrix for the
linear system. The C output matrix must have the same number of
columns as the A state matrix and the same number of rows as the
number of elements in the outputs (Y) array. Entering a C output matrix
is optional. If you enter a C output matrix, you must also include an
outputs (Y) array name.
D Feedforward Matrix Name Enter the matrix data element that defines the feed forward matrix for
the linear system. The D feedforward matrix must have the same
number of rows as the number of elements in the Y output array and the
same number of columns as the number of elements in the inputs (U)
array.

When you enter a D feedforward matrix, you must also include both a
Y output matrix and an inputs (U) array.
Static Hold Select yes if you do not want the linear state equation states to change
during static and quasi-static simulations; select no if they can change.
For more information on holding values constant, see Controlling
Equilibrium Values When Using System Elements..
 P - Z 423
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

Constrains the marker of one part so that it remains perpendicular to the z-axis of a second part as shown
below. In the figure, the solid circle indicates the first part that the joint connects and the hollow circle
indicates the second part that the joint connects. The first part is constrained relative to the second part.

The marker of the first part can rotate about two axes with respect to the second part.
Learn:
• About Joint Primitives
424 Adams/View
Perpendicular Axes Joint Tool

• Creating Joint Primitives

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
• 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only
2 Bodies - 2 Locations one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and
ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see about Connecting Constraints to
Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working grid,
if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
 P - Z 425
Picture of Marker and Node Table

Picture of Marker and Node Table

426 Adams/View
PID Controller

PID Controller

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

The PID controller creates a general proportional-integral-derivative control block. Two inputs are
necessary for this block: the proportional input and the derivative input. You must specify the derivative
state for input to this block that is consistent with the proportional state. For example, if the proportional
input is the measured x position of a part, the derivative input should be the linear velocity in the x
direction.
This block automatically creates the integrated state of the proportional input for use as the integrated
input. You can parameterize the P, I, and D gains of this block with an Adams/View real design variable
to quickly study the effect of changing control gains.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Deriviative Input Specify the signal representing the first-time derivative of the input.
P Gain Specify the gain applied to the input signal.
I Gain Specify the gain applied to the integral of the input signal.
D Gain Specify the gain applied to the derivative input.
Initial Condition Enter the initial condition for the input signal.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

 P - Z 427
Planar Joint Tool

Planar Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Planar Joint Tool

Creates a planar joint that allows a plane on one part to slide and rotate in the plane of another part. The
location of the planar joint determines a point in space through which the joint’s plane of motion passes.

The orientation vector of the planar joint is perpendicular to the joint’s plane of motion. The rotational
axis of the planar joint, which is normal to the joint’s plane of motion, is parallel to the orientation vector.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
428 Adams/View
Planar Joint Tool

• Modeling Two-Dimensional Body Using Planar Option

For the option: Do the following:

1 location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies -1 • 1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint and
Location/ have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be connected.
2 Bodies -2 Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If there is only
Locations one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to that part and
ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains fixed
on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You should
use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on exploded
view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of these options,
see Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry
Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current working grid, if
it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector
on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
Body (only appears
if you select to • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
explicitly define the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach the
bodies using the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint follows
options 2 Bodies - 1 the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with Marker Modify
Location or 2 Bodies dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is only available with
- 2 Locations Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching solvers with Solver Settings -
explained above) Executable dialog box help.
 P - Z 429
Plane Tool

Plane Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Plane Tool

Creates a two-dimensional box. You can draw a plane’s length and width in the plane of the screen or the
Working grid, if it is turned on. You will find planes most useful when you are creating contact forces
between objects, as explained in Contacts.
When you create a plane, you can select to create a new part consisting of the plane geometry or add the
plane geometry to an existing part or ground. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed
of only wire geometry.
Learn about Creating Two-Dimensional Plane.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Part/On Select either:
Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds plane to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the plane to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you
are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry
that defines the race track can be added to ground.

Notes on Modifying Planes: One hotpoint appears after you draw the plane. It lets you modify the length
and height of the plane. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
430 Adams/View
Plate Tool

Plate Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Plate Tool

Creates a plate, which is an extruded polygon solid with rounded corners. You create a plate by indicating
the location of its corners. You must select at least three locations. The first location you select acts as an
anchor point defining the position and orientation of the plate in space. The Plate tool creates markers at
each location. The marker at the anchor point is called the reference marker.

After you indicate the locations, the Plate tool creates a polygon with the specified number of sides and
extrudes it. By default, it creates the plate with a depth that is 1 and has corners with radii of 1 in current
length units. Before drawing, you can also specify the thickness and radius of the corners of the plate.

Note: The reference marker of the plate determines the plate orientation and defines the plane of
the plate to its x and y axes. Adams/View defines the x and y axes of the reference marker
using the working grid, if it is turned on, or the view screen. Adams/View defines the plate
vertices as the component of distance from the reference marker to the vertex marker as
defined along the reference marker's y-axis. Therefore, if you choose a plate vertex marker
that is out-of-plane from the xy plane of the reference marker, the vertex marker is not the
actual plate vertex.
 P - Z 431
Plate Tool

Learn about Creating a Plate.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds plate to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the plate to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are
simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that
defines the race track can be added to ground.
Thickness Select and then enter the thickness of the plate.

If you do not specify a thickness, Adams/View creates the plate with a thickness
of 1 in current length units.
Radius Select and then enter the radius of the plate corners.

If you do not specify a radius, Adams/View creates the plate with corners with
radii of 1 in current length units.

Note: After you draw a plate, a hotpoint appears at the reference marker. It lets you change the
depth of the plate. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using
Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry

You can also use the Geometry Modify Shape Plate dialog box to change the markers used
to define the plate, the thickness of the plate, and the radius of the corners of the plate.
432 Adams/View
Plot Design Evaluation Results

Plot Design Evaluation Results

Simulate -> Design Evaluation ->

Automatically plots the results of a parametric analysis.

Learn about Generating Plots.

For the option: Do the following:

Result Set Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set you want to plot.
Create plot of Select if you want to generate a plot of the measure or objectives
measure/objective value vs. versus the variable value, trial number, or iteration number.
run
Create plot of measure vs. Select if you want to generate a plot of the measure or objectives
time for all runs versus time with a curve for each trial or iteration. If you use this
option,you must have specified a measure or an objective that refers to
a measure or result set component (not a macro or function). In
addition, you must have saved the results from the individual runs.
Learn more about Saving Results from individual runs.
 P - Z 433
Plots Transfer Function

Plots Transfer Function

Build -> System Elements -> Transfer Function -> New or Modify -> Check Format and Display Plot

Displays a plot of the transfer function you created using the Create/Modify Transfer Function dialog box.
Learn more about Creating and Modifying Transfer Functions.
434 Adams/View
Plots Transfer Function

For the option: Do the following:

Plot Select the type of plot to display:

• Magnitude - The magnitude of the transfer function element's

frequency response.
• Phase Angle - Phase of the transfer function element's frequency
response.
• Real Part - Real part of the frequency response of the transfer function
element.
• Imaginary Part - Imaginary part of the frequency response of the
transfer function element.
Plot Display Display a plot of the transfer function. Right-click to perform operations on
the plot, such as clear the plot. Right-click on each element in the plot to
delete that element.

Note: There are several operations displayed in the shortcut menu when
you right-click but many are not supported in the plot display.
Min Set the minimum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Max Set the maximum value for the frequency axis (horizontal). Press Enter to
enable the Redraw button.
Scale Select either:

• log - Scales the axis values so that each power of 10 is separated by the
same distance. For example, the values 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10,000 are
equally spaced.
• lin - Displays the axis values linearly, starting at 0.
Redraw Redraws the plot after you change the scale of the plot.
 P - Z 435
Plugin Manager

Plugin Manager
Tools -> Plugin Manager Shared Dialog Box
Manages the add-on modules or plugins to Adams/View, which expand its functionality. The MSC
plugins include Adams/Vibration, Adams/Controls, and Adams/Durability. The Plugin Manager lets you
run these products from within Adams/View and set Adams/View to load them automatically when you
start up. It also lets you unload them while in your current session of Adams/View, and view whether or
not there is a license available to run them.
Learn about Loading and Unloading Plugins.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Displays the names of the plugins installed.
Load To load a plugin, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes. To unload a plugin,
clear the selection of Yes.
Load at Startup To load a plugin automatically at startup, next to the name of the plugin, select Yes.
To not have the plugin load automatically, clear the selection of Yes.
Description Displays a description of the plugin selected in the Name column.
Version Displays the version of the plugin selected in the Name column.
Author Displays the company that published the plugin selected in the Name column.
License Displays the number of total licenses of the plugin selected in the Name column,
and how many of those licenses are available. A license must be available for you
to load the plugin.
436 Adams/View
Point Motion

Point Motion
Right-click point motion -> Modify

Lets you modify a single Point Motion.

Learn more about:
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Defining the Motion Magnitude
• DOF Removed by Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name of the point motion to modify.
Moving Point Change the marker that defines the location of the motion on the parts. Learn
About Point Motion.
Reference Point Change the marker that defines the orientation of the motion on the parts.
Direction Specify direction axis on reference point marker.
Define Using Enter how you want to define the motion. Select Function to define using a
numerical value or Subroutine to define using a user-written subroutine.
Function If you selected Function for Define Using, enter the following in the
Function (time) text box that appears:

• Numerical value (For rotational motion, specify the magnitude in

radians.)
• Function expression
To enter a function expression, next to the Function (time) text box, select the
More button

to display the Function Builder.

Parameters and ID If you selected Subroutine for Define Using, enter the parameters to be
passed to the MOTSUB user-written subroutine and its ID. Entering an ID is
optional.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine MOTSUB.
Learn about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
Type Set to Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration to specify how motion
magnitude is defined.
Displacement IC and Enter the initial conditions for displacement or velocity. The text boxes that
Velocity IC appear depend on how the magnitude of the motion is defined.
 P - Z 437
Point Motion/Joint Motion

Point Motion/Joint Motion

Right-click point/joint motion -> Modify

Modifies either a Point Motion or a Joint motion. Its title and options change depending on the type of
motion. Select a motion below for more information on the options available:
• Point Motion
• Joint Motion
438 Adams/View
Point Tool

Point Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Point Tool

Defines locations in three-dimensional space upon which you can build your model. Points allow you to
build parameterization between objects, as well as position objects. For example, you can attach a link to
points so that each time you move the points, the link’s geometry changes accordingly.
You can also use points to define the location where modeling objects connect, such as the point where
a joint connects two parts. Points do not define an orientation, only a location.
As you create a point, you define whether Adams/View should add it to ground or to another part. In
addition, you specify whether other parts near the same location should be attached (parameterized) to
the point. If you attach other bodies to the point, then the location of those bodies is tied to the location
of that point. As you change the location of the point, the location of all attached bodies change
accordingly.

Note: You should not attach a part’s center of mass marker to a point, however. If you attach a
center of mass marker, Adams/View removes the parameterization whenever it recomputes
the center of a part, unless you defined mass properties for the part.

Learn about:
• Creating Points
• Parameterization

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds point to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the point to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are
simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that
defines the race track can be added to ground.
Don't Attach/Attach Don't Attach - Keep other objects surrounding the point unattached to the
Near point. There will be no parameterization relationship set up.

Attach Near - Attach other nearby objects to the point. When you change the
location of the points, the other objects locations and orientations update
accordingly.
 P - Z 439
Point Tool

Note: After creating the point, you can modify its name and set its location using the Table Editor.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
440 Adams/View
Point-Curve Constraint Tool

Point-Curve Constraint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Point-Curve Constraint

The point-curve constraint restricts a fixed point defined on one part to lie on a curve defined on a second
part. The first part is free to roll and slide on the curve that is fixed to a second part. The curve on the
second part can be planar or spatial or open or closed. The first part cannot lift off the second part; it must
always lie on the curve. A point-curve constraint removes two translational Degrees of freedom from
your model.
When you specify the location of the point-curve constraint on the first part, Adams/View creates a
marker at that location. The marker is called the I marker. The I marker can only translate in one direction
relative to the curve. The I marker, however, is free to rotate in all three directions.
You can use the point-curve constraint to model a Pin-in-slot mechanism or a Simple Cam Follower
mechanism where a lever arm is articulated by the profile of a revolving cam.

When modeling a pin-in-slot mechanism, the point-curve constraint keeps the center of the pin in the
center of the slot, while allowing it to move freely along the slot and rotate in the slot.
Learn more about:
• Point-Curve Constraints
• Tips on Creating Higher-Pair Constraints

For the option: Do the following:

Curve/Edge Select whether you are defining the point-curve constraint along a curve or an edge
of a part:

• Curves - Splines, chains, and data-element curves are all considered

curves.
• Edge - An edge is one of the wireframe outlines drawn on a solid. For
example, you can use a Parasolid object representing a cam that you
imported into Adams/View.
 P - Z 441
Point-to-Point Measure

Point-to-Point Measure
Select object -> Build -> Measure -> Point-to-Point -> Create/Modify

Measures kinematic characteristics, such as displacement or velocity, between two locations on a model
during a Simulation.
Learn more about:
• Point-to-Point Measures
• Methods for Creating Point-to-Point Characteristics
• About Simulation Output

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Enter the name of the measure.
To Point Enter the marker or point to which to measure.
From Point Enter the marker or point from which to measure.
Characteristic Select the kinematic characteristic to be measured. The values you
enter in the next text boxes depend on whether you select a
translational or angular characteristics.

Learn about Point-to-Point Characteristics You Can Measure.

Component Select the component in which you are interested. The components
available depend on the coordinate system.
Cartisian/Cylindrical/Spherical For translational characteristics only, set to the associated
coordinate system (Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical).
Represent Coordinates in Specify:

• A marker along whose axes the measure will be represented.

• Leave blank to represent in the ground reference frame.
Do time derivatives in (Available if you selected translational velocity, translational
acceleration, or angular acceleration as the characteristic.)

You can:

• Enter a marker representing the measure reference frame.

• Leave blank to use ground as the reference frame.
Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you
are modifying a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
442 Adams/View
Polyline Tool

Polyline Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Polyline Tool

Creates single- and multi-line segments (polylines) and create open or closed polylines (polygons)

Before drawing lines or polylines, you can specify the length of the line or lines to be created so you can
quickly create perfectly sized lines and polylines.
When creating a single line, you can also specify the angle of the line. The angle you specify is relative
to the x-axis of the global coordinate system or the working grid, if it is turned on. When you create line
geometry, you can select to create a new part consisting of the line geometry or add the line geometry to
an existing part. If you create a new part, it has no mass since it is composed of only wire geometry. You
can extrude the lines into solid geometry that has mass. For more information, see Extruding Construction
Geometry Along a Path.

Learn about Creating Lines and Polylines.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Part/On Select either:
Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the polyline to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the polyline to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you
are simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry
that defines the race track can be added to ground.
Polyline/One Line Select either:

• Polyline - Creates a line made up of multiple lines.

• One Line - Creates a single line.
 P - Z 443
Polyline Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Length Set the length of the single line or the individual lines making up the
polyline. This should give you greater control.
Angle Set the angle of the line. If you set the angle for a polyline, Adams/View
creates all the lines making up the polyline at the same angle.
Closed Set to create a closed polygon.

Note: Adams/View places hotpoints at the endpoint of each line segment after you draw the
objects. The hotpoints let you reshape the lines. If you create a closed polyline,
Adams/View maintains it as a closed polyline regardless of how you move the hotpoints.
For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to
Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also use the line or polyline modify dialog box to more accurately place the points
that make up the line or polyline. You can also read in location points from a file. For more
information, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location
Table.
444 Adams/View
Precision Move

Precision Move
Edit -> Move

Moves objects either by increments or to precise coordinates.

You can select to move the objects relative to a specified object’s coordinate system, called the reference
coordinate system. You can also select to move objects relative to the screen. In addition, you can use the
Precision Move dialog box to view the coordinates of one object in relation to another.

Learn about Moving Objects Using the Precision Move Dialog Box.

Option Description
Rotate Y, X, Z Select each to rotate an object with respect to a body-fixed or reference
coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/- text box. You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to/About the
options.
Translate Y, X, Z Select each box to translate an object with respect to a body-fixed or
reference coordinate system in incremental amounts specified in the +/-
text box. You specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative
to/About the options.
Relocate the Enter the object or objects to be moved.
 P - Z 445
Precision Move

Option Description
Relative to/About the Select to define the coordinate system whose axes are to be used for
defining rotations and translations. For rotations:

• Relative to rotates objects in place (their locations do not change) and

their rotations are with respect to the coordinate system specified in the
Relative to the text box.
• About the rotates the objects rotate about the origin of the coordinate
system specified (their locations change) and the rotations are with
respect to the coordinate system specified in the About the text box.
Translations are with respect to the coordinate system defined as either
Relative to the or the About the.
Model/Part/Marker/Vie By default, the Precision Move dialog box moves the selected objects
w/Entity/Screen relative to the default coordinate system. You can specify that Adams/View
use a different coordinate system as the reference coordinate system. The
rotational and translational coordinates you enter for the move or the
incremental values you select are with respect to the origin and orientation
of this coordinate system.

You can select the following types of objects:

• Model - Global coordinate system.

• Part or marker - Part or marker in your model.
• View - Adams/View defined View, such as front, right, or left. Use the
Database Navigator to select the name of the view.
• Entity - Any entity, including those that are not on the screen. Entities
also include the working grid and gravity.
• Screen - The plane of the screen. When you select to move objects
relative to the screen, the Precision Move dialog box changes the dials
on the left to those shown in this picture. The dials translate and rotate
the objects:
• Think of the translation as pulling the object in the direction of the
arrow. For example, when you select the small arrow that points
up, you pull an object up along the vertical axis. The double arrows
to the right translate an object along an axis that is normal to the
screen (works only if the view is in perspective mode).
• Think of the rotation as pushing on an object at that point. For
example, if you select the arrow that points to the right, you are
pushing the horizontal axis back, resulting in a positive rotation
around the vertical axis.
446 Adams/View
Precision Move

Option Description
C1 - C3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to move an object relative to
another object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About
the options.

Enter the coordinates in the default coordinate system (Cartesian,

spherical, or cylindrical).

Note: If you select Load, C1 displays the current coordinates of an object.

A1 - A3 Enter the coordinates to which you want to rotate an object relative to
another object’s coordinate system (the reference coordinate system). You
specify the reference coordinate system using the Relative to the and About
the options.

Enter the coordinates in the default coordinate system (Cartesian,

cylindrical, or spherical).

Note: If you select Load, C1 displays the current coordinates of an object.

Load Select to view the current coordinates of an object with respect to the
coordinate system of another object (reference coordinate system).
Adams/View displays the coordinates in the six position text boxes (C1
through C3 for translation and A1 through A3 for rotation).

For example, if you want to ensure that two markers, which you want to
connect using an inplane joint, are in the same plane, you can set one
marker as the object to be moved and the other object as the relative to
object. You can then view the rotation coordinates of the first marker to
ensure that they are (0, 0, 0).
 P - Z 447
Print

Print
Adams/PostProcessor -> File -> Print

You can print pages directly to a printer or store them in a file for printing at a later time.

Note: Adams/PostProcessor only prints the portion of a report or table that fits on the paper.

• To print a multi-page report, open the report in a browser and print from there.
• To print a multi-page table, export the table in HTML format, open the report in a
browser, and print from there. Pages with only reports and tables on them print
significantly faster than pages with mixed views (for example, plot and report),
depending on the type of printer being used.

For the option: Do the following:

Print to Select either:

• Printer:
• On UNIX, in the Print to area, select Printer and enter an operating system
command to execute the print job (for example, lpr -Psp2 or lp -c -Ppd1).
• On Windows, select also show Windows print dialog to display the
default Windows printer dialog box from which you can select a printer.
The dialog box appears after you select OK.
• File:
• In the Print to area, select File and enter the location and name of the file
to which you want to print the page.
Note that if you print more than one page to a file, Adams/PostProcessor
uses the page number of each page as the name of the file.
If you selected to print to a file, select the type of file format. You can
select Postscript, HPGL, Encapsulated Postscript, tif, jpg, xpm, bmp, and
Native Windows (Windows only).
Note: If you select jpg format, you can set the level of quality.
(A)Paper Size Select the size of paper, or to accept the current default paper for the printer, select
default.
Landscape Select if you want the page to print horizontally.
Portrait Select if you want the page to print vertically.
448 Adams/View
Print

For the option: Do the following:

Black and White Select if you want the page to print in black and white.

If you select Black and White, Adams/PostProcessor prints all colors in black and
the background in white even if you are using a color printer.

Selecting black and white is generally considered more readable for presentations,
but you should use altering line style or line thickness to distinguish between the
curves on the plot.
Color Select if you want to print the plot in color.

If you print a plot in color but send it to a black-and-white printer, the printer
approximates the colors using grayscale.
Current Page Select to print the page you currently have displayed.
All Pages Select to print all the pages.
Page Range Select to print specific pages and enter the first page and last page.
 P - Z 449
Range Measure

Range Measure
Build -> Measure -> Range -> New/Modify

Creates range measures with which you can obtain statistical feedback about any existing measure.
Ranges dynamically calculate the maximum, minimum, average, or variation characteristics of any
measure.
Learn about Range Measures.

For the option: Do the following:

Measure Name Enter the name of the measure.
Type Select the range characteristic to measure.
Of Measure Enter an existing measure to analyze.
Create Strip Chart Select to display a Strip chart of the measure.
Select to set the attributes of the measure. Only available when you are modifying
a measure. See Measure Attributes dialog box help.
450 Adams/View
Reading a Command File

Reading a Command File

Before reading a command file, set the display and error options as described in Command File dialog
box help.

To read (import) a command file:

1. From the Tools menu, select Read Command File.
2. Select the command file to import.
Shortcut: Press F2.
Learn about importing command files using Import - Adams/View Command Files.
 P - Z 451
Rename

Rename
Database Navigator -> Rename

Renames any object in the Modeling database.

Learn about Renaming Objects Through the Database Navigator.

For the option: Do the following:

Text box Enter the new name for the object you selected in the tree list.
Apply Select to apply the new name to the object.
452 Adams/View
Rename Dialog Box

Rename Dialog Box

Tools -> Dialog Box -> Modify -> Dialog Box -> Rename

Renames a dialog box.

Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter a new name for your dialog box.
 P - Z 453
Rename Object

Rename Object
Edit -> Rename

Lets you rename any object in your Modeling database. You can change the default name assigned to the
object but you cannot change its full name.
Learn About Object Naming.

For the option: Do the following:

New Name Enter the name you want to assign to the object.
Select to display the Database Navigator and rename another object in the
database.
454 Adams/View
Results (.res) Content

Results (.res) Content

Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Results (.res) Content

Selecting Results (.res) Content as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
content of the results file.
Select the options for the content you want in the results file.
 P - Z 455
Results (.res) Options

Results (.res) Options

Settings -> Solver -> Output -> More -> Output Category -> Results (.res) Options

Selecting Results (.res) Options as the Output Category in the Solver Settings dialog box lets you set the
format of the results file.

For the option: Do the following:

Comment Enter a title for the results file.
Format Set the type of format:

• Binary - By default, Adams/View saves the results file as a binary file.

You cannot view a binary file nor can you move it to different computer
platforms. It, however, provides greater precision, faster access, and
more compact size than a standard Adams/View text file.
• ASCII - Standard Adams/View text file with no formatting.
• XML - XML is a license-free, platform-independent file format used
often for Web applications. The XML format's structured data
representation is an ideal framework for storing Adams information.
Because XML is an ASCII file, you can use it across all platforms and
read it in a text editor. Although the formatting is not optimized for
reading in text editors, you will find it useful to quickly check the
progress of a simulation, or debugging a model. You can tag XML-
formatted results for retrieval from many database or pdm systems.
Freely available tools for reading and writing XML files makes it easy to
incorporate Adams results into other programs.
If you selected XML as the format, the following options are active:
Decimal Places Specify how many digits are written after the decimal point for real numbers.
The default value is 17 decimal places (full precision for recovery of double-
precision numbers).
Round Off Set to On to turn on the roundoff feature for real numbers (the default is
disabled). The Significant digits option controls the actual numbers of digits
retained during rounding off.
Scientific Notation Specify the boundaries at which the format for real numbers switches from a
fixed point format to scientific notation. The values are exponents for the base
ten. The default values are -4 and 5, meaning that any number less than or equal
to 1.0E-04 or greater than or equal to 1.0E+05 will be written in scientific
notation.
456 Adams/View
Results (.res) Options

For the option: Do the following:

Shift Width Specify a positive integer that defines the number of spaces added at the left of
each level of hierarchy in the XML data structure. The default is zero spaces to
minimize the file size, but provides the lowest level Kof readability. The
following shows an example of a portion of an XML file when Shift Width is set
to 3.

-------------------------------------
xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Results>
< Analysis>
< ModelInfo title="model_1" />
< Units angle="deg" length="mm" mass="kg" time="sec"
/>
...
Significant digits Specify how many significant figures of a real number are retained during round
off (when round off is enabled). The default is to use ten significant figures. This
number is distinct from the number of places actually printed for a real number,
which the Decimal Places option controls. Significant Figures includes digits to
the left and right of the decimal point.
Trailing Zeros Set to On to specify that trailing zeros are printed for real numbers. The default
is not to print trailing zeros. When enabled, all the digits after the decimal point
will be printed, whether they are zero or not. When disabled, any zeros at the end
of the fractional part of the number will be dropped, leaving the last digit as a
non-zero digit.
Zero Threshold Enter the zero threshold value for numbers being written to an output file. If a
number has an absolute value smaller than the zero threshold value, then it will
be written out as zero. This value is independent of units.
 P - Z 457
Revolute Joint Tool

Revolute Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Revolute Joint Tool

Creates a revolute joint that allows the rotation of one part with respect to another part about a common
axis. The revolute joint can be located anywhere along the axis about which the joint’s parts can rotate
with respect to each other.

The orientation of the revolute joint defines the direction of the axis about which the joint’s parts can
rotate with respect to each other. The rotational axis of the revolute joint is parallel to the orientation
vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
458 Adams/View
Revolute Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction
vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
 P - Z 459
Revolution Tool

Revolution Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Revolution Tool

Creates geometry by revolving a profile. You specify the profile and the axis about which to revolve the
profile. The Revolution tool revolves the profile around the axis in a counterclockwise direction (right-
hand rule)

You can create an open or closed revolution. If you create a closed revolution, the Revolution tool closes
the profile by drawing a line segment between the profile’s first and last points and creates a solid
revolution from this profile. If you leave the revolution open, the Revolution tool creates a skin that has
no mass properties.
You can also select to create the revolution using the Non-analytical Method or Analytical Method.
Learn about Creating a Revolution.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Part/On Select either:
Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the revolution to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the revolution to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or influence
the simulation of your model. For example, if you are simulating a car
driving around a race track, the geometry that defines the race track can be
added to ground.
Create by Picking Select:

• Points to select the locations on the screen that define the profile.
• Curve to select the curve to be used to define the profile.
460 Adams/View
Revolution Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Closed Select to create a closed revolution. (Available only when you set Create
by Picking to Points.)
Analytical Select to create a revolution using the analytical method. Clear to use the
non-analytical method

Note: After you draw a revolution, hotpoints appear. If you used the non-analytical method to
create the revolution, the hotpoints appear at the vertexes of the profile. If you used the
analytical method, hotpoints appear at points along the curves that define the revolution.
The hotpoints let you resize and reshape the revolution. For more information on
modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.
You can also use the revolution modify dialog box to more accurately place the points that
make up the profile and read in location points from a file. For more information, see Using
Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify Geometry and Using the Location Table.
 P - Z 461
Rotational Motion Tool

Rotational Motion Tool

Build -> Joints -> Rotational Motion Tool

Rotates the first part that the joint connects about the z-axis of a second part. The right-hand rule
determines the sign of the motion. The z-axis of the first part must be aligned with the z-axis of the second
part at all times. The angle is zero when the x-axis of the first part is also aligned with the x-axis of the
second part.
Learn about:
• Overview of Motion
• Creating Joint Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Rot. Speed Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By
default, creates a rotational motion with a speed of 30 degrees per second.

To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the

Rot. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on
using the Function Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
462 Adams/View
Save Binary Notebook As

Save Binary Notebook As

Postprocessing -> File -> Save As

In stand-alone mode, Adams/PostProcessor saves your current session in notebooks, which are binary
files that store all the simulation results, animations, and plots that you are working on. You can also save
a copy of a notebook with a different name or in a different location. When you save a notebook,
Adams/Posrocessor saves all the pages you created and their content. It also saves the simulation results
in the binary file. The results are not associated with the files you imported.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Enter a name for the notebook.

To save the document in a different directory, right-click the File Name text box,
select Browse, and then select the desired directory.
 P - Z 463
Save Database

Save Database
File -> Save Database

Alerts you that Adams/View is saving the current Modeling database as an Adams/View binary file and
asks you if you want to create a backup file. To save the model data in another format, see the File Export
dialog box.
Learn about Modeling Database.

For the option: Do the following:

model_name exists. • Yes - Creates a backup file of the existing database file and saves the
Create backup? database. When Adams/View creates a backup file, it adds a % to the
end of the file extension (for example, model.bin%).
• No - Overwrites the existing database file with the current database
contents without creating a backup.
• Cancel - Exits the command without saving the database.
464 Adams/View
Save Database As

Save Database As
File -> Save Database As

Saves the current Modeling database to a binary file with a new name. This lets you keep several versions
of your database under different names and reduces the risk of losing your work if you inadvertently
change or delete your model. Saving your modeling database saves all modeling information, including
any customization changes you made.
To save the model data in another format, export the data as explained Exchanging Data in Adams. To
save your preferences, see Saving and Restoring Settings.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name Specify the name you want to assign to the file.

If you want the file written to a directory other than the one from which you are
running Adams/View, enter the path name in the File Name text box.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

 P - Z 465
Save Design Evaluation Results

Save Design Evaluation Results

Simulate -> Design Evaluation ->

Allows you to save a single set of results for a parametric analysis.
Learn about Saving Results.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter a name for the analysis.
Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to add a unique number at the end of the
name. Adams/View copies the current parametric results to a new analysis
with the name you specify.
466 Adams/View
Save Model at Simulation Position

Save Model at Simulation Position

Simulate -> Interactive ->

Saves the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new name so you can use it
as your new design configuration.
Learn about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.

For the option: Do the following:

New Model Enter a name for the model to be created.
Analysis Specify the simulation containing the frame you want to save.
Frame Enter the frame number of the configuration you want to save to a new model.
 P - Z 467
Save Run Results

Save Run Results

Simulate -> Interactive ->

Saves the results of the last Simulation under a new name so that you can animate or plot the results at a
later time. Saving simulation results is particularly important when you want to compare the results from
several design variations.
Be sure to save your Modeling database after you save your simulation results (File -> Save Database).

Note: By default, the results of a simulation are only saved to the modeling database, not to
external Adams/Solver analysis files. To save the results to external Adams/Solver analysis
files, set the simulation output before you run the simulation, as explained in Setting
Simulation Controls. To export the results to analysis files, see Export - Adams/Solver
Analysis Files.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name for the simulation results.
Auto-Increment Name Select if you want Adams/View to automatically increment the run names
when you save subsequent simulations.
468 Adams/View
Screw Joint Tool

Screw Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Screw Joint Tool

Creates a screw joint that specifies the rotation of one part about an axis, as the part translates along the
axis with respect to a second part.

The screw joint does not require that the two parts remain parallel with respect to the axis of rotation and
translation. However, the z-axis of the coordinate system marker on the first part and the z-axis of the
coordinate system marker on the second part must always be parallel and co-directed. Although the screw
joint does not enforce this parallelism, the chain of parts and joints that connects the two markers should.
After you create a screw joint, you need to specify the pitch value. The pitch value is the distance from
one peak on a thread of the screw to the next thread. It defines the amount of translational displacement
of the first part for every rotation of the second part about the axis of rotation.
By default, Adams/View sets the pitch value to 1. The pitch value is in length units. A positive pitch
creates a right-hand thread, and a negative pitch creates a left-hand thread.
 P - Z 469
Screw Joint Tool

Learn about Creating Idealized Joints.

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see about Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers with Solver Settings - Executable dialog box help.
470 Adams/View
Scripted Simulation

Scripted Simulation
Simulate -> Scripted

Display tools for performing Scripted simulation.

Learn about Performing a Scripted Simulation.
 P - Z 471
Scripted Simulation

Icon Description
Sets your model back to its initial design configuration so you can modify
your model or perform another simulation starting at time 0.

You do not have to set the model back to its design configuration to
continue simulating. You can pick up from the last frame of your animation
and continue.

Shortcut: Double-click the Select tool.

Stops any further processing, and the modeling objects appear in the
positions that Adams/Solver last successfully calculated.

Starts the Simulation.

Replays an Animation of the last Simulation. Replaying an animation

displays the results much faster than if you simulate the model again and
watch the frames update as the solution calculates results. You can also
replay an animation of a saved simulation; for more information, see
Animation Controls.

How Adams/View replays your simulation depends on whether or not you

have finished the simulation and reset the model back to its initial design
configuration.

• If you have run a simulation, or part of a simulation, but not set the
model back to its initial configuration, when you select to replay the
animation, Adams/View animates the model up to the last simulation
step and leaves your model there.
• If you reset your model back to its initial configuration, when you select
to replay the animation, Adams/View automatically sets the model back
to the initial design configuration when the animation is complete.
Model Verify Tool

Simulation Script Name Enter the name of the simulation Script.

Reset before and after Sets your model back to its initial design configuration before you run the
Simulation.
Interactive/Scripted Displays tools for controlling either an interactive or Scripted simulation.
472 Adams/View
Scripted Simulation

Icon Description
Save/Delete Simulation Results

• Left-click to display the Save Run Results dialog box so you can
save the simulation results.
• Right-click to select a set of simulation results to delete.
Save Simulated Position

Displays the Save Model at Simulation Position dialog box so you can save
the model at a simulated position into the Modeling database under a new
name.
Displays the Animation Controls dialog box.

Displays the Linear Modes Controls dialog box.

Displays Adams/PostProcessor.

Simulation Settings... Displays the Solver Settings dialog box, letting you set how you want the
Simulation performed.
 P - Z 473
Second-Order Filter Block

Second-Order Filter Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

The second-order filter block creates a second-order filter by specifying the undamped natural frequency
and the damping ratio. You can parameterize the undamped natural frequency or damping ratio constant
with an Adams/View real design variable to quickly study the effect of varying the frequency or damping
ratio of the associated block.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Natural Specify the natural frequency.
Frequency
Damping Ratio Specify the damping ratio.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

474 Adams/View
Select List

Select List
Database Navigator -> Select List

Allows you to view objects that you've selected. You can also add and remove objects from the select list.
Learn about:
• Managing the Select List
• Showing , Hiding, and Selecting Objects in the Database Navigator

For the option: Do the following:

Add Select to add objects from the tree list or view window.
Remove Select to remove the highlighted objects from the list.
Clear All Select to clear all objects from the select list.
 P - Z 475
Select List Manager

Select List Manager

Edit -> Select List

Lets you view objects you’ve selected and add to and remove objects from the select list. You can add
and remove objects based on their name, type, group, and parent.
Learn more about Selecting Objects.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Number of Objects in Select Lists the objects currently selected (in the select list).
List
Object Name Enter the name of the object that you want to add, and then select the
Add button next to the text box.
Add Select to add the object in the Object Name text box to the select list.
Name Filter Enter the name of the objects that you want to add to or remove from
the select list. Type any wildcards that you want included. For
example, to remove all objects that contain a particular character,
such as an h.
Type Filter Set to the type of object or objects that you want to add or remove.
To display all the different object types, select Browse.
Scope Limit the scope of objects to be added or removed to only objects
belonging to a certain object by entering the name of the parent
object. For example,you can tell Adams/View to limit the scope from
all markers to only markers belonging to a PART_1.
Expand Groups Select to add or remove objects in a group to the Select List Manager.
Before adding the object to the select list, you can set whether or not
you want to list each object in the group in the Select List Manager
or just list the name of the group.
Remove Objects Select and then select the objects to be removed from a list.

Tips To select objects: in a list.

Clear All Select to quickly remove all objects in the select list.
Refresh Select to update the list of objects in the Select List Manager window
so that it reflects any selections that you made using the mouse or
Shortcut menus.
Add Select to add the object in objects to and from the select list based on
search criteria.
Remove Removes multiple objects from the select list based on search
criteria.
476 Adams/View
Setting Screen and Printer Fonts

Setting Screen and Printer Fonts

Settings -> Fonts

Changes the font Adams/View uses to display text in a view, such as the name of a part or a note on the
screen, or to print text to a printer. The fonts available for displaying text in a view are those available
with your operating system. The fonts available for printing text are a fixed set of 12 fonts.

Note: Your printer may not support all of these printer fonts.

For the option: Do the following:

Screen Font Enter the name of the font you want Adams/View to use to display text in a view.

To browse for a font, right-click the text box, point to Browse, and then select a
font.
Postscript Font Select the font you want to use to print the text.
 P - Z 477
Simulation Controls

Simulation Controls
Simulate -> Interactive/Scripted

Main toolbox -> Click

Displays tools for controlling Interactive Simulation and Scripted simulations. Select a topic below:
• Interactive Simulation Palette and Container
• Scripted Simulation
478 Adams/View
Single-Component Force tool

Single-Component Force tool

Build -> Forces -> Single-Component Tool

Applies a translational force in one of two ways:

• To one movable part - You select the part, the location of the point of application, and the
direction. Adams/View automatically applies the force to ground.
• To two parts - You select the parts and the locations of the point of application on each part.
Adams/View automatically defines the direction based on the line of sight between the two
locations. The direction is continuously updated during Simulation.

You cannot use the line-of-sight method if the two points that define the force will become coincident
during a simulation because the force direction becomes undefined. When running a simulation,
Adams/Solver warns you when the points become nearly coincident. The following shows an example
of a warning:

Caution: The direction cosines for SFORCE model_1.FORCE_1 are invalid. This is usually caused
by a (nearly) zero length SFORCE or SPRINGDAMPER.

You can ignore the warning only if the computed force is zero when the points are coincident (for
example, when you are using a BISTOP function that is inactive when its markers are coincident).
Otherwise, having coincident points is a modeling error with unpredictable results.
Learn more about:
 P - Z 479
Single-Component Force tool

• Single-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Run-Time Direction Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can
select the following:

• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let

Adams/View use a default value.
• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
480 Adams/View
Single-Component Torque tool

Single-Component Torque tool

Build -> Forces -> Single-Component Torque Tool

Applies a rotational force to either one part or two about a specified axis. You specify the point of
application and the direction. The following figure shows an example of a single-component torque
applied to one part.

Learn more about:

• Single-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Run-Time Direction Specify the number of parts and the nature of the force direction. You can
select the following:

• Space Fixed
• Body Moving
• Two Bodies
Learn about Specifying Force Direction for Single-Component Forces.
Construction Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
 P - Z 481
Single-Component Torque tool

For the option: Do the following:

Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant torque - Lets you enter a constant torque value or let

Adams/View use a default value.
• Spring-Damper - Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values. (Not available when you are using the
Main toolbox to access the force tool.)
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Torque, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Spring-Damper, the following two options appear:
Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
482 Adams/View
Single Point Motion Tool

Single Point Motion Tool

Build -> Joints -> Single Point Motion Tool

Creates a single Point Motion.

Learn more about:
• Tips on Creating Motions
• Defining the Motion Magnitude
• Types of Motion
• Creating Point Motions Using the Motion Tools

For the option: Do the following:

1 location (Bodies Set how you want the motion connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies -1 Location/ • 1 location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies -2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the motion oriented:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the motion along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the motion along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
Characteristic Specify the direction of the motion.
 P - Z 483
Single Point Motion Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Trans. Speed If you set Characteristic to Translational, specify the speed of the motion
in displacement units per second. By default, Adams/View creates a
translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per second.

To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the

Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder to display the Function Builder. For information on using the
Function Builder, see Function Builder and the Adams/View Function
Builder online help.
Rot. Speed If you set Characteristic to Rotational, specify the speed of the motion in
displacement units per second. By default, creates a rotational motion with
a speed of 30 degrees per second.

To enter a function expression or user-written subroutine, right-click the

Rot. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression
Builder to display the Adams/View Function Builder.
484 Adams/View
Six-Component General Force tool

Six-Component General Force tool

Build -> Forces -> Six-Component General Tool

Creates rotational and translational force between two parts in your model using six orthogonal
components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force and torque values or lets
Adams/View use a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following options appears:
Force and Torque Enter a constant force value.
 P - Z 485
Six-Component General Force tool

For the option: Do the following:

If you selected Bushing Like, the following options appear:
K and KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.
C and CT Enter the damping coefficients.
486 Adams/View
Sizes

Sizes
Dialog-Box Builder -> Preferences -> Sizes

Displays the default size of a new interface object if you create it by clicking in the new dialog box or
container.
It does not display the size for the objects you created and modified by dragging the item to a desired size.
Learn more about Customizing Dialog Boxes Using the Dialog-Box Builder.

For the option: Do the following:

Default Height Displays the default height for the object.
Default Width Displays the default width for the object.
 P - Z 487
Snap Grid

Snap Grid
Dialog Box-Builder ->Preferences -> Snap Grid

Allows you to restrict the possible positions and sizes of your interface objects, similar to the Working
grid in the modeling window.

When you drag an item with the mouse to move or resize it, the mouse position will snap to the nearest
grid point. Because the snap grid points are not visible, and the default grid is very fine (2 pixel distance)
it is generally not very noticeable.
You can turn this option on or off in the Option menu in the Dialog-Box Builder.

For the option: Do the following:

Horizontal Grid Spacing Enter a value to set the horizontal distance between grid points.
Vertical Grid Spacing Enter a value to set the vertical distance between grid points.
Horizontal Grid Offset/ Enter the number of pixels from the top left border to begin grip snaps.

Vertical Grid Offset

488 Adams/View
Solver Settings

Solver Settings
Settings -> Solver -> Dynamics/Kinematics/Equilibrium/Initial

Conditions/Executable/Display/Output/Optimizer/Debugging

Displays options for setting the Simulation depending on the command you selected:
• Dynamics
• Kinematics
• Equillibrium
• Initial Conditions
• Executable
• Display
• Output
• Pattern for Jacobian
• Optimizer
• Debugging
• Contacts
• Flexible Bodies
 P - Z 489
Solver Settings - Contacts

Solver Settings - Contacts

Settings -> Solver -> Contacts

You can set default options for the performing three-dimensional contact operations.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Contacts.
Model Enter the name of the model associated with the settings.
Geometry Library Select the geometry library to be used for contact operations:

• Parasolids - Specifies that the Parasolid geometry library to be used for

three-dimensional contact determination. Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)
supports Parasolid version 19.0.17.
• Default_Library - Specifies that the default geometry library to be used
for three-dimensional contact determination. The default library is based
on RAPID, a polygon-based interference detection package developed
at the University of North Carolina. Currently, Adams/Solver supports
RAPID version 2.01.
For many models, the Default Library can substantially reduce simulation time.
Because it is polygon-based, however, it is not always as accurate as the
Parasolids geometry engine. Parasolids is an exact boundary-representation
geometric modeler, which makes it highly accurate, but not as fast as a polygon-
based engine. For these reasons, you can switching from one to the other
depending on your needs.
Faceting Tolerances Specify the faceting tolerances when you select the Default_Library as the
geometry library (see above). Faceting is the process of approximating the
surface of an object by a mesh of triangles. All polygon-based geometry engines
used faceted representations of surfaces.

The default value Faceting Tolerances is 300. Increasing this value will result in
a finer mesh of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of surfaces
which are curved. Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the memory
requirements of the geometry engine and adds to the computational overhead,
which makes it run slower. Setting the faceting tolerance to values greater than
1000 is not recommended. Values smaller than 300 will give negligible
performance improvements. The faceting tolerance has no effect on inherently
polygonal surfaces such as boxes.
490 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Debugging

Solver Settings - Debugging

Settings -> Solver -> Debugging

You can set default options for the debugging information that appears when you run a Simulation.
You can also turn on the display of Strip charts and step through a simulation. Learn more about
Debugging Your Model.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Debugging.
Debugger Set to:

• On - Turn on the Simulation Debugger

• Off - Turn off the Simulation debugger
Display Set to:

• None - Displays no information.

• Table - Displays the Debug table.
• Highlighting - Highlights those objects experiencing the most error or the
most change, force, or acceleration, depending on the element you select
to track. Note that selecting highlighting of objects will significantly slow
down your simulation.
• Table and Highlighting - Displays both the Debug table and highlights
objects. The objects highlighted are the same objects shown at the top of
the Element list in the Debug table.
Track Maximum Set to track:

• Error - Track objects with the largest equation residual error. This number
is an indicator of how far Adams/Solver is from a solution. It should
decrease with every iteration.
• Force - Track objects generating the greatest force. Includes forces and
constraints.
• Change - Track variables with the most change.
• Acceleration - Track objects experiencing the greatest acceleration.
Includes only parts.
More Select to display options for stepping through a simulation and displaying strip
charts.
 P - Z 491
Solver Settings - Debugging

For the option: Do the following:

Single Step Set to Yes to single step through a simulation. The Simulation Debugger pauses
after each simulation output step, time step, or iteration so you can closely inspect
the simulation behavior. You can step through a simulation with any of the other
debugger options selected, such as strip charts, tables, or object highlighting. As
you run a simulation, Adams/View displays a dialog box that gives you the option
to continue with the simulation or cancel it.
Display Stripchart Select the type of strip chart you want to display to provide you with insight into
the simulation.

Learn about the types of strip charts.

492 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Display

Solver Settings - Display

Settings -> Solver -> Display

Controls how Adams/View displays your model during a single Simulation or how it displays your model
during a parametric analysis. You can also set the information that Adams/View displays during a
parametric analysis.
Use the Solver Settings dialog box so you see just the amount of information you need during a
simulation. For example, when you perform a simulation on a new model, set up the display to see the
model change as the solution proceeds to determine if the simulation is working properly. Updating the
display of the model frequently can, however, slow down the overall solution process. Once your model
runs properly, change the options so Adams/View only updates the model at the end of the simulation.
You can even set Adams/View so it never updates the model. You can then play an animation of the
simulation, as required.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Display.
Show Messages If you are running Adams/Solver externally, set to Yes to display the messages that
Adams/Solver generates into an Information window. The messages include the
diagnostic messages that Adams/Solver generates during a simulation, as well as
warnings and errors, which are always displayed. Adams/View displays all
messages output during a simulation to the message window and to its Log file.
 P - Z 493
Solver Settings - Display

For the option: Do the following:

Update Graphics Set to one of the options below to indicate when you want your model updated
during the simulation. The options are listed from option that sets the fewest
updates to the option that sets the most.

• Never - No updates. Use this option only when you are sure that your
simulation will run to completion without difficulty, and you want to
maximize the efficiency of the simulation. (You can also set this option
directly from the Interactive Simulation Palette and Container when
Running an Interactive Simulation.)
• At Simulation - Update your model display only at the end of the
simulation.
• At Output Step - Update your model display at every output time step
that you specified when you submitted your simulation and omit any
contact steps. Because it does not display contact steps, your simulation
time may improve because the graphical processing operations will not be
burdened with intermediate contact events.
• At Contact/Output Step - Update the model display at each output time
step and contact step. This is the default.
• At Integration Step - An update of your model display at every
integration time step that Adams/Solver requires to provide a solution to
your specified level of accuracy. This option only applies to dynamic
simulations since they are the only type requiring numerical integration. It
is helpful for debugging purposes but can lead to significantly longer
simulation times. For more information, see Solver Settings - Dynamic.
• At Iteration - Update your model display at every iteration. This option is
most useful when debugging static simulations because they are purely
iterative in nature since there is no integration required. This option is also
available for dynamic simulations, in which case Adams/View displays
the model at every corrector step associated with each predictor step.
Using the At Every Iteration option with dynamic simulations can result
in significantly longer simulation times.
Icons To see all your model icons as your model is updated, set to On. Keeping your
icons on as your model is updated can help you understand how model objects
behave, especially constraints and forces. By default, icons are not visible during
animations.
More Select to more display options, including those for parametric analysis.
Prompt Set to Yes to indicate that you want to be prompted whether or not Adams/View
should display each updated frame. By default, there is no delay and you are not
prompted to display each updated frame.
Time Delay Enter the number of seconds Adams/View should pause after displaying each
updated frame so you can study it. By default, there is no delay.
494 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Display

For the option: Do the following:

Update Toolbar Select an option to set how Adams/View should update the simulation information
that appears in the status bar as the solution proceeds. The options are a subset of
the options available under the Update Graphics pull-down menu and behave in a
similar way.
Chart Objective Select to display a strip chart of the following depending on the type of parametric
analysis:

• Objective value versus variable value for a Design study.

• Objective value versus trial for a Design of experiments (DOE).
• Objective value versus iteration number for an Optimization.
Adams/View updates the strip chart at every trial or iteration.
Chart Variables Displays a strip chart for each design variable, plotting its value versus the trial or
iteration number. Adams/View updates the strip chart every trial or iteration.
Save Curves Clears all displayed measures at the beginning of the parametric analysis and
automatically saves the curve from each trial or iteration. If you do not select Save
Curves, Adams/View does not clear or save any curves. It only displays the curve
for the current simulation and any curves you previously saved.
Show Report Automatically displays a tabular report at the end of the parametric simulation.
You can use the Tabular Report

tool to display this table at any time, write it to a file, and control its format
(see Generating a Table).
 P - Z 495
Solver Settings - Dynamic

Solver Settings - Dynamic

Settings -> Solver -> Dynamic

Dynamic simulations are transient or time-varying simulations used to investigate the movements of parts
over time; these movements result from the combined effects of forces and constraint relationships. You
can perform dynamic simulations on models that have any number of Degrees of freedom (DOF).
It is computationally more efficient, however, to perform Kinematic simulations on models with zero DOF
and to perform dynamic simulations only on models with one or more DOF. For dynamic simulations,
Adams/Solver can use several numerical algorithms to calculate an approximate solution to the equations
of motion it formulates for your mechanical system.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Dynamic.
Integrator Select an integrator (the integrators HASTIFF, HHT and Newmark are only available
with Adams/Solver (C++)).

For more on the integrators, see Comparison of Integrators and the:

• INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) online help

• INTEGRATOR statement in the Adams/Solver (C++) help
Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integrator that is not used or no
longer supported. For example, if you import a dataset (.adm) file that
contains the statement "INTEGRATOR/DSTIFF", which is discontinued,
Adams/View displays Unknown. If you try to select Unknown,
Adams/View defaults to GSTIFF.
Formulation If you selected the integration method GSTIFF, WSTIFF, HASTIFF or Constant
BDF, select a formulation for the integrator:

• I3
• SI2
• SI1 - only available in Adams/Solver (FORTRAN)
See Equation Formulation Comparison and the INTEGRATOR statement in the
Adams/Solver online help, for more on the integrators.

Note: Unknown appears if your model uses an integration method that is not
used or no longer supported. If you try to select Unknown, Adams/View
defaults to I3.
496 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic

For the option: Do the following:

Corrector Specify the corrector algorithm that is to be used with the stiff integrators GSTIFF,
WSTIFF, or Constant BDF. The corrector in a stiff integrator ensures that all the
unknowns satisfy the equations of the system. The two algorithms, original and
modified, differ primarily in the algorithm that they use to define when the corrector
iterative process has converged.

• Original - Specifies that the corrector available in the previous releases of

Adams/Solver be used. This is the default. This implementation of the
corrector requires that at convergence, the error in all solution variables be
less than the corrector error tolerance.
• Modified - Specifies that a modified corrector is to be used. This
implementation of the corrector requires that at convergence, the error in
only those variables for which integration error is being monitored, be less
than the corrector error tolerance. This is a slightly looser definition of
convergence, and you should use proper care when using this. The modified
corrector is helpful for models containing discontinuities in the forcing
functions. Problems with contacts belong in this category.
For additional information, see Extended Definition in the INTEGRATOR statement
in the Adams/Solver online help.
Error Specify the relative and absolute local integration error tolerances that the integrator
must satisfy at each step. For BDF, HHT, and Newmark integrators, Adams/Solver
monitors the integration errors in the displacement and state variables that the other
differential equations (differential equations, linear state equations, general state
equations, and transfer functions) define. ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations also
monitor errors in velocity variables. The larger the error, the greater the error per
integration step in your solution.

Note that the value for error is units-sensitive. For example, if a system is modeled in
mm-kg-s units, the units of length must be in mm. Assuming that all the translational
states are larger than 1 mm, setting ERROR=1E-3 implies that the integrator
monitors all changes of the order of 1 micron.

The error tolerances (e) are enforced as:

|| Yc - Y || < MAX (e, e * ||Y||)

where:

• Yc is the column matrix of computed values for the unknowns, Y.

• The symbol || . || indicates the root-mean-square of the array of numbers.
 P - Z 497
Solver Settings - Dynamic

For the option: Do the following:

Hmax Enter the maximum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.

When setting the Interpolate option, the integration step size is limited to the value
that is specified for Hmax. If Hmax is not defined, no limit is placed on the
integration step size. If you do not set the Interpolate option, the maximum step size
is limited to the output step.

Range is 0 < Hmin Hinit Hmax.

Note: In the dialog box, click More to see Interpolate, Hinit, and Hmin options.
More Click to set more advanced options.
Hmin Specify the minimum time step that the integrator is allowed to take.

Default is 1.0E-6*HMAX for GSTIFF and WSTIFF integrators, and machine

precision for ABAM, SI1, and SI2 formulations and HHT and Newmark integrators.

Range is 0 < HMIN HINIT HMAX.

Hinit Enter the initial time step that the integrator attempts. The default is 1/20 of the output
step.

Range is 0 < HMIN HINIT HMAX.

498 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic

For the option: Do the following:

Adaptivity All of the BDF integrators (GSTIFF, WSTIFF, HASTIFF and Constant BDF) use
Newton-Raphson iterations to solve the nonlinear Differential-Algebraic equations
of motion. This iteration process is referred to as correcting the solution. The
adaptivity value modifies the corrector error tolerance to include a term that is
inversely proportional to the integration step size. This is intended to loosen the
corrector tolerance when the step size gets small (many corrector failures occur
because of small step size). If the integration step size is equal to h, Adaptivity/h is
added to the corrector tolerance.

When setting a value for Adaptivity, begin with a small number, such as 1E-8. Note
that this relaxes the tolerance of the corrector, which can introduce additional error
into the dynamic solution. The corrector tolerance must be at least a factor of 10
stricter than the integration tolerance. The ratio advocated in theoretical literature
ranges from .1 to .001 and is a function of the integrator order and step size. The ratio
that Adams/Solver uses varies with the integrator chosen, but is within the range
specified above. If you use an Adaptivity value to relax the corrector tolerances, be
sure to validate your results by running another simulation using a different
integration error tolerance.

The Adaptivity value affects only the GSTIFF, WSTIFF, and Constant BDF
integrators.

An Adaptivity value is typically required to overcome corrector convergence

difficulties and you should not use it in normal situations.

The default is 0, and the range is Adaptivity 0.

Interpolate Set to Yes when you don't want the integrator to control the integration step-size to
precisely hit an output step. The integrator might then overshoot an output point and
in this case an interpolation algorithm will provide an approximation of the solution
at the output point. This approximate is then refined to provide for the consistent
solution at the output point.
 P - Z 499
Solver Settings - Dynamic

For the option: Do the following:

Kmax Specify the maximum order that the integrator can use. The order of integration refers
to the order of the polynomials used in the solution. The integrator controls the order
of the integration and the step size, and, therefore, controls the local integration error
at each step so that it is less than the error tolerance specified.

For problems involving discontinuities, such as contacts, setting Kmax to 2 can

improve the speed of the solution. However, we do not recommend that you set the
Kmax option unless you are a very experienced user. Any modification can adversely
affect the integrator’s accuracy and robustness.

Kmax's default and range depend on the integrator you selected:

For the The
integrator: default is: The range is:
ABAM 12 1 Kmax 12
GSTIFF, 6 1 Kmax 6
WSTIFF,
HASTIFF,
Constant
BDF
RKF45, Not Not applicable
HHT, applicable
Newmark
Note: KMAX is irrelevant (ignored) if the integrator selected is HHT or
Newmark. Both these integrators are constant order (order 2 and 1,
respectively) and, therefore, the order does not change during simulation as
is the case for the rest of the integrators available in the solver.
Maxit Enter the maximum number of iterations allowed for the Newton-Raphson iterations
to converge to the solution of the nonlinear equations. The correctors in GSTIFF and
WSTIFF use the Newton-Raphson iterations. ABAM also uses Newton-Raphson
iterations to solve for the dependent coordinates.

We recommend that you do not set Maxit larger than 10. This is because round-off
errors start becoming large when a large number of iterations are taken. This can
cause an error in the solution.

The default is 10, and the range is Maxit > 0.

500 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Dynamic

For the option: Do the following:

Scale Enter the sum of the relative and absolute error tolerances. If T is the sum of the
relative and absolute error tolerances applied to the state vector, then the following
tolerance is applied:

r1 * T to the translational displacements

r2 * T to the angular displacements
r3 * T to the modal coordinates

The scale applies to only WSTIFF and ABAM. It is does not apply to GSTIFF and
Constant BDF. The use of scale factors is not supported in Adams/Solver (C++).
Beta One of the two defining coefficients associated with the Newmark method. Learn
more about the Newmark integrator with INTEGRATOR statement help.

Default value is 0.36.

Range is defined in conjunction with Gamma. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.

Gamma One of the two (together with Beta) defining coefficients associated with the
Newmark method.

Default value is 0.7.

Range is defined in conjunction with Beta. Together they must satisfy the stability
condition.

Alpha Defining coefficient for the HHT method.

Default value is -0.3.

Range is -0.3 < Alpha < 0.

 P - Z 501
Solver Settings - Equilibrium

Solver Settings - Equilibrium

Settings -> Solver -> Equilibrium

Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Static equilibrium and Quasi-static simulations.
A static or quasi-static equilibrium analysis is appropriate only when inertia forces, such as, d’Alembert
forces, are not important and the system has one or more Degrees of freedom (degrees of freedom after
Adams/Solver has removed any redundant constraints). Static and quasi-static equilibrium simulations
solve for displacement and static forces, but not for velocity, acceleration, or inertia forces, which are all
assumed to be zero.
502 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium

To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Equilibrium.
Equilibrium Type Select either:

• Static - Performs a static equilibrium operation. Learn more.

• Dynamic - Performs a dynamic simulation to find the static equilibrium.
Learn more
If you selected Static, the following options are available:
Error Specifies the relative correction convergence threshold. The iterative process
carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to all relevant
relative corrections being smaller than this value.

The default is 1.0E-04 and the range is Error > 0

Tlimit Specifies the maximum translational increment allowed per iteration during static
simulations performed using static simulations.

The default is 20 and the range is Tlimit > 0.

Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment allowed per iteration. The default is 10
degrees, and the range is Alimit > 0. Enter the value in the current modeling units
(degrees by default).
Maxit Specifies the maximum number of iterations allowed for finding static
equilibriums.

The default is 25 and the range is Maxit > 0.

Stability Specifies the fraction of the mass and damping matrices Adams/Solver adds to the
stiffness matrix. Adding a fraction of the mass and damping matrices to the
stiffness matrix can stabilize the iteration process and prevent the iteration from
diverging. Often the stiffness matrix is singular for a system because the system is
neutrally stable (for example, the system moves in certain directions without
affecting the potential energy). Adding a fraction of the mass and damping
matrices to the stiffness matrix removes this singularity and makes it possible to
solve for equilibrium positions. The value of Stability does not affect the accuracy
of the solution, but it does affect the rate of convergence of the iteration process.

The default is 1.0E-05 and the range is Stability > 0.

Imbalance Specifies the equation imbalance convergence threshold. The iterative process
carried out during the equilibrium analysis can not converge prior to each equation
imbalance being smaller than this value.

The default is 1.0E-04 and the range is Imbalance > 0.

 P - Z 503
Solver Settings - Equilibrium

For the option: Do the following:

Static Method Select either:

1. ORIGINAL, for running only the ORIGINAL Solver

2. ADVANCED, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows
progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
3. AGGRESSIVE, runs, in order, the following methods until one shows
progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
g. Broyden-Armijo
h. Trust-Region
4. ALL, runs, in order, all the available methods, until one shows progress:
a. ORIGINAL
b. ORIGINAL+Krylov
c. ORIGINAL+UMF
d. Newton+Krylov
e. Tensor-Krylov block-3
f. Tensor-Krylov block-2+
g. Broyden-Armijo
h. Trust-Region
i. Hooke-Jeeves
If you selected Advanced, the following options are available:
Atol Specify the absolute tolerance value.

The default is 1.0E-06 and the range is 0.0  atol  1.0

504 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Equilibrium

For the option: Do the following:

Rtol Specify the relative tolerance value.

For all solvers, except ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov, the tolerance is

defined as : TOL=ATOL+||xIC||*RTOL.

For ORIGINAL and ORIGINAL+Krylov solvers the tolerance is equal to ERROR.

The default is 0.0 and the range is 0.0  rtol  1.0 .

Maxitl Specifies the maximum number of allowed inner loops in all the solvers, except
ORIGINAL, ORIGINAL+Krylov and ORIGINAL+UMF. For Hooke-Jeeves
method, allowed budget of function evaluations is set to MAXITL*N, where N is
the size of the problem (number of unknowns).

The default is 40 and the range is maxit1  1.0 .

Etamax Specify the maximum threshold for the error tolerance of the linear Krylov solver
(for Newton+Krylov and Tensor-Krylov methods), that solves the linear systems,
required by Krylov algorithm. Maximum error tolerance for residual in inner
iteration. The inner iteration terminates when the relative linear residual is smaller
than eta*| F(x_c) |. eta is determined by the modified Eisenstat-Walker formula if
etamax > 0. If etamax < 0, then eta = |etamax| for the entire iteration.

The default is 0.9 and the range is 0.0  etamax  1.0 .

If you selected Aggressive or All, along with the above options (i.e Atol, Rtol, Maxitl and Etamax)
following additional options will also be available:
Eta Specify the initial residual tolerance for the linear Krylov Solver for
Tensor_Krylov method. The Tensor-Krylov ETA parameter is maintained
adaptively by the Krylov algorithm but ETA is the indicated starting value, while
ETAMAX is the maximum threshold for ETA.

Default: 1.0e-4
Range: 0.0 < ETA < 1.0

Specify the dimensionless radius of the trust-region for Trust-region method. The
smaller the value, the more the refinement of Trust-region solution (hence more
work).

Range: 0.0 < ETA < 0.25

If you selected Dynamic, the following options are available:
Global Damping Specify the coefficient for global damping applied to all bodies during static
simulations performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 0 and the range is Global Damping > 0.

 P - Z 505
Solver Settings - Equilibrium

For the option: Do the following:

Settling Time Specify the maximum time allowed to reach equilibrium during static simulations
performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 100 and the range is Settling Time > 0.

Acceleration Error Specify the maximum acceleration error allowed during static simulations
performed using dynamic analyses.

The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Acceleration Error > 0.

Kinetic Energy Specify the maximum kinetic energy error allowed in static simulations performed
Error using dynamic analyses.

The default is 1.0E-02 and the range is Kinetic Energy Error > 0.

Note: Convergence happens when both of the following occur:

• Maximum (Static Equation Residual Values) < Imbalance

AND
• Maximum (Relative State Errors) < Error
506 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Flexible Bodies

Solver Settings - Flexible Bodies

Settings -> Solver -> Flex Bodies ...

Sets the options for flexible body linear limit feature.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Flexible Bodies.
Model Enter the name of the model associated with the settings.
Limit Check Select the limit check option to be used

• Skin - Adams/Solver C++ will check the deformation of all the nodes on the
skin to see whether they exceed the linear limit. To use this option,
MNF_FILE or DB_FILE need to be specified in FLEX_BODY statement.
• Selnod - Adams/Solver C++ will only check the nodes specified in
SELNOD section in MTX file.
• None
The linear limit is defined as 10% of the characteristic length of the flexible
body. You can use CHAR_LEN in FLEX_BODY statement to specify the
characteristic length. If CHAR_LEN is not specified, Adams/Solver C++ will
calculate the characteristic length using MNF or MD DB if MNF_FILE or
DB_FILE is specified. Otherwise, Adams/Solver C++ issues a warning.
Limit Action Select the action to be performed when flexible body exceeds its linear limit.

• Halt - Terminates execution of Adams/Solver C++.

• Return - Stops the simulation and returns to the command level.
• Message Only - Issues a warning message only (Default).
 P - Z 507
Solver Settings - Executable

Solver Settings - Executable

Settings -> Solver -> Executable

Sets the type of Adams/Solver to run.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Executable.
Executable Select:

• Internal - Run Adams/Solver from within Adams/View and animate the

results as they are calculated, which is the default
• External - Perform a Simulation with Adams/Solver while in
Adams/View, but without seeing the model update on your screen during
the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an animation of the
simulation when the simulation is complete.
• Write Files Only - Instruct Adams/View to write out the files that are
needed to run a simulation using Adams/Solver from outside of
Adams/View. The files include the:
• Dataset (.adm) file
• Command (.acf) file, which contains the commands necessary to run
the desired simulation.
If you select Internal, you can perform either an Interactive Simulation or a
Scripted simulation. If you select External or Write Files Only, you can only
perform a scripted simulation. Adams/View issues an error if you try to perform
an interactive simulation after choosing either of these options.
If you selected Internal or External, you can set the following options:
Solver Library Set it to use the standard Adams/Solver executable (leave it blank) or a user-
defined or customized Adams/Solver library. A customized Adams/Solver library
is required if you used subroutines to define any objects in your model, such as
motions or forces. For more information, see the following:

• Adams/Solver help
• Running and Configuring Adams
Note: On UNIX, you can use the Adams Toolbar to set the Adams/Solver
library to run and create different tools on the Adams Toolbar for each
library you have.
508 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Executable

For the option: Do the following:

Choice Select either:

• FORTRAN - Our existing version of Adams/Solver.

• C++ - Our new, C++-based version of Adams/Solver, which promises to
be faster, provide new linear analysis capabilities, and have an improved
methodology for identifying and handling redundant constraints.
Currently, it supports several new capabilities that Adams/Solver
(FORTRAN) does not support, though not all modeling elements that the
Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) supports are included.
As you create modeling objects in Adams/View, it lets you know whether or not
they are compatible with the C++ version or the FORTRAN. If you use the
Adams/Solver C++, please provide us with feedback through the Adams Feedback
Database at http://support.Adams.com/fdb/. Be sure to select the product
Adams/Solver (C++). For more information on the different solvers, see Release
Notes and Adams/Solver (C++) help.
Verify First Set to yes to verify your model before running a simulation. See Model Verify Tool
dialog box help.
Hold License Set whether or not the Adams/Solver license is checked back in once the
simulation is complete. By default, Adams/View does not check the license back
in for another user. You must exit Adams/View before other users can use the
Adams/Solver license.

• If you set Hold License to Yes, then Adams/View checks out the
necessary licenses when you perform a model verify operation (because
of the degrees of freedom calculation, which uses Adams/Solver) or any
type of simulation using the internal Adams/Solver. It only releases the
licenses when you exit Adams/View or when you run a simulation using
the external Adams/Solver.
• If you set Hold License to No, Adams/View releases all Adams/Solver
licenses (static, kinematic, and dynamic), and all module licenses
(Adams/Tire, Adams/Linear, and Adams/SmartDriver) in these cases:
• You run a simulation using the external Adams/Solver (as before).
• After a model verify operation.
• When you reset after a single simulation using the internal
Adams/Solver.
• After a parametric analysis (licenses are held throughout the
parametric analysis)
More Select to display options for setting the remote computer on which to run
Adams/Solver.
 P - Z 509
Solver Settings - Executable

For the option: Do the following:

Remote Compute • UNIX only; not displayed when running on Windows
• Enter the name of the remote host where you run Adams/Solver or leave
blank to use local machine. The option you select depends on where the
Adams/Solver is licensed at your site.
Note: Network access and multi-task package licenses allow you to submit
tasks to Adams/Solver while Adams/View runs on one of many desktop
workstations. To see if you can submit multiple tasks to Adams/Solver,
check the licensing information on the password certificate that is
included in the Installer’s Kit. If you do not know the type of license you
have, check with the administrator who installed the Adams.
If you set Remote Compute to Yes, the following options are available:
Node Name Enter the node ID of the remote computer.
MDI Directory Enter the name of the Adams/Solver installation directory on the remote machine.
Remote Directory Specify a directory that Adams/Solver uses to write out its files and search for
input files. The directory is optional. You need to specify it only if the user’s file
system is not automounted on the remote machine upon log in.
The following options are available for Adams/Solver (C++) only
Thread Count Adams/Solver (C++)

Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams/Solver (C++) uses when
performing the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the
range of 1 to 8. The default value is 1. By executing multiple threads in parallel
across multiple processors, Adams/Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required
for a simulation.

Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the
number of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium
processors with HyperThreading enabled).

Learn more about Threaded (Parallel) Operation of Adams/Solver(C++).

510 Adams/View
Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

Settings -> Solver -> IC (Initial Conditions)

Sets error tolerances and other parameters for an Initial conditions simulation. By default, the integrators
ABAM, WSTIFF, and DSTIFF reconcile integrator results to be consistent with constraints; GSTIFF
does not, unless you set Interpolate to Yes in Solver Settings - Dynamic.
The initial conditions simulation ensures that the system satisfies all constraints within the system. If
necessary, Adams/Solver moves parts until both parts of each joint are in contact. The simulation
involves three separate phases:
• First, Adams/Solver makes the displacements between all parts and joints in the system
physically consistent. This requires the use of Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a set of
nonlinear algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG
statement in the Adams/Solver online help.)
• Once the displacements are consistent, Adams/Solver makes the velocities physically consistent.
Because this requires solving a set of linear equations, iteration is not necessary.
• Finally, Adams/Solver calculates consistent accelerations and forces. This solution also requires
solving a set of nonlinear equations using Newton-Raphson iteration.
When reconciling, the integrator uses the initial conditions solution process at each Output step to ensure
that velocities, accelerations, and forces are consistent with the system constraints. If you set Interpolate
to Yes, the integrator also uses the initial conditions solution at each output step to ensure displacements
are consistent with the constraints. The IC parameters control those solutions as well as the initial
conditions solution.
Because the initial conditions simulation relies on an iterative procedure, it is possible for it to fail if
model inconsistencies are initially too large. If this ever occurs, you should review your model for errors
in part and constraint inconsistencies. When using the Stabilized Index 2 (SI2) and Stabilized Index 1
(SI1) integrators, it is also important to ensure that initial velocities do not introduce discontinuities at
time equal to zero. The initial conditions settings can be used to adjust the convergence criteria as
appropriate for problematic modeling scenarios. See Equation Formulation Comparison for more
information.
To set the Jacobian matrix for initial condition simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to IC (Initial Conditions).
Error Specify the maximum displacement error Adams/Solver is to allow for the
assembly process.

The default is 1.0E-10 and the range is Error > 0.

 P - Z 511
Solver Settings - IC (Initial Conditions)

For the option: Do the following:

Tlimit Specify the maximum translational increment Adams/Solver is to allow while
testing trial solutions during a solution step.

The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit Specify the maximum angular increment Adams/Solver is to allow while testing
trial solutions for a set of consistent initial conditions that satisfy all system
constraints. The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees,
add a D after the value.

The default is 30D and the range is Alimit > 0.

More Click to set more advanced options.
Maxit Specify the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding
displacements during initial conditions, or when reconciling displacement output.

The default is 25 and the range is Maxit > 0.

Amaxit Specify the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding
accelerations during an initial conditions solution or for reconciling acceleration
output.

The default is 25 and the range is Amaxit > 0.

Aerror Specify the maximum acceleration error Adams/Solver is to allow during an initial
conditions solution or for reconciling acceleration output.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Aerror > 0.

512 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Kinematic

Solver Settings - Kinematic

Settings -> Solver -> Kinematic

Specifies error tolerances and other parameters for Kinematic simulations.

A kinematic simulation is only appropriate when a system has zero Degrees of freedom. A kinematic
analysis solves for the displacements, velocities, accelerations, and forces (if any) at a series of points in
time. To find the displacements,Adams/Solver uses Newton-Raphson iteration to solve a nonlinear set of
algebraic equations. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.)

After finding the displacements, Adams/Solver solves a system of linear equations to find the velocities,
then solves another set of nonlinear equations to find accelerations and forces. Adams/Solver repeats this
procedure at successively later times until it obtains results over the period of time specified in a
SIMULATE command.
To set the Jacobian matrix for dynamic simulations, see Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Kinematic.
Model Enter the name of the model associated with the settings.
Error Specifies the maximum displacement error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time
step.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Error > 0.

Tlimit Specifies the maximum translational increment Adams/Solver is to allow per
iteration.

The default is 1.0E10 (no limit) and the range is Tlimit > 0.
Alimit Specifies the maximum angular increment Adams/Solver is to allow per iteration.
The default units for Alimit are radians. To specify Alimit in degrees, add a D after
the value.

The default is 30D and the range is ALIMIT > 0.

More Click to set more advanced options.
Maxit Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding the
displacements at a point in time.

The default is 25 and the range is Maxit > 0.

Aerror Enter the maximum acceleration error Adams/Solver is to allow for each time step.

The default is 1.0E-4 and the range is Aerror > 0.

 P - Z 513
Solver Settings - Kinematic

For the option: Do the following:

Amaxit Enter the maximum number of iterations Adams/Solver is to allow for finding
accelerations at a point in time.

The default is 25 and the range is Amaxit > 0.

Hmax Enter the maximum time step that the kinematics solver is allowed to take.

The default is the output step size.

514 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Optimizations

Solver Settings - Optimizations

Settings -> Solver -> Optimizer

Allows you to set options for Optimizations.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Optimization.
Algorithm Specify the algorithm used to perform the optimization. The OPTDES algorithms
are provided with Adams/View. The DOT algorithms can be purchased from
Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. You can also include your own optimization algorithm.
The contact information for Vanderplaats R&D, Inc. is:

Vanderplaats R&D, Inc.

1767 S. 8th Street, Suite. 100

Colorado Springs, CO 80906

http://www.vrand.com/

http://www.vrand.com/dot.htm

More about Algorithms.

Tolerance Specify the limit below which subsequent differences of the objective must fall
before an optimization is considered successful. If the condition:
ABS(objective[now] - objective[now-1]) < convergence_tolerance is true for a
certain number of iterations (usually two), then the convergence tolerance criterion
is met. Note that this is only one test that is made by most optimization algorithms
before they terminate successfully.

Like other Adams/Solver tolerances, you may need to experiment with this
tolerance to find the right value for your application. Display the objective versus
iteration Strip chart. (See Solver Settings - Display) If the optimizer quits even
though the last iteration made noticeable progress, try reducing the tolerance. If the
optimizer continues iterating even after the objective has stopped changing very
much, make the tolerance larger.
Max. Iterations Set how many iterations the optimization algorithm should take before it admits
failure. Note that a single iteration can have an arbitrarily large number of analysis
runs.
Rescale Enter the number of iterations after which the design variable values are rescaled.
If you set the value to -1, scaling is turned off.
 P - Z 515
Solver Settings - Optimizations

For the option: Do the following:

Differencing Control how the optimizer computes gradients for the design functions. Centered
differencing perturbs each design variable in the negative direction from the
nominal value, then again in the positive direction using finite differencing
between the perturbed results to compute the gradient. If you choose forward
differencing, each design variable is perturbed in a positive direction only.
Centered differencing can sometimes generate smoother, more reliable gradients
(especially in noisy models), but it causes twice as many analysis runs to be
performed.
More Click to set more advanced options, listed below.
Increment The differencing increment specifies the size of increment to use when performing
finite differencing to compute gradients. When using forward differencing, this
value is added to the nominal value of each design variable on successive runs.
When using central differencing, this value is first subtracted from the nominal
value and then added to it.

Smaller increments may give more accurate approximations of the gradient, but are
also more susceptible to random variations from run to run. Larger increments help
minimize the effects of variations, but give less accurate gradients.
Debug Set to display messages from the optimizer. Turning on debugging output sends
copious optimizer diagnostics to the window that launched Adams/View. Keep an
eye on that window anyway, as some important warnings might be written there.
The debugging output shows you the data the optimizer is receiving from
Adams/View, among other things. If the optimizer is behaving erratically, this may
help you determine the source of the problem.
User Adams/View passes the user parameters to a user-written optimization algorithm.
Realizing that there may be parameter information that is not conveyed through the
existing parameter set, this parameter was added to allow you to pass any real
numeric data to your algorithm.
Min. Converged The number of consecutive iterations for which the absolute or relative
convergence criteria must be met to indicate convergence in the DOT Sequential
Linear Programming method.
516 Adams/View
Solver Settings - Output

Solver Settings - Output

Settings -> Solver -> Output

Sets whether or not Adams/View stores Simulation results in three external files: graphics, request, and
results.

Selecting More lets you set options for the format and content of the results files, and the format and
content of the message and tabular output file when you are using External Adams/Solver. In addition,
you can set up how Adams/View stores the simulation results in the Modeling database.
To learn more, see the DEBUG statement in the Adams/Solver online help.

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Output.
Save Files Set to Yes to create Adams/Solver analysis files in the directory from which you
ran Adams/View. Adams/View saves the files after each simulation.
Prefix After setting Save Files to Yes, enter the prefix you want added to the name of each
saved analysis file to help identify it.
Graphics Set to Yes to save a graphics file.
Request Set to Yes to save a request file.
Results Set to Yes to save a results file.
More Select to display more files to which to save output.
Output Category Select what you'd like to set about the files. Click the output category to learn more
about its options.

• Files
• Database Storage
• Results (.res) Options
• Results (.res) Content
• Output (Out) Content
• Message (.msg) Content
• Durability Files - For more information, see Adams/Durability online help.
 P - Z 517
Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian

Solver Settings - Pattern for Jacobian

Settings -> Solver -> Pattern for Jacobian

Specifies as many as ten character strings that together establish the pattern for evaluating the Jacobian
matrix during the modified Newton-Raphson solution for a dynamic, kinematic, or Initial conditions
simulation. (To learn more about Newton-Raphson solutions, see the DEBUG statement in the
Adams/Solver online help.)

For each iteration, T or TRUE indicates that Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian, and F or FALSE
indicates that Adams/Solver is not to evaluate the Jacobian, instead it is to use the previously calculated
Jacobian matrix as an approximation of the current one. Therefore, cj determines whether or not
Adams/Solver is to evaluate the Jacobian at the jth iteration. If necessary, Adams/Solver repeats the
pattern of evaluations until it reaches the maximum number of iterations (set by the option Amaxit or
Maxit).

For the option: Do the following:

Category Set to Pattern for Jacobian.
Integrator Pattern Select a pre-defined pattern:

• TFFFTFFFTFFFTF - Sets the pattern to the default for dynamic

simulations.
• T - Sets the pattern to all TRUEs, which evaluates the Jacobian at every
iteration.
• F - Sets the pattern to all FALSEs. A pattern of all FALSEs implies that
Adams/Solver is to not evaluate the Jacobian until it encounters a
corrector failure. For problems that are almost linear or are linear, this
setting can improve simulation speed substantially.
• Advanced - Indicates that you created a custom pattern by selecting
More and setting options as explained below. Select More to see the
custom pattern. Not available until you created a custom pattern.
Tip: Selecting a pattern to request less frequent evaluations of the
Jacobian matrix can decrease the computation time, decreasing the
cost and improving the response time. However, infrequent
evaluations could also be more expensive since the modified
Newton-Raphson algorithm might require more iterations due to the
slower convergence rates.
More Select to create your own pattern.
Specify Pattern for Set the type of solution for which you are setting the Jacobian pattern.
Number of Entries Enter the number of TRUE's and FALSE's. The number of T’s or TRUE’s and F’s
or FALSE’s together must be at least one and no more than 10.
Pattern Click a box to set the pattern. A check mark indicates TRUE.
518 Adams/View
Sorting Settings

Sorting Settings
Tools -> Table Editor -> Sorting

Allows you to sort the type of objects and category information after you have set it up in the Filter menu
of the Table Editor.
You can sort the information by object name or by a particular column. You can set the type of sorting.
You can select:
• Alphanumeric sorting - Sorts the information so that alphabetic characters are first followed by
numeric characters
• Numeric sorting - Sorts objects based on their numeric values. It sorts any alphanumeric
characters as zeros.

Note: When you sort the Table Editor, Adams/View sets the values displayed in cells back to
those stored in the Modeling database. Therefore, you lose any changes you made to cells
and did not apply to your modeling database.

Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.

For the option: Do the following:

Category on which Choose from:
objects are sorted
• No sorting - Object appear in the Table Editor in the order they are
stored in the modeling database.
• Sort By Name - Sorts the objects by their name (by rows).
• Sort By Column Labeled - Select and enter the name of the
column on which to sort the objects. To select a column name from
a list, select Select.
Type of Sorting • Choose alphanumeric to sort alphabetic characters first.
• Choose numeric to sort in numeric order. It sorts any alphabetic
characters as zero.
 P - Z 519
Sphere Tool

Sphere Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Sphere Tool

Creates a solid ellipsoid whose three radii are of equal length. You draw the sphere by indicating its center
point and the radius for the three radii.
Before you draw the sphere, you can also specify the radius value for the three radii

Learn about Creating a Sphere.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Part/On Select either:
Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the sphere to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the sphere to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you
are simulating a car driving around a race track, the
geometry that defines the race track can be added to
ground.
Radius Select, and then enter the desired radius.

Note: After you draw the sphere, three hotpoints appear on it that let you reshape the radii of the
sphere. For example, you can elongate the sphere into an ellipsoidal shape. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
520 Adams/View
Spherical Joint Tool

Spherical Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Spherical Joint Tool

Creates a spherical joint that allows the free rotation about a common point of one part with respect to
another part. The location of the spherical joint determines the point about which the joint’s parts can
pivot freely with respect to each other.

Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
 P - Z 521
Spherical Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Implicit)/ Set how you want the joint connected to parts:

2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the
joint and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
2 Bodies - 2 Locations connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint
location. If there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View
connects the joint to that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint
remains fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to
be connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part.
You should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For
more on exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool.
For more on the effects of these options, see About Connecting
Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:

Pick Geometry Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Geometry Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a
direction vector on a feature in your model, such as the face of a
part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you select to
explicitly define the bodies • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
using the options 2 Bodies - 1 • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 attach the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and
Locations explained above) the joint follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve
markers with Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to
a spline curve is only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn
about switching solvers.
522 Adams/View
Spline Tool

Spline Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Spline Tool

Creates a spline, which is a smooth curve that a set of location coordinates define.
You create splines by defining the locations of the coordinates that define the curve or by selecting an
existing geometric curve or edge and specifying the number of points to be used to define the spline. The
Spline tool produces a smooth curve through the points.
You can also close the spline or leave it open. A closed spline must be composed of at least eight points;
an open spline must be composed of at least four points.

Tip: You can also create a spline in the following ways:

• Creating Trace Spline

• Creating and Modifying Data Element Splines
 P - Z 523
Spline Tool

Learn about Creating Splines.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Select either:
Part/On Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the spline to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the spline to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move or
influence the simulation of your model. For example, if you are
simulating a car driving around a race track, the geometry that
defines the race track can be added to ground.
Closed Select if you want to create a closed spline. Note that it must contain eight
points.

Tip: You can extrude a closed spline into solid geometry that has
mass. For more information, see the Extrusion Tool.
Create by Picking Select:

• Points to select the locations on the screen where you want the spline
to pass through. You must specify at least eight locations for a closed
spline and four locations for an open spline.
• Curve to select the curve to define the spline.
• Edge to select the edge to define the edge.
If you selected Curve or Edge for Create by Picking, you have one additional option:
Spread Points Set how many points you want used to define the curve or clear the selection
and let Adams/View calculate the number of points needed.

Note: If you are using this tool from the Main toolbox, the Spread Points text
box is called # of Points.

Note: Adams/View places hotpoints at locations on the spline as you draw it. The hotpoints let
you reshape the spline. For more information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see
Using Hotpoints to Graphically Modify Geometry.

You can also modify the spline by editing the point locations directly or by changing the
curve and matrix data elements that Adams/View creates to support the spline. In addition,
you can change the number of segments that Adams/View creates through the spline. For
more information on modifying splines, see Using Dialog Boxes to Precisely Modify
Geometry.
524 Adams/View
Split Tool

Split Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Split Tool

Splits a complex solid (often referred to as a CSG) that you created using the other Boolean tools back
into its primitive solids. It creates a part for each solid resulting from the split operation.
Learn about Splitting a Solid.
 P - Z 525
Static Equilibrium Tool

Static Equilibrium Tool

Interactive Simulation dialog box -> Static Equilibrium Tool

Performs a static simulation on your model. Adams/Solver iteratively repositions all the parts in an
attempt to balance all the forces for one particular point in time. Each static simulation is independent of
the time-varying effects of velocity and acceleration. Therefore, no inertial forces are taken into account.
A positioning of your parts for which all your forces balance is known as an equilibrium configuration.
If your force and motion inputs change over time and you want to investigate how your equilibrium
configurations change, you can choose to perform a series of static simulations over an interval of time.
A series of static simulations is often referred to as a quasi-static simulation because time is allowed to
vary between static simulations but time-varying inertial effects are neglected for each individual static
simulation. Quasi-static simulations are useful for approximating the dynamic response of models that
move very slowly and for which you can assume that the effects of inertial force can be neglected.
Since Adams/Solver must be able to move parts around as it attempts to iterate to an equilibrium
configuration, it does not make sense to perform a static simulation on a model that has no Degrees of
freedom (DOF). If the model has no DOF, no parts are allowed to move.

Learn about Performing Static Equilibrium Simulations.

526 Adams/View
Stereo Viewing

Stereo Viewing
Settings -> Stereo Viewing

Sets options for using Adams/View with stereo viewing. Stereo viewing is available on all UNIX
platforms but not Windows.
Before running Adams/View in stereo-viewing mode, you need to set the MDI_STEREO environment
variable MDI_STEREO (setenv MDI_STEREO 1). Learn more about setting Adams/View Environment
Variables.

Stereo viewing is only available when running Native OpenGL graphics with the
OpenGL_Software_Assisted registry setting set to disabled. You use the Registry Editor.

To set this registry setting:

1. From the Adams Toolbar, right-click the Toolbar tool , and then select Registry Editor.
The Registry Editor appears.
2. Select AView -> Preferences -> Graphics -> OpenGL_Software_Assisted.

Using Stereo Viewing on SGI Machines

There are two types of stereo views available on SGI machines:
• Above-and-below viewing - The first, and least useful, is above-and-below viewing. This type
of viewing is used with non-stereo- ready hardware and splits the screen into two halfs, a top half
and bottom half. The result is that the screen size in pixels is effectively cut in half in the vertical
direction. For example, on a monitor set for a screen size 1024 x 768 pixels, the screen size
changes to 1024 x 384. This changes the aspect ratio of the screen and of the resulting images
displayed within Adams/View and Adams/PostProcessor. They appear to be one half as tall as
they should be.
• Interlaced stereo viewing - The second type of viewing is Interlaced stereo viewing, which is
available on stereo-capable graphics cards. This approach has the advantage that the screen
aspect ratio is not changed and, therefore, the resulting images maintain the same proportions
has their non-stereo counterparts. To enable this mode in the current Adams code, the video
format for the monitor must be set to a format that supports interlaced stereo viewing. To do this,
use the SGI setmon(1) shell command. For example, on a SGI tezro machine with a V12
graphics card, you could use the following command:
/usr/gfx/setmon -n 1280x1024_100s

For the option: Do the following:

Stereo viewing Select to enable stereo viewing.
Depth of Field Slide to control the depth of the perspective matrix.
Eye Separation Slide to control of offset between the left and right modeling views.
 P - Z 527
Stereo Viewing

For the option: Do the following:

Parallax Control the type of parallax view used to display the model:

• Positive - Positive parallax viewing produces images that appear to be

within the space of the monitor. For engineering purposes where objects
are often cut off by the window borders or partially obscured by dialog
boxes, positive parallax viewing produces images that are less confusing
to the viewer and are, therefore, easier to view.
• Negative - Negative parallax viewing produces images that appear to float
in space in front of the display. Viewing floating images that are partially
obscured by interface items produces confusing cues to the viewer. While
the image appears in front of the screen, the interface items appear to be on
the screen but these interface items can obscure part of the image. These
conflicting inputs can be confusing and lead to extra strain.
Eye Position Use with Negative parallax viewing and use it to control how far the image floats
in front of the screen.
528 Adams/View
Summing Junction Block

Summing Junction Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

Summing junction blocks add or subtract the outputs from other standard blocks. You can select whether
the positive or negative value of an input to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign
button.
A summing junction block takes any valid controls block output as its input.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input 1/ Specify the assembly name of any controls block, including input function blocks,
Input 2 in either text box. You can select whether the positive or negative value of the input
to a summing junction is used by single-clicking on the +/- sign button. Single-click
on the +/- button to select whether the positive or negative value of an input to a
summing junction is used.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

 P - Z 529
Swap a flexible body for an external system

Swap a flexible body for an external system

Build -> External Systems -> Flex to External System...

Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for an external system.

To substitute a flexible body for an external system, use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections

Alignment

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Enter the flexible body to be replaced
External System Select either:
• An existing external system in the model
• Or Create an external system on the fly

The “…” button can be used to invoke the ‘External System Cremod’ dialog,
in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid body.
Note: Only external systems with an MNF or an MD DB specified are
supported for the swap operation. If the selected external system
does not have either an MNF or an MD DB specified, then an error
message is seen, indicating that such external systems are not
supported.
External System Positioning
Align External System Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and inertia
CM with CM of tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:
Current Part
• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
flexible body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with
the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the external system with the flexible body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the
flexible body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the
flexible body 180° back into position.
Launch Precision Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either
Move Panel by increments or to precise coordinates.
530 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for an external system

For the option: Do the following:

3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body
and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each body
must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the
flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is
then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in the
plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the flexible body.
Flip about Only available if you used Align External System CM with CM of Current
Part.

Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:

• X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction.
• Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction.
• Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal
inertia direction.
View parts only Select to display only the flexible body and its replacement external system.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the flexible body in the modeling database. This is helpful if
you want to reactivate the flexible body.

Connections

For the
option: Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
ID/Apply Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
node location of the specified node.
Preserve Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
expression and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
 P - Z 531
Swap a flexible body for an external system

For the
option: Do the following:
Preserve Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node
location table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex preserves the
offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker. It keeps the
joint from breaking.

Note: Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams/Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn
more.
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
digits Node table.
532 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for an external system

For the
option: Do the following:
Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns. For
example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its selected
node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name

• Connections - Sort by markers with connections
• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node
• Interface - Sort by interface nodes
• Distance - Sort by markers that are most distant from the selected node
• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column
 P - Z 533
Swap a flexible body for an external system

For the
option: Do the following:
Marker and Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
Node Table transferred on the replacement external system. See the Picture of Marker and Node
Table. Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in
the table for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker
individually for each of the nodes.

• Marker - All the markers on the flexible body that will be transferred to the
external system.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the flexible body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the external
system.
• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement external
system.
• Interface - The existing or replacement node may or may not be an interface
node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to
the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred
to the external system. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses
the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment node
relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate
system. A perfect match is 0.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams/Flex will position the marker. The three
options are:
• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the external system, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams/View expression, the parameterization
will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams/View expression,
the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current
position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location using the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set the
Move column value.
534 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Flex to Flex

(Template-based products, Standard Interface: Adjust -> Flexible Body -> Modify)

Lets you substitute an existing flexible body in your model for another flexible body. The name of the
replacement flexible body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a flexible body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections

Alignment

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Enter the flexible body to be replaced.
MNF File/ • Select the Modal Neutral File (MNF) containing the replacement
MD DB file flexible body.
• MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import. The
index parameter applies only to MD DBs.
Index The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out of
the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in the
specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is assumed
to have the value 1.

Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the displayed
list.
Flex body positioning
 P - Z 535
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

For the option: Do the following:

Align Flex Body CM Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and inertia
with CM of Current tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:
Part
• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
rigid body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident with
the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric about
a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid body.
In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible body 180°
back into position.
Launch Precision Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects either
Move Panel by increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of the
flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the original flexible body
and a point on replacement flexible body. The three points on each body must
uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the
flexible body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
flexible body is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then
oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane
defined by points 2 and 3 on the original flexible body.
Flip about Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.

Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:

• X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal inertia
direction
• Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest principal
inertia direction
• Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal inertia
direction
View parts only Select to display only the original flexible body and its replacement.
View topology Select to display a flexible representation of the body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the original flexible body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the original flexible body.
536 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

Connections

For the
option: Do the following:
Update Table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.
Reset Table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of the
ID/Apply Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to the
location of the specified node.
Preserve Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
expression and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through Adams/View
expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized position.
Preserve Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker and
location Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node, Adams/Flex
preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint location on the marker.
It keeps the joint from breaking.

Note: Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset from their
attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams/Flex (FORTRAN) automatically
introduces a massless link between the marker and the flexible body. Learn
more.
Number of Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the Marker and
digits Node table.
 P - Z 537
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

For the
option: Do the following:
Sort by Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the columns.
For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most distant from its
selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.

• Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.
• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.
• Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.
• Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the selected node.
• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.
538 Adams/View
Swap a flexible body for another flexible body

For the
option: Do the following:
Marker and Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the marker will be
Node Table transferred on the replacement flexible body. See a Picture of Marker and Node Table.
Note that if a marker is attached to more than one node, the marker is listed in the table
for each node to which it is attached. You need to change the marker individually for
each of the nodes.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
flexible body.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the marker
for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to the flexible
body.
• Old Node - The nodes the marker is attached to on the replacement flexible
body.
• Interface - Whether or not the existing or replacement node is an interface
node. An asterisk appears if the node is an interface node.
• Old Relative Location - The x, y, and z coordinates of the old node relative to
the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's coordinate system.
• Old Distance - The magnitude of the old relative location vector.
• New Node - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is transferred
to the flexible body. When Adams/Flex initially creates the table, it chooses
the closest node. You can change the chosen node using the Node ID text box.
• New Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• New Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment
node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's
coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams/Flex will position the marker. The three
options are:
• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the flexible body, it
will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will be
moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the marker's
position was defined by an Adams/View expression, the parameterization
will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams/View expression,
the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the marker's current
position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location using the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to set
the Move column value.
 P - Z 539
Swap a rigid body for an external system

Swap a rigid body for an external system

Build -> External Systems -> Rigid to External System...

Lets you substitute a rigid body for an external system.

To substitute a rigid body for an external system, use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections

Alignment

For the option: Do the following:

Current Part Enter the rigid body to be replaced
External System Select either:

• An existing external system in the model

• Or Create an external system on the fly
The “…” button can be used to invoke the ‘External System Cremod’
dialog, in order to create an external system as a replacement for the rigid
body.

Note: Only external systems with an MNF or an MD DB specified are

supported for the swap operation. If the selected external system
does not have either an MNF or an MD DB specified, then an
error message will be shown, indicating that such external
systems are not supported.
External System Positioning
Align External System Select to align the external system by comparing the center of mass and
CM with CM of Current inertia tensor of the two bodies. The external system is:
Part
• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
flexible body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident
with the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the external system with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the external system 180° from the
rigid body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the rigid
body 180° back into position.
Launch Precision Move Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects
Panel either by increments or to precise coordinates.
540 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for an external system

For the option: Do the following:

3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of
the external system. A point pair consists of a point on the original rigid
body and a point on replacement external system. The three points on each
body must uniquely define a plane. The first point pair defines the location
of the rigid body and the second and third points define the orientation. The
external system is positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It
is then oriented by making points 2 and 3 on the External System reside in
the plane defined by points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
Flip about Only available if you used Align External System CM with CM of Current
Part.

Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:

• X axis - Rotate external system 180° about its largest principal

inertia direction.
• Y axis - Rotate external system 180° about its second largest
principal inertia direction
• Z axis - Rotate external system 180° about its smallest principal
inertia direction.
View parts only Select to display only the rigid body and its replacement external system.
View topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the rigid body in the modeling database. This is helpful if
you want to reactivate the rigid body.

Connections

For the option: Do the following:

Update table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you have made.
Reset table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node ID/Apply Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row of
the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table to
the location of the specified node.
 P - Z 541
Swap a rigid body for an external system

For the option: Do the following:

Preserve expression Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row of the
Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified through
Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its parameterized
position.
Preserve location Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the Marker
and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment node,
Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined a joint
location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.
Number of digits Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
Marker and Node table.
542 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for an external system

For the option: Do the following:

Sort By Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the
columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most
distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name

• Connections - Sort by markers with connections
• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node
• Interface - Sort by interface nodes
• Distance - Sort by markers most distant from the selected node
• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column
 P - Z 543
Swap a rigid body for an external system

For the option: Do the following:

Marker and Node Displays the markers on the external system and the node to which the marker
Table will be transferred on the replacement external system.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred to the
external system.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use the
marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be transferred to
the external system.
• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the external system. When Adams/Flex initially creates the
table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen node using
the Node ID text box.
• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen attachment
node relative to the marker's current position, resolved in the marker's
coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams/Flex will position the marker. The
three options are:
• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the external system,
it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the marker will
be moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
marker's position was defined by an Adams/View expression, the
parameterization will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams/View
expression, the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise, the
marker's current position will be preserved. This is helpful if you have
defined a joint location using the marker. It keeps the joint from
breaking.
Use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve expression buttons to
set the Move column value.
544 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Rigid to Flex

(Template-based products, Standard Interface: Adjust -> General Part -> Rigid to Flex)

Lets you substitute a rigid body for an Adams/Flex flexible body. The name of the replacement flexible
body is the name of the existing body with _flex appended to it.
Learn more about Replacing Existing Bodies with Flexible Bodies.
To substitute a rigid body for a flexible body, you use the following tabs:
• Alignment
• Connections

Alignment

For the option: Do the following:

Current Part Enter the rigid body to be replaced.

For template-based products: Enter the general part to be replaced. If the

general part has a symmetric brother (counterpart), both the left/right
general parts will be set to asymmetric, and only the general part specified
will be made flexible.
Flex Body/ Select either:
MNF File/
MD DB File • Flex Body, and then select a flexible body that already exists.
• MNF File, and then select the name of the MNF to import.
• MD DB File, and then select the name of the MD DB to import.
The index parameter applies only to MD DBs. The appropriate
index of the body in the specified DB file, is input here. If not
specified, it is assumed that the value is 1.
Index The parameter applies only, when the user is creating a flexible body out
of the MD DB. The parameter specifies the index of the flexible body in
the specified MD DB. The parameter is optional. If not specified, it is
assumed to have the value 1.

Note: The user can wish to view all the flexible bodies in the MD DB,
using the “…” button provided beside the index. The desired
flexible body can be selected by double-clicking on the
displayed list.
 P - Z 545
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

For the option: Do the following:

Load The load button needs to be/can be used only when the user specifies a MD
DB option, to create the replacement flexible body from. Pressing the load
button, after specifying a valid MD DB file (and index if specified), loads
the appropriate flexible body from the MD DB.

For the flex-body and MNF option, the load button stays disabled and
cannot be used.
Flex Body Positioning
Align Flex Body CM with Select to align the flexible body by comparing the center of mass and
CM of Current Part inertia tensor of the two bodies. The flexible body is:

• Positioned such that its center of mass (CM) is coincident with the
rigid body CM.
• Oriented such that its principal inertia directions are coincident
with the part's principal inertia directions.
If the inertia properties of the two bodies are similar, this method closely
aligns the flexible body with the rigid body. If the bodies are symmetric
about a plane, this method may rotate the flexible body 180° from the rigid
body. In this case, you can use the Flip about buttons to rotate the flexible
body 180° back into position.
Launch Precision Move Displays the Precision Move dialog box, which lets you move objects
Panel either by increments or to precise coordinates.
3 Point Method Select to specify three point pairs to define the location and orientation of
the flexible body. A point pair consists of a point on the rigid body and a
point on the flexible body. The three points on each body must uniquely
define a plane. The first point pair defines the location of the flexible body
and the second and third points define the orientation. The flexible body is
positioned by making the first point pair coincident. It is then oriented by
making points 2 and 3 on the flexible body reside in the plane defined by
points 2 and 3 on the rigid body.
Flip about Only available if you used Align Flex Body CM with CM of Current Part.

Select either of the following to rotate the flexible about the corresponding
axis:

• X axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its largest principal

inertia direction
• Y axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its second largest
principal inertia direction
• Z axis - Rotate flexible body 180° about its smallest principal
inertia direction
546 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

For the option: Do the following:

View Parts Only Select to display only the rigid body and the replacement flexible body.
View Topology Select to display a representation of the rigid body and its connections to
other parts. Learn more about Graphically Viewing Model Topology.
Copy original part Leave a copy of the original rigid body in the modeling database. This is
helpful if you want to reactivate the rigid body.

For template-based products: The original part is always copied.

Connections

For the option: Do the following:

Update table Select to update the Marker and Node table with the changes you've made.
Reset table Select to reset the Marker and Node table to the original connections found.
Node Finder Select to display the Node Finder Dialog Box and search for nodes.
Node ID/Apply Enter a node ID, and then select Apply to replace the node in a selected row
of the Marker and Node table with the node ID you entered.
Move to node Select to move the marker in the selected row of the Marker and Node table
to the location of the specified node.
Preserve expression Select to maintain the parameterization of the marker in the selected row
of the Marker and Node table. The parameterization would be specified
through Adams/View expressions. This will keep the marker at its
parameterized position.
Preserve location Select to maintain the location of the marker in the selected row of the
Marker and Node table. If a marker is not coincident with the attachment
node, Adams/Flex preserves the offset. This is helpful if you have defined
a joint location on the marker. It keeps the joint from breaking.

Note: Adams/Solver (FORTRAN) does not support markers offset

from their attachment nodes. Therefore, Adams/Flex
(FORTRAN) automatically introduces a massless link between
the marker and the flexible body. Learn more.
Number of digits Enter the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
Marker and Node table.
 P - Z 547
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

For the option: Do the following:

Sort By Select how to sort the Marker and Node table based on the headings of the
columns. For example, you can sort the table by the marker that is the most
distant from its selected node.

• Marker - Sort alphabetically by marker name.

• Connections - Sort by those markers with connections.
• Node ID - Sort by the ID of the node.
• Interface - Sort by those nodes that are interface nodes.
• Distance - Sort by those markers the most distant from the
selected node.
• Move - Sort by the values in the Move column.
548 Adams/View
Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

For the option: Do the following:

Marker and Node Table Displays the markers on the existing body and the node to which the
marker will be transferred on the replacement flexible body.

• Marker - All the markers on the rigid body that will be transferred
to the flexible body.
• Connections - All the forces and joints on the rigid body that use
the marker for their definitions. These joints and forces will be
transferred to the flexible body.
• Node ID - The attachment node chosen for the marker when it is
transferred to the flexible body. When Adams/Flex initially creates
the table, it chooses the closest node. You can change the chosen
node using the Node ID text box.
• Interface - An asterisk (*) in this column indicates that the chosen
attachment node is an interface node.
• Relative Location - The x,y,z coordinates of the chosen
attachment node relative to the marker's current position, resolved
in the marker's coordinate system. A perfect match is 0.
• Distance - The magnitude of the relative location vector.
• Move column - Indicates how Adams/Flex will position the
marker. The three options are:
• move - When Adams/Flex transfers the marker to the flexible
body, it will move it to the chosen attachment node. How far the
marker will be moved is given in the Distance column.
• loc - The current location of the marker will be preserved. If the
marker's position was defined by an Adams/View expression,
the parameterization will be lost.
• expr - If the marker's position is defined by an Adams/View
expression, the parameterization will be preserved. Otherwise,
the marker's current position will be preserved. This is helpful
if you have defined a joint location using the marker. It keeps
the joint from breaking.
You use the Move to node, Preserve location, and Preserve
expression buttons to set the Move column value.
 P - Z 549
Switch Block

Switch Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

The switch is a convenient means to “zero” the signal into any block. Connect the switch at a point in the
feedback loop to quickly see the change from open loop control to closed loop control. The switch takes
any control block as its input.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Close Switch Set the loop to be closed.
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

550 Adams/View
Table Editor

Table Editor
Tools -> Table Editor

Allows you to enter values for all types of objects. It displays the objects in your Modeling database in
table format so you can compare, update, and manage the objects. The object information you can view
and update depends on the type of object. You can create and delete object.
To set the type of objects displayed:
• Select a check box of the desired object type from along the bottom of the Table Editor.
Adams/View updates the Table Editor to display the selected type of object.
Learn about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.

For the option: Do the following:

Select to insert the text in the input cell into the selected cell.

(Insert tool) Select to insert text from the input cell into the selected cells.

(Object Name & Field tool) Select to insert the database name for the next selected cell into the
input box. Learn about entering database names into cells.

(Cell Variable tool) Select to insert the self-reference operator into the input cell. Learn
about entering modifying cells based on their current contents.

Input cell Enter text to add to more than one cell at a time and quickly update the
values in the cell. Learn more about Working with Cells in the Table
Editor.
Apply Click to execute the object table's commands.
OK Click to execute the object table's commands and close the Table
Editor.
Create Select to create a new object for the current table type.
Filters Displays the Table Editor Filters dialog box.
Sorting Displays the Sorting Settings dialog box.
Write Select to write out the contents of this object table.
Reload Select to reload the values in the database into the Table Editor.
 P - Z 551
Table Editor Filters

Table Editor Filters

Tools -> Table Editor -> Filters

Narrows the display of objects in Table Editor based on an object’s name or parent, such as to display
only markers that belong to PART_1, which is called setting the scope. You can also narrow the display
based on the names of objects. For example, you can set the name filter to only display the names of
objects that contain the number 2 (MARKER_20, MARKER_21, and so on). Using the scope and name
filter together, you can focus on those objects of interest and filter out the rest.
The categories of information that you can display about an object depend on the type of object. For
example, for parts, you can display their location, initial conditions, and attributes, such as whether they
are visible or active in the current Simulation. For markers, you can view their locations, as well as their
locations relative to ground. For forces, you cannot change the information displayed, only the types of
forces displayed. For joints, you can change the information displayed as well as the type of joints
displayed.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.

For the option: Do the following:

Scope You can limit the scope of the search, if you want, to all objects beneath a
particular object in the database hierarchy by entering the name of the object.

For example, enter .model_1 to display all objects under your entire model or
enter .model_1.PART_3 to display objects belonging only to PART_3.

Note: You cannot enter wildcards.

Name Filter Enter the name of the object or objects that you want to display. Type any
wildcards that you want included. By default, Adams/View displays all objects
that meet the scope entered in the previous step regardless of their name.
Select the categories of information or set the type of object that you want displayed and then select
OK.
552 Adams/View
Three-Component Force tool

Three-Component Force tool

Build -> Forces -> Three-Component Tool

Creates a translational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant force - Lets you enter a constant force value or let

Adams/View use a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant Force, the following option appears:
Force Value Enter a constant force value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:
 P - Z 553
Three-Component Force tool

For the option: Do the following:

Translational K Enter the stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter the damping coefficients.
554 Adams/View
Three-Component Torque tool

Three-Component Torque tool

Build -> Forces -> Three-Component Torque Tool

Creates a rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
Learn more about:
• Multi-Component Forces

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:

Pick Feature • Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force normal to the current
Working grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as along an edge or normal to the face of a
part.
Characteristic Specify the characteristics of the force:

• Constant - Lets you enter a constant force value or let Adams/View use
a default value.
• Bushing Like- Lets you enter stiffness and damping coefficients and
lets Adams/View create a function expression for damping and stiffness
based on the coefficient values.
• Custom - Adams/View does not set any values for you, which, in
effect, creates a force with zero magnitude. After you create the force,
you modify it by entering a function expressions or parameters to a
User-written subroutine that is linked to Adams/View. You can also
specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn
about specifying routines with ROUTINE Argument.
If you selected Constant , the following option appears:
Torque Enter a constant torque value.
If you selected Bushing Like, the following two options appear:
 P - Z 555
Three-Component Torque tool

For the option: Do the following:

KT Enter the stiffness coefficients.
CT Enter the damping coefficients.
556 Adams/View
Tool Settings

Tool Settings
View -> Toolbox and Toolbars

Turns on and off the Main toolbox and the Standard toolbar and Status bars. You can also set where the
Standard and status toolbars appear—either at the top of thes main window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. By default, the Main toolbox appears at the left of the main window, the Standard
toolbar is turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.

For the option: Do the following:

Main toolbox Select to display the Main toolbox.
Standard toolbar Select to display the Standard toolbar.
Status toolbar Select to display the Status toolbar.
 P - Z 557
Toolbar Settings

Toolbar Settings
View -> Toolbars -> Settings

Allows you to turn the display of toolbars on and off. The toolbars are:
• Main toolbar - The Main toolbar appears by default. It contains tools for setting options and
performing operations. The contents of the toolbar change depending on the
Adams/PostProcessor mode. Learn About the Main Toolbar.
• Curve Edit toolbar - Lets you manipulate curve data. Learn about using the Curve Edit toolbar.
• Statistics toolbar - Lets you view statistics about curves, such as the minimum and maximum
values. Learn about viewing statistics.
• Status bar - Displays information messages and prompts while you work. The right side of the
status bar displays the number of the displayed page and the total number of pages.
You can also set where the toolbars appear—either at the top of the window under the menu bar or at the
bottom of the window. You can also turn on and off the dashboard and treeview. By default, the dashboard
and treeview are displayed, the Main toolbar appears at the top of the window, the Curve Edit and
Statistics toolbars are turned off, and the status bar appears at the bottom of the window.

For the option: Do the following:

Main Toolbar, Curve Edit Select which toolbars you want visible. The changes take place
Toolbar, Statistics Toolbar, and immediately.
Status Toolbar
Top Select if you want the toolbar placed at the top of your screen.
Treeview Select if you want to display the treeview.
Dashboard Select if you want to display the dashboard.
558 Adams/View
Topology By Connections

Topology By Connections
Database Navigator -> Topology By Connections

Allows you to display information about a selected constraint or force with the parts that they connect
and act on.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.

The option: Does the following:

Save to File Select if you want to save the topology to a file.
 P - Z 559
Topology By Parts

Topology By Parts
Database Navigator -> Topology By Parts

Allows you to display information about a selected part of your model. It displays information of the
selected part and shows its connections to other parts.
Learn about Viewing Model Topology Through the Database Navigator.

The option: Does the following:

Save to File Select if you want to save the topology to a file.
560 Adams/View
Torsion SpringTool

Torsion SpringTool
Build -> Forces -> Torsion SpringTool

Creates a Torsion spring.

Learn about:
• Torsion Springs

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Set the method you want to use to define the bodies and force-application
points. You can select the following:

• 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations
Learn about Applying Multi-Component Forces to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the force oriented. You can select:
Pick Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the force using the x-, y-, and z-axes
of the current Working grid, if it is displayed, or using the x-, y-, and z-
axes of the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the force along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part. The direction vector
you select defines the z-axis for the force; Adams/View automatically
calculates the x- and y-axes.
KT Enter the torsional stiffness coefficients.
CT Enter the torsional damping coefficients.
 P - Z 561
Torus Tool

Torus Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Torus Tool

Creates a solid circular ring. You draw the ring from the center outward. By default, the Torus tool makes
the radius of outer ring (minor radius) 25% of the inner ring (major radius).

You can also specify the minor and major radii before you draw.
Learn about Creating a Torus.

For the option: Do the following:

New Part/Add to Part/On Select either:
Ground
• New Part - Creates a new part.
• Add to Part - Adds the torus to another part in your model.
• On Ground - Adds the torus to ground.
Tip: Add geometry to ground if the geometry does not move
or influence the simulation of your model. For example,
if you are simulating a car driving around a race track, the
geometry that defines the race track can be added to
ground.
Minor Radius If desired, select and enter the inner radius for the torus.
Major Radius If desired, select and enter the outer radius for the torus.
562 Adams/View
Torus Tool

Note: Two hotpoints appear on a torus after you draw it. One controls the centerline of the torus’
circular shape and the other controls the radius of the circular cross-section. For more
information on modifying geometry using hotpoints, see Using Hotpoints to Graphically
Modify Geometry.
 P - Z 563
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Build -> Flexible Bodies -> Adams/Flex -> FEM Translate

Translates either:
• MSC.Nastran output data into a Modal Neutral File (MNF) using the MSC.Nastran-Adams
Interface. You generate the output data by running MSC.Nastran first and then running the
Adams/Flex DMAP alter.
• Universal file into an MNF that you can use to create a flexible body with a constant coupling
inertia invariant formulation. Learn more.
To set the type of translation:
• Set the option menu in the upper left corner to either:
• MSC.Nastran
• Test Modal

MSC.Nastran

For the option: Do the following:

OUTPUT2 File Name Enter the name of the output (.out) file that you generated by running
MSC.Nastran with the AdamsMNF Case Control command or a special
DMAP alter. Learn about generating output. The MCS.Nastran translator
generates the MNF file based on the .out file name.
Invariants Set which inertia invariants should be computed and stored in the MNF. You
can select:

• Fast Set - If you select Fast Set, Adams/Flex does not compute
invariants five and nine. It corresponds to the Partial Coupling
formulation mode for modal flexibility. It is also suitable for use with
the Constant Coupling formulation. Only Full Coupling requires all
nine invariants. Unless you think you might need the Full Coupling
formulation, you can safely select Fast Set. Learn about the different
formulations.
• Full Set - If you select Full Set, Adams/Flex computes all inertia
invariants, including invariants five and nine.
• None - If you select None, Adams/Flex does not perform any invariant
calculations, and must compute invariants each time you save an
Adams/Solver dataset with a modified selection of modes or nodes.
564 Adams/View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

For the option: Do the following:

Units Do one of the following:

• To preserve the units in the original MNF, select Original. If you

select to preserve the units, Adams/Flex performs the unit scaling as it
performs different operations, which can degrade performance
noticeably.
• To convert all data to Adams/View internal units, which are meters,
kilogram, seconds, and Newtons, select SI. This is the optimal setting
for processing flexible bodies in Adams/View.
Formatting From the Formatting pull-down menu, do either of the following:

• To turn off the encoding that makes the MNF platform independent,
select Platform Specific.
The encoding has some computational overhead that you may want to
remove if you are not concerned about MNF portability.
• To keep the encoding and portability, select Standard Portable.
Remove Internal Solid Select to remove certain interior geometry, such as the mated faces of two brick
Element Geometry elements, to enhance graphics performance. When used with invariants
computation (explained above), removing interior geometry can significantly
reduce the size of an MNF.
 P - Z 565
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

For the option: Do the following:

Automatic Select the tab Automatic, and then select Remove Internal Solid Element
Geometry.

When you remove the interior geometry, the graphics performance of

Adams/View is greatly enhanced. When you remove both interior geometry
and calculate the invariants, Adams/Flex removes nodes that were only
connected to the geometry that it also removed. Occasionally, the removal of
the geometry may be undesirable especially when a particular interior node is
to be the target for an attachment in Adams.
Apply Mesh Select and then use the sliders to set the following:
Coarsening Algorithm
• Target Mesh Resolution - Slide the Mesh Resolution slider to the
fraction of the total component size below which Adams/Flex removes
the detail of the mesh. For example, if your component is
approximately 1 m long, and you select 15% mesh resolution, the
coarsening results in a mesh with 15 cm-wide mesh cells.
• Face Smoothing - Slide the Face Smoothing slider to the angle
between adjacent faces below which Adams/Flex should merge faces.
For example, if you select 15, the coarsening algorithm does not merge
two faces when one face is more than 15o out of the plane of the other
face.
• Colinear Point Removal - Select Remove Colinear Points to control
removal of nodes that are intermediate nodes on the straight edge of a
face.
• Retain Particular Nodes - In the Retained Node List text box,
specify a list of nodes that Adams/Flex should not remove during
coarsening.
When you use mesh coarsening and also calculate the invariants, Adams/Flex
removes nodes that were only connected to the geometry that was removed by
coarsening, which results in a great reduction in MNF size.

Test Modal

For the option: Do the following:

Universal File Enter the name of the Universal file containing datasets 15, 55, 82.
I-DEAS/CADAX/STAR Specifies the program from which the Universal file was generated.
MNF File Enter the name of the MNF to be created. If you do not provide a file
name, Adams/Flex generates an MNF with the same path and prefix as
the Universal file.
Total Mass Enter the global mass of the tested component.
566 Adams/View
Translate Nastran Output to Modal Neutral File

Center of Mass Enter the x, y, and z coordinates of the tested component’s center of
mass, relative to datum used to measure the nodal positions in dataset 15
of the Universal file.
Inertia Tensor Enter the inertia tensor of the tested component relative to the center of
mass.
Title Enter a title for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).
Comment #1/ Comment #2/ Enter comments for the MNF to help you identify it (optional).
Comment #3
Length/Mass/Time/Force Set Length Units, Mass Units, Time Units, and Force Units to, Mass
Units Units, Time Units, and Force Units toto the units used in the Universal
file and the data entered in this dialog box.
 P - Z 567
Translate Tool Stack

Translate Tool Stack

Main Toolbox -> Translate Tool Stack

Contains tools for translating the view in the View window and setting the perspective.

Icon Link
Dynamically Translating a View

Setting the View Perspective

568 Adams/View
Translational Joint Tool

Translational Joint Tool

Build -> Joints -> Translational Joint Tool

Creates a translational joint that allows one part to translate along a vector with respect to another part.
The parts can only translate, not rotate, with respect to each other.

When you create a translational joint, you specify its location and orientation. The location of a
translational joint does not affect the motion of the joint. It simply determines where Adams/View places
the joint. The orientation of the translational joint, however, determines the direction of the axis along
which the parts can slide with respect to each other. The direction of the motion of the translational joint
is parallel to the orientation vector and passes through the location.
Learn about:
• Creating Idealized Joints
 P - Z 569
Translational Joint Tool

• Adding Friction to Idealized Joints

For the option: Do the following:

1 Location (Bodies Set how you want the joint connected to parts:
Implicit)/
2 Bodies - 1 Location/ • 1 Location (Bodies Implicit) - Lets you select the location of the joint
2 Bodies - 2 Locations and have Adams/View determine the two parts that should be
connected. Adams/View selects the parts closest to the joint location. If
there is only one part near the joint, Adams/View connects the joint to
that part and ground.
• 2 Bodies - 1 Location - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint. The joint remains
fixed on the first part and moves relative to the second part.
• 2 Bodies - 2 Locations - Lets you explicitly select the two parts to be
connected by the joint and the location of the joint on each part. You
should use this option if you are working in exploded view. For more on
exploded view, see Initial Conditions Tool. For more on the effects of
these options, see About Connecting Constraints to Parts.
Normal to Grid/ Set how you want the joint oriented:
Pick Geometry Feature
• Normal to Grid - Lets you orient the joint along the current Working
grid, if it is displayed, or normal to the screen.
• Pick Feature - Lets you orient the joint along a direction vector on a
feature in your model, such as the face of a part.
First Body/Second Body Set the bodies on which you want to attach the joint. Select either:
(only appears if you
select to explicitly define • Pick Body - Select to attach the joint to a body.
the bodies using the • Pick Curve - Select to attach the joint to a curve. If you select to attach
options 2 Bodies - 1 the joint to a curve, Adams/View creates a curve marker, and the joint
Location or 2 Bodies - 2 follows the line of the curve. Learn more about curve markers with
Locations explained Marker Modify dialog box help. Attaching the joint to a spline curve is
above) only available with Adams/Solver (C++). Learn about switching
solvers.
570 Adams/View
Translational Motion Tool

Translational Motion Tool

Build -> Joints -> Translational Motion Tool

Moves the first part that the joint connects along the z-axis of the second part.
Learn about:
• Overview of Motion
• Creating Joint Motion

For the option: Do the following:

Trans. Speed Specify the speed of the motion in displacement units per second. By default,
Adams/View creates a translational motion with a speed of 10 millimeters per
second. To enter a function expression or User-written subroutine, right-click the
Trans. Speed text box, point to Parameterize, and then select Expression Builder to
display the Adams/View Function Builder. For information on using the Function
Builder, see Function Builder and Adams/View Function Builder online help.
 P - Z 571
Translational Spring Damper Tool

Translational Spring Damper Tool

Build -> Forces -> Spring-Damper Tool

Adds a translational spring damper to your model by defining the locations on two parts between which
the spring-damper acts. You define the action force that is applied to the first location, and Adams/Solver
automatically applies the equal and opposite reaction force to the second location.
Learn about:
• Equations Defining the Force of Spring Dampers
• Translational Spring Dampers

For the option: Do the following:

Translational K Enter stiffness coefficients.
Translational C Enter damping coefficients.
572 Adams/View
Unite Tool

Unite Tool
Build -> Bodies/Geometry -> Unite Tool

Creates complex geometry by joining two intersecting solids. It merges the second part you select into
the first part, resulting in a single part.
The union has a mass computed from the volume of the new solid. Any overlapping volume is only
counted once.

Learn about Creating One Part from the Union of Two Solids
 P - Z 573
Units

Units
Settings -> Units

Changes the default units Adams/View uses in modeling, importing, and exporting files. You can select
individual units or select a set group of units.
Learn about:
• Units of Measurement in Adams/View
• Unit Labels
• Entering Unit Measurements in Text Boxes

For the option: Do the following:

Length Select the desired unit.
Mass Select the desired unit.
Force Select the desired unit.
Time Select the desired unit.
Angle Select the desired unit.
Frequency Select the desired unit.
MMKS Select to set length to millimeters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When
you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion
of the dialog box.
MKS Select to set length to meters, mass to kilograms, and force to Newtons. When you
select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the
dialog box.
CGS Select to set length to centimeters, mass to grams, and force to Dyne. When you
select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion of the
dialog box.
IPS Select to set length to inches, mass to pound mass, and force to PoundForce. When
you select a predefined unit system, the units selected appear in the upper portion
of the dialog box.

Note: In all the unit systems, time is in seconds and angle is in degrees.
574 Adams/View
Update Design Variables

Update Design Variables

Simulate -> Design Evaluation ->

Allows you to set the design variable values to those of a trial or iteration. This is helpful if you want to:
• Update your model to match the best trial of a Design study or Design of experiments (DOE).
• Visualize the variable settings of a particular trial or iteration.
• Use an intermediate iteration in an optimization instead of the final values.

Learn more about Updating Variables.

For the option: Do the following:

Result Set Enter the name of the parametric analysis result set that you want to use to update
the variables.
Trial Enter the trial or iteration number you want to use. Adams/View sets the design
variable values to match those used in the specified trial or iteration, and updates
the model graphics to reflect the new values.
 P - Z 575
User-Defined Transfer Function Block

User-Defined Transfer Function Block

Build -> Controls Toolkit -> Standard Control Blocks -> New/Modify ->

The user-defined transfer function block creates general rational polynomial blocks by specifying the
polynomial coefficients. Specify the coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2 for the numerator.
Specify the assembly name of any controls block as the input.

For the option: Do the following:

Name Enter the name that you want assigned to the function block.
Input Specify the assembly name of any controls block.
Numerator Specify the polynomial coefficients in the order n0, n1, n2.
Coefficients/
Denominator
Coefficients
Check the inputs to the function block.

Display the Information window to review the connections to the block.

Create an output measure. See Controls_measure_panel dialog box help.

576 Adams/View
View Accessories

View Accessories
View -> View Accessories

Sets the display of the following in the currently active View window:
• Working grid
• Screen icons
• View triad
• View title

Note: You can also use the tools in the Main toolbox to set the display of these items. If you use
the tools, you can change the accessories for all view windows at once but you cannot
change the view title.

For the option: Do the following:

Working grid Select to display the working grid.
Screen icons Select to display the screen icons.
View triad Select to display the view triad.
View title Select to display the view title.
 P - Z 577
View Orientation Tools

View Orientation Tools

View -> Pre-Set -> A View
Main Toolbox -> View Orientation tool

Provide seven pre-set views of your model that you can display in any of your view windows. You can
access the pre-set views using the Pre-set command on the View menu or using the set of View Orientation
Tool Stacks on the Main toolbox.

Learn about:
• The different Orientations and the tools that activate them
• Changing the View in a Window
578 Adams/View
View Rotation

View Rotation
Main toolbox -> Toggle toolstack -> View Rotation

Rotates the View in a View window about the x, y, and z screen axes by a specified increment.

Learn about Dynamically Rotating a View.

Icon Description
Rotate view about the screen’s z-axis

Rotate view about screen’s x- and y-axis

Set the amount by which you want to incrementally rotate the view in the text box.
 P - Z 579
Welcome

Welcome
Appears when you start Adams/View or create a database (File - New Database)

Lets you create a new Modeling database or use an existing one. It also lets you import modeling data
and specify your working directory. Learn about creating a modeling database.

For the option: Do the following:

How would you like to Sets how you will proceed with Adams/View:
proceed?
• Create a new model - Lets you start a new modeling session with a
new modeling database.
• Open an existing database - Lets you open an existing modeling
database.
• Import a file - Lets you start a new modeling session by reading in a
model from an Adams/View command file or an Adams/Solver
dataset. For more information, see:
• Import - Adams/Solver Dataset
• Import - Adams/View Command Files
• Exit - Lets you exit Adams/View without performing an operation.
Start in Specify the directory to be used as your working directory. Adams/View saves
all files in this directory. Learn about Specifying Working Directory.
Model name Enter the name you want assigned to the new Model. You can enter up to 80
alphanumeric characters. You cannot include special characters, such as
spaces or periods.
580 Adams/View
Welcome

For the option: Do the following:

Gravity Select the gravity settings for the new model. You can select:

• Earth Normal - Sets the gravity to 1 G downward.

• No Gravity - Turns off the gravitational force.
• Other - Lets you set the gravity as desired. The Gravity Settings
dialog box appears after you select OK on the Welcome dialog box.
Learn about Specifying Gravitational Force.
Units Select a preset unit system for your model. In all the preset unit systems, time
is in seconds and angles are in degrees. You can set:

• MMKS - Sets length to millimeter, mass to kilogram, and force to

Newton.
• MKS - Sets length to meter, mass to kilogram, and force to Newton.
• CGS - Sets length to centimeter, mass to gram, and force to Dyne.
• IPS - Sets length to inch, mass to slug, and force to PoundForce.
If you do not want any of the preset unit systems, you can change the units as
required. Learn about Setting Units of Measurement.
 P - Z 581
Window Layout

Window Layout
View -> Layout

Main toolbox -> Window Layouts toolstack

Provides 12 View window layouts for the Main window. The layouts vary from a single view window of
your model up to six windows. Each window displays a different view of your model. Adams/Views
displays the current model (if there is one) into any of the views that are empty.
582 Adams/View
Window Layout

You select the layout you’d like for your main window from a palette of layouts or from the Window
Layouts tool stack on the Main toolbox. The palette and tool stack contain the same set of view layouts.
If you display the palette, you can keep it open so that you can quickly select another layout.

For the option: Do the following:

Any of layout choices Select the choice to change the view window to your desired layout.
Close Select to close the palette. You can keep it open to quickly switch between
layouts.
 P - Z 583
Working Grid

Working Grid
Settings -> Working Grid

Main tool box -> Move toolstack ->

Sets the appearance of various elements in the Working grid and toggle their visibility.
.

Learn about Setting Up the Working Grid.

For the option: Do the following:

Show Working Grid Set to display the working grid.
Rectangular Set to select a Rectangular working grid. Adams/View changes the
coordinate system settings accordingly.
Polar Set to select a Polar working grid. Adams/View changes the coordinate
system settings accordingly. For more information, see Coordinate System
dialog box.
584 Adams/View
Working Grid

For the option: Do the following:

Size For a rectangular grid only, enter the size of the grid in the x and y
directions in length units.

Spacing For a rectangular grid only, enter the spacing between each point in the
grid in the x and y directions in length units.
Maximum Radius For polar grid only, enter the radius of the working grid from its origin to
its outermost circle.

Circle Spacing For polar grid only, enter the amount of space between each circle in the
working grid. The smaller the spacing, the more circles Adams/View
defines.
 P - Z 585
Working Grid

For the option: Do the following:

Radial Increments For polar grid only, enter the number of lines radiating from the origin of
the working grid. Adams/View spaces the lines equally around the working
grid. The lines do not include the axes. The number of lines (N) determines
the angle increment between lines (q), as shown in the formula:

 = 360×/N

In the picture above 8 lines are specified for an angle increment

between the lines of 45.
Dots, Axes, Lines, and Select the color and weight (thickness) of each object in the grid. You can
Triad also set the color of the objects to Contrast, which indicates that
Adams/View should select a color that contrasts with the color currently set
for the view background. Setting the color to Contrast is particularly helpful
when you set each of your view windows to a different background color or
when you frequently change the view background.

The colors listed for the working grid elements are the same colors provided
for setting the color of objects. The colors do not include any new colors
that you created.

The weight values are from 1 to 3 screen pixels.

Set Location Select either:

• Global Origin to set the center location of the working grid to the
center of the view window.
• Pick and click a location on the screen to set as the center of the
working grid.
Set Orientation Select how you want to orient the working grid. You can set its orientation
by picking points or by aligning it with the screen plane. Note that if you
select Pick for orientation, you will also set the location of the working grid.
586 Adams/View
Working Grid
Appendix
A-C
2 Adams/View
ABAM integrator

ABAM integrator
The Adams-Bashforth and Adams-Moulton (ABAM) integrator reduces the full set of differential and
algebraic equations to a set of ordinary differential equations during a Dynamic simulation. The ABAM
integrator uses a Predict-Evaluate-Correct-Evaluate scheme to integrate the ordinary differential
equations. The ABAM integrator is better for simulations of models undergoing sudden changes or with
high, active (excited, but not damped out) frequencies.
See Integrator.
 A-C 3
Accuracy tolerance

Accuracy tolerance
The accuracy tolerance is the number of decimal digits required at each Integration step to solve the
Dynamic simulation. In general, the more decimal digits of accuracy you select, the slower the Simulation
but the better the results. You can select a range of 1 to 7 for the decimal digits. The default is 3.
4 Adams/View
Action marker

Action marker
A marker belonging to the body to which Adams/View applies a multi-component applied force (see
Applied forces). Action Markers are also referred to as I markers.
 A-C 5
Activation status

Activation status
Determines whether or not an object is included in a Simulation.
6 Adams/View
Adams Toolbar

Adams Toolbar
The Adams Toolbar is your starting point to using Adams products on UNIX. It gives you access to the
major products you installed. It uses a registry service that maintains values and settings that you need
when running Adams.

Adams Toolbar tool - Right-click to setup Toolbar,

manage memory models, access online help and
Technical Support resources, and more

Product tools - Click to run product or right-click to

configure products and create user libraries.
Hold the cursor over a tool to see the name of the
associated product.
 A-C 7
Adams/Exchange

Adams/Exchange
MSC’s optional software to Adams/View that lets you import and export geometric data in CAD format.
For more information, see About Adams/Exchange.
8 Adams/View
Adams/Flex Toolkit

Adams/Flex Toolkit
The Adams/Flex toolkit lets you view and work with an Modal Neutral File (MNF). It lets you browse the
contents of an MNF, generate reports on its contents, optimize it, and translate an MNF to a matrix file.
You can also use it to perform a translation of an MSC/NASTRAN program file to an MNF. The
Adams/Flex toolkit is available through the Adams Toolbar on the UNIX platform and through the Start
menu on the Windows platform.
 A-C 9
Adams/Insight

Adams/Insight
Adams/Insight lets you design sophisticated experiments for measuring the performance of your
mechanical system. It also provides a collection of statistical tools for analyzing the results of your
experiments so that you can better understand how to refine and improve your model. For more
information on Adams/Insight, see the Adams/Insight online help.
10 Adams/View
Adams/Linear

Adams/Linear
Adams/Linear is a module to Adams/Solver that linearizes Adams models. Linearized Adams models can
be represented by complex-valued eigendata (eigenvalues, mode shapes) or by a state-space
representation in the form of real-valued state matrices (A,B,C, and D). Adams uses a condensation
scheme to reduce an Adams model to a minimal realization linear form for efficient solution.
 A - C 11
Adams/PostProcessor

Adams/PostProcessor
Adams/PostProcessor is a powerful post-processing tool that lets you view the results of simulations you
performed using other Adams products. Your Adams product launches it when you select Postprocessing
from the Review menu.
For more information, see the Adams/PostProcessor online help.
12 Adams/View
Adams/Solver

Adams/Solver
MSC’s software program for kinematically and dynamically analyzing mechanical systems. For more
information, see the Adams/Solver online help.
 A - C 13
Adams/Solver ID

Adams/Solver ID
An Adams/Solver ID is an integer used to identify the element in the Adams/Solver dataset files (.adm).
You only need to specify an ID number if you have User-written subroutine.
Enter a 0 to have Adams/Solver assign the ID for you.
14 Adams/View
Adams/Solver analysis files

Adams/Solver analysis files

Three files that can be produced during a simulation. They are Graphics file (.gra), Request file (.req), and
Results file (.res). By default, Adams/Solver does not create them when you work in Adams/View.
 A - C 15
Adams/Solver dataset files

Adams/Solver dataset files

Adams/Solver dataset files describe the essential components of a model using Adams/Solver Data
Language (ADL) statements, the basic language of Adams/Solver. You can import and export a dataset
file using Adams/View.
A dataset consists of statements Adams/View writes to describe the characteristics of your mechanical
system. These characteristics include part geometry, initial position, velocity, inertial properties,
constraints, and forces. In addition to communicating the mechanical system characteristics, the dataset
specifies the output and the output format.
See Simple pendulum sample dataset.
16 Adams/View
Adams/View

Adams/View
A powerful modeling and simulating environment you use to build, simulate, and refine virtual models
of any mechanical system that has moving parts, from automobiles and trains to VCRs and backhoes.
 A - C 17
Adams/View command file

Adams/View command file

A file that contains a set of Adams/View commands that defines a Model, performs a specific function,
or performs a set of functions. The commands in the file are the same commands that you enter through
the Command window or Command Navigator. They are used to automate the creation of a model or in
the investigation of Simulation results. For example, you can import a command file that contains all the
commands to build a latch in Adams/View.
A command file is the fastest and easiest way to issue the same sequence of commands repeatedly. It is
in ASCII format and you can transfer it between most computer platforms. Command files usually have
the extension .cmd, although that extension is not required.
18 Adams/View
Adaptivity value

Adaptivity value
Loosens or tightens the convergence tolerance for the corrector phase of the Integration step when solving
a Dynamic simulation.
 A - C 19
Analytical Method

Analytical Method
The analytical method uses the curves of the path and profile you specify for the revolution or extrusion
and uses the curves to define the revolution or extrusion. Unlike the Non-analytical Method, for a
revolution, it maintains the relationship of the profile and axis. When you edit the revolution or extrusion,
you edit the curves making up the object, not the individual points of the profile as you do for non-
analytical.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods

Comparision of extrusions created with analytical and non-analytical methods

20 Adams/View
Animation

Animation
An Adams/View tool that allows you to replay the frames from your Simulation, and helps you review
and study the part movements within your model.
 A - C 21
Applied forces

Applied forces
Forces that define loads and compliances on parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). They allow you to write
your own equations to represent a wide variety of force relationships. To help you write force equations,
we’ve provided a Function Builder, which steps you through writing a function and evaluates the
function before adding it to your model. For more information on the Function Builder, see Adams/View
Function Builder online help.
22 Adams/View
Array

Array
A list of input variables, state variables, output variables, and initial conditions associated with System
elements, such as general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer functions. You can also use
general arrays to define lists of constants. You can access the values in function Expressions or User-
written subroutines.
 A - C 23
Assemblies

Assemblies
Assemblies, also referred to as user-defined elements, let you collect generic modeling elements into a
single object that you can easily duplicate. Assemblies are accessible only from the command line or
through macros. Examples of assemblies are the Adams/View Controls tool kit; some forces, such as the
spring damper; and general motions. To see assemblies in Adams/View, display the Database Navigator
and select to view assemblies.
24 Adams/View
Background color tool stack

Background color tool stack

A Tool stack on the Main toolbox. It contains four of the most commonly used colors for setting the
background color of a View window.
 A - C 25
Basic Type

Basic Type
Includes the following:
real, integer, location, orientation, string, function, list(str1, str2, str3,...), file(path wildcard)
The list type must be followed by the list of allowed values.
The file type can optionally be followed by a wildcard with or without a path. The File Selection dialog
box uses the specified path and wildcard as the defaults for the parameter. If you do not specify a
wildcard, the File Selection dialog box lists all files.
26 Adams/View
Beam

Beam
A linear translational and rotational force between two locations.
 A - C 27
Beam example

Beam example
28 Adams/View
Binary format

Binary format
The format of the Adams/View Modeling database that saves all aspects of your modeling session,
including Models, Simulation results, defaults, and changes to the interface. You can save your work to a
binary file and later reload it and resume working where you left off.
 A - C 29
Bode plot

Bode plot
Helps you study frequency response functions (FRFs) for linear systems and linearized representations
of nonlinear systems. The frequency response function measures the response at the outputs due to unit
harmonic excitation at the inputs at various frequencies. A Bode plot shows the amplitude gain and the
phase shift between input to output for all output/input combinations of the linear system.
30 Adams/View
Body-fixed rotation

Body-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that move with the body as it rotates. As Adams/View applies each rotation
to an axis, it produces a new set of axes.
 A - C 31
Boss

Boss
Raised circular protrusions on the face of solid objects.
32 Adams/View
Bushing

Bushing
Spring and damper forces acting between two parts. You define the force and torque magnitudes using
six Cartesian components (Fx, Fy, Fz, Tx, Ty, and Tz), which are a linear function of the translational and
rotational displacement between two coordinate systems moving with the two parts.
 A - C 33
Cartesian coordinate system

Cartesian coordinate system

A coordinate system you define using three perpendicular axes (x, y, and z) to specify locations.
34 Adams/View
Chamfer

Chamfer
A beveled edge or corner on a solid object.
 A - C 35
Check button

Check button
A small square button in a dialog box that selects an option. You can select more than one check box in
a group.
36 Adams/View
Clearance study

Clearance study
A clearance study reports the minimum distance between objects in your model at each frame of an
animation in Adams/PostProcessor. For example, you might want to perform a clearance study to ensure
packaging requirements are satisfied.
When you view an animation of the clearance study, Adams/PostProcessor displays a line between the
two objects in the study to track the minimum distance. You can also plot the data and generate reports.
 A - C 37
Click

Click
To press and quickly release the mouse button.
38 Adams/View
Command Navigator

Command Navigator
The Command Navigator displays a list of all Adams/View command keywords. A plus (+) in front of a
keyword indicates that the command has more keywords below it but they are hidden. A minus (-)
indicates that all keywords below the keyword are displayed. No indicator in front of a keyword indicates
that there are no more keywords below the object. When you select an object with no indicator, a dialog
box appears in which you enter parameters for executing the command.
 A - C 39
Command window

Command window
An Adams/View window that lets you enter Adams/View commands directly instead of using menus.
The commands correspond to menu selections and the parameters correspond to Dialog box choices. You
can either enter the full command or an abbreviation to the command.
Learn more about the Command Window.
40 Adams/View
Comments

Comments
For comments, you can enter any alphanumeric characters. The comments that you create appear in the
Information window when you select to display information about the object, in the Adams/View Log file,
and in a Adams/View command file or Adams/Solver dataset files when you export your model to these
types of files. (Note that Design variables are not output to datasets; therefore, neither are their
comments.)
 A - C 41
Comparision of extrusions

Comparision of extrusions
42 Adams/View
Comparision of revolutions

Comparision of revolutions
 A - C 43
Constraint

Constraint
An Adams/View object that defines how two parts are attached and how they can move with respect to
one another. There are four different types of constraints: Idealized joints, Primitive joints, Contacts, and
motions.
44 Adams/View
Construction geometry

Construction geometry
Primitive objects that have no mass. They include Points and Markers as well as wire geometry, such as
lines, arcs, and splines. You can use construction geometry to define other Geometry.
 A - C 45
Contacts

Contacts
Objects that model how parts meet at points and how points on parts follow curves. They also model how
curves on one part follow curves on another part.
46 Adams/View
Coordinate window

Coordinate window
Displays the coordinate location of the cursor in the main window. It updates the coordinates as you move
the cursor. You can also use the coordinate window to find the distance between two Points.

To toggle its display:

• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the Coordinate Window tool

Shortcut: Press the F4 key.

• Double-click to apply the change to all View windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack
to double-click it.
 A - C 47
Curve

Curve
A line representing data on a plot.
48 Adams/View
Cylindrical coordinate system

Cylindrical coordinate system

A coordinate system in which you specify r, , and z for the location of an object:

• r is the distance in the xy plane to the location. r is measured from the origin to the point
projected onto the xy plane.

• is the angle in the xy plane to the location. is measured from the x-axis to the line
connecting the origin and the location projected into the xy plane. is positive using the right-
hand rule about the z-axis.
• z is the distance to the location along the z-axis.
 D - F 49
Cylindrical coordinate system

D-F
50 Adams/View
DAC Format

DAC Format
nCode International created the DAC file format. This DAC format supports single-parameter (time
series), two-parameter (x-y), and three-parameter (histogram) files. Adams/Durability supports the time
series format. With this DAC format, you can input data from durability test machines and output data to
nSoft and other DAC-compatible programs. This topic contains an overview of the DAC format. For a
detailed description of the DAC format, see the nSoft data File Formats document from nCode
International.
DAC files are binary, sequential, and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The data represent a fixed
sample rate or time step. Real numbers are single-precision (4-byte) values. Each file has header, data,
and footer regions. Adams/Durability supports both old (pre version 5.0) and new (version 5.0+) DAC
formats with a single channel of time series data.
In general, DAC files are not portable from platform to platform. For example, files created by
Adams/Durability on a Windows platform are not readable by Adams/Durability or other programs on
UNIX platforms. nCode provides an nSoft utility to convert DAC files from one platform to another.
However, this utility does not have a specification for the Linux platform. When using Adams/Durability
or Adams/View on a Linux platform, use DAC files that have been converted to Windows or INTEL
(Windows DAC files are compatible with Linux). Note that Linux-generated DAC files can be processed
on Windows and the reverse.
 D - F 51
DXF/DWG

DXF/DWG
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams/Exchange.
52 Adams/View
Database Object Type

Database Object Type

Specifying a database object type means a user must enter the name of an existing object of that type.
You can also prefix any of these types with new_ to specify a name for a new object of that type. For
example, t=marker means the user must enter the name of an existing marker and t=new_marker means
the user must enter the name for the new marker.
Here are some examples:
$stiffness:t=real
$counter:t=integer
$end_point:t=location
$attitude:t=orientation
$mat:t=marker
Similar to the file parameter type, you can also add a default wildcard after the object type, such as
marker(left_*). In this case, if you browse for existing markers, the Database Navigator uses this as the
default wildcard pattern for the parameter and lists only markers whose names begin with "left_". If you
do not supply a wildcard, the Database Navigator lists all the objects of the appropriate type.
You can use the Adams/View Function Builder to view the different object types in Adams/View as
explained below. Note that this procedure returns both object types and object classes.

To view the database object types in Adams/View:

1. From the Tools menus, select Database Navigator.
2. Change the filter (typically All) to Browse. Learn about Filtering Objects in the Database
Navigator.
A listing of all object types appears.
 D - F 53
Database Object-Class Types

Database Object-Class Types

The classes of objects include the following:

ADAMS_Output_File Measure_Vector
Body Modeling
Constraint Old_Graphic_User_Interface
Data_Element Optimization_Function
Equation Plotting
Expression_primitive Point_to_Point_Force
Feature Position
Force Reference_Frame
Frame_Display Runtime_Measure
Function_Container Solid_Geometry
Geometry Triad
Graphic_User_Interface Variable_Class
Higher_Pair_Contact Wire_Geometry
Measure
54 Adams/View
Data element matrix

Data element matrix

A data element matrix lets you input a two-dimensional array of numerical values. You use the matrix
primarily to support other elements such as curves, linear state equations, Multi-Component forces, and
more. You can assign the entries in a matrix directly or specify the name of a data file from which
Adams/View should read the values. You can also use the results of a Simulation as input to a matrix by
referencing Result set components.
 D - F 55
Data elements

Data elements
Elements that store alpha-numeric information in your model. Data elements include Arrays, curves,
splines, matrixes, and strings.
Note that data elements by themselves do nothing. They simply hold supporting data for other Adams
elements or for your user function Expressions or User-written subroutines. For example, you reference
matrices in the definition of a linear state equation. In addition, a linear state equation uses arrays of
variables to define input, output, and state characteristics. You can also use curves to create contact
constraints.
56 Adams/View
Data point

Data point
Represents data that Adams/View created at an output step during a Simulation or test data that you’ve
imported.
 D - F 57
Database Navigator

Database Navigator
An Adams/View tool that lets you view and select objects in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Database Navigator.
58 Adams/View
Default

Default
Selects a simulation for you depending on your model:
• If your model contains zero Degrees of freedom (DOF), performs a Kinematic simulation.
• If your model has one or more DOF, Adams/View performs a Dynamic simulation.
 D - F 59
Degrees of freedom

Degrees of freedom
The amount a part is free to move in space (see Part (also called Bodies)). A part free in space has six
degrees of freedom: three translational, three rotational. A constraint removes degrees of freedom
between two parts, causing them to remain positioned with respect to one another.
60 Adams/View
Delta mode

Delta mode
A mode in which the Coordinate window displays the differences between Points. The coordinate window
is in delta mode when you are moving an object or drawing the selection box.
When Adams/View starts delta mode, it displays the distance between the current location of the cursor
and its original location. Adams/View adds the distance information to the coordinate window below the
coordinate values. It places a D in front of the coordinate values to differentiate them.
Adams/View also displays a MAG field near the bottom of the window, which displays the magnitude of
the cursor displacement. The magnitude is the square root of the sum of the squares of the three
coordinate values.
 D - F 61
Design of experiments (DOE)

Design of experiments (DOE)

A systematic method of determining a model’s sensitivity to variation. You enter Design variables for
those elements whose sensitivity to variation you want to gauge and then run the DOE. During the DOE,
Adams/View runs several Simulations and varies the values of the design variables. It measures the effect
of the changes. See Adams/Insight, Design study, and Optimization.
62 Adams/View
Design study

Design study
A set of Simulations that help you adjust a parameter in your Model to measure its effect on the
performance of your model. For example, you can run a design study to determine the optimal length
required for a driving link in a stamping machine required to make a stamp hit a box.
See Design of experiments (DOE) and Optimization.
 D - F 63
Design variables

Design variables
Design variables represent elements in your model that can change. For example, a design variable can
represent a location for a design point, a magnitude for a force, or spring stiffnesses. After you enter a
design variable in your model, you can run automated simulations that vary the values of the variable
over specified ranges to understand the sensitivity to the variable or to find the optimum values. See
Design of experiments (DOE), Design study, and Optimization.
64 Adams/View
Dialog box

Dialog box
A panel that appears when you select a command. It requests more information.
 D - F 65
Dialog-Box Builder

Dialog-Box Builder
66 Adams/View
Dialog-Box builder

Dialog-Box builder
An Adams/View tool that helps you create and modify Dialog boxes. For example, you can use it to add
a new button to a dialog box or create a new dialog box to execute a special procedure you run often.
 D - F 67
Dimensions

Dimensions
Any measurable extent, such as velocity, length, mass, and torque.
68 Adams/View
Double-click

Double-click
To quickly click the mouse button twice without moving the mouse.
 D - F 69
Drag

Drag
To press and hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.
70 Adams/View
Dynamic Model Navigator

Dynamic Model Navigator

An Adams/View tool that helps you select and place objects by highlighting entire objects or elements
on those objects so you can easily select, place, or align other objects.
 D - F 71
Dynamic simulation

Dynamic simulation
A time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and internal reaction forces in
your Model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic simulation is also known as a
kinetic simulation.
During a dynamic simulation, Adams/Solver solves the full set of non linear differential and algebraic
equations (DAEs). It is the most complex and computationally demanding type of Simulation and is
meant to be used with models that have one or more Degrees of freedom.
A dynamic simulation provides a time-history solution for displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
internal reaction forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations.
Learn more About Dynamic Simulations.
72 Adams/View
Elements of an arc

Elements of an arc
This example shows a 60-degree angle with a starting angle of 15 degrees and an ending angle of 75
degrees.
 D - F 73
Entering a marker name

Entering a marker name

You can specify a marker by typing its name or by picking it from the screen.
If the marker is not visible on the screen, you must type the name (you may find it convenient to type the
name even if the marker is displayed).
If you created the marker by reading an Adams/Solver dataset or graphics file, the marker name is the
letters MAR followed by the Adams/Solver dataset marker ID number. For example, the name of Adams
MARKER/101 is MAR101. If you created the marker during pre-processing, you gave it a name at that
time.
If a marker is available by default, you can specify it by entering its name only. If it is not, you must enter
its full name. To identify a marker under a different part, for example, you may need to enter the model
and part names as well. For example, you may specify marker pivot from model links, part lower_arm
by entering .links.lower_arm.pivot. If you type a ?, Adams/View will list the markers available by
default.
You must separate multiple marker names by commas.
If the marker is visible in one of your views, you may identify it by picking on it. You don't need to
separate multiple marker picks by commas.
74 Adams/View
Entering File Names in Text Boxes

Entering File Names in Text Boxes

To enter file names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
• Enter the file name directly in the text box.
• Clear the text box and then double-click to open a selection window.
• Right-click to either:
• Search a database
• Browse a database
 D - F 75
Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

To enter object names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
• Enter the object name directly in the text box.
• Clear the text box and then double-click to open the Database Navigator.
• Right-click to either:
• Pick an object shown on the screen.
• Browse a complete list of available objects.
• Choose from a product-generated list of guesses.
76 Adams/View
Eprint

Eprint
Eprint prints a block of information for each Kinematic simulation, Static equilibrium , or Dynamic
simulation step to a Command window and to your Adams/View Log file. The information helps you
monitor the simulation process and locate the source of the error if there is a problem. Each step consists
of two phases:
• A forward step in time (the predictor for dynamics).
• The solution of the equations of motion (the corrector for dynamics).

Eprint displays the same information that the DEBUG command does when used with the argument
EPRINT. For more information, see DEBUG in the Adams/Solver online help.
When you select Eprint, a command window appears. It displays the most recent commands that
Adams/View executed.

Note: You can close the command window and use your log file to view the debugging
information.
 D - F 77
Example 5x3 mesh

Example 5x3 mesh

78 Adams/View
Example of Extrusion

Example of Extrusion
 D - F 79
Example of Extrusion Directions

Example of Extrusion Directions

80 Adams/View
Example of Function Builder in Computed Measure Mode

Example of Function Builder in Computed Measure

Mode
 D - F 81
Example of Function Builder in Function Measure Mode

Example of Function Builder in Function Measure

Mode
82 Adams/View
Example of Hollowed Boxes

Example of Hollowed Boxes

The following shows two hollowed boxes. One box was hollowed from the inside; the other box was
hollowed by adding material to the outside.

The resulting dimensions of the boxes are:

 D - F 83
Example of Mixed Dimensions

Example of Mixed Dimensions

84 Adams/View
Example of Nodes Table

Example of Nodes Table

 D - F 85
Example of Objects with Shared edges and faces

Example of Objects with Shared edges and faces

86 Adams/View
Example of renaming an object

Example of renaming an object

 D - F 87
Example of shortcut menu

Example of shortcut menu

88 Adams/View
Expression language

Expression language
You use the Adams/View expression language to write expressions. Expressions are combinations of
constants, operators, functions, and database object references, all enclosed in parentheses. In
Adams/View you can use expressions to specify parameter values, such as locations of markers or
functions of motions.
Adams/View uses expressions for two purposes:
• To compute values for you, such as when you are entering the radius of a cylinder and the value
is not a simple number, but is the result of a mathematical computation.
• To parameterize your model.
 D - F 89
Expression mode

Expression mode
Function Builder mode in which you create expressions, which are the basis of all parameterization.
90 Adams/View
Expressions

Expressions
Groups of standard constants, operators, functions, and data references. You use expressions to specify
parameters in your model or to allow Adams/View or Adams/Solver to calculate values.
 D - F 91
External Adams/Solver

External Adams/Solver
Performs a Simulation with Adams/Solver while in Adams/View, but without seeing the model update on
the screen during the simulation. Adams/View automatically plays an animation of the simulation when
the simulation is complete.
92 Adams/View
Extrusion

Extrusion
A three-dimensional object defined by its profile and depth. An extrusion can be either solid or hollow.
 D - F 93
Fast fourier transform (FFT)

Fast fourier transform (FFT)

A mathematical algorithm that takes a time-domain function and maps it into its sinusoidal components.
FFT can take any time-dependent function or measure in your model and transform it to the frequency
domain, isolating the frequencies of the sinusoidal components.
94 Adams/View
Field element

Field element
A translational and rotational force between two locations. The field element can apply either linear or
nonlinear force depending on the values that you specify after you create the field.
 D - F 95
Fillet

Fillet
A rounded edge or corner on a solid object.
96 Adams/View
Fixed joint

Fixed joint
A constraint that allows no translation or rotation between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
 D - F 97
Flexible bodies

Flexible bodies
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) that vibrates and bends as Forces are applied to it.
98 Adams/View
Flexible connectors

Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors let you connect two bodies in a compliant way. In contrast to Joints, which are rigid
connectors, flexible connectors do not absolutely prohibit any part movement and, therefore, do not
remove any Degrees of freedom from your model. Flexible connectors do typically resist movements
between parts (see Part (also called Bodies)), however, by applying spring and damper forces to the
connected bodies. These forces are proportional to the displacement and rate of change in displacement
between two parts, respectively.
 D - F 99
Flexible links

Flexible links
A discrete link consisting of two or more rigid bodies (see Rigid body) connected by beam force elements.
100 Adams/View
Floating marker

Floating marker
Specifies a site for applying Forces or Constraints to parts. The force or constraint dictates the location
and orientation of the floating marker. Therefore, you do not specify a position for a floating marker. This
allows the floating marker’s location and orientation to change with respect to its body coordinate system
during the simulation, as dictated by the force or constraint.
 D - F 101
Force

Force
An effect that has magnitude and direction and that causes motion of a part (see Part (also called Bodies))
when there is no other external effect on the part. In Adams/View, force can refer to both translational
and rotational forces.
102 Adams/View
Force graphics

Force graphics
Arrows whose magnitudes and directions reflect the scaled, relative magnitudes and directions of the
force vectors acting on your Model during a Simulation.
 D - F 103
Frame

Frame
A single step of an Adams/View Simulation applied to a Model.
104 Adams/View
Function

Function
An operand that takes a list of arguments and computes a value based on the values in the list. Each
argument in the list is an expression that is evaluated and given to the function. Common examples are
SIN( ), SQRT( ), and ABS( ).
 D - F 105
Function Builder

Function Builder
An Adams/View tool that helps you build and modify Function expressions and Measures. For more
information, see the Adams/View Function Builder online help.
Function Builder has two modes:
• Run-time mode
• Expression mode
106 Adams/View
Function Builder in Expression Mode

Function Builder in Expression Mode

 D - F 107
Function Builder in Run Time Mode

Function Builder in Run Time Mode

108 Adams/View
Function Builder in Run Time Mode

G-M
 G - M 109
Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator

Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator

The Gear Stiff Integrator uses a backwards differentiation formula to integrate differential and algebraic,
standard index-three equations. In addition, it assumes a fixed time step which results in fixed
coefficients for predictions. The Gear Stiff integrator provides good solutions for simulations of stiff
models (models with a mix of high and low frequencies).
110 Adams/View
Geometric entities

Geometric entities
The following is complete list of entities that can be translated into outlines and markers or polylines.
In addition to the entities listed in the table, you can create outlines for any geometry or annotation entity
that results in a linear approximation of two points. In this case, a line is created. You can also create
outlines for surfaces that are polygonalized.

Iges entity: Type number: Converted to Adams/View object:

Circular arc 100 Arc, circle
Composite curve 102 Polyline
Conic arc 104 Polyline
Copious data 106 Outline or polyline
Centerline 106 (20-21) Polyline
Section 106 (31-38) Polyline
Witness line 106 (40) Polyline
Plane 108 Outline or polyline
Line 110 Outline or polyline
Parametric spline curve 112 Polyline
Parametric spline surface 114 Polyline
Point 116 Marker
Ruled surface 118 Outline or polyline
Surface of revolution 120 Cylinder, outline, or polyline
Tabulated cylinder 122 Cylinder, frustum, outline, or polyline
Rational B-spline curve 126 Polyline
Rational B-spline surface 128 Outline or polyline
Offset curve 130 Polyline
Offset surface 140 Outline or polyline
Boundary 141 Polyline
Curve on a parametric surface 142 Polyline
Bounded surface 143 Outline or polyline
Trimmed (parametric) surface 144 Outline or polyline
Angular dimension 202 Polyline
Curve dimension 204 Polyline
Diameter dimension 206 Polyline
Flag note 208 Polyline
 G - M 111
Geometric entities

Iges entity: Type number: Converted to Adams/View object:

General label 210 Polyline
General note 212 Polyline
New general note 213 Polyline
Leader (arrow) 214 Polyline
Linear dimension 216 Polyline
Ordinate dimension 218 Polyline
Point dimension 220 Polyline
Radius dimension 222 Polyline
General symbol 228 Polyline
Sectioned area 230 Polyline
112 Adams/View
Geometry

Geometry
Graphical elements that make up a Rigid body or Flexible bodies. These elements include curves, such as
arcs, and shapes, such as cylinders. A rigid or flexible body can have one or more geometric elements.
Note that a part (see Part (also called Bodies)) can have no geometry associated with it.
 G - M 113
Getting help in the Command Navigator

Getting help in the Command Navigator

The Command Navigator has a separate help system from the rest of the Adams/View online help. It
appears in an Information Window. The help contains only information about entering Adams/View
commands.
1. Highlight the command keyword for which you want help.
2. Select Help.

Note: There is also command language help in this help system. From the help table of contents,
select MD Adams Package -> Adams/View -> View Command Language.
114 Adams/View
Graphics file

Graphics file
An Adams/Solver file that contains graphics output from a Simulation. Has a .gra extension.
 G - M 115
Group

Group
A set of objects that make up a unit or subsystem of your Model. You can work on them as a single object.
Once you’ve grouped the objects, you can add them to the Select list all at once so that you can perform
editing operations on them, such as move or copy them. You can also set up their Activation status and
deactivation status during Simulations.
116 Adams/View
Highlighting

Highlighting
To display an object, and any objects related to that object, in a specified color so you can see the
relationship between the objects in your Model. For example, you can highlight a Joint and the parts it
constrains (see Part (also called Bodies)) .
 G - M 117
Hotpoints

Hotpoints
Small squares that appear on geometric elements and plot Curves when selected. They enable you to
reshape and resize the Geometry. Each type of geometry has a different number of hotpoints.
118 Adams/View
Hotspot

Hotspot
A hotspot is a node or region on the flexible body that experienced one of the highest values of
stress/strain during the simulation.
 G - M 119
IGES files

IGES files
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES) files containing the geometry from Adams/View or a
CAD software package. You can import and export IGES files using Adams/Exchange. When you import
an IGES file, you associate the geometry in the file with any Rigid body in the current Model.
120 Adams/View
IMPACT-Function-Based Contact

IMPACT-Function-Based Contact
In this method, Adams/Solver computes the contact force from the IMPACT function available in the
Adams function library. The force is essentially modeled as a nonlinear spring damper.
 G - M 121
Idealized joints

Idealized joints
Mathematical representations of joints that have physical counterparts, such as a revolute (hinge) or
translational joint (sliding dovetail). See Primitive joints.
122 Adams/View
Information window

Information window
Displays many different types of information about your Model, Simulation, or motions, including:
• Topology on the different objects in your model
• Object information, such as information about a part or a view
• Model verification results
• Measurements from one marker to another (see Markers)
• Result set component information
• View attributes
• Results from a system command you run using the Execute System Command

Picture with part information displayed

 G - M 123
Initial conditions simulation

Initial conditions simulation

An initial conditions simulation ensures the proper assembly of your Model before other Simulations. It
checks to ensure that all constraints and initial conditions are allowable and consistent. If it finds any
discrepancies, it corrects them so that there is a consistent set of values representing the state of the model
and assembles the model in a more appropriate way.
For example, if initial values for displacements and velocities violate the constraint equations,
Adams/Solver modifies the input displacement and velocity data to satisfy the constraint equations while
minimizing the change in the input data.
124 Adams/View
Integration step

Integration step
The time step that Adams/Solver takes internally to solve the equations of motion to the specified
accuracy tolerance. Adams/Solver uses variable-step Integrators that constantly increase or decrease the
size of the integration steps as needed. By default, the size of the integration step is proportional to the
size of the Output step.
 G - M 125
Integrator

Integrator
An algorithm that solves the differential equations of motion over an interval of time during a dynamic
Dynamic simulation. Adams/View lets you select four types of integrators when you customize how
Adams/Solver solves equations of motion. The default is the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF) integrator.
126 Adams/View
Interactive Simulation

Interactive Simulation
An interactive Simulations lets you run a single simulation and experiment with different simulation
parameters and options. Simulating interactively is helpful when you are not sure exactly what your
model will do or which options you need.
When you perform an interactive simulation, Adams/View submits one or two simple commands to
Adams/Solver based on the type of simulation, how long the simulation will last, and the frequency with
which you want data to be output. For example, for an interactive Dynamic simulation for which you set
the end time to 5.0 seconds and the frequency of output to 0.1 seconds, Adams/View sends the following
command to Adams/Solver:
SIMULATE/DYNAMIC, END=5.0, DTOUT=0.1
 G - M 127
Interface objects

Interface objects
The database objects that make up the Adams/View interface. All standard interface objects are stored
under the library GUI in your Modeling database.
Learn more about Adams/View Interface Objects.
128 Adams/View
Jacobian matrix

Jacobian matrix
Specifies the pattern Adams/Solver should use to check that the Integration step is moving closer to the
desired accuracy. Adams/Solver repeats the pattern of checks until it reaches the maximum number of
iterations. The default is to check the process after every iteration.
 G - M 129
Joint

Joint
A mechanical element that connects two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) and allows relative motion
of one object with respect to another.
See Idealized joints and Primitive joints.
130 Adams/View
Joint motion

Joint motion
Prescribes translational or rotational motion on a translational, revolute, or cylindrical joint. Each joint
motion removes one degree of freedom (DOF) from your model (see Degrees of freedom). Joint motions
are very easy to create, but they limit you to motions that are applied to the above listed joints and
movements in only one direction or rotation.
 G - M 131
Keywords

Keywords
A word that represents a command or parameter.
132 Adams/View
Kinematic simulation

Kinematic simulation
Determines the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of any point of interest in
the model, independent of Forces applied to it. During a kinematic simulation, Adams/Solver solves only
the reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of simulation, therefore, is only available for models
with zero Degrees of freedom.
If you specify the mass and inertial properties of bodies in your Model, a kinematic Simulation also
calculates the corresponding applied and reaction forces required to generate the prescribed motions.
 G - M 133
Libraries

Libraries
A collection of Adams/View objects, such as a collection of interface objects. Libraries help organize the
Adams/View Modeling database because they collect related objects into one area. For example, there is
a library, called GUI, that collects all standard Adams/View interface objects. You can use the Database
Navigator tool to find libraries within the standard Adams/View interface for materials, interface objects,
Forces, and controls elements.

You can create libraries of your own. You add objects to a library by creating them as children of the
library object. A library can hold windows and Dialog boxes, groups, macros, materials, Models, plots,
assembly definitions and instances, Views, and other libraries.
134 Adams/View
Linear Modes

Linear Modes
Calculates eigenvalues and eigenvectors, which give you a better understanding of your system’s natural
frequencies and mode shapes, respectively.
After the calculation is complete, you can choose to view an animation or a table of the values. If you
select an animation, the Linear Modes Controls dialog box appears, letting you make other changes.
For additional information, see the LINEAR command in the Adams/Solver online help.
 G - M 135
Linear simulation

Linear simulation
Linearizes your nonlinear dynamic equations of motion about a particular operating point in order to
determine natural frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. You must purchase Adams/Linear to
perform a linear simulation.
136 Adams/View
Link

Link
An extrusion of a rectangle with semi-circular ends.
 G - M 137
Loads on Rigid Body

Loads on Rigid Body

Outputs all external forces (reaction and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and
inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and acceleration, including effects of gravity) as a
function of time. Load data will be output in the simulation set of units.
138 Adams/View
Loads on a Flex Body

Loads on a Flex Body

Outputs all external forces (reaction and applied forces except gravity) acting on the specified body and
inertial forces of the specified body (angular velocity and acceleration, including effects of gravity) as a
function of time. Load data will be output in the simulation set of units. In the Flex Body text box, enter
the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE modal basic
coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
 G - M 139
Location table

Location table
The Location Table lets you view the points in lines, polylines, splines, Extrusions, and revolutions and
edit them. You can also save the location information to a file or read in location information from a file.

See Location Table dialog box help for more information.

140 Adams/View
Log file

Log file
An ASCII file called aview.log containing all of the commands that you entered during the current
modeling session, as well as all the error, warning, and fatal messages that you received. Adams/View
generates a log file during each Adams/View session.
 G - M 141
Macro

Macro
A macro is a single command that you create to execute a series of Adams/View commands.
142 Adams/View
Main toolbox

Main toolbox
Displays tools and Tool stacks that assist you in creating and simulating your Model.

Learn more with Main Toolbox dialog box help.

 G - M 143
Main window

Main window
The Adams/View window in which you build and simulate your Model.
Learn about Adams/View Main Window.
144 Adams/View
Markers

Markers
Define a local coordinate system on any part (flexible, rigid, curve, or ground) in your model (see Part
(also called Bodies)) . A marker has a location (the origin of the coordinate system) and an orientation.
Adams/View automatically creates markers at the center of mass of all solid Geometry and at anchor
points on geometry that define the location of the object in space. For example, a link has three markers:
two at its endpoints and one at its center of mass. Adams/View also automatically creates markers for you
when you constrain objects, such as add a joint between parts. Adams/View displays markers as triads.
 G - M 145
Measures

Measures
Gauge particular quantities in your Model during a Simulation. For example, you can measure the Force
in a spring throughout a simulation or the angle between two Points or axes.
146 Adams/View
Menu Builder

Menu Builder
An Adams/View tool that lets you modify and create menus. For example, you can use the Menu Builder
to change the Main window’s menu bar so that it includes a Tire menu for adding tires to your Model. You
can build menus for a particular model or for an entire application.
 G - M 147
Menu bar

Menu bar
Contains the headings of each menu. The menus contain all the Adams/View commands for creating,
simulating, and improving your model.
148 Adams/View
Message file

Message file
Can contain Adams/Solver messages and topology information. Has an .msg extension.
 G - M 149
Modal Deformation

Modal Deformation
Outputs modal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible body. Adams/View will only
export coordinates of the active modes in the simulation.
150 Adams/View
Modal Neutral File (MNF)

Modal Neutral File (MNF)

A modal neutral file (MNF) is a binary file that defines a flexible body (see Flexible bodies) in
Adams/Flex. The information in a MNF includes:
• Geometry (locations of nodes and node connectivity)
• Nodal mass and inertia
• Mode shapes
• Generalized mass and stiffness for mode shapes

By default an MNF is platform-independent, however, you can obtain a platform-dependent MNF, which
can improve flexible body animation performance in the Adams products.
Learn more About the Flexible Body Description File (MNF).
 G - M 151
Model

Model
A complete description of your virtual prototype in Adams/View, including parts (see Part (also called
Bodies)) , Joints, Forces, and Geometry.
152 Adams/View
Model topology

Model topology
A view of your Modeling database to determine what Constraints your Model owns and what parts the
constraints connect (see Part (also called Bodies)) .
 G - M 153
Modeling database

Modeling database
Contains all your work in the current session of Adams/View. It contains any Models you create, their
attributes, Simulation results, plots, customized menus and Dialog boxes, and any preferences you set.
You can view the contents of a modeling database using the Database Navigator.
154 Adams/View
Move Toolstack

Move Toolstack
Contains tools for moving objects and setting the Working grid and default coordinate system.
 G - M 155
Multi-Component force

Multi-Component force
A translational and/or rotational Force between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) in your Model
defined by three or more orthogonal components.
156 Adams/View
Multi-Component force

N-R
 N - R 157
Nodal Deformation

Nodal Deformation
Outputs nodal deformations as a function of time of the specified flexible. Adams/View writes the
deformations in the simulation set of units.
158 Adams/View
Non-analytical Method

Non-analytical Method
The non-analytical method digitizes the profile and path you specify for the the revolution or extrusion
and uses these points to create the revolution or extrusion. For a revolution, it also moves the profile
making it perpendicular to the path along which you are revolving the profile, and then performs the
revolution. The resulting solid geometry for both a revolution and extrusion are sharp edges where the
points of the profile were. The geometry is not smoothed.
When you modify an extrusion or revolution created using the non-analytical method, you move the
original profile points to change the solid.
Comparision of revolutions created with analytical and non-analytical methods

Comparision of extrusions created with analytical and non-analytical methods

Learn about Analytical Method

 N - R 159
Non-Manifold

Non-Manifold
Extrusions that have mixed dimensions, edge or faces shared by another face, or intersecting lines. These
types of extrusions are not allowed in Adams/View.
160 Adams/View
Numeric data

Numeric data
Files that contain numerical results generated during an Adams/View session.
 N - R 161
Numeric results sample file

Numeric results sample file

This sample file contains three components. The first two columns of numbers, beginning with 1 and
10.0, are the first two components and the third column of numbers beginning with 22 is the third
component.
If you do not specify the number of steps, Adams/View uses a blank line to delimit the end of a
component. In the following example, the first two components have ten numbers each. If you specify
the number of steps to be read, Adams/View continues to read lines until the requested number of steps
have been stored in the component. For example, if only one component was read from the following file
162 Adams/View
Numeric results sample file

and the number of steps was specified to be 15, the component would contain the values 1, 2, 3.4, -4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23, .24, 25, 26.

>>>>>> beginning of file <<<<<<<

This is a test file for the NUMERIC_RESULT READ command.
1 10.0
2 11.0
3.4 12.5
-4 13.0
5 +14.0
6 15.5
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
22
23
.24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<

Note: Numbers can be separated by a comma (,) and they do not have to be lined up in even
columns.
 N - R 163
Numeric results sample file

If a paragraph of text contains a line that begins with a number, Adams/View tries to read the line. To
avoid this, precede lines that are to be ignored with a non-numeric character. Do not use +, -, or . because
these characters are valid as the first characters in a real number.

>>>>>> beginning of file <<<<<<<

This sample file contains only one component but contains the number 3 at the beginning of a line in
this header paragraph. Adams/View will try to read this line because it is not considered a comment.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<

>>>>>> beginning of file <<<<<<<

The same file, without a numerical character, ensuring that Adams/View does not try to read the
paragraph of text.
1.5
3.0
4.5
6.0
>>>>>> end of file <<<<<<<
164 Adams/View
Object position handle

Object position handle

An Adams/View tool for moving and rotating objects. The object position handle appears when you first
create a modeling object, such as a link or force. You can also display the position handle at any time by
selecting just one object.
 N - R 165
Optimization

Optimization
Helps you find an optimal design. You define the design objective and specify the parameters of the
Model that can change.
166 Adams/View
Options for Creating Angular Point-to-Point Measures

Options for Creating Angular Point-to-Point Measures

To: Do the following:

Select the vector component in which you are From the Component option buttons, select an option.
interested
Specify a marker about whose axes the In the Represent Coordinates in text box, enter a
measure will be represented marker.
Specify the reference frame (available In the Do time derivatives in text box, enter a marker
depending on the type of characteristic you representing the measure reference frame. If you do
chose) not enter a marker, Adams/View uses ground as the
reference frame.
 N - R 167
Options for Creating Translational Point-to-Point Measures

Options for Creating Translational Point-to-Point

Measures

To: Do the following:

Select the vector component in which you From the Component option buttons, select an option.
are interested
Select the associated coordinate system Set the pull-down menu next to the Component option
buttons to a coordinate system ( Cartesian, spherical, or
cylindrical.
Specify a marker along whose axes the In the Represent Coordinates in text box, enter a
measure will be represented marker. Leave the text box blank to represent the
coordinates in the ground coordinate system.
Specify the reference frame (available In the Do time derivatives in text box, enter a marker
depending on the type of characteristic you representing the measure reference frame. If you do not
chose) enter a marker, Adams/View uses ground as the
reference frame.
168 Adams/View
Orientation angles

Orientation angles
Angles that define three rotations about the axes of a coordinate system. These can be Space-fixed
rotations or Body-fixed rotations.
 N - R 169
Orientation tool stacks

Orientation tool stacks

170 Adams/View
Orientations

Orientations
 N - R 171
Outline

Outline
An outline is a sketch you create to substitute the more complex graphics from an Modal Neutral File
(MNF) with a simpler version. An outline on a flexible body deforms like the flexible body would. A
flexible body can have multiple outlines. The outline is only visible during animations of Simulations,
linear system modes, and when modeling. You cannot use the outline to investigate the component modes
of a flexible body.
Learn more about Substituting Outline Graphics for the Finite Element Mesh.
172 Adams/View
Output step

Output step
The time step at which Adams/Solver supplies data for you to investigate the results of a Simulation.
Adams/View displays each output step as an animation frame and as a point of data on a plot.
 N - R 173
Palette

Palette
A Dialog box of tools. You display a palette by selecting the Display Palette tool from a Tool stack or
selecting a modeling command on the Build menu.
Picture of a palette
174 Adams/View
Parametric analyses

Parametric analyses
Parametric analyses help you investigate the influence of Design variables on model performance.
During a parametric analysis, Adams/View runs a series of Simulations with different values for the
design variables and gives you feedback on the effects of the changes.
Adams/View has three types of parametric analyses:
• Design study
• Design of experiments (DOE)
• Optimization
 N - R 175
Parasolid

Parasolid
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams/Exchange.
176 Adams/View
Part (also called Bodies)

Part (also called Bodies)

Moving components of your Model. They can have a mass, inertia, initial position, and initial velocity.
They are made up of geometric elements of any size or shape. There are three types of parts: Rigid body,
Flexible bodies, and Point mass.
 N - R 177
Picture for Orientation Marker

Picture for Orientation Marker

178 Adams/View
Picture of a palette

Picture of a palette
 N - R 179
Picture of Color Picker

Picture of Color Picker

180 Adams/View
Picture of Database Navigator with PID Block

Picture of Database Navigator with PID Block

 N - R 181
Picture of dragging hotpoints

Picture of dragging hotpoints

182 Adams/View
Picture of Precision Move for Defining Screen Coordinates

Picture of Precision Move for Defining Screen

Coordinates
 N - R 183
Picture of referencing element

Picture of referencing element

184 Adams/View
Picture of rotating by increments

Picture of rotating by increments

 N - R 185
Picture of working grid

Picture of working grid

186 Adams/View
Pin-in-slot mechanism

Pin-in-slot mechanism
 N - R 187
Plate

Plate
188 Adams/View
Point Measures

Point Measures
Point measures provide an easy way to determine the kinematic and force characteristics of any marker
(see Markers), not just center-of-mass markers. For example, you can use point measures to resolve a
force at a specific location on a flexible body (see Flexible bodies), or you can determine the acceleration
of the end marker of a pendulum with respect to the ground reference frame.
 N - R 189
Point Motion

Point Motion
Prescribes the movement between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)). When you create a point
motion, you specify the direction along which the motion occurs. You can impose a point motion on any
type of idealized joint, such as a spherical or cylindrical.
See Spherical Joint Tool and Cylindrical Joint Tool.
Point motions enable you to build complex movements into your model without having to add joints or
invisible parts. For example, you can represent the movement along an arc, of a ship in the ocean, or a
robot’s arm.
There are two types of point motions:
• Single point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around one axis.
• General point motion - Prescribes the motion of two parts along or around the three axes (six
Degrees of freedom).
190 Adams/View
Point mass

Point mass
Part that has mass but no inertia properties or angular velocities.
 N - R 191
Point-to-Point Measures

Point-to-Point Measures
Point-to-point measures let you measure the kinematic relationship between any two Markers in your
model. For example, you can use a point-to-point measure to calculate the global y-component of
distance between any two specified markers.
You can also obtain point-to-point characteristics for geometric vertices. When you select vertices for the
markers, Adams/View automatically creates a marker at each vertex and uses it in the point-to-point
measure.
192 Adams/View
Points

Points
Locations (x, y, and z) that define a point in space. You can attach other objects in your Models to points
to establish parametric relationships. If you move a point to which other objects have been attached, the
objects move accordingly.
You can also define the location of points using Design variables so that Adams/View can vary the
location of the coordinates to understand the sensitivity of the design to the variable or to find its optimum
values.
 N - R 193
Polar working grid

Polar working grid

The Working grid in polar coordinates.
194 Adams/View
Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing

Polar Working Grid Sizing and Spacing

 N - R 195
Precision-fill rendering mode

Precision-fill rendering mode

Renders constant tone colors using hardware and software hidden line removal (HLR) algorithms. It
provides more accuracy when objects overlap, but it is slower.
196 Adams/View
Precision-shaded rendering mode

Precision-shaded rendering mode

Renders variable tone colors using hardware and software, hidden line removal (HLR) algorithms.
 N - R 197
Primitive joints

Primitive joints
A Joint that places a restriction on relative motion, such as restricting one part (see Part (also called
Bodies)) to always move parallel to another part. The joint primitives do not have physical counterparts
as the Idealized joints do.
198 Adams/View
Pull-down menu

Pull-down menu
An element in a Dialog box that displays a list of choices when you select it.
 N - R 199
Push buttons

Push buttons
Buttons in a Dialog box that execute a command or display another dialog box.
200 Adams/View
Quasi-static simulation

Quasi-static simulation
Sequence of static Simulations performed for different configurations of the Model. Typically, Static
equilibrium is computed at fixed time intervals throughout a prescribed motion for a model.
 N - R 201
RPC III Format

RPC III Format

MTS Systems Corporation created the Remote Parameter Control (RPC) III file format. This format has
become a standard for writing time history information of loads, forces, and accelerations. With RPC III,
you can input data from durability test machines and output data to any RPC III-compatible programs.
This topic contains an overview of the RPC III format. For a detailed description of the RPC III format,
see www.mts.com.
RPC III files are sequential and fixed-length with 512-byte records. The files begin with a standard
header that describes the file contents. The header includes a FORMAT flag that specifies one of four
data formats:
• BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END - used on Windows systems
• BINARY_IEEE_BIG_END - used on UNIX systems
• BINARY - used on VAX systems
• ASCII

Adams/View and Adams/Durability can read any of the binary formats, so from the point of view of an
Adams user, these files are portable between platforms. These products can also write RPC III files in the
BINARY_IEEE_LITTLE_END format because MTS only provides RPC III software for the Windows
platform.
The RPC III file format supports multi-channel time history data with a fixed sample rate or time step.
Adams/View and Adams/Durability support an unlimited number of channels. These binary files map
real data into a short (2-byte) signed integer with the header providing a scaling factor for each channel.
Because the scaling factor essentially determines where the decimal point appears in these signed
numbers, the maximum resolution of data in an RPC III file is 0.0000305 () when the scaling factor is 1.
A key point to remember is that data that varies less than the magnitude of the channel resolution won’t
be reflected in an RPC III file. For example, with a scaling factor of 1, changes less than ±0.0000305
won’t register in the RPC III data file.
202 Adams/View
Radio buttons

Radio buttons
One of a series of buttons in a Dialog box that display alternative choices. You can only select one button
at a time.
 N - R 203
Reaction markers

Reaction markers
A marker (see Markers) belonging to the body to which Adams/View applies the reaction Force of a
multi-component applied force. Reaction markers are also referred to as J markers.
204 Adams/View
Rectangular working grid

Rectangular working grid

The Working grid in rectangular coordinate system.
 N - R 205
Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing

Rectangular Working Grid Size and Spacing

206 Adams/View
Reference markers

Reference markers
A marker (see Markers) that indicates the direction of a multi-component applied Force.
 N - R 207
Reflections Example

Reflections Example
No Reflections Reflections
208 Adams/View
Render files

Render files
Render files are polygonal representation of surfaces that you create using Parametric Technology’s
Pro/ENGINEER. The format of the render files is almost identical to the Stereolithography (SLA) format
but it includes material information, such as color, with the polygonal surfaces.
 N - R 209
Rendering mode

Rendering mode
The application of shading and light to the objects in your Model. Adams/View provides you with six
rendering modes.

Wireframe render mode Precision-fill rendering mode

Solid fill render mode Precision-shaded rendering mode
Shaded rendering mode Smooth-shaded rendering mode

To set rendering mode:

• On the Main toolbox, select the Render button to toggle between wireframe and smooth-shaded
mode.
• On the View menu, point to Render Mode, and then select a rendering mode.
210 Adams/View
Request file

Request file
Contains requests for standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information. You can also
define other quantities (such as pressure, work, energy, momentum, and more) that you want output
during a Simulation.
 N - R 211
Requests

Requests
Requests contain standard displacement, velocity, acceleration, or force information that will help you
investigate the results of your simulation. You can also define other quantities (such as pressure, work,
energy, momentum, and more) that you want output during a Simulation.
Adams stores the requests in Request files (.req).
212 Adams/View
Restitution-based contact

Restitution-based contact
In this method, Adams/Solver computes the contact force from a penalty parameter and a coefficient of
restitution. The penalty parameter enforces the unilateral constraint, and the coefficient of restitution
controls the dissipation of energy at the contact.
 N - R 213
Result set component

Result set component

A basic set of state variable data that Adams/Solver calculates during a Simulation. Adams/Solver outputs
the data at each simulation Output step. A component of a result set is a time series of a particular quantity
(for example, the x displacement of a part or the y torque in a joint).
214 Adams/View
Result set naming

Result set naming

Result set Result set File that result

type: name: Component names: is from:
part PARxxx... x y z e1 e2 e3 e4 mag results file

vx vy vz wx wy wz

accx accy accz wdx wdy wdz

diff DIFxxx... q dq results file
joint JOIxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
jprim JPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
motion MOTxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
gear GEAxxx... fx fy fz results file
coupler COUxxx... fx1 fy1 fz1 tx1 ty1 tz1 fmag1 tmag1 results file

fx2 fy2 fz2 tx2 ty2 tz2 fmag2 tmag2

fx3 fy3 fz3 tx3 ty3 tz3 fmag3 tmag3

sforce SFOxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
spring damp SPRxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
bushing BUSxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
beam BEAxxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
field FIExxx... fx fy fz tx ty tz fmag tmag results file
user request UREQxxx... u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8 results file
request REQxxx... x y z r1 r2 r3 mag amag request file
ucon (not implemented)
 N - R 215
Results file

Results file
A file containing the set of state variable information that Adams/Solver calculates during a Simulation.
By default, Adams/Solver does not create a results file when working with Adams/View.
216 Adams/View
Right-click

Right-click
To hold the right mouse button down over an object, such a text box or part on the screen.
 N - R 217
Rigid body

Rigid body
A part (see Part (also called Bodies)) with inertial properties and mass that cannot deform. Every time
you add a rigid body to your Model, it adds six Degrees of freedom to your model. Rigid bodies can move
relative to other parts and can be used as a reference frame to measure another part's velocity or
acceleration.
Adams/View provides you with geometric constructions and solids with which you can create rigid
bodies. You can also refine the part geometry by adding features and performing Boolean operations to
combine bodies.
By default, Adams/View uses the geometry of the rigid body to determine its mass and inertia properties.
You can also enter your own values for mass and inertia properties.
218 Adams/View
Run-time mode

Run-time mode
Function Builder mode in which you define the functions Adams/Solver uses during a Simulation.
 S - Z 219
Run-time mode

S-Z
220 Adams/View
SI2 integrator

SI2 integrator
The SI2 Integrator uses the Stabilized Index-2 formulation, in conjunction with the Gear Stiff (GSTIFF)
integrator, for formulating and integrating differential equations of motion.
 S - Z 221
STEP file

STEP file
A standard CAD file format that you can import and export using Adams/Exchange.
222 Adams/View
Saturation

Saturation
Saturation is the strength or purity of a color in a specified hue, up to a maximum of 240. The higher the
saturation, the purer the color.
 S - Z 223
Save the simulation position as a model

Save the simulation position as a model

Saves the model to the database at a simulated position, and under a new name.
Learn more about Saving a Simulation Frame as New Model.
224 Adams/View
Screen icons

Screen icons
Graphical representations of various modeling objects that do not have a geometric representation, such
as force application points and directions.
 S - Z 225
Script

Script
A list of commands that Adams/Solver executes during a Scripted simulation. Scripts give you access to
capabilities that are not available interactively. For example, you can use a simulation script to activate
and deactivate portions of your model or change solution settings during the simulation. Simulation
scripts can do everything that the interactive controls can.
226 Adams/View
Scripted simulation

Scripted simulation
A Simulation that uses a set of commands stored in a Script instead of the standard simulation commands.
Simulation scripts are useful when you have come up with a good set of simulation parameters that you
want to repeat again and again. They are also needed for Design study, Design of experiments (DOE), and
Optimization simulations.
 S - Z 227
Select List Manager

Select List Manager

An Adams/View tool that lets you view a list of the objects that you’ve currently selected and add to and
remove objects from the list. To access the Select List Manager, from the Edit menu, select Select List.
228 Adams/View
Select list

Select list
A list of all the objects that you have selected. You can view the list in the Select List Manager.
 S - Z 229
Shaded rendering mode

Shaded rendering mode

A Rendering mode that displays a shaded solid object. It gives a more realistic appearance. It does not
show edges. The light source is from the left.
230 Adams/View
Shared Dialog Box

Shared Dialog Box

Several Adams products share this Adams/View dialog box. Because this is an Adams/View dialog box,
the current online help may have changed to Adams/View.
To return to your product's online help, select the browser's Back button or select All Products, and then
select your product.
 S - Z 231
Shell

Shell
The remains of a solid object once you’ve hollowed out one of its faces.
232 Adams/View
Shortcut menus

Shortcut menus
Menus that appear when you place the cursor over an object and hold down the right mouse button
(Example of shortcut menu). The commands in the menus differ depending on the object that the cursor
is currently over.
Learn more about Using Shortcut Menus.
 S - Z 233
Show, Hide, and Select Objects in the Database Navigator

Show, Hide, and Select Objects in the Database

Navigator
In the Database Navigator, a plus (+) in front of an object indicates that the object has children below it
but they are hidden. A minus (-) indicates that all objects immediately below the object are displayed.

To show or hide objects below a single object:

• Double-click an object with a plus or minus by it.

To expand or collapse all objects by one level:

• In the lower right corner of the navigator window, select the + or - button.

To hide all objects:

• In the lower right corner of the navigator window, select the - button.

You can use the Database Navigator to select any object in the database. You can also select more than
one object to complete a command. You can create a list of selected objects on which to perform options
by choosing Select List from the pull down menu at the top of the Database Navigator.

To select a single object:

• In the tree list, click the object and select OK. If the Database Navigator is not in multi-select
mode, you can also double-click the object to select it.

To use the mouse to select a continuous set of objects:

1. In the tree list, drag the mouse over the objects you want to select or click on one object, hold
down the Shift key, and then click the last object in the set. All objects between the two selected
objects are highlighted.
2. Select OK.

To use the Up and Down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects:
1. In the tree list, click on the first object, hold down the Shift key, and then use Up or Down arrows
to select a block of objects.
2. Select OK.

To select a noncontinuous set of objects:

1. In the tree list, click on object, hold down the Ctrl key, and then click on the individual objects
you want to select.
2. Select OK.

To clear any selection in the tree list:

• Hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected object to clear its highlighting.
234 Adams/View
Sim_controls

Sim_controls

Displays the Simulation Controls dialog box.

 S - Z 235
Simple Cam Follower mechanism

Simple Cam Follower mechanism

236 Adams/View
Simple pendulum sample dataset

Simple pendulum sample dataset

PART/01, GROUND
MARKER/0101 ! MARKER FOR PIVOT POINT

PART/02, MASS=1, CM=0202 ! SWINGING MASS

MARKER/0201, QP=0,0,0 ! MARKER FOR PIVOT POINT
MARKER/0202, QP=1,0,0 ! MARKER FOR MASS CENTER

JOINT/0102, REVOLUTE I=0101, J=0201

GRAPHICS/01, OUTLINE=0201,0202 ! ARM OF PENDULUM

GRAPHICS/02, CIRCLE, CM=0202, ! CIRCLE FOR MASS
, RADIUS=.1 SEG=20

ACCGRAV/ JGRAV = -386. ! ACCEL DUE TO GRAV

OUTPUT/ GRSAVE ! SAVE GRAPHICS FILE
END
 S - Z 237
Simulation

Simulation
A prediction of how your physical prototype will behave. When you run a simulation, Adams/Solver
verifies the Model and applies Forces and motion to it. It displays an animation of the simulation in the
Main window by default.

You can select the types of simulation that Adams/Solver runs on your model as well as set the level of
output. You can also supply a Script of commands to be performed.
238 Adams/View
Simulation Debugger

Simulation Debugger
The Simulation Debugger provides both graphical and tabular feedback on how hard Adams/Solver is
working to simulate your model. For example, during a simulation, the Simulation Debugger provides a
table of those objects with the greatest simulation error. The Simulation Debugger can also highlight
trouble areas during a simulation and provide measures of integrator progress, such as step size and
integrator order.
The graphical and tabular feedback helps you determine:
• Which modeling elements (forces, constraints, and so on) are causing numerical difficulties.
Often, the information directly points out modeling elements that you should change. You should
always carefully inspect any modeling elements to which the Simulation Debugger calls
attention.
• Determine what simulation events are causing numerical difficulties. For example, if your model
simulates fine until there is an impact between two parts, you should closely monitor simulation
performance before, during, and after the impact.
The Simulation Debugger has several options for how you want to view its debugging information.
During an interactive simulation, you can:
• Step through the simulation one output step, time step, or iteration at a time, depending on your
output preference. Adams/View pauses after each simulation output step so that you can closely
inspect the behavior of the simulation.
• View a table of objects that list the objects that have the most error or the greatest change,
acceleration, or force. You can also view Adams/Solver integrator progress.
• Highlight objects that have the most error or the greatest change, acceleration, or force.
• Display strip charts of Adams/Solver settings.

You can select to view any or all of these options during a single simulation. Note, however, that the
options significantly slow down your simulation.
 S - Z 239
Single-component force

Single-component force
A Force defined as one resultant magnitude along a direction.
240 Adams/View
Six-component general force

Six-component general force

A rotational and translational force between two parts in your model using six orthogonal components.
 S - Z 241
Smooth-shaded rendering mode

Smooth-shaded rendering mode

To smooth out the shading of torus, ellipsoid, revolutions, extrusion, and link geometry. It uses the
Gouraud rendering algorithm to perform the shading.
242 Adams/View
Snap

Snap
To lock geometry so it aligns with the Working grid.
 S - Z 243
Solid fill

Solid fill
To show both the faces and edges of objects. Uses flat shading.
244 Adams/View
Solid geometry

Solid geometry
Geometric objects that have mass. Adams/View comes with several types of predefined solid geometry,
including boxes, cylinders, and links. You can also create solid geometry from Construction geometry by
extruding it.
 S - Z 245
Space-fixed rotation

Space-fixed rotation
To apply rotations about axes that remain in their original orientation.
246 Adams/View
Spec lines

Spec lines
A line that represents a constant baseline value in a plot.
 S - Z 247
Sphere

Sphere
A solid ellipsoid whose three axes are of equal length.
248 Adams/View
Spherical coordinate system

Spherical coordinate system

A coordinate system in which you specify the location of an object as , , and :

• is the distance from the origin of the coordinate system to a location.

• is the angle between the z-axis of the coordinate system and the line connecting the origin of
the coordinate system and the location.

• is the angle in the xy plane of the coordinate system to a location, as in cylindrical

coordinates.
 S - Z 249
Spline Editor

Spline Editor
An Adams/View tool that provides a tabular or plot view of spline data for editing and plotting. You can
drag points on the spline plots and see the effect of different curve-fitting techniques on your spline. You
can also select linear extrapolation and view its effect.
250 Adams/View
Standard toolbar

Standard toolbar
Contains tools for performing basic file and edit operations. We have not filled the entire toolbar with
tools so you can add your own tools to customize your work environment.

Learn about Displaying Toolbox and Toolbars.

 S - Z 251
Start at Equilibrium

Start at Equilibrium
Performs a Static equilibrium before performing a Dynamic simulation.
252 Adams/View
State variables

State variables
State variables define scalar algebraic equations for independent use or as part of the plant input, plant
output, or Array elements.
 S - Z 253
Static equilibrium

Static equilibrium
Finds the state of the Model in which all internal and external forces are balanced in the absence of any
system motions or inertial Forces. It sets all system velocities and accelerations to zero, so inertial forces
are not taken into consideration. A static simulation is for use with models that have one or more Degrees
of freedom so Adams/Solver can move parts around as it seeks to balance all the forces acting on the
model.
You can request to perform a static equilibrium before a Dynamic simulation to remove unwanted system
transients at the start of the Simulation. (Unbalanced forces in the initial configuration can generate
undesirable effects at the beginning of a dynamic analysis).
254 Adams/View
Status bar

Status bar
A line at the bottom of the Main window that displays information about the element your cursor is
currently on, the action you should perform, or an error message. The following shows the status bar in
Adams/View.
 S - Z 255
Stereolithography (SLA)

Stereolithography (SLA)
Files containing triangularized polygon information representing the surface of geometry. You specify
the quality of surface representation when you produce the SLA files in your CAD program. You usually
specify the error tolerance, chord height, or quality factor. When you import the files, Adams transfers
the surfaces to shells.
256 Adams/View
Strain

Strain
Outputs strain information if strain modes are available in the modal neutral file (MNF) of the specified
flexible body. Adams/View outputs all six components of strain (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-
XY, shear-YZ, and shear-ZX). It outputs strains in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body.
In the Flex Body text box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs
the data in the FE model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
 S - Z 257
Stress

Stress
Outputs stress information if modal stresses are available in the MNF of the flexible body. Adams/View
outputs all six components of stress (normal-X, normal-Y, normal-Z, shear-XY, shear-YZ, and shear-
ZX). It outputs stresses in the basic FEA coordinate system of the flexible body. In the Flex Body text
box, enter the flexible body whose data Adams/View outputs. Adams/View outputs the data in the FE
model basic coordinate system that is inherent to the flexible body.
258 Adams/View
Stress/strain flags

Stress/strain flags
You specify the value of stress or strain to be evaluated in the HOT_SPOTS, MAX_STRESS, or
TOP_SPOTS function using the Value argument. The following settings are supported for the Value
argument:
0 - Von mises
1 - Normal x
2 - Normal y
3 - Normal z
4 - Shear xy
5 - Shear yz
6 - Shear zx
7 - Maximum principal
8 - Minimum principal
9 - Maximum shear
 S - Z 259
Strip chart

Strip chart
A monitoring device in which Adams/View plots a measure (See Measures). The strip chart monitors the
measure during a Simulation.
You can transfer a Curve in a strip chart to Adams/PostProcessor so you can further manipulate it, such
as zoom in on it or view its statistical data. In addition, you can view multiple curves from successive
simulations in a single strip chart to chart changes.
260 Adams/View
System elements

System elements
System elements let you create one or more general differential and/or algebraic equations that enable
you to model system components that are not as easily represented by standard Adams/View modeling
objects, such as parts (see Part (also called Bodies)), Constraints, and Forces.
 S - Z 261
Table

Table
Displays the Maximum Equation Error (Debug Table) dialog box, which contains a running count of the
iterations needed to solve the equations of motion.
262 Adams/View
Table Editor

Table Editor
An Adams/View tool that displays the objects in your Modeling database in table format so you can
compare the objects and quickly update them.
Learn more about Editing Objects Using the Table Editor.
 S - Z 263
Tabular output file

Tabular output file

The tabular output file can contain the following items. Has an .out extension.
• Map of equations and variables and their numeric codes.
• Table of part initial displacement and initial velocity values.
• Table of part principal inertias and the orientation of the part principal axes with respect to the
body coordinate system.
• A time history of the request output.
• Mode frequencies, energies, and shapes that Adams/Linear computes.
264 Adams/View
Template-Based products

Template-Based products
The template-based products expand MSC's virtual prototyping to provide you with standard building
blocks so you can rapidly prototype your real system, such as engine parts, car suspensions, and rail cars.
They offer fully parametric modeling techniques so if you move one entity, its dependents move
accordingly.
The template-based products include Adams/Car and Adams/Driveline.
 S - Z 265
Text box

Text box
A field in a Dialog box in which you enter text.
266 Adams/View
Three-component torque

Three-component torque
A rotational force between two parts in your model using three orthogonal components.
 S - Z 267
Tic marks

Tic marks
Short lines that mark the axis at regular intervals to define the scale of the axis on a plot. You can set how
the tic marks are placed along the axis and their color.
268 Adams/View
Toggle Tool Stack

Toggle Tool Stack

Main Toolbox -> Toggle Tool Stack

Toggles on and off the display of view accessories, such as the Coordinate window.

View triad Coordinate window

View title View Rotation

 S - Z 269
To select objects:

To select objects:
• To select a single object, click the part.
• To use the mouse to select a continuous set of objects, drag the mouse over the objects that you
want to select or click on one objects, hold down the Shift key, and click the last object in the set.
All the objects between the two selected parts are highlighted.
• To use the up and down arrow keys to select a continuous set of objects, click on the first part,
hold down the Shift key, and then use the up or down arrow to select a block of objects.
• To select a noncontinuous set of objects, click on an object, hold down the Ctrl key, and click on
the individual object that you want.
• To clear any object in the selected list, hold down the Ctrl key and then click the selected object
to clear its selection.
270 Adams/View
Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords

Showing, Hiding, or Selecting Keywords

To show or hide keywords in the Command Navigator:
• Double-click a keyword with a plus or minus beside it.

To select command keywords and enter parameters:

1. Double-click the desired keywords in the Command Navigator.

A dialog box appears.

2. Enter the desired values in the dialog box, and then select OK.
 S - Z 271
Tool stack

Tool stack
A collection of tools in a toolbox or Toolbar. For example, the Main toolbox has a View Layout tool stack
that contains all the ways in which you can display the views in the main window. The last selected or
default tool appears on top of the stack. A small triangle in the lower right corner of the top tool indicates
that there are additional tools.
272 Adams/View
Tool tips

Tool tips
Boxes that display information about the command or Toolbar button that the cursor is currently over.
Use the Tips On/Off command on the Help menu to turn the tips on and off.
 S - Z 273
Toolbar

Toolbar
An area of a window that contains icons that represent Adams/View commands for creating and viewing
your Model.
274 Adams/View
Torsion spring

Torsion spring
A rotational spring-damper applied between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)).
 S - Z 275
Transient simulation

Transient simulation
During a transient simulation, Adams/Solver performs either a:
• Kinematic simulation if your model has zero Degrees of freedom.
• Dynamic simulation if your model has one or more degrees of freedom.
276 Adams/View
Translational spring damper

Translational spring damper

A spring and damper combination acting in parallel between two parts (see Part (also called Bodies)) in
your Model.
 S - Z 277
Tree list

Tree list
The tree list is a hierarchical listing of objects in your model. It appears on the left side of the Database
Navigator.

• A plus (+) appears in front of an object to indicate that the object has children below it but they
are hidden.
• A minus (-) indicates that all objects immediately below the object are displayed.

The text (OFF) appears next any object that has been deactivated.
278 Adams/View
Treeview

Treeview
The treeview is a hierarchical listing of objects in your current session of Adams/PostProcessor. It
appears along the left side of the Adams/PostProcessor window. A folder appears in front of each page
in the tree to indicate that there are objects stored on the page.
 S - Z 279
User-written subroutine

User-written subroutine
Subroutines that you link into Adams/Solver through dynamic link libraries that allow you to customize
Adams/Solver to:
• Define your own modeling elements.
• Make Adams work in your preferred environment, such as a control system design package.

For more information, See the Subroutines section of the Adams/Solver online help.
280 Adams/View
View

View
The position of the model in a View window. There are six standard views of a Model. They include the
front, back, top, bottom, left, and right views.
 S - Z 281
View Orientation Tool Stacks

View Orientation Tool Stacks

282 Adams/View
View title

View title
Title of View window, which, by default, displays the name of the model currently displayed in the
window.

To toggle its display:

• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Title tool .
• Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack
to double-click it.
 S - Z 283
View triad

View triad
A triad that displays the orientation of the global coordinate system axes. It appears in the lower left
corner of each view window. As you move the view of a window, the triad displays the changes to the
coordinate system orientation.

To toggle its display:

• On the Main toolbox, from the Toggle Tool Stack, click the View Triad tool .
• Double-click to apply the change to all view windows. The tool must be on top of the tool stack
to double-click it.
284 Adams/View
View window

View window
A portion of the Main window that displays different aspects of your Model.
Picture of main window divided into two view windows:
 S - Z 285
Wavefront files

Wavefront files
Set of files that contain a description of the model graphics. Their format is suitable for the Wavefront®
visualization system so you can create network broadcast quality animations of your Simulations.
286 Adams/View
Window Layout Tool Stack

Window Layout Tool Stack

 S - Z 287
Window title bar

Window title bar

Displays the title of the Adams/View main window.
288 Adams/View
Wireframe render mode

Wireframe render mode

Displays only the edges of objects in your Model so that you can see through the objects. Allows for the
fastest viewing and helps you select points and edges.
 S - Z 289
Working grid

Working grid
A grid of points that defines the plane on which you are creating objects. Initially, it is aligned with the
global coordinate system but you can move it as desired. When you turn on the grid, objects
automatically Snap to the grid points whenever you create, move, or reshape them. You can select a
Rectangular working grid or Polar working grid.

Picture of working grid.

To turn on and off the display of the working grid:

• On the Main toolbox, select Grid.

Shortcut: Type a lowercase g while the cursor is in the view window.

290 Adams/View
Zoom

Zoom
To change the magnification of your Model on the screen.